CivilGEOCivilGEO
GeoSTORMGeoHECRASGeoHECHMSCustomer StoriesKnowledge BaseProduct TutorialsEngineering Resources
Customer ReviewsCustomer StoriesCustomer VideosCase StudiesWall of LoveProductsKnowledge BaseProduct Tutorials
Training ClassesTraining WebinarsProduct TutorialsProductsKnowledge BaseAbout Us
Get SupportKnowledge BaseFeature RequestsEngineering ResourcesProductsCustomer StoriesAbout Us
About UsPrivacy CenterNewsBlogProductsCustomer StoriesKnowledge Base
Contact
Free Trial
CivilGEO Knowledge Base

GeoHECRAS

River hydraulics, floodplain modeling, and bridge/culvert analysis powered by HEC-RAS, integrated with ArcGIS.

328 articles · Generated August 16, 2026

Contents

  1. Getting Started & Project Workflow › GeoHECRAS Overview & Comparisons
  2. How does GeoHECRAS compare to Competitors?
  3. How is GeoHECRAS different than HEC‑GeoRAS?
  4. How is GeoHECRAS different than Civil 3D River and Flood Analysis?
  5. How is GeoHECRAS different than HEC‑RAS?
  6. Getting Started & Project Workflow › Common Workflows
  7. Common HEC‑RAS Workflows
  8. Getting Started & Project Workflow › Project Setup & Georeferencing
  9. Georeferencing a HEC‑RAS Model to a River Alignment
  10. Georeferencing a HEC‑RAS Model to a Map Location
  11. Getting Started & Project Workflow › Importing / Exporting Models
  12. Exporting Your Project to HEC-RAS
  13. Import HEC-RAS Shapefile Geometry Command
  14. Importing a HEC-2 Model in HEC-RAS
  15. HEC‑RAS Import Base Engine Troubleshooting
  16. External Editing of HEC‑RAS Models
  17. Importing a HEC-RAS Model
  18. Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans
  19. Global Copy Command (GeoHECRAS)
  20. Multiple Plan Analysis (HEC-RAS)
  21. Scenario Summary (HEC-RAS)
  22. Delete Scenarios (HEC-RAS)
  23. Duplicate Current Scenario (HEC-RAS)
  24. Understanding HEC-RAS Scenarios
  25. Running HEC‑RAS Batch Analyses
  26. Getting Started & Project Workflow › Display & Element Properties
  27. HEC‑RAS Element Display Properties
  28. River System Geometry › River Reaches
  29. Georeferencing River Reaches
  30. Automated Draw River Reaches Command
  31. Editing of River and Reach Names
  32. Import River Reach Geometry Command
  33. Reverse River Reach Command
  34. Assign River Reaches Command
  35. Draw River Reaches Command
  36. River System Geometry › River Junctions
  37. Draw and Assign River Junctions Command
  38. River Junction Data Command
  39. River System Geometry › Flow Lengths
  40. Edit Flow Lengths Command
  41. Assign Flow Lengths Command
  42. River System Geometry › River Stations
  43. Edit River Stations, Node Names & Descriptions Command
  44. River System Geometry › Channel Modification & Stream Restoration
  45. River Channel Modification Command
  46. Stream Restoration & Channel Stabilization Modeling using HEC-RAS
  47. Cross Sections › Creation & Drawing
  48. Draw Cross Sections Command Shortcut (Ctrl+D Keypress)
  49. Assigning Survey Data to Cross Sections
  50. Automated Draw Cross Sections Command (HEC-RAS)
  51. Draw Cross Sections Command
  52. Assign Multiple Cross Sections Command
  53. Assign Cross Sections Command
  54. Creating Cross Sections from Terrain Elevation Data
  55. Cross Sections › Editing & Interpolation
  56. Reverse Cross Section Geometry Command
  57. Geometry Comparison
  58. Geometry Point Reduction
  59. Interpolate Cross Sections Command
  60. Export Cross Sections to CAD Command
  61. Interpolate Geometry Command
  62. Extract Cross Section Geometry Command
  63. Import Cross Section Geometry Command
  64. Cross Sections › Properties & Geometry Requirements
  65. HEC-RAS Cross Sections
  66. Georeferencing HEC-RAS Cross Sections
  67. Hydraulic Parameters – Cross Sections Command
  68. Cross Section Lids
  69. HEC‑RAS Cross Section Geometry Requirements
  70. Cross Sections › Banks & Bank Stations
  71. Bank Station Placement
  72. Assign Channel Banks Command
  73. Cross Sections › Manning's Roughness & Land Cover
  74. Assign Manning's Data (HEC-RAS)
  75. Create and Assign Land Cover Data as Manning’s Roughness
  76. Flow Roughness Change Factors Command
  77. Cross Sections › Contraction & Expansion
  78. HEC‑RAS Contraction & Expansion Losses
  79. Editing of Contraction and Expansion Coefficients
  80. Cross Sections › Ineffective Flow & Conveyance Obstructions
  81. HEC-RAS Minor Loss Coefficients
  82. HEC-RAS Ineffective Flow Areas
  83. HEC‑RAS Conveyance Obstructions
  84. Bridges › Bridge Overview & Setup
  85. HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling
  86. HEC-RAS Bridge Rail Modeling Guidelines
  87. Bridge Design Location Considerations
  88. Bridges › Bridge Geometry & Parameters
  89. Defining Bridge Modeling Approach for HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling
  90. Defining Internal Geometry for HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling
  91. Defining Build Bridge Opening for HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling
  92. Defining WSPRO Parameters for HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling
  93. Defining Bridge Parameters for HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling
  94. Defining Deck Roadway Geometry for HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling
  95. Bridges › Bridge Hydraulic Computations
  96. HEC‑RAS Bridge Low Flow Computations
  97. HEC‑RAS Bridge High Flow Computations
  98. Bridges › Multiple Openings & Divided Flow
  99. Defining Multiple Openings for HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling
  100. Modeling HEC‑RAS Multiple Bridge Openings as Divided Flow
  101. Bridges › Skewed Bridges
  102. Modeling Skewed Bridges
  103. Bridges › Bridge Scour & Floating Debris
  104. Bridge Scour Modeling
  105. HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling of Floating Debris
  106. Bridges › Bridge Output & Parameters
  107. Defining Profile Results for HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling
  108. Hydraulic Parameters - Bridges & Culverts Command
  109. Export Table from Bridge Opening Comparison
  110. Culverts › Culvert Definition & Types
  111. Culvert Chart and Scale Number
  112. HEC‑RAS Culvert Types/Shapes & Dimensions
  113. Culvert Modeling
  114. Defining Culverts for HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling
  115. Defining HEC‑RAS Culverts for Fish Passage
  116. Culverts › Culvert Design Considerations
  117. Culvert Design Considerations
  118. HEC‑RAS Horizontal and Adverse Culvert Slopes
  119. HEC‑RAS Culvert Cross Section Locations
  120. Culverts › Culvert Hydraulics & Computations
  121. Setting Maximum Headwater Parameter
  122. HEC-RAS Culvert and Roadway Overflow Computations
  123. HEC‑RAS Culvert Supercritical & Mixed Flow Computations
  124. HEC‑RAS Culvert Expansion & Contraction Coefficients
  125. HEC-RAS Culvert Normal Depth Computations
  126. HEC‑RAS Culvert Hydraulics Concepts
  127. HEC‑RAS Culvert FHWA Full Flow Computations
  128. HEC‑RAS Culvert Direct Step Computations
  129. Roadway Crossings › Roadway Geometry
  130. Graphically Editing Roadway Geometry
  131. Import Roadway Geometry Command
  132. Extract Roadway Geometry Command
  133. Draw and Assign Roadway Crossings Command
  134. Roadway Crossings › Roadway Management & Georeferencing
  135. Delete Roadway Crossings Command
  136. Georeferencing Roadway Crossings
  137. Hydraulic Structures › Inline Structures (Weirs/Spillways)
  138. Georeferencing Inline Structures
  139. Extract Weir Crest Geometry Command
  140. Stepped Spillway Discharge Coefficient
  141. Inline Structure Data Command
  142. Draw and Assign Inline Structures Command
  143. Inline Structure Gated Spillway Hydraulic Computations
  144. Hydraulic Structures › Lateral Structures
  145. Connecting River to Off-Channel Storage Area Using Lateral Structure
  146. Troubleshooting of Lateral Structures Modeling
  147. Lateral Structure Data Command
  148. Draw and Assign Lateral Structures Command
  149. Hydraulic Structures › Storage Areas
  150. Storage Area Data Command (HEC-RAS)
  151. Automated Draw Storage Areas Command
  152. Georeferencing Storage Areas
  153. Extracting Storage Area Volume Curve
  154. Defining HEC-RAS Storage Areas
  155. Hydraulic Structures › SA/2D Connections
  156. Reverse SA/2D Connection Geometry Command
  157. SA/2D Connection Data Command
  158. Hydraulic Parameters - Storage Area Connections Command
  159. Draw and Assign SA/2D Connections Command
  160. 2D Flow Area Connection Issues
  161. Hydraulic Structures › Levees
  162. Levee Breach Modeling
  163. Defining Levees in HEC-RAS
  164. Hydraulic Structures › Pump Stations
  165. Pump Station Modeling
  166. Pump Station Data Command
  167. Hydraulic Structures › Gates
  168. Elevation Controlled Gates
  169. Hydraulic Structures › Flow Training Structures & Pilot Channels
  170. Pilot Channels Command
  171. 2D Flow Training Structures Command
  172. 2D Modeling › 2D Domain & Flow Area
  173. Defining 2D Model Domain
  174. 2D Flow Area Data Command
  175. 2D HEC-RAS Modeling Recommendations
  176. Draw and Assign 2D Flow Areas Command
  177. HEC-RAS 2D Flow Area Modeling
  178. 2D Modeling › Mesh Generation & Zones
  179. Draw and Assign 2D Flow Area Breaklines
  180. Delete 2D Mesh Zones
  181. Draw and Assign 2D Mesh Zones Command
  182. HEC-RAS 2D Mesh Generation Errors & Corrections
  183. 2D Modeling › 2D Roughness & Land Cover
  184. Edit 2D Roughness Regions Command
  185. Draw and Assign 2D Roughness Regions Command
  186. Edit 2D Land Cover Data Command
  187. 2D Modeling › 2D Obstructions & Ineffective Areas
  188. 2D Ineffective Flow Areas
  189. 2D Conveyance Obstructions
  190. 2D Modeling › 2D Boundary & Initial Conditions
  191. Draw and Assign SA/2D Initial Condition Points Command
  192. Initial Flow and Stage Conditions
  193. Initial Conditions Flow Optimizations
  194. Draw and Assign SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines Command
  195. 2D Modeling › 1D-2D Coupling
  196. Connecting 2D Flow Areas to 1D Hydraulic Elements
  197. 2D Modeling › 2D Analysis Tools
  198. 2D Floodplain Encroachments Command
  199. 2D Profile Lines
  200. 2D Modeling › 2D Bridge Modeling
  201. HEC-RAS 2D Bridge Modeling
  202. 2D Modeling › 2D Computational Theory
  203. HEC-RAS 2D Grid & Subgrid Computations
  204. HEC-RAS 2D Computational Equations Comparison
  205. 2D Modeling › 2D Troubleshooting
  206. Troubleshooting 2D Fragmented Inundation
  207. HEC-RAS 2D Analysis Error – Weir Stationing Not Increasing
  208. Flow Data & Boundary Conditions › Steady Flow Data
  209. Steady Flow Data Command
  210. Steady Flow Calibration Command
  211. Import Steady Flow Data Command
  212. Flow Data & Boundary Conditions › Unsteady Flow Data
  213. Unsteady Flow Data Command
  214. Flow Data & Boundary Conditions › Boundary Conditions
  215. Boundary Conditions
  216. Flow Data & Boundary Conditions › Flow Optimizations
  217. Flow Optimizations Command
  218. Flow Data & Boundary Conditions › Lateral Flow Modeling
  219. Modeling Lateral Flows
  220. Rainfall, Infiltration & Hydrology › Rainfall Data
  221. Rain Gage Data Command (GeoHECRAS)
  222. Lookup Rainfall Command (GeoHECRAS)
  223. Rainfall Distribution
  224. Rainfall, Infiltration & Hydrology › Soils & Infiltration
  225. Infiltration Grid Properties
  226. Compute Infiltration Command
  227. Create Soils Layer Command
  228. Rainfall, Infiltration & Hydrology › Specialty Flow
  229. Non-Newtonian Flow Options
  230. Rainfall, Infiltration & Hydrology › External Hydrology Integration
  231. Meteorology Map Command
  232. Evapotranspiration Gage Data Command
  233. Computational Options & Engine Analysis › Steady Flow Computations
  234. Compute Steady - Current Scenario Command
  235. Steady Flow Computational Options Command
  236. Computational Options & Engine Analysis › Unsteady Flow Computations
  237. Compute Unsteady - Current Scenario Command
  238. Restart Options
  239. Advanced Time Step Control
  240. Unsteady Flow Computational Options
  241. Computational Options & Engine Analysis › 2D Flow Options
  242. 2D Flow Options
  243. Computational Options & Engine Analysis › Computational Theory
  244. Computational Differences Between HEC‑RAS and HEC‑2
  245. Flow Distribution Calculations with HEC-RAS
  246. Modified Puls Routing
  247. Computational Options & Engine Analysis › Dam Break Analysis
  248. Dam Break Analysis
  249. Viewing Breach Time Series Plots
  250. Entering Dam Break Data
  251. Computational Options & Engine Analysis › Performance & Parallelization
  252. Parallelization and CPU Affinity in GeoHECRAS
  253. Selecting HEC-RAS Analysis Engine Version
  254. Floodplain Mapping & Encroachments › Steady Flow Encroachments
  255. Assign Floodway Stations Command
  256. Floodplain Encroachments Command
  257. Floodplain Mapping & Encroachments › Unsteady Flow Encroachments
  258. Unsteady Flow Floodplain Encroachments Command
  259. Floodplain Mapping & Encroachments › Flood Map Generation
  260. Flood Map Command
  261. Flood Map Contours
  262. HEC-RAS Flood Result Raster Grids
  263. Floodplain Mapping & Encroachments › Floodway Map Settings
  264. Floodway Map Settings Command
  265. Floodplain Mapping & Encroachments › Velocity Mapping
  266. Horizontal Velocity Mapping Command
  267. Sediment & Specialty Analysis › Sediment Transport
  268. Fixed Sediment Elevations Command
  269. Sediment & Specialty Analysis › Shear Stress Diagnostics
  270. Troubleshooting Shear Stress Results
  271. Output, Reporting & Visualization › Cross Section Plots
  272. HEC‑RAS Cross Section Plot Options
  273. Output, Reporting & Visualization › Profile Plots
  274. HEC‑RAS Profile Plot Options
  275. HEC‑RAS Output Water Surface Profile Plots
  276. Output, Reporting & Visualization › Hydrographs & Time Series
  277. Time Series Nodes
  278. Viewing Stage and Flow Hydrographs
  279. Output, Reporting & Visualization › Tabular & Detailed Output
  280. Detailed Output
  281. Troubleshooting & Best Practices › General Modeling Problems
  282. Fixing HEC-RAS Modeling Problems
  283. Troubleshooting & Best Practices › Engine/Import Errors
  284. HEC-RAS Engine Loading Error
  285. HEC-RAS File Name and Directory Path Issues
  286. HEC‑RAS Analysis Base Engine Troubleshooting
  287. Troubleshooting & Best Practices › Unsteady Flow Issues
  288. Unsteady Flow HEC‑RAS Model Troubleshooting
  289. Troubleshooting & Best Practices › Best Practices
  290. HEC‑RAS Modeling Best Practices
  291. Platform & GIS Tools › Coordinate Reference Systems
  292. Spatial Reference
  293. Google Mercator Coordinate Reference System
  294. Custom Coordinate Reference Systems
  295. Local Coordinate Reference Systems
  296. Supported Coordinate Reference Systems
  297. Platform & GIS Tools › Layer Management
  298. Raster Image Layer Properties
  299. Adding an Elevation Layer
  300. Point Layer Properties
  301. Add Layers Command
  302. TIN Surface Properties
  303. Creating a New Layer
  304. Drawing Layer Properties
  305. Elevation Grid Properties
  306. External Map Layers Command
  307. Layer Transformation
  308. Reload Layer command
  309. Layer Display Order
  310. Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools
  311. Copy & Paste Element Properties
  312. Create Holes Command
  313. Editing Element IDs & Descriptions
  314. Trim Polylines Command
  315. Merge Polylines Command
  316. Extend Polylines Command
  317. Deleting Project Elements
  318. Rotating and Resizing Polyline and Polygon Elements
  319. Polyline and Polygon Vertices Editing
  320. Reshape Polyline Command
  321. Explode Multipart Command
  322. Build Polygons Command
  323. Intersect Polygons Command
  324. Detach Polygons Command
  325. Detach Polylines Command
  326. Split Polylines Command
  327. Fill Holes Command
  328. Selection Sets
  329. Merge Polygons Command
  330. Buffer Polylines Command
  331. Buffer Polygons Command
  332. Distribute Vertices Command
  333. Offset Polyline Command
  334. Split Polygons Command
  335. Smooth Elements Command
  336. Simplify Elements Command
  337. Intersect Polylines Command
  338. Stamp Multiple Command
  339. Format Painter Command
  340. Stamp Geometry Command
  341. Digitizing Elements
  342. Copying and Pasting Model Elements
  343. Platform & GIS Tools › GIS Data Import/Export
  344. Exporting Your Project to AutoCAD or MicroStation
  345. Automated GIS Mapping Functions
  346. Exporting Your Project to Google Earth
  347. GIS Shapefile Common Restrictions
  348. GIS Element Properties
  349. Export To Shapefile Command
  350. Conflate Point Data Command
  351. Supported External Data Formats
  352. Attribute Table Command
  353. Exporting Your Project to Shapefiles
  354. Viewing and Editing GIS Attribute Data using Data Explorer
  355. Platform & GIS Tools › Terrain & Elevation Data
  356. Elevation Profile Command
  357. Terrain Elevation Geometry Sources
  358. Download DEM Data Command
  359. Add Survey Points Command
  360. Grid Calculator Command
  361. Adjust Elevations Command
  362. Generate Contours Command
  363. Merge DEMs Command
  364. Working with LIDAR
  365. ESRI TIN to Elevation Contour Shapefile
  366. Convert Elevations Command
  367. Importing MicroStation Terrain Surfaces
  368. How to Convert ESRI TIN to Elevation Raster?
  369. Importing an ESRI TIN elevation dataset
  370. Generate Terrain Command
  371. Surface Terrain 3D Vertical Exaggeration
  372. AutoCAD Drawing as Terrain Elevation Data
  373. Platform & GIS Tools › External Data Sources
  374. Soil Survey Data Download Command
  375. Hydroshed Data Download Command
  376. Hydrography Data Download Command
  377. Hydroshed Data Command
  378. Stream Gages Command
  379. Hydrography Data Command
  380. Wetlands Data Command
  381. Watershed Flow Paths Command
  382. Delineate Watershed Command
  383. Compute Flow Paths Command
  384. Contributing Streams Command
  385. Automated Flow Paths Command
  386. Draw and Assign Subbasins Command
  387. USGS StreamStats Command
  388. FEMA NFHL Download Command
  389. FEMA Flood Data Command
  390. Platform & GIS Tools › Annotation & Symbology
  391. CAD Properties
  392. Annotation Mapping
  393. Attribute Mapping
  394. Photo Catalog
  395. Platform & GIS Tools › Project Management
  396. Options Backstage Page - General Preferences
  397. Options Backstage Page
  398. Project Archiving
  399. Running CivilGEO Software on Virtual Machines
  400. Clear Cache Command
  401. Record Video Command
  402. Publish PDF Command
  403. Publish Graphics Command
  404. Platform & GIS Tools › AI Assistant
  405. Ask Simon - CivilGEO's AI Assistant
  406. Platform & GIS Tools › Keyboard Shortcuts
  407. Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts Listing
  408. Customizing Keyboard Shortcuts
  409. Platform & GIS Tools › Land Use Tools
  410. Land Use Data
  411. Land Cover Command
  412. Urban Impervious Command
  413. Automated Land Use Command
  414. Land Use Properties
  415. Draw Land Use Command
  416. Classify Land Use Command
  417. Merge Land Use Command
Getting Started & Project Workflow › GeoHECRAS Overview & Comparisons

How does GeoHECRAS compare to Competitors?

How does GeoHECRAS stack up against the competition’s software? Now and then, clients considering the purchase of GeoHECRAS ask us this important question.

GeoHECRAS provides an interactive 2D/3D graphical user interface data wrapper to the industry-standard US Army Corps of Engineers HEC-RAS software. It tightly integrates with AutoCAD, MicroStation and ArcGIS, providing much more functionality, power, and time savings. Onboard training, technical support and engineering project assistance are also included free with the software.

As an informed engineer, you want to make the best choice for your needs. Check out what our clients have said about our software. We are confident that after you review how GeoHECRAS rates against the competition, you will choose GeoHECRAS.

Here are some items to consider when comparing GeoHECRAS to the competition’s software.

unknown node

In summary, GeoHECRAS utilizes the industry-standard US Army Corps of Engineers HEC-RAS software in an interactive 2D/3D graphical user interface data wrapper that tightly integrates with AutoCAD, MicroStation and ArcGIS.

Our mission is to continuously develop the product, adding additional functionality, features and capabilities. GeoHECRAS includes customized onboard training, toll-free technical support and engineering project assistance at no additional cost. In addition, special incentives are available to new customers to easily transition to GeoHECRAS.

GeoHECRAS Comparison

The best way for you to do an effective comparison between GeoHECRAS and the competition is to experience GeoHECRAS for yourself. We can show you the fantastic functionality that GeoHECRAS provides, but ultimately you need to make that decision—both from a cost perspective, get-up-to-speed perspective, and a technical/engineering support perspective.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › GeoHECRAS Overview & Comparisons

How is GeoHECRAS different than HEC‑GeoRAS?

Why would anyone want to purchase GeoHECRAS when HEC‑GeoRAS is free? This is a question we occasionally get asked by clients who have heard of HEC‑GeoRAS. Let's examine this in detail.

HEC‑GeoRAS Workflow

HEC‑GeoRAS enables a user to create a partial HEC‑RAS project using ESRI ArcGIS, ESRI 3D Analyst, and ESRI Spatial Analyst software and required extensions. HEC‑GeoRAS can only work with ESRI TIN (triangulated irregular network) terrain surfaces, and generally there is a fair amount of work necessary to construct a TIN terrain surface by manually swapping TIN edges, refining the TIN, etc. Usage of AutoCAD Civil 3D or Bentley MicroStation drawing files, or ESRI ArcInfo grid terrain surfaces is difficult. HEC‑GeoRAS will construct only the following elements in a HEC‑RAS model by manually drawing or assigning polylines and polygons within the ArcGIS user interface:

  • River centerline
  • Channel bank lines
  • Flow path lines
  • Cross section cut lines
  • Manning's roughness polygons
  • Levee lines
  • Ineffective flow area polygons
  • Storage area polygons

Once the ArcGIS coverages have been created, they need to be exported and then converted into a format that the Army Corps of Engineers HEC‑RAS software can import. However, if the user discovers an error or requires changes in the defined GIS data, the user needs to start back in ArcGIS, make the necessary changes—basically repeating the process over again. Any changes made within the Army Corps of Engineers HEC‑RAS software cannot be reflected back into the ArcGIS model without major data conversion efforts. After importing the GIS coverages into the Army Corps of Engineers HEC‑RAS software, other elements of the HEC‑RAS model will need to be constructed separately:

  • Roadway crossings
  • Bridge openings
  • Culverts
  • Inline structures
  • Dam failures
  • Lateral structures
  • Levee failures
  • Storage area connections
  • Steady or unsteady flow boundary conditions
  • Floodplain encroachments
  • Conveyance obstructions
  • Cross section lids

After the HEC‑RAS model has been constructed and run within the Army Corps of Engineers HEC‑RAS software, the user needs to export the computed water surface elevations back to ArcGIS in order to generate a flood map. If there were any changes in existing cross section alignments, or additional cross sections inserted, this can cause issues when round-tripping the computed results back to ArcGIS. Once the HEC‑RAS computed results have been imported into ArcGIS, the user can then generate a flood map. If the user discovers at that time any issues with the completed HEC‑RAS model, the entire process starts again. It is not possible to merge any ArcGIS model changes with an existing HEC‑RAS model.

HEC‑GeoRAS Cost

Another consideration that needs to analyzed is the cost outlay required to get started with HEC‑GeoRAS. Keep in mind that utilizing HEC‑GeoRAS in an efficient manner requires some GIS expertise (or the necessary training or playing around time) to get up to speed.

unknown node

In comparision, GeoHECRAS is a fraction of the cost of HEC‑GeoRAS, and includes customized onboard training and toll-free technical support at no additional cost. In addition, special incentives are available to new customers to provide a migration path to GeoHECRAS.

GeoHECRAS Comparison

The best way for you to do an effective comparison between HEC‑GeoRAS and GeoHECRAS is to experience GeoHECRAS for yourself. We can point out all of the fantastic functionality that GeoHECRAS provides over other software, but ultimately you need to make that decision—both from a cost perspective, get-up-to-speed perspective, and a technical support perspective.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › GeoHECRAS Overview & Comparisons

How is GeoHECRAS different than Civil 3D River and Flood Analysis?

How does GeoHECRAS stack up against Autodesk’s AutoCAD Civil 3D River and Flood Analysis? We occasionally get asked by clients that are heavily invested in AutoCAD Civil 3D what sets GeoHECRAS apart from what already ships with Civil 3D.

For the most part, Civil 3D’s application is a basic program for cutting cross sections and assigning some HEC‑RAS elements. However, if you use HEC‑RAS on a regular basis and want to really leverage Civil 3D capabilities with HEC‑RAS, GeoHECRAS integrates tightly with Civil 3D and provides much more functionality, power, and time savings.

Here are some of the items that you might consider when comparing GeoHECRAS and Civil 3D’s River and Flood Analysis.

unknown node

Another major consideration is that GeoHECRAS acts as a data wrapper to the US Army Corps of Engineers HEC‑RAS software. GeoHECRAS does not modify HEC‑RAS in any way, but facilitates entering data into HEC‑RAS by running the software in a “client-server” mode and directly interfacing with HEC‑RAS. So, as you enter the data into GeoHECRAS, the same data is stored in HEC‑RAS.

In summary, GeoHECRAS tightly integrates with Civil 3D and further extends Civil 3D capabilities. We continue to develop the product, adding additional functionality and capabilities. GeoHECRAS includes customized onboard training and toll-free technical support at no cost. In addition, special incentives are available to new customers to provide a migration path to GeoHECRAS.

GeoHECRAS Comparison

The best way for you to do an effective comparison between GeoHECRAS and AutoCAD Civil 3D River and Flood Analysis is to experience GeoHECRAS for yourself. We can point out all of the fantastic functionality that GeoHECRAS provides over other software, but ultimately you need to make that decision—both from a cost perspective, get-up-to-speed perspective, and a technical support perspective.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › GeoHECRAS Overview & Comparisons

How is GeoHECRAS different than HEC‑RAS?

GeoHECRAS is an easy-to-use 2D/3D graphical user interface data wrapper to the US Army Corps of Engineers HEC‑RAS. It builds upon the HEC‑RAS software and provides a single platform to rapidly construct and visualize a HEC‑RAS 1D and/or 2D model, saving engineer's time by finishing their work.

GeoHECRAS-Data-Wrapper-474x474-320x320

GeoHECRAS is 100% compatible with the Army Corps of Engineers HEC‑RAS. It provides advanced modeling and visualization, such as ability to work and visualize results on a live 2D or 3D map of your choice (Google Maps, Bing Maps, and many more) by using CAD technology licensed from Autodesk while also providing GIS features and functionality.

The Army Corps of Engineers HEC‑RAS provides you with essential river modeling capabilities, but lacks an easy-to-use graphical interface, CAD and GIS capabilities, 2D/3D capabilities, support for live maps, undo/redo, multiple document interface (MDI), and many other capabilities that are quite common today in other computer software. Earlier, engineers needed at least three separate applications—HEC‑RAS, HEC‑GeoRAS, and ArcGIS—to get even close to what GeoHECRAS provides with ease.

Following is the list of additional functionalities GeoHECRAS provides to the Army Corps of Engineers HEC‑RAS software:

  • Load existing Army Corps HEC‑RAS projects and quickly georeference them to real-world maps
  • View and edit HEC‑RAS model in both 2D and 3D, including flying along the river
  • Cut HEC‑RAS cross sections by either polyline assignment, interactive drawing, or automatic generation
  • Extract HEC‑RAS cross sections directly from digital terrain models
  • Interactively draw river alignments, cross sections, roadway crossings, inline structures, lateral structures, storage areas, and storage area connections directly on the map and automatically extract elevation data from the underlying terrain model
  • Create either rectangular and/or adaptive 2D meshes
  • Insert 2D conveyance obstructions to account for flow blockages due to buildings and other structures
  • Construct 2D ineffective flow areas to account for stagnant flow areas at roadway crossings and other dead-flow areas
  • Automatically identifies and fixes 2D mesh bad elements
  • Incorporate bridge piers, abutments, and embankments into a 2D mesh
  • Generate digital terrain surfaces from a variety of elevation data, including online elevation sources
  • Generate flood maps from HEC‑RAS steady flow and unsteady flow results
  • Generate flood hazard maps showing contours of flow depth, velocity, and flow depth x velocity
  • Edit and compute floodplain encroachments interactively, speeding up FEMA flood study analysis and submittal
  • Display FEMA online flood maps directly on top of existing HEC‑RAS models
  • Export HEC‑RAS projects directly to Google Earth, AutoCAD Civil 3D, ESRI ArcMap, and display of steady flow and unsteady flow flood maps as well as animation of unsteady flow flood maps
  • Support for AutoCAD Civil 3D and ESRI GIS data, allowing importing and exporting of data
  • Construct and edit model interactively using HEC‑RAS specific editing and model creation tools
  • Unlimited undo and redo allows quick changes and correction of mistakes
  • Automatic assignment of bank stations, flow lengths, ineffective flow areas, and more
  • Edit and compare multiple plans using built-in Scenario Manager
  • Underlay online maps, including Google Maps, Microsoft Bing Maps, and more
  • Work with multiple HEC‑RAS projects simultaneously using the Multiple Document Interface (MDI), including copying and pasting of cross sections and other data between HEC‑RAS projects
  • Handle larger HEC‑RAS projects with 64-bit, multi-core, parallel processing support
  • Free 24x7 technical and modeling support from experienced water resources engineers
Getting Started & Project Workflow › Common Workflows

Common HEC‑RAS Workflows

GeoHECRAS can perform the following HEC‑RAS workflows:

  • Floodplain Analysis and Mapping
  • Floodplain Encroachment Studies
  • Roadway Crossing (Bridge & Culvert) Design and Analysis
  • Bridge Replacements
  • Stream Realignment
  • Dam Failure Analysis
  • Scenario Comparisons
  • River Management Studies

GeoHECRAS can generate the following HEC‑RAS output:

  • Floodplain Maps
  • Flood Hazard Maps
  • Flood Animations (unsteady flow only)
  • Cross Section Plots
  • Profile Plots
  • General Profile Plots
  • Rating Curve Plots
  • Stage and Flow Hydrograph Plots
  • Detailed Output Tables
  • Summary Output Tables
Getting Started & Project Workflow › Project Setup & Georeferencing

Georeferencing a HEC‑RAS Model to a River Alignment

This video tutorial shows you how to georeference a non-georeferenced HEC‑RAS model to a river alignment in real-world coordinates using GeoHECRAS.

unknown node

Our software also provides the option to georeference a HEC-RAS model to a map location. To learn more about this feature, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › Project Setup & Georeferencing

Georeferencing a HEC‑RAS Model to a Map Location

When importing a HEC‑RAS model, the imported model will be assigned to a local coordinate reference system. If the project has been assigned a coordinate reference system, then the HEC‑RAS model can be georeferenced with the other data within the project. In that way, the HEC‑RAS model will be set in its correct location on the Map View.

unknown node

Manually Georeferencing a HEC‑RAS Model

If the imported HEC‑RAS model has not been defined using projected coordinates, these steps can be followed to georeference the HEC‑RAS model to a map:

  1. If the Map View still shows the imported HEC‑RAS model, refer to this article to restore the Map View CRS.
  2. Zoom to the location on the Map View where the HEC‑RAS model is to be placed.
  3. From the Map Data Layers panel, click on the HEC‑RAS layer and drag it on top of the Map View. As the HEC‑RAS model is dragged over the map, an outline of the HEC‑RAS model limits will be shown to the user.
  4. Releasing the mouse button will cause the HEC‑RAS model to be placed at the selected location.

The HEC‑RAS model location on the Map View may need to be further adjusted to correctly align it with other map features. Follow these steps to refine the georeferencing:

  1. Click on one of the elements of the HEC‑RAS model. The element will be highlighted to show that it is selected.
  2. Press [Ctrl+A] on the keyboard. This will cause all of the HEC‑RAS elements to become selected.
  3. Press function key [F2] on the keyboard. A bounding box will be shown around the selected HEC‑RAS model. This bounding box allows the user to move, scale, stretch and rotate the selected HEC‑RAS model.
  4. Click and drag on the interior of the bounding box to move the HEC‑RAS model around on the Map View.
  5. Hover the cursor over the displayed rotation handle (i.e., circle) displayed above the bounding box. A rotation anchor point will be displayed at the center of the bounding box. The rotation anchor point can be repositioned anywhere on the interior of the bounding box. Clicking and moving the rotation handle will cause the HEC‑RAS model to rotate around the rotation anchor point.
  6. Click and drag one of the corners of the bounding box to uniformly scale up and down the size of the HEC‑RAS model. Holding down the Shift key will cause the HEC‑RAS model to scale up and down in size non-uniformly. Holding down the Alt key will cause the HEC‑RAS model to uniformly scale up and down in size, relative to the center of the bounding box.
  7. Click and drag one of the sides of the bounding box to stretch or shrink the HEC‑RAS model in that direction. Holding down the Shift key will cause the HEC‑RAS model to uniformly scale up and down in size. Holding down the Alt key will cause the HEC‑RAS model to stretch in that direction, relative to the center of the bounding box.

Note that if a mistake is made during the fine tuning of the move, scale, stretch, and rotate georeferencing of the HEC‑RAS model, the Undo command can be used to back up to a previous georeferenced state.

Georeferencing a HEC‑RAS Model by CRS Assignment

If the imported HEC‑RAS model has been defined using projected coordinates, these steps can be followed to georeference the HEC‑RAS model to a map by assigning a coordinate reference system:

  1. If the Map View still shows the imported HEC‑RAS model, refer to this article to restore the Map View CRS.
  2. Confirm that the correct project CRS is being used by looking in the lower right corner of the application and examining the CRS that is listed.
  3. Click on the […] properties button for the HEC‑RAS layer within the Map Data Layers panel.
  4. The HEC‑RAS Properties dialog box will be displayed.
  5. Click on the Spatial Reference tab contained within the Properties dialog box.
  6. Click on the [Assign Current CRS] button. This will cause the HEC‑RAS layer to be assigned to the Map View CRS. The HEC‑RAS model should be visible on the Map View along with the other data.
  7. Click on the [OK] button in the displayed Properties dialog box to finish the process.

Our software also provides the option to georeference a HEC-RAS model to a river alignment. To learn more, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › Importing / Exporting Models

Exporting Your Project to HEC-RAS

GeoHECRAS is a data wrapper to the HEC‑RAS software. It is quite easy to export the HEC‑RAS project that the software generates. The Export HEC-RAS Project command allows a HEC-RAS river model to be exported to external HEC-RAS files. This allows the HEC-RAS project to be used with the US Army Corps HEC-RAS software.

unknown node

Follow the steps below to export a HEC‑RAS project:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Export Data dropdown menu and then select the Export HEC‑RAS Project command.
    Export Data dropdown menu
  2. The Export HEC‑RAS Project dialog box will be displayed.
    Export HEC‑RAS Project dialog box

The following sections describe the Export HEC-RAS Project command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting HEC-RAS File Type to Export

The Select HEC-RAS File Type to Export section allows the user to select the HEC-RAS file type to export. The following options are provided:

  • HEC-RAS input data files: Selecting this radio button option allows the user to export out the standard HEC-RAS input data files, including the project file, plan files, geometry files, steady flow files, and unsteady flow files. Clicking on the […] browse button displays the Export HEC-RAS Input Data Files dialog box where the available file types are “HEC-RAS Project Files (*.prj)”. After the user defines the HEC-RAS file name, the complete directory path and HEC-RAS project file name is shown in the adjacent string field.
  • HEC-RAS archive (ZIP) file: Selecting this radio button option allows the user to archive all of the standard HEC-RAS input data files (project file, plan files, geometry files, steady flow files, and unsteady flow files) into a single archive ZIP file. Clicking on the […] browse button displays the Export HEC-RAS Archive (ZIP) File dialog box where the available file types are “Archive File (*.zip)”. After the user defines the archive file name, the complete directory path and ZIP file name is shown in the adjacent string field.

Exporting Options

The Export Options section allows the user to select the specific HEC-RAS data to export. The following options are provided:

  • Include output results with HEC-RAS archive: Selecting this option allows the user to include the HEC-RAS model analysis output files in the archive ZIP file.
  • Include all support files (i.e., terrain, land cover) with HEC-RAS archive: Selecting this option allows the user to include terrain, land cover, etc., in the ZIP file.
  • Include base map layer: Selecting this option allows the user to include the background base map as a georeferenced JPG image file.

Selecting Scenarios (Plans) to Export

The Select Scenarios (Plans) to Export section contains a radio button group that controls what plan data from the current HEC-RAS project file is to be exported. The following options are provided:

  • All scenarios: Selecting this radio button option causes all scenarios (or plans) contained within the current HEC-RAS project to be exported to equivalent scenarios.
  • Select scenario: Selecting this radio button option allows the user to select a single scenario (or plan) contained within the current HEC-RAS project to be exported to an equivalent scenario.
Getting Started & Project Workflow › Importing / Exporting Models

Import HEC-RAS Shapefile Geometry Command

In GeoHECRAS, the user has the ability to import 3D river schematic and cross section data created in GIS or CADD systems using the Import HEC-RAS Shapefile Geometry command. This command allows the user to import GIS shapefile geometry data to construct a large multi-reach HEC-RAS model.

Follow the steps below to use the Import HEC-RAS Shapefile Geometry command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Import Data dropdown menu and select the Import HEC-RAS Shapefile Geometry command.Import HEC-RAS Shapefile Geometry input ribbon menu command
  2. The Import HEC-RAS Shapefile Geometry dialog box will be displayed.Import HEC-RAS Shapefile Geometry dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Import HEC-RAS Shapefile Geometry command and interact with the above dialog box.

River Reach Data

This section allows the user to specify which river reaches to import using the polyline shapefile, how to import the data, and what to name the river and reach. By default, this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Select the River Reach Data checkbox to enable this section.

River Reach Data section

This section allows the user to define the river reach data:

  • Polyline shapefile
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select which river reaches found in the shapefile to import into the project.
  • River name ID
    This sub-section is used to define the river name to be imported into the project. The following options are provided:
    1. Fixed name: This entry field is used to provide the name of a river when imported into the project. If this option is selected and no value is provided, the following informational dialog box will be displayed on clicking the [Import] button.
      Missing Data informational dialog box
    2. Name attribute: This dropdown combo box is used to select the river attributes name defined in the shapefile as the name of a river when imported into the project. If this option is selected and no attribute is defined in the dropdown combo box, the following informational dialog box will be displayed on clicking the [Import] button.
      Missing Attribute Data informational dialog box
  • Reach name ID
    This sub-section is used to define the reach name to be imported into the project. The following options are provided:
    1. Name attribute: This dropdown combo box is used to select the reach attributes name defined in the shapefile as a name of the reach when imported into the project.
    2. Auto-generate numeric ID: This radio button option causes the software to automatically specify the numeric ID for each reach when imported into the project.

The Insert Junctions for adjoining reaches checkbox option causes the software to automatically insert junctions where there are adjoining reaches. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked and options below it in the section are disabled (i.e., grayed out). Check the checkbox to enable the Dissolve incomplete junctions and Junction reach snap distance options.

Dissolve incomplete junctions and Junction reach snap distance options

The Dissolve incomplete junctions checkbox option causes the software to dissolve redundant junctions from the river reach. By default, this checkbox option is checked.

The Junction reach snap distance entry field allows the user to define the snapping distance for determining the placement of the junctions for adjoining reaches. By default, the software uses a snapping distance of 10 ft (or 3 m). However, the user can enter a different value. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to measure the maximum distance for snapping adjacent river reaches together from the Map View.

Cross Section Data

This section allows the user to import cross sections and internal boundaries (bridges and inline structures) using a polyline shapefile. By default, this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Select the Cross Section Data checkbox to enable this section.

Cross Section Data section

This section allows the user to define cross section data:

  • Polyline shapefile
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the cross sections shapefile to be imported into the project.

River Stationing

This panel is used to define the cross section river stationing to be imported.

This panel allows the user to define the following data:

  • River stationing attribute
    This radio button option is used to define the cross section attributes name defined in the shapefile as the name of river stations when imported into the project. The user can select the river stationing attribute from the dropdown combo box next to this radio button option. By default, this radio button option is selected.

The Auto correct inconsistent river stationing checkbox is used to fix affected cross section river stationing encountered during GIS attribute assignment so that they are in increasing order moving downstream.

  • Auto-generate river stationing
    This sub-section allows the user to number cross section river stationing based upon river chainage or incrementally.
    River Stationing Panel
    1. Downstream cross section river station
      This sub-sub-section allows the user to measure the downstream reach distance in order to assign it as the most downstream cross section river station. The following options are provided:
      • User defined: This radio button option allows the user to define downstream reach distance in order to assign it as the most downstream cross section river station.
      • User river reach downstream length: This radio button option causes the software to use the default river reach downstream length provided in the read-only field in order to assign it as the downstream most cross section river station.
    2. Cross section river stationing
      This sub-sub-section is used to define how the cross section river stations are to increase in value as they move up the river reach. The following options are provided:
      • Fixed increment: This radio button option causes the cross section river stations to increase by a fixed value defined in the input field next to this option.
      • Channel flow length: This radio button option causes the cross section river stations to increase by an increment represented by the channel flow length from the previous (downstream) cross section river station. The user can select miles or feet when working in US units, or kilometers or meters when working in metric (SI) units as units of measure for computing the cross section river station.
      • Decimal precision: This spin control allows the user to define the decimal precision used in determining the cross section river stations. By default, the spin control uses a value of 0. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 0 to 6.

Other Attribute Data

This panel is used to define additional cross section geometric data to be imported.

Other Attribute Data Panel

This panel allows the user to define the following data:

  • Flow lengths
    This sub-section allows the user to define the flow length for the left overbank, channel, and right overbank from the selected shapefile.

The Compute junction flow length checkbox option is used to automatically compute junction flow lengths when inserting a junction into the middle of an existing river reach or digitizing a new reach into the middle of an existing river reach.

  • Bank stations
    This sub-section allows the user to define the left and right bank stations from the selected shapefile.
  • Manning’s roughness
    This sub-section allows the user to define Manning’s n roughness values for the left overbank, channel, and right overbank from the selected shapefile.

Importing Shapefile Geometry

When all the options have been defined, click the [Import] button. The software will then import the GIS shapefile geometry data to construct a HEC-RAS model.

If the selected shapefiles and the project’s CRS are different, the following informational dialog box will be displayed on clicking the [Import] button.

Inconsistent CRS dialog box

If the same shapefile is used to import different features for the river reaches and cross sections, the following informational dialog box will be displayed on clicking the [Import] button.

Invalid Data Specified
Getting Started & Project Workflow › Importing / Exporting Models

Importing a HEC-2 Model in HEC-RAS

In GeoHECRAS, the Import HEC-2 Project command allows a pre-existing HEC-2 data file to be imported and converted into a HEC-RAS model, and then displayed on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to use the Import HEC-2 model command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Import Data dropdown menu and then choose the Import HEC‑2 Project command.
    Import HEC‑2 Project input ribbon menu command
  2. The Import HEC‑2 Project dialog box will be displayed.
    Import HEC‑2 Project dialog box

The following sections describe the Import HEC‑2 Project command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting HEC-2 Data File

In the Select HEC-2 Data File section, click the […] browse button and the Import HEC‑2 Data File dialog box wll be displayed. Select the HEC‑2 data file to be imported and click the [Open] button.

Import HEC‑2 Data File dialog box

The user will be returned to the Import HEC‑2 Project dialog box.

Cross Section River Stationing

This section provides methods for defining the cross section river stationing. A cross section cannot be identified randomly. It is identified with a river name, reach name, and a river station. The numerical order for cross section river stationing is from highest river stationing upstream to lowest river stationing downstream.

This section contains the following methods:

Cross section river stationing section
  • Use HEC‑2 cross section IDs
    By choosing this option, the software will import the cross sections with original IDs defined in the HEC‑2 model. The user can choose this option if the cross sections are numbered with highest river stationing to lowest river stationing downstream. Also, no two or more cross sections should have the same river station. If these two conditions are not met, then the software will not import the data properly.
  • Number cross sections sequentially
    Choose this option if the cross section data is not properly defined. This method basically defines the cross sections in a sequential method, like 1,2,3,4, etc. However, the software will maintain the numerical order for the cross section river stationing – from highest river stationing upstream to lowest river stationing downstream.

Note that by default the Use HEC‑2 cross sections IDs radio button is selected. However, the user can choose the method that best meets the user’s requirements.

After defining all the required data, click the [Import] button to import the HEC‑2 data file. After the HEC‑2 data has been imported, the software will zoom in to the extent of the HEC‑2 model data.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › Importing / Exporting Models

HEC‑RAS Import Base Engine Troubleshooting

This article describes how to fix the HEC‑RAS base engine if you cannot get a HEC‑RAS model imported.

When GeoHECRAS imports a HEC‑RAS model, it uses the HEC‑RAS base engine to update it to the current HEC‑RAS version. Prior to running the HEC‑RAS base engine, it checks to see that it is correctly configured and registered. If not, the software will display the following dialog box.

Error-Loading-HEC-RAS-Engine-1-1.png

Installing other software or other versions of HEC‑RAS can cause the registry entries for the HEC‑RAS base engine to become corrupted.

You can try one of the following methods to resolve the issue.

Method 1

Uninstalling and reinstalling GeoHECRAS should correct the issue.

Method 2

  1. Uninstall GeoHECRAS.
  2. Click on the Windows Start button to display the Windows Start menu.
  3. Open the Run dialog box and type CMD. Then click on the [OK] button. A command window will be displayed.
  4. Type the following at the command prompt: reg delete "HKEY_CURRENT_USERSoftwareVB and VBA Program SettingsC:Program Files (x86)CivilGEO" /f
    CMD-1-1.png
  5. Press the Enter key.
  6. The command prompt should display the message The operation completed successfully.
    CMD-2-1.png
  7. Close the command window and re-install GeoHECRAS.

Method 3

  1. Exit GeoHECRAS if it is running.
  2. Download the file HECReg.txt from here. (To download the file, right click on the text "here" and then select Save link as... from the context menu options.)
  3. Start Windows Explorer and navigate to where the file has been saved to.
  4. Rename the downloaded HECReg.txt file to HECReg.bat.
  5. Right click on the HECReg.bat file and select Run as administrator from the context menu options.
    Run-as-Administrator-1.png
  6. A User Account Control message box will be displayed.
    Batch-File-User-Account-Control-1.png
  7. Click on the Yes button.

Method 4

  1. Press Windows+R to open the Run dialog box.
    RunDialog-1.png
  2. Type in "%programfiles(x86)%CivilGEOGeoHECRASHEC‑RAS Engines" and press enter to open the HEC‑RAS Engines folder in file explorer.
  3. Right click on the Register.bat file and select Run as administrator from the context menu options.
    RegisterBatRun-1.png

This article should resolve your importing HEC‑RAS model issues. If you are still having problems, contact our technical support. They will be glad to assist you further.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › Importing / Exporting Models

External Editing of HEC‑RAS Models

Often users will export a HEC‑RAS model from GeoHECRAS for project submission. During the process, changes might be made to the exported HEC‑RAS model using the Army Corps of Engineers HEC‑RAS software.

To update the existing GeoHECRAS model with these HEC‑RAS model changes, re-import the HEC‑RAS model into GeoHECRAS so that the project database is re-synchronized. The software will not automatically recognize that external changes were made to the HEC‑RAS model.

The easiest way to do this re-synchronization is to right-click on the HEC‑RAS layer within the Map Data Layers panel and choose Remove from the displayed context menu. This will remove the HEC‑RAS model data from the GeoHECRAS project and make room for the revised HEC‑RAS model to be re-synchronized.

Map Data Layers panel - Remove option

Then, import the revised HEC‑RAS model into the GeoHECRAS project.

Import Data ribbon menu command

The HEC‑RAS model will re-synchronize with the GeoHECRAS project at the same model location, along with the changes that were made.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › Importing / Exporting Models

Importing a HEC-RAS Model

GeoHECRAS is a data wrapper to the HEC‑RAS software. By using the Import HEC-RAS Project command of GeoHECRAS, it is quite easy to import any existing HEC‑RAS model. This command allows the user to import a preexisting HEC-RAS river model and then display it on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to import a HEC‑RAS model:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Import Data dropdown menu and then select the Import HEC-RAS Project command.
    Import HEC-RAS Project Command
  2. The Import HEC‑RAS Project dialog box will be displayed.
    Import HEC-RAS Project Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Import HEC-RAS Project command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting HEC-RAS Project

The Select HEC-RAS Project section allows the user to select the HEC‑RAS project file. Click the […] browse button to select the HEC‑RAS project file. The software will display the Import HEC‑RAS Project File dialog box. From the displayed dialog box, select the HEC-RAS project file. After selecting the HEC‑RAS project file, the user will be returned to the Import HEC‑RAS Project dialog box, and the complete directory path and the file name will be shown in the HEC-RAS project file entry.

Selecting Scenarios (Plans) to Import

The Select Scenarios (Plans) to Import section contains radio button options that control what plan data from the selected HEC‑RAS project file are to be imported. The following options are provided:

All Scenarios

The All scenarios radio button option provides the ability to import all scenarios (or plans) contained within the selected HEC‑RAS project. By default, this option is selected, and all scenarios will be imported.

Selecting Scenarios

The Select scenarios radio button option provides the ability to import a specific scenario (or plan) from the HEC‑RAS model. This is helpful in the case of extremely large HEC‑RAS models where only one scenario needs to be considered. The Select Scenario dropdown combo box lists all the scenarios contained within the model. The user can select the checkboxes for the corresponding scenarios that are to be imported.

Select Scenario to Import

Other Import Options

This section is used to determine if the imported HEC-RAS model is georeferenced to real world coordinates or simply a schematic representation of the HEC-RAS model. The following options are provided:

Use HEC-RAS Coordinate Scaling

The Use HEC-RAS coordinate scaling radio button option is automatically selected when the software has determined that the HEC-RAS model being imported is not georeferenced. The software will then scale the model up based upon the lengths defined for each reach so that the model is at the correct coordinate extents.

The Fix intersecting geometries in HEC‑RAS model data checkbox option is used to automatically align cross sections that overlap each other. The software will auto-detect when to apply this option and the user does not need to override this option. By default, this checkbox option is checked. However, any changes to this checkbox are remembered for the application session.

Use Real World Coordinates Without Scaling

The Use real world coordinates without scaling radio button is automatically selected when the software has determined that the HEC-RAS model being imported is georeferenced.

When all the options have been properly defined, click the [Import] button to import the HEC‑RAS project. After the HEC‑RAS project is imported, the extent of the model will be displayed in the Map View.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans

Global Copy Command (GeoHECRAS)

In GeoHECRAS, the Global Copy command allows the user to copy project elements from one scenario to other existing scenarios of the same project or between two separate (loaded) projects as long as the two projects have the same coordinate reference system (CRS).

This allows a user to quickly copy elements to other scenarios and create new models based on existing ones. This is particularly useful for engineers who want to study and visualize the effects of modifications made to a model. This helps an engineer make faster and better design decisions.

Using Global Copy Command in GeoHECRAS

You can use the Global Copy command to copy these HEC-RAS elements:

  • 2D flow areas
  • Cross sections
  • Inline structures
  • Junctions
  • Lateral structures
  • Pumps
  • River reaches
  • Roadway crossings
  • Storage areas

Note that when any of the above elements are copied, then the sub-elements associated with that element are also copied automatically. Hence, the tally for copied elements in the status panel might differ from selected elements.

Follow the steps below to use the Global Copy command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Global Copy command.
    Global Copy command
  2. The Global Copy dialog box will be displayed.
    Global Copy dialog box
  3. From the Element Selection section, click the [Pick] button to select the HEC-RAS elements from the Map View.
  4. The Global Copy dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the HEC-RAS elements.
  5. Select the HEC-RAS elements on the Map View to copy.
  6. After selecting the elements, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  7. The Global Copy dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected elements will be shown in the Selected elements read-only field, as shown below.
    Selected elements read-only field
  8. From the Copy Elements to Target section, use the GeoHECRAS (loaded) project dropdown combo box to select the project where you want to copy the selected elements to. Note that the target project must already be open in GeoHECRAS.
  9. From the Geometry dropdown combo box, select the geometry file to copy the selected elements.
    Geometry dropdown combo box
    Alternatively, click the [New] button to create a new geometry file. In addition, at the top of the listing is an Add New Geometry entry, which will create new geometry.
  10. Optionally, check the Overwrite existing geometry elements checkbox option to overwrite existing geometry elements with the new geometry elements.
  11. When all the options have been properly defined, click the [OK]

The selected elements will be copied to the target project and the corresponding geometry file.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans

Multiple Plan Analysis (HEC-RAS)

GeoHECRAS can perform an analysis on multiple scenarios (plans) at the same time for both steady and unsteady flow models. This is useful, for example, when an existing bridge's flow regime is compared to a proposed replacement bridge's analysis. A scenario would consist of selecting the flow data and one of the geometry data. After the scenarios have been defined, the Multiple Scenarios command can be used to perform computations on the multiple scenarios in sequential order (one after the other). The user can choose which scenarios to compute, apply a flow regime, and specify the computation order.

The software provides some advanced options in the choice of flow regime to use when modeling complex steady and unsteady flow situations. The different flow regime options are:

  • Subcritical Flow – requires only downstream boundary conditions.
  • Supercritical Flow – requires only the upstream boundary conditions.
  • Mixed Flow – requires both upstream and downstream boundary conditions.

To learn how to set up boundary conditions, refer to this article in our Knowledge Base.

The various applications of flow regimes are:

  • Dam break analysis
  • Levee overtopping and breaching
  • Hinge pool calculations for navigation dams
  • Generic rules to control gate operations at hydraulic structures

Follow the steps below to use the Multiple Scenarios command for steady flow analysis:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, expand the Compute Steady dropdown combo box and select the Multiple Scenarios command.Multiple-Plan-Analysis-HEC-RAS-image-1.png
  2. The Compute Steady - Multiple Scenarios dialog box will be displayed.Multiple-Plan-Analysis-HEC-RAS-image-2.png
  3. Select the checkboxes corresponding to the scenarios you want to compute. Note that the checkbox corresponding to the current scenario will be selected by default.
  4. In the Flow Regime column, use the dropdown combo box to select the flow regime.Multiple-Plan-Analysis-HEC-RAS-image-3.png
  5. In the Run Order column, click the [↑] and [↓] buttons to change the computation order of the selected scenarios. Scenarios that are higher in the listing have precedence over scenarios that appear lower in the list.
  6. Click the [Compute] button. This will cause HEC‑RAS to perform the multiple scenario analysis.

Multiple plan analysis for unsteady flow models can be performed using the similar approach. The user can select the Multiple Scenarios command from the Compute Unsteady dropdown combo box of the Analysis ribbon menu.

Multiple-Plan-Analysis-HEC-RAS-image-4.png

This will display the Compute Unsteady – Multiple Scenarios dialog box.

Multiple-Plan-Analysis-HEC-RAS-image-5.png

In this dialog box, the user can select the scenarios to compute, apply a flow regime, set computation order and perform the multiple scenario analysis, as described above.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans

Scenario Summary (HEC-RAS)

The Scenario Summary command in GeoHECRAS displays an informational dialog box that provides a detailed overview of the project: number of scenarios (plans), number of geometry definitions, number of flow definitions, and other details (such as element details, boundary conditions, defined flows, and storage area elevations).

Follow the steps below to use the Scenario Summary command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Scenario Manager dropdown menu and select the Scenario Summary command.
    Scenario Summary command
  2. The Scenario Summary dialog box will be displayed.
    Scenario Summary dialog box
    Note that the Scenario Summary dialog box can also be displayed by clicking the [Summary] button of the Scenario Manager dialog box.
    Scenario Manager dialog box - [Summary] button

The following sections describe the information displayed in the Scenario Summary dialog box.

General Information

This section displays the project name, the project run file name, and the directory path for the project. It also displays a read-only field containing the project description added by the user.

Scenarios (Plans)

This section displays all the scenarios (plans) within the project, including the associated file extension, geometry data, flow data, and flow type in a tabular format. The current scenario of the project is selected by default.

Geometry Data

This section displays the list of all the geometry data and their file extensions contained within the project. The geometry data associated with the current scenario are selected by default.

Flow Data

This section displays the list of all the flow data and their file extensions contained within the project. The flow data associated with the current scenario are selected by default.

Current Plan Detailed Information

This section provides detailed information related to the scenario selected in the Scenarios (Plans) section, such as element details, boundary conditions, defined flows, and storage area elevations.

Elements Details

The Elements Details panel displays the sum of all HEC-RAS elements (river reaches, cross sections, roadway crossings, 2D elements, etc.) contained within the selected scenario.

Elements Details panel

Boundary Conditions

The Boundary Conditions panel displays the boundary condition type defined at each river station.

Scenario-Summary-HEC-RAS-image-4.png

SA/2D Flow Areas

The SA/2D Flow Areas panel displays any storage areas and 2D flow areas contained within the selected scenario.

Scenario-Summary-HEC-RAS-image-5.png

SA/2D BC Lines

The SA/2D BC Lines panel displays the boundary condition type defined at each Boundary Condition Line drawn along a storage area or 2D flow area.

Scenario-Summary-HEC-RAS-image-6.png

Initial Flows

The Initial Flows panel displays the initial flow defined for any river station.

Scenario-Summary-HEC-RAS-image-7.png

Initial Elevations

The Initial Elevations panel displays the initial elevation of all storage areas and 2D flow areas contained within the selected scenario.

Scenario-Summary-HEC-RAS-image-8.png

Note that by clicking the [Copy to Clipboard] button, the user can copy the entire contents of the Scenario Summary dialog box to the Windows clipboard and then paste it into a text file.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans

Delete Scenarios (HEC-RAS)

The Delete Scenarios command allows the user to select which plans, geometries, and flow data to remove from the HEC‑RAS project. This is helpful in order to remove data that is no longer relevant to a project or planned for inclusion in a reviewing agency project submittal. In addition, this command compresses the database, removing data no longer in use and reducing the project file size.

Follow the steps below to use the Delete Scenarios command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, expand the Scenario Manager dropdown combo box and select the Delete Scenarios command.
    Delete-Scenarios-HEC-RAS-image-1.png
  2. The Delete Scenarios dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box displays all plans, geometry, and flow data associated with the HEC‑RAS project.
    Delete-Scenarios-HEC-RAS-image-2.png
  3. Select the checkboxes corresponding to the scenarios (plans), geometry, and flow data to be removed.
  4. Click the [Delete] button. The software will delete the selected scenarios, geometry, and flow data.

Note that after a scenario data has been deleted from the HEC‑RAS project, it cannot be recovered with the Undo command. However, if the project is not saved, then the user can reload the project, and the scenario data will still be present. Alternatively, if the project has been saved, then the project backup file can be used to recover the previous state of scenario data.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans

Duplicate Current Scenario (HEC-RAS)

The Duplicate Current Scenario command in GeoHECRAS allows the user to make identical copies of the current scenario (plan). These copies are independent and do not interact with the original scenario after it has been made. The user can optionally make a copy of the current geometry and steady/unsteady flow data.

Follow the steps given below to use the Duplicate Current Scenario command.

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Scenario Manager dropdown menu and then select the Duplicate Current Scenario command.
    Duplicate Current Scenario Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Duplicate Current Scenario dialog box will be displayed.
    Duplicate Current Scenario dialog box (steady flow)
    Note that if the project is of an unsteady flow model, then the Steady flow checkbox will be changed to an Unsteady flow checkbox as shown below.
    Duplicate Current Scenario dialog box (unsteady flow)
  3. Enter the scenario name in the Scenario (plan) checkbox entry field to create an identical copy of the current scenario (plan). By default, the Scenario (plan) checkbox is checked. If unchecked, then the Scenario (plan) entry field along with the Short ID and Description fields are disabled.
  4. Enter the unique short id in the Short ID entry field for the scenario.
  5. Enter the description in the Description field to describe the scenario.
  6. Alternatively, the user can optionally check the Geometry and Steady flow checkboxes to make identical copies of the current scenario’s Geometry Data and Steady Flow Data.
    Note that the geometry data and unsteady flow data are helpful when the user needs to create different alternative designs for comparison—like when comparing different bridge opening designs, etc.
  7. Click the [Apply] button and a copy of the current scenario will be created.
    [Apply] button
Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans

Understanding HEC-RAS Scenarios

HEC‑RAS provides the ability to work with multiple scenarios (or plans) within a single project. Each scenario associates a specific geometry file and flow file with a specific set of conditions, such as pre-developed and post-developed phases of a project.

unknown node

Elements of a Project

A HEC‑RAS project is comprised of one or more scenarios. Scenarios are formulated by selecting particular geometry data and flow data. HEC‑RAS stores the geometry data and flow data in separate files. Modifications can be made to the geometry data and/or flow data to represent specific conditions, and then saved as new files.

The following diagram shows the interaction between the various files contained within a HEC‑RAS project.

Elements of a Project

Elements of a HEC‑RAS Scenario

The dropdown combo box adjacent to the Scenario Manager dropdown menu displays the Short ID of the currently selected scenario. The read-only field below the Short ID dropdown combo box displays the Scenario (plan) or Long ID of the current scenario.

Elements of a HEC‑RAS Scenario

The ribbon menu dropdown combo box allows the user to quickly switch between scenarios. Moving from one scenario to another will cause the contents of the Map View to change to represent the geometry of the selected scenario.

Short ID dropdown combo box

From the Input ribbon menu, click the dropdown combo box arrow of Scenario Manager. It will display four commands: Scenario Manager, Duplicate Current Scenario, Delete Scenarios, and Scenario Summary.

Scenario Manager

Scenario Manager

The Scenario Manager dialog box is used to manage the geometry and flow data (i.e., geometry and flow files) associated with the current scenario. In addition, new scenarios, geometry data, and flow data can be created, as well as copied from existing data. Selecting the Scenario Manager command will display the below dialog box.

Scenario Manager dialog box

The Scenario Manager dialog box is segmented into the following sections:

  • Scenario (or plan) data
  • Geometry data
  • Flow data (either steady flow or unsteady flow)

Each of these sections contains individual elements that are used to define the corresponding section data. For example, both the Scenario (plan) and Geometry data sections allow the user to provide a description detailing the data. Each section allows the user to name the data. However, scenario (plan) data has both a Long ID and a Short ID for naming its data.

In the Geometry Data section, the user can insert the associated terrain surface from the dropdown.

Terrain surface dropdown

The user can select the blank entry from the Terrain surface dropdown to disassociate the terrain from the project.

Blank entry from the Terrain surface dropdown

The 2D land cover layer checkbox entry allows the user to associate the project scenario with the land use coverage layer. The available 2D land cover layers of the project will be displayed in the 2D land cover layer dropdown combo box. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about creating 2D land cover layers.

The 2D infiltration layer checkbox entry allows the user to associate the project scenario with the 2D infiltration layer. The available 2D infiltration layers of the project will be displayed in the 2D infiltration layer dropdown combo box. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about computing infiltration layers.

2D land cover and infiltration layer

To define the steady or unsteady flow data, the user can enable either the Steady Flow Data or Unsteady Flow Data radio button for the selected scenario.

Scenario Summary

In the Scenario Manager dialog box, clicking on the [Summary] button will display an informational dialog box that provides a detailed overview of the project: number of scenarios (plans), number of geometry definitions, number of flow definitions, and details of the current plan (such as Element Details, Boundary Conditions, Defined Flows, and Storage Area Elevations).

Scenario Summary button

Alternatively, the user can view the scenario summary by selecting the Scenario Summary command from the list of Scenario Manager dropdown commands.

Scenario Summary command

To learn more about the Scenario Summary command, refer to this article in our Knowledge Base.

Duplicate Current Scenario

The Duplicate Current Scenario command makes an identical copy of the current scenario (plan). The user can elect to make a copy of the current geometry and steady flow data. This is helpful when the user needs to create different alternative designs for comparison — when comparing different bridge opening designs, for example.

To learn more about the Duplicate Current Scenario command, refer to this article in our Knowledge Base.

Delete Scenarios

The Delete Scenarios command allows the user to select which plans, geometries, and flow data to remove from the HEC‑RAS project. This is helpful in order to remove data that is no longer relevant to a project or planned for inclusion in a reviewing agency project submittal. In addition, this command compresses the database, removing data no longer in use and reducing the project file size.

To learn more about the Delete Scenarios command, refer to this article in our Knowledge Base.

Multiple Plan Analysis

GeoHECRAS can perform analysis on multiple scenarios at the same time. This is useful, for example, when an existing bridge’s flow regime is compared to a proposed replacement bridge’s analysis. A scenario would consist of selecting the flow data and one of the geometry data. Computations on the multiple plans can then be performed sequentially (one immediately after the other) using the Multiple Scenarios command.

Note that the software provides separate Multiple Scenarios command for steady and unsteady flow models.

To learn more about the Multiple Scenarios command, refer to this article in our Knowledge Base.

Displaying Multiple Scenario Results

After the scenario computations have been performed, the software can display the associated results using the following output parameters:

  • Cross Section Plot
  • Profile Plot
  • General Profile Plot
  • Rating Curve
  • Time Series Plot
  • Summary Output

To view the output results, select the Profile Plots command icon from the Results ribbon menu.

Profile Plots command

Alternatively, select the Profile Plot command from the Profile Plots dropdown menu.

Profile Plot command

The Profile Plot window will be displayed. From the Profile Plot window, select Plans from the Options menu. The Plan Selection dialog box will be displayed and the user can then select the scenarios (or plans) to display.

Profile Plot window

Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Ut elit tellus, luctus nec ullamcorper mattis, pulvinar dapibus leo.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans

Running HEC‑RAS Batch Analyses

GeoHECRAS can perform an analysis on multiple scenarios at the same time. This is useful, for example, when comparisons of an existing bridge and a proposed replacement bridge are to be analyzed. One scenario could consist of the flow data and another of the geometry data. Computations on the multiple plans can then be performed sequentially (one immediately after the other) using the Multiple Scenarios command contained within the Compute Steady menu item of the Analysis ribbon menu. (A similar command exists for unsteady flow scenarios.)

Multiple Scenarios command

Selecting the Multiple Scenarios command causes the Compute Steady - Multiple Scenarios dialog box to be displayed.

Compute Steady - Multiple Scenarios dialog box

This dialog box allows the user to select which scenarios to be computed, the flow regime to be used in the computation, and which scenario result file should be loaded by default when displaying the output results. Clicking the [Compute] button will cause HEC‑RAS to perform the multiple scenario analysis.

Displaying Multiple Scenario Results

After the computations have been performed, the software can display the results from multiple scenarios overlaid on each other for the following output results:

  • Cross Section Plot
  • Profile Plot
  • General Profile Plot
  • Rating Curve
  • Stage & Flow Hydrographs
  • Summary Output

To view the output results, select the Results ribbon menu and choose the output menu command. For example, select the Profile Plots command from the Results ribbon menu.

Profile Plots command

The Profile Plot window will be displayed. From the Profile Plot window, select Plans from the Options menu. The Plan Selection dialog box will be displayed and the user can then select the scenarios (or plans) to display.

Profile Plot window
Getting Started & Project Workflow › Display & Element Properties

HEC‑RAS Element Display Properties

In GeoHECRAS, you can change the display properties of the following HEC-RAS elements shown on the Map View:

  • 2D Flow Areas
  • Cross Sections
  • Inline Structures (i.e., dams)
  • Lateral Structures (i.e., levees and flood walls)
  • Profile Line Plots
  • Pumps
  • River Reaches
  • Roadway Crossings (i.e., bridges and culverts)
  • Storage Area Connections
  • Storage Areas (i.e., reservoirs and off channel storage)
  • Time Series Nodes
  • and more…

These same display properties are utilized when exporting the HEC‑RAS model to an AutoCAD drawing file. Refer to this article in our knowledge base on how to export the HEC-RAS model to an AutoCAD drawing file.

To view or edit the display properties of different HEC-RAS elements, follow the steps below:

  1. In the Map Data Layers panel, click on the […] Properties button next to the HEC-RAS layer.
    HEC-RAS Layer […] Properties
  2. The HEC-RAS Properties dialog box will be displayed.
    HEC-RAS Layer Properties dialog box
  3. In the General Options tab, scroll down through the dialog box to see all the available display options. The following sections are available:
    • River Reach Display Properties
      Use this section to configure the display properties of the river reaches.
      You can turn the display on/off and configure the display properties of these items:
      1. River reaches
      2. River and Reach names
      3. River reach flow direction arrows
      4. River junctions and junction IDs
      5. River centerline stationing IDs, major, and minor tick
    • Cross Section Display Properties
      Use this section to configure the display properties of river cross sections. A cross section represents the geometry of the underlying terrain surface.
      You can turn the display on/off and configure the display properties of these items:
      1. Cross sections
      2. Interpolated cross sections
      3. Cross section IDs and direction arrows
      4. Node names
      5. Roughness segments
      6. Bank stations
      7. Ineffective flow areas
      8. Conveyance obstructions
      9. Levee stations
    • Internal Boundary Condition Display Properties
      Use this section to configure the display properties of hydraulic structures, such as dams, bridges, culverts, levees, etc. in the model.
      You can turn the display on/off and configure the display properties of these items:
      1. Roadway crossings and their IDs
      2. Sloping Embankment: Upstream, Downstream, and node names
      3. Inline structures, their IDs, and node names
      4. Lateral structures, their IDs, and node names
    • 2D Flow Area Display Properties
      Use this section to configure the display properties of 2D modeling entities, such as 2D flow areas, boundary conditions, bridge piers, land cover, 2D flow training structures, etc.
      You can turn the display on/off and configure the display properties of these items:
      1. 2D flow area boundaries, cell faces, cell points, cell IDs, face points, face point IDs, area IDs, boundary face IDs, area breaklines, breakline IDs, and filled-in flow areas
      2. External BC lines and their IDs
      3. Internal BC lines and their IDs
      4. Initial condition points and their IDs
      5. Land cover regions and their IDs
      6. Bridge piers and bridge pier IDs
      7. 2D ineffective flow areas and their IDs
      8. 2D conveyance obstructions and their IDs
      9. 2D meshing zones and their IDs
      10. Patch meshes and their IDs
      11. Patch faces and nodes
      12. 2D flow training structures and their IDs
    • Storage Area Display Properties
      Use this section to configure the display properties of storage area elements, such as reservoirs and off-channel storage.
      You can turn the display on/off and configure the display properties of these items:
      1. Storage Areas and their IDs
      2. Filled-in storage areas
      3. SA/2D connections and their IDs, flow directions arrows, and weirs
    • Profile Line Plots
      Use this section to configure the display properties of profile line plots and their IDs on the Map View. Profile line plots are used for plotting results from a 2D flow area. The data is extracted longitudinally, like a profile plot.
      You can turn the display on/off and configure the display properties of these items:
      1. Profile line plots and their IDs
      2. Profile line stationing IDs, major, and minor tick
    • Time Series Nodes
      Use this section to configure the display properties of time series nodes and their IDs on the Map View. Time series nodes are used for generating a time series plot and the time series data at that node.
    • Pump Display Properties
      Use this section to turn the display on/off and to change the size of pumps on the Map View. You can also turn on/off and configure the display properties of the pump connection lines and pump conduits.
    • Other Display Properties
      You can can use this section to turn the display on/off for structure rendering, stamp geometry polylines, label auto scaling, and can also configure the display properties of these items:
      1. Text label size
      2. Text label offset
      3. Text label alignment
  4. After configuring the above display settings, click the [OK] button to apply them on the map view.
    Click the [OK] button to apply

Notes:

  • To restore the default display settings, click the [Default] button.
  • To restore the HEC-RAS labels to their default locations, click the [Reset Label Locations] button.
  • To update any changes in the dialog box without closing it, click the [Apply] button.

Modifying HEC-RAS Element Properties From the Ribbon Menu

HEC-RAS element properties can also be modified directly from the ribbon menu. Selecting a HEC-RAS layer in the Map Data Layers panel displays a dedicated Display Options ribbon menu, enabling quick and precise customization of its element properties.

HEC-RAS Layer Display ribbon menu
River System Geometry › River Reaches

Georeferencing River Reaches

When the software imports a model, it automatically places the river reach, junctions, and cross sections on the Map View. However, if the original model was not spatially georeferenced, the river reach (and associated junctions and cross sections) will not align with any loaded background base map. While the software can operate without any issues in this situation, it is preferable to have the river data georeferenced to the background base map. Therefore, it might become necessary to georeference the imported river reach.

The Georeference River Reaches command in GeoHECRAS is used to manually georeference each of the river reaches to the background base map displayed in the Map View. The process of georeferencing a river reach to the Map View can be a trial and error process—especially when the exact location of the original river reach is not known. Using the Georeference River Reaches command, the georeferencing process can be accelerated.

Follow the steps below to georeference an existing river reach:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the River Reaches dropdown menu and then select the Georeference River Reaches command.
    Georeference River Reaches Command
  2. The Georeference River Reaches dialog box will be displayed.
    Georeference River Reaches Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to georeference an existing river reach and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting River Reach

This section allows the user to select the river reach to be georeferenced.

Note that if a river reach has been preselected from the Map View before running this command, then the selected river and reach will be displayed in the River and Reach dropdown combo boxes.

If the model contains a single river and reach, then it will automatically be selected in the River and Reach dropdown combo boxes. If the model contains multiple rivers and reaches, then the user can select the desired river and reach from the River and Reach dropdown combo boxes.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the river reach from the Map View. Clicking on the [Pick] button causes the dialog box to temporarily disappear and the user will be prompted to select the river reach from the Map View. After selecting a river reach, the dialog box will be redisplayed with the river reach shown as selected. The selected river reach is highlighted on the Map View. To abort the selection process, press the [Esc] key or right-click and select Cancel from the displayed context menu.

After selecting the river reach, the user can select one of the following georeference options:

  • Snap to Alignment Centerline
  • Slide Along Alignment Centerline
  • Draw on Map View

Snap to Alignment Centerline

If an existing river alignment centerline for the selected river reach exists on the Map View, the Snap to Alignment Centerline can be used to snap the HEC-RAS river reach to the alignment centerline. Select the Snap to Alignment Centerline radio button option to enable this section.

Snap to Alignment Centerline Section
  • Pick near upstream end
    Clicking the [Pick] button adjacent to this read-only entry allows the user to pick a point from the Map View near the upstream end of the river alignment centerline. On clicking the [Pick] button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear and the user will be prompted to select an upstream point on the river centerline. After selecting the point, the user will be returned to the dialog box and the Pick near upstream end entry changes from Not Selected to Selected. In addition, a temporary highlighted point is shown on the river centerline to show the selected location. To abort the selection process, press the [Esc] key or right-click and choose Cancel from the displayed context menu.
  • Pick near downstream end
    Clicking the [Pick] button adjacent to this read-only entry allows the user to pick a point from the Map View near the downstream end of the river alignment centerline. On clicking the [Pick] button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear, and the user will be prompted to select a downstream point on the river centerline. After selecting the point, the user will be returned to the dialog box and the Pick near downstream end entry will change from Not Selected to Selected. In addition, a temporary highlighted point is shown on the river centerline to show the selected location. To abort the selection process, press the [Esc] key or right-click and choose Cancel from the displayed context menu.

After selecting the upstream and downstream end of the river reach, click the [Snap] button and the river reach will get snapped to the alignment centerline.

Note that the [Snap] button can only be enabled when the upstream and downstream end of the river reach has been selected. In addition, a preview of the snapped river reach is shown on the river alignment centerline, which allows the user to reselect the pick points or cancel the selection process.

The user can turn on the Scale to fit checkbox option to scale the river reach to fit within the alignment centerline.

If the upstream and downstream points do not overlay the same continuous alignment centerline, then the following informational message will be displayed.

Noncontinuous Alignment Polyline Dialog Box

Slide Along Alignment Centerline

If the HEC-RAS river reach has been snapped to an alignment centerline on the Map View, but is not precisely located where it should be, the Slide along Alignment Centerline option can be used. This option allows the user to slide the HEC-RAS river reach along an underlying river alignment centerline, as well as shrink or stretch the river reach to fit between two known locations. Select the Slide along Alignment Centerline radio button option to enable this section.

Slide Along Alignment Centerline

Click the [Slide] button to manually slide river reach along the underlying alignment centerline. Clicking the [Slide] button makes the dialog box temporarily disappear and prompts the user to click on the river reach and drag it along the underlying river centerline. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. To abort the operation, press the [Esc] key and the moved river reach will return to its original location.

While dragging (sliding) the river reach along the river alignment centerline, the user would not be allowed to move the river reach beyond the end of the centerline.

Note that if the endpoints of the HEC-RAS river reach do not overlay the same continuous centerline, then the following informational message will be displayed.

Cannot Slide River Reach Dialog Box

Draw on Map View

This section allows the user to draw the river reach on the Map View. Select the Draw on Map View radio button option to enable this section.

Draw on Map View Section

Clicking the [Draw] button temporarily removes the dialog box and prompts the user to draw the river reach on the Map View in an upstream to downstream direction. Once the river reach drawing is finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The river reach will automatically snap to the drawn alignment polyline. To abort the operation, press the [Esc] key and the snapped river reach will return to its previous location.

The user can turn on the Create curvilinear polyline checkbox option to draw the polyline using a curvilinear segment. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about element digitizing on the Map View.

The user can select the Maintain existing reach alignment for segments outside of the drawn reach checkbox option to maintain the existing reach alignment for segments outside of the drawn reach.

Reach Length Handling

This section allows the user to select the method that should be used to reference the total length of the river reach.

The following radio button options are provided:

  • Use actual river reach length (total channel flow length)
    On selecting this option, the software will automatically extend or shorten the downstream end of the river reach to match the total channel flow length.

  • Use digitized length (schematic layout)
    On selecting this option, the software uses the user’s digitized river reach as the river reach, even if the actual river reach length is greater or less than what the user has digitized. The benefit of this option is that the user can create a schematic layout of the river reach to fit perhaps poorly created HEC-RAS data models to fit a map.

Other Options

The Update cross section geometric layout checkbox option allows the user to update the cross section geometric layout. By default, this option is checked. If unchecked, then the river reach cross sections will not be moved from their current position.

Note that checking the Maintain existing reach alignment for segments outside of drawn reach checkbox option will automatically uncheck the Update cross section geometric layout checkbox.

River System Geometry › River Reaches

Automated Draw River Reaches Command

The Automated Draw River Reaches command allows the user to automatically draw river reaches on the Map View for the user selected location(s).

Follow the steps below to use the Automated Draw River Reaches command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the River Reaches dropdown menu and then select the Automated Draw River Reaches command.
    Automated Draw River Reaches command
  2. The Automated Draw River Reaches dialog box will be displayed.
    Automated Draw River Reaches dialog box

The following sections describe the Automated Draw River Reaches command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting River Reach Starting Point

The Select River Reach Starting Point section is used to select a starting point on the Map View for drawing a river reach.

To select a starting point, follow the steps below:

  1. Click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    Click the [Pick] button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt the user to select a starting point on the Map View for drawing the river reach.
  3. Once the river reach starting point is selected, the Automated Draw River Reaches dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Select point read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.
    Select point read-only field

River Reach Draw Direction

This section is used to define the direction of the river reach polyline that will be drawn based upon the selected starting point.

River Reach Draw Direction

This section contains the following options:

  • Downstream flow direction
    This radio button option is used to select the flow direction of the river reach polyline downstream from the starting point. By default, this option is selected.
  • Upstream flow direction
    This radio button option is used to select the flow direction of the river reach polyline upstream from the starting point.

River Reach Specifications

This section is used to specify the River name and the corresponding Reach name for each drawn river reach. The user can manually enter the river and reach names. The [New] button can be used to create a new river.

River Reach Specifications

General Options

This section is used to define the following options for drawing a river reach.

General Options
  • Terrain surface
    The dropdown combo box lists the terrain surfaces associated with the project which are used to define the reach polyline. By default, the current scenario’s terrain surface is selected. If there is no terrain surface defined for the selected scenario, then this entry is blank.
  • River reach maximum length
    This optional checkbox entry is used to define the maximum length of the drawn river reach polyline. If this checkbox entry is left blank/unchecked, the river reach polyline will be extended to the limits of the underlying flow direction grid.

    Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to draw a river reach polyline representing the maximum river reach length. On clicking the [Pick] button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw an approximate river reach polyline on the Map View.

    When drawing a river reach polyline by holding down the [Shift] key, the drawing is done along an ortho line. Similarly, if the user holds down the [Ctrl] key while drawing, the drawing is done along a curvilinear line. In addition, the status bar shows the accumulated length while drawing the river reach polyline. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The drawn polyline will be removed, and the Automated Draw River Reaches dialog box will be redisplayed with the measured distance, as shown below.
    River reach maximum length checkbox entry

Computing River Reach

After defining all the required options, click the [Compute] button to compute the flow direction grid for the selected terrain surface.

While the computation is running, the [Compute] button will change to [Cancel] button, which allows the user to abort the command if needed. In addition, a progress bar at the bottom will show the progress of the computation along with status messages.

After computing the flow direction grid, the software will automatically generate a river reach on the Map View.

River System Geometry › River Reaches

Editing of River and Reach Names

GeoHECRAS allows the user to rename a river and/or reach by double clicking on the reach name on the Map View. There is no need to display the corresponding River Reach Data dialog box.

editing-of-river-and-reach-names.png

Alternatively, the user can double click on the river reach polyline from the Map View and the River Reach Data dialog box will be displayed.

River-reach-data-dialog-box-image.png

The following sections are used to edit river reach data in the above dialog box.

Edit River Reach

This section of the dialog box is used to edit the river and reach name. The River name dropdown combo box can be used to select a different river or to create a new river. To edit the selected river name, click on the pencil icon.

Click the [Pick] button to directly select a river reach from the Map View. The dialog box will temporarily disappear, and the user will be prompted to select the river reach from the Map View. After selecting the river reach, the user will be returned to the dialog box with the river reach selected.

A flow directional arrow is shown at the center of the river reach to show the assigned flow direction. If the river reach flow direction is incorrect, click the [Reverse Direction] button.

Assign Reach to Different River

This section of the dialog box allows the user to assign the selected reach to a different river. The River name dropdown combo box can be used to select an existing river or to create a new river.

To add a new river, click the [New] button. Once the new river name has been defined, click the [Assign] button to see the results updated on the Map View.

River System Geometry › River Reaches

Import River Reach Geometry Command

The Import River Reach Geometry command allows the software to import surveyed river reach geometry from a wide variety of file formats. The software will automatically determine where the next river reach starts within the selected file, based upon either gaps within the file, or a sudden change in direction from one geometry point to the next.

Follow the steps below to use the Import River Reach Geometry command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the River Reaches dropdown menu, and then choose the Import River Reach Geometry command.
    Import River Reach Geometry command
  2. The Import River Reach Geometry dialog box will be displayed.
    Import River Reach Geometry dialog box

The following sections are used while importing surveyed river reach geometry data.

Select River Reach File

This section allows the user to select the survey river reach point file. The file needs to be in an ASCII text file format, with either commas, tabs, or spaces delimiting the data fields contained within each row of the file.

The first row within the file that contains 2 or 3 floating point numbers are used to start the import river reach process. Whenever a blank line is encountered within the data file, or the direction between three adjacent points changes too much, the software interprets this as the start of a new river reach.

The following survey file formats are supported:

  • EN (Easting, Northing)
  • ENZ (Easting, Northing, Elevation)
  • ENZD (Easting, Northing, Elevation, Description)
  • LLZ (Lat-Long, Elevation)
  • LLZD (Lat-Long, Elevation, Description)
  • NE (Northing, Easting)
  • NEZ (Northing, Easting, Elevation)
  • NEZD (Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description)
  • PEN (Point, Easting, Northing)
  • PENZ (Point, Easting, Northing, Elevation)
  • PEND (Point, Easting, Northing, Description)
  • PENZD (Point, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Description)
  • PLLZD (Point, Lat-Long, Elevation, Description)
  • PNE (Point, Northing, Easting)
  • PNEZ (Point, Northing, Easting, Elevation)
  • PNED (Point, Northing, Easting, Description)
  • PNEZD (Point, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description)
  • PNT (XYZ Survey Alignment Data)
  • PTS (XYZ Survey Alignment Data)

Note that PENZD is the default file format. Also, note that Easting = X coordinate and Northing = Y coordinate.

Point File Preview

This section shows the first 100 lines contained within the survey file. It allows the user to see the contents of the ASCII survey file and allows the user to change the file format based upon previewing the contents. After changing the file format, the column headings change in the Point File Preview section.

Point File Preview section

Elevation Data Adjustment

This section is optional. It allows the user to adjust the survey point data elevation values if the elevation data is in the unit system or needs to have a datum adjustment. Note that elevation data is not required for survey river reach alignment data.

Elevation Data Adjustment section

The user can select one of the following options to modify the elevation values:

  • No change
    This is the default option. This radio button option will not make any changes to the elevation values.
  • Convert meters to feet
    This radio button option converts the elevation values from meters to feet. After selecting this option, click the [Apply] button. The software will then update the converted values in the Elevation column of the Point File Preview table.
  • Datum adjustment
    This radio button option allows the user to add a constant value to the existing elevation values. After selecting this option, the entry field adjacent to this option is enabled, allowing the user to enter the constant value. After entering the value, click the [Apply] button. The software will then update the values in the Elevation column of the Point File Preview table. The new elevation values are the sum of the original value and a constant value provided by the user.

River Reach Specifications

This section is used to define the river reach naming convention to be used for the imported river reaches.

River Reach Specifications section

River names can be defined by the following methods:

  • An existing river name can be selected
  • A new river name can be defined
  • The software can auto generate a numeric ID that defines the river name

Reach names can be defined by the following methods:

  • A new reach name can be defined
  • The software can auto generate a numeric ID that defines the reach name

Note that each river reach must have a unique ID formed from the combination of its river name and reach name.

River System Geometry › River Reaches

Reverse River Reach Command

The river flow direction is defined by digitizing the river reach in a downstream direction. The software will display a flow directional arrow at the center of the river reach showing the assigned flow direction.

Reverse-River-Reach-command-image-1.png

If the river reach is defined in an incorrect direction, either right-click on the river reach and select Reverse River Reach from the context menu or go to Input | River Reaches and then select the Reverse River Reach command.

The Reverse River Reach dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box gives the user the option to renumber the cross-section river stations.

Reverse River Reach dialog box

The following sections describe the Reverse River Reach command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting River Reach

The Select River Reach section is used to select river and reach segments available in the project. The River and Reach dropdown entries display the selected river and reach. The user can click the [Pick] button to interactively select the river reach from the Map View.

Reverse River Reach and Flip Existing Cross Section River Stationing

This radio button option allows the software to reuse the existing cross section river stationing by simply reversing the cross section. In this way, the river stations will be in the correct order with the smallest river station at the downstream end and then progressively increasing in order as cross sections move upstream.

Reverse River Reach and Revise Cross Section River Stationing

This radio button option allows the user to control the cross section river stationing by defining the starting (downstream most) cross section river station, and then identifying the cross section river station increment values as they move upstream.

The following options are available:

  • Downstream cross section river station
    This entry defines the downstream most cross section river station and is used to determine the starting point for numbering the cross sections along the reach. This entry displays the existing downstream cross section river station of the selected river reach.
  • Decimal precision
    If this option is checked, then the adjacent spin control entry can be used to define the decimal precision that will be used in determining the cross section river stations.
  • Cross section river stationing
    This subsection defines how the cross section river stations are to increase in value as they move up the river reach. The following options are available:
    1. Fixed increment
      This radio button option causes the cross section river stations to increase by a fixed amount.
    2. Channel flow length
      This radio button option causes the cross section river stations to increase by the channel flow length from the previous (downstream) cross section river station. The adjacent dropdown combo box has Feet and Miles entries for US project units and Meters and Kilometers for metric project units.

Once the options are defined, click the [OK] button, and the software will reverse the direction of the selected river reach.

River System Geometry › River Reaches

Assign River Reaches Command

The Assign River Reaches command is used to manually associate, one-by-one, previously drawn polylines as river reach alignments. For example, this command can be used to assign a river reach from a stream created from the Contributing Streams command.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to use the Contributing Streams command.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign River Reaches command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the River Reaches menu item and then choose the Assign River Reaches command.
    Select the River Reaches menu item
  2. The Assign River Reaches dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign River Reaches dialog box will be displayed

The following sections describe the Assign River Reaches command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting River Reach Polyline

The Select River Reach Polyline section is used to interactively select a polyline from the Map View in order to assign it as a river reach. Click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed on the status bar, informing the user what to do next. Within the Map View, click on the downstream half of the polyline to assign it as a river reach.

After selecting a polyline, the user will be returned to the dialog box, which now shows that a polyline was selected. In addition, the software will display the assumed flow direction arrow on the polyline where the user clicked. If the river reach is assigned an incorrect flow direction, click the [Reverse Direction] button.

River Reach Specifications

This section is used to define the river name and reach name of the river reach polyline that was selected. Note that each river reach must have a unique ID, which is formed from the combination of the river name and reach name. This is how the HEC‑RAS software can correctly identify each river reach.

The River name dropdown combo box allows the user to select a previously defined river name. Clicking the dropdown combo box will show a listing of already existing river names in sorted ascending order.

To create a new river name, either select the Add New River option from the dropdown combo box listing or click the [New] button.

Click the [New] button

The dropdown combo box will change to an editable field, and the cursor will be placed into the field. The user must then enter a valid and unique river name in this field.

Enter a valid and unique river name in this field

The Reach name entry field is used to define the reach name.

Once the river reach has been defined, click the [Apply] button to assign the selected polyline as a river reach. The river reach ID will be displayed on the Map View adjacent to the assigned river reach.

River System Geometry › River Reaches

Draw River Reaches Command

The Draw River Reaches command enables the user to draw a river reach on the Map View.

From the Input ribbon menu, select the River Reaches menu item, and then choose Draw River Reaches command.

Draw-river-reaches-command-image.png

Selecting this command will display the Draw River Reaches dialog box.

Draw-river-reaches-command-image-1.png

The following sections are used to define data when drawing river reaches.

Draw River Reach Polyline

This section is used to interactively draw a polyline on the Map View in order to assign it as a river reach. Click on the [Draw] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed at the status line, informing the user what to do next. Within the Map View, draw a polyline along the river in a downstream direction.

After the river reach polyline has been drawn, right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu or press the [Enter] key. The software will then return the user to the dialog box showing that a river reach polyline has been drawn.

The river reach flow direction is defined by starting at the upstream end and then progressing in a downstream direction. A flow directional arrow is shown at the center of the river reach to show the assigned flow direction. If the river reach is accidentally drawn in an upstream direction, click on the [Reverse Direction] button.

Note that the Create curvilinear polyline checkbox option can be used to create a more natural looking river reach. The software will fit a cubic spline through the digitized points, as shown below.

NaturalCubicSpline-600x354-1.png

While digitizing the river reach polyline, the user can interactively toggle between linear (straight line) and curvilinear digitizing by holding down the [Ctrl] key. This provides more control over the placement of the river reach polyline when additional detail is needed.

River Reach Specifications

This section is used to define the river name and reach name of the river reach that was digitized. Note that each river reach must have a unique ID, which is formed from the combination of the river name and reach name. This is how the HEC‑RAS software can correctly identify each river reach.

The river name dropdown combo box can be used to select from an existing river name or to create a new river name.

Draw-river-reaches-command-image-2.png

To create a new river name, either select the Add New River entry from the dropdown combo box listing or click the [New] button. The software will then provide an empty field to define the new river name.

River System Geometry › River Junctions

Draw and Assign River Junctions Command

River junctions are defined as locations where two or more river reaches join together or split apart.

In GeoHECRAS, river junctions can be defined by either drawing or assigning nodes on the Map View using the following commands:

  • Draw River Junctions
  • Assign River Junctions

Drawing/Assigning River Junctions

The Draw/Assign River Junctions command allows the user to manually draw/assign multiple nodes on the Map View as river junctions, one after another until completed.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw/Assign River Junctions command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the River Reaches dropdown menu and then choose the Draw/Assign River Junctions command.
    Draw/Assign River Junctions input ribbon menu command
  2. The following dialog boxes will be displayed.
    • Draw River Junctions:
      Draw River Junctions dialog box
    • Assign River Junctions:
      Assign River Junctions dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Draw and Assign River Junctions command and interact with the above dialog boxes.

Drawing River Junctions

Drawing River Junction Node

The River Junction Node section is used to manually draw nodes on the Map View as river junctions. The user can draw the river junctions either before or after the river reaches have been created. However, it is generally better to place the river junctions first, and then connect the river reaches to the junctions.

To draw a river junction node, follow the steps below:

  1. Click the [Draw] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    [Draw] button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt you to select a river junction node location on the Map View. Click on the Map View to place the river junction node. To abort the draw command, press the [Esc] key.
    Map view river junction node locationNotes:
    • To place the node more accurately, use the mouse roller wheel to zoom into a specific location.
    • The Snap Mode option can be enabled to cause the drawn river junction to snap to the nearest HEC-RAS element.
  3. Following placement of a river junction, the Draw River Junctions dialog box will be redisplayed, and the River junction node read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    River junction node read-only field

Assigning River Junctions

Selecting River Junction Node

The Select River Junction Node section can be used to manually assign previously drawn nodes on the Map View as river junctions. Note that at least three river reaches must be connected to the node to be assigned as river junctions.

To select river junction nodes, follow the steps below:

  1. Click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    [Pick] button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt you to select a node from the Map View as a river junction. Click on the previously drawn junction node on the Map View to select it.
    Map view river junction node location
  3. Following the selection of a junction node, the Assign River Junctions dialog box will be redisplayed, and the River junction node read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.
    River junction node read-only field

Note that if a river junction node has been preselected before running this command, the River junction node read-only field will be shown selected on opening the Assign River Junctions command.

Junction Specifications

This section is common to both the Draw River Junctions and Assign River Junctions dialog boxes and is used to specify the data for each drawn/assigned river junction.

Junction Specifications section

The following data are provided in this section:

  • River junction name
    This entry field allows the user to provide the river junction name. Note that the river junction name must be unique. Otherwise, the Duplicate Junction Name dialog box will be displayed.
    Duplicate Junction Name dialog boxTo abort the rename operation, press the [Esc] key.
  • Steady flow computation mode
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the computational method to be used at the junction when performing steady flow hydraulic computations. The following methods are available in the dropdown combo box.
    Steady flow computation mode dropdown combo boxTo learn more about the methods available in the dropdown combo box, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Unsteady flow computational mode
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the computational method to be used at the junction when performing unsteady flow hydraulic computations. The following methods are available in the dropdown combo box.
    Unsteady flow computation mode dropdown combo boxTo learn more about the methods available in the dropdown combo box, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Description
    The Description box allows the user to describe the location of the river junction in more detail.

Junction Type

The dialog box automatically defines the types of river junctions of the selected node. The software automatically determines the type of junction based upon the number of river reaches that are connected to the node, as well as the direction of the river reaches. The user cannot override the selected junction type radio button option.

The following types of junctions are available in the dialog box:

Undefined Junction

This radio button selection section defines the junction as undefined when the following conditions have not been met:

  • Three or more river reaches connecting to the junction node.
  • Only one river reach pointing downstream towards or downstream from the junction node.
Undefined Junction radio button section

Confluence Junction

This radio button selection section defines data for river confluences, where rivers combine flow into a single reach. This junction type requires the following conditions to be met:

  • Three or more river reaches connected to the junction node.
  • One river reach pointing downstream from the junction node.

The following data correspond to this radio button selection section.

Confluence Junction radio button section

To learn more about this section, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Split Flow Junction

This radio button selection section is used to define data for split flow diversions, where a river splits into two (or more) river reaches. This junction type requires the following conditions to be met:

  • Three or more river reaches connecting to the junction node.
  • One river reach pointing downstream towards the junction node.

The following data corresponds to this radio button selection section:

Split Flow Junction radio button section

To learn more about this section, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

River System Geometry › River Junctions

River Junction Data Command

The River Junction Data command allows the user to define/edit attribute data for river reaches.

Follow the steps below to use the River Junction Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the River Reaches dropdown menu and select the River Junction Data command.
    River Junction Data Input ribbon menu command
    Alternatively, the user can double-click the river junction node on the Map View to open the River Junction Data command.
  2. The River Junction Data dialog box will be displayed.
    River Junction Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the River Junction Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Junction Specifications

This section allows the user to define the river reach data for the selected river junction.

Junction Specifications section

The following data are provided in this section:

  • River junction node
    This dropdown combo box lists the river junctions already defined in the model. The user can select a desired river junction node to edit.

    Click the [Pick] button to directly select a river junction from the Map View. On clicking the [Pick] button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear and the user will be prompted to select the river junction from the Map View. After selecting the river junction, the user will be returned to the dialog box with the river junction selected. To abort the selection process, press the [Esc] key or right-click and choose Cancel from the displayed context menu.

    Note that if the user opens the River Junction Data dialog box by double-clicking the river junction on Map View, then that river junction will be selected by default.

    Click the pencil icon to rename the selected river junction. Note that the river junction name must be unique. Otherwise, the Duplicate Junction Name dialog box will be displayed with the following message:

    Duplicate Junction Name dialog box


    To abort the rename operation, press the [Esc] key.

  • Steady flow computation mode
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the computational method to be used at the junction when performing steady flow hydraulic computations. The following methods are available in the dropdown combo box:
    Steady flow computation mode dropdown combo box
    1. Energy Equation
      This method is used to model the water surface profile at a river junction. The energy equation does not consider the angle of the tributary entering or leaving the main channel. In most situations, the amount of energy loss due to the angle of the tributary flow is insignificant and hence this is the preferred computational approach to use. By default, this method is shown selected in the dropdown combo box.
    2. Momentum Equation
      This method is used to consider the angle of the tributary entering or leaving the main channel. In situations where the angle of the tributary can cause significant energy losses, the momentum equation is the more appropriate computational approach to use.

      When this computational method is selected, an additional Angle (deg) column will be available in the Confluence Junction and Split Flow Junction sections data table. This column is used to enter the angle of the tributary relative to the main river. For river reaches that are considered to be the main channel, the angle should be left at 0.

      In addition, the following checkbox options get enabled on selecting the Momentum Equation method:

      Include friction component and Include weight component checkboxes


      The Include friction component checkbox option is used to include the friction force component in the momentum equation. By default, this checkbox option is checked.

      The Include weight component checkbox option is used to include the weight component in the momentum equation. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked.

  • Unsteady flow computational mode
    This dropdown combo box is used to select the computational method to be used at the junction when performing unsteady flow hydraulic computations. The following methods are available in the dropdown combo box:
    Unsteady flow computational mode dropdown combo box
    1. Force Equal WSEL
      This method makes some simplifying assumptions for the unsteady state hydraulics at the junction. If the junction is a normal flow combining junction, then all cross sections that bound the junction are given the same water surface elevation during a time step, based upon the computed water surface elevation at the downstream side of the junction. This simplifying assumption requires that the cross sections be placed fairly close together around the junction, depending upon the slope of the stream. If the cross sections are spaced too far apart, then model stability problems may arise. By default, this method is shown selected in the dropdown combo box.
    2. Energy Balance
      This method performs an energy balance across the junction to compute the water surface elevation, rather than forcing the water surface elevations to be the same. It is useful when junction reach lengths are fairly lengthy or when the river reach has a moderate to a steep slope.
  • Description
    This entry field allows the user to describe the location of the river junction in more detail.

Junction Type

The dialog box automatically defines the types of river junctions of the selected node. The software determines the type of junction based upon the number of river reaches that are connected to the node, as well as the direction of the river reaches. The user cannot override the selected junction type radio button option.

The following types of junctions are available in the dialog box:

Undefined Junction

This radio button selection section defines the junction as undefined when the following conditions have not been met:

  • Three or more river reaches connected to the junction node
  • Only one river reach pointing downstream towards or downstream from the junction node
Undefined Junction radio button section

Confluence Junction

This radio button selection section defines data for river confluences, where rivers combine flow into a single reach. This junction type requires the following conditions to be met:

  • Three or more river reaches connected to the junction node
  • One river reach pointing downstream from the junction node

The following data corresponds to this radio button selection section:

Confluence Junction radio button section
  • Upstream reaches
    The Upstream reaches contain a table listing the upstream river reaches that contribute flow to the confluence. Each row in the table has read-only fields that show a contributing river reach. However, for each river reach, the flow distance from the cross section upstream of the junction and to the cross section downstream of the junction can be defined. In addition, when using the Momentum Equation method in the Steady flow computation method dropdown, the flow angle the river reach makes to the main river channel needs to be defined.

    The user can click the [Compute] button to automatically compute junction flow lengths when inserting a junction into the middle of an existing river reach or digitizing a new reach into the middle of an existing river reach.
  • Downstream river & reach
    This read-only field lists the downstream river reach.

Split Flow Junction

This radio button selection section is used to define data for split flow diversions, where a river splits into two (or more) river reaches. This junction type requires the following conditions to be met:

  • Three or more river reaches connected to the junction node
  • One river reach pointing downstream towards the junction node

The following data corresponds to this radio button selection section:

Split Flow Junction radio button section
  • Upstream river & reach
    This read-only field lists the upstream river reach.
  • Downstream reaches
    The Downstream reaches contain a table listing the downstream river reaches that split flow away from the junction. Each row in the table has read-only fields that show a split flow river reach. However, for each river reach, the flow distance from the cross section upstream of the junction and to the cross section downstream of the junction needs to be defined. In addition, when using the Momentum Equation method in the Steady flow computation method dropdown, the flow angle the split flow river reach makes to the main river channel needs to be defined.

    The user can click the [Compute] button to automatically compute junction flow lengths when inserting a junction into the middle of an existing river reach or digitizing a new reach into the middle of an existing river reach.

  • Balance (optimize) steady flow diversions
    This checkbox option causes the HEC-RAS steady flow analysis to balance the flow between the downstream river reaches. It optimizes the amount of flow in the river reach until the computed energy grade elevation for the cross sections just downstream of the junction is within a specified tolerance (0.02 ft.). By default, this checkbox option is unchecked.
River System Geometry › Flow Lengths

Edit Flow Lengths Command

In GeoHECRAS, the Edit Flow Lengths command allows the user to view and edit flow lengths of a river reach measured between cross sections (or river stations). These flow lengths are defined for the left overbank, channel, and right overbank.

Note: For a specific river reach, the flow lengths for the left overbank, channel, and the right overbank are defined in the Geometry Data dropdown panel of the Cross Section Data dialog box. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Cross Section Data command in GeoHECRAS.

Cross Section Data dialog box

Typically, the channel flow length is measured along the thalweg, while the overbank flow lengths are measured along the anticipated flow paths of the center of mass of the overbank.

Although the three flow lengths are often similar, they can vary significantly in cases such as river bends or meandering channels. In such conditions, a discharged weighted flow length is determined based on the discharges in the main channel and left and right overbank segments of the river reach.

Follow the steps below to use the Edit Flow Lengths command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Cross Sections dropdown menu and select the Edit Flow Lengths command.
    Edit Flow Lengths command
  2. The Edit Flow Lengths dialog box will be displayed.
    Edit Flow Lengths dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the Edit Flow Lengths dialog box.

Downstream Flow Length Data

The Downstream Flow Length Data section allows the user to select the river and the corresponding reach for editing flow lengths.

Follow the steps below to manually select the river and reach to be assigned for editing flow lengths:

  1. Click on the River dropdown combo box and select the river to be assigned for purposes of editing the flow length.
    River dropdown combo box
  2. Then, click the Reach dropdown combo box and select the corresponding reach to be assigned for editing the flow length.
    Reach dropdown combo box
    Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to select the river and reach from the Map View, as shown below.
    [Pick] button
    The Edit Flow Lengths dialog box will temporarily disappear, allowing the user to select the river reach from the Map View. After selecting the river reach, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The dialog box will be redisplayed with the river and reach shown as selected in the respective dropdown combo boxes.

    Notes:

    • If a river reach is preselected from the Map View prior to running this command, then the selected river reach will be displayed in the River and Reach dropdown combo boxes.
    • If the model contains a single river and reach, they will be automatically selected in the River and Reach dropdown combo boxes.

Downstream Flow Length Data Table

The Downstream Flow Length Data section contains a table that lists all the corresponding cross sections of the selected river reach, along with their left overbank, channel, and right overbank flow length values.

Downstream Flow Length Data Table

Note that structures such as culverts, lateral structures, and roadway crossings falling within the reach are identified in the Type column, as shown below. In addition, the corresponding Left, Right, and Channel flow length values will be disabled.

Type column

The right-click context menu of the data grid displays the commands to cut, copy, and paste data to and from the Windows clipboard. In addition, the user can export the grid data to Excel or PDF format and delete the grid data.

Right-click context menu commands

Selected Cells Group Editing

This section allows the user to edit the downstream flow length data in the Downstream Flow Length Data summary table (described above).

Selected Cells Group Editing section

Follow the steps below to update the downstream flow length data:

  1. Select the cell in the Downstream Flow Length Data table whose data is to be updated. Hold down the [Ctrl] key to select multiple cells.
  2. After selecting the desired cell(s) to be updated, use one of the following options:
    • No change
      This is the default option. This radio button option will not make any changes to the selected cell’s value.
    • Add constant
      This radio button option adds a constant value to the selected cell’s value. After selecting this option, enter the constant value (to be added to the selected cell’s value) into the adjacent entry field.
    • Multiply by factor
      This radio button option multiplies the selected cell’s value by a user-defined number. After selecting this option, enter the value (to be multiplied by the selected cell’s value) into the adjacent entry field.
    • Apply value
      This radio button option replaces the selected cell’s value with the user-defined value. After selecting this option, enter the value (to be replaced with the selected cell’s value) into the adjacent entry field.
  3. Click the [Apply Change] button to apply the defined downstream flow length adjustment. Note that the [Apply Change] button is disabled when the No Change radio button option is selected.

When all the downstream flow length information is updated in the Downstream Flow Length Data table, click the [OK] button to save the changes.

River System Geometry › Flow Lengths

Assign Flow Lengths Command

In GeoHECRAS, the Assign Flow Lengths command is used to manually associate previously drawn polylines as left and right overbank flow lengths as well as the (optional) channel flow length. This article describes how to use the Assign Flow Lengths command.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Flow Lengths command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Assign Entities dropdown menu and then select the Assign Flow Lengths command.
    Assign Flow Lengths Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Assign Flow Lengths dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign Flow Lengths dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Cross Sections

The Select Cross Sections section provides a table listing the cross sections contained within the project. This section allows the user to select which cross sections are to be assigned as channel and overbank flow lengths.

By default, no cross sections are selected. Clicking the [Select All] button causes all cross sections to be selected. Clicking the [Clear All] button will cause all cross sections to be deselected. In addition, the user can manually select from the table the cross sections that are to be assigned as channel and overbank flow lengths.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to interactively select the cross sections from the Map View. The dialog box will temporarily disappear. Select either cross sections one by one or click on the river reach and all associated cross sections will be selected from the Map View. After selecting the cross sections, press the Enter key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The Assign Flow Lengths dialog box will be redisplayed and the total number of selected cross sections will be shown in the Total selected read-only field as shown below.

Total selected read-only field

Note that if a cross section is already selected on the Map View prior to running this command, the same cross section will be shown selected within the table as well as in the Total selected read-only field.

Selecting Junctions

The Select Junctions section provides a table listing the river junctions contained within the project. This section allows the user to select the river junction(s) to compute the flow lengths.

By default, no river junctions are selected. Clicking the [Select All] button causes all river junctions to be selected. Clicking the [Clear All] button will cause all river junctions to be deselected. In addition, the user can manually select from the table the river junctions that are to be updated flow lengths.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to interactively select the river junctions from the Map View. After selecting the river junction, press the Enter key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The Assign Flow Lengths dialog box will be redisplayed and the total number of selected river junctions will be displayed in the read-only field as shown below.

Select Junctions section

Note that if a river junction is already selected on the Map View prior to running this command, the same river junction will be shown selected within the table.

Selecting Flow Length Polylines

The Select Flow Length Polylines section allows the user to interactively select polyline(s) on the Map View to be associated as flow lengths.

Select Flow Length Polylines section

This section requires the following data:

  • Overbank flow length polylines
    This read-only field allows the user to select the left and/or right overbank flow length polylines from the Map View. Click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select overbank flow length polylines from the Map View. After selecting the overbank polylines, press the Enter key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The Assign Flow Lengths dialog box will be redisplayed and the total number of selected polylines will be displayed in the read-only field.
    Overbank flow length polylines read-only field
  • Channel flow length polylines
    This checkbox entry controls whether channel flow lengths are defined from the Map View. By default, this checkbox is checked. Click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select channel flow length polylines from the Map View. After selecting the channel flow length polylines, press the Enter key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The Assign Flow Lengths dialog box will be redisplayed and the total number of selected channel flow length polylines will be displayed in the read-only field.
    Channel flow length polylines read-only field

The user can click the [Clear] buttons to cancel any previous selection and redo the entire process.

Additional Options

This section contains the Assign channel flow lengths to undefined overbank flow lengths checkbox option. This checkbox option is used to assign the channel flow length to the adjacent overbanks if the flow lengths are not already defined. By default, this checkbox option is checked.

Assigning Flow Lengths

After defining all the required data, click the [OK] button. The software will then assign polylines as cross section channel and overbank flow lengths.

River System Geometry › River Stations

Edit River Stations, Node Names & Descriptions Command

The Edit River Stations, Node Names & Descriptions command allows the user to edit the cross sections river stationing, associated node names, and description for single/multiple reaches along a river and computes new river stationing using a defined flow length.

Follow the steps below to use the Edit River Stations, Node Names & Descriptions command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Cross Sections dropdown menu and select the Edit River Stations, Node Names & Descriptions command.
    Edit River Stations, Node Names & Descriptions Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Edit River Stations, Node Names & Descriptions dialog box will be displayed.
    Edit River Stations, Node Names & Descriptions dialog box

The following sections describe the Edit River Stations, Node Names & Descriptions command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting River Reaches

The Select River Reaches panel is used to select single or multiple reaches along a river that define the river path.

Selecting Single River Reach

The Select Single River Reach radio button section allows the user to select the river and the reach that make up a river path. Note that this radio button section is selected by default when the dialog box is displayed.

If the model contains a single river and reach, then that particular river and reach will automatically be selected in the River and Reach dropdown combo boxes. If the model contains multiple rivers and reaches, then the user can select the desired river and reach from the River and Reach dropdown combo boxes.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the river and the reach from the Map View. Clicking on the [Pick] button causes the dialog box to temporarily disappear, prompting the user to select the river reach from the Map View. After selecting a river reach, the dialog box will be redisplayed with the river reach shown as selected. The selected river reach is highlighted on the Map View. To abort the selection process, the user can press the [Esc] key or right-click and select Cancel from the displayed context menu.

Selecting Multiple (Interconnected) River Reaches

The Select Multiple (Interconnected) River Reaches radio button section is used to sequentially number cross sections and (by option) junctions along a set of selected river reaches that are connected end-to-end with each other. This section allows the user to select multiple reaches defined in the project that make up the river path.

This section has a table that lists all river reaches defined in the project. The user can select the desired river reach by checking the checkboxes available in the Reach column corresponding to each river name available in the River column that defines the river path. By default, all reaches are unchecked.

The user can click the [Select All] button to select all river reaches listed in the table that define the river path.

The user can click the [Clear All] button to cancel all the reaches selected in the table and redo the entire process.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the most downstream and upstream river reach on the Map View and the software will automatically determine the connected reaches between them that make up the river path. On clicking the [Pick] button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear, prompting the user to select the most downstream and upstream river reach on the Map View. Once finished, the user can press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected river reaches will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.

Select Multiple (Interconnected) River Reaches radio button section

Notes:

  • The user can select multiple reaches from the Map View prior to running the Edit River Stations, Node Names & Descriptions command by holding the [Ctrl] key while selecting the desired river reaches,
  • Only those river reaches that contain irregular cross sections are listed.
  • Multiple river reaches that reference the same irregular cross section geometry are not listed.

Manual Cross Section River Stationing

This section contains a table that allows the user to manually edit the cross section river stationing, associated node names, and descriptions along with computing new river stationing using defined flow lengths for the selected river reach.

The first two columns of the table identify the river and the reach. The remaining portion of the table displays significant information, including the type of river station, original river station, channel flow distance in feet and meters, new river stations, node names, and description of the river station.

In addition, the data in the cross section river stationing table can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document by using the Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF commands from the right-click context menu.

Manual Cross Section River Stationing section

Defining River Stationing

The Define River Stationing panel allows the user to number the cross section river stationing based upon river chainage or incrementally.

Define River Stationing panel

Reference Cross Section Selection

This section allows the user to select the reference cross section that will be used for computing river stationing for all other cross sections. The following options are provided:

  • Downstream most cross section
    This radio button option causes the downstream most cross section to be used as a reference cross section for computing river stationing for all other cross sections.
  • User selected cross section
    This radio button option allows the user to select the reference cross section from the Map View that will be used for computing river stationing for all other cross sections. The user can click the [Pick] button to select the reference cross section on the Map View.

Reference Cross Section River Station

This section allows the user to measure downstream reach distance in order to assign it as the most downstream cross section river station. The following options are provided:

  • User defined
    This radio button option allows the user to measure downstream reach distance from the Map View in order to assign it as the most downstream cross section river station. The user can click the [Pick] button to measure the downstream reach distance from the Map View.
  • User river reach downstream length
    This radio button option causes the software to use the default river reach downstream length provided in the read-only field in order to assign it as the downstream most cross section river station.

Cross Section River Stationing

This section is used to define how the cross section river stations are to increase in value as they move up the river reach. The following options are provided:

  • Fixed increment
    This radio button option causes the cross section river stations to increase by a fixed value.
  • Channel flow length
    This radio button option causes the cross section river stations to increase by an increment represented by the channel flow length from the previous (downstream) cross section river station. The user can select miles or feet when working in US units, or kilometers or meters when working in metric (SI) units as units of measure for computing the cross section river station from the Channel flow length dropdown combo box.
  • Decimal precision
    This spin control allows the user to define the decimal precision used in determining the cross section river stations. By default, the spin control uses a value of 0. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 0 to 6.

Renumber Connected Junctions

The Renumber connected junctions checkbox option is used to list the junctions in the table. By default, this checkbox is unchecked.

Convert Interpolated ‘*’ Cross Sections to Georeferenced

The Converted interpolated ‘*’ cross section to georeferenced checkbox option is used to convert the interpolated cross sections to georeferenced. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked.

Previewing New River Station

Clicking on the [Preview] button causes the software to display the station suggestion to the user in the New River Station column of the Manual Cross Section River Stationing data grid. This allows the user to apply defined cross section river stationing to the selected river reach.

[Preview] button for previewing new river station

When all the option has been properly defined in the Edit River Stations, Node Names & Descriptions dialog box, click the [Apply] button. The software will then assign the user-defined changes to the cross section river stations along a defined flow path. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.

Note that when the user clicks the [Preview] button and then navigates to select a different river reach or clicks the [Close] button without applying the changes, the Revise River Stationing confirmational dialog box will be displayed.

Revise River Stationing confirmational dialog box

Clicking on the [Assign] button will apply the user-defined changes to the river station.

Clicking on the [Discard] button will discard the user-defined changes and allows the user to redo the process.

River System Geometry › Channel Modification & Stream Restoration

River Channel Modification Command

The River Channel Modification command allows the user to define a trapezoidal cut into the existing channel geometry or create a new channel geometry. In order to perform a channel modification analysis, a hydraulic model of the existing river reach is required. Once the model is complete, channel modifications can be made to perform trapezoidal cuts and fill into the existing geometry. The user can see a profile view of the channel modification along the river, and can either draw the channel bottom, define a channel bottom slope to use, or instruct the software to interpolate the channel bottom between selected cross sections. In addition, the user can specify that the channel modification follow along the existing river centerline or select a new alignment polyline to use—for example, when performing stream channel restoration back to a sinuous river path.

River channel overview

After the changes have been added to the river channel, a HEC-RAS analysis can be performed to see what effect these changes have on the computed water surface elevation, depth of flow, velocity, and shear stress. This command can be used when performing stable channel design and for fish waterway and passage design.

Follow the steps below to use the River Channel Modification command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Cross Sections menu item, and then select the River Channel Modification command.
    Cross sections menu item
  2. The River Channel Modification dialog box will be displayed.
    River channel modification dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting River Reach Segment

This section is used to define the river and the reach for performing channel modifications. Follow these steps:

  1. Click on the River dropdown combo box and then select the river for performing channel modifications.
    River name dropdown
  2. If there are multiple reaches for the selected river, click on the Reach dropdown combo box and then select the reach for performing channel modifications.
    Reach name dropdown

Alternatively, click on the [Pick] button and the River Channel Modification dialog box will temporarily disappear. The software will then prompt the user to select the river reach from the Map View. After selecting a river reach, the River Channel Modification dialog box will redisplay with the river reach shown as selected.

In addition, a graphical plotting is provided that displays a longitudinal view of the river reach and the modified river reach.

Channel Modification Editing

This section allows parameters to be defined for performing channel modifications and for creating a new channel template. This includes the modification method and respective parameters for defining channel inverts over a range of cross sections as well as the parameters to define a trapezoidal cut for the selected cross sections. The following optional tabs are available:

  • Draw Invert: This section allows for the drawing of channel inverts (channel bottom) along the existing river reach. Click the [Draw] button, and then draw channel inverts on the graphical plot available under the Select River Reach Segment section. Then, right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The software will then compute the required channel invert.
    Selecting river reach segment
  • Project Slope: This section allows the user to define a new channel bottom slope using one of the following methods:
    • Specific invert elevations can be defined for each of the cross sections in the selected cross section range.
    • The user can enter an elevation for the most downstream cross section and request that the invert elevations for the other cross sections be computed by projecting cuts on a constant slope upstream.
    • The elevation entered can be applied to the most upstream cross section of the range, and all others will be computed by projecting a user specified slope downstream.

      Follow the steps below to define a new channel bottom slope:
    1. Click the Downstream cross section dropdown combo box and then select the cross section that will be used as the downstream most river station for applying channel invert.
      Downstream cross section dropdown
    2. Click the Upstream cross section dropdown combo box and then select the cross section that will be used as the upstream most river station for applying channel invert.
      Upstream cross section dropdown
    3. Define the Channel invert elevation.
      Channel invert elevation
    4. In the Invert options section, select the desired option for applying the invert elevation for each of the cross sections within the selected range.
      Invert options section
    5. Click the [Apply] button.
  • Interpolate Invert: This section allows invert elevations to be defined for the downstream most and the upstream most cross sections, and then automatically interpolates invert elevations for all the cross sections within the selected range.

    Follow the steps below to interpolate invert elevations:
    1. Click the Downstream cross section dropdown combo box and then select the cross section that will be used as the downstream most river station for applying channel invert.
    2. Click the Upstream cross section dropdown combo box and then select the cross section that will be used as the upstream most river station for applying channel invert.
    3. Define the Downstream XS channel invert elevation and the Upstream XS channel invert elevation.
      Define channel invert
    4. Click the [Apply] button.
  • Channel Template: This section allows for the defining of trapezoidal cuts into the existing channel geometry and then applies these specifications to all cross sections within the selected range.

    Follow the steps below to define the channel template:
    1. Click the Downstream cross section dropdown combo box and then select the cross section that will be used as the downstream most river station for applying channel modification.
    2. Click the Upstream cross section dropdown combo box and then select the cross section that will be used as the upstream most river station for applying channel modification.
    3. Specify Channel bottom width to represent the bottom width of the trapezoidal cuts.
    4. Specify Channel Manning’s n value to represent the new Manning’s n value to be applied to each of the trapezoidal cuts.
      Channel Manning’s value
    5. In the Top of channel (bank station) placement section, select one of the following radio button options:
      • Channel side slope (V:H): This option allows defining a vertical versus horizontal channel side slope for both the left and the right riverbank stations.
      • Channel bankfull top width: This option sets the left and right bank stations at a distance equal to the channel bankfull top width. The user can simply enter the channel bankfull top width or click the […] button and interactively measure the bankfull top width from the map view.
      • Match existing bank stations: This option automatically places the modified bank stations exactly at the spots where existing channel bank stations lie.
    6. Enter the Channel depth value.
      Channel depth value
    7. By default, the Fill channel below template checkbox option is checked. If checked, the option will fill the main channel of the cross section before applying the channel template.
    8. After the options for channel modification have been defined, click the [Apply] button and the software will create a new modified channel geometry.

Channel Modification Data

This section contains a table that displays a summary of all modifications that will be made to the selected river reach when the new geometry is created. Any update in the modification data is automatically reflected in the table.

Selected Cells Group Editing

This section allows for rapid enter/edit of the channel modification data in the modification summary table (described above).

Follow the steps below to update the channel modification data:

  1. Select desired cells in the channel modification table.
  2. Click the Define change dropdown combo box and then select one of the options for updating the cells value and enter the change coefficient. The following options are available:
    • Add Constant: This option adds a constant value to the selected cells value.
    • Multiply By Factor: This option multiples a user-defined number to the selected cells value.
    • Apply Value: This option replaces the selected cells value with the user-specified value.
      Apply value
  3. Click the [Apply Change] button.

Selected Channel Template Centerline (Optional)

By default, the channel modifications are applied based on the existing river centerline. However, this section allows the user to interactively select a new alignment polyline to use for channel modification. This option is useful when performing stream channel restoration back to a sinuous, pre-channelized path. Click on the [Pick] button adjacent to the Select channel center polyline entry and select the new alignment polyline from the Map View.

Select channel center polyline entry

After the options for channel modification have been defined, click the [Apply] button, and the software will create a new modified channel geometry.

River System Geometry › Channel Modification & Stream Restoration

Stream Restoration & Channel Stabilization Modeling using HEC-RAS

Many streams and rivers require restoration and/or stabilization measures due to urbanization impacts associated with the watershed.

Stream restoration is used to improve the environmental health of the river or stream. This process aims to restore the natural state and functioning of the river system to support biodiversity, recreation, flood management, and landscape development.

Channel stabilization incorporates natural channel design principles to construct stream improvements with natural elements and vegetation to help stabilize the open channel streams and ditches so that they are non-erosive and self-maintaining.

Kinnickinnic-River-1.png


Figure #1: A side by side comparison of the Kinnickinnic River in Northwest Wisconsin, before and after stream restoration efforts

Stream restoration and channel stabilization can be achieved using both structural and non-structural measures. If in-stream structures are designed and constructed properly, they can provide the following benefits:

  • Channel Bed/Bank and Floodplain Scour Protection
  • Improved Hydraulic Conveyance
  • Effective Sediment Transport
  • Habitat Creation or Enhancement
  • Nutrient Processing
  • Biogeochemical Processing
  • Utility/Infrastructure Protection
  • Aesthetic Enhancements/Blending into the Existing Landscape

This article describes the in-stream structures most commonly used for stream restoration and channel stabilization as well as how to analyze these structures using HEC-RAS.

Stream Restoration and Channel Stabilization Techniques

A wide variety of strategies and methodologies are implemented in stream restoration projects. Stream stabilization techniques, including in-stream structures, typically are designed based upon the bankfull geomorphic condition. This is the condition that represents the average morphological characteristics (dimension, pattern, and profile) of a channel that are most critical in long-term channel maintenance.

Some practitioners focus on rigid structures, constructed of concrete and quarried rock, while others prefer natural materials. The major structures that are likely to be useful in stream restoration and stabilization are described briefly below.

Spur Dikes

A spur dike can be defined as an elongated obstruction having one end on the stream bank and the other end projecting into the stream channel. It may be permeable, allowing water to pass through it at a reduced velocity, or it may be impermeable, completely blocking the flow. Spur dikes may be constructed of permanent materials such as masonry, concrete, or earth and stone; semi-permanent materials such as steel or timber sheet piling, gabions, or timber fencing; or temporary material such as weighted brushwood fascines. Spur dikes may be built at right angles to the bank or current or angled upstream or downstream. Two to five structures are typically placed in a series along a straight or convex bank line where the flow lines are roughly parallel to the bank. The effect of the spur dike is to reduce the current along the streambank, thereby reducing the erosive potential of the stream and in some cases inducing sedimentation between dikes. These structures are used to control natural meandering at a river bend, to channelize wide rivers, and to convert poorly defined streams into well-defined channels.

Spur-Dikes.png


Figure #2: Spur Dikes

Bendway Weir

A bendway weir is an installed spur, intended to be overtopped by design discharges. They extend linearly from the outside of a bank, either perpendicular to flow or angled slightly upstream, and are comprised of short riprap or other angular material sized to resist transport for a design discharge. They are designed to control and redirect currents through a bend and immediately downstream of the bend. Their purpose is to deflect high velocity near-bed flow away from the outer bank, inhibit helical secondary current motion in the bend, and redistribute momentum near the outer bank. They reduce near-bank velocity by redirecting the current and adding form roughness along the bank. Bendway weirs should consist of a filter fabric layer for preventing soil movement into and through the feature, undermining its footing, and a series of barbs or spurs of angular stone material. Bendway weirs differ from spurs and vanes (barbs) in that they capture the flow field and redirect flows away from the bank.

Bendway-Weirs.png


Figure #3: Bendway Weirs

Vanes or Barbs

Vanes are a subcategory of barbs. They are discontinuous, transverse structures angled into the flow. They are implemented with an upstream orientation of 20 to 30 degrees from the tangent to the bank line, have a crest elevation at or just below the bankfull elevation, and sloped at 2 to 7 degrees dip towards the tip. Dip angle increases with increasing stream slope and bed material size. In-stream tips of vanes are usually low enough to be overtopped by nearly all flows. Vanes can be constructed of either rock and/or logs. They can be used for bank protection, as well as for providing variable depth and velocity that can benefit aquatic organisms. Vanes redirect flow, provide toe protection, reduce local bank erosion, and result in bed scour downstream of the axis of the vane and near their tips.

Cross-Vanes-min-1024x423-1.png


Figure #4: Cross Vanes

J-Hook Vane

J-Hook vane is a single arm, low profile vane structure that directs flow away from the stream banks. It decreases the velocity, shear stress, and stream power in the near bank region while creating habitat by encouraging pool development through flow variability. The J-Hook vane is generally built on the outside of the meander bends and consists of angular and blocky rocks placed in such a way that the shape resembles the letter ‘J’. The arms occupy one-third of the bankfull channel width, and the ‘hook’ occupies one-third of the bankfull channel width. J-Hook vanes are well suited for lower gradient stream systems. It should be avoided in bedrock channels or highly unstable streambeds and deeply incised and entrenched channels.

J-Hoke-Vane.png


Figure #5: J-Hoke Vane

Defining Flow Training Structures in a HEC-RAS 2D Model

2D flow training structures can be defined by manually drawing/assigning the polylines on the Map View using the Draw 2D Flow Training Structures and Assign 2D Flow Training Structures commands. To learn more about these commands, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Incorporating the Flow Training Structures into the 2D Mesh

After the flow training structures have been defined, the software will stamp them into the 2D mesh and refine the mesh to account for each flow training structure shape. Follow these steps:

  1. From the Map View, double-click on the 2D mesh. This will display the 2D Flow Area Data dialog box.
  2. Click the [Update] button.
    Draw-2D-Flow-Training-Structures-dialog-box-KB-3
  3. The software will incorporate the 2D flow training structures into the 2D mesh. Flow training structure in 2D view mode
    Figure #6: Flow training structure in 2D view mode
    Flow-training-structure-in-3D-view-mode.png
    Figure #7: Flow training structure in 3D view mode
Cross Sections › Creation & Drawing

Draw Cross Sections Command Shortcut (Ctrl+D Keypress)

The Draw Cross Sections Command shortcut (Ctrl+D Keypress) allows the user to draw the cross sections directly on the Map View without having to interact with the ribbon menu or Draw Cross Sections dialog box.

However, before drawing the cross sections directly on the Map View, the user is required to specify the general specifications for cutting the cross sections (i.e., terrain elevation surface, river stationing method, bank stations, etc.) in the Draw Cross Sections dialog box.

Pressing Ctrl+D on the Map View will automatically start the Draw Cross Sections command. This allows the user to quickly draw additional cross sections on the Map View.

After drawing the cross section on the Map View, the user can either press the Enter key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The software will accept the drawn cross section and then the user can immediately start drawing the next cross section on the Map View.

Shortcut-command-image.jpg

When finished drawing cross sections, the user can either press the Esc key or right-click on the Map View and choose Cancel from the displayed context menu. The user will be returned to the Draw Cross Sections dialog box. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box and end the command.

Note that the Ctrl+D keypress is ignored when other commands are active, like when the Cross Section Data dialog box is displayed.

Cross Sections › Creation & Drawing

Assigning Survey Data to Cross Sections

LiDAR has become an established method for collecting very dense and accurate elevation data across landscapes, shallow-water areas, and project sites. Many LiDAR systems operate in the near-infrared region of the electromagnetic spectrum and cannot penetrate water, as shown below. As such, the terrain model is flat in these areas.

Cannot-Penetrate-Water.png

However, some LiDAR sensors operate in the green region of the electromagnetic spectrum and can penetrate water and detect channel bottom features. These bathymetric LiDAR systems can be used in areas with relatively clear water to measure channel bed elevations. However, many times it is necessary to combine survey of airborne LiDAR (green) and sonar (red), as shown below.

Lidar-Sonar-Mapping.png

In order to reduce bathymetric survey costs, it is only necessary to field survey the river to extract channel cross sections. These channel cross sections can then be merged with overbank cross sections created from a LiDAR derived surface terrain model.

LiDAR-River-Channel-Survey.jpg

A common problem with surveyed channel cross section data is that surveyed point data do not follow precisely along a straight line across the river, but instead waiver in the X-Y plane. To solve this problem, use the Conflate Point Data command to collapse the surveyed channel cross section data to a selected cross section alignment. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about Conflate Point Data command.

Below is an example of the Conflate Point Data command using channel survey data for an existing cross section that was originally created using LIDAR data, replacing the channel geometry of the cross section.

assigning-survey-data-to-hec-ras-cross-sections
Cross Sections › Creation & Drawing

Automated Draw Cross Sections Command (HEC-RAS)

The Automated Draw Cross Sections command of GeoHECRAS software allows the user to automatically create cross sections along a river reach. The software will attempt to uniformly space cross sections along the river reach, creating cross sections that are perpendicular to the river reach. In places where adjoining cross sections might cross each other, the software will intelligently bisect the cross section point of intersection and then run the adjoining cross sections parallel to each other.

Follow the steps below to use the Automated Draw Cross Sections command in GeoHECRAS:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Cross Sections dropdown menu and then choose the Automated Draw Cross Sections command.
    Automated Draw Cross Sections input ribbon menu command
  2. The Automated Draw Cross Sections dialog box will be displayed.
    Automated Draw Cross Sections dialog box

The following sections describe the Automated Draw Cross Sections command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

River Reach Selection

This section is used to select the river reach(es) that will be used to automatically draw cross sections. The following options are provided:

  • All river reach alignments
    This option causes all the defined river reaches within a model to have cross sections created along their respective reaches. This option works well when there is only one river reach in a model and the user wants the software to immediately start creating cross sections along its length.
  • Selected river reach alignments
    This option is used to interactively select river reaches from the Map View for automatically drawing cross sections along the specified sections. Click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed on the status bar, informing the user what to do next. Within the Map View, click on river reaches to select them. When finished selecting river reaches, right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu or press the [Enter] key. The Automated Draw Cross Sections dialog box will be redisplayed, showing the number of river reach(es) selected.

Note that if river reach(es) have been preselected on the Map View before running this command, the number of selected river reach(es) will be displayed in the Selected river reach alignments read-only field.

General Settings

This tabbed panel is used to define the general settings for the cross sections to be created.

Cross Section River Stationing

This section controls the numbering of the cross section river stations. The cross section river stations need to be unique per river reach and need to increase in value as they move up the river reach. The following entries are provided:

  • Downstream cross section river station
    This entry field allows the user to define the downstream most cross section river station for each selected reach and is used to determine the starting point for numbering the cross sections along the reach. When a single river reach is selected, this field displays the existing downstream cross section river stations (if cross sections already exist in the river reach).
  • Decimal precision
    This checkbox controls whether the read-only spin control is enabled. The spin control allows the user to define the decimal precision used in determining the cross section river stations. By default, this check box is disabled (i.e., grayed out) and uses a value of 0. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 0 to 6.
  • Cross section river stationing
    This subsection is used to define how the cross section river stations are to increase in value as they move up the river reach. Two options are provided:
    1. Fixed increment
      This radio button option causes the cross section river stations to increase by a fixed value.
    2. Channel flow length
      This radio button option causes the cross section river stations to increase by an increment represented by the channel flow length from the previous (downstream) cross section river station. The user can select feet or miles as units of measure for computing the cross section river station as per the Channel flow length dropdown combo box.
      Channel flow length dropdown

Cross Section Specifications

This section is used to define the general specifications for the cross sections to be created. The following entries are provided:

  • Approximate (max) cross section spacing
    This field allows the user to define the maximum distance between cross sections when placing the cross sections. The software will attempt to uniformly space the cross sections along each river reach, up to this maximum spacing. This prevents the last cross sections created along a river reach from being spaced too close together. By default, the software uses a value of 500 feet or 150 meters. Clicking on the […] button allows the user to measure the approximate (max) cross section spacing from the Map View.
  • Cross section width
    This field allows the user to define the cross section width to be used for extracting the cross section geometry from the terrain data. However, the defined cross section width is a starting point; additional criteria are provided to control how much data is to be extracted when the user extracts the ground geometry from the terrain. By default, the software uses a value of 500 feet or 150 meters. Clicking on the […] button allows the user to measure the cross section width from the Map View.

Note that the Cross section width field is ignored if the user has enabled the Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control section from the Extraction Data panel.

Cross Section Placement

This section is used to define the placement of the cross sections along the selected river reaches. The following entries are provided:

  • Offset from junctions
    This entry field is used to define the distance from a downstream and/or upstream junction(s) where cross sections should be located. This prevents a cross section from being placed directly at a junction. By default, the software uses a value of 150 feet or 50 meters. Clicking on the […] button allows the user to measure the offset distance from the Map View.
  • New cross section placement
    This subsection is used to control how new cross sections should be placed. Two options are provided:
    1. Uniformly placed along river reach
      This radio button option is used to uniformly place new cross sections along the river reach depending on the cross section spacing specified in the Offset from junctions entry.
    2. Exactly matching specified cross sections spacing
      This radio button option is used to place new cross sections along the river reach at an exactly matching cross section spacing specified in the Offset from junctions entry.
  • Existing cross section treatment
    This subsection is used to control how existing cross sections should be treated. Two options are provided:
    1. Replace existing cross sections
      This radio button option replaces any previously defined cross sections for the selected river reaches.
    2. Uniformly spaced between existing control cross sections
      This radio button option treats existing cross sections as control cross sections. Control cross sections are user-defined cross sections that are defined before the automated cross section creation process. These cross sections are typically placed at bridge and culvert roadway crossings, as well as at other important areas of interest where the automated cross section creation will not correctly locate the cross sections.

Extraction Data

This tabbed panel is used to define the data extraction specifications and channel bank locations based upon the options selected for the cross sections to be created.

Extraction Data panel

Extract Elevation Data

This optional section is used to define the elevation data source(s) to be used for extracting the cross section geometry. The user can use the Primary and Secondary Elevation Data panels to define the primary and secondary (if available in the project) elevation data sources for extracting the cross section geometry. Depending upon the elevation data source type that is selected, different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base for information on the types of terrain elevation data that can be used for constructing cross sections.

The software will form a concave hull around the primary elevation data source to identify its bounds when a secondary elevation data source is available. For locations where elevation data from the primary data source is unavailable, the software will use the elevation data from the secondary data source.

Note that the user cannot utilize the same data source for defining both the primary and secondary elevation data.

The user can click the [Swap Sources] button to swap the selected elevation source from primary elevation data to secondary elevation data and vice versa.

If the Extract Elevation Data checkbox is unchecked, then the subsequent subsections and Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control section below it will be unavailable (i.e., grayed out). In addition, no geometry will be created when the cross sections are created. The cross sections will be just flat horizontal lines at elevation 0.

Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control

This optional section is used to control the amount of cross section geometry to extract for the automatically drawn cross section polylines. This assures that an adequately deep enough cross section is created on both sides of the river reach. The software will attempt to retrieve the cross section geometry data to the depth specified within the specified maximum cross section width.

If the drawn polyline does not extend outward far enough to get the cross section depth specified, the software will automatically extend the constructed cross section further outward. Similarly, if the drawn polyline extends too far outward for the depth specified, the software will automatically trim the constructed cross section.

Assign Bank Stations

This optional section is used to construct HEC‑RAS channel bank locations based on the selected option. The following options are provided:

  • Define by channel width
    This option will assign the bank stations using a defined channel width. The software will first determine the thalweg location on the cross section. It will then move outward from the thalweg equally until the requested channel width is reached.
  • Define by channel depth
    This option will assign the bank stations using an assumed normal flow depth and a maximum channel width search distance. The software will first determine the thalweg location on the cross section. It will then move outward from the thalweg until the requested channel depth is reached within the maximum channel width specified.
  • Define by bank polylines/polygons
    This option will assign the bank stations using selected polylines or polygons. Using the corresponding [Pick] buttons, the user can interactively select individual polylines or polygons on the Map View to be associated as bank stations. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

    The software will first determine the thalweg location on the cross section. It will then move outward from the thalweg until a previously selected bank polyline or polygon edge is reached.

Alignment Settings

This tabbed panel is primarily used to perform automated cross section creation along sinuous (meandering) river reaches and is not used for other conditions. By default, the content of this panel is disabled (i.e., grayed out). In addition, no smoothing will be performed when the cross section is created. Select the Generalize Cross Section Alignment checkbox option to enable the content of this panel.

Alignment Settings panel

Generalize Cross Section Alignment

This checkbox option allows the user to control the river reach and cross section alignment smoothing and generalization. If this checkbox option is checked, the following options will be enabled to perform the cross section alignment smoothing:

  • River valley alignment polyline control pt spacing
    This entry field allows the user to enter the distance for smoothing river reach. Clicking on the […] button allows the user to measure the distance between spline control points for smoothing river reach from the Map View.
  • Draw generalized river valley alignment polyline
    This checkbox option is used to draw the computed generalized river reach alignment polyline.
  • Orthogonal channel alignment between banks
    This checkbox option is used to make the cross section orthogonal between the channel bank stations and generalized in the floodplain. Note that bank station definition is required to perform an orthogonal channel alignment between bank stations.

Assignment of Manning’s Roughness and Flow Lengths

During the construction of the HEC‑RAS cross sections, the software will automatically assign a default Manning’s roughness for the left overbank, channel, and right overbank areas. The user can adjust these Manning’s roughness values in the Roughness tabbed panel.

Roughness panel

In addition, the flow length to the next downstream cross section is determined. If inserting a new cross section between two adjacent cross sections, the software will automatically adjust the flow length of the next upstream cross section to account for the insertion of the new cross section.

Generating Cross Sections

When all the options have been properly defined in the Automated Draw Cross Sections dialog box, click the [Generate] button. The software will automatically generate the cross sections along a river reach.

Cross Sections › Creation & Drawing

Draw Cross Sections Command

Cross sections are located at intervals along a stream in order to characterize the flow carrying capability of the stream and the adjacent floodplain. They should extend across the entire floodplain and should be perpendicular to the anticipated flow lines. Sometimes it is necessary to layout cross sections in a curved or a dog-leg alignment to meet this requirement. They should not intersect each other and should remain perpendicular to the main channel.

How to Add a Cross Section in HEC-RAS?

The Draw Cross Sections command allows the user to draw a cross section on the Map View as well as extract the cross section geometry from the underlying ground terrain.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw Cross Sections command.

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Cross Sections dropdown menu and then select the Draw Cross Sections command.
    Draw Cross Sections command
  2. The Draw Cross Sections dialog box will be displayed.
    Draw Cross Sections Dialog Box

The below sections describe the Draw Cross Sections command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Note that the software provides a shortcut key (Ctrl+D) that automatically starts the Draw Cross Sections command. Pressing the Ctrl+D key allows the user to draw the cross sections directly on the Map View without having to interact with the ribbon menu or Draw Cross Sections dialog box. To learn how draw cross sections using the shortcut key (Ctrl +D), refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Drawing Cross Section Polyline

The Draw Cross Section Polyline section is used to interactively draw a polyline on the Map View as a cross section. It is highly recommended that the rest of the dialog box input parameters be defined before drawing the cross sections on the Map View. These parameters define information, such as how the cross section IDs should be numbered, where the cross section geometry will be extracted from, and if cross section bank stations should be assigned.

When ready to construct the cross sections on the Map View, click the [Draw] button. The Draw Cross Sections dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar, informing the user what to do next. Within the Map View, draw a polyline across the river, from one side to the other, to define the cross section. Note that the drawn polyline must cross an existing river reach, or the software will report this as an issue. However, the user can draw in either direction across the river (i.e., left to right or right to left) as the software will determine cross section direction based upon the previously defined river reach direction. In addition, when drawing cross section polylines near river junctions or hydraulic structures (such as culverts, bridges, or inline structures), ensure that there is sufficient spacing between them and that cross sections do not intersect the hydraulic structures.

After the cross section polyline has been drawn, either right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu or press the [Enter] key. The software will then construct the cross section and then prompt the user to draw the next cross section. When finished drawing cross sections, right-click and select Cancel from the displayed context menu or press the [Esc] key. The software will return the user to the dialog box.

Cross Section River Stationing

This section is used to define the river stationing of the constructed cross sections. After drawing a cross section polyline, the software will automatically compute the river station for the cross section based upon other cross sections already assigned to the river reach and the parameters defined in this section.

For the cross sections being constructed, the river stationing value after the decimal point can be defined using the Decimal precision spin control. Cross sections can be numbered using a fixed increment or by the river chainage along the river reach. The river chainage can be in miles or feet when working in US units, or kilometers or meters when working in metric (SI) units.

Extraction Data

This tabbed panel is used to define the geometry extraction specifications for the drawn cross sections.

Extraction Data Panel

Extract Elevation Data

This optional section is used to define the elevation data source to be used for extracting the cross section geometry. Depending upon the elevation data source type that is selected, different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base for information on the types of terrain elevation data that can be used for constructing cross sections.

If the Extract Elevation Data checkbox is unchecked, then the subsequent subpanels and Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control section below it will be unavailable (i.e., grayed out). In addition, no geometry will be created when the cross section is created. The cross section will just be a flat horizontal line at elevation 0.

Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control

This optional section is used to control the amount of the cross section geometry to extract for the drawn polyline. This assures that an adequately deep enough cross section is created on both sides of the river reach. The software will attempt to retrieve the cross section geometry data to the depth specified within the maximum cross section width specified.

If the drawn polyline does not extend outward far enough to get the cross section depth specified, the software will automatically extend the cross section line further outward. Similarly, if the drawn polyline extends too far outward for the depth specified, the software will automatically trim the drawn cross section line.

Other Data

This tabbed panel is used to define channel bank locations based upon the options selected for the drawn cross sections.

Other Data Panel

Assign Bank Stations

This optional section is used to construct HEC‑RAS channel bank locations based upon the selected option. The following options are available:

Define by Channel Width

This option will assign the bank stations using a defined channel width. The software will first determine where the thalweg location is on the cross section. It will then move outward from the thalweg equally until the requested channel width is reached.

Define by Channel Depth

This option will assign the bank stations using an assumed normal flow depth and a maximum channel width search distance. The software will first determine where the thalweg location is on the cross section. It will then move outward from the thalweg until the requested channel depth is reached within the maximum channel width specified.

Define by Bank Polylines/Polygons

This option will assign the bank stations using selected polylines or polygons. The software will first determine where the thalweg location is on the cross section. It will then move outward from the thalweg until a previously selected bank polyline or polygon edge is reached.

Assigning Manning's Roughness and Flow Lengths

During the construction of the cross section, the software will automatically assign a default Manning's roughness for the left overbank, channel, and right overbank areas in the Roughness panel. However, the user can change the default values to whatever is required.

Roughness panel

In addition, the software automatically determines the flow lengths to the next downstream cross section. If a new cross section is being inserted between two adjacent cross sections, the software will automatically adjust the flow lengths of the next upstream cross section to account for the insertion of the new cross section.

The software also allows the user to define more than three Manning's n values for any selected cross section. The user can provide horizontally varying Manning's n values to define multiple sub roughness areas for the selected cross section.

After the cross section has been drawn, the user can double-click on the cross section in the Map View to display the Cross Section Data dialog box.

Cross Section Data dialog box

In the Cross Section Geometry section of the above dialog box, the user can select the Horizontal Roughness checkbox to enable the Horizontal Roughness column and enter the varying Manning's n values.

Horizontal Roughness column

A Manning's n value must be placed in the first row of the table. This n value is good for all cross section stations until a new n value shows up in the table. The user is only required to enter a n value at the locations where the n value is changing, not for every station.

Cross Section Data dialog box

Note that, while defining the Manning's n values, the user can click the […] button to display the Manning's Roughness dialog box. This dialog box provides a reference to Manning's roughness coefficients for some commonly used surface materials.

Manning's Roughness dialog box
Cross Sections › Creation & Drawing

Assign Multiple Cross Sections Command

The Assign Multiple Cross Sections command enables the user to select a group of existing polylines on the Map View as cross sections and prompt the software to extract the HEC-RAS cross section geometry from the underlying ground terrain.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Multiple Cross Sections command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Cross Sections menu item and then choose the Assign Multiple Cross Sections command.
    Assign Multiple Cross Sections input ribbon menu command
  2. The Assign Multiple Cross Sections dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign Multiple Cross Sections dialog box

The following sections describe the Assign Multiple Cross Sections command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Cross Section Polylines

The Select Cross Section Polylines section is used to interactively select polylines from the Map View for assigning as HEC-RAS cross sections. Click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed on the status bar, informing the user what to do next. Within the Map View, click on the polylines to assign as cross sections.

[Pick] button

To select all the polylines on the same map data layer, first select one polyline on the Map View. Then right-click and choose Select Similar from the displayed context menu. The software will then select all the polylines contained on that layer.

When finished selecting the polylines, right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu or press the Enter key. The Assign Multiple Cross Sections dialog box will be redisplayed, and the number of selected polylines will be shown in the Cross section polylines entry.

Cross section polylines entry

Note that cross sections cannot already exist for the corresponding river reach. If cross sections already exist, then use the Assign Cross Sections command instead. Refer to this article to learn more about this command.

Cross Section River Stationing

This section is used to define the river stationing of the selected cross sections. After selecting the cross section polylines, the software will automatically compute the river station of the cross sections based upon the parameters defined in this section.

For the cross sections being constructed, the river stationing value after the decimal point can be defined using the Decimal precision spin control. Cross sections can be numbered using a fixed increment or by the river chainage along the river reach. The river chainage can be in miles or feet when working in US units, or kilometers or meters when working in metric (SI) units.

Extraction Data

This tabbed panel is used to define the data extraction specifications for the assigned cross sections.

Extraction Data panel

Extract Elevation Data

This optional section is used to define the elevation data source(s) to be used for extracting the cross section geometry. The user can use the Primary and Secondary Elevation Data panels to define the primary and secondary (if available in the project) elevation data sources for extracting the weir crest geometry. Depending upon the elevation data source type that is selected, different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base for information on the types of terrain elevation data that can be used for constructing cross sections.

When a secondary elevation data source is available, the software will form a concave hull around the primary elevation data source to identify its bounds. For locations where elevation data from the primary data source is unavailable, the software will use the elevation data from the secondary data source.

Note that the user cannot utilize the same data source for defining the primary and secondary elevation data.

The user can click the [Swap Sources] button to swap the selected elevation source from primary elevation data to secondary elevation data and vice versa.

If the section checkbox is unchecked, then the subsequent sections below it will be unavailable (i.e., grayed out). In addition, no geometry will be created when the cross section is created. The cross section will just be a flat horizontal line at elevation 0.

Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control

This optional section is used to control the amount of the cross section geometry to extract for the selected polyline. This assures that an adequately deep cross section is created on both sides of the river reach. The software will attempt to retrieve the cross section geometry data to the depth specified within the maximum cross section width specified.

If the selected polyline does not extend outward far enough to reach the cross section depth specified, the software will automatically extend the constructed cross section further outward. Similarly, if the selected polyline extends too far outward for the depth specified, the software will automatically trim the constructed cross section.

River Reach Selection

This tabbed panel allows the user to define whether the Assign Multiple Cross Sections command should be applied to all river reaches contained within a project, or a specific river reach.

River Reach Selection panel

The following options are provided:

  • All river reaches (entire HEC-RAS model): This option allows cross sections to be assigned to one or multiple river reaches within the model.
  • Restricted to river reach: This option allows the user to select a specific river reach for cross sections to be assigned to. Selected cross section polylines that do not overlay the defined river reach will be discarded. The user can click the [Pick] button to select a river reach from the Map View.

Other Data

This tabbed panel is used to define channel bank locations based upon the options selected for the constructed cross sections.

Other Data panel

Assign Bank Stations

This optional section is used to construct HEC‑RAS channel bank locations based upon the selected option. The following options are available:

Define by Channel Width

This option will assign the bank stations using a defined channel width. The software will first determine where the thalweg location is on the cross section. It will then move outward from the thalweg equally until the requested channel width is reached.

Define by Channel Depth

This option will assign the bank stations using an assumed normal flow depth and a maximum channel width search distance. The software will first determine where the thalweg location is on the cross section. It will then move outward from the thalweg until the requested channel depth is reached within the maximum channel width specified.

Define by Bank Polylines/Polygons

This option will assign the bank stations using selected polylines or polygons. Using the corresponding [Pick] buttons, the user can interactively select individual polylines or polygons on the Map View to be associated as bank stations. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

The software will first determine where the thalweg location is on the cross section. It will then move outward from the thalweg until a previously selected bank polyline or polygon edge is reached.

Assignment of Manning’s Roughness and Flow Lengths

During the construction of the cross sections, the software will automatically assign a default Manning’s roughness for the left overbank, channel, and right overbank areas. The user can adjust these Manning’s roughness values in the Roughness tabbed panel.

Roughness panel

In addition, the flow length to the next downstream cross section is determined. If inserting a new cross section between two adjacent cross sections, the software will automatically adjust the flow length of the next upstream cross section to account for the insertion of the new cross section.

Cross Sections › Creation & Drawing

Assign Cross Sections Command

The Assign Cross Sections command is used to select an existing polyline on the Map View, assign it as a cross section, and have the software extract the HEC‑RAS cross section geometry from the underlying ground terrain.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Cross Sections command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Cross Sections menu item and then choose the Assign Cross Sections command.
    Assign Cross Sections ribbon menu command
  2. The Assign Cross Sections dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign Cross Sections dialog box

The following sections describe the Assign Cross Sections command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Cross Section Polyline

The Select Cross Section Polyline section is used to interactively select a polyline from the Map View for assigning as a HEC‑RAS cross section. Click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed on the status bar, informing the user what to do next. Within the Map View, click on a polyline to assign it as a cross section. Note that the selected polyline must overlay a pre-existing river reach or the software will report this as an issue. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to define river reaches.

After selecting a polyline, the software will then construct the cross section and then prompt the user to select the next polyline for assigning as a cross section. When finished assigning cross sections, right-click and choose Cancel from the displayed context menu or press the Esc key. The software will return the user to the dialog box.

Cross Section River Stationing

This section is used to define the river stationing of the selected cross sections. After selecting a cross section polyline, the software will automatically compute the river station of the cross section based upon other cross sections already assigned to the river reach and the parameters defined in this section.

For the cross sections being constructed, the river stationing value after the decimal point can be defined using the Decimal precision spin control. Cross sections can be numbered using a fixed increment or by the river chainage along the river reach. The river chainage can be in miles or feet when working in US units, or kilometers or meters when working in metric (SI) units. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to set model units in GeoHECRAS.

Extraction Data

This tabbed panel is used to define the data extraction specifications for the assigned cross sections.

Extraction Data panel

Extract Elevation Data

This optional section is used to define the elevation data source(s) to be used for extracting the cross section geometry. The user can use the Primary and Secondary Elevation Data panels to define the primary and secondary (if available in the project) elevation data sources for extracting the weir crest geometry. Depending upon the elevation data source type that is selected, different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base for information on the types of terrain elevation data that can be used for constructing cross sections.

When a secondary elevation data source is available, the software will form a concave hull around the primary elevation data source to identify its bounds. For locations where elevation data from the primary data source is unavailable, the software will use the elevation data from the secondary data source.

Note that the user cannot utilize the same data source for defining the primary and secondary elevation data.

The user can click the [Swap Sources] button to swap the selected elevation source from primary elevation data to secondary elevation data and vice versa.

If the section checkbox is unchecked, then the subsequent sections below it will be unavailable (i.e., grayed out). In addition, no geometry will be created when the cross section is created. The cross section will just be a flat horizontal line at elevation 0.

Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control

This optional section is used to control the amount of cross section geometry to extract for the selected polyline. This assures that an adequately deep enough cross section is created on both sides of the river reach. The software will attempt to retrieve the cross section geometry data to the depth specified within the maximum cross section width specified.

If the selected polyline does not extend outward far enough to get the cross section depth specified, the software will automatically extend the constructed cross section further outward. Similarly, if the selected polyline extends too far outward for the depth specified, the software will automatically trim the constructed cross section.

Other Data

This tabbed panel is used to define channel bank locations based upon the options selected for the constructed cross sections.

Other Data panel

Assign Bank Stations

This optional section is used to construct HEC‑RAS channel bank locations based upon the selected option. The following options are available:

Define by Channel Width

This option will assign the bank stations using a defined channel width. The software will first determine where the thalweg location is on the cross section. It will then move outward from the thalweg equally until the requested channel width is reached.

Define by Channel Depth

This option will assign the bank stations using an assumed normal flow depth and a maximum channel width search distance. The software will first determine where the thalweg location is on the cross section. It will then move outward from the thalweg until the requested channel depth is reached within the maximum channel width specified.

Define by Bank Polylines/Polygons

This option will assign the bank stations using selected polylines or polygons. Using the corresponding [Pick] buttons, the user can interactively select individual polylines or polygons on the Map View to be associated as bank stations. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.
The software will first determine where the thalweg location is on the cross section. It will then move outward from the thalweg until a previously selected bank polyline or polygon edge is reached.

Assignment of Manning’s Roughness and Flow Lengths

During the construction of the HEC‑RAS cross section, the software will automatically assign a default Manning’s roughness for the left overbank, channel, and right overbank areas. The user can adjust these Manning’s roughness values in the Roughness tabbed panel.

Roughness panel

In addition, the flow length to the next downstream cross section is determined. If inserting a new cross section between two adjacent cross sections, the software will automatically adjust the flow length of the next upstream cross section to account for the insertion of the new cross section.

Cross Sections › Creation & Drawing

Creating Cross Sections from Terrain Elevation Data

GeoHECRAS provides numerous methods for creating cross sections from terrain elevation data. The following commands are provided for creating cross sections:

  • Assign Cross Sections
  • Assign Multiple Cross Sections
  • Draw Cross Sections
  • Automated Draw Cross Sections
  • Import Cross Section Geometry
  • Extract Cross Section Geometry
Cross Sections › Editing & Interpolation

Reverse Cross Section Geometry Command

In HEC-RAS projects, the presumed direction of the horizontal stationing for the cross section geometry is from left to right, from the vantage point of the downstream direction. For HEC-RAS projects whose horizontal stationing for the cross section geometry is not in the presumed direction, the Reverse Cross Section Geometry command can be used to correct the direction of the cross section geometry.

Refer to the steps below to use the Reverse Cross Section Geometry command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Cross Sections dropdown menu and select the Reverse Cross Section Geometry command. Alternatively, press the [Ctrl+Shift+R] shortcut keys directly on the Map View.

    Reverse Cross Section Geometry command
  2. The Reverse Cross Section Geometry dialog box will be displayed.

    Reverse Cross Section Geometry dialog box
  3. The data table under the Select Cross Sections section lists river, reach, and river stations for each cross section. If a hydrological structure is defined over a cross section, then it will be displayed in the Type column of the data table against the corresponding river station.
  4. Check the River Station checkbox entries from the data table corresponding to the cross sections whose geometry is to be reversed. Click the [Select All] button to select all the available cross sections at once. Click the [Clear All] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.
  5. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to manually select cross sections from the Map View. Clicking the [Pick] button temporarily removes the dialog box and redirects the user to the Map View. On the Map View, either select cross sections or river reach to automatically select all the associated cross sections.
  6. After the Map View selection, the dialog box will be redisplayed showing the selected cross sections as well as the total number of cross sections.

    Cross sections selection
  7. The selected cross sections will also be highlighted on the Map View. To abort the Map View selection process, press the [Esc] key or right-click and select Cancel from the displayed context menu.
  8. After selecting the cross sections, click the [OK] button and the software will reverse the geometry of the selected cross sections.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to observe how the cross section geometry changes after using the Reverse Cross Section Geometry command.

Cross Sections › Editing & Interpolation

Geometry Comparison

The Geometry Comparison command of GeoHECRAS allows the user to select a comparison cross section to display in the cross section plot, align the comparison cross section with the current cross section, and replace the current cross section with the selected portion of the comparison cross section. Furthermore, the user can also select comparison cross sections from other geometry files to quickly compare different model geometries and better understand the resulting differences.

Follow the steps given below to use the Geometry Comparison command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Cross Section Data command.
    Cross Section Data Input ribbon menu command
    Alternatively, the user can either double click on the cross section from the Map View or choose the Cross Section Data command from the Cross Sections dropdown menu of the Input ribbon menu.
    Cross Section Data command from the Cross Sections dropdown menu of the Input ribbon menu
  2. The Cross Section Data dialog box will be displayed.Geometry-Comparison-image-1.png
  3. From the Cross Section Specifications dropdown combo box, select Geometry Comparison option.Geometry-Comparison-image-2.png
  4. The following data panel will be displayed.Geometry Comparison data panel

The following sections describe how to interact with the above data panel.

Selecting Comparison Cross Section

The Select Comparison Cross Section section allows the user to select the comparison cross section to display in the plot window. The user can select to display a cross section from any geometry data associated with the current HEC-RAS project (i.e., scenarios).

Select Comparison Cross Section section

Enabling the Retain selected cross section checkbox option ensures that the selected cross section geometry line remains visible in the plot, even when a different data panel is selected from the Cross Section Specifications dropdown combo box.

Enabling the Synchronize navigation checkbox option would link the comparison cross section with the current cross section—effectively locking them in step with each other.

Align Comparison Cross Section

This section allows the user to align the comparison cross section with the current cross section using a reference point.

Align Comparison Cross Section section

The Alignment type dropdown combo box allows the user to define the axis coordinates to be used in aligning the comparison cross section with the current cross section. The following options are provided in the dropdown combo box:

  • Station Only
  • Elevation Only
  • Station & Elevation (default)
Alignment type dropdown combo box

The Reference point dropdown combo box allows the user to align the comparison cross section with the current cross section using a reference point. The following reference points are provided in the dropdown combo box:

  • Leftmost Station (default)
  • Left Bank
  • Thalweg
  • Centered Between Banks
  • River Reach Intersection
  • Right Bank
  • Rightmost Station
Reference point dropdown combo box

Once the alignment options have been selected, clicking on the [Align] button will cause the software to align the comparison cross section to the current cross section using the selected reference point. Clicking on the [Restore] button will cause the software to restore the comparison cross section to its original stationing/elevations.

Note that if either the left and/or right bank stations are not defined for either the comparison or current cross section, then the following options are grayed out (i.e., not available) in the dropdown combo box:

  • Left Bank
  • Centered Between Banks
  • Right Bank

Shift Comparison Cross Section

This section allows the user to define the amount of shift in the comparison cross section in terms of X and Y direction in order to align it with a point of interest within the current cross section. By default, the editable spin-controls are set to 0.00 when the comparison cross section is first selected.

Shift Comparison Cross Section section

The user can then either directly enter a value into the editable spin-control or use the spin dial to increment or decrement the value. The user can also measure horizontal and vertical shift distances from the cross section plot using the [Pick] button.

Replace with Comparison Geometry

Enabling this checkbox allows the user to replace parts of the current cross section with the comparison cross section.

Replace with Comparison Geometry section

The Replacement type dropdown combo box allows the user to select a part of the current cross section and replace that with the comparison cross section.

The following options are provided in the dropdown combo box:

  • Left Side
  • Inside (default)
  • Right Side
  • Both Sides
Replacement type dropdown combo box

The user can then either directly enter a value into the editable spin-control or use the spin dial to increment or decrement the value of the Left station and Right station options. The user can also select left and right stations of the comparison geometry from the cross section plot using the [Pick] button. Clicking on the [Replace] button will replace the current cross section with the selected portion of the comparison cross section.

Alternatively, the user can graphically grab the replacement lines in the cross section plot and drag them to the left and right to select the region to be replaced.

Cross Sections › Editing & Interpolation

Geometry Point Reduction

The Geometry Point Reduction command allows the user to automatically filter out unnecessary station-elevation points for:

  • Cross Section Geometry
  • Roadway Geometry
  • Inline Structure Crest Geometry
  • Lateral Structure Crest Geometry

HEC-RAS limits the number of geometry points for cross sections, lateral structures, roadway crossing high chord and low chord geometry, and inline structures to a maximum of 500. This limitation may appear to be large enough, but when these HEC-RAS entities are computer generated from Light Detection and Ranging (LiDAR) or Digital Elevation Models (DEMs), or data is acquired with equipment such as an echo sounder, the number of data points can be fairly high.

GeoHECRAS supports 5000 station-elevation points (HEC-RAS only supports 500). In addition, ineffective flow areas, conveyance obstructions, and levees can insert additional geometry points. To meet the restrictions of HEC-RAS, large datasets must be reduced. In hydraulic modeling, too many station-elevation points can affect run time (which is exacerbated in sediment which runs the steady flow computations every time step) but are mostly innocuous. Dense station-elevation points can cause several issues in a 1D sediment transport model, including bed inversion and node stranding. Reduced datasets enhance run-time performance while also making data transmission and storage easier. Choosing the right data points to keep from among hundreds or thousands of data points can be difficult and time-consuming. GeoHECRAS has made this task easier.

To assist the user, GeoHECRAS provides a checkbox option in the Other Options panel of the Options backstage page that will prompt the software to always reduce the number of geometry points to 490 points or less when the user creates these HEC-RAS entities. By default, this checkbox option is displayed checked.

Automatically Reduce Geometry Points to - Checkbox Option

Alternatively, the user can manually specify the points in the Cross Section Data, Bridge & Culvert Data, Inline Structure Data, and Lateral Structure Data dialog boxes.

Geometry Point Reduction in Cross Sections

Follow the steps given below to use the Geometry Point Reduction command for cross sections:

  1. From the Map View, double-click on the cross section to open the Cross Section Data dialog box.
  2. The Cross Section Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Cross Section Data Dialog Box
  3. From the Cross Section Specifications dropdown combo box, select the Geometry Point Reduction data panel entry.
    Cross Section Specifications Dropdown Combo Box
  4. The Geometry Point Reduction data panel will be displayed.
    Geometry Point Reduction Data Panel

The following sections describe how to interact with the above data panel.

Geometry Point Reduction

The Current number of geometry points is a read-only field that shows the total number of geometry points associated with the selected cross section.

The Reduce number of geometry points to entry field allows the user to enter the target numeric value (geometry points) for the cross section. By default, this entry will show 490, but the user can change the value if desired.

The Select region to reduce dropdown allows the user to specify exactly at what part of the cross section the ground geometry (or roadway geometry) point reduction should be applied. The user can choose from the following:

  • Entire Cross Section
  • Both Overbanks
  • Channel Only
  • Left Overbank Only
  • Right Overbank Only
    Select Region to Reduce Dropdown

Clicking on the [Preview] button will cause the software to generate a preview of the cross section plot with the reduced number of geometry points.

Preview Button

Reduction Extent

This section allows the user to perform the reduction of geometry points. The Apply reduction to dropdown allows the user to specify the river regions for which the ground geometry point reduction should be applied. The user can choose from the following:

  • Current Cross Section
  • Current River Reach
  • All River Reaches

When creating a roadway crossing in HEC-RAS, the software creates a bounding cross section or internal cross sections that are a copy of cross sections just upstream and downstream of the bridge. So, the user can apply this command to those internal cross sections as well by clicking the Apply at bridge internal geometry cross sections checkbox.

Clicking on the [Apply] button will apply the reduced geometry points to the specified cross section.

Apply Button

Geometry Point Reduction in Roadway Crossing

The Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box allows the user to reduce the number of station-elevation points in roadway crossings. Similar to the geometry point reduction performed for cross sections, the user can enter the new station-elevation points count in the Reduce number of geometry points to input field and then click the [Apply] button.

Apply Button - Bridge & Culvert Data

Geometry Point Reduction in Inline Structure

The Inline Structure Data dialog box allows the user to reduce the number of station-elevation points in inline structures. Similar to the geometry point reduction performed for cross sections, the user can enter the new station-elevation points count in the Reduce number of crest geometry points to input field and then click the [Apply] button.

Apply Button - Inline Structure Data

Geometry Point Reduction in Lateral Structure

The Lateral Structure Data dialog box allows the user to reduce the number of station-elevation points in lateral structures. Similar to the geometry point reduction performed for cross sections, the user can enter the new station-elevation points count in the Reduce number of weir geometry points to input field and then click the [Apply] button.

Apply Button - Lateral Structure Data
Cross Sections › Editing & Interpolation

Interpolate Cross Sections Command

The Interpolate Cross Sections command can be used to automatically add interpolated cross sections to a river reach. The interpolated cross sections can be added for an entire river reach or just part of a reach.

While it is always better to define “real” cross sections by extracting the cross sections from an underlying terrain surface, there are times when this is not feasible. For example, the existing cross sections might have been created by compositing the overbank geometry with the channel geometry using different data sources. The overbank geometry might have been extracted from a terrain surface, whereas the channel geometry may have been constructed from field survey data. In these situations, the Interpolate Cross Sections command can be used to fill-in cross sections between the existing cross sections. If desired, after the interpolated cross sections have been constructed, the user can then re-extract only the overbank geometry from the terrain surface using the Extract Cross Section Geometry command to create more accurate interpolated cross sections. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Extract Cross Section Geometry command.

Interpolated cross sections are useful when there is too large of a change in the velocity head between existing cross sections and the software cannot accurately calculate the energy gradient. An adequate depiction of the energy gradient change is important for accurately modeling friction losses as well as contraction and expansion losses. HEC-RAS will report the following warning messages for these situations as well as other situations where additional cross sections may be required:

  • The energy equation could not be balanced within the specified number of iterations. The program used critical depth for the water surface and continued on with the calculations.
  • The energy equation could not be balanced within the specified number of iterations. The program selected the water surface that had the least amount of error between computed and assumed values.
  • During the standard step calculations, the final energy answer that was computed is less than the downstream energy. This is not physically possible. Please check your data.
  • Critical depth could not be determined within the specified number of iterations. The program used the iteration with the lowest energy.
  • The energy loss was greater than 1.0 ft (0.3 m) between the current and previous cross section. This may indicate the need for additional cross sections.
  • The maximum number of iterations were exceeded in calculating the wide river ice jam thickness between this cross section and the adjacent upstream cross section.
  • The energy computed by the inline structure equations at the upstream cross section is lower than the energy at the downstream cross section. The energy at the upstream cross section has been set to the energy at the downstream cross section.
  • The split flow optimization for the lateral structure failed to converge within the maximum number of iterations. The results from the final iteration were used.

When adding interpolated cross sections, the software will automatically add and space the cross sections along the river reach as per the user-defined specifications, positioning the cross sections perpendicular to the channel centerline.

Follow the steps below to add interpolated cross sections:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Cross Sections dropdown menu, and then select the Interpolate Cross Sections command.
    Interpolate Cross Sections Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Interpolate Cross Sections dialog box will be displayed.
    Interpolate Cross Sections dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Interpolate Cross Sections command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting River Reach

The Select River Reach section describes how to select the river reach for performing automatic cross section interpolation. Follow the steps below:

  1. Click on the River dropdown combo box and then select the river for performing the cross section interpolation.
    River dropdown combo box
  2. If there are multiple reaches for the selected river, then click on the Reach dropdown combo box and then select the reach for performing the cross section interpolation.
    Reach dropdown combo box

Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to select the river reach from the Map View. The Interpolate Cross Sections dialog box will temporarily disappear. The software will then prompt the user to select the river reach from the Map View. After selecting a river reach, the Interpolate Cross Sections dialog box will be redisplayed and the selected river reach will be shown in the River and Reach dropdown combo boxes.

Selecting Cross Section Range

The Select Cross Section Range section is used to define the cross section range along the selected river reach, in which the cross section interpolation will be applied. Follow the steps below:

  1. Click on the Upstream cross section dropdown combo box and then select the cross section that will be used as the upstream most river station for the interpolation. By default, the software will select the cross section at the upstream end of the river reach.
    Upstream cross section dropdown combo box
  2. Click on the Downstream cross section dropdown combo box and then select the cross section that will be used as the downstream most river station for the interpolation. By default, the software will select the cross section at the downstream end of the river reach.
    Downstream cross section dropdown combo box

Alternatively, click the [Pick] buttons adjacent to the Upstream cross section and Downstream cross section dropdown combo boxes and select the corresponding cross sections from the Map View. The Interpolate Cross Sections dialog box will temporarily disappear. The software will then prompt the user to select the associated cross section from the Map View. After selecting a cross section, the Interpolate Cross Sections dialog box will be redisplayed and the selected cross section will be shown in the Upstream cross section and Downstream cross section dropdown combo boxes.

Cross Section Specifications

This section is used to define the maximum allowable distance between cross sections. If the channel distance between any two existing cross sections is greater than the maximum allowable distance defined by the user, then the software will interpolate cross sections between these two cross sections. The software will interpolate as many cross sections as necessary to get the distance between the cross sections below the specified maximum allowable distance.

Enter the distance for the Maximum cross section spacing entry field. Alternatively, click the […] button to measure the cross section spacing from the Map View. The Interpolate Cross Sections dialog box will temporarily disappear. The software will then prompt the user to measure the maximum cross section spacing distance from the Map View. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The Interpolate Cross Sections dialog box will be redisplayed and the measured distance will be shown in the Maximum cross section spacing entry field.

The [Delete Interpolated Cross Sections] button can be used to delete previously created interpolated cross sections for the selected river reach. Note that this button is disabled if there are no interpolated cross sections defined for the selected river reach. Alternatively, the Delete Cross Sections command can be used to interactively delete the selected cross sections. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Delete Cross Sections command.

[Delete Interpolated Cross Sections] button

After the cross section interpolation options have been defined, click the [OK] button and the software will interpolate the cross sections.

[OK] button
Cross Sections › Editing & Interpolation

Export Cross Sections to CAD Command

The Export Cross Sections to CAD command is used to automate the batch plotting of all or a selection of cross sections to CAD (i.e., AutoCAD and MicroStation) in a rectangular array pattern. This allows the user to quickly generate cross section plot sheets for his or her projects. This command allows the defined settings to be saved, and then later retrieved, for specific plot requirements.

Follow these steps to export the cross sections to CAD:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, click the Cross Sections dropdown menu and then choose the Export Cross Sections to CAD command.
    Export Cross Sections to CAD command
  2. The Export Cross Sections to CAD dialog box will be displayed.
    Export Cross Sections to CAD dialog box

The following sections describe the Export Cross Sections to CAD command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Export Analysis Results

This section allows the user to select the results to be plotted on the cross sections.

For a steady flow model, the software will list the profiles that were computed. By default, the first listed profile will be selected. However, the user can select the results to be plotted on the cross sections.

For an unsteady flow model, the software will not show any profiles in the table and only the maximum water surface elevation will be exported.

For a steady flow model, clicking the [Select All] button will cause all the available results to be selected. Clicking the [Clear All] button will cause all the results to be deselected.

Exported CAD Drawing File

This section is used to define where the exported cross sections are to be saved.

Click the […] button beside the File name entry to specify the directory location and the drawing file name to save the exported results. Make certain to select the file type, which includes whether to save the file as an AutoCAD or MicroStation drawing file, as well as what file version (i.e., AutoCAD 2013, AutoCAD 2018, etc.).

CAD Plot Specifications

This section is used to define the specifications for the cross sections being exported. Click the [Default] button to reset the specifications back to their default values.

This section is further segmented into four panels.

Cross Sections

This panel provides a table listing the cross sections contained within the model and which allows the user to select which cross sections are to be exported.

Cross Sections panel

By default, no cross sections are selected. Clicking the [Select All] button causes all cross sections to be selected. Clicking the [Clear All] button will cause all cross sections to be deselected. In addition, the user can manually select from the table which cross sections are to be exported.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to interactively select cross sections from the Map View. After selecting the cross sections to be exported, press Enter or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The user will be returned to the dialog box with the cross sections selected.

Note that the Include interpolated cross sections checkbox entry is used to include interpolated cross sections (those cross sections with a “*” after the river station ID) in the cross section table listing.

XS Plot Labels

This panel is used to define the cross section labels to be exported. The user can edit, change, and define labels that will appear on the cross sections.

XS plot labels tab

The Cross-section plot title entry is used for defining the cross section plot title. The Title location dropdown combo box entry provides two options for placing the title on the plot sheet: Above Plot and Below Plot. The user can also define the Text height and Font name to be used in the title.

Other options are provided to define the vertical axis label, horizontal axis label, and elevation and station tick mark labels.

General Options

This panel is used to specify the tick mark spacing, scaling, and cross section array layout to be used when exporting the cross sections.

General Options

The Tick Mark Specifications section is used for defining the distance between tick marks for vertical and horizontal axes. The software provides two methods: Automatic and User defined.

The Plot Scale Specifications section is used to define the scale to be used for vertical and horizontal axes.

The Plot Layout Specifications section is used to define the gap between the individual cross sections and the number of columns to be used. Units in the spacing entries should match the project units. For example, if the project is in feet, then the cross section grids spacing is in feet.

The Number of plot columns entry defines the number of columns to be created in the rectangular array when creating the cross-section plots. The Export each cross section plot as a block checkbox option causes the entire cross section to be a single block, allowing the user to easily move it within CAD.

Layer Options

This panel is used to define the drawing layers (or levels for MicroStation) to be created for the exported CAD drawing.

Layer Options

The Internal Layer Name column reflects the internal (read-only) layer name used for reference by the software. The Exported Layer Name column defines the layer (or level) name to be used when constructing the cross section plots. For example, the user may want the exported layer names to be in the French language.

The visibility of the layers can be controlled by [Show All] and [Hide All] buttons. Alternatively, the user can manually select which layers are to be visible.

The Fill ground area, Fill structures and Fill water area checkboxes control the filling of the ground terrain, water, and structures (dams, bridges, etc.) on the cross sections.

Save Settings & Load Settings

The [Save Settings] button allows the user to save the defined settings for later reuse on other projects. The [Load Settings] button allows the user to retrieve previously defined settings.

Exporting the Cross Sections

When all the options have been defined, click the [OK] button and the software will export cross sections to CAD.

Cross Sections › Editing & Interpolation

Interpolate Geometry Command

The Interpolate Geometry command allows the user to interpolate the 3D river geometry from the defined HEC-RAS cross sections and the elevation terrain DEM contained in the project. This command extends the Interpolate Cross Sections command by interpolating the 3D river geometry between defined cross sections. This functionality is quite useful when the terrain data does not contain any channel geometry. From the defined HEC-RAS cross sections, the software will interpolate the river channel geometry between the defined cross sections, burning the cross-section channel geometry into the 3D terrain data while it follows along the river reach alignment centerline.

Follow these steps to use the Interpolate Geometry command:

  1. From the Terrain ribbon menu, select the Interpolate Geometry command.
    Terrain ribbon menu - Interpolate Geometry command
  2. The Interpolate Geometry dialog box will be displayed.
    Interpolate Geometry dialog box

The following sections describe the Interpolate Geometry command as well as how to interact with the above dialog box.

Interpolate Geometry Limits

This section allows the user to define whether the Interpolate Geometry command should be applied to all river reaches contained within a project, or a specific river reach or portion of a river reach. For example, for a large model with numerous river reaches, this option allows the user to interpolate the river and channel geometry in a small portion of the model.
This section is used to select the river reaches and cross sections that will be used for interpolation. The following options are provided:

  • All river reaches (entire HEC-RAS model): This option causes the interpolation to be applied to river reaches within the model.
  • Restricted to river reach: The user can select a specific river reach from the dropdown entries. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to select the river reach from the Map View.

When a single river reach has been selected, the user can choose to interpolate river geometry between selected cross sections using the Restrict by cross section range option:

  • Upstream XS river station: From the dropdown combo box, select the upstream cross section at which to end the river geometry interpolation. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to select the cross section from the Map View.
  • Downstream XS river station: From the dropdown combo box, select the downstream cross section at which to start the river geometry interpolation. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to select the cross section from the Map View.

Include Cross Section Geometry

This section is used to define how much of the cross section to include in the river geometry interpolation. The following options are provided:

  • Channel and overbanks: Interpolates the river geometry for the channel and overbank regions.
  • Channel only: Interpolates the river geometry from the channel only.

Merge Terrain Layer with Interpolated River Geometry

This section allows the user to merge the interpolated river geometry layer with an elevation terrain DEM. The Base terrain grid layer dropdown combo box lists all the elevation layers that are currently used in the project.

Terrain Grid Limits

This section is provided to allow the user to define the limits of the elevation terrain DEM to be computed from the river geometry interpolation. The following options are provided:

  • HEC-RAS model selected extents: This option will create a bounding rectangular region the same size as the HEC-RAS model reaches, cross sections, storage areas and 2D flow areas, plus an additional buffer boundary.
  • User-defined limits: This option allows the user to draw a rectangle on the Map View to define the limits of the river geometry interpolation. Click the [Pick] button to select the limits on the Map View. The dialog box will temporarily disappear, and an information message will be displayed on the status line. Click and drag a rectangular region on the Map View to define the elevation terrain DEM limits. After releasing the mouse button, the user will be returned to the dialog box. A layer will be created with a rectangular box drawn to represent the user-defined selected region.
  • Clipping Polygons: The user can select one or more polygons on the Map View and the software will clip the selected raster to the boundary of the polygons. The raster will set the limits of the grid to the extents of the selected polygons. For regions that are within these limits but outside the selected polygon boundary, the cells will be set to a null value.
    Click the [Pick] button to select the polygon shape region(s). The Interpolate Geometry dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user to select the clipping polygons. Select the clipping polygons on the Map View and press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The dialog box will be redisplayed. The area underneath the selected clipping polygons will be considered by the software as it processes the terrain. Additionally, the user can check the Crop terrain to polygon boundary checkbox to crop the merged terrain to the selected polygon boundary.
  • Base terrain grid limits: The interpolated river geometry elevation terrain DEM will have the same extents as the original base terrain grid. If the Merge Terrain Layer with Interpolated River Geometry section is unchecked, then this section will be unavailable (i.e., grayed out).

Terrain Grid Specifications

This section is used to specify the interpolated river geometry DEM being created.

Click the […] browse button at the River geometry DEM file entry to specify the file name and the directory location to save the interpolated river geometry DEM.

If the Load DEM as map layer checkbox option is checked then the interpolated DEM will be loaded as a layer in the Map Data Layers panel. Click the pencil icon to rename the layer. The defined layer name cannot be the same as the existing base terrain grid layer.

The River geometry DEM CRS entry is used to select the Coordinate Reference System (CRS) that the interpolated river geometry grid will be created with. This entry only lists the CRS that are used by the different layer data contained within the project and will list the project CRS as the default entry.

The Overwriting existing terrain layer checkbox option controls overwriting an existing terrain layer with the same layer name.

Terrain Grid Resolution

This section is used to define the terrain quality by specifying the grid cell size of the interpolated river geometry terrain grid being generated.

From the Predefined terrain quality entry, choose the resolution option to be used. Elevation grid resolutions range from low to ultra-high quality.

Alternatively, from the User-defined cell size entry, the user can manually define the grid cell size. The finer the grid resolution (or smaller the cell size) defined, the greater the detail that can be represented in the interpolated river geometry terrain grid.

After the river geometry options have been defined, click the [Generate] button and the software will generate the interpolated river geometry grid file and optionally load the DEM as a new layer in the Map Data Layers panel.

Cross Sections › Editing & Interpolation

Extract Cross Section Geometry Command

The Extract Cross Section Geometry command can extract the cross section geometry from an underlying elevation grid where there is valid elevation data. The software will automatically recognize the limits of the elevation data and extract the cross section geometry where this data exists. It will not try to extract the cross section geometry data where there is no valid elevation data.

For example, the underlying elevation grid might be of the river channel only. Previously, extracting the cross section geometry for this area required that the user define the channel bank stations at the limits of the elevation data and then extract the cross section geometry only for the cross section channel. If the user tried to extract the cross section geometry for the overbank areas, the overbank geometry would be flat.

Follow the steps given below to use the Extract Cross Section Geometry command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Cross Sections dropdown menu and then choose the Extract Cross Section Geometry command.
    Cross Sections dropdown menu - Extract Cross Section Geometry command
  2. The Extract Cross Section Geometry dialog box will be displayed.
    Extract Cross Section Geometry dialog box

The following sections describe the Extract Cross Section Geometry command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Extract Geometry for Selected Cross Sections

This section is used to manually select the cross sections for extracting geometry. If a cross section is already selected on the Map View prior to running this command, the same cross section will be shown selected within the table.

Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to interactively select the cross sections from the Map View. Clicking the [Select All] button causes all the cross sections to be selected. Clicking the [Clear All] button causes all the cross sections to be deselected. In addition, the user can sort out the specific river reaches to be shown in the table listing.

Extract Data

This tabbed panel is used to define the data extraction specifications for the selected cross sections.

Extract Data tab

Extract Elevation Data

The Primary Elevation Data and Secondary Elevation Data panels of this section are used to define the primary and secondary (if available in the project) elevation data sources for extracting the cross section geometry. Depending on the selected elevation data source type, the content of these panels changes to specify additional elevation data information.

When a secondary elevation data source is available, the software forms a concave hull around the primary elevation data source to identify its bounds. For locations where elevation data from the primary data source is unavailable, the software will use the elevation data from the secondary data source.

Note that the user cannot utilize the same data source for defining the primary and secondary elevation data.

The user can click the [Swap Sources] button to swap the selected elevation source from primary elevation data to secondary elevation data and vice versa.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base for more information on the types of terrain elevation data that can be used for constructing cross sections.

Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control

This optional section is used to control the amount of the cross section geometry to extract for the selected polylines. This assures the user that adequately deep cross sections are created on both sides of the river reach. The software will attempt to retrieve the cross section geometry data to the depth specified within the maximum cross section width specified.

Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control section

If the selected polylines do not extend far enough outward for the cross section depth specified, the software will automatically extend the cross sections. Similarly, if the selected polylines extend too far outward for the cross section depth specified, the software will automatically trim the cross sections.

Cross Section Extraction Options

This section is used to control what portions of the cross section(s) should be extracted.

Cross Section Extraction Options section

For example, the user may have survey data for the cross section channel and a LIDAR digital terrain surface for the overbank areas.

In this example, the user would only want to extract the cross section geometry for the overbank areas since the surveyed channel geometry is already accurate.

The Extract cross section geometry for the dropdown combo box entry contains the following options:

  • Entire Cross Section (default)
  • Both Overbanks
  • Channel Only
  • Left Overbank Only
  • Right Overbank Only

In addition, the cross section flow lengths are automatically updated.

Other Data

This data panel is used to define channel bank locations based upon the options selected for the selected cross sections.

Other Data tab

Assigning Manning’s Roughness and Flow Lengths

During the extraction of the cross section geometry, the software will automatically assign a default Manning’s roughness for the left overbank, channel, and right overbank areas. However, the user can adjust these Manning’s roughness values in the Roughness tabbed panel.

Assigning Manning’s Roughness and Flow Lengths - Roughness tab

Note that while defining the Manning’s n values, the user can click the […] button to display the Manning’s Roughness dialog box. This dialog box provides a reference to Manning’s roughness coefficients for some commonly used surface materials.

When all the options have been defined, click the [OK] button and the software will extract the cross section geometry from the elevation terrain.

Cross Sections › Editing & Interpolation

Import Cross Section Geometry Command

The Import Cross Section Geometry command is used to import surveyed cross section geometry from a wide variety of file formats. The software will automatically determine where the next cross section starts within the selected file based upon either blank lines contained within the file or a sudden change in direction from one geometry point to the next.

Follow the steps below to use the Import Cross Section Geometry command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Cross Sections menu item and then choose the Import Cross Section Geometry command.
    Import Cross Section Geometry Ribbon Menu Command
  2. The Import Cross Section Geometry dialog box will be displayed.
    Import Cross Section Geometry dialog box

The following sections describe the Import Cross Section Geometry command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Cross Section File

The Select Cross Section File section allows the user to select the survey point cross section file. The file needs to be in an ASCII text file format, with either commas, tabs, or spaces delimiting the data fields contained within each row of the file.

The first row within the file that contains 3 floating point numbers is used to start the import cross section process. Whenever a blank line is encountered within the data file or the direction between three adjacent points changes too much, the software interprets this as the start of a new cross section.

The following survey file formats are supported:

  • ASC (ASCII text file)
  • CSV (Comma-Separated Variables)
  • ENZ (Easting, Northing, Elevation)
  • NEZ (Northing, Easting, Elevation)
  • PENZ (Point, Easting, Northing, Elevation)
  • PENZD (Point, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Description)
  • PNEZ (Point, Northing, Easting, Elevation)
  • PNEZD (Point, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description)
  • PNT (ASCII Point File)
  • PTS (ASCII Point File)
  • TXT (ASCII Point File)
  • XYZ (Easting, Northing, Elevation)

The software will attempt to determine the file format based upon the file extension. However, the user can change the file format to be used after the file is selected.

For reference, Easting = X coordinate and Northing = Y coordinate.

Note that cross section points must overlay only one river reach for this command to operate. In addition, cross sections should not already exist for the river reach that is being used to construct cross sections from the imported points.

Point File Preview

This Point File Preview panel shows the first 100 lines contained within the survey point file. It allows the user to see the contents of the survey point file and allows the user to change the file format to be used for importing based upon preview of the contents. After changing the file format, the column headings change in the Point File Preview panel.

Elevation Data Adjustment

This optional section allows the user to adjust the survey point data elevation values if the elevation data is in a different unit system or needs to have a datum adjustment.

Cross Section River Stationing

This section is used to define the river stationing to be used for the constructed cross sections. The user can define the downstream most cross section river station, along with the river stationing to be used for upstream cross sections.

For the cross sections being constructed, the river stationing value after the decimal point can be defined using the Decimal precision spin control. Cross sections can be numbered using a fixed increment or by using the river chainage along the river reach. The river chainage can be in miles or feet when working in US units, or kilometers or meters when working in metric (SI) units.

Assign Bank Stations

This optional section is used to construct channel bank locations based upon an assumed normal flow depth and a maximum channel width search distance. The software will first determine where the thalweg location is on a cross section by assuming the lowest elevation is the thalweg. It will then move outward from the thalweg until the requested channel depth is reached within the maximum channel width specified.

Assignment of Manning’s Roughness and Flow Lengths

During the construction of the cross sections, the software will automatically assign a default Manning’s roughness for the left overbank, channel, and right overbank areas. In addition, the cross section flow lengths are automatically determined.

Cross Sections › Properties & Geometry Requirements

HEC-RAS Cross Sections

Cross sections are developed based on the location layout of cross section lines and the properties of other layers such as the rivers, bank lines, and terrain layers. Cross sections should be laid out perpendicular to where water will flow in the channel and overbank areas. Most cross section lines are created from a minimum of four points (i.e., the end points and points at the edge of the main channel). Cross sections will also be visualized when looking in the downstream direction; therefore, they should be created from left to right when looking downstream. There are many considerations when developing cross section data in terms of orientation, location, and spacing, but keep in mind that the cross sections should represent a smooth transition in geometry (elevation and area) and properties (conveyance, surface roughness, etc.). It is always recommended to use the terrain, river centerline, bank lines, flow path lines, inundation mapping, and other data to properly place cross section lines.

Follow the steps below to view or modify the cross section data in GeoHECRAS:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Cross Section Data command.
    Cross Section Data Command
    Alternatively, the user can either double click on the cross section from the Map View or choose the Cross Section Data command from the Cross Sections dropdown menu of the Input ribbon menu.
    Cross Sections Dropdown Menu
  2. The Cross Section Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Cross Section Data Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to define the cross section data and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Cross Section

The Select Cross Section section allows the user to select a cross section for purposes of defining the cross section data.

Select Cross Section Section

This section contains the following entries:

  • River
    This read-only dropdown combo box displays the river(s) defined in the current scenario. When the user changes a river, the Reach dropdown combo box automatically updates to display a valid corresponding river reach.
  • Reach
    This read-only dropdown combo box displays all the reach(s) defined in the current scenario that correspond to the selected river.
  • River station
    This editable dropdown combo box displays all the cross sections defined in the current scenario that correspond to the selected reach. The up and down arrow buttons adjacent to the dropdown combo box allow the user to switch between the next downstream and upstream cross section. If there are no other cross sections defined for the selected river reach, then these buttons are disabled (grayed out). Alternatively, the user can click the […] pick button to select the cross section from the Map View.
  • Node name
    This entry field allows the user to assign an optional text label to the current cross section.
  • Description
    This optional text field allows the user to include information on the current cross section.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to draw a new cross section on the Map View.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to create a copy of the current cross section on the Map View.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the current cross section.
  • Less/More
    The [< Less] and [More >] buttons at the Select Cross Section section header allow the user to expand or collapse the Cross Section Plot section.

Once the cross section is selected, the user can switch between the following panels from the Cross Section Specifications dropdown entry to view and edit the associated cross section data.

Cross Section Specifications

This section contains a dropdown combo box with the following data panel entries, which allow the user to define cross section data:

  • Geometry Data
  • Ineffective Flow Areas
  • Levees
  • Conveyance Obstructions
  • Cross Section Lid
  • Internal Rating Curve
  • Vertical Roughness
  • Geometry Adjustment
  • Geometry Comparison
  • Geometry Point Reduction
  • Profile Results
  • Hydraulic Calculator
    Cross Section Specifications Section

Geometry Data

This data panel allows the user to define the geometry data of the current cross section.

Geometry Data Panel

The Geometry Data panel contains the following sections:

Cross Section Geometry

This section of the panel provides a table for entering and editing cross section geometry. The top right corner of the table header displays the number of points for the current cross section. This allows the user to quickly determine which cross sections need to be reduced in terms of total number of ground points.

The table contains the following columns:

  • Horizontal Station
    This table column defines the horizontal station for the cross section geometry data. The user can click the […] pick button adjacent to the Horizontal Station column header to select a specific horizontal station of the cross section from the Map View.
  • Ground Elevation
    This table column defines the ground elevation for the corresponding horizontal station of the cross section geometry.
  • Horizontal Roughness
    This table column is enabled only when the Manning’s checkbox option under the Other Cross Section Data section is unchecked. The user does not need to enter a roughness at every ground station, except the locations where the roughness changes. The acceptable Manning’s range is from 0 to 1. Clicking the […] lookup button displays the Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box for reference values, as shown below.
    Manning’s Roughness Lookup Dialog Box

Other Cross Section Data

This section of the panel defines the following additional cross section data.

Other Cross Section Data Section
  • Bank Stations
    This field defines the left and right bank stations. The defined bank station must match an existing ground station. The user can click the […] pick buttons under the Left and Right entry fields to select the right and left bank stations from either Map View or the cross section plot.
  • Manning’s
    This checkbox entry defines Manning’s n roughness values for left overbank, channel, and right overbank. Clicking the […] lookup button displays a Manning’s roughness lookup table. Unchecking this checkbox entry disables the underlying fields and enables the Horizontal Roughness column under the Cross Section Geometry table.
  • Flow length
    This entry defines the flow length for the left overbank, channel, and right overbank. Typically, these values are automatically determined using flow length polylines drawn on the Map View. However, the user can override those values by either entering a flow length or clicking the […] pick button to measure the flow distance from the Map View.
  • Contraction / Expansion
    These entries define the contraction and expansion coefficients. Clicking the […] lookup button displays the Expansion Contraction Coefficients lookup table, as shown below. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about expansion and contraction losses in HEC-RAS.
    Expansion Contraction Coefficients Lookup Table
  • Skew angle
    This entry defines the skew angle of the cross section. This entry is blank by default.

Ineffective Flow Areas

This data panel allows the user to define ineffective flow areas of the cross section, which represent water that is not actively being conveyed. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about ineffective flow areas.

Ineffective Flow Areas Panel

Levees

This data panel allows the user to define levees to constrain the flow to the main channel by defining a left and/or right levee station and corresponding elevation at a cross section. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about levees.

Levees Panel

Conveyance Obstructions

This data panel allows the user to define areas at a cross section that are permanently blocked from conveying flow. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about conveyance obstructions.

Conveyance Obstructions Panel

Cross Section Lid

This data panel allows the user to define long pipes or tunnels over a flow direction. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about cross section lids.

Cross Section Lid Panel

Internal Rating Curve

This data panel is used to define a rating curve (Stage vs Flow curve) at the current cross section. By defining a rating curve at a cross section, the software will use the rating curve to look up the corresponding water surface elevation rather than compute the water surface elevation.

Internal Rating Curve Panel

Vertical Roughness

This data panel allows the user to define the vertical variation of Manning’s roughness for cross sections. This panel allows the user to enter Manning’s roughness values that vary both horizontally as well as vertically. After enabling the Vertical Roughness section, the user can define the data between Roughness versus Flow or Roughness versus WSEL. In this way, the user can vary the roughness value either by elevation or discharge rate. During the computations, HEC-RAS will interpolate Manning’s roughness whenever the computed water surface elevation is between the user-defined elevations. If the computed water surface elevation is below the lowest elevation defined, then the roughness values from that lowest elevation will be used. Similarly, if the computed water surface elevation is above the highest elevation defined, the roughness values from that highest elevation will be used.

Vertical Roughness Panel

Geometry Adjustment

This data panel is used to adjust geometry for the current cross section or other cross sections.

Geometry Adjustment Panel

Adjust Cross Section Geometry

This section allows the user to define the type of adjustment to be applied to the cross section geometry.

This section contains the following options:

  • No change
    This option is selected by default and causes no changes to the cross section geometry.
  • Adjust elevations
    This option allows the user to adjust the cross section geometry elevations by the defined amount.
  • Adjust stations
    This option allows the user to adjust the cross section geometry stations by the defined amount.
  • Shift stationing
    This option allows the user to shift the cross section geometry stationing using an existing reference point. The user selects the corresponding reference point from the dropdown combo box and then assigns the station to be assigned to the reference point. The following reference points are provided in the dropdown combo box entry:
    1. Leftmost Station
    2. Left Bank
    3. Thalweg (lowest elevation between channel banks)
    4. Centered Between Banks
    5. River Reach Intersection
    6. Right Bank
    7. Rightmost Station
  • Scale stationing
    This option allows the user to scale the stationing by the defined amount for the following regions:
    1. Entire Cross Section
    2. Left Over Bank
    3. Channel
    4. Right Overbank
  • Reverse ground station order (flip end for end)
    This option causes the cross section stationing geometry to be reversed (flipped end for end). This option should be used when the cross section was entered with the survey data in a reverse fashion relative to the other cross sections.

Adjustment Extent

This section is used to select which cross sections and river reaches are to be changed by the specified adjustment. If bridge structures or inline structures are defined for selected reach(s), then their corresponding cross section geometry is also adjusted.

Clicking the [Apply] button applies the defined cross section adjustment method.

Geometry Comparison

This data panel allows the user to select a comparison cross section to display in the cross section plot, align the comparison cross section with the current cross section, and replace the current cross section with the selected portion of the comparison cross section. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about geometry comparisons.

Geometry Comparison Panel

Geometry Point Reduction

This data panel allows the user to automatically filter out unnecessary station-elevation points for Cross Section Geometry, Roadway Geometry, Inline Structure Crest Geometry, and Lateral Structure Crest Geometry. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about geometry point reduction.

Geometry Point Reduction Panel

Profile Results

This data panel allows the user to select analysis results and additional curves (i.e., terrain surface, fixed sediment, and pilot channel) to display on the cross section plot. This section allows the user to select the analysis results to display on the cross section plot. The displayed table lists all of the analyzed water surface profiles, allowing the user to specify for which profiles the results should be displayed.

Profile Results PanelProfile Results Section

This section contains the following options:

  • Profile
    This read-only table column lists the profile name.
  • Water Surface
    This table column lists a checkbox option that controls the display of computed water surface on the cross section geometry.
  • Energy Grade
    This table column lists a checkbox option that controls the display of computed energy grade lines on the cross section geometry.
  • Critical Depth
    This table column lists a checkbox option that controls the display of computed critical depth on the cross section geometry.
  • Filled-in water surface
    This checkbox option causes the selected water surface to be filled-in on the cross section geometry. If more than one profile has been selected which has the water surface checkbox option selected, then the lowest water surface elevation value is used.

Clicking the [Remove All] button removes all profile results from the cross section plot.

Other Options

This section allows the user to enable additional curves for the plot terrain surface, fixed sediment, and pilot channel in the cross section plot.

Other Options Section

This section contains the following options:

  • Plot terrain surface
    This checkbox option is used to display the terrain surface against the cross section geometry on the cross section plot. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked. Note that this checkbox option is disabled (i.e., grayed out) if there is no terrain surface available in the project.
  • Fixed sediment
    This checkbox option is used to display the fill-in portions of cross sections with sediment on the cross section plot. The sediment is assumed to be at a constant elevation in any particular cross section. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked.
  • Pilot channel
    This checkbox option is used to display the pilot channel on the cross-section plot. A pilot channel is a small slot at the bottom of the cross section, which gives the cross section a greater depth without adding much flow area. This allows the software to compute shallow depths on the leading edge of the flood wave without becoming unstable. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the pilot channels.

Hydraulic Calculator

This data panel allows the user to choose an unknown variable, at which point the software will then automatically compute the solution after the user enters the known parameters. For example, for a given water surface elevation (WSEL) and energy (or bed) slope, the software will compute the discharge rate. It accounts for Manning’s roughness subareas, but does not account for ineffective flow areas, conveyance obstructions, levees, or lids.

Hydraulic Calculator Panel

Selecting Normal Depth from the Calculate property dropdown combo box enables the Discharge and Gradient entry fields. The user can enter these entry fields and click the [Compute] button to compute all the associated hydraulic parameters under the Hydraulic Calculator Data section.

Similarly, selecting Normal Discharge from the Calculate property dropdown combo box enables the Water surface elevation, Flow depth, and Gradient entry fields. The user can enter these entry fields and click the [Compute] button to compute all the associated hydraulic parameters.

Cross Sections › Properties & Geometry Requirements

Georeferencing HEC-RAS Cross Sections

When the software imports a model, it automatically places the river cross sections on the Map View. However, if the original model was not spatially georeferenced, the river cross sections will not align with any loaded background base map. While the software can operate without any issues in this situation, it is preferable to have the river cross sections georeferenced to the background base map. Therefore, it might become necessary to georeference the imported cross sections.

The Georeference Cross Sections command can be used to manually georeference each of the cross sections to the background base map displayed in the Map View. The process of georeferencing a cross section to the Map View can be a trial and error process—especially when the exact location of the original cross section is not known. Using the Georeference Cross Sections command, this process is accelerated.

Note that a CRS should be assigned prior to running this command. Otherwise, the software will display the below informational dialog box.

CRS not assigned to HEC-RAS model dialog box

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to assign a coordinate reference system to a project.

Follow the steps below to georeference an existing cross section:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Cross Sections dropdown menu and then select the Georeference Cross Sections command.
    Georeference Cross Sections Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Georeference Cross Sections dialog box will be displayed.
    Georeference Cross Sections dialog box

The following sections describe how to georeference an existing cross section and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Cross Section to Georeference

The Select Cross Section to Georeference section allows the user to interactively select the cross sections to georeference on the Map View. This section allows the user to select the river, corresponding reach, and the cross section from the River, Reach, and Cross section dropdown combo boxes. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the cross section from the Map View.

Once the cross section has been selected, the user can choose between the following options to georeference the cross section:

  • Snap to Alignment Polyline
  • Slide Along Alignment Polyline
  • Draw on Map View

Snap to Alignment Polyline

If an existing alignment polyline for the cross section exists on the Map View, the Snap to Alignment Polyline can be used to snap the cross section to the alignment polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Snap to Alignment Polyline option:

  1. Select the Snap to Alignment Polyline radio button option. Note that this option is selected by default when the dialog box is displayed.
  2. Click the [Pick] button.
    [Pick]
  3. The Georeference Cross Sections dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the alignment polyline.
  4. Select the alignment polyline on the Map View.
  5. The Georeference Cross Sections dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Select alignment polyline read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.
  6. Click the [Snap] button. Alternatively, turn on the Scale to fit checkbox option to scale the cross section to fit within the alignment polyline.
    [Snap]
  7. The software will snap the cross section to the selected alignment polyline.

Slide Along Alignment Polyline

This option allows the user to manually slide the cross section along the alignment polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Slide Along Alignment Polyline option.

  1. Select the Slide Along Alignment Polyline radio button option and click the [Slide] button.
    [Slide] button
  2. The Georeference Cross Sections dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the cross section and drag it along the underlying alignment polyline.
  3. Click and drag the cross section on the Map View to revise its alignment.
  4. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Georeference Cross Sections dialog box will be redisplayed.

Notes:

  • The cross section must overlay a continuous alignment polyline for this option to work.
  • For more precision, the user can use the Snap to Alignment Polyline option first and then use the Slide Along Alignment Polyline option.

Draw on Map View

This option allows the user to draw an alignment polyline and automatically snap the selected cross section to the drawn polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw on Map View option:

  1. Select the Draw on Map View radio button option and click the [Draw] button. Alternatively, turn on the Scale to fit checkbox option to scale the cross section to fit within the alignment polyline.
    [Draw] button
  2. The Georeference Cross Sections dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw the alignment polyline on Map View.
  3. Draw the alignment polyline on the Map View. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Georeference Cross Sections dialog box will be redisplayed, and the cross section will automatically snap to the drawn alignment polyline.

Extract Elevation Data

This optional section is used to define the elevation data source(s) to be used for extracting the cross section geometry. The user can use the Primary and Secondary Elevation Data panels to define the primary and secondary (if available in the project) elevation data sources for extracting the cross section geometry. Depending upon the elevation data source type that is selected, different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information.

Extract Elevation Data section

Refer to this article in our knowledge base for information on the types of terrain elevation data that can be used for constructing cross sections.

When a secondary elevation data source is available, the software will form a concave hull around the primary elevation data source to identify its bounds. For locations where elevation data from the primary data source are unavailable, the software will use the elevation data from the secondary data source.

Note that the user cannot utilize the same data source for defining the primary and secondary elevation data.

The user can click the [Swap Sources] button to swap the selected elevation source from primary elevation data to secondary elevation data and vice versa.

If this section checkbox is unchecked, then the subsequent sections below it (excluding the Update cross section flow lengths checkbox of the Cross Section Extraction Options section) will be unavailable (i.e., grayed out).

Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control

This optional section is used to control the amount of cross section geometry to extract for the drawn cross section polylines. This assures that an adequately deep enough cross section is created on both sides of the river reach. The software will attempt to retrieve the cross section geometry data to the depth specified within the specified maximum cross section width.

Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control section

If the drawn polyline does not extend outward far enough to get the cross section depth specified, the software will automatically extend the constructed cross section further outward. Similarly, if the drawn polyline extends too far outward for the depth specified, the software will automatically trim the constructed cross section.

Cross Section Extraction Options

This section is used to control which portions of the cross section(s) should be extracted.

Cross Section Extraction Options section

For example, the user may have survey data for the cross section channel and a LIDAR digital terrain surface for the overbank areas. In this example, the user would only want to extract the cross section geometry for the overbank areas since the surveyed channel geometry is already accurate.

The Extract cross section geometry for dropdown combo box entry contains the following options.

  • Both Overbanks
  • Channel Only
  • Entire Cross Section (default)
  • Left Overbank Only
  • Right Overbank Only

The Update cross section flow lengths checkbox option allows the user to update the existing cross section flow lengths with the surveyed cross section flow lengths.

Cross Sections › Properties & Geometry Requirements

Hydraulic Parameters – Cross Sections Command

In GeoHECRAS, the Hydraulic Parameters-Cross Sections command is used to define the hydraulic parameters that are used for building cross section rating curves. During unsteady flow simulations, GeoHECRAS converts the geometry of cross sections into a set of rating curves defining relationships between hydraulic parameters and stage. When running a hydraulic model, the software picks values from these curves rather than computing hydraulic parameters for each time step, which speeds up the unsteady flow computations. This data is only used for unsteady flow simulations and is ignored for steady flow simulations.

Follow the steps below to use the Hydraulic Parameters – Cross Sections command:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, expand the Rating Curves – Hydraulic Parameters dropdown combo box and select the Hydraulic Parameters – Cross Sections command. Hydraulic Parameters – Cross Sections Command
  2. The Hydraulic Parameters – Cross Sections dialog box will be displayed. Hydraulic Parameters – Cross Sections Dialog Box

The following sections describe the Hydraulic Parameters – Cross Sections command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Rating Curve Parameters

This section contains three editable columns within a data grid in which the user can enter minimum elevation, increment height, and the number of points for the rating curve. The remaining columns are read-only. The first time the user opens the dialog box, all the columns are automatically filled.

Rating Curve Parameters

The data in the following columns are editable:

  • Rating Curve (RC) Minimum Elevation
    By default, these column entries are automatically filled with an elevation equal to 0.5 ft (0.15 meters) higher than the channel minimum invert. However, the user can change these values as per specific modeling requirements.
  • Rating Curve (RC) Increment Height
    By default, these column entries are filled with a value of 1.0 foot (1.0 meter). However, if this default value causes any cross section to have less than 20 rating curve points (because the cross section is not tall enough), the offending cross section entry is automatically filled with a value equal to the cross section height (maximum – minimum elevation) divided by 20. However, the user can change this value to any positive non-zero value as per the user’s modeling requirements.
  • Number of Rating Curve (RC) Points
    By default, these column entries are set to a value that will allow the table to extend to the top of the cross section. However, the user can adjust the number of points between 10 and 500. More points mean that HEC-RAS can interpolate between more values. Therefore, it is a good idea to increase the number of points when you are having stability problems.

Note that the River Name and Reach Name columns can be filtered, allowing the user to select specific rivers and reaches for review.

In addition, the user can use the cut, copy, and paste commands (using standard Windows function keys) to move data to and from the Windows clipboard.

Selected Cells Group Editing

This section allows the user to manipulate the cell values for the above-described column entries. The user can select a range of cells (or an entire data column) and use the following group editing radio button options:

  • Add constant
    Use this radio button option to add a constant value to the selected cells' value.
  • Multiply by factor
    Use this radio button option to multiply the selected cells' value by a factor.
  • Apply value
    Use this radio button option to enter a pre-defined value in all the selected cells.
  • Apply invert
    Use this radio button option to set your Rating Curve Minimum Elevation value to be the same as your Channel Minimum Elevation value. This will cause the software to start small computation increments from the channel invert, not 1 ft (0.3 m) above the channel invert. Selected Cells Group Editing

Once the required group editing radio button option is selected, the user can click the [Apply Change] button to complete the editing process.

Note that the [Apply Change] button is only available when a group editing radio button option other than the default No Change option is selected.

If cells are selected in the data grid, then clicking the [Defaults] button resets the selected cells back to their default values. If no cells are selected, then clicking the [Defaults] button resets the entire table back to its default values.

Cross Section Plot

The Cross Section Plot section displays the cross section that is selected in the Rating Curve Parameters table, along with lines representing the corresponding rating curve elevation values.

Cross Section Plot

After entering the appropriate information, the user can click the [OK] button.

Cross Sections › Properties & Geometry Requirements

Cross Section Lids

Cross section lids are used to model long pipes or tunnels over a flow direction. The ground geometry can be used to describe the bottom half of the tunnel, while the lid can describe the top half. A lid can be added to any number of cross sections in a row. Several successive cross sections with lids can be used to model multiple interconnected pipes.

Note that HEC-RAS does not directly support long drainage pipes along the river flow direction, and cross section lids are a “workaround” to provide that functionality.

The software treats cross sections with lids just like any other cross sections. The energy equation is used to balance a water surface with the assumption of open channel flow. The only difference is that the software will subtract the area and add a wetted perimeter when the water surface comes into contact with the lid.

Follow the steps given below to add a lid to a cross section:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Cross Section Data command.
    Input ribbon menu
  2. The Cross Section Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Cross Section Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to add a lid to a cross section and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Cross Section

This section allows the user to select the river, corresponding reach, and cross section for adding a lid from the River name, Reach name, and River station dropdown combo boxes.

The user can also navigate between cross sections using the following keyboard shortcut.

Hold down the [Ctrl] key and press the ­[Up arrow] keyboard key to move to the next upstream cross section. Similarly, hold down the [Ctrl] key and press the [Down arrow] keyboard key to move to the next downstream cross section.

Alternatively, the user can click the [...] button to graphically select the cross section from the Map View.

Select cross section from Map View

The Cross Section Data dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar informing the user how to select the cross section. When the cross section is selected, it is highlighted on the Map View, and the Cross Section Data dialog box will be redisplayed with the cross section selected.

Defining Cross Section Lid Geometry

The Cross Section Lid data panel of the Cross Section Data dialog box is used to add a lid to a cross section and define the lid geometry. Select the Cross Section Lid option from the Cross Section Specifications dropdown combo box.

Cross Section Specifications dropdown combo box

The Cross Section Lid data panel will be displayed.

Cross Section Lid panel

The following section describes how to interact with the above data panel.

Cross Section Lid Geometry

The Cross Section Lid Geometry table is used to manually define the lid geometry. The user can enter the high and low chord elevation values for the corresponding horizontal stations under the Horizontal Station (ft), High Chord Elevation (ft), and Low Chord Elevation (ft) columns. Alternatively, the user can copy and paste the lid geometry data into the grid using the standard copy-paste commands keyboard shortcuts.

Cross Section Lid panel

Drawing High and Low Chord Lid

The user can also interactively draw a high chord and low chord for a cross section lid on the cross section plot using the [Draw High Chord] and [Draw Low Chord] buttons, respectively.

Drawing High Chord and Low Chord

To draw the high chord or low chord lid, the user can click the [Draw High Chord] or [Draw Low Chord] buttons. Then, draw the high or low chord geometry point-after-point on the cross section plot. Once finished, the user can press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.

The user can remove the defined lid data for the current cross section by clicking the [Remove All] button and redo the entire process.

Modeling Pressurized Pipe Flow

GeoHECRAS can be used to model pressurized pipe flow during unsteady flow calculations. This is accomplished by applying the Preissmann slot theory to the open channel flow equations.

To model pressure flow, the user must add lids to the cross sections using the Cross Section Lid option. Lids can be added to any cross section in the HEC-RAS model. Several cross sections in succession with lids can be used to represent a pipe. Multiple interconnected pipes can be modeled.

The cross section represents the bottom half of the pipe, and the lid represents the top half of the pipe. Any pipe shape can be modeled. However, the details of the pipe shape will depend on how many points the user puts in for the bottom (cross section) and the top (lid). An example of adding a lid to a cross section is shown below.

Cross Section Plot

The user must enable the Add Preissmann slot for unsteady flow computations option to model pressurized pipe flow. This option allows the unsteady flow equations to solve for a pressure flow water surface using the open channel flow equations.

Enabling this option will instruct the computational code to treat this cross section and lid as a pressurized pipe. The conveyance curves for the cross section will be truncated at the maximum low chord elevation of the lid. Preissmann slot theory will be used for modeling the flow once it becomes pressurized.

Note that the Presissmann slot option only works with the 1D Finite Difference solution scheme. It does not work with the 1D Finite Volume solution scheme.

The 1D Finite Volume solution scheme cannot handle pressurized flow even with the Priessman slot option turned on. If the model has lidded cross sections, it will become unstable as soon as the water reaches the high point of the lid low chord.

Lidded cross sections can also be used around stream junctions to represent pressurized junctions. However, HEC-RAS does not compute minor losses at junctions, bends, or where pipes change size. This is currently a limitation in modeling pressurized pipe flow with HEC-RAS.

Cross Sections › Properties & Geometry Requirements

HEC‑RAS Cross Section Geometry Requirements

This article discusses the requirements for HEC‑RAS cross section placement, spacing, layout, geometry, and other data.

Boundary geometry for the HEC‑RAS analysis of flow in natural streams is specified in terms of ground surface cross sections and the measured flow distances between them (reach lengths). Cross sections are located at intervals along a stream to characterize the flow carrying capability of the stream and the adjacent floodplain. The cross sections should extend across the entire floodplain and should be perpendicular to the anticipated flow lines. Occasionally it is necessary to layout cross sections in a curved or dog‑leg alignment to meet this requirement. Every effort should be made to obtain cross sections that accurately represent the stream and floodplain geometry.

An example cross section layout is shown in the below figure. The general approach to laying out cross sections is to ensure that the cross sections are perpendicular to the flow lines. This requires an estimation of what the flow lines will look like in the overbank areas away from the main channel. One option is to draw a stream center line down the main channel along what is perceived to be the center of mass of flow. The same thing should be done for the left and right overbanks. The assumed flow paths for the channel and overbank areas are shown as dashed lines in below figure. These lines will not only help in drawing the cross sections perpendicular to the flow lines, but they also represent the centroid flow path for measuring the reach lengths between the cross sections.

Figure-3.4.png

Cross sections are required at representative locations throughout a stream reach and at locations where changes occur in discharge, slope, shape, or roughness, at locations where levees begin or end and at bridges or inline control structures such as weirs. Where abrupt changes occur, several cross sections should be used to describe the change regardless of the distance between cross sections.

Cross section spacing is also a function of stream size, slope, and the uniformity of cross section shape. In general, large uniform rivers of flat slope normally require the fewest number of cross sections per mile. The purpose of the study also affects spacing of cross sections. For instance, navigation studies on large relatively flat streams may require closely spaced (e.g., 200 feet) cross sections to analyze the effect of local conditions on low flow depths, whereas cross sections for sedimentation studies, to determine deposition in reservoirs, may be spaced at intervals on the order of miles.

The choice of friction loss equation may also influence the spacing of cross sections. For instance, cross section spacing may be maximized when calculating an M1 profile (backwater profile) with the average friction slope equation or when the harmonic mean friction slope equation is used to compute M2 profiles (drawdown profile). The HEC‑RAS software provides the option to let the program select the friction slope equation.

Each cross section in a HEC‑RAS model is identified by a river, reach, and river station. The cross section geometry is described by entering the station and elevation (X‑Y data) from left to right, with respect to looking in the downstream direction. The river station may correspond to stationing along the channel, mile points, or any fictitious numbering system. The numbering system must be consistent in that HEC‑RAS assumes that higher river stations are upstream and lower river stations are downstream.

Each data point in the cross section geometry is given a station number corresponding to the horizontal distance from a starting point on the left. Up to 500 data points may be used to describe the cross section geometry. Cross section data are traditionally defined looking in the downstream direction. The program considers the left side of the stream to have the lowest station numbers and the right side to have the highest. Cross section data are allowed to have negative stationing values. Stationing must be entered from left to right in increasing order. However, more than one point can have the same stationing value, as in the case of a vertical wall. The left and right stations separating the main channel from the overbank areas must be specified for the cross section. End points of a cross section that are too low (below the computed water surface elevation) will automatically be extended vertically and a computational note indicating that the cross section has been extended will show up in the output for that cross section. The program adds additional wetted perimeter for any water that comes into contact with the extended vertical walls.

Other data are required for each cross section:

  • Downstream reach lengths
  • Roughness coefficients
  • Contraction and expansion coefficients

Numerous program options are available to allow the user to easily add or modify cross section data. For example, when the user wishes to repeat a surveyed cross section, an option is available from the interface to make a copy of any cross section. Once a cross section is copied, other options are available to allow the user to modify the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the repeated cross section data.

Cross Sections › Banks & Bank Stations

Bank Station Placement

In a hydrological model, bank stations are used to define the geometry of a river channel and specify the locations of hydraulic structures and other features.

A bank station divides a river channel into three distinct conveyance zones: the left overbank, the main channel, and the right overbank. This segregation simplifies the calculation of energy loss in the system using Manning's equations. Therefore, the importance of bank station placement cannot be overstated. This article outlines the best practices that a user can follow for optimal bank station placement in CivilGEO software.

Common Mistakes to Avoid

The following mistakes should be avoided when placing bank stations:

Placing Bank Stations at Grade Break

Bank stations are typically placed at the grade break between the physical channel and the flatter overbanks, as shown below.

Bank-Station-Placement-Image-1.png

The placement of a bank station should always be determined based on the location of the change in conveyance. For instance, excessive roughness pushes the boundary between conveyance zones down closer to the toe of the banks. This is often the case where thick vegetation occurs down the banks of the channel, as shown below.

Bank-Station-Placement-Image-2.png

Placing Bank Stations at Lower Depth

For a cross section with two channels of varying depths, it may seem logical to place the bank stations in the deeper channel.

Bank-Station-Placement-Image-3.png

However, before making this decision it is important to check the upstream and downstream sections of the river of the specific cross section. It is possible that the smaller channel may carry most of the flow, while the other side is primarily a low-lying area.

Bank-Station-Placement-Image-4.png

Parameters to Consider

The above mistakes can be avoided by considering the below parameters when placing bank stations at a cross section:

  • Having aerial imagery behind the geometry schematic makes bank station placement easier. The user can study the reach above and below a cross section to correctly determine the location at which the bank station is to be placed.
  • When moving through a reach, the placement of bank stations should be consistent from cross section to cross section. Changes in main channel width should generally be gradual from one cross section to the next.
  • An essential step to constructing a model is the deliberate and methodical consideration of each cross section and the proper placement of each bank station.
  • If importing cross sections from GIS, make sure that the bank line delineation places the bank stations properly.
  • After importing cross sections, make sure to fine tune the bank station placement.

There are always exceptions, but the key thing to remember is that bank stations capture the change in conveyance between the main channel and the overbanks. In addition, make sure that the resulting channel width does not change too drastically from one cross section to another.

Cross Sections › Banks & Bank Stations

Assign Channel Banks Command

Channel bank locations identify the boundaries of the main channel within each cross section. HEC-RAS uses these stations to divide the cross section into the left overbank, main channel, and right overbank subsections. This subdivision affects conveyance, hydraulic radius, velocity distribution, and the application of Manning’s roughness values.

In GeoHECRAS, the Assign Channel Banks command allows the user to assign channel bank locations using polylines or polygons, assumed channel normal flow depth, defined channel width, HEC-RAS computed water surface elevations for low flow conditions, or end points of the cross sections. Selecting the correct method can reduce the time required to edit bank stations individually while maintaining consistency across a river reach.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Channel Banks command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Assign Entities dropdown menu and select the Assign Channel Banks command.
    unknown node
  2. The Assign Channel Banks dialog box will be displayed.
    unknown node

The Assign Channel Banks dialog box contains five panels, each representing a different method for assigning channel bank locations. The following sections describe each panel in detail and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Polyline/Polygon

The Polyline/Polygon panel assigns the channel bank locations by projecting the intersections of drawn polylines or polygons onto the cross sections. This method is useful when the channel edge is already digitized as a GIS layer or drawn on the Map View.

Selecting Cross Sections

The Select Cross Sections section is used to manually select the cross sections for assigning channel bank locations. If a cross section is already selected on the Map View prior to running this command, the same cross section will be shown selected within the table.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to interactively select the cross sections from the Map View. The user can also click on the river reach, and all associated cross sections will be selected. Clicking the [Select All] button causes all the cross sections to be selected. The user can click the [Clear All] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

In addition, the user can filter the specific river reaches to be shown in the table listing. Once the cross sections are selected, the number of selected cross sections will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.

Selecting Channel Bank Elements

The Select Channel Bank Elements section allows the user to select the polylines or polygons to be associated as channel banks. Click the [Pick] button to select the bank polylines or polygons from the Map View. The software will first determine where the thalweg location is on the cross section. It will then move outward from the thalweg until a previously selected bank polyline or polygon edge is reached. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

Process Channel Bank Elements

This section contains the Replace existing channel banks checkbox option. This option causes the software to replace already defined cross section channel banks for cross sections that are processed by defined channel bank polylines. By default, this checkbox option is checked.

Channel Depth

The Channel Depth panel is used to assign the channel bank locations at the cross sections using the assumed channel normal flow depth.

Assign Channel Banks Command Img 3

Selecting Cross Sections

The Select Cross Sections section allows the user to manually select the cross sections for assigning channel bank locations.

Assigning Bank Stations

The Assign Bank Stations section allows the user to define the channel depth and maximum channel width to construct channel bank locations. The software will first determine where the thalweg location is on the cross section. It will then move outward from the thalweg until the requested channel depth is reached within the maximum channel width specified.

The Channel depth entry field specifies the depth used to define the top of the channel. By default, the software uses a value of 3 ft.

The Maximum channel width entry field limits how far outward from the thalweg the search will extend. By default, the software uses a value of 300 ft. Clicking the […] button allows the user to measure the maximum channel width from the Map View.

Process Channel Bank Elements

This section contains the Replace existing channel banks checkbox option. This option causes the software to replace already defined cross section channel banks for cross sections that are processed by a defined channel depth.

Channel Width

The Channel Width panel is used to assign the channel bank locations at the cross sections using a defined channel width. This method works well where the channel width is reasonably uniform, and the thalweg is near the center of the channel.

Assign Channel Banks Command Img 4

Selecting Cross Sections

The Select Cross Sections section allows the user to manually select the cross sections for assigning channel bank locations.

Assigning Bank Stations

The Assign Bank Stations section allows the user to define a maximum channel width for assigning channel bank locations. The software will first determine where the thalweg location is on the cross section. It will then move outward from the thalweg equally until the requested channel width is reached. The Channel width entry field allows the user to enter a maximum channel width. By default, the software uses a value of 300 ft. The user can enter a different value or click the […] button to measure the maximum channel width from the Map View.

Process Channel Bank Elements

This section contains the Replace existing channel banks checkbox option. This option causes the software to replace already defined cross section channel banks for cross sections that are processed by a defined channel width.

WSEL Results

The WSEL Results panel is used to assign channel bank locations using the computed water surface elevations for low flow conditions.

Assign Channel Banks Command Img 5

Selecting Cross Sections

The Select Cross Sections section allows the user to manually select cross sections for assigning channel bank locations.

Selecting Output Profile

The Select Output Profile section allows the user to select the computed water surface elevation profile to be used as baseline low flow and then move channel bank locations to the next point above the water surface. From the Water surface profile dropdown combo box, the user can select the previously computed water surface profile to use as the basis for bank assignment.

Bank Assignment

The Bank Assignment section provides the following options for controlling where exactly the channel bank location is placed relative to the water surface elevation:

  • Next existing ground point above water surface: When this option is selected, the software places the channel bank location at the next existing ground point on the cross section that rises above the selected water surface elevation.
  • Create new ground point above water surface: When this option is selected, the software creates a new ground point on the cross section above the water surface elevation plus the specified height offset and places the channel bank location at that new point. By default, the software uses a height of 1ft, but the user can enter a different value.
unknown node

Cross Section (XS) End Points

The XS End Points panel is used to assign the leftmost and/or rightmost ground station of each cross section as the channel bank locations. This method is useful for schematic models or cross sections that have already been trimmed to the channel extents.

Assign Channel Banks Command Img 6

Selecting Cross Sections

The Select Cross Sections section allows the user to manually select cross sections for assigning channel bank locations.

Assigning Bank Stations

The Assign Bank Stations section provides the following options to select which end point of the cross section is used to construct channel bank locations:

  • Use leftmost ground station: When this checkbox option is checked, the software will use the leftmost ground station on the cross sections to be set as the channel bank location.
  • Use rightmost ground station: When this checkbox option is checked, the software will use the rightmost ground station on the cross sections to be set as the channel bank location.

Process Channel Bank Elements

This section contains the Replace existing channel banks checkbox option. This option causes the software to replace already defined cross section channel banks for cross sections that are processed by a defined channel bank outward ground station.

Assigning Channel Banks

When the data have been defined in the Assign Channel Banks dialog box, click the [OK] button. The software will then look at each selected option and assign the channel bank locations to all selected cross sections.

unknown node
Cross Sections › Manning's Roughness & Land Cover

Assign Manning's Data (HEC-RAS)

In GeoHERAS, the Assign Manning's Data command allows the user to extract and assign Manning's roughness to cross sections for 1D modeling reaches and 2D roadway crossings. To learn how to define roadway crossings, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Manning's Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Manning's Roughness dropdown menu, and select the Assign Manning's Data command.Assign Manning's Data command
  2. The Assign Manning's Data dialog box will be displayed.Assign Manning's Data dialog box

The above dialog box contains two panels:

  • 1D Cross Sections
  • 2D Roadway Crossings

The dialog box will default to either the 1D Cross Sections or 2D Roadway Crossings panel based on the following criteria:

  • If the user has only 1D elements in the model, the 1D Cross Sections panel will be displayed by default and the 2D Roadway Crossings panel will be disabled.
  • If the user has only 2D elements in the model, the 2D Roadway Crossings panel will be displayed by default and the 1D Cross Sections panel will be disabled.
  • If the user has both 1D and 2D elements in the model, the 1D Cross Sections panel will be displayed by default.

The following sections describe how to use the Assign Manning’s Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Assigning Manning’s Data for 1D Cross Sections

The 1D Cross Sections panel of the Assign Manning’s Data command is used to assign Manning’s roughness data to each selected cross section for the 1D modeling reaches.

The following sections are available in this panel:

Cross Section Selection

This section is used to manually select the cross sections for purposes of assigning Manning's roughness. If a cross section is already selected on the Map View prior to running this command, the same cross section will be shown selected within the table.

Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to interactively select the cross sections from the Map View. The user can also click on the river reach and all associated cross sections will be selected. Clicking the [Select All] button causes all the cross sections to be selected. The user can click the [Clear All] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process. In addition, the user can filter the specific river reaches to be shown in the table listing. Once the cross sections are selected, the number of selected cross sections will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.

NLCD Layer

The NLCD Layer displays both natural and man-made land cover using the national land cover developed by the Multi-Resolution Land Characteristics (MRLC) Consortium. The NLCD Layer tab panel contains the NLCD Land Cover Database (optional) checkbox option. This optional section allows the user to assign Manning’s roughness to the selected cross sections based on the land use information downloaded from the NLCD map service.

Note that for countries other than the USA, the software provides similar land cover databases. The content of this data panel will change to represent the one that is available for the project area. Currently, our software supports Africa, Australia, Canada, Europe, India, New Zealand, and the USA land cover database.

NLCD Layer tab panel

The Layer cover data source dropdown combo box allows the user to select which land use data sources to utilize for the newly created layer. By default, the software selects the most recent land use data. The following options are available in the dropdown combo box:

  • NLCD Land Cover 2021 (default)
  • NLCD Land Cover 2019
  • NLCD Land Cover 2016
  • NLCD Land Cover 2013
  • NLCD Land Cover 2011
  • NLCD Land Cover 2008
  • NLCD Land Cover 2006
  • NLCD Land Cover 2004
  • NLCD Land Cover 2001Layer cover data source dropdown entry

The Apply Manning’s coverage data to overbank areas only checkbox option causes the software to not assign channel roughness values (between the bank stations) from the Manning’s area layer. Generally, the channel roughness is uniform along a river or stream, and not defined by coverage area.

The Insert ground stationing where NLCD tile intersects checkbox option is checked by default. If this checkbox option is checked and if the NLCD tile is within 3 feet (1 meter) of an existing ground point, the existing ground point will be used. If not, a new ground point is inserted into the cross section at the point of intersection where the NLCD tile intersects. If this checkbox option is not checked, then the nearest cross section ground point to the point of intersection where the NLCD tile intersects will be used.

The user can click the [Edit] button to display the NLCD Land Cover dialog box that provides an editable data grid, allowing the user to change the Manning’s roughness values of different hydrologic soil groups.

NLCD Land Cover dialog box

After editing the required cell values, the user can click the following buttons:

  • [Default] – This button will restore the default Manning’s roughness values and close the dialog box.
  • [Save] – This button will save the user changes and close the dialog box.
  • [Cancel] – This button will discard any changes made by the user and close the dialog box.

Polygon Layer

This optional section allows the user to map polygon shapefile data as Manning’s roughness data.

Polygon Layer tab panel

The Manning’s area layer dropdown combo box allows the user to select the layers that contain Manning’s roughness value. This dropdown combo box lists only loaded polygon shapefiles. If there is no layer selected, the user can still complete the assignment of Manning’s roughness using the default values.

The Attribute field dropdown combo box allows the user to select the corresponding Manning’s roughness attribute field contained within the selected roughness shapefile.

The Minimum value and Maximum value read-only fields show the minimum and maximum float values contained in the selected shapefile and attribute fields. This allows the user to determine if the selected attribute field is correct. If the selected attribute field does not contain float values, then these fields show Not Available.

Note that the Apply Manning’s coverage data to overbank areas only checkbox option works similarly to the Apply Manning’s coverage data to overbank areas only checkbox option provided in the NLCD Layer panel.

The Insert ground stationing where polygon coverage intersects checkbox option is checked by default. If this checkbox option is checked and if the Manning's roughness polygon is within 3 feet (1 meter) of an existing ground point, the existing ground point will be used. If not, a new ground point is inserted (using linear interpolation) into the cross section at the point of intersection with the cross section and Manning's roughness polygon. If this checkbox option is not checked, then the nearest cross section ground point to the point of intersection and Manning's roughness polygon will be used.

Channel Values

This optional section allows the user to control Manning’s values for the channel. There are two options for assigning Manning’s roughness. The user can either choose the Set Manning’s to channel value or the Assign Manning’s value option.

Channel Values tab panel

The Set Manning’s to channel center value option will set the Manning's n value to a center value for all selected cross sections that have more than one n value inside of the channel.

The Assign Manning’s value option allows the user to change any individual Manning’s values for the selected cross section. By default, the software uses a value of 0.032. The user can also enter a different value or click the […] browse button to display the information table for Manning’s roughness values that can be assigned.

Overbank Values

The Overbank Values tab panel is used to assign roughness values to the overbank parts of a cross section where the data contained in the NLCD Layer and Polygon Layer panels do not cover the cross section overbanks. These overbank values are only assigned if the Assign left overbank Manning’s value and Assign right overbank Manning’s value checkboxes are checked.

Overbank Values tab panel

The Assign left overbank Manning’s value checkbox option allows the user to assign Manning’s roughness to the left overbank areas. By default, the software uses a value of 0.045. The user can also enter a different value or click the […] browse button to display the information table for Manning’s roughness values that can be assigned.

The Assign right overbank Manning’s value checkbox option allows the user to assign Manning’s roughness to the right overbank areas. By default, the software uses a value of 0.045. The user can also enter a different value or click the […] browse button to display the information table for Manning’s roughness values that can be assigned.

Roughness

The Roughness tab panel is used to define the default values when a new cross section is created on the Map View using the assign or draw commands.

Roughness tab panel

This panel provides the following fields to define default Manning’s roughness values:

The Left overbank Manning’s entry field allows the user to define the default Manning’s roughness to be applied to the left overbank areas (looking in a downstream direction) that do not have Manning’s roughness data defined. By default, the software uses a value of 0.045. The user can also enter a different value or click the […] browse button to display the information table for Manning’s roughness values that can be assigned. A blank entry is not allowed.

The Channel Manning’s entry field allows the user to define the default Manning’s roughness to be applied to the channel areas that do not have Manning’s roughness data defined. By default, the software uses a value of 0.032. The user can also enter a different value or click the […] browse button to display the information table for Manning’s roughness values that can be assigned. A blank entry is not allowed.

The Right overbank Manning’s entry field allows the user to define the default Manning’s roughness to be applied to the right overbank areas (looking in a downstream direction) that do not have Manning’s roughness data defined. By default, the software uses a value of 0.045. The user can also enter a different value or click the […] browse button to display the information table for Manning’s roughness values that can be assigned. A blank entry is not allowed.

When the data have been defined in the 1D Cross Sections panel of the Assign Manning’s Data dialog box, click the [OK] button. The software will then assign Manning's roughness to each selected cross section for 1D modeling reaches.

Assigning Manning’s Data for 2D Roadway Crossings

The 2D Roadway Crossings panel of the Assign Manning’s Data command is used to assign Manning’s roughness data for the cross sections defined at a 2D roadway crossing.

2D Roadway Crossings panel

2D Roadway Crossings - Cross Sections

This section is used to manually select cross sections defined at a 2D roadway crossing for assigning Manning's roughness. If a 2D roadway crossing corresponding cross section is already selected on the Map View prior to running this command, the same cross section will be shown selected within the table.

Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to interactively select the 2D roadway crossing corresponding cross sections from the Map View. The user can also click on the 2D roadway crossing structure and all associated cross sections will be selected. Clicking the [Select All] button causes all the cross sections to be selected. The user can click the [Clear All] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process. Once the 2D roadway crossing corresponding cross sections are selected, the number of selected cross sections will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.

Note that the remaining sections of this panel are similar to that of the 1D Cross Sections panel. Refer to the Assigning Manning’s Data for 1D Cross Sections part of this article to learn more about them.

When the data have been defined in the 2D Roadway Crossings panel, click the [OK] button. The software will then assign Manning’s roughness data to the selected cross sections defined at a 2D roadway crossing.

Cross Sections › Manning's Roughness & Land Cover

Create and Assign Land Cover Data as Manning’s Roughness

Engineers use land cover datasets to assign manning's n values quickly and account for flow resistance, especially over large areas. It is a popular approach because of its ability to reduce HEC-RAS modeling time, improve data quality, increase data availability in digital format, and improve the ability to manage and visualize geospatial information in GIS.

CivilGEO software allows the users to import land use information in polygon (shapefile) and gridded formats. Additionally, the software allows the user to use the National Land Cover Database (NLCD) web map service to obtain gridded land cover data and automatically compute Manning's n values based on land cover. The National Land Cover Database provides land cover data for the entire United States. The software can dynamically download an NLCD raster land cover grid for the area being modeled. Each 75ft x 75ft land cover grid cell represents a specific land type. Up to 20 different land types and corresponding Manning’s roughness values are provided.

The user can use user-defined land cover polygon shapefiles or the National Land Cover Database (NLCD) web map service to assign Manning’s roughness to cross sections and 2D flow areas. Furthermore, the user can import multiple land cover layers (NLCD raster grid layer, Manning’s roughness polygons layer, etc.) and merge them into a single composite land cover map layer. The user can later utilize the composite land cover map layer to assign Manning’s roughness to a specific scenario (plan).

Creating 2D Land Cover

In GeoHECRAS, the Create 2D Land Cover command allows the user to add multiple land use data input files to create a single land use coverage layer. For example, a user may want to use USGS NLCD 2016 gridded land use data as the base land use coverage data. However, a user may also want to use or generate a polygon coverage (shapefile) that is more accurate for many of the areas within the study region (i.e., the main channel regions, buildings, roads, etc.). By setting the more accurate shapefile as the higher priority, the land use data from the shapefile will be used unless it does not cover portions of the specified area, in which case the USGS gridded data will be used for those areas. The software processes the various land use data types, creates a composite land cover layer, and stores it as a GeoTIFF file (a companion *.hdf file generated).

To create a composite 2D land cover layer, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Manning’s Roughness dropdown menu and then choose the Create 2D Land Cover command.Manning's Roughness dropdown menu
  2. The Create 2D Land Cover dialog box will be displayed.Create 2D Land Cover dialog box

The following sections describe how to create a composite 2D land cover layer and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Land Cover Layers

The Select Land Cover Layers section allows the user to select the existing land cover layers in the project as well as the NLCD grided land use data in order to merge them into a single composite land cover layer. Furthermore, the user can adjust the priority for merging the land cover layers and define the naming convention for the combined land use data.

Existing land cover layer

This dropdown combo box allows the user to select one or more land use data layers that will be merged into a single composite land cover layer.

To select one or more land use files of varying types, follow the steps below:

  1. Click the Existing land cover layer dropdown combo box and select a land use layer.Existing land cover layer dropdown
  2. Click the [Add] button.Add button Note that selecting NLCD Land Cover layer in the Existing land cover layer dropdown combo box entry displays an additional Land cover data source dropdown combo box entry. This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to select which land use data source to utilize for the newly created land cover layer. By default, the software selects the most recent land use data. The following options are available in the dropdown combo box:

    • NLCD Land Cover 2021 (default)
    • NLCD Land Cover 2019
    • NLCD Land Cover 2016
    • NLCD Land Cover 2013
    • NLCD Land Cover 2011
    • NLCD Land Cover 2008
    • NLCD Land Cover 2006
    • NLCD Land Cover 2004
    • NLCD Land Cover 2001Land cover data source dropdown
  3. The selected land cover layer will be added to the Land Cover Layers table.Land Cover Layers data table
  4. To add more land cover layers, repeat the above steps.

Selected land cover layers

This subsection displays the source land cover layers that will be merged to create a composite layer in a tabular form. If more than one land use file is selected, the user can use the up and down arrows in the Land Cover Layers table to move the listed files.

Land Cover Layers data table

Note that the order of the land cover layers in the table determines the priority of land use data. The layer at the top of the list is granted the highest priority, and so on.

Selected land cover layer mapping

This subsection allows the user to define the land cover naming convention. Because the software supports multiple land use files and types, the user will have to select one of the established naming conventions or provide a custom naming convention for each land use type.

Land Cover Layer Definition data table

The Land cover naming convention dropdown combo box allows the user to set the naming convention for a shapefile. Currently, there are three options for defining the names of the land use types:

  • Anderson II
  • Custom
  • NLCD 2011
Land Cover Limits section

The Land Cover Layer Definition table defines the one-to-one mapping of the source layer Land Use Field Values to the user-defined Land Cover Label and associated Manning’s n value. The software will automatically specify the mapping settings. However, the table cells can be edited (except the layer name) to modify mapping settings. Note that the user cannot keep the Manning’s n value field empty or 0. Otherwise, the software will generate an error while running the analysis.

Land Cover Limits

This section allows the user to define the extent of the land cover grid file to be generated.

Land Cover Limits section

The following options are provided:

  • Land cover source limit: Selecting this option causes the software to use the extent of the GIS source land cover layer to define the land cover limits of the composite land cover grid.
  • User-defined limits: Selecting this option allows the user to manually define the land cover limits of the land cover layer from the Map View. After selecting this option, the user can click the [Pick] button to select a rectangular region from the Map View that will define the land cover limits of the composite land cover grid file.
  • Model extents: Selecting this option causes the software to use the current model’s extent to define the land cover limits of the composite land cover grid. By default, this option is selected.

Land Cover Processing Specifications

This section allows the user to define the processing options for generating the composite land cover grid file.

Land Cover Processing Specifications section

The Land cover grid file input field is used to define the name and the directory address where the composite land cover grid file will be saved.

The Load grid as map layer checkbox causes the software to add the composite land cover layer in the Map Data Layers panel. By default, this checkbox is checked. The software automatically defines the name of this layer based on the land cover grid file name provided by the user. However, the user can change the name to whatever is desired by clicking the pen icon next to this field.

The Land cover grid CRS dropdown combo box allows the user to define the layer’s CRS (Coordinate Reference System). If there is only one CRS in the project, the software automatically selects it.

The Land cover grid cell size spin control button can be used to define the cell size of the land cover grid. By default, the software uses a value of 15 ft.

Based on the defined grid cell size and the extent of land cover, the Grid resolution details subsection displays the total number of cells and count of columns and rows that the land cover grid file will contain.

Once all the options in the Create 2D Land Cover dialog box are defined, click the [Create] button. The software will combine the source land cover layers to create a single composite land cover grid file at the specified location. If the Load grid as map layer checkbox was left checked, the newly created land cover grid will be added in the Map Data Layers panel.

Assign Land Cover Data as Manning’s Roughness

Once the user has created a land cover layer and added some user-defined classification regions, the user-created 2D land cover as Manning’s roughness can be linked to a specific scenario (plan).

The Scenario Manager command of the Input ribbon menu allows the user to associate a land cover layer as Manning’s roughness to a specific scenario (plan).

Scenario Manager command

The user can check the 2D land cover layer checkbox and then select the required layer from the dropdown combo box that will be associated with the selected scenario (plan).

Scenario Manager dialog box

To learn more about the Scenario Manager command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Cross Sections › Manning's Roughness & Land Cover

Flow Roughness Change Factors Command

The Flow Roughness Change Factors command allows the user to adjust roughness coefficients with changes in flow. It enables the user to adjust roughness coefficients up or down individually as well as in a group to calibrate a HEC-RAS model to observed data.

This feature is very useful for calibrating an unsteady flow model for flows that vary from low to high. Note that roughness generally decreases with increases in flow and depth. In other words, for shallow, lower flows the Manning’s roughness can be increased to a higher value, but for deep, higher flows the Manning’s roughness will be reduced to a lower value.

For example, agricultural areas might become flooded during a large storm event. Depending upon the amount of discharge and corresponding flood depth, the surface roughness can vary. If the flood depth is shallow, the Manning’s roughness would be high. But, as discharge increases, and the corresponding flood depth becomes deeper, the agricultural crops would flatten, and the Manning’s roughness would be reduced.

flood-hamilton.jpg

Assigning Flow Roughness Change Factors

Follow the steps below to use the Flow Roughness Change Factors command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Manning’s Roughness menu item and then select the Flow Roughness Change Factors command.
    Flow Roughness Change Factors Command
  2. The Flow Roughness Change Factors dialog box will be displayed.
    Flow Roughness Change Factors dialog box

The following sections describe the Flow Roughness Change Factors command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting River Reach

The Select River Reach section enables the user to select the desired river reach. Click the [Pick] button adjacent to the Reach name entry. The dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt is displayed on the status line, informing the user what to do next. Select the river by clicking on it in the Map View.

Select River Reach

Alternatively, the user can click the dropdown combo boxes adjacent to the River name and the Reach name entries and select the desired river reach.

Roughness Factor Data

This section displays a table listing different flow data and their respective roughness coefficients corresponding to their respective cross sections. The user can export the table as a PDF file or a Microsoft Excel file, or copy the table to the clipboard.

Roughness Factor Editing

This section enables the user to automatically generate multiple flow data as well as batch edit the flow and roughness factor data. It contains two tabs:

  • Selected Cell Editing
  • Auto Generate Flows

Selected Cell Editing Tab

The Selected Cell Editing section enables the user to select the desired cells from the Roughness Factor Data table and then edit the flow and roughness coefficients either individually or in a batch. The user can edit the coefficients using:

  • Add constant
  • Multiply by a factor
  • Apply value

To edit the cell’s coefficient, select the cell by clicking on it while pressing the [Ctrl] or [Shift] key; choose the desired cell-editing option; enter the change coefficient, and then click the [Apply Change] button.

Editing Selected Cells

Auto Generate Flow Tab

The Auto Generate Flow section enables the user to automatically generate the river flow based on user-desired options. Simply select the upstream and the downstream cross sections from the respective dropdown combo box and enter the starting flow value. Then, select the flow growth type. It can be either uniform spacing or exponential.

Auto Generate Flows tab

Enter the uniform increase value or the increase factor coefficient, and then select the number of flows to generate. Next, click the [Apply] button.

Cross Sections › Contraction & Expansion

HEC‑RAS Contraction & Expansion Losses

Flood-Constricted-at-Bridge-Opening.jpg

Losses due to contraction and expansion of flow between cross sections are determined during the HEC‑RAS standard step profile calculations. Manning’s equation is used to calculate friction losses, and all other losses are described in terms of a coefficient multiplied by the absolute value of the change in velocity head between adjacent cross sections. When the velocity head increases in the downstream direction, a contraction coefficient is used; and when the velocity head decreases, an expansion coefficient is used.

Roadway Crossing Flow Contraction & Expansion

The below figure shows the contraction and expansion of flow as it passes through a bridge or culvert opening at a roadway crossing.

hec-ras-contraction-expansion-losses.png

As shown in the above figure, flow contraction occurs between cross sections 4 and 3, while the flow expansion occurs between sections 2 and 1. The contraction and expansion coefficients are used to compute energy losses associated with changes in the shape of river cross sections (or effective flow areas). The loss due to expansion of flow is usually larger than the contraction loss, and losses from short abrupt transitions are larger than losses from gradual transitions.

Subcritical Flow Contraction & Expansion Coefficients

Typical values for contraction and expansion coefficients for subcritical flow conditions are shown in the table below. The maximum value for the contraction and expansion coefficient is 1.0.

Table 1
Subcritical Flow Contraction and Expansion Coefficients

unknown node

Supercritical Flow Contraction & Expansion Coefficients

In general, contraction and expansion coefficients for supercritical flow are lower than for subcritical flow. For typical bridges that are under class C flow conditions (totally supercritical flow), the contraction and expansion coefficients should be around 0.03 and 0.05, respectively. For abrupt bridge transitions under class C flow, values of 0.05 and 0.1 may be more appropriate.

Utilizing Contraction and Expansion Coefficients for Unsteady Flow

The application of contraction and expansion coefficients for unsteady flow differs from steady flow modeling. In general, contraction and expansion losses are not utilized for unsteady flow. Therefore, the default coefficients are 0.0. The losses due to contraction and expansion are handled in the momentum equation through pressure force differences.

However, since HEC-RAS is a one-dimensional unsteady flow model, the one-dimensional momentum equation may not fully capture all the forces acting on the flow field within zones of sharp contraction and/or expansion. To better approximate the forces acting on the water and the resulting water surface elevation, at a contraction and/or expansion, users can input empirical contraction and expansion coefficients during unsteady flow modeling.

In unsteady flow modeling, the contraction and expansion coefficients are typically used at the following structures:

  • Bridges
  • Culverts
  • Other internal boundary locations where energy-based methods are applied

For these structures, the contraction and expansion coefficients are typically used to compute additional head losses.

In GeoHECRAS, the user can view and edit contraction and expansion coefficients in a tabular format using the Edit Contraction & Expansion Coefficients command.

Edit Contraction & Expansion Coefficients Command

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about editing contraction and expansion coefficients.

Cross Sections › Contraction & Expansion

Editing of Contraction and Expansion Coefficients

Contraction or expansion of flow due to changes in the cross section is a common cause of energy losses within reach (between two cross sections). Whenever this occurs, the loss is computed from the contraction and expansion coefficients specified in the cross section data. To learn more about contraction and expansion losses, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

In GeoHECRAS, the Edit Contraction & Expansion Coefficients command allows the user to view and edit contraction and expansion coefficients in a tabular format. The user can modify a group of contraction or expansion coefficient values as follows:

  • By adding a constant to coefficient values
  • By multiplying coefficient values by a factor
  • By changing coefficient values to a specific value

The user can also go directly into the table and change any individual values.

In addition, cut, copy, and paste commands are provided to pass data to and from the Windows clipboard. The contraction and expansion coefficients are shaded in different colors to make it easier to distinguish between contraction and expansion coefficients in the table.

Follow the steps below to use the Edit Contraction & Expansion Coefficients command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Cross Sections dropdown menu and then select the Edit Contraction & Expansion Coefficients command. Edit Contraction & Expansion Coefficients Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Edit Contraction & Expansion Coefficients dialog box will be displayed. Edit Contraction & Expansion Coefficients dialog box

The following sections describe the Edit Contraction & Expansion Coefficients command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Cross Section Contraction & Expansion Coefficients

This section is used to select the river and the corresponding reach for editing the contraction and expansion coefficients. The user can select the river and the reach from the River and Reach dropdown combo boxes, respectively. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the river reach from the Map View.

The data grid will list all the corresponding cross sections of the selected river reach and their contraction and expansion coefficients values.

Note that structures such as culverts, lateral structures, and roadway crossings falling within the reach are identified in the Type column. The corresponding rows for the Contraction and Expansion columns will be disabled.

The right-click context menu of the data grid displays the commands to cut, copy, and paste data to and from the Windows clipboard. In addition, the user can export the grid data to excel or pdf format and delete the grid data.

data grid right-click context menu commands

Selected Cells Group Editing

This section provides different options for the user to edit the grid data. The user must first select the values that the user would like to change. To select a group of values, place the mouse in the upper-left cell of the desired cells to select, then press the left mouse button and drag the cursor to the lower-left corner of the desired cells. When the left mouse button is released, the selected cells will be highlighted.

Selected Cells Group Editing section

After selecting the desired cells to be modified, use one of the following options:

  • No change This is the default option. No changes will be made in the contraction and expansion coefficient values when this radio button option is selected.
  • Add constant Select this radio button option to add a constant value to a group of contraction and expansion coefficient values. After selecting this option, the user must enter a constant value in the entry field provided next to this option. This value will be added to all the cells that are selected.
  • Multiply by factor Select this radio button option to multiply a group of contraction and expansion coefficient values by a factor. The user must enter a value in the entry field provided next to this option. This value will be multiplied by each of the selected cells’ values.
  • Apply value Select this radio button option to set a group of contraction or expansion coefficient values to the same number. The user must enter a specific contraction or expansion coefficient value in the entry field provided next to this option. This value will replace all of the selected values. The user can click the […] lookup button to display the Expansion Contraction Coefficients lookup dialog box. Expansion Contraction Coefficients dialog box

After selecting the desired option and entering the required value, the user can click the [Apply Change] button to modify the values in the data grid.

Note that the [Apply Change] button will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) when the No change radio button option is selected.

The user can click the [Default] button to restore the values of the coefficients to the default values.

When the grid data has been modified, click the [OK] button to save the changes and close the dialog box.

Cross Sections › Ineffective Flow & Conveyance Obstructions

HEC-RAS Minor Loss Coefficients

Minor losses represent sources of energy depletion along a river reach that are not related to friction loss. For example, minor losses are energy losses related to expansions and contractions along a reach, secondary currents, spiral currents, and eddies. They are generally created by increased turbulence and resistance to flow at areas in the reach where the direction of flow is changed or where other obstructions are present.

HEC-RAS-Minor-Loss-Coefficients.png

The most commonly encountered minor losses are:

  • Head losses due to a sudden enlargement of the cross section
  • Head losses due to a sudden contraction of the cross section
  • Head losses due to an obstruction (gates, valves, metering devices, etc.)
  • Head losses at bends and changes in flow direction

Significance of Minor Loss

Minor losses account for a significant percentage of the total energy loss in a reach. They must be entered into the total energy loss calculations to prevent discrepancies between actual conditions and HEC-RAS computed results.

Defining HEC-RAS Minor Loss Coefficients

Follow the steps below to define HEC-RAS minor loss coefficients:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Cross Sections menu item and then select the Edit Minor Loss Coefficients command.
    Ribbon Menu Command
  1. The Edit Minor Loss Coefficients dialog box will be displayed.
    Edit Minor Loss Coefficients dialog box

The following sections describe the Edit Minor Loss Coefficients command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Cross Section Minor Loss Coefficients

This section allows the user to select the desired river reach. Click the [Pick] button adjacent to the Reach name entry. The dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt is displayed on the status line, informing the user what to do next. Select the river by clicking on it in the Map View.

Alternatively, the user can click the dropdown combo boxes adjacent to the River name and the Reach name entries and select the desired river reach.

This section displays a table listing the cross sections contained in the river reach and their respective minor loss coefficients. If an entry is blank, then no minor loss is applied to the cross section hydraulic computations. The user can export the table as a PDF file or a Microsoft Excel file, or copy the table to the clipboard.

Selected Cell Group Editing

This section enables the user to select the desired cells from the data table and then edit the minor loss coefficients either individually or in a batch. The user can edit the coefficients using:

  • Add constant
  • Multiply by a factor
  • Apply value

To edit the cells coefficient, select the cells by clicking on them while pressing the [Ctrl] or [Shift] key; choose the desired cell-editing option; enter the change coefficient, and then click the [Apply Change] button.

Meander Bend Minor Loss

Minor losses due to secondary and spiral currents are known as minor loss due to a meander bend and must be integrated into the model calculations. These losses can be accounted for in both steady flow and unsteady flow analysis. The minor loss coefficients can vary between 0.0 and 1.0. This loss coefficient gets multiplied by the velocity head at the cross section it corresponds to for calculating the minor energy loss. For steady flow computations, this energy loss gets added to the energy equation. For unsteady flow computations, the energy loss is converted to an equivalent force and then inserted into the momentum equation. In both cases, the energy loss is assumed to act as a force in the upstream direction slowing the flow down.

Since the average minor loss due to the meander bends through a meander bend is significant in the physical model, it is evident that spiral and secondary currents must be included in total energy loss calculations.

Calculating Minor Loss from a Meander Bend

Minor losses due to a meander bend are calculated by first calculating the average velocity, total energy, and friction loss at each cross section in the model. After these values are calculated at each cross section, total energy loss through each meander bend is calculated.

Cross Sectional Average Minor Loss due to Meander Bends Calculation

Once the average total energy loss between adjacent cross sections, the cross sectional average, and average friction losses are calculated, then the cross-sectional average minor loss due to meander bends (hBEND) is calculated by using the following equation:

HEC-RAS-Minor-Loss-Coefficients-image-4.png

Note that the total energy loss ht in a reach is the sum of all the head losses along the flow path. It is calculated using the following equation:

HEC-RAS-Minor-Loss-Coefficients-image-5.png

Average Minor Loss due to Meander Bends through Meander Bends Calculation

The cross sectional average minor loss due to meander bend calculated using Equation 1 is the final variable required to determine average minor loss due to meander bends. To calculate Average minor loss due to meander bends through a meander bend (hBEND-TOTAL) use the following equation:

HEC-RAS-Minor-Loss-Coefficients-image-6.png

Calculating Average Total Energy Loss through Meander Bend

Finally, the average total energy loss through the bend (hr) is calculated. It is important to determine how significant average minor loss due to a meander bend through each meander bend is to the average total loss through the bend computation. The average total energy loss through the bend (hr) is calculated using the following equation:

HEC-RAS-Minor-Loss-Coefficients-image-7.png
Cross Sections › Ineffective Flow & Conveyance Obstructions

HEC-RAS Ineffective Flow Areas

Ineffective flow areas allow the user to define areas of the cross section that will contain water that is not actively being conveyed. Ineffective flow areas are often used to describe portions of a cross section in which water will pond and the velocity of that water, in the downstream direction, is close to zero. This water is included in the storage calculations and other wetted cross section parameters, but is not included as part of the active flow area. When using ineffective flow areas, no additional wetted perimeter is added to the active flow area.

Ineffective-Flow-Area.png

Ineffective flow areas often occur near roadway crossings when water levels exceed the channel banks and when water cannot flow in the longitudinal direction along the overbank areas due to roadway fill. When this occurs, flow must contract to pass through the opening under the roadway, adding additional and often significant losses. However, if the roadway overtops, flow becomes possible in the overbank areas as well as in the main channel.

The below figure illustrates the ineffective flow areas upstream and downstream of a roadway crossing.

Bridge Opening ineffective flow areas

Ineffective Flow Area Types

There are two types of ineffective flow areas available:

  • Normal ineffective flow areas
  • Multiple blocks ineffective flow areas

Ineffective flow areas are defined in the Ineffective Flow Areas panel of the Cross Section Data dialog box.

Cross Section Data Dialog Box

Normal Ineffective Flow Areas

Normal ineffective flow areas allow the user to define a left station and elevation and a right station and elevation for the ineffective flow area. When this type is used, and if the water surface is below the established ineffective elevations, the areas to the left of the left station and to the right of the right station are considered ineffective. Once the water surface goes above either of the established elevations, then that specific area is no longer considered ineffective, and flow is considered to be conveyed.

Normal ineffective flow areas

Multiple Blocks Ineffective Flow Areas

Multiple blocks ineffective flow areas allow the user to define up to 10 individual blocks for each cross section. With this type of ineffective flow area, the user enters a left station, a right station, and an elevation for each of the blocks. An example of a cross section with multiple blocked ineffective flow areas is shown below. Once the water surface goes above the elevation of the blocked ineffective flow area, the blocked area is no longer considered ineffective.

Multiple blocks ineffective flow areas

Permanent Ineffective Flow Areas

An option is available to make the defined ineffective flow area “permanent” where it does not change into effectively carrying flow when the computed water surface elevation is above the defined ineffective flow area elevation.

This option is generally used only for unsteady flow models to dampen the oscillation that can occur when the software is attempting to converge to a water surface elevation and the computed water surface elevation is iterating and advancing simulation time steps. For example, if the computed water surface elevation is just above the defined ineffective flow area elevation for one time step, and then in the next time step the computed water surface elevation is just below the defined elevation, the available effective flow area will begin to oscillate. This may cause the unsteady flow computations to fail to converge to a solution. By making the ineffective flow areas “permanent”, this ineffective flow area oscillation is eliminated.

Defining Ineffective Flow Areas

The user can use the Cross Section Data dialog box to manually define the ineffective flow areas by selecting horizontal stations and elevations for each of the ineffective flow areas. The user can select the horizontal stations from either the Map View or from the displayed cross section plot.

Alternatively, the user can utilize GIS polyline or polygon data to define ineffective flow areas. Select the Assign Ineffective Flow Areas command from the Assign Entities dropdown combo box of the Input ribbon menu to display the Assign Ineffective Flow Areas dialog box.

Assign ineffective flow areas Dialog Box

From this dialog box, the user can select GIS polyline or polygon data to define the ineffective flow areas.

Cross Sections › Ineffective Flow & Conveyance Obstructions

HEC‑RAS Conveyance Obstructions

Conveyance obstructions allow the user to define areas at a cross section that are permanently blocked from conveying flow. Conveyance obstructions decrease flow area and add additional wetted perimeter where the water comes in contact with the obstruction. A conveyance obstruction does not prevent water from going outside of the obstruction.

Conveyance-Obstructions-from-Structures.png

Conveyance Obstruction Types

There are two types of conveyance obstructions available:

  • Normal conveyance obstructions
  • Multiple blocks conveyance obstructions

Conveyance obstructions are defined in the Cross Section Data dialog box, in the Conveyance Obstructions panel.

Cross-Section-Data-dialog-box-Conveyance-Obstructions

Normal Conveyance Obstructions

Normal conveyance obstructions allow the user to define a left station and elevation and a right station and elevation for the conveyance obstruction. When this type is used, the area to the left of the left station and to the right of the right station will be completely blocked out. An example of this type of conveyance obstruction is shown below.

Cross-Section-Plot-Normal-Conveyance-Obstructions

Multiple Blocks Conveyance Obstructions

Multiple blocks conveyance obstructions allow the user to define up to 20 individual blocks. With this type of obstruction, the user enters a left station, a right station, and an elevation for each of the blocks. An example of a cross section with multiple blocked obstructions is shown below.

Cross-Section-Plot-Multiple-Blocks-Conveyance-Obstructions

Defining Conveyance Obstructions

The user can use the Cross Section Data dialog box to manually define the conveyance obstructions by selecting horizontal stations and elevations for each of the obstructions. The user can select the horizontal stations from either the Map View or from the displayed cross section plot.

Alternatively, the user can utilize GIS polyline or polygon data to define conveyance obstructions. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Assign Entities menu item and then choose the Assign Conveyance Obstructions command. This will display the Assign Conveyance Obstructions dialog box.

Assign-Conveyance-Obstructions-dialog

From this dialog box, the user can select GIS polyline or polygon data to define the conveyance obstructions. An example of the completed conveyance obstruction from a building is shown below.

3D-Building-Conveyance-Obstruction.png
Bridges › Bridge Overview & Setup

HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling

The GeoHECRAS software can model roadway crossing bridges and culverts by using the Bridge & Culvert Data command. The Bridge & Culvert Data command defines the bridge & culvert data, roadway deck geometry, bridge piers, sloping abutments, ineffective flow areas, bridge methodology & parameters, multiple opening stations, internal geometry, and more.

The user can define bridge data for 1D flow areas in the same way as defining bridge data for a 2D model. HEC-RAS provides the same low flow (energy, momentum, and Yarnell) and high flow (energy and pressure/weir) bridge modeling approaches for both 1D and 2D bridge modeling.

unknown node

The following sections describe how to perform bridge modeling in GeoHECRAS.

Defining 1D Roadway Crossing Centerline

The roadway crossing centerline must be first defined to represent a bridge or culvert in a 1D model. The roadway crossing centerline must be drawn from left to right looking in a downstream direction.

To define the roadway crossing centerline, the user can use the Draw Roadway Crossings or Assign Roadway Crossings commands to either manually draw the roadway crossing centerline or assign an already existing polyline as the roadway centerline. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Draw Roadway Crossings or Assign Roadway Crossings commands.

1D Roadway Crossing Interior and Exterior Cross Sections

The software requires a minimum of four cross sections to be defined for modeling a roadway crossing. Two cross sections are defined at the downstream end of the roadway crossing structure. By contrast, the other two cross sections are defined at the upstream end of the roadway crossing structure. However, additional cross sections can also be defined upstream of the roadway crossing to account for additional backwater created upstream of the roadway crossing.

The two cross sections adjacent to the roadway crossing are placed in the full valley area adjacent to the roadway embankment. They represent the geometry of the river valley without the roadway embankment, which is the roadway fill area. These cross sections are called the Upstream Face Cross Section and the Downstream Face Cross Section since they are located very near the face of the roadway crossing structure.

The cross section drawn at the upstream end of the Upstream Face Cross Section is called the Approach Cross Section. This cross section is drawn upstream of the roadway crossing at a distance far enough where the impact of the flow contracting inward through the bridge or culvert opening is no longer felt. The cross section drawn downstream of the Downstream Face Cross Section is called the Exit Cross Section and is placed at a distance far enough in the downstream direction where the impact of the flow expanding outward is no longer considered significant.

1D Roadway Crossing Interior and Exterior Cross Sections

Entering Bridge Data

Once the 1D roadway crossing is defined, the user can enter the data for the 1D bridge in the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box.

Follow the steps below to enter the bridge data:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Bridge & Culvert Data command.
    Select the Bridge & Culvert Data command
    Alternatively, the user can either double click the roadway structure on the Map View or choose the Bridge & Culvert Data command from the Roadway Crossings dropdown menu of the Input ribbon menu.
    Choose the Bridge & Culvert Data command from the Roadway Crossings dropdown
  2. The Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to enter the bridge data and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Roadway Crossing

This section of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box is used to switch between roadway crossings. Note that if the user opens the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box by double-clicking the roadway crossing on Map View, that roadway crossing will be selected by default.

This section contains the following entries:

  • River: This dropdown combo box shows all the currently defined rivers. When the user changes a river, then the Reach dropdown combo box also updates to show a valid corresponding river reach.
  • Reach: This dropdown combo box shows all the currently defined reaches that correspond to the selected river.
  • River station: This is an editable dropdown combo box that shows the currently defined roadway crossing river stations that correspond to the selected reach. The user can also change the river station of the current roadway crossing by clicking on the edit tool option adjacent to the River station dropdown entry or by clicking the […] pick button to graphically select the roadway crossing from the Map View.
  • Node name: This entry field allows the user to assign an optional text label to the current roadway crossing.

Roadway Crossing Specifications

This section of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box allows the user to select the various roadway specifications from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box. The Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box lists the following roadway specifications:

  • Deck Roadway
  • Culverts
  • Bridge Piers
  • Sloping Abutments
  • Ineffective Flow Areas
  • Bridge Methodology
  • Bridge Parameters
  • WSPRO Parameters
  • Multiple Openings
  • Internal Geometry
  • Build Bridge Opening
  • Opening Comparison Analysis
  • Geometry Adjustment
  • Geometry Point Reduction
  • Profile Results
    Roadway Crossing Specifications

Defining Deck Roadway Geometry

The Deck Roadway data panel is displayed by default when the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box is displayed. This data panel provides a table for entering and editing the roadway high chord and bridge opening low chord geometry. The data in the table is used to describe the area that is blocked due to the roadway bridge deck, road embankment, and bridge opening vertical abutments.

Deck Roadway Geometry

To learn more about the Deck Roadway data panel, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Defining Culverts

The Culverts data panel is used to define the culverts at a roadway crossing. Select the Culverts option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box.

Select the Culverts option

The Culverts data panel will be displayed.

Culverts data panel will be displayed

To learn more about the Culverts data panel, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Defining Piers and Sloping Abutments

After entering the deck roadway and culverts data, the user can define bridge piers and sloping abutments that are inside of the bridge opening.

Bridge Piers

Select the Bridge Piers option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box.

Select the Bridge Piers option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown

The Bridge Piers data panel will be displayed.

Bridge Piers data panel

In the above panel, the user can enter the pier data in the same exact manner as required for a 2D bridge. To learn more about the Bridge Piers panel, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Sloping Abutments

Select the Sloping Abutments option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box.

Select the Sloping Abutments option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown

The Sloping Abutments data panel will be displayed.

Sloping Abutments data panel

The Sloping Abutments data panel is the same as for 2D bridges and works the same way. To learn more about the Sloping Abutments data panel, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Defining Ineffective Flow Areas

The user can define ineffective flow areas for the upstream and downstream cross sections outside of the bridge. If the user has included the left and right roadway approaches as part of the bridge, then it may be necessary to define ineffective flow areas for the outside cross sections in order to compute accurate headwater and tailwater elevations for the bridge curves.

Select the Ineffective Flow Areas option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box.

Select the Ineffective Flow Areas option

The Ineffective Flow Areas data panel will be displayed.

The Ineffective Flow Areas data panel

This data panel contains the following two types of ineffective flow areas:

Normal Ineffective Flow Areas

This section allows the user to define a left station and elevation and a right station and elevation for the ineffective flow area. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about Normal Ineffective Flow Areas.

Multiple Blocks Ineffective Flow Areas

This section allows the user to define up to 10 individual blocks for each cross section. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about Multiple Blocks Ineffective Flow Areas.

Defining Bridge Modeling Approach

The Bridge Methodology data panel allows the user to define which computational methods HEC-RAS will use at a bridge opening. The user can also select the bridge opening types and bridge pier shapes using this data panel.

Select the Bridge Methodology option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box.

Select the Bridge Methodology option

The Bridge Methodology data panel will be displayed.

Bridge Methodology data panel

To learn more about the Bridge Methodology data panel, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Defining Bridge Parameters

The Bridge Parameters data panel allows the user to define the bridge parameters to be used for all bridges (if multiple bridge openings) at a roadway crossing.

Select the Bridge Parameters option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box.

Select the Bridge Parameters option

The Bridge Parameters data panel will be displayed.

Bridge Parameters data panel

To learn more about Bridge Parameters data panel, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Defining WSPRO Parameters

The WSPRO Parameters data panel computes the water surface profile through a bridge by solving the energy equation. Select the WSPRO Parameters option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box.

Select the WSPRO Parameters option

The WSPRO Parameters data panel will be displayed.

WSPRO Parameters data panel

To learn more about the WSPRO Parameters data panel, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Defining Multiple Openings

The Multiple Openings data panel defines stagnation points for multiple opening roadway crossings. Select the Multiple Openings option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box.

Select the Multiple Openings option

The Multiple Openings data panel will be displayed.

Multiple Openings data panel

To learn more about the Multiple Openings data panel, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Defining Internal Geometry

The Internal Geometry data panel allows the user to edit the two-ground geometry cross sections inside of the bridge opening. This panel allows the user to change the station and elevation data, roughness coefficients, and main channel bank stations for each of the two internal bridge cross sections.

Select the Internal Geometry option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box.

Select the Internal Geometry option

The Internal Geometry data panel will be displayed.

Internal Geometry data panel

To learn more about the Internal Geometry data panel, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Defining Build Bridge Opening

The Build Bridge Opening data panel allows the user to define the geometry of the bridge opening by using span or abutment data. Select the Build Bridge Opening option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box.

Select the Build Bridge Opening option

The Build Bridge Opening data panel will be displayed.

Build Bridge Opening data panel

To learn more about the Build Bridge Opening data panel, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Bridge Opening Comparison Analysis

This data panel analyzes differences between bridge opening data for any two selected scenarios, and then exports the Opening Comparison Analysis results table.

Select the Opening Comparison Analysis option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box.

Select the Opening Comparison Analysis option

The Opening Comparison Analysis dialog box will be displayed.

Opening Comparison Analysis dialog box

This data panel contains three sections: Select Existing Roadway Crossing for Comparison, Perform Opening Comparison Analysis, and Opening Comparison Results. To know more about this data panel, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Adjusting Roadway Geometry

The user can adjust the roadway geometry at any time during the modeling process. Select the Geometry Adjustment option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications section.

Select the Geometry Adjustment option

The Geometry Adjustment data panel will be displayed.

Geometry Adjustment data panel

This data panel is similar to the Geometry Adjustment data panel of the 2D Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to do the adjustment of the roadway geometry.

Geometry Point Reduction in Roadway Crossing

Select the Geometry Point Reduction option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications section.

Select the Geometry Point Reduction option

The Geometry Point Reduction data panel will be displayed.

Geometry Point Reduction data panel

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Geometry Point Reduction data panel in roadway crossing.

Defining Profile Results

The Profile Results data panel allows the user to select the analysis results. Select the Profile Results option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications section.

Select the Profile Results option

The Profile Results data panel will be displayed.

Profile Results data panel

To learn more about the Profile Results data panel, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Defining HTAB Parameters

After the user has defined the necessary data for the roadway crossing structure, the user needs to define the parameters necessary to create the HTAB (hydraulic table of rating curves). Note that this data is only used for unsteady flow simulations and is ignored for steady flow simulations. To change the flow data from steady to unsteady flow data, go to the Input ribbon menu, click the Scenario Manager dropdown menu, and then select the Scenario Manager command. The Scenario Manager dialog box will be displayed.

Scenario Manager dialog box

In the Scenario Manager dialog box, enable the Unsteady Flow Data radio button and add new unsteady flow data from the Unsteady flow dropdown combo box. Close the Scenario Manager dialog box and the current scenario flow data is now changed to unsteady flow.

Close the Scenario Manager dialog box

The user can now select the Hydraulic Parameters – Bridges & Culverts command from the Rating Curves – Hydraulic Parameters dropdown menu of the Analysis ribbon menu to define the parameters.

Hydraulic Parameters – Bridges & Culverts command from the Rating Curves – Hydraulic Parameters dropdown

The Hydraulic Parameters – Bridges & Culverts dialog box will be displayed.

Hydraulic Parameters – Bridges & Culverts dialog box will be displayed

Selecting Roadway Crossing

The Select Roadway Crossing section allows the user to select the roadway crossing for purposes of defining the hydraulic parameters. This section contains three entries: River name, Reach name, and Roadway crossing river station.

Family of Rating Curve Parameters

The Family of Rating Curve Parameters section is used to define the limits of the family of rating curves that are developed for the roadway crossing. This section covers the following parameters:

  • Number of points on free flow curve
  • Number of submerged curves
  • Number of points on each submerged curve
  • Use above parameters on all roadway crossings

Roadway Crossing Parameters

This section defines the parameters necessary to compute the rating curves for the selected roadway crossing. This section covers the following parameters:

  • Maximum headwater elevation
  • Maximum tailwater elevation, optional
  • Maximum flow, recommended

The Maximum headwater elevation defines the maximum elevation that the water surface can reach on the upstream side of the roadway crossing. Enter the maximum elevation that you expect the water surface to reach on the upstream side of the bridge in the Maximum headwater elevation entry field. Click on the […] button next to the Maximum headwater elevation entry field to pick the elevation from the roadway crossing plot. To learn more about the maximum headwater parameter settings, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

The Maximum tailwater elevation and Maximum flow parameters are optional. However, entering a maximum flow value is recommended as it will help control the limits of the hydraulic property table at the roadway crossing.

To learn more about the various parameters provided in this dialog box, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

When the data are defined, the user can click the [OK] button to save the entered data and close the dialog box.

Performing the Analysis

After the user has entered the roadway crossing data, the user must run the analysis by selecting the Compute Unsteady command from the Analysis ribbon menu.

Compute Unsteady command from the Analysis ribbon menu

When the analysis run is complete, the software will then generate a family of rating curves for any 1D bridge openings and then perform the 1D flow analysis.

Viewing Output Results

Once the model has finished running, the user can begin to view the output related to the 1D bridge hydraulics.

The software provides several types of output results for 1D bridges, as described below:

  1. Inundation maps including water surface, velocity, etc.
    Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to view inundation maps.
  2. Stage and flow hydrographs
    Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to view stage and flow hydrographs.
  3. Cross section plots
    Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to view cross section plots.
Bridges › Bridge Overview & Setup

HEC-RAS Bridge Rail Modeling Guidelines

It is generally always better to be conservative in your analysis and design, especially when it comes to flood events. Accordingly, the loss of conveyance due to bridge railings should be considered when defining the high chord geometry at a roadway crossing when using HEC-RAS.

HEC-RAS-Bridge-Rail-Modeling-Guidelines-Img-1.png

As shown in the photo below, you can see that the bridge railing has a sizable effect in creating additional backwater upstream as the water surface elevation rises at the bridge structure.

Modeling-Bridge-Guard-Rails-Image-2.png

(Photo courtesy: Holly Hales, NCA News Corp Australia, July 3, 2022)

The upper portion of the guard rails should be included, even if there are openings within the guard rails.

Modeling-Bridge-Guard-Rails-Image-3.png

(Photo courtesy: Short Span Steel Bridges)

It should be assumed that guard rail openings will fill up with logs, debris, and other trash during a flood and reduce and/or prevent conveyance.

Modeling-Bridge-Guard-Rails-Image-4.png

(Photo courtesy: Terence Pratt, 15 News, Jan 11, 2023)

Bridges › Bridge Overview & Setup

Bridge Design Location Considerations

A poor bridge location makes it susceptible to damage and a host of other problems. Therefore, the location for a bridge is as important as the characteristics of the bridge itself. Selecting a good bridge site involves several factors like environmental and geological concerns, hydrology and hydraulics, preliminary engineering and roadway alignment.

Bridge-Placement.jpg

Introduction

Generally, the location for a roadway crossing is selected during the planning and location phase of a highway project. The final location should be selected only after obtaining detailed survey information and completing a preliminary HEC-RAS hydraulic study. Although hydraulic criteria are not the sole consideration in bridge location and design, these issues should receive major attention in the initial planning of the highway. The location and alignment of the highway can either magnify or eliminate hydraulic problems at the crossing. Adverse conditions should be identified in the early stages of location selection so that potential problems receive adequate review and consideration. If the cost of the required structures is prohibitive, consider rerouting the highway.

Bridge_Design_Drawing-845x684-1.jpg

Location Selection and Orientation Guidelines

Bridges that are constructed in a poor location or that are the wrong size are more prone to failure. Therefore, it’s important to get the design and location right the first time. Good bridge siting involves many disciplines. A solid and effective analysis requires careful attention to preliminary engineering, hydrology and hydraulics, stream alignment, and environmental and geomorphic concerns. The specific hydraulic requirements are covered below:

  • The bridge should be centered on the main channel of the entire floodplain. This may mean an eccentricity in the location with respect to the entire stream cross section, but this approach allows for a more effective accommodation of the normal low flows of the stream.
  • The bridge waterway opening should be designed to provide a flow area sufficiently large to maintain the through-bridge velocity for the design discharge no greater than the allowable through-bridge velocity.
  • The headers and interior bents should be oriented to conform to the streamlines at flood stage. Standard skew values of 15°, 30°, and 45° should be used where feasible. The piers and the toe of slope of the header must be located away from deep channels, cuts, and high velocity areas to avoid scour problems or interference with stream low flows.
  • Consider including either relief openings or guide banks if the intrusion of either or both roadway headers into the stream floodplains is more than about 800 feet.
  • Existing vegetation should be incorporated into the overall bridge plan. Where practicable, trees and shrubs should be left intact even within the right-of-way. Vegetation that remains intact also tends to control turbulence of the flow into, through and out of the bridge.
  • For some configurations, roadway approaches may need to accommodate overflow. Such overflow approaches allow floods that exceed the design flow to overtop the roadway, thereby reducing the threat to the bridge structure itself. Protection of the approaches from overflow damage should be considered.

Environmental Considerations

Environmental impacts must be considered in conjunction with hydraulic issues given that one may directly affect the other.

Sediment-Control.jpg

During the course of site analysis and selection, biological considerations should include analyzing the effects of bridge construction on diverse habitat and ecosystems in the floodplain, stream, and associated wetlands. Biologists should evaluate this aspect of site selection and not only provide information necessary for a valid assessment of key biological effects but also address potential alternatives for mitigation, including the following:

  • Economic viability of using a bridge rather than filling in wetland areas
  • Cost and feasibility of replacing lost marsh or wetland areas
  • Circulation of fresh or brackish water in marshes and estuaries
  • Feasibility of mitigating the loss of invertebrate populations
  • Shade and resting areas for fish

Water Resource Development Projects

Water resources development projects such as reservoirs or stream channel modifications, whether existing or projected for future development, must be considered when selecting a stream crossing location. Planned resources development projects often require the relocation or reconstruction of existing highways and can interfere with the location or design of proposed highway-stream crossings. Many water resources development projects are planned or authorized for several years or even decades before construction begins. Others never come to fruition or may be permanently stopped by court decisions or regulatory agency actions. The roadway designer must carefully plan and construct a highway near a water resources project location, designing the highway so that it is compatible with existing and future site conditions. The cost of building the roadway due to a projected or existing water resources project must be considered in selecting the stream crossing location.

FEMA Designated Floodplains

The majority of highway crossings involve floodplains that are in FEMA-participating communities. It is important to acknowledge FEMA floodplains in the planning phases of a project and accommodate them during the design process. Early coordination with the community's NFIP administrator is essential to identify and avert potential problems.

FEMA_FIRM_Map-845x637-1.png

Stream Characteristics

All streams change with time. Planning, roadway and bridge design engineers should be conscious of stream morphology and be aware that methods have been developed to quantify natural changes and the changes that can occur as the result of stream encroachments and crossings.

Procedure to Check Present Adequacy of Methods Used

Methods to analyze the hydrology and hydraulics at bridge sites continue to improve. In many cases, the methodology used in the original analysis is no longer the appropriate method to employ. The following steps should be used to examine the adequacy of the methodology:

  • Examine the adequacy of the analysis for the original crossing design before undertaking major reconstruction or replacement.
  • If the method originally used is no longer appropriate, recalculate the analysis for these crossings using a more current and accurate methodology.
  • Reconsider the risk of failure of the existing structure, and include consideration of the following:
    1. Increased traffic volumes
    2. Changed traffic service requirements
    3. Increased highway construction and maintenance costs
    4. Liability for damages to the property that could be attributed to the highway crossing
Bridges › Bridge Geometry & Parameters

Defining Bridge Modeling Approach for HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling

In GeoHECRAS, the Bridge Methodology data panel of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box allows the user to define which computational methods HEC-RAS will use at a bridge opening. This article describes how to use the Bridge Methodology data panel.

Follow the steps below to use the Bridge Methodology data panel:

  1. Select the Bridge Methodology option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box.

    Select the Bridge Methodology option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box
  2. The Bridge Methodology data panel will be displayed.

    Bridge Methodology data panel

The following sections describe how to interact with the Bridge Methodology data panel of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box.

Select Bridge Opening (Multiple Opening Roadway Crossing Only)

This section allows the user to choose the bridge opening types from the Select bridge opening dropdown box.

Support Pier Shape

This section allows the user to select the bridge pier shape. By default, the Select pier shape dropdown combo box is set to Dual-Column Circular Piers for new bridges. The dropdown combo box lists the following options:

  • None
  • Dual-Column Circular Piers (default)
  • Dual-Column Square Nose Piers
  • Dual-Column Triangular Nose Piers
  • Hammerhead Pier
  • Single-Column Circular Pier
  • Wall-Type Round Nose Pier
  • Wall-Type Square Nose Pier
  • Wall-Type Triangular Nose Pier

When importing a HEC-RAS model, the software will automatically set the pier shape by reviewing the defined pier drag coefficient value.
Based on the defined pier shape, the software will render the bridge pier to match. Circular piers, square piers, and triangular nose piers are roughly the same—just the leading (upstream) edge looks different.

Low Flow Computational Methods

This section allows the user to instruct HEC-RAS to use any or all of the low flow computational methods by selecting the checkboxes under the Compute label. If the Momentum and/or Yarnell methods are selected, the user must enter pier loss coefficients corresponding to each method.

The following table lists the drag coefficient for the different pier shapes.

unknown node

The following table lists the Yarnell K coefficient for the different pier shapes.

unknown node

Once the user has selected the low flow bridge methods to be computed, the user must specify which methods will be used as the final answer to continue the computations upstream. Only one of the methods can be selected by choosing the corresponding radio button under the Use label to continue the computations upstream.

An alternative to selecting a single method is to instruct HEC-RAS to use the results with the highest computed upstream energy elevation. This is accomplished by selecting the Highest energy answer radio button option under the Use label. By default, the software selects the Highest energy answer radio button option.

High Flow Computational Methods

This section allows the user to instruct HEC-RAS on how to compute high flows (flow at or above the maximum low chord elevation). For high flows, the user can choose between Energy only (Standard step) or Pressure and/or weir flow calculations.

If Pressure and/or weir flow is selected as the high flow method, the user must enter coefficients for the pressure flow equations. The first coefficient (Submerged inlet discharge coefficient) applies to the equation that is used when only the upstream side (inlet) of the bridge is submerged. If this coefficient is left blank, HEC-RAS selects a coefficient based on the amount of submergence. If the user enters a coefficient, that value is used for all degrees of submergence. The second coefficient (Submerged inlet & outlet discharge coefficient) applies to the equation that is used when both the upstream and downstream end of the bridge is submerged. By default, this coefficient is defined as 0.8.

The Pressure flow trigger elevation (optional) field is used to set the maximum elevation of the deck low chord and defines the elevation at which pressure flow calculations will begin. If this field is left blank, then the elevation that triggers pressure flow calculations is based on the highest low chord elevation on the upstream side of the bridge deck. If the user enters a value in this field, the entered value will be the trigger for pressure flow calculations to begin.

Pressure flow is triggered when the energy elevation exceeds the maximum low chord. When pressure flow is calculated, the answer is compared to the low flow answer, and the highest energy elevation of the two is selected. Alternatively, the user can tell the program to use the water surface elevation instead of the energy elevation to trigger pressure flow calculations.

Bridges › Bridge Geometry & Parameters

Defining Internal Geometry for HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling

In GeoHECRAS, the Internal Geometry data panel of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box allows the user to edit the two-ground geometry cross sections inside of the bridge opening. This panel is used to change the station and elevation data, roughness coefficients, and main channel bank stations for each of the two internal bridge cross sections. This article describes how to use the Internal Geometry data panel.

Follow the steps below to use the Internal Geometry data panel:

  1. Select the Internal Geometry option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box.
    Select the Internal Geometry option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown
  2. The Internal Geometry data panel will be displayed.
    Internal Geometry data panel displayed

The following sections describe how to interact with the Internal Geometry data panel of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box.

Cross Section Ground Geometry

This section contains a tabbed header for Upstream Inside and Downstream Inside, corresponding to the two-ground geometry cross sections just inside of the bridge opening. These two cross sections are a copy of the ground geometry cross sections just upstream and downstream of the bridge. The provided table contains the horizontal station, elevation, and Manning’s roughness for these cross sections, and provides a means of editing this geometry. If the ground stations and/or elevations inside of the bridge structure are different than just outside of the bridge, then the internal bridge cross sections should be modified to reflect the change in geometry.

The table contains the following entries:

  • Horizontal Station (ft): This table column defines the horizontal station for the internal cross section geometry data.
  • Ground Elevation (ft): This table column defines the corresponding elevation for the internal cross section geometry data.
  • Horizontal Roughness: This table column defines the horizontal roughness for the internal cross section geometry data.

The user can copy the current interior opening geometry for the upstream cross section to the downstream cross section (or vice versa) by clicking on the [Copy to Downstream Cross Section] button.

Geometry Bank Stations

This section defines the additional cross section geometry data.

Geometry Bank Stations

The Bank Stations field defines the left and right bank stations. The defined bank station must match an existing ground station. The user can click the […] pick buttons under the Left and Right entry fields to select the left and right bank stations from either Map View or the cross section plot.

The Manning’s checkbox entry defines Manning’s n roughness values for left overbank, channel, and right overbank. Clicking the […] lookup button displays a Manning’s roughness lookup table. Unchecking this checkbox entry disables the underlying fields and enables the Horizontal Roughness column under the Cross Section Ground Geometry data table.

Adjust Selected Elevations

This section allows the user to select rows in the above cross section ground geometry table for which elevations are to be adjusted. After selecting the desired rows, the user can define the elevation adjustment by clicking on the [Adjust] button to implement the elevation change.

Adjust Selected Elevations

Clicking the [Restore] button allows the user to restore all of the internal cross section geometry data (stations and elevations data) for both upstream and downstream of the bridge to their original values.

Bridges › Bridge Geometry & Parameters

Defining Build Bridge Opening for HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling

In GeoHECRAS, the Build Bridge Opening data panel of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box allows the user to define the geometry of the bridge opening by using span or abutment data. This article describes how to use the Build Bridge Opening data panel.

Follow the steps below to use the Build Bridge Opening data panel:

  1. Select the Build Bridge Opening option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box.
    Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box
  2. The Build Bridge Opening data panel will be displayed.
    Build Bridge Opening data panel

The following sections describe how to interact with the Build Bridge Opening data panel of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box.

Bridge Opening Geometry

In this section of the data panel, the user can enable either the Define Opening by Span or Define Opening by Abutment radio button for the selected bridge opening geometry. Clicking the [Pick] button next to the Low chord elevation entry field allows the user to select the low chord elevation from the roadway crossing plot. Note that there are two tabs at the top of the geometry table that correspond to the upstream and downstream faces of the bridge opening. The user can copy the chord elevation data from the downstream bridge opening to the upstream bridge opening (or vice versa) by clicking on the [Copy to Upstream Bridge Opening] button.

  • Define Opening by Span: On selecting this radio button option, the user can define the geometry of the bridge opening by using span data. The user can choose the desired opening span reference station from the dropdown combo box. Clicking the […] buttons next to the reference station entry field allows the user to pick the reference station from the Map View and roadway crossing plot, respectively. Clicking the […] buttons next to the Opening span (width) entry field allows the user to measure the bridge opening span from the Map View and roadway crossing plot, respectively.
  • Define Opening by Abutment: On selecting this radio button option, the user can define the geometry of the bridge opening by using abutment data. Clicking the […] buttons next to the Left abutment station and Right abutment station allows the user to pick the leftmost and rightmost abutment stations from the Map View and roadway crossing plot, respectively.

Defining Sloping Abutments

This section allows the user to define the sloping abutment data. The user can check the Define Sloping Abutments checkbox option to allow the software to enable this section for defining the sloping abutment values.

Clicking the [Pick] button next to the Offset below low chord entry field allows the user to measure the vertical offset distance from the bottom of the bridge low chord to the top of the sloping abutment. The Side slope (V:H) entry field defines the side slope of the abutments.

Defining Piers

Selecting this checkbox option allows the user to define the pier width and pier span centerline spacing data. This section of the data panel allows the user to enter and edit bridge pier centerline spacing across the roadway crossing cross section.

Clicking the […] buttons next to the Pier span centerline spacing entry field allows the user to measure the pier span centerline spacing from the Map View and roadway crossing plot, respectively.

Bridges › Bridge Geometry & Parameters

Defining WSPRO Parameters for HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling

In GeoHECRAS, the WSPRO Parameters data panel of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box allows the user to compute the water surface profile through a bridge by solving the energy equation. This article describes how to use the WSPRO Parameters data panel.

Follow the steps below to use the WSPRO Parameters data panel:

  1. Select the WSPRO Parameters option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box.

    Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box
  2. The WSPRO Parameters data panel will be displayed.

    WSPRO Parameters data panel

The following sections describe how to interact with the WSPRO Parameters data panel of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box.

Select Bridge Opening (Multiple Opening Roadway Crossing Only)

In this section, the user can select the bridge opening type from the Select bridge opening dropdown combo box.

Embankment & Abutment Data

In this section, the user can define the embankment and abutment data of the selected bridge opening. The user can select the type of abutment from the Abutment type dropdown combo box. The Abutment type dropdown combo box lists the following abutment types.

  • Vertical Abutments & Vertical Embankments
  • Vertical Abutments & Sloping Embankments
  • Sloping Abutments & Sloping Embankments
  • Vertical Abutments & Sloping Embankments & Wing Walls
Embankment & Abutment Data

For Embankment top elevation and Abutment toe elevation entries, the user can click on the […] pick buttons to define the left and right elevations of the bridge opening. The Abutment Slope (V:H) field is used for entering the slope of the abutments. This slope is taken as the horizontal distance divided by the vertical distance.

By clicking on the […] pick button next to the Embankment top width entry, the user can enter the width of the top of the road embankment in the area of the bridge opening.

The Projected opening centroid station at approach XS allows the user to enter their own centroid stationing value for the approach cross section.

Wing Wall Data

In this section, the user can define the various data of the wing wall, such as wing wall type, angle, length, and wing wall entrance rounding radius. The user can select the type of wing wall from the Wing wall type dropdown combo box. The Wing wall type dropdown combo box lists the following wall types.

  • No Wing Walls (default)
  • Angular Wing Walls
  • Rounded Wing Walls

On selecting the Angular Wing Walls type, the software enables the Wing wall angle and Wing wall length fields, as shown below. Clicking on the […] pick button allows the user to define the wall angle and wall length from the map view.

Angular Wing Wall

On selecting the Rounded Wing Walls type, the software enables the Wing wall length and Wing wall entrance rounding radius fields, as shown below. Clicking on the […] pick button allows the user to define the wall length and wall entrance rounding radius from the map view.

Rounded Wing Wall

Guide Bank Data

In this section, the user can define the various guide bank data, such as guide bank type, skew angle, length, and offset value. The user can select the type of guide bank from the Guide bank type dropdown combo box. The Guide bank type dropdown combo box lists the following bank types.

  • No Guide Banks (default)
  • Straight Guide Banks
  • Elliptical Guide Banks

On selecting the Straight Guide Banks type, the software enables the Guide bank length and Guide bank offset fields, as shown below. Clicking on the […] pick button allows the user to define the bank length and offset value from the map view.

Straight Guide Banks

On selecting the Elliptical Guide Banks type, the software enables the Guide bank skew angle and Guide bank length, as shown below. Clicking on the […] pick button allows the user to define the bank skew angle and bank length from the map view.

Elliptical Guide Banks

Contraction & Expansion Losses (Optional)

This is an optional section and allows the user to turn on contraction and expansion losses at locations that are traditionally not included in the WSPRO methodology.

Contraction & Expansion Losses (Optional)

The user can turn on contraction and expansion losses individually at the following locations: approach cross section, guide bank (if guide banks exist), upstream outside of the bridge, bridge upstream internal cross section, and bridge downstream internal cross section.

Other Options

In this section, the user has options to define whether piers are continuous through the bridge openings and use the geometric mean friction slope averaging technique through the bridge computations (from the exit to the approach section). By default, the Piers are continuous through the bridge opening and Use Geometric Mean friction slope method checkboxes are checked.

Other Options
Bridges › Bridge Geometry & Parameters

Defining Bridge Parameters for HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling

In GeoHECRAS, the Bridge Parameters data panel of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box defines the bridge parameters to be used for all bridges (if multiple bridge openings) at a roadway crossing. This article describes how to use the Bridge Parameters data panel.

Follow the steps below to use the Bridge Parameters data panel:

  1. Select the Bridge Parameters option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box.

    Bridge & Culvert Data Dialog Box
  2. The Bridge Parameters data panel will be displayed.

    Bridge Parameters Data Panel

The following sections describe how to interact with the Bridge Parameters data panel of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box.

Momentum Equation

This section defines the computational components to be included in the momentum equation. The Momentum Equation is one of the optional low flow methods used in computing flow through the bridge.

The section contains the following entries:

  • Add friction component: This checkbox controls whether the momentum equation should include the friction loss component. This checkbox is checked by default.
  • Add weight component: This checkbox controls whether the momentum equation should include the water weight component.

Critical Depth Location

This section defines where the critical depth should be computed within the bridge opening.

If the program computes that the flow must pass through critical depth inside the bridge, critical depth will automatically be located inside the bridge at the most constricted cross section. If both cross sections are identical, the program will (by default) locate critical depth at the upstream inside cross section. However, if the user feels that it would be better to set critical depth inside the bridge at the downstream end, then this can be selected.

Pressure Flow Criteria

This section defines how pressure flow is determined at a bridge opening. By default, the program uses the energy grade line elevation. Note that this does not change how pressure flow is calculated, only how the program checks for pressure flow at a bridge opening.

Bridges › Bridge Geometry & Parameters

Defining Deck Roadway Geometry for HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling

In GeoHECRAS, the Deck Roadway data panel of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box provides a table for entering and editing the roadway high chord and bridge opening low chord geometry. The data in the table is used to describe the area that is blocked due to the roadway bridge deck, road embankment, and bridge opening vertical abutments. This data panel is displayed by default when the dialog box is displayed.

Deck Roadway data panel

Note that there are two tabs at the top of the geometry table that correspond to the upstream and downstream faces of the roadway crossing. The user can copy the current bridge deck and roadway geometry from the upstream cross section to the downstream cross section (or vice versa) by clicking the [Copy to Downstream Cross Section] button.

The following sections describe how to interact with the Deck Roadway data panel of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box.

Roadway Structure Dimensional Specifications

This section is used to define the width, distance, and slope of the road crossing.

Roadway Structure Dimensional Specifications section

The following entries are available in this section:

  • Distance between bounding cross sections: This is a read-only field, and it shows the distance between two cross sections located a short distance downstream of the roadway bridge and another located a short distance upstream of the roadway bridge. The bounding cross sections are a crucial aspect of bridge modeling. It provides a means of analyzing the impacts of the bridge structure on the flow.
  • Roadway width (parallel to flow): This entry field is used to enter the width of the roadway crossing along the stream. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to measure roadway width parallel to flow from the Map View.
  • Distance from railing to upstream XS: This entry field is used to enter the distance between the upstream side of the roadway and the cross section immediately upstream of the roadway. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to measure the distance from the Map View.
  • Upstream embankment side slope (V:H): This entry field is used to enter the slope of the road embankment on the upstream side of the roadway. The slope should be entered as the horizontal to vertical distance ratio of the roadway crossing.
    Note that this variable is generally not used in the computations, but is only used to be displayed in the profile plot. However, if the user has selected the FHWA WSPRO Method for low flow, this field will be used in the computation of the bridge discharge coefficient. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the FHWA WSPRO Method.
  • Downstream embankment side slope (V:H): This entry field is used to enter the slope of the road embankment on the downstream side of the roadway. The slope should be entered as the horizontal to vertical distance ratio of the roadway crossing.
    Note that this variable is generally not used in the computations, but is only used to be displayed in the profile plot. However, if the user has selected the FHWA WSPRO Method for low flow, this field will be used in the computation of the bridge discharge coefficient.

Roadway Weir Overflow Specifications

This section is used to define the minimum weir elevation, maximum submergence ratio, weir crest shape, and weir coefficient for an overflow weir on a roadway.

Roadway Weir Overflow Specifications section

The section contains the following entries:

  • Minimum weir elevation (optional): This entry field allows the user to enter the minimum elevation for which weir flow will begin to be evaluated. If this field is left blank, the elevation that triggers weir flow is based on the lowest high chord elevation on the upstream side of the roadway. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select elevation from the cross section on the Map View.
  • Maximum submergence ratio: This entry field defines the maximum allowable submergence ratio that can occur during weir flow calculations over the roadway. If this ratio is exceeded, the program automatically switches to energy-based calculations instead of pressure and weir flow calculations. By default, the software uses a value of 0.98 (98 percent submerged).
  • Weir crest shape: This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to specify weir types. There are two options available: Broad Crested and Ogee. The user can choose the weir type that best matches the problem.
    Note that if the user selects the Ogee shaped weir, two additional parameters, Spillway approach height and Design energy head, are displayed in the Roadway Weir Overflow Specifications section.
    Weir crest shape - Ogee
  • Spillway approach height: This entry field defines the height, which is equal to the elevation of the spillway crest minus the mean elevation of the ground just upstream of the spillway.
  • Design energy head: This entry field defines the height, which is equal to the energy grade line elevation minus the elevation of the spillway crest.
  • Weir coefficient: This entry field allows the user to enter a weir coefficient that will be used in the weir computations. Note that different coefficients may be selected, depending on the use of Metric (SI) or US Units. By default, the software uses a value of 2.6. The user can click the […] button to display the lookup dialog box containing weir coefficients.

Roadway Crossing Skew

This section is used to define a skew angle for the roadway crossing and bridge piers.

Roadway Crossing Skew section

The following entries are available in this section:

  • Roadway and abutment skew angle: If the entered Roadway and abutment skew angle is valid, the software then adjusts the stationing values.
  • Apply roadway skew angle at adjacent upstream and downstream XS: If these checkboxes are checked, then the cross section skew routine is also run for the adjacent cross section(s).
    Note that if these checkboxes are unchecked, then no action is performed at the adjacent cross section(s), even if a skew angle is already defined.
  • Bridge pier skew angle: If the entered Bridge pier skew angle is valid, the software then adjusts each pier width entry.
Bridges › Bridge Hydraulic Computations

HEC‑RAS Bridge Low Flow Computations

The HEC‑RAS bridge computations allow the modeler to analyze a bridge using several different methods without changing the bridge geometry.

Low-Flow-Bridge-Opening.jpg

The bridge computational methods have the ability to model:

  • Low flow (Class A, B, and C)
  • Low flow and weir flow (with adjustments for submergence on the weir)
  • Pressure flow (orifice and sluice gate equations)
  • Pressure and weir flow
  • Highly submerged flows (the program will automatically switch to the energy equation when the flow over the road is highly submerged)

This article describes how the HEC‑RAS program models bridge low flow conditions.

Low Flow Classifications

Low flow exists when the flow going through the bridge opening is open channel flow (water surface below the highest point on the low chord of the bridge opening). For low flow computations, the program first uses the momentum equation to identify the class of flow. This is accomplished by first calculating the momentum at critical depth inside the bridge at the upstream and downstream ends. The end with the higher momentum (therefore most constricted cross section) will be the controlling cross section in the bridge. If the two cross sections are identical, the program selects the upstream bridge cross section as the controlling cross section.

The momentum at critical depth in the controlling cross section is then compared to the momentum of the flow downstream of the bridge when performing a subcritical profile (upstream of the bridge for a supercritical profile).

The low flow is then classified according to the following criteria:

  • Class A Low Flow
    The momentum downstream is greater than the critical depth momentum inside the bridge and the class of flow is considered to be completely subcritical.
  • Class B Low Flow
    The momentum downstream is less than the momentum at critical depth, in the controlling bridge cross section. Under these conditions, it is assumed that the constriction will cause the flow to pass through critical depth and a hydraulic jump will occur at some distance downstream.
  • Class C Low Flow
    The profile is completely supercritical through the bridge.

Class A Low Flow Computations

Class A low flow exists when the water surface through the bridge is completely subcritical (i.e., above critical depth). Energy losses through the expansion (cross sections 2 to 1) are calculated as friction losses and expansion losses. Friction losses are based on a weighted friction slope multiplied by the weighted reach length between cross sections 1 and 2. The weighted friction slope is based on one of the four available alternatives in HEC‑RAS, with the average conveyance method being the default. This option is user selectable. The average length used in the calculation is based on a discharge‑weighted reach length. Energy losses through the contraction (cross sections 3 to 4) are calculated as friction losses and contraction losses. Friction and contraction losses between cross sections 3 and 4 are calculated in the same way as friction and expansion losses between cross sections 1 and 2.

There are four methods available for computing losses through the bridge (cross sections 2 to 3):

  • Energy Equation (standard step method)
  • Momentum Balance
  • Yarnell Equation
  • FHWA WSPRO method

The user can select any or all of these loss methods to compute bridge energy losses. This allows the modeler to compare the answers from several techniques all in a single execution of the program. If more than one method is selected, the user must choose either a single method as the final solution or direct the program to use the method that computes the greatest energy loss through the bridge as the final solution at cross section 3. Minimal results are available for all the methods computed, but detailed results are available for the method that is selected as the final answer. A detailed discussion of each method follows.

Energy Equation (Standard Step Method)

The energy‑based method treats a bridge in the same manner as a natural river cross section, except the area of the bridge below the water surface is subtracted from the total area, and the wetted perimeter is increased where the water is in contact with the bridge structure. As described previously, the program formulates two cross sections inside the bridge by combining the ground information of cross sections 2 and 3 with the bridge geometry. As shown in the figure below, for the purposes of discussion, these cross sections will be referred to as cross sections BD (Bridge Downstream) and BU (Bridge Upstream).

The sequence of calculations starts with a standard step calculation from just downstream of the bridge (cross section 2) to just inside of the bridge (cross section BD) at the downstream end. The program then performs a standard step through the bridge (from cross section BD to cross section BU). The last calculation is to step out of the bridge (from cross section BU to cross section 3).

Figure 1: Cross Sections Near and Inside the Bridge

Figure 1: Cross sections near and inside the bridge

The energy‑based method requires Manning’s n values for friction losses and contraction and expansion coefficients for transition losses. The estimate of Manning's n values is well documented in many hydraulics text books, as well as several research studies. Detailed output is available for cross sections inside the bridge (cross sections BD and BU) as well as the user defined cross sections (cross sections 2 and 3).

Momentum Balance Method

The momentum method is based on performing a momentum balance from cross section 2 to cross section 3. The momentum balance is performed in three steps. The first step is to perform a momentum balance from cross section 2 to cross section BD inside the bridge. The equation for this momentum balance is as follows:

equation for momentum balance from cross section 2 to cross section BD

Where:

Momentum Balance Method

The second step is a momentum balance from cross section BD to BU (see Figure 1). The equation for this step is as follows:

equation for momentum balance from cross section BD to BU

The final step is a momentum balance from section BU to section 3 (see Figure 1). The equation for this step is as follows:

equation for momentum balance from section BU to section 3

Where: CD = α1 and β1 coefficient for flow going around the piers.

Guidance on selecting drag coefficients can be found in Table 1 below.

The momentum balance method requires the use of roughness coefficients for the estimation of the friction force and a drag coefficient for the force of drag on piers. Drag coefficients are used to estimate the force due to the water moving around the piers, the separation of the flow, and the resulting wake that occurs downstream. Drag coefficients for various cylindrical shapes have been derived from experimental data (Lindsey, 1938). The following table shows some typical drag coefficients that can be used for piers:

Table 1: Typical Drag Coefficients for Various Pier Shapes

unknown node

The momentum method provides detailed output for the cross sections inside the bridge (BU and BD) as well as outside the bridge (2 and 3). The user has the option of turning the friction and weight force components off. The default is to include the friction force but not the weight component. The computation of the weight force is dependent upon computing a mean bed slope through the bridge. Estimating a mean bed slope can be very difficult with irregular cross section data. A bad estimate of the bed slope can lead to large errors in the momentum solution. The user can turn the weight force on if he or she feels that the bed slope through the bridge is well behaved for their project.

During the momentum calculations, if the water surface (at cross sections BD and BU) comes into contact with the maximum low chord of the bridge, the momentum balance is assumed to be invalid and the results are not used.

Yarnell Equation

The Yarnell equation is an empirical equation that is used to predict the change in water surface from just downstream of the bridge (cross section 2 of Figure 1) to just upstream of the bridge (cross section 3). The equation is based on approximately 2600 lab experiments in which the researchers varied the shape of the piers, the width, the length, the angle, and the flow rate. The Yarnell equation is as follows (Yarnell, 1934):

Yarnell equation

Where:

equation summary

The computed upstream water surface elevation (cross section 3) is simply the downstream water surface elevation plus H3‑2. With the upstream water surface known, the program computes the corresponding velocity head and energy elevation for the upstream section (cross section 3). When the Yarnell method is used, hydraulic information is only provided at cross sections 2 and 3 (no information is provided for cross sections BU and BD).

The Yarnell equation is sensitive to the pier shape (K coefficient), the pier obstructed area, and the velocity of the water. The method is not sensitive to the shape of the bridge opening, the shape of the abutments, or the width of the bridge. Because of these limitations, the Yarnell method should only be used at bridges where the majority of the energy losses are associated with the piers. When Yarnell's equation is used for computing the change in water surface through the bridge, the user must supply the Yarnell pier shape coefficient, K.

The following table provides values for the Yarnell pier coefficient for various pier shapes:

Table 2: Yarnell pier coefficient, K, for various pier shapes

unknown node

FHWA WSPRO Method

The low flow hydraulic computations of the Federal Highway Administration's (FHWA) WSPRO computer program has been adapted as an option for low flow hydraulics in HEC‑RAS. The WSPRO methodology has been modified slightly in order to fit into the HEC‑RAS concept of cross section locations around and through a bridge.

The WSPRO method computes the water surface profile through a bridge by solving the energy equation. The method is an iterative solution performed from the exit cross section (1) to the approach cross‑section (4). The energy balance is performed in steps from the exit cross section (1) to the cross section just downstream of the bridge (2); from just downstream of the bridge (2) to inside of the bridge at the downstream end (BD); from inside of the bridge at the downstream end (BD) to inside of the bridge at the upstream end (BU); From inside of the bridge at the upstream end (BU) to just upstream of the bridge (3); and from just upstream of the bridge (3) to the approach cross section (4). A general energy balance equation from the exit cross section to the approach cross section can be written as follows:

general energy balance equation from the exit cross section to the approach cross section

Where:

equation summary

The incremental energy losses from cross section 4 to 1 are calculated as follows:

Cross Sections 1 to 2

Losses from cross section 1 to cross section 2 are based on friction losses and an expansion loss. Friction losses are calculated using the geometric mean friction slope times the flow weighted distance between cross sections 1 and 2. The following equation is used for friction losses from cross sections 1 to 2:

equation for friction losses from cross sections 1 to 2

Where B is the flow weighted distance between cross sections 1 and 2, and K1 and K2 are the total conveyance at cross sections 1 and 2 respectively. The expansion loss from cross section 2 to cross section 1 is computed by the following equation:

equation for expansion loss from cross section 2 to cross section 1

Where α and β are energy and momentum correction factors for non-uniform flow. α1 and β1 are computed as follows:

non-uniform flow for α


non-uniform flow for β


and are related to the bridge geometry and are defined as follows:

bridge geometry for α


bridge geometry for β


Where C is an empirical discharge coefficient for the bridge, which was originally developed as part of the Contracted Opening method by Kindswater, Carter, and Tracy (USGS, 1953), and subsequently modified by Matthai (USGS, 1968).

Cross Sections 2 to 3

Losses from cross section 2 to cross section 3 are based on friction losses only. The energy balance is performed in three steps: from cross section 2 to BD; BD to BU; and BU to 3. Friction losses are calculated using the geometric mean friction slope times the flow weighted distance between cross sections. The following equation is used for friction losses from BD to BU:

friction losses from BD to BU

Where KBU and KBD are the total conveyance at cross sections BU and BD respectively, and LB is the length through the bridge. Similar equations are used for the friction losses from cross section 2 to BD and BU to 3.

Cross Sections 3 to 4

Energy losses from cross section 3 to cross section 4 are based on friction losses only. The equation for computing the friction loss is as follows:

friction loss

Where Lav is the effective flow length in the approach reach, and K3 and K4 are the total conveyances at cross sections 3 and 4. The effective flow length is computed as the average length of 20 equal conveyance stream tubes (FHWA, 1986).

Class B Low Flow Computations

Class B low flow can exist for either subcritical or supercritical profiles. For either profile, class B flow occurs when the profile passes through critical depth in the bridge constriction. For a subcritical profile, the momentum equation is used to compute an upstream water surface (cross section 3) above critical depth and a downstream water surface (cross section 2) below critical depth. For a supercritical profile, the bridge is acting as a control and is causing the upstream water surface elevation to be above critical depth. Momentum is used to calculate an upstream water surface above critical depth and a downstream water surface below critical depth. If for some reason the momentum equation fails to converge on an answer during the class B flow computations, the program will automatically switch to an energy‑based method for calculating the class B profile through the bridge.

Whenever class B flow is found to exist, the user should run the program in a mixed flow regime mode. If the user is running a mixed flow regime profile, the program will proceed with backwater calculations upstream, and later with forewater calculations downstream from the bridge. Also, any hydraulic jumps that may occur upstream and downstream of the bridge can be located if they exist.

Class C Low Flow Computations

Class C low flow exists when the water surface through the bridge is completely supercritical. The program can use either the energy equation or the momentum equation to compute the water surface through the bridge for this class of flow.

Bridges › Bridge Hydraulic Computations

HEC‑RAS Bridge High Flow Computations

HEC‑RAS has the ability to compute high flows (flows that come into contact with the highest point of the bridge deck low chord) by either the energy equation (standard step method) or by using separate hydraulic equations for pressure and/or weir flow. These two methodologies are explained below.

Flooding-bridge.jpg

Bridge experiencing pressure (orifice) flow

Energy Equation Method

The energy‑based (standard step) method is applied to high flows in the same manner as it is applied to low flows. The HEC‑RAS computations are based on balancing the energy equation in three steps through the bridge. Energy losses are based on friction and contraction and expansion losses. Output from this method is available at the cross sections inside the bridge as well as outside.

With the energy equation, friction losses are based on the use of Manning's equation. Contraction and expansion losses are based on the loss coefficient times the change in velocity head.

The energy‑based method performs all computations as though they are open channel flow. At the cross sections inside the bridge, the area obstructed by the bridge piers, abutments, and deck is subtracted from the flow area and additional wetted perimeter is added. Occasionally the resulting water surfaces inside the bridge (at bridge interior cross sections at the upstream and downstream sides) can be computed at elevations that would be within the interior of the bridge deck. The computed water surfaces within the bridge deck reflect the hydraulic gradeline elevations, but not necessarily the actual water surface elevations. Additionally, the active flow area is limited to the open bridge area.

Pressure and Weir Flow Method

A second approach for computing high flows is to utilize separate hydraulic equations to compute the flow as pressure (orifice) and/or weir flow. The two types of flow are presented below.

Pressure-and-Weir-Flow.png

Pressure Flow Computations

Pressure flow occurs when the flow comes into contact with the low chord of the bridge. Once the flow comes into contact with the upstream side of the bridge, backwater occurs and orifice flow is established. HEC‑RAS will handle two cases of orifice flow:

  • when only the upstream side of the bridge is in contact with the water, and
  • when the bridge opening is flowing completely full.

The HEC‑RAS program will automatically select the appropriate equation, depending upon the flow situation. For the first case (see below figure), a sluice gate type of equation is used (FHWA, 1978):

unknown node

Where:

Q = Total discharge through the bridge opening
Cd = Coefficients of discharge for pressure flow
ABU = Net area of the bridge opening at cross section BU
Y3 = Hydraulic depth at cross section 3
Z = Vertical distance from maximum bridge low chord to the mean river bed elevation at cross section BU

The discharge coefficient Cd, can vary depending upon the depth of water upstream. Values for Cd range from 0.27 to 0.5, with a typical value of 0.5 commonly used in practice. The user can enter a fixed value for this coefficient or the program will compute one based on the amount that the bridge opening is submerged. A diagram relating Cd to Y3/Z is shown in given figure.

Figure-5-4.pngHigh-Flow-Computation-Figure-3.png

As shown in above figure, the limiting value of Y3/Z is 1.1. There is a transition zone somewhere between Y3/Z = 1.0 and 1.1 where free surface flow changes to orifice flow. The type of flow in this range is unpredictable, and equation mentioned above is not applicable.

In the second case, when both the upstream and downstream side of the bridge is submerged, the standard full flowing orifice equation is used (see below figure). This equation is as follows:

unknown node

Where:

C = Coefficient of discharge for fully submerged pressure flow. Typical value of C is 0.8.
H = The difference between the energy gradient elevation upstream and the water surface elevation downstream.
A = Net area of the bridge opening.

High-Flow-Computations-Figure-5-6.gif

Figure 3: Example of a bridge under fully submerged pressure flow

Typical values for the discharge coefficient C range from 0.7 to 0.9, with a value of 0.8 commonly used for most bridges. The user must enter a value for C whenever the pressure flow method is selected. The discharge coefficient C can be related to the total loss coefficient, which comes from the form of the orifice equation that is used in the HEC‑2 computer program (HEC, 1991):

unknown node

Where: K = Total loss coefficient

The conversion from K to C is as follows:

unknown node

The program will begin checking for the possibility of pressure flow when the computed low flow energy grade line is above the maximum low chord elevation at the upstream side of the bridge. Once pressure flow is computed, the pressure flow answer is compared to the low flow answer; the higher of the two is used. The user has the option to tell the program to use the water surface, instead of energy, to trigger the pressure flow calculation.

Weir Flow Computations

Flow over the bridge, and the roadway approaching the bridge is calculated in HEC‑RAS using the standard weir equation (see the below figure):

unknown node

Where:

Q = Total flow over the weir
C = Coefficients of discharge for weir flow
L = Effective length of the weir
H = Difference between energy upstream and road crest

High-Flow-Computation-Figure-5-7.png

Figure 4: Example bridge with pressure and weir flow

The approach velocity is included by using the energy grade line elevation in lieu of the upstream water surface elevation for computing the head, H.

Under free flow conditions (discharge independent of tailwater) the coefficient of discharge C, ranges from 2.5 to 3.1 (1.38 ‑ 1.71 for metric units) for broad‑crested weirs depending primarily upon the gross head on the crest (C increases with head). Increased resistance to flow caused by obstructions such as trash on bridge railings, curbs, and other barriers would decrease the value of C.

Tables of weir coefficients, C, are given for broad‑crested weirs in King's Handbook (King, 1963), with the value of C varying with measured head H and breadth of weir. For rectangular weirs with a breadth of 15 feet and a H of 1 foot or more, the given value is 2.63 (1.45 for metric units). Trapezoidal shaped weirs generally have a larger coefficient with typical values ranging from 2.7 to 3.08 (1.49 to 1.70 for metric units).

The “Hydraulics of Bridge Waterways” document (FHWA, 1978) provides a curve of C versus the head on the roadway. The roadway section is shown as a trapezoid and the coefficient rapidly changes from 2.9 for a very small H to 3.03 for H = 0.6 feet. From there, the curve levels off near a constant value of 3.05 (1.69 for metric units).

With very little prototype data available, it seems the assumption of a rectangular weir for flow over the bridge deck (assuming the bridge can withstand the forces) and a coefficient of 2.6 (1.44 for metric units) would be reasonable. If the weir flow is over the roadway approaches to the bridge, a value of 3.0 (1.66 for metric units) would be consistent with available data. If weir flow occurs as a combination of bridge and roadway overflow, then an average coefficient (weighted by weir length) could be used.

For high tailwater elevations, the program will automatically reduce the amount of weir flow to account for submergence on the weir. Submergence is defined as the depth of water above the minimum weir elevation on the downstream side of the bridge (cross section 2) divided by the height of the energy gradeline above the minimum weir elevation on the upstream side of the bridge (cross section 3). The reduction of weir flow is accomplished by reducing the weir coefficient based on the amount of submergence. Submergence corrections are based on a trapezoidal weir shape or optionally an ogee spillway shape. The total weir flow is computed by subdividing the weir crest into segments, computing L, H, a submergence correction, and a Q for each section, then summing the incremental discharges. The submergence correction for a trapezoidal weir shape is from the "Hydraulics of Bridge Waterways" document (FHWA, 1978). The below figure shows the relationship between the percentage of submergence and the flow reduction factor.

When the weir becomes highly submerged, the program will automatically switch to calculating the upstream water surface by the energy equation (standard step backwater) instead of using the pressure and weir flow equations. The criteria for when the program switches to energy based calculations are user controllable. A default maximum submergence is set to 0.98 (98 percent submerged).

High-Flow-Computation-Figure-5-8.png

Combination Flow

Sometimes combinations of low flow or pressure flow occur with weir flow at a roadway crossing. In these cases, an iterative procedure is used to determine the amount of each type of flow. The program continues to iterate until both the low flow (and pressure flow) method and the weir flow method have the same energy (within a specified tolerance) upstream of the bridge structure (cross section 3). The combination of low flow and weir flow can only be computed with the energy and Yarnell low flow methods.

Combination-Flow.png
Bridges › Multiple Openings & Divided Flow

Defining Multiple Openings for HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling

In GeoHECRAS, the Multiple Openings data panel of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box allows the user to define stagnation points for the multiple opening roadway crossings. This article describes how to use the Multiple Openings data panel.

Follow the steps below to use the Multiple Openings data panel:

  1. Select the Multiple Openings option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box.

    Select the Multiple Openings option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown
  2. The Multiple Openings data panel will be displayed.

    Multiple Openings data panel

The following sections describe how to interact with the Multiple Openings data panel of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box.

Opening Stagnation Specifications

This section provides a table that is used to define the stagnation stations for multiple bridge and/or culvert openings at a roadway crossing. A maximum of 7 rows are provided because HEC-RAS supports a maximum of 7 openings at a single roadway crossing. Any combination of bridges, culvert groups (a group of culverts is considered to be a single opening), and conveyance areas (an area where water will flow as open channel flow, other than a bridge or culvert opening) can be defined. Conveyance areas can only be located on the far left or right of the roadway crossing.

Openings must be defined in order from left to right while looking in the downstream direction. In addition to establishing the number and types of openings, the user must also define a left and right stagnation station for each opening. Stagnation stations are used to establish limits for each opening at which flow separates (on the upstream side) from one opening to the next adjacent opening. Stagnation stations between bridges and/or culvert groups can overlap, and the HEC-RAS software will attempt to determine the actual stagnation station within this area of overlap. However, conveyance area stagnation stations must be set to fixed locations, they are not allowed to overlap other opening stagnation stations.

The table contains the following entries:

  • Opening Type: This column contains a read-only dropdown entry that allows the user to select the type of opening that the stagnation stations are to be defined for. By default, the Blank entry is set in the table column. The Opening Type column consists of three additional types of dropdown options: Conveyance, Culvert, and Bridge.
  • Upstream Left Station (ft): This entry defines the leftmost stagnation station for the upstream face of the roadway crossing. A […] pick button can be used to select the station from the roadway crossing cross section plot.
  • Upstream Right Station (ft): This entry defines the rightmost stagnation station for the upstream face of the roadway crossing. A […] pick button can be used to select the station from the roadway crossing cross section plot.
  • Downstream Left Station (ft): This entry defines the leftmost stagnation station for the downstream face of the roadway crossing. A […] pick button can be used to select the station from the roadway crossing cross section plot.
  • Downstream Right Station (ft): This entry defines the rightmost stagnation station for the downstream face of the roadway crossing. A […] pick button can be used to select the station from the roadway crossing cross section plot.

Duplicate Opening Stagnation Station

In this section, the user can copy the stagnation points from upstream cross section to downstream cross section (or vice versa) by clicking on the [Copy Upstream to Downstream] or [Copy Downstream to Upstream] button.

Bridges › Multiple Openings & Divided Flow

Modeling HEC‑RAS Multiple Bridge Openings as Divided Flow

Main-Bridge-and-Relief-Bridge.png

Multiple Opening Bridge Computational Limitations

The HEC‑RAS multiple opening computational method is a one‑dimensional flow approach to a complex hydraulic problem. This methodology has the following limitations:

  • Energy grade line is assumed to be constant upstream and downstream of the multiple opening crossing
  • Stagnation points are not allowed to migrate past the edge of an adjacent opening
  • Stagnation points between a conveyance area and any other type of opening must be fixed (i.e., cannot float)

In addition to the above limitations, HEC‑RAS restricts a multiple opening roadway crossing structure to a maximum of seven openings. If there are conveyance overflow areas at the roadway crossing, there can only be two conveyance type openings, located at the far left and right ends of the cross section.

Given these limitations, if you have a multiple opening crossing in which the water surface and energy vary significantly between openings, then the HEC‑RAS multiple opening computational method may not be the appropriate approach to use. An alternative to the multiple opening method is the divided flow method. This method is discussed below.

Multiple Opening Divided Flow Method

An alternative method for solving a multiple opening roadway crossing problem is to model the flow paths of each bridge opening as a separate river reach. This method is more time consuming and requires the user to have a greater understanding of how the flow will separate between openings. The benefit of using this method is that varying water surfaces and energies can be computed between openings. An example of a divided flow application is shown in the below figure.

2-4-2015-5-01-29-PM.png

In the example shown in the above figure, high ground exists between the two openings (both upstream and downstream). Under low flow conditions, there are two separate and distinct channels. Under high flow conditions, the ground between the openings may be submerged, and the water surface is continuous across both openings.

To model this as a divided flow, the user must create two separate river reaches around the high ground and through the openings. Cross sections 2 through 8 must be divided at what the user believes is the appropriate stagnation points for each cross section. This can be accomplished in several ways. The cross sections could be physically split into two, or the user could use the same cross sections in both reaches. If the same cross sections are used, the user must block out the area of each cross section (using the ineffective flow option) that is not part of the flow path for that particular reach. In other words, if you were modeling the left flow path, you would block out everything to the right of the stagnation points. For the reach that represents the right flow path, everything to the left of the stagnation points would be blocked out.

Computing Flows for each Reach

For modeling the divided flow, HEC‑RAS can optimize the flow split in order to determine how much flow is going through each reach. The user can provide an initial estimate of the flow distribution for each reach in the Steady Flow Data dialog box. Then, turning on the split flow optimization option in the Flow Optimizations dialog box, HEC‑RAS will use an iterative procedure to calculate the flow in each reach.

Flow Optimizations Command
Bridges › Skewed Bridges

Modeling Skewed Bridges

Introduction to Skewed Bridges

If a bridge is not oriented perpendicular to the flow lines moving through the bridge, then this type of bridge is known as a skewed bridge. Skewed bridge crossings are typically handled by making adjustments to the bridge dimensions (i.e., bridge deck, piers, etc) to define an equivalent cross section perpendicular to the flow lines.

Skewed Bridges

Skew Angle

The skew angle (θ) defines the angle with respect to the flow going through the bridge opening and a line perpendicular to the bridge cross sections. While modeling lower flows, the skew angles below 20 to 30 degrees do not significantly affect the flow patterns through a bridge. The reason for this is that during lower flows, the water/flow lines will be able to turn or pass more easily through the bridge opening than during large flows.

Skew angle

When the user skews the bridge, then he reduces the bridge’s deck/roadway stationing by multiplying the values by cos θ*b. Note that the user should not base the skew angle on the direction of the flow upstream of the bridge. As the water approaches a bridge that is highly skewed, it is common that the flow lines will turn before going through the bridge. A field visit is very important to visualize the flow pattern at the bridge and to help estimate the skew angle.

Skew angle and roadway crossing

The projected width of the bridge opening, perpendicular to the flow lines, will be computed with the following equation:

WB = cosθ∗b

Skew-Bridge-Img-10.png

Note that, as HEC-RAS assumes the piers are continuous, the pier information must also be adjusted to account for the skew of the bridge.

Modeling Skewed Bridges

For a skewed bridge, the bounding cross sections (i.e., upstream and downstream) of a bridge should be cut parallel to bridge faces and should be skewed together with the bridge. For example, in the below schematic diagram, 1000 is the upstream cross section and 879 is the downstream cross section.

For a skewed bridge, the bounding cross sections

To define a skew angle to the bridge, open the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box and then the Deck Roadway panel as shown below.

Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box - Deck Roadway panel

The Roadway Crossing Skew section of the data panel is used to define a skew angle for the roadway crossing and bridge piers.

Roadway Crossing Skew section

In the Roadway and abutment skew angle entry field, the user can enter the desired skew angle ranging from 0 to 45 degrees. Alternatively, the adjacent [Pick] button can be used to manually measure the skew angle from the Map View.

Once the valid Roadway and abutment skew angle is entered, the software then adjusts the stationing values by multiplying the cosine of the defined angle with each station value contained in the following data:

  • Deck roadway geometry horizontal station
  • Bridge pier centerline stations
  • Sloping abutment stations
  • Multiple openings stagnation stations
  • Culvert barrel centerline stationing
  • Internal geometry stations (if different than adjacent cross section)
  • Internal geometry bank stations (if different than adjacent cross section)

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to know more about the above points and how to model a HEC-RAS 2D bridge.

The users can then apply the same skew angle to the bounding bridge cross sections by checking the Apply roadway skew angle at adjacent upstream XS and Apply roadway skew angle at adjacent downstream XS checkbox options.

If for some reason the user does not want to skew the bounding cross sections, then he may have to manually alter either the cross section or bridge deck stationing to ensure that the bridge opening correctly aligns with the cross sections.

In a skewed bridge, piers can be either skewed or unskewed. Since HEC-RAS can only handle a continuous pier/bent, a skewed pier will have a very big opening blockage width which depends on the skew angle, bridge deck width, and pier width. For a skewed pier, its skew angle can be different from or the same as the bridge skew angle. The user can provide the skew angle to bridge piers using the Bridge pier skew angle entry field. Alternatively, the adjacent [Pick] button can be used to manually measure the skew angle from the Map View.

Bridge pier skew angle entry field

Once the valid Bridge pier skew angle is entered, the software then adjusts each pier width using the following formula:

New Pier Width = (Current Pier Width*Cosine (Pier Skew Angle)) + (Roadway Width*Sine (Pier Skew Angle))

Note that entering the Roadway and abutment skew angle field value keeping the Apply roadway skew angle at adjacent upstream XS and Apply roadway skew angle at adjacent downstream XS checkboxes checked, automatically fills the corresponding Skew angle in the Cross Section Data dialog box as shown below.

Cross Section Data dialog box - Skew angle

After defining the roadway and abutment skew angle, the ineffective flow areas should be established at upstream and downstream cross sections using Contraction and Expansion coefficients for low flows or pressure flows to pass through the bridge opening. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about HEC-RAS ineffective flow areas.

For typical bridge cross sections, the Contraction and Expansion coefficients should be set to 0.3 and 0.5 respectively. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about contraction and expansion losses in HEC-RAS.

Cross Section Data dialog box - Contraction and Expansion coefficients

When a weir flow passes the bridge opening (overtopping bridge deck), the defined ineffective flow areas should be turned off. For this reason, the elevation of ineffective flow areas at the upstream cross section should be set up initially as the low point of the top of the road. Also, for the downstream cross section, its ineffective flow area elevation should be initially set up somewhere in between the low point of the top of the road and the low chord.

After defining the bridge skew and other associated parameters, the analysis should be computed with the incorporated changes in the model. The modeled skewed bridge then will have all the changes, and the computational results can be viewed from the Cross Section plot. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about HEC‑RAS cross section output plots.

Bridges › Bridge Scour & Floating Debris

Bridge Scour Modeling

Flood events on rivers can cause erosion of the soil around a bridge foundation. This process is frequently referred to as bridge scour. Over time, scour can lead to bridge failure. Bridge scour is an essential factor to address because it is the most common cause of bridge failure.

The computation of scour at bridges within GeoHECRAS is based upon the methods outlined in Hydraulic Engineering Circular No. 18 (HEC 18) report. Before performing a scour analysis with the GeoHECRAS software, the engineer should thoroughly review the procedures outlined in the HEC 18 report. This article presents the data input required for computing contraction scour and local scour at piers and abutments.

Modeling Guidelines

To perform a bridge scour analysis, the user must first develop a hydraulic model of the river reach containing the bridge to be analyzed. This model should include several cross sections downstream from the bridge, such that any user defined downstream boundary condition does not affect the hydraulic results inside and just upstream of the bridge. The model should also include several cross sections upstream of the bridge to evaluate the long-term effects of the bridge on the water surface profile upstream. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to model a bridge in GeoHECRAS.

After performing the steady flow analysis, the bridge scour can then be evaluated. The total scour at a highway crossing comprises three components: long-term aggradation and degradation, contraction scour, and local scour at piers and abutments. The Scour Calculator in GeoHECRAS allows the user to compute contraction scour and local scour at piers and abutments. However, the software does not allow the user to evaluate long-term aggradation and degradation. Long-term aggradation and degradation should be evaluated before performing the bridge scour analysis. Procedures for performing these types of analyses are outlined in the HEC No. 18 report.

Scour Calculator Command

The bridge scour computations are performed by opening the Analysis ribbon menu and selecting the Scour Calculator command. The Hydraulic Design - Bridge Scour window will be displayed as shown below.

Hydraulic Design - Bridge Scour

Once this option is selected, the software will automatically go to the output file and get the computed output for the approach section, the section just upstream of the bridge, and the sections inside the bridge. As shown in the above image, the Hydraulic Design - Bridge Scour window contains the input data, a graphic, and a window for summary results. Input data tabs are available for contraction scour, pier scour, and abutment scour. The user is required to enter only a minimal amount of input, and the computations can be performed. If the user does not agree with any of the data that the software has selected from the output file, the user can overwrite it by entering the user’s own values. This provides maximum flexibility in using the software. The forward sections of this article describe how to interact with the above window.

Entering Contraction Scour Data

Contraction scour occurs when a bridge restricts flow and limits the flow area of a stream. Contraction scour can be divided into two categories: live-bed and clean-water contraction scour. Live-bed contraction scour occurs when flow transfers bed material from the upstream area of the river into the contracted bridge section. On the other hand, clear-water contraction scour occurs when sediment transport in the uncontracted approach section is negligible. In GeoHECRAS, the computation of contraction scour is performed separately for the left overbank, main channel and right overbank.

The below image shows the contraction scour data panel. Here, all of the variables except K1 and D50 are obtained automatically from the HEC-RAS output file. The user can change any variable to whatever value the user thinks is appropriate.

Entering Contraction Scour Data

To compute contraction scour, the user is only required to enter the D50 (mean size fraction of the bed material) and a water temperature to compute the K1 factor. To have the software compute a value, click the [K1] button. The Compute K1 for Contraction Scour dialog box will be displayed.

Compute K1 for Contraction Scour dialog box

Once a water temperature is entered and the user clicks the [OK] button, the K1 factor will be displayed in the main contraction scour window.

Note that the D50 size fractions are needed to compute K1. These D50 values must be entered at the LOB, Channel and ROB locations before computing the K1.

Entering Pier Scour Data

Pier scour occurs due to the formation of horseshoe vortices and accelerated flow around the pier. The scour hole is created as these vortices erode material from the base of the pier. GeoHECRAS allows the user to compute pier scour by using either the Colorado State University (CSU) equation or the Froehlich equation. However, the CSU equation is recommended by HEC-18. As a result, the CSU equation is the default equation in GeoHECRAS.

Entering Pier Scour Data

As shown in the above image, the user has the option to use the maximum velocity and depth in the main channel (Maximum V1 Y1) or the local velocity and depth at each pier (Local V1 Y1) for the calculation of the pier scour. In general, the Maximum V1 Y1 option is used to account for the potential of the main channel thalweg to migrate back and forth within the bridge opening. The migration of the main channel thalweg could cause the maximum potential scour to occur at any one of the bridge piers.

If the user selects the Maximum V1 Y1 option, the software will find the maximum velocity (V1) and depth (Y1) located in the cross section just upstream and outside of the bridge. The software uses the flow distribution output to obtain these values. The maximum V1 and Y1 will then be used for all the piers. If the user selects the Local V1 Y1 option, the software will find the velocity (V1) and depth (Y1) at the cross section just upstream and outside of the bridge that corresponds to the centerline stationing of each of the piers.

Computing Correctness Factors

The Shape dropdown combo box allows the user to select the shape of the pier. The user can select from: square nose, round nose, circular cylinder, group of cylinders, or sharp nose (triangular) pier shapes. When the user selects a shape, the K1 factor for the CSU equation and the Phi factor for the Froehlich equation are automatically set. The user can set the pier nose shape for all piers, or a different shape can be entered for each pier.

The next step will be to enter the angle of attack value into the Angle entry field. The angle of attack is the angle of the flow approaching the pier. If the flow direction upstream of the pier is perpendicular to the pier nose, then the angle would be entered as zero. If the flow is approaching the pier nose at an angle, then that angle should be entered as a positive value in degrees. When an angle is entered, the software automatically sets a value for the K2 coefficient. When the angle is greater than 5 degrees, K1 is set to 1.0.

After this, from the K3 dropdown combo box, select the bed condition. The user can select from: clear-water scour, plane bed and antidunes, small dunes, medium dunes, and large dunes.

At last, enter the D95 value in the D95 entry field. The D95 size fraction is used in the computation of the K4 factor and must be entered in millimeters directly by the user. The software will use this value, along with the D50, a, and the depth of water just upstream of the pier (V1), to automatically calculate the K4 correction factor. The K4 factor is used to decrease scour depths to account for armoring of the scour hole. This factor is only applied when the D50 of the bed material is greater than 0.006 feet (0.2 mm) and the D95 is greater than 0.06 feet (2.0 mm).

Entering Abutment Scour Data

Abutment scour can be computed by either the HIRE equation or Froehlich's equation. In GeoHECRAS, the computation of abutment scour is performed separately for the left and right abutments. The user is only required to enter the abutment type (vertical, vertical with wing walls and spill-through), i.e., K1. The software automatically populates the data needed for both equations. However, the user can change any variable.

Entering Abutment Scour Data

Computing Total Bridge Scour

The total scour is a combination of the contraction scour and the individual pier and abutment scour at each location.

Once all three types of scour data are entered, clicking on the [Compute] button will cause the software to update the bridge scour graphic to reflect the total computed scour. It will also generate results in the bottom portion of the window, as shown below.

Computing Total Bridge Scour

Furthermore, on clicking the [Report…] button, the software will generate a detailed report showing all the input data, computations, and results, as shown below. The software allows the user to send the table to the default printer using the [Print ...] button, copy the table to the clipboard using the [Clipboard] button, and save the table to a file using the [File ...] button.

Generating Report
Bridges › Bridge Scour & Floating Debris

HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling of Floating Debris

Floating debris, such as tree limbs, logs, roots, brush, and other material, can get caught on the upstream side of a bridge pier under the right conditions. The debris gets tangled up with the bridge pier and moves up and down with the rise and fall of the water surface. Debris will cause the river flow to slow down, creating additional backwater and effectively raising the water surface elevation at the roadway crossing. This can cause a significant problem during high flow events.

Bridge-Pier-Debris-min.png

Debris accumulation on bridge piers is an ongoing national problem, which results in obstructions of waterway openings at bridges and results in significant erosion of stream banks and scour at abutments and piers. In some cases, the accumulation of debris can adversely affect the operation of the waterway opening or result in failure of the bridge structure.

Bridge-Collapse-min.png

GeoHECRAS allows the user to enter floating debris information into the HEC-RAS model, so that the effects of floating debris can be analyzed during a flooding event. Debris can be defined at specific piers or at all piers. The debris height and width can be the same for all the piers, or different for each pier.

Debris at Bridge Piers

Modeling Floating Pier Debris

The pier debris blocks out a rectangular shaped area on the upstream side of the pier. While the HEC-RAS analysis is performed, the software adjusts the area and wetted perimeter of the bridge opening to account for the pier debris. The rectangular block is centered on the centerline of the upstream pier. The pier debris floats at the top of the water surface, where the top of the rectangular block is set to the same elevation as the computed water surface.

The pier debris does not form until the specified pier experiences flow. If the bottom of the pier is above the water surface, then there is no area or wetted perimeter adjustment for that pier. However, if the computed water surface is above the top of the pier, the debris is assumed to lodge underneath the bridge, where the top of the pier intersects with the bottom of the bridge deck. It is assumed that the debris completely blocks the flow and that the debris is part of the pier. If the debris field is large enough, it can completely block the underside of the bridge superstructure.

While the simulation is running, the program changes the geometry of the bridge to account for the pier debris. This is to ensure that there is no double accounting of blocked flow area or wetted perimeter. The Yarnell and momentum bridge methods include pier debris in their computations. And, if the pier debris extends past the abutment, into the ground, or overlaps an adjacent pier, the computations ignore this overlap.

Bridge Pier Floating Debris Parameters

Actual values specified for debris height and width is left to the modeler to decide, but conservative values often used are:

  • Debris Height = 2.5 times the pier width
  • Debris Width = 5 times the pier width

Defining Bridge Pier Floating Debris

Follow the steps below to add debris data at the bridge piers:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Bridge & Culvert Data command.
    Bridge and Culvert Data Ribbon Menu Command
  2. The Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Bridge and Culvert Data Dialog Box
  3. From the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box, select the Bridge Piers.
    Roadway Crossing Specification Dropdown Combo Box
  4. The Bridge Piers data panel will be displayed.
    Bridge Piers data panel
  5. From the Pier Geometry section, use the Pier number spin control to select the pier to define the floating debris.
    Pier Geometry - Enter Number of Piers
  6. Then, turn on the Apply floating debris to pier checkbox to enable it.
    Apply Floating Debris to Pier Checkbox
  7. Enter the debris width and height.
  8. Click the [Close] button.

The software will accept the pier data and close the dialog box. The user can then run a simulation of the model and see the effects of debris on the model.

There are additional buttons provided for specifying bridge pier debris:

  • Click the [Set Debris to ON for All Piers] button to enable defined pier debris data.
  • Click the [Set Debris to OFF for All Piers] button to disable defined pier debris data.
  • Click the [Copy Debris to All Piers] button to copy the debris data of the selected pier to all the piers at the bridge.

Impact of Floating Debris

The analysis of floating debris at a roadway should be compared with an analysis with no debris to see the impact in the computed water surface elevation and energy grade elevation at the upstream side of the roadway crossing.

HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling of Floating Debris
Bridges › Bridge Output & Parameters

Defining Profile Results for HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling

In GeoHECRAS, the Profile Results data panel of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box allows the user to select the analysis results. This article describes how to use the Profile Results data panel.

Follow the steps below to use the Profile Results data panel:

  1. Select the Profile Results option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box.

    Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box
  2. The Profile Results data panel will be displayed.

    Profile Results data panel

The following sections describe how to interact with the Profile Results data panel of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box.

Profile Results

This section of the data panel lists all of the analyzed roadway crossings profiles, allowing the user to specify which profiles to display results for.

The table contains the following entries:

  • Profile: This read-only column shows the profile name.
  • Water Surface: This column shows a checkbox that controls the display of computed water surface on the cross section geometry. This checkbox is not checked by default.
  • Energy Grade: This column shows a checkbox that controls the display of computed energy grade line on the cross section geometry. This checkbox is not checked by default.

The Filled-in water surface checkbox causes the selected water surface to be filled-in on the cross section geometry. If more than one profile is selected that has the Water Surface checkbox option selected, then the lowest water surface elevation is used for filling in.

Other Options

In this section of the data panel, the checkbox options are left unchecked, and the user can check the checkboxes to apply the desired options on the cross section geometry. This section contains the following checkbox options:

  • Plot terrain surface
  • Fixed sediment
  • Pilot channel
Bridges › Bridge Output & Parameters

Hydraulic Parameters - Bridges & Culverts Command

In GeoHECRAS, the Hydraulic Parameters - Bridges & Culverts command is used to define the hydraulic parameters that are used for building a family of rating curves for bridges and culverts. This data is only used for unsteady flow simulations and is ignored for steady flow simulations.

Follow the steps below to use the Hydraulic Parameters - Bridges & Culverts command:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, click the Rating Curves – Hydraulic Parameters dropdown menu and select the Hydraulic Parameters - Bridges & Culverts command.
    Hydraulic Parameters - Bridges & Culverts Analysis ribbon menu command
  2. The Hydraulic Parameters - Bridges & Culverts dialog box will be displayed.
    Hydraulic Parameters - Bridges & Culverts dialog box

The following sections describe the Hydraulic Parameters – Bridges & Culverts command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Roadway Crossing

The Select Roadway Crossing section is used to select the roadway crossing for purposes of defining the hydraulic parameters.

This section covers the following options:

  • River name
    This read-only dropdown combo box lists all of the currently defined rivers. When the user selects a river, then the Reach name dropdown combo box also updates to show a valid corresponding river reach.
  • Reach name
    This read-only dropdown combo box lists all of the currently defined reaches that correspond to the selected river.
  • Roadway crossing river station
    This dropdown combo box lists the currently defined roadway crossing river stations that correspond to the selected reach. This field represents a unique value (lookup key) for the current river reach to identify a roadway crossing among other cross sections, roadway crossings, inline structures, and lateral structures. After the river station has been selected, the two cross sections that bound the bridge will be displayed on the Map View. In addition, the Up and Down arrow buttons are provided for moving to the next adjacent upstream and downstream roadway crossing within a river reach. Alternatively, the user can click the […] Pick button to graphically select the roadway crossing from the Map View.

Family of Rating Curve Parameters

The Family of Rating Curve Parameters section is used to define the limits of the family of rating curves that are developed for the roadway crossing.

Family of Rating Curve Parameters section

This section covers the following parameters:

  • Number of points on free flow curve
    This spin-control defines the number of points to be computed on the free flow curve. By default, the software uses a value of 50. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 10 to 100.
  • Number of submerged curves
    This spin-control defines the number of submerged curves to be computed. By default, the software uses a value of 50. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 10 to 100.
  • Number of points on each submerged curve
    This spin-control defines the number of points to be computed on each of the submerged curves. By default, the software uses a value of 20. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 10 to 50.
  • Use above parameters on all roadway crossings
    Clicking the [Apply] button causes the above parameter values to be applied to all roadway crossings contained in the HEC-RAS current scenario.

Roadway Crossing Parameters

The Roadway Crossing Parameters section defines the parameters necessary to compute the rating curves for the selected roadway crossing:

Roadway Crossing Parameters section

This section covers the following parameters:

  • Maximum headwater elevation
    This entry defines the maximum elevation that the water surface can reach on the upstream side of the roadway crossing. By default, this value is set to equal the maximum elevation for the roadway crossing high chord (weir geometry). Alternatively, the user can click the […] Pick button to graphically select the headwater elevation from the roadway crossing plot. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about setting the maximum headwater elevation parameter.
  • Maximum tailwater elevation, optional
    This optional entry defines the maximum elevation that the water surface can reach on the downstream side of the roadway crossing. By default, this entry is blank.
  • Maximum flow, recommended
    This optional (but recommended) entry defines the maximum flow expected at the roadway crossing. By default, this entry is blank.

Roadway Crossing Plot

The Roadway Crossing Plot section displays the elevation versus horizontal station plot for upstream roadway cross sections.

Roadway Crossing Plot section

After entering the appropriate information, the user can click the [OK] button to apply the defined changes and close the dialog box.

Bridges › Bridge Output & Parameters

Export Table from Bridge Opening Comparison

The user can export a Bridge Opening Comparison table from a GeoHECRAS project with multiple scenarios using the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box. The use of multiple scenarios has several advantages, including the use of a single flow data file for multiple geometry simulations, reducing the necessity for duplicate flow data files and easier analysis of the results. The upstream energy dynamics for multiple scenarios can be calculated and compared to see which set of results is optimal.

Using Bridge & Culvert Data Command

Follow these steps to analyze differences between bridge opening data of any two selected scenarios, and then export the Opening Comparison Results table:

    1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Bridge & Culvert Data command.
      Bridge & Culvert Data Command
    2. The Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box will be displayed.
      Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box
    3. From the Roadway Crossing Specification dropdown combo box, select Opening Comparison Analysis.
      Opening Comparison Analysis
    4. From the Select Existing Roadway Crossing for Comparison section, click the dropdown combo box adjacent to the Existing opening scenario (plan) entry and then select a specific scenario.
      Select Existing Roadway Crossing for Comparison
    5. Click the Opening Comparison Results dropdown combo box and then select the profile.
      Select profile
    6. Click the [Compute] button.
      Perform Opening Comparison Analysis


      Note that the Opening Comparison Analysis feature in the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box allows simultaneous computation of a bridge opening between any two scenarios.

    7. In the Opening Comparison Results table, the software displays bridge opening data for both scenarios.
      Opening Comparison Results
      The following paragraphs describe the Opening Comparison Results data panel.

      The first two columns identify the river station and the scenarios. The remaining portion of the table displays significant information, including energy grade elevation, water surface elevation, velocity, flow area, and the difference between the metrics.

      In addition, the data in the bridge opening comparison table can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document. This method allows the user to document the difference between the two bridges.

    8. Right-click on the table and select the Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel or Export Table to PDF command from the displayed context menu.

      Export Table to Excel
    9. Browse to the relevant directory to save the file, enter the file name, and then click the [Save] button.
      Save file
Culverts › Culvert Definition & Types

Culvert Chart and Scale Number

A culvert is a relatively short segment of conduit that is typically used to transport water underneath a roadway or other type of earthen embankment. Common culvert shapes include circular pipes, rectangular boxes, ellipses, and arches. Noncircular culverts are generally described by their size in terms of a culvert rise and culvert span. The size of a circular culvert is usually expressed in terms of the culvert diameter. There is a wide variety of entrance conditions found at culverts, including square edge, angled wingwalls, beveled edges, entrance mitered to slope, etc.

According to research sponsored by the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA), culvert operation is governed at all times by one of two conditions: inlet control or outlet control (Normann, et al, 1985).

Inlet control is a common governing situation for culvert design, characterized by the fact that the tailwater or culvert barrel conditions allow more flow to be passed through the culvert than the inlet can accept. The inlet itself acts as a controlling or governing section of the culvert, restricting the passage of water into the main barrel.

Typical Inlet Configurations


Image Source: https://rashms.com/blog/culvert-analysis-in-hy8-hec-ras-xpswmm/

Outlet control is different from inlet control in that the barrel or tailwater cannot accept as high a flow as the inlet may allow. This may occur with a high tailwater or a long culvert with a rough interior.

The FHWA Chart Number and Scale Number refer to a series of nomographs published by the Bureau of Public Roads (BPR) (now called the FHWA) 1965. These nomographs allowed the inlet control headwater to be computed for different types of culverts operating under a wide range of flow conditions.

The table displayed below in the article is the Chart Number and Scale Number information from the 1985 FHWA publication. Each of the FHWA charts has two to four separate scales representing different culvert entrance designs. The appropriate FHWA Chart Number and Scale Number should be chosen according to the type of culvert and culvert entrance.

For example, Chart Numbers 1, 2, and 3 apply only to pipe culverts. Similarly, Chart Numbers 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, and 13 apply only to box culverts. The GeoHECRAS software checks the Chart Number to ensure that it is appropriate for the type of culvert being analyzed. GeoHECRAS also checks the value of the Scale Number to ensure that it is available for the given Chart Number. For example, a Scale Number of 4 would be available for chart 11, but not for chart 12.

unknown node

In GeoHECRAS, the user can select from 1, 2, 3, 55, and 56 Chart Numbers and their corresponding Scale Numbers to define culvert data.

Defining Chart number and Scale number

A successful culvert design depends on accurately predicting the effect that a culvert will have on the surrounding area. Typically, culverts can be expected to cause changes in the water surface elevation upstream. The project modeler must estimate these effects to ensure that the change to water elevation upstream headwater will not adversely affect the surrounding community.

Culverts › Culvert Definition & Types

HEC‑RAS Culvert Types/Shapes & Dimensions

Circular-Culvert-Shape.png

This article describes the various culvert types/shapes, sizes, and dimensions that HEC‑RAS supports.

Culvert Types

HEC‑RAS has the ability to model most common culvert types, including the following shapes:

HEC-RAS-Supported-Culvert-Shapes.png

The program has the ability to model up to ten different culverts (any change in shape, slope, roughness, or chart and scale number requires the user to enter a new culvert type) at a roadway crossing. For a given culvert type, a maximum of 25 identical culvert barrels are allowed.

Culvert Sizes

The size of the culvert is defined by entering a rise and span. The rise refers to the maximum inside height of the culvert, while the span represents the maximum inside width. Both the circular and semi‑circular culverts are defined by entering a diameter.

Culvert-Dimensions.png

The inside height (rise) of a culvert opening is important not only in determining the total flow area of the culvert, but also in determining whether the headwater and tailwater elevations are adequate to submerge the inlet or outlet of the culvert.

Most box culverts have chamfered corners on the inside, as shown in the below picture. The chamfers are ignored by the HEC‑RAS culvert computations when computing the cross‑sectional area of the culvert opening. Some manufacturers' literature contains the true cross‑sectional area for each size of box culvert, considering the reduction in area caused by the chamfered corners. If you wish to consider the loss in area due to the chamfers, then you should reduce the span (width) of the culvert. You should not reduce the rise (height) of the culvert, because the program uses the culvert rise to determine the submergence of the culvert entrance and outlet.

Box-Culvert-with-Chamfer.png

All of the arch culverts (arch, pipe arch, low profile arch, high profile arch, and CON/SPAN) within HEC‑RAS have predefined sizes. However, the user can specify any size they want. When a size is entered that is not one of the predefined sizes, the program interpolates the hydraulic properties of the culvert from tables (except for CON/SPAN culverts).

CON/SPAN Arch Culverts

HEC‑RAS has nine predefined CON/SPAN arch culverts. CON/SPAN arch culverts are composed of two vertical walls and an arch.

Conspan-Culvert.jpg

Each predefined span has a predefined arch height. For example, the 12 ft arch has an arch height of 3.07 ft. For the 12 span, any rise greater than 3.07 ft can be made by adding vertical wall below the arch, when a rise is entered less than the arch height, the arch must be modified as discussed below. HEC‑RAS has the ability to produce a culvert shape for rise and span combinations not in the predefined list.

The following is a list of the predefined CON/SPAN sizes that HEC‑RAS has defined.

Table 1
Pre-defined ConSpan sizes

unknown node

If a span is requested that is not in the list of predefined shapes, then one is interpolated geometrically from the bounding predefined shapes. The plot below shows an interpolated 21 ft arch from 20 and 24 predefined arches.

Geometric Interpolation of ConSpan Culvert for Non-Standard Widths (Span)

Figure 1: Geometric Interpolation of ConSpan Culvert for Non-Standard Widths (Span)

If the span is less than the smallest predefined arch, then the smallest arch is scaled to the requested span, similarly, if a span is entered larger than the largest predefined arch, then the largest arch is scaled to the requested span.

If a rise is entered that is less that the predefined arch rise, then the vertical ordinates of the arch are scaled down to the requested arch rise and no vertical segments are added. In the plot below, a 20 ft span was requested with a 3 ft rise. The arch height of the 20 ft span is 4.13 feet so all the vertical distances were multiplied by 3 / 4.13.

Geometric Interpolation of the ConSpan Culvert for Non-Standard Rise.

Figure 2: Geometric Interpolation of the ConSpan Culvert for Non-Standard Rise.

Culvert Length

The culvert length is measured in feet (or meters) along the centerline of the culvert. The culvert length is used to determine the friction loss in the culvert barrel, and to compute the culvert slope.

Number of Identical Barrels

The user can specify up to 25 identical barrels. To use the identical barrel option, all of the culverts must be identical; they must have the same cross‑sectional shape and size, chart and scale number, length, entrance and exit loss coefficients, upstream and downstream invert elevations, and roughness coefficients. If more than one barrel is specified, the program automatically divides the flow rate equally among the culvert barrels and then analyzes only a single culvert barrel. The hydraulics of each barrel is assumed to be exactly the same as the single culvert that is analyzed.

Identical-culverts.png
Culverts › Culvert Definition & Types

Culvert Modeling

Culverts are essential hydraulic structures designed to convey water beneath obstructions such as roads, railways, levees, or embankments. Culverts play a critical role in flood risk management, infrastructure resilience, and roadway drainage systems. Accurately modeling culverts is essential for estimating flow capacity, assessing backwater effects, predicting upstream inundations, and evaluating the risk of overtopping or structural failure.

Culvert Model Example

In GeoHECRAS, culverts can be modeled in both 1D and 2D hydraulic models:

  • 1D Models: Culverts are incorporated as part of a roadway or bridge crossing.
  • 2D Models: Culverts are represented using connection structures that link two adjacent 2D flow areas or a 2D flow area and a storage area. These structures allow for embedded culverts, where users input geometric and hydraulic data to simulate interactions with surface flow and surrounding terrain.

Design Considerations for Culverts

The structural choice of a culvert and corresponding inlet depends on various factors such as environmental considerations, risk to property, cost of construction and maintenance, etc. The capacity of an existing culvert can be increased with an improved inlet. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about culvert design considerations.

Types of Culverts

In GeoHECRAS, the user can model a variety of standard culvert types. The most commonly used culvert shapes include circular, box (rectangular), arch, pipe arch, low-profile arch, high-profile arch, elliptical (horizontal and vertical), semi-circular, and Con/Span. Each culvert type can be modeled with up to 25 identical barrels. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about culvert types.

Types of Culverts

Cross Section Location for Culverts

In GeoHECRAS, culverts are defined within a cross section that represents the roadway embankment. This cross section acts as the control section where the culvert conveys flow from upstream to downstream. To accurately represent this flow, the software uses computational routines that account for how water enters, moves through, and exits the culvert. The culvert computational routines for a HEC-RAS project require the same four cross sections as the bridge computational routines. These cross sections include:

  1. Cross section sufficiently downstream from the culvert such that the flow is unaffected by the culvert
  2. Cross section at the downstream end of the culvert
  3. Cross section at the upstream end of the culvert
  4. Cross section located far enough upstream so that the culvert again has no effect on the flow

The following figure illustrates the cross section locations at a culvert roadway crossing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about cross section location for culverts.

Cross Section Location at a culvert roadway crossing

Expansion and Contraction Coefficient for Culverts

Expansion and contraction coefficients are used to account for energy losses due to changes in flow area as water enters and exits a culvert. These coefficients are applied to the velocity head when computing head losses through the culvert system. If the velocity head increases in the downstream direction, a contraction coefficient is applied. When the velocity head decreases in the downstream direction, an expansion coefficient is used. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about cross section location for culverts.

Culvert Hydraulics

Culvert hydraulics refers to the simulation of how water flows through a culvert structure, typically located at a roadway crossing over a channel or stream. This involves computing water surface elevations, flow rates, and energy losses associated with the movement of water as it enters, moves through, and exits the culvert structure. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about culvert hydraulics.

Entering and Editing Culvert Data

After defining the necessary cross-section data, the user can define culverts using the Culverts data panel of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box. This dialog box allows the user to define the culverts at a roadway crossing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Bridge & Culvert Data command.

Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box
Culverts › Culvert Definition & Types

Defining Culverts for HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling

In GeoHECRAS, the Culverts data panel of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box allows the user to define the culverts at a roadway crossing. This article describes how to use the Culverts data panel.

Follow the steps below to use the Culverts data panel:

  1. Select the Culverts option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box.
    Select the Culverts option from the Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box
  2. The Culverts data panel will be displayed.
    Culverts data panel

The following sections describe how to interact with the Culverts data panel of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box.

Culvert Definition

  • Culvert set ID: This editable dropdown combo box allows the user to select the current culvert set from the Culvert Set table. Alternatively, the user can select a row in the Culvert Set table and the dropdown combo box will update with the current Culvert set ID.
  • Shape: This read-only dropdown combo box allows the user to select the desired culvert shape from the dropdown list.
  • Chart number: This read-only dropdown combo box lists all of the associated chart numbers for the selected culvert shape.
  • Scale number: This read-only dropdown combo box lists all of the associated scale numbers for the selected culvert shape and chart numbers.
  • Solution criteria: This read-only dropdown combo box lists the solution criteria that the HEC-RAS software will use in determining the controlling flow type for the culvert set. The following options are provided in the dropdown list:
    1. Computed Flow Control
    2. Inlet control
    3. Outlet control

The user can also use the buttons provided in this section to add a culvert set, copy a culvert set, pick a culvert, and delete the desired culvert sets, respectively.

Clicking the [Add] button allows the user to add the culvert set.

Clicking the [Copy] button allows the user to copy culverts from the original culvert set.

Clicking the [Pick] button allows the user to select the culvert from the Map View.

Clicking the [Delete] button allows the user to delete the culvert set.

Clicking the [Delete All] button allows the user to delete all of the culvert sets.

Culvert Barrel Centerline Stationing

This section of the panel defines the centerline stationing for each of the culvert barrels that make up a culvert set. The user can manually enter the culvert barrel centerline station. Alternatively, the user can click on the […] pick button under the Upstream Station and Downstream Station column to select the centerline station from the Map View or from the roadway crossing cross section plot for both the upstream and downstream faces. Clicking the […] pick button under the Barrel Alignment column allows the user to select the culvert barrel alignment polyline from the Map View and draw the culvert barrel centerline alignment on the Map View, respectively. Note that a maximum of 25 culvert barrels can be defined in the table.

Culvert Barrel Centerline Stationing

Auto-Assign Culvert Parameters

The Auto-Assign Culvert Parameters is an optional section that is used to auto-assign the culvert parameters. The following options are provided in this section:

  • Assign inverts using terrain surface: This option allows the user to choose the desired terrain surface type from the dropdown combo box.
  • Assign using shapefile layer: This option allows the user to choose the desired shapefile layer type from the dropdown combo box. Note that the following dropdown combo box entries are enabled only when the user selects the Assign using shapefile layer option.
    1. Upstream invert elevation attribute
      This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation attribute of the culvert invert at the upstream end.
    2. Downstream invert elevation attribute
      This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the elevation attribute of the culvert invert at the downstream end.
    3. Culvert shape attribute
      This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the attributes of the culvert’s shape.
    4. Diameter or height attribute
      This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the diameter or height attributes of the culvert.
    5. Width or span attribute
      This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the width or span attributes of the culvert.
      Width or span attribute

Culvert Dimensions

This section of the panel defines the dimensions of the culvert set being defined. The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Diameter or height: This entry field defines the maximum diameter or height inside of the culvert. The user can click the [Pick] button to measure the height from the roadway crossing cross section plot.
  • Width or span: This entry field defines the maximum width inside of the culvert. The user can click the [Pick] button to measure the span from the roadway crossing cross section plot. Note that for circular culvert shapes, this entry field is disabled.
  • Distance to upstream cross section: This entry field is used to locate the culvert in space, relative to the two cross sections that bound the culvert crossing. The user can click the [Pick] button to measure the distance from the upstream side of the culvert to the next upstream cross section from the Map View.
  • Culvert length: This entry field defines the length of the culvert along the centerline of the barrel. The user can click the [Pick] button to measure the culvert length from the Map View.
  • Upstream invert elevation: This entry field defines the elevation of the culvert invert at the upstream end. The user can click the [Pick] button to select the invert elevation from the roadway crossing cross section plot.
  • Downstream invert elevation: This entry field defines the elevation of the culvert invert at the downstream end. The user can click the [Pick] button to select the invert elevation from the roadway crossing cross section plot.
  • Culvert slope: This entry field defines the slope of the culvert. The software computes the value of the Culvert slope entry field based on the upstream and downstream invert elevations. Note that if the upstream and downstream invert elevation entry fields are blank, then the Culvert slope field will be displayed as NA (not applicable).
    Culvert slope entry field

Culvert Coefficients

This section of the panel defines the coefficients for the culvert set being defined. The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Entrance loss coefficient: The coefficient entered in this entry field is computed as a coefficient multiplied by the absolute velocity head of the flow inside the culvert at the upstream end. This value represents the amount of energy loss that occurs as flow transitions from the upstream cross section to inside the culvert barrel. Clicking the […] lookup button next to the Entrance loss coefficient entry field displays the Culvert Entrance Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box. To learn more about the Entrance loss coefficient, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Exit loss coefficient: The coefficient entered in this entry field is computed as a coefficient multiplied by the change in velocity head from inside the culvert at the downstream end to outside the culvert at the downstream end. This value represents the energy loss that occurs as water exits the culvert. Clicking the […] lookup button next to the Exit loss coefficient entry field displays the Culvert Exit Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box. To learn more about Exit loss coefficient, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Manning's n for top: This entry field is used to enter the Manning's n values of the culvert barrel and allows the user to enter a separate n value for the top (which includes the top and sides) of the culvert, as well as for the bottom. If the culvert has the same roughness at the top and bottom, the user can enter the value for the top. Clicking the […] lookup button next to Manning's n for top entry field displays the Manning's Roughness lookup dialog box.
  • Manning's n for bottom: This entry field is used to enter a Manning's n value for the bottom of the culvert. This n value will be used up to a user specified depth inside the culvert. When the water surface exceeds that depth, a composite Manning's n value is computed based on the bottom and top n values and their corresponding wetted perimeters. Clicking the […] lookup button next to the Manning's n for bottom entry field displays the Manning's Roughness lookup dialog box.
  • Depth to use bottom Manning's n: This entry field is used to specify the depth at which the Bottom n value is applied inside the culvert. The surface of the culvert below this depth is given the n value for the bottom of the culvert, while the surface of the culvert above this depth is given the n value for the top of the culvert. The user can click the [Pick] button to measure the depth from the roadway crossing cross section plot.
  • Depth blocked: This entry field is used to block off a portion of the bottom of the culvert. When a value is entered into this field, the culvert is completely blocked up to the depth specified. This blocked out area persists the entire way through the culvert. The user can click the [Pick] button to measure the depth from the roadway crossing cross section plot.
    Depth blocked
Culverts › Culvert Definition & Types

Defining HEC‑RAS Culverts for Fish Passage

This article discusses defining HEC‑RAS culverts for fish passage, by defining multiple roughness regions and partially-buried culverts.

Fish-Passage-Culvert-1.jpg

Multiple Roughness Regions

HEC‑RAS allows the user to define two Manning's roughness values for a culvert, one for the top and sides, and a second for the culvert bottom. The user defines the depth inside the culvert to which the bottom n value is applied. This feature can be used to simulate culverts that have a natural stream bottom, or a culvert that has the bottom portion rougher or smoother than the top, or if something has been placed in the bottom of the culvert to facilitate fish passage. An example of this is shown in the below figure.

Figure-6-10.png

When multiple Manning's n values are applied to a culvert, the computational program will use the bottom n value until the water surface goes above the specified bottom n value. When the water surface goes above the bottom n value depth the program calculates a composite n value for the culvert as a whole. This composite n value is based on an equation from Chow’s book on Open Channel Hydraulics (Chow, 1959) and is the same equation we use for computing a composite n value in open channel flow.

Partially Filled or Buried Culverts

HEC‑RAS allows the bottom portion of the culvert to be filled-in. This option can be applied to any of the culvert shapes. The user is only required to specify the depth to which the culvert bottom is filled-in. An example of this is shown in the below figure.

Partially-Buried-Culvert.png

The user can also specify a different Manning's n value for the blocked portion of the culvert (the bottom), versus the remainder of the culvert. The user must specify the depth to apply the bottom n value as being equal to or greater than the depth of the filled portion of the culvert.

Design of Culverts for Fish Passage

Fish-Passage-Cover.jpg

Date Published: May 09, 2013

Number of Pages: 300

Publisher Information: State of Washington Department of Fish & Wildlife

DESCRIPTION:
This edition of the Water Crossing Design Guidelines document has been completely revised and covers the design of culverts with new chapters on bridge design, tidally influenced crossings, temporary crossings, culvert abandonment, and project development. This document provides practical, real-world knowledge and techniques to improve the overall success of water crossings.

Suggested Citation:
Barnard, R. J., J. Johnson, P. Brooks, K. M. Bates, B. Heiner, J. P. Klavas, D.C. Ponder, P.D. Smith, and P. D. Powers (2013), Water Crossings Design Guidelines, Washington Department of Fish and Wildlife, Olympia, Washington.

Culverts › Culvert Design Considerations

Culvert Design Considerations

The structural choice of a culvert and corresponding inlet is based on environmental considerations, risk to property, cost of construction and maintenance and also aesthetic considerations. The capacity of an existing culvert can be increased with an improved inlet.

Culvert Inlet Design

An improved inlet serves to funnel the flow into the culvert to remove the point of control from the face of the inlet to a throat located downstream from the face. The normal contraction of flow is included in the transition from the face to the throat. An improved inlet may be economical if the culvert is operating under inlet control, but not if the culvert is operating under outlet control.

An improved inlet may offer the advantage of increasing the capacity of an existing culvert that has become inadequate because of changes in the watershed which have increased the discharge to the culvert. However, improving a culvert inlet is not recommended in the following situations:

  • Available design procedures cannot accommodate an improved inlet when the face of the inlet is skewed to the flow entering the inlet.
  • Heavy debris loads could pass through the inlet entrance and become lodged further in the culvert due to the restriction at the throat.
  • The flow reduction at the throat may cause the culvert to flow as outlet control, which would negate any advantages of the improved inlet.
  • Improved inlets are usually costly to construct when compared with standard inlets.

Careful consideration should be given before selecting and using an improved inlet design. Guidelines for design can be found in FHWA publication, Hydraulic Design of Highway Culverts, HDS-5.

The recommended types of improved inlets are top-tapered inlets, side-tapered inlets, and slope-tapered inlets.

Top-Tapered Culvert Inlet

A simple transition of depth in a rectangular box culvert may improve the hydraulic efficiency. If the box culvert is operating under inlet control, the barrel of the culvert is more hydraulically efficient than the entrance geometry. The designer may reduce the barrel depth in transition from the original depth to a minimum of 1.0 feet (0.3 m) greater than the uniform depth of flow. The transition length should be a minimum of 20 feet (6 m) as shown in Figure 1, below. This method is arbitrary, and care should be exercised when the culvert is operating in inlet control.

culvert-design-considerations.png

In terms of design and construction, top-tapered transition inlet is effective, economical, and simple to construct. This type inlet improvement is desirable when designing a multiple barrel box culvert. Other inlet improvement types are not feasible for multiple barrel box culverts because of the need to taper or flare the sidewalls of the barrels.

Side-Tapered Culvert Inlet

Side-tapered inlets involve a widening of the face area of the culvert by tapering the sidewalls. Such inlets have two possible control sections as shown in : the face and the throat as shown in Figure 2. Maintain control at the throat for the design discharge in order to realize significant cost savings in the culvert barrel. This type of improvement is similar in operation to the flared inlet for pipes.

culvert-design-considerations-2.png

Slope-Tapered Culvert Inlet

The slope-tapered inlet incorporates the efficient flow characteristics of side-tapered inlets with a concentration of more of the total available culvert fall at the throat control section. Figure 3 shows a slope-tapered inlet. Generally, slope-tapered improvements are not practical for pipe culverts because of their complexity.

Some of the drawbacks of slope-tapered inlets are as follows:

  • Slope-tapered inlets have a tendency to allow sediment deposition; this can result in maintenance problems.
  • The degree of the slope taper is limited by how flat the remaining portion of pipe can be made without resulting in a mild slope.
  • The use of slope-tapered inlets can increase costs of structural excavation because of the lowering of the upstream end of the culvert.
culvert-design-considerations-2-1.png
Culverts › Culvert Design Considerations

HEC‑RAS Horizontal and Adverse Culvert Slopes

The HEC‑RAS culvert routines allow for horizontal and adverse culvert slopes. The primary difference is that normal depth is not computed for a horizontal or adverse culvert. Outlet control is either computed by the direct step method for an unsubmerged outlet or the full flow equation for a submerged outlet.

Culvert-Energy-Gradeline-Profile.png
Culverts › Culvert Design Considerations

HEC‑RAS Culvert Cross Section Locations

culverts-for-stream-crossing.jpg

The culvert computational routines in HEC‑RAS require the same four cross sections as the bridge computational routines. These cross sections include:

  1. Cross section sufficiently downstream from the culvert such that flow is not affected by the culvert
  2. Cross section at the downstream end of the culvert
  3. Cross section at the upstream end of the culvert
  4. Cross section located far enough upstream that the culvert again has no effect on the flow

The following figure illustrates the cross section locations at a culvert roadway crossing.

Figure-6.3.png

The two cross sections at the culvert ends represent the channel outside of the culvert. Separate culvert data will be used to create internal cross sections inside of the culvert. Whenever the user is computing a water surface profile through a culvert (or any other hydraulic structure); additional cross sections should always be included both upstream and downstream of the structure. This will prevent any user‑entered boundary conditions from affecting the hydraulic results through the culvert.

Culvert Cross Section 1

Cross section 1 should be located at a point where flow has fully expanded from its constricted top width caused by the culvert constriction. The cross section spacing downstream of the culvert can be based on the same criterion as used for bridge modeling. The entire cross sectional area of Cross Section 1 is typically considered to be effectively conveying flow.

Culvert Cross Section 2

Cross section 2 is located a short distance downstream from the culvert exit. This distance should represent the short distance that is required for the abrupt transition of the flow from the culvert to the channel. This cross section does not include the culvert structure or embankments, but represents the physical shape of the channel just downstream of the culvert. The roadway geometry and culvert shape and location is entered into the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box which include this cross section as the ground geometry.

Bridge and Culvert Data dialog box

The ineffective flow area option is used to restrict the effective flow area of cross section 2 to the flow area around or near the edges of the culverts, until flow overtops the roadway. The ineffective flow areas are used to represent the correct amount of active flow area just downstream of the culvert. Because the flow will begin to expand as it exits the culvert, the active flow area at cross section 2 is generally wider than the width of the culvert opening. The width of the active flow area will depend upon how far downstream cross section 2 is from the culvert exit. In general, a reasonable assumption would be to assume a 1.5 : 1 expansion rate over this short distance. With this assumption, if cross section 2 is 6 feet from the culvert exit, then the active flow area at cross section 2 should be 8 feet wider than the culvert opening (4 feet on each side of the culvert). The figure below illustrates cross section 2 of a typical culvert model with a box culvert. As indicated, the cross section data does not define the culvert shape for the culvert model. On the below figure, the channel bank locations are indicated by small circles, and the stations and elevations of the ineffective flow areas are indicated by triangles.

Figure-6.4-Bigger.png

Cross sections 1 and 2 are located so as to create a channel reach downstream of the culvert in which the HEC‑RAS program can accurately compute the friction losses and expansion losses downstream of the culvert.

Culvert Cross Section 3

Cross section 3 is located a short distance upstream of the culvert entrance, and represents the physical configuration of the upstream channel. This cross section should be far enough upstream from the culvert face, such that the abrupt contraction of flow has room to occur. Also, the culvert computational routines take into account the entrance loss in all of the calculations. This entrance loss requires some flow distance to occur over. The culvert computational routines use a combination of a bridge deck, cross sections 2 and 3, and culvert data, to describe the culvert(s) and the roadway embankment. The culvert data, which is used to describe the roadway embankment and culvert openings, is located at a river station between cross sections 2 and 3.

The ineffective flow area option is used to restrict the effective flow area of cross section 3 until the flow overtops the roadway. The ineffective flow area is used to represent the correct amount of active flow area just upstream of the culvert. Because the flow is contracting rapidly as it enters the culvert, the active flow area at cross section 3 is generally wider than the width of the culvert opening. The width of the active flow area will depend upon how far upstream cross section 3 is placed from the culvert entrance. In general, a reasonable assumption would be to assume a 1 : 1 contraction rate over this short distance. With this assumption, if cross section 3 is 5 feet from the culvert entrance, then the active flow area at cross section 3 should be 10 feet wider than the culvert opening (5 feet on each side of the culvert). The figure below illustrates cross section 3 of a typical culvert model for a box culvert, including the roadway profile and the culvert shape defined by the the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box. As indicated, the ground profile does not define the culvert shape for the culvert model. On the below figure, the channel bank locations are indicated by small circles and the stations and elevations of ineffective area control are indicated by triangles.

Figure-6.5.png

Culvert Cross Section 4

Cross section 4 is located at a point where flow has not yet begun to contract from its unrestrained top width upstream of the culvert to its constricted top width near the culvert. This distance is normally determined assuming a 1 : 1 contraction of flow. In other words, the average rate at which flow can contract to pass through the culvert opening is assumed to be one foot laterally for every one foot traveled in the downstream direction. The entire area of Cross Section 4 is typically considered to be effective in conveying flow.

Culverts › Culvert Hydraulics & Computations

Setting Maximum Headwater Parameter

For unsteady flow simulations, hydraulic structures such as bridges and culverts and storage area connections are converted into families of rating curves that describe the structure as a function of tailwater, flow, and headwater. Then, internally, while the unsteady flow analysis is running, the HEC-RAS computational engine will refer to the computed rating curves to determine what the headwater elevation at the structure is. This speeds up the unsteady flow simulation by not having to iterate the computations at the structure.

The user can set several parameters that can be used in defining the rating curves, but generally only the maximum headwater elevation needs to be defined. This headwater elevation needs to be high enough to account for the maximum computed water surface elevation expected at the upstream side of the structure.

Users set these parameters in HEC-RAS by selecting the “HTab Parameters” (Hydraulic Table) button from the Geometric Data Editor, Bridge Culvert Data Editor or Connection Data Editor. In GeoHECRAS, these same parameters are accessed from the Analysis ribbon menu.

Follow the steps below to set these parameters in GeoHECRAS:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, click the Rating Curves – Hydraulic Parameters dropdown menu and then select the Hydraulic Parameters – Bridges & Culverts command.
    Select the Hydraulic Parameters – Bridges & Culverts command
  2. The Hydraulic Parameters – Bridges & Culverts dialog box will be displayed.
    Hydraulic Parameters – Bridges & Culverts dialog box
  3. Enter the maximum elevation that you expect the water surface to reach on the upstream side of the bridge in the Maximum headwater elevation data entry field. Click on the […] button to pick the headwater elevation from the graphical plot.
  4. The other parameters defined in the dialog box can usually retain their default values.
  5. Click the [OK] button to apply the defined changes and close the dialog box.

When the unsteady flow analysis runs, the HEC-RAS computation engine will construct a family of headwater elevation vs flow vs tailwater elevation rating curves. To speed up this rating curve computation, enter the maximum flow (discharge) expected at the structure, and the software will limit the computations to that maximum value. This can reduce the time required for computing the rating curves.

Culverts › Culvert Hydraulics & Computations

HEC-RAS Culvert and Roadway Overflow Computations

Combination-Flow-1.png

HEC‑RAS can compute the amount of flow passing through the culvert opening and over the top of the roadway. This article describes the computational method used by HEC‑RAS for computing culvert flow and roadway overflow.

Combination Flow Computational Method

The first solution through the culvert is under the assumption that all of the flow is going through the culvert barrels.

Once a final upstream energy is obtained the program checks to see the energy elevation is greater than the minimum roadway elevation for weir flow to occur. If the computed energy is less than the minimum elevation for weir flow, then the solution is final.

If the computed energy elevation is greater than the minimum roadway elevation for weir flow, the program performs an iterative procedure to determine the amount of flow over the roadway (weir) and through the culverts. During this iterative procedure, the program recalculates both inlet and outlet control culvert solutions for each estimate of the culvert flow. In general the higher of the two is used for the culvert portion of the solution, unless the program feels that inlet control cannot be maintained. The program will continue to iterate until it finds a flow split that produces the same upstream energy (within the error tolerance) for both roadway overflow and culvert flow.

Culverts › Culvert Hydraulics & Computations

HEC‑RAS Culvert Supercritical & Mixed Flow Computations

Circular-Culverts.jpg

The HEC‑RAS culvert routines allow for supercritical and mixed flow regimes inside the culvert barrel. During outlet control computations, the program first makes a subcritical flow pass through the culvert, from downstream to upstream.

If the culvert barrel is on a steep slope, the program may default to critical depth inside of the culvert barrel. If this occurs, a supercritical forewater calculation is made from upstream to downstream, starting with the assumption of critical depth at the culvert inlet. During the frontwater calculations, the program is continually checking the specific force of the flow, and comparing it to the specific force of the flow from the subcritical flow pass.

If the specific force of the subcritical flow is larger than the supercritical answer, the program assumes that a hydraulic jump will occur at that location. Otherwise, a supercritical flow profile is calculated all the way through and out of the culvert barrel.

Culverts › Culvert Hydraulics & Computations

HEC‑RAS Culvert Expansion & Contraction Coefficients

Culvert-Entrance.jpg

User‑defined coefficients are required to compute head losses due to the contraction and expansion of flows upstream and downstream of a culvert. These losses are computed by multiplying an expansion or contraction coefficient by the absolute difference in velocity head between two cross sections.

If the velocity head increases in the downstream direction, a contraction coefficient is applied. When the velocity head decreases in the downstream direction, an expansion coefficient is used.

As indicated by the below suggested values, the expansion of flow causes more energy loss than the contraction. Also, energy losses increase with the abruptness of the transition. For culverts with abrupt flow transitions, the contraction and expansion loss coefficients should be increased to account for additional energy losses.

Contraction-Expansion-Coefficients.png
Culverts › Culvert Hydraulics & Computations

HEC-RAS Culvert Normal Depth Computations

Culvert-Normal-Depth.png

For culvert computations, normal depth is the depth at which uniform flow will occur as free surface flow within the culvert. In other words, for a uniform channel of infinite length, carrying a constant flow rate, flow in the channel would be at a constant depth at all points along the channel, and this would be the normal depth.

Normal depth often represents a good approximation of the actual depth of flow within a channel segment. The program computes normal depth using an iterative approach to arrive at a value, which satisfies Manning's equation:

unknown nodeEquation-Summary-6-8.gif

If the normal depth is greater than the culvert rise (from invert to top of the culvert), the program sets the normal depth equal to the culvert rise.

Culverts › Culvert Hydraulics & Computations

HEC‑RAS Culvert Hydraulics Concepts

This article introduces the basic concepts of culvert hydraulics, which are used in the HEC‑RAS culvert computational routines.

A culvert is a relatively short length of closed conduit, which connects two open channel segments or bodies of water. Two of the most common types of culverts are: circular pipe culverts, which are circular in cross section, and box culverts, which are rectangular in cross section. The below figure shows an illustration of circular pipe and box culverts.

Cross Section of a Circular Pipe and Box Culvert, Respectively

Figure 1: Cross Section of a Circular Pipe and Box Culvert, Respectively

HEC‑RAS has the ability to model the following culvert shapes:

  • Box
  • Circular
  • Arch
  • Pipe Arch
  • Low Profile Arch
  • High Profile Arch
  • Elliptical
  • Semi-Circular
  • CON/SPAN

Culverts are made up of an entrance where water flows into the culvert, a barrel, which is the closed conduit portion of the culvert, and an exit, where the water flows out of the culvert, as shown in the below figure. The total flow capacity of a culvert depends upon the characteristics of the entrance as well as the culvert barrel and exit.

The tailwater at a culvert (TW in the below figure) is the depth of water at the exit or downstream side of the culvert, as measured from the downstream invert of the culvert. The invert is the lowest point on the inside of the culvert at a particular cross section. The tailwater depth depends on the flow rate and hydraulic conditions downstream of the culvert.

The headwater at a culvert (HW in the below figure) is the depth from the culvert inlet invert to the energy grade line, for the cross section just upstream of the culvert (cross section 3). The headwater represents the amount of energy head required to pass a given flow through the culvert.

The Upstream Water Surface (WSU in the below figure) is the depth of water on the entrance or upstream side of the culvert (cross section 3), as measured from the upstream invert of cross section 3.

The Total Energy at any location is equal to the elevation of the invert plus the specific energy (depth of water + velocity heady) at that location. All of the culvert computations within HEC‑RAS compute the total energy for the upstream end of the culvert. The upstream water surface (WSU) is then obtained by placing that energy into the upstream cross section and computing the water surface that corresponds to that energy for the given flow rate.

Figure 2: Full Flowing Culvert with Energy and Hydraulic Grade Lines

Figure 2: Full Flowing Culvert with Energy and Hydraulic Grade Lines

Culverts › Culvert Hydraulics & Computations

HEC‑RAS Culvert FHWA Full Flow Computations

Culvert-flowing-full.jpg

Culverts are made up of an inlet where water flows into the culvert, a barrel, which is the closed conduit portion of the culvert, and an outlet where water flows out of the culvert. Culvert designs that convey water under roadways with optimal capacity and minimal headwater build up are generally preferred to alternative designs. To ensure optimal flow-through, the culvert should be designed to minimize losses incurred at the inlet, barrel, and outlet. To learn more about key culvert design considerations, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

For culverts flowing full, the total head loss (or energy loss) through the culvert is measured in feet (or meters).

The head loss, HL, is computed using the following formula:

FHWA

Entrance Loss

The entrance loss is computed as a coefficient multiplied by the absolute velocity head of the flow inside the culvert at the upstream end. The entrance loss for the culvert is computed as:

FHWA_2

The coefficient entered in the above equation is multiplied by the velocity head inside the culvert at the upstream end. This value represents the amount of energy loss that occurs as flow transitions from the upstream cross section to the interior of the culvert barrel. This coefficient is used in the outlet control computations and will not affect inlet control computations, as they are performed with the Federal Highway Inlet Control equations directly.

Friction Loss

The friction loss in the culvert is computed using Manning’s formula, which is expressed as follows:

FHWA_3

Exit Loss

The exit energy loss is computed as a coefficient multiplied by the change in velocity head from just inside the culvert, at the downstream end, to outside of the culvert at the downstream end. The equation for computing exit losses is as follows:

FHWA_4

The coefficient entered in the above equation is multiplied by the change in velocity head from inside the culvert to outside the culvert at the downstream end. This value represents the energy loss that occurs as water exits the culvert. This coefficient is used in the outlet control computations.

Culverts › Culvert Hydraulics & Computations

HEC‑RAS Culvert Direct Step Computations

Three-Barrel-Culvert.png

For culverts flowing partially full, the water surface profile in the culvert is computed using the direct step method. This method is very efficient, because no iterations are required to determine the flow depth for each step. The water surface profile is computed for small increments of depth (usually between 0.01 and 0.05 feet). If the flow depth equals the height of the culvert before the profile reaches the upstream end of the culvert, the friction loss through the remainder of the culvert is computed assuming full flow.

The first step in the direct step method is to compute the exit loss and establish a starting water surface inside the culvert. If the tailwater depth is below critical depth inside the culvert, then the starting condition inside the culvert is assumed to be critical depth. If the tailwater depth is greater than critical depth in the culvert, then an energy balance is performed from the downstream cross section to inside of the culvert. This energy balance evaluates the change in energy by the following equation.

unknown nodeEquation-Summary-6-7.gif

Once a water surface is computed inside the culvert at the downstream end, the next step is to perform the direct step backwater calculations through the culvert. The direct step backwater calculations will continue until a water surface and energy are obtained inside the culvert at the upstream end. The final step is to add an entrance loss to the computed energy to obtain the upstream energy outside of the culvert at the upstream side (cross section 3) of the roadway crossing. The water surface outside the culvert is then obtained by computing the water surface at cross section 3 that corresponds to the calculated energy for the given flow rate.

Roadway Crossings › Roadway Geometry

Graphically Editing Roadway Geometry

In GeoHECRAS, the graphical editing area of the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box allows the user to graphically modify roadway geometry. The user can interactively modify the bridge deck, sloping abutments, and bridge piers and view the changes in real-time on the graphical plot. This improves productivity by providing options to easily build and edit HEC-RAS models. The user can build more accurate HEC-RAS models and easily perform a comparison between different engineering models such as existing and proposed bridges.

To graphically edit the roadway crossing geometry, follow these steps:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Bridge & Culvert Data command.
    Bridge-Culvert-Data-Command-Image
  2. The Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box will be displayed. Alternatively, the user can double-click on the roadway crossing on the Map View to display this dialog box.
    Bridge-Culvert-Data-Dialog-Box
  3. The Roadway Crossing Plot section in the above dialog box displays the elevation versus horizontal station plot for upstream and downstream roadway cross sections. The vertical toolbar on the left contains several tools to graphically modify the roadway geometry.

The following sections describe how to edit the roadway crossing geometry using various tools in the Roadway Crossing Plot section.

Tools for Editing Roadway Geometry

The vertical toolbar on the left of the Roadway Crossing Plot section contains tools to graphically edit the roadway crossing.

unknown node
Roadway Crossings › Roadway Geometry

Import Roadway Geometry Command

The Import Roadway Geometry command allows the user to import any external geometry data necessary to construct roadway geometry.

Follow the steps below to use the Import Roadway Geometry command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Roadway Crossings dropdown menu and then select the Import Roadway Geometry command.
    Import Roadway Geometry command
  2. The Import Roadway Geometry dialog box will be displayed.
    Import Roadway Geometry dialog box

Note that the 1D Roadway Crossing panel will be enabled when the project contains at least one river reach with two cross sections defined for it.

The following sections describe how to use the Import Roadway Geometry command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting a Roadway Geometry File

The Select Roadway Geometry File section allows the user to select the roadway point file. The file needs to be in an ASCII text file format, with either commas, tabs, or spaces delimiting the data fields contained within each row of the file.

The first row within the file that contains 3 floating point numbers is used to start the import roadway crossing process. Whenever a blank line is encountered within the data file or the direction between three adjacent points changes too much, the software interprets this as the start of a new roadway crossing.

The following survey point file formats are supported:

  • EN (Easting, Northing)
  • ENZ (Easting, Northing, Elevation)
  • ENZD (Easting, Northing, Elevation, Description)
  • LLZ (Lat-Long, Elevation)
  • LLZD (Lat-Long, Elevation, Description)
  • NE (Northing, Easting)
  • NEZ (Northing, Easting, Elevation)
  • NEZD (Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description)
  • PEN (Point, Easting, Northing)
  • PENZ (Point, Easting, Northing, Elevation)
  • PEND (Point, Easting, Northing, Description)
  • PENZD (Point, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Description)
  • PLLZD (Point, Lat-Long, Elevation, Description)
  • PNE (Point, Northing, Easting)
  • PNEZ (Point, Northing, Easting, Elevation)
  • PNED (Point, Northing, Easting, Description)
  • PNEZD (Point, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description)
  • PNT (XYZ Survey Alignment Data)
  • PTS (XYZ Survey Alignment Data)

The software will attempt to determine the file format based upon the file extension. However, the user can change the file format to be used after the file is selected.

For reference, Easting = X coordinate and Northing = Y coordinate.

Note that the cross section points must overlay only one river reach for this command to operate. In addition, cross sections should not already exist for the river reach that is being used to construct cross sections from the imported points.

Point File Preview

This Point File Preview section shows the first 100 lines contained within the survey point file. It allows the user to see the contents of the survey point file and allows the user to change the file format to be used for importing based upon previewing the contents. After changing the file format, the column headings change in the Point File Preview section.

Point File Preview section

Elevation Data Adjustment

The Elevation Data Adjustment section allows the user to adjust the survey point data elevation values if the elevation data is in a different unit system or needs to have a datum adjustment.

Elevation Data Adjustment section

The user can select one of the following options to modify the elevation values:

  • No change
    This is the default option. This radio button option will not make any changes to the elevation values.
  • Convert meters to feet
    This radio button option converts the elevation values from meters to feet. After selecting this option, click the [Apply] button. The software will then update the converted values in the Elevation column of the Point File Preview table.
  • Datum adjustment
    This radio button option allows the user to add a constant value to the existing elevation values. After selecting this option, the entry field adjacent to this option is enabled, allowing the user to enter the constant value. After entering the value, click the [Apply] button. The software will then update the values in the Elevation column of the Point File Preview table. The new elevation values are the sum of the original value and a constant value provided by the user.

Roadway Crossing General Specifications

The Roadway Crossing General Specifications section is used to provide general specifications for the 1D and 2D roadway crossings. This section contains the following panels:

  • 1D Roadway Crossing
  • 2D Roadway Crossing

For a 1D roadway crossing, the user is required to enter the river station ID for the 1D roadway crossing in the Roadway crossing river station entry field. This river station ID identifies the upstream end of the roadway crossing.

Roadway Crossing General Specifications - 1D Roadway Crossing panel

Whereas for a 2D roadway crossing, the user is required to enter a 2D roadway crossing ID in the 2D Roadway crossing ID entry field.

Roadway Crossing General Specifications - 2D Roadway Crossing panel

The user can use the Description box of each panel to describe the location of the roadway crossing in more detail.

Importing Roadway Geometry

Clicking on the [OK] button allows the user to import the external geometry data to construct roadway geometry.

Map View Imported Roadway Geometry
Roadway Crossings › Roadway Geometry

Extract Roadway Geometry Command

The Extract Roadway Geometry command allows the user to extract high chord geometry and internal bridge geometry of roadway crossings from digital terrain layers. Additionally, for 2D roadway crossings, the user can extract the elevation data from approach and exit cross sections. The extracted geometry data will automatically get populated in the appropriate fields of the bridge and culvert data dialog boxes.

Note that 1D roadway crossing geometry data will get populated into the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box, whereas 2D roadway crossing geometry data will get populated into the 2D Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box.

Refer to the below articles in our knowledge base to learn more about 1D and 2D bridge modeling:

  • HEC-RAS Bridge Modeling
  • HEC-RAS 2D Bridge Modeling

Follow the steps below to use the Extract Roadway Geometry command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Roadway Crossings dropdown menu and then select the Extract Roadway Geometry command. Extract Roadway Geometry ribbon menu command
  2. The Extract Roadway Geometry dialog box will be displayed. Extract Roadway Geometry dialog box

Note that this command is also available in the roadway crossing right-click context menu.

The following sections describe the Extract Roadway Geometry command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Roadway Crossing

The Select Roadway Crossing section allows the user to select the roadway crossing in order to extract the roadway geometry. It contains two panels:

  • 1D Roadway Crossing
  • 2D Roadway Crossing

The Extract Roadway Crossing dialog box will default to either the 1D or 2D Roadway Crossing panel based on the following criteria:

  • If the user has only 1D elements in the model, the 1D Roadway Crossing panel will be displayed by default.
  • If the user has only 2D elements in the model, the 2D Roadway Crossing panel will be displayed by default.
  • If the user has both 1D and 2D elements in the model, the 1D Roadway Crossing panel will be displayed by default.

The 1D Roadway Crossing panel allows the user to select the river, corresponding reach, and the roadway crossing river station from the River name, Reach name, and Roadway crossing river station dropdown combo boxes. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the roadway crossing river station from the Map View.

The 2D Roadway Crossing panel allows the user to select the 2D roadway crossing from the 2D roadway crossing ID dropdown combo box. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the 2D roadway crossing from the Map View.

2D Roadway Crossing tabbed panel

Extract Elevation Data

This section is used to define the elevation data source(s) to be used to extract the roadway geometry.

Extract Elevation Data section

The user can use the Primary and Secondary Elevation Data panels to define the primary and secondary (if available in the project) elevation data sources for extracting the roadway geometry. Different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information depending on the selected elevation data source type.

The following elevation data formats are supported:

  • CAD Drawing
  • Elevation Grid
  • GIS Contours
  • LandXML Data
  • Terrain Surface
  • TIN Surface

When a secondary elevation data source is available, the software will form a concave hull around the primary elevation data source to identify its bounds. For locations where elevation data from the primary data source is unavailable, the software will use the elevation data from the secondary data source.

Note that the user cannot utilize the same data source to define both the primary and secondary elevation data.

The user can click the [Swap Sources] button to swap the selected elevation source from primary elevation data to secondary elevation data and vice versa.

Extraction Specifications

This section is used to define the specifications for extracting the roadway geometry. The user can extract the high chord geometry of the roadway crossing and the internal bridge geometry. For 2D models, the user can also extract the elevation data from approach and exit cross sections.

The following panels are provided in this section:

High Chord Geometry

This panel is used to specify general parameters for extracting high chord roadway geometry. The extracted elevation at the roadway high chord vertices will get populated in the appropriate fields of the bridge and culvert data dialog boxes.

High Chord Geometry tabbed panel

By default, the options in this panel are disabled (i.e., grayed out). The user can select the Extract Elevation Data checkbox to enable the content of this panel. If this checkbox is left unchecked, the software will not extract high chord roadway geometry.

The following options are provided to extract elevation data:

  • Extract elevation data from roadway centerline
    On selecting this radio button option, the software will extract the elevation data using the roadway centerline.
  • Extract elevation data from roadway edges
    On selecting this radio button option, the software will extract the elevation data using roadway edges.

The following options are provided to assign elevations at roadway edges:

  • Assign elevations at upstream and downstream roadway edges
    On selecting this radio button option, the software will extract and assign elevations at both upstream and downstream roadway edges.
  • Assign elevations at upstream roadway edge only
    On selecting this radio button option, the software will extract and assign elevations only at the upstream roadway edge.
  • Assign elevations at downstream roadway edge only
    On selecting this radio button option, the software will extract and assign elevations only at the downstream roadway edge.

Internal Bridge Geometry

This panel is used to provide general specifications for extracting the bridge's internal geometry. The extracted internal bridge geometry data will get populated in the appropriate fields of the bridge and culvert data dialog boxes.

Internal Bridge Geometry tabbed panel

By default, the options in this panel are disabled (i.e., grayed out). The user can select the Extract Elevation Data checkbox to enable the content of this panel. If this checkbox is left unchecked, the software will not extract the internal bridge geometry.

Note that the options provided to extract the elevation data in this panel are similar to that of the High Chord Geometry panel.

The following options are provided to assign geometry to internal cross sections:

  • Assign at upstream and downstream internal cross sections
    On selecting this radio button option, the software will extract and assign geometry for both upstream and downstream cross sections.
  • Assign at upstream internal cross section only
    On selecting this radio button option, the software will extract and assign geometry for only the upstream cross section.
  • Assign at downstream internal cross section only
    On selecting this radio button option, the software will extract and assign geometry for only the downstream cross section.

Other Data

This panel is enabled only for 2D roadway crossings. It allows the user to extract elevation data from approach and exit cross sections.

Other Data tabbed panel

The following parameters are provided in the panel:

  • Extract elevation data from 2D approach cross section
    Select this checkbox to extract elevation data from the approach cross section.
  • Extract elevation data from 2D exit cross section
    Select this checkbox to extract elevation data from the exit cross section.

When all the data has been defined, the user can click the [OK] button to extract and populate the roadway geometry data into the appropriate fields of bridge and culvert data dialog boxes.

Roadway Crossings › Roadway Geometry

Draw and Assign Roadway Crossings Command

GeoHECRAS allows the user to model roadway crossings consisting of single or multiple bridge openings and culverts. Roadway crossings can also be drawn directly inside 2D flow areas to model 2D bridges.

Roadway crossings can be defined by either drawing or assigning the polyline using the following commands:

  • Draw Roadway Crossings
  • Assign Roadway Crossings

Existing roadway crossings can also be georeferenced to represent the roadway structure more accurately. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to georeference a roadway crossing.

Drawing Roadway Crossings

The Draw Roadway Crossings command allows the user to interactively draw the centerline of the roadway crossing on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw Roadway Crossings command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Roadway Crossings dropdown menu, and then select the Draw Roadway Crossings command.Roadway crossings dropdown menu
  2. The Draw Roadway Crossings dialog box will be displayed.Draw Roadway Crossings dialog box

The above dialog box contains two panels:

  • 1D Roadway Crossing
  • 2D Roadway Crossing

The dialog box will default to either the 1D or 2D Roadway Crossing panel based on the following criteria:

  • If the user has only 1D elements in the model, the 1D Roadway Crossing panel will be displayed by default.
  • If the user has only 2D elements in the model, the 2D Roadway Crossing panel will be displayed by default and the 1D Roadway Crossing panel will be disabled.
  • If the user has both 1D and 2D elements in the model, the 1D Roadway Crossing panel will be displayed by default.

The below sections describe how to draw a roadway crossing on the Map View and interact with the Draw Roadway Crossings dialog box.

Drawing 1D Roadway Crossings

The 1D Roadway Crossing panel of the Draw Roadway Crossings command is used to draw 1D roadway crossings. The following sections are available in this panel:

Draw Roadway Crossing Polyline

This section is used to draw the 1D roadway crossings on the Map View using polylines. To draw a roadway crossing polyline, follow the steps below:

  1. Click the [Draw] button adjacent to the Structure centerline field. The user can check the Create curvilinear polyline checkbox option in order to draw a smooth outline for the polyline using curvilinear segments.Draw button Note that if the user clicks the [Draw] button and tries to draw the bridge centerline on a 2D mesh, then the software will automatically switch to the 2D Roadway Crossing panel.
  2. The Draw Roadway Crossings dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user on what to do next.
  3. Draw the roadway crossing polyline on the Map View. While drawing elements, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between the curvilinear and the linear digitizing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about drawing elements on the Map View.
  4. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The Draw Roadway Crossings dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Structure centerline read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.Structure centerline

Roadway Crossing General Specifications

This section is used to provide general specifications for the roadway crossing.

General specifications

Note that the software automatically picks up the value for the Roadway crossing river station. This river station ID identifies the upstream end of the roadway crossing. The user can use the Description box to describe the location of the roadway crossing in more detail.

General Options

The General Options tabbed panel is used to specify the structural dimensions and weir overflow specifications of the roadway crossing.

General Options tabbed

Roadway Structure Dimensional Specifications

This section is used to define the width, distance, and slope of the road crossing.

Roadway Width (Parallel to Flow)

The Roadway width (parallel to flow) entry field is used to enter the width of the roadway crossing along the stream. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to measure roadway width parallel to flow from the Map View.

Distance from Railing to Upstream XS

The Distance from railing to upstream XS entry field is used to enter the distance between the upstream side of the roadway and the cross section immediately upstream of the roadway. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to measure the distance from the Map View.

Upstream Embankment Side Slope (V:H)

The Upstream embankment side slope (V:H) entry field is used to enter the slope of the road embankment on the upstream side of the roadway. The slope should be entered as the horizontal to vertical distance ratio of the roadway crossing. Note that this variable is generally not used in the computations but is used for display purposes in the profile plot. However, if the user has selected the FHWA WSPRO Method for low flow, this field will be used in the computation of the bridge discharge coefficient. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the FHWA WSPRO Method.

Downstream Embankment Side Slope (V:H)

The Downstream embankment side slope (V:H) entry field is used to enter the slope of the road embankment on the downstream side of the roadway. The slope should be entered as the horizontal to vertical distance ratio of the roadway crossing. Note that this variable is generally not used in the computations but is used for display purposes in the profile plot. However, if the user has selected the FHWA WSPRO Method for low flow, this field will be used in the computation of the bridge discharge coefficient.

Roadway Weir Overflow Specifications

This section is used to define the minimum weir elevation, maximum submergence ratio, weir crest shape, and weir coefficient for an overflow weir on a roadway.

Roadway Weir Overflow Specifications

Minimum Weir Elevation (optional)

The Minimum weir elevation (optional) entry field allows the user to enter the minimum elevation for which weir flow will begin to be evaluated. If this field is left blank, the elevation that triggers weir flow is based on the lowest high chord elevation on the upstream side of the roadway. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select elevation from the cross section on the Map View.

Maximum Submergence Ratio

The Maximum submergence ratio entry field defines the maximum allowable submergence ratio that can occur during weir flow calculations over the roadway. By default, the software uses a value of 0.98 (98 percent submerged).

Overflow Weir Crest Shape

The Overflow weir crest shape dropdown combo box entry allows the user to specify weir types. There are two options available: Broad Crested and Ogee. The user can choose the weir type that best matches the problem.

If the user selects the Ogee shaped weir, two additional parameters: Spillway approach height and Design energy head are displayed in the Roadway Weir Overflow Specifications section.

Ogee shaped weir
Spillway Approach Height

The Spillway approach height entry field defines the height which is equal to the elevation of the spillway crest minus the mean elevation of the ground just upstream of the spillway.

Design Energy Head

The Design energy head entry field defines the height which is equal to the energy grade line elevation minus the elevation of the spillway crest.

Weir Coefficient (Cd)

The Weir Coefficient (Cd) entry field allows the user to enter a weir coefficient that will be used in the weir computations. Note that different coefficients may be selected, depending on use of Metric (SI) or US Units. By default, the software uses a value of 2.6. Clicking on the […] button will display a lookup dialog box containing weir coefficients.

Weir coefficients

Note that if the Ogee shaped weir is selected, the user can click [Compute] and compute the weir coefficient based on the approach and design energy head.

Terrain Options

The Terrain Options tabbed panel is used to define the source elevation data that can be used to extract the roadway geometry defined from the digital terrain layers.

Terrain Options

Extract Roadway Geometry

This optional section is used to select the source elevation data necessary to extract roadway geometry. By default, the Extract Roadway Geometry section is enabled. The user can uncheck the Extract Roadway Geometry checkbox to disable this section. If this section is disabled, the sections that appear below it will be unavailable (i.e., grayed out), and the software will not extract the roadway geometry.

The user can use the Primary and Secondary Elevation Data panels to define the primary and secondary (if available in the project) elevation data sources for extracting roadway geometry. Depending upon the elevation data source type that is selected, different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base for information on the types of terrain elevation data that can be used to construct cross sections.

When a secondary elevation data source is available, the software will form a concave hull around the primary elevation data source to identify its bounds. For locations where elevation data from the primary data source are unavailable, the software will use elevation data from the secondary data source.

Note that the user cannot utilize the same data source to define both primary and secondary elevation data.

The user can click the [Swap Sources] button to swap the selected elevation source from primary elevation data to secondary elevation data and vice versa.

Select Elevation Data Extraction Source

This section is used to define the location of the extracted terrain source on the Map View.

The Extract elevation data from roadway centerline option is used to extract the roadway geometry from the centerline of the roadway. By default, this option is selected.

The Extract elevation data from roadway edges option is used to extract the roadway geometry from the edges (left and right) of the roadway.

When the data has been defined in the 1D Roadway Crossing panel, click the [Apply] button. The software will create a roadway crossing using the roadway centerline drawn by the user.

Drawing 2D Roadway Crossings

The 2D Roadway Crossing panel of the Draw Roadway Crossings command is used to draw 2D roadway crossings.

Note that most of the sections of this panel are similar to that of the 1D Roadway Crossing panel.

Similar to drawing a 1D roadway crossing, the user can draw the 2D roadway crossing centerline using the Draw 2D Roadway Crossing Polyline section and define the general specifications for creating the roadway crossing.

2D roadway crossing

Note that if the user clicks the [Draw] button of the 2D Roadway Crossing panel and tries to draw the bridge centerline on a river reach, then the software will automatically switch to the 1D Roadway Crossing panel wherein the user can fill in the required information.

Additionally, for 2D roadway crossings, the user must specify the cell spacing values along the roadway centerline in the 2D Roadway Centerline Cell Spacing section.

Centerline Cell Spacing section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Cell spacing along roadway centerline This entry represents cell spacing along the roadway centerline. If this entry is left blank, then the cell spacing used in the vicinity of the roadway centerline will be used. Click the […] button to measure the cell spacing from the Map View.
  • Relaxed cell spacing for roadway centerline This entry represents the cell spacing further away from the roadway centerline. If this entry is left blank, then the cell spacing used in the vicinity of the roadway centerline will be used. This value should not be the same as the Cell spacing along roadway centerline value, or there may be many cell errors introduced along the roadway centerline. Click on the […] button to measure the cell spacing from the Map View.

When the data has been defined in the 2D Roadway Crossing panel, click the [Apply] button. The software will create a roadway crossing using the roadway centerline drawn by the user.

Assigning Roadway Crossings

The Assign Roadway Crossings command allows the user to manually assign an already existing roadway crossing centerline as a roadway crossing.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Roadway Crossings command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Roadway Crossings dropdown menu, and then select the Assign Roadway Crossings command.Assign Roadway Crossings command
  2. The Assign Roadway Crossings dialog box will be displayed.Assign Roadway Crossings dialog box

Note that this dialog box is similar to the Draw Roadway Crossings dialog box. It follows similar criteria and defaults to either the 1D or 2D Roadway Crossing panel.

The below sections describe how to assign a roadway crossing on the Map View and interact with the above dialog box.

Assigning 1D Roadway Crossing

The 1D Roadway Crossing panel of the Assign Roadway Crossings dialog box is used to assign an existing polyline as the roadway centerline for 1D roadway crossings.

Assigning 1D Roadway Crossing

The Select Roadway Crossing Polyline section allows the user to select the existing polyline representing the roadway centerline from the Map View.

Follow the steps below to select the roadway centerline from the Map View:

  1. Click the [Pick] button.Pick button
  2. The Assign Roadway Crossings dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user on what to do next.
  3. Select the polyline that represents the roadway centerline from the Map View.
  4. After selecting the polyline, the Assign Roadway Crossings dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Structure centerline read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.Structure centerline read-only field

When the polyline is selected, the user can define the general specifications for creating the roadway crossing.

Note that the remaining sections of the 1D Roadway Crossing panel are similar to that of the Draw Roadway Crossings command. To learn more about them, see the above sections of this article.

When the data have been defined in the 1D Roadway Crossings panel, click the [Apply] button. The software will then assign the selected polyline as a roadway crossing.

Assigning 2D Roadway Crossing

The 2D Roadway Crossing panel of the Assign Roadway Crossings dialog box is used to assign an existing polyline as the roadway centerline for 2D roadway crossings.

2D Roadway Crossing panel

Note that most of the sections of this panel are similar to that of the 1D Roadway Crossing panel.

Similar to selecting a 1D roadway crossing polyline, the user can select the 2D roadway crossing polyline using the Select 2D Roadway Crossing Polyline section and define the general specifications for creating the 2D roadway crossing.

Additionally, for 2D roadway crossings, the user must specify the cell spacing values along the roadway centerline in the 2D Roadway Centerline Cell Spacing section.

When the data has been defined in the 2D Roadway Crossings panel, click the [Apply] button. The software will then assign the selected polyline as a 2D roadway crossing.


Roadway Crossings › Roadway Management & Georeferencing

Delete Roadway Crossings Command

The Delete Roadway Crossing command is used to delete selected roadway crossing(s) from the HEC-RAS model. When the roadway crossings are deleted, any associated bridge and culvert data, as well as any associated internal flow boundary condition data, will also be deleted.

Follow the steps below to use the Delete Roadway Crossing command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Roadway Crossings dropdown menu and select the Delete Roadway Crossing command.
    Delete Roadway Crossing command of Roadway Crossings dropdown menu
  2. The Delete Roadway Crossings dialog box will be displayed. Note that this dialog box contains separate sections for deleting 1D and 2D roadway crossings.
    Delete Roadway Crossings dialog box
  3. From the Select 1D Roadway Crossing section, check the checkboxes corresponding to the 1D roadway crossings you want to delete. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to select the roadway crossing(s) from the Map View.
    Selecting 1D Roadway Crossing Section
    Note that to select all the 1D roadway crossing(s) at once, check the 1D Roadway Crossing checkbox.
  4. From the Select 2D Roadway Crossing section, check the checkboxes corresponding to the 2D roadway crossings you want to delete. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to select the roadway crossing(s) from the Map View.
    Selecting 2D Roadway Crossing Section
    Note that to select all the 2D roadway crossing(s) at once, check the 2D Roadway Crossing checkbox.
  5. The number of selected roadway crossing(s) will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.
    Total selected read-only field
  6. After selecting the roadway crossing(s), click the [OK] button and the software will delete all the selected roadway crossing(s).
    [OK] button
Roadway Crossings › Roadway Management & Georeferencing

Georeferencing Roadway Crossings

The Georeference Roadway Crossings command allows the user to automatically map roadway crossings to the desired locations by snapping, sliding, or by drawing an alignment polyline on the Map View. This command can also be used to georeference an existing roadway crossing and generate more accurate calculations.

The following options are available for georeferencing roadway crossings:

  • Snap to Alignment Polyline
  • Slide Along Alignment Polyline
  • Draw on Map View

Follow the steps given below to use the Georeference Roadway Crossings command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Roadway Crossings dropdown menu and select the Georeference Roadway Crossings command.
    Roadway Crossings dropdown combo box
  2. The Georeference Roadway Crossings dialog box will be displayed.
    Georeferencing Roadway Crossings dialog box

The following sections describe how to georeference a roadway crossing and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Roadway Crossing to Georeference

The Select Roadway Crossings to Georeference section allows the user to interactively select the roadway crossings in order to georeference them on the Map View. It contains two panels:

  • 1D Roadway Crossing
  • 2D Roadway Crossing

Note that if the model contains only 2D elements, then the 1D Roadway Crossing panel will be disabled.

The 1D Roadway Crossing panel allows the user to select the river, corresponding reach, and the roadway crossing river station from the River name, Reach name, and Roadway crossing river station dropdown combo boxes. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the roadway crossing river station from the Map View.

The 2D Roadway Crossing panel allows the user to select the 2D roadway crossing from the 2D roadway crossing ID dropdown combo box. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the 2D roadway crossing from the Map View.

2D Roadway Crossing panel

After selecting the roadway crossing, the user can use one of the following options to georeference it.

Snap to Alignment Polyline

This option allows the user to snap a roadway crossing to an existing alignment polyline on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to use the Snap to Alignment Polyline option:

  1. Select the Snap to Alignment Polyline radio button option. Note that this option is selected by default when the dialog box is displayed.
  2. Click the [Pick] button.
    Snap to Alignment Polyline section
  3. The Georeference Roadway Crossings dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user to select the alignment polyline.
  4. Select the alignment polyline on the Map View. The Georeference Roadway Crossings dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Select alignment polyline will change to Selected.
  5. Click the [Snap] button.
    [Snap] button
  6. The roadway crossing will get snapped to the alignment polyline.

Slide Along Alignment Polyline

This option allows the user to manually slide the roadway crossing along the alignment polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Slide Along Alignment Polyline option:

  1. Select the Slide Along Alignment Polyline radio button option and click the [Slide] button.
    Slide Along Alignment Polyline section
  2. The Georeference Roadway Crossings dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user to select the roadway crossing and drag it along the underlying alignment polyline.
  3. Click and drag the roadway crossing on the Map View to revise its alignment.
  4. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Georeference Roadway Crossings dialog box will be redisplayed.

Notes:

  • The roadway crossing must overlay a continuous alignment polyline for this option to work.
  • For more precision, the user can use the Snap to Alignment Polyline option first and then use the Slide Along Alignment Polyline option.

Draw on Map View

This option allows the user to draw an alignment polyline and automatically snap the selected roadway crossing to the drawn polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw on Map View option:

  1. Select the Draw on Map View radio button option and click the [Draw] button.
    Draw on Map View section
  2. The Georeference Roadway Crossings dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user to draw the alignment polyline on the Map View.
  3. Draw the alignment polyline on the Map View. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Georeference Roadway Crossings dialog box will be redisplayed, and the roadway crossing will automatically snap to the drawn alignment polyline.
Hydraulic Structures › Inline Structures (Weirs/Spillways)

Georeferencing Inline Structures

The Georeference Inline Structures command allows the user to manually georeference each of the inline structures to the background base map displayed in the Map View. The process of georeferencing an inline structure to the Map View can be a trial and error process, especially when the exact location of the original inline structure is not known. With the use of the Georeference Inline Structures command, the georeferencing process can be accelerated.

Follow the steps below to georeference an existing inline structure:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Inline Structures dropdown menu and select the Georeference Inline Structures command.
    Georeference Inline Structures command
  2. The Georeference Inline Structures dialog box will be displayed.
    Georeference Inline Structures dialog box

The following sections describe how to georeference an existing inline structure and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Inline Structure to Georeference

The Select Inline Structure to Georeference section allows the user to select the inline structure to georeference.

Follow the steps below to select the inline structure to georeference:

  1. Select the river from the River dropdown combo box.
    River dropdown combo box
  2. Select the corresponding reach from the Reach dropdown combo box.
    Reach dropdown combo box
  3. Select the corresponding inline structure from the Inline structure river station dropdown combo box.
    Inline structure river station dropdown combo box

Alternatively, the user can interactively select the inline structure from the Map View. To select the inline structure from the Map View, follow the steps below:

  1. Click the [Pick] button adjacent to the Inline structure river station dropdown combo box.
    [Pick] button
  2. The Georeference Inline Structures dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the inline structure to georeference.
  3. Select the inline structure on the Map View. Note that the user can select only one inline structure at a time.
  4. Upon selecting the inline structure, the Georeference Inline Structures dialog box will be redisplayed along with the inline structure river station value. The software will automatically select the corresponding river and reach in the River and Reach dropdown combo boxes.
    River and Reach dropdown combo boxes

Once the inline structure has been selected, the user can choose between the following options to georeference the inline structure:

  • Snap to Alignment Polyline
  • Slide Along Alignment Polyline
  • Draw on Map View

Snapping Inline Structure to an Alignment Polyline

If an existing alignment polyline for the inline structure exists on the Map View, the Snap to Alignment Polyline georeferencing option can be used to snap the inline structure to the alignment polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Snap to Alignment Polyline georeferencing option:

  1. Select the Snap to Alignment Polyline radio button option.
  2. Click the [Pick] button adjacent to the Select alignment polyline read-only field.
    [Pick] button
  3. The Georeference Inline Structures dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the alignment polyline from the Map View.
  4. Upon selecting the alignment polyline, the Georeference Inline Structures dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Select alignment polyline read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.
    Select alignment polyline read-only field
  5. After selecting the alignment polyline, click the [Snap] The software will then snap the selected inline structure to the alignment polyline.
    [Snap] button

Note: If the alignment polyline does not lie between the selected inline structure’s bounding cross sections, then the following informational dialog box will be displayed.

Cannot Georeference Inline Structure dialog box

Sliding Inline Structure Along Alignment Polyline

If an inline structure has been snapped to an alignment polyline on the Map View but is not precisely located where it should be, the Slide Along Alignment Polyline georeferencing option can be used to slide the inline structure along the alignment polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Slide Along Alignment Polyline georeferencing option:

  1. Select the Slide Along Alignment Polyline radio button option and click the [Slide] button.
    [Slide] button
  2. The Georeference Inline Structures dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the inline structure and drag it along the underlying alignment polyline.
  3. Click and drag the inline structure on the Map View to revise its alignment.
  4. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Georeference Inline Structures dialog box will be redisplayed, and the inline structure will be placed at the new location.

Notes:

  • If the endpoints of the inline structure do not overlay the same continuous alignment polyline, then the following informational dialog box will be displayed.
    Cannot Slide Inline Structure dialog box
  • For more precision, the user can use the Snap to Alignment Polyline option first and then use the Slide Along Alignment Polyline option.

Drawing Inline Structure on Map View

The Draw on Map View option allows the user to draw an inline structure polyline on the Map View and automatically snap the selected inline structure to the drawn polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw on Map View georeferencing option:

  1. Select the Draw on Map View radio button option and click the [Draw] button.
    [Draw] button
  2. The Georeference Inline Structures dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw the inline structure polyline on the Map View.
  3. Draw the inline structure polyline on the Map View. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Georeference Inline Structures dialog box will be redisplayed, and the inline structure will automatically snap to the drawn polyline.
Hydraulic Structures › Inline Structures (Weirs/Spillways)

Extract Weir Crest Geometry Command

The Extract Weir Crest Geometry command allows the software to utilize AutoCAD Civil 3D surfaces, contours, TINs, DTMs, DEMs, survey points, and other external digital elevation terrain data to extract weir crest geometry for the following structure types:

  • Lateral structures
  • Inline structures
  • SA/2D connections

This article describes how to use the Extract Weir Crest Geometry command in GeoHECRAS.

Extracting Weir Crest Geometry for Lateral Structures

The Extract Weir Crest Geometry command allows the user to extract the weir crest geometry for the selected lateral structure using the specified terrain elevation data sources.

Follow the steps below to use the Extract Weir Crest Geometry command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Lateral Structures dropdown menu and select the Extract Weir Crest Geometry command.
    Extract Weir Crest Geometry command of the Lateral Structures dropdown menu
  2. The Extract Weir Crest Geometry dialog box will be displayed.
    Extract Weir Crest Geometry dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the Extract Weir Crest Geometry dialog box.

Selecting Lateral Structure

The Select Lateral Structure section allows the user to select the lateral structure for which the weir crest geometry will be extracted. In this section, the user can select the river, reach, and the lateral structure river station from the corresponding dropdown combo boxes. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the lateral structure from the Map View.

Extraction Options

This section allows the user to control which portions of the cross sections should be extracted. The following options are available:

  • Trim overlapping cross sections
    This checkbox option is used to automatically trim the extended cross sections to the lateral structure. By default, this checkbox is unchecked.
  • Extend shortened cross sections
    This checkbox option is used to automatically extend the shortened cross sections to the lateral structure. By default, this checkbox is unchecked.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about trimming and extending cross sections.

Extract Elevation Data

This section allows the user to define the elevation data source(s) to be used for extracting the weir crest geometry.

The Primary Elevation Data and Secondary Elevation Data panels are used to define the primary and secondary (if available in the project) elevation data sources for extracting weir crest geometry. Depending on the selected elevation data source type, the content of these panels changes to specify additional elevation data information.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base for information on the types of terrain elevation data that can be used to extract weir crest geometry.

When a secondary elevation data source is available, the software forms a concave hull around the primary elevation data source. For locations where elevation data from the primary data source are unavailable, the software will use the elevation data from the secondary data source.

Note that the user cannot utilize the same data source for defining the primary and secondary elevation data.

The user can click the [Swap Sources] button to swap the selected elevation source from primary elevation data to secondary elevation data and vice versa.

Once all the options have been defined, click the [OK] button. The software will then extract the weir crest geometry for the selected lateral structure.

Extracting Weir Crest Geometry for Inline Structures

The Extract Weir Crest Geometry command allows the user to extract the weir crest geometry for the selected inline structure using the specified terrain elevation data sources.

Follow the steps below to use the Extract Weir Crest Geometry command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Inline Structures dropdown menu and select the Extract Weir Crest Geometry command.
    Extract Weir Crest Geometry command of the Inline Structures dropdown menu
  2. The Extract Weir Crest Geometry dialog box will be displayed.
    Extract Weir Crest Geometry dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the Extract Weir Crest Geometry dialog box.

Selecting Inline Structure

The Select Inline Structure section allows the user to select the inline structure for which the weir crest geometry will be extracted. In this section, the user can select the river, reach, and inline structure river station from the corresponding dropdown combo boxes. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the inline structure from the Map View.

Extract Elevation Data

This section is similar to the Extract Elevation Data section explained above for the lateral structures.

Once all the options have been defined, click the [OK] button. The software will then extract the weir crest geometry for the selected inline structure.

Extracting Weir Crest Geometry for SA/2D Connections

The Extract Weir Crest Geometry command allows the user to extract weir crest geometry for the selected SA/2D connection using the specified terrain elevation data sources.

Follow the steps below to use the Extract Weir Crest Geometry command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the SA/2D Connections dropdown menu and select the Extract Weir Crest Geometry command.
    Extract Weir Crest Geometry command of the SA/2D Connections dropdown menu
  2. The Extract Weir Crest Geometry dialog box will be displayed.
    Extract Weir Crest Geometry dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the Extract Weir Crest Geometry dialog box.

Selecting SA/2D Connection Weir Polyline

The Select SA/2D Connection Weir Polyline section allows the user to select the SA/2D connection weir centerline for which the weir crest geometry will be extracted.

Follow the steps below to select the SA/2D connection weir centerline:

  1. Click the [Pick] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    [Pick] button
  2. The status bar will prompt the user to select the SA/2D connection weir centerline from the Map View. Click on the previously drawn SA/2D connection weir centerline on the Map View to select it.
  3. Upon clicking the SA/2D connection weir centerline, the Extract Weir Crest Geometry dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Structure centerline read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.
    Structure centerline read-only field

Extract Elevation Data

This section is similar to the Extract Elevation Data section explained above for the lateral structure.

Once all the options have been defined, click the [OK] button. The software will then extract the weir crest geometry for the selected SA/2D connection.

Hydraulic Structures › Inline Structures (Weirs/Spillways)

Stepped Spillway Discharge Coefficient

As water is transported to a dam downstream, it generates high volumes of kinetic energy. This can damage parts of structures within a dam or levee that are not designed to convey water. In such cases, a stepped weir or spillway is used to lower the kinetic energy of flow travelling downstream. In stepped spillways, the design of the steps has a significant impact on how much of the flow’s kinetic energy is transferred downstream. Currently, pooled designs are more commonly used in stepped spillways as these are better at dissipating kinetic energy. In addition, increasing the number of steps in a spillway increases the energy dissipation rate. However, an increase in discharge leads to an increase in the discharge coefficient and thus decreases the energy dissipation rate.

What is a Stepped Spillway?

A stepped spillway is a structure that provides controlled release of water downstream from a dam or levee. It is also used to measure the discharge and depth of rising water in irrigation channels. Stepped spillways have steps on their faces running from close to the crest to the toe. These steps accelerate the rate of energy dissipation from the weir surface. Using a stepped spillway can also reduce the cavitation risk by boosting self-aerated flow compared to smooth weirs.

Energy Dissipation

The energy between the inlet section and the approach channel of the spillway can be used to calculate and measure the energy dissipation E0 and any area of intriguing phase E.

Energy dissipation equationStepped Spillway

Similarly, the energy at the outlet section of the spillway E1 can be measure as follows:

Energy at outlet secton

Thus, the energy loss ΔE is the difference between the energy at the inlet section E0 and the energy at the outlet section E1.

The dissipation of energy is a dimensionless parameter used to research the energy dissipation characteristics of a stepped spillway and can be formulated as ΔE/ E0.

Discharge Coefficient

The discharge coefficient (Cd) is directly dependent on the upstream head to crest length ratio (y0/Lc) such that an increase in y0/Lc results in an increase in the discharge coefficient.

In addition, the rate of the discharge leads to an increase in the discharge coefficient, which results in a decrease in the rate of energy dissipation.

The relationship between discharge and energy dissipation can be expressed with the help of the following equation:

Discharge over weir

Where, Q = Discharge over weir,

L = Length of the weir crest

H = Distance between water surface and the crest

Cd = Discharge coefficient

Thus, to calculate the value of Cd, the above formula can be rearranged as follows:

Discharge coefficient
Hydraulic Structures › Inline Structures (Weirs/Spillways)

Inline Structure Data Command

In hydraulic modeling, inline structures refer to hydraulic structures that are placed within a river or channel reach. These structures are designed to modify the flow characteristics of the watercourse, such as its depth, velocity, and conveyance capacity. Inline structures are incorporated into the hydraulic model to accurately represent their influence on river flow. By defining the geometry, characteristics, and operational rules of these structures, engineers can simulate and analyze the hydraulic behavior of rivers and channels under various conditions, such as floods or dam releases.

This article describes how the Inline Structure Data command of GeoHECRAS can be used to view or modify the data associated with inline structures.

Follow the steps below to view or modify inline structure data in GeoHECRAS:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Inline Structure Data command.
    Inline Structure Data commandAlternatively, from the Input ribbon menu, expand the Inline Structures dropdown menu and select the Inline Structure Data command.
    Inline Structure Data command
  2. The Inline Structure Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Inline Structure Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to define the inline structure data and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Inline Structure

The Select Inline Structure section allows the user to switch between inline structures.

Select Inline Structure section

This section contains the following entries:

  • River
    This read-only dropdown combo box displays the river(s) defined in the project. When the user changes a river, the Reach dropdown combo box automatically updates to display a valid corresponding river reach.
  • Reach
    This read-only dropdown combo box displays all the reach(s) defined in the project that corresponds to the selected river.
  • River Station
    This editable dropdown combo box displays all the inline structures defined in the project that correspond to the selected reach. The up and down arrow buttons adjacent to this dropdown combo box allow the user to switch between the next downstream and upstream inline structure. If there are no other inline structures defined for the selected river reach, then these buttons are disabled (grayed out). Alternatively, the user can click the […] pick button adjacent to this dropdown to select the inline structure from the Map View.
  • Node name
    This entry field allows the user to assign an optional text label to the current inline structure.
  • Description
    This optional text box entry field allows the user to include information on the current inline structure.
  • Less/More
    The [< Less] and [More >] buttons at the Select Inline Structure section header allow the user to hide and display the right side of the dialog box containing the inline structure plot. This allows the dialog box to be smaller when the user does not want to see the inline structure plot view.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to draw a new inline structure on the Map View.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to create a copy of the current inline structure on the Map View.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the current inline structure.

Once the inline structure is selected, the user can switch between the following panels from the Inline Structure Specifications dropdown panel selector to view or modify the associated inline structure data.

Inline Structure Specifications

This dropdown panel selector contains the following data panel entries, which allow the user to define inline structure data:

  • Structure Specifications
  • Culverts
  • Gates
  • Rating Curve
  • Outlet Time Series
  • Ineffective Flow Areas
  • Dam Breach
  • Geometry Adjustment
  • Geometry Point Reduction
  • Profile Results
Inline Structure Specifications data panel selector

Structure Specifications

This data panel is used to define the specifications of the inline structure.

Structure Specifications data panel

This data panel contains the following sections:

Inline Structure Crest Geometry

This section provides a data table for entering and editing inline structure top of structure geometry (weir geometry). This data table is used to describe the embankment blocking the stream as well as any uncontrolled overflow weirs. The geometry of the inline structure is entered from the left to right station looking in a downstream direction. The user enters stations and elevations for the top of the embankment and weir. The stationing does not have to match the ground stations of the bounding upstream cross section, but it must be based on the same origin. Everything below the defined crest geometry elevations will be filled-in down to the ground. The […] button at the Horizontal Station column header allows the user to select the horizontal station of the inline structure from the Map View. The [Draw] button is used to draw weir crest geometry on the Inline Structure Plot. The [Reset] button resets the inline structure crest geometry on the Map View.

Inline Structure Dimensional Specifications

This section provides the following options to define the dimensions of the inline structure:

  • Distance between bounding cross sections
    This entry field specifies the distance between the bounding cross sections where the inline structure is defined.
  • Structure width (parallel to flow)
    This entry field specifies the width of the inline structure (measured along the flow direction). By default, the software uses a value of 46 feet. The user can enter a different value or click the [Pick] button to interactively measure this width from the Map View.
  • Distance from US face to US XS
    This entry field specifies the distance from the upstream side of the inline structure to the cross section immediately upstream of the inline structure. By default, the software uses a value of 10 feet. The user can enter a different value or click the [Pick] button to interactively measure this distance from the Map View.
  • Upstream embankment side slope (V:H)
    This entry field specifies the embankment side slope of the inline structure (measured in the direction of flow) on the upstream face of the structure. The slope is represented by the number of horizontal units per vertical unit. For vertical side slope embankments, enter a value of 0. By default, the software uses a value of 3.0 (i.e., 1:3).

Note that this variable is generally not used in the computations but is used for display purposes in the profile plot. However, if the user has selected the FHWA WSPRO Method for low flow, this field will be used in the computation of the bridge discharge coefficient. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the FHWA WSPRO Method.

  • Downstream embankment side slope (V:H)
    This entry field specifies the embankment side slope of the inline structure (measured in the direction of flow) on the downstream face of the structure. The slope is represented by the number of horizontal units per vertical unit. For vertical side slope embankments, enter a value of 0. By default, the software uses a value of 3.0 (i.e., 1:3).

Note that this variable is generally not used in the computations but is used for display purposes in the profile plot. However, if the user has selected the FHWA WSPRO Method for low flow, this field will be used in the computation of the bridge discharge coefficient.

Inline Structure Weir Specifications

This section provides the following parameters to define spillway flow through the inline structure:

  • Spillway weir crest shape
    This dropdown combo box defines the spillway shape at the inline structure. The following options are provided:
    1. Broad Crested (default) - This option should be used with typical spillways.
    2. Ogee - This option should be used with ogee spillways.

If the user selects the Ogee shaped weir, two additional parameters–Spillway approach height and Design energy head are displayed in the Inline Structure Weir Specifications section.

  • Spillway approach height
    This entry field is used to specify the height that is equal to the elevation of the spillway crest minus the mean elevation of the ground just upstream of the spillway.
  • Design energy head
    This entry field is used to specify the height that is equal to the energy grade line elevation (i.e., at the design discharge) minus the elevation of the spillway crest.
  • Weir coefficient (Cd)
    This entry field specifies the coefficient of discharge for use in the weir flow equation for spillway flow. By default, the software uses a value of 2.60. Clicking the [...] button displays the Weir Coefficients lookup dialog box.
    Weir Coefficients lookup dialog box
    For an ogee shaped spillway, defining Spillway Approach Height and Design Energy Head, and clicking on the [Compute] button causes the software to calculate the weir coefficient at the design discharge corresponding to the design head.

Other Specifications

This section contains an optional Pilot (low base) flow field, which is used only for unsteady flow computations. This entry defines the minimum flow that will be released from the structure. The HEC-RAS unsteady flow computations require no cross sections to go dry during the simulation. Therefore, if water is not flowing over the spillway at an inline structure, the user can use this field to ensure that there is always some minor flow going through the structure.

Culvert Flow Direction

In addition to the weir geometry, inline structures can include culverts. These culverts typically have flap gates to prevent flow reversal so that the flood in the main river channel does not flow out into the overbank areas.

The following flap gate options are available to describe culvert flow:

  • No Flap Gates – Flow is allowed to flow in either direction through the culvert
  • No Negative Flow – Allows water to flow from the river into the overflow area
  • No Positive Flow – Allows water to flow into the river from the overflow area

Culverts

In HEC-RAS, culverts in inline structures can be modeled using the appropriate culvert geometry, including the shape, size, and slope of the culvert, as well as other relevant parameters such as roughness coefficients and inlet control conditions. These parameters can further be used for the simulation of water flow through the culvert and the analysis of hydraulic performance, such as water surface profiles, flow rates, velocities, and energy losses. Refer to this article in our Knowledge base to learn how to define culverts using the Culverts panel.

Culverts data panel

Gates

Inline structures are hydraulic structures that are placed along a river channel or a conduit to control the flow of water. Gates are used within these structures to regulate the water flow by opening or closing them. Some common types of gates used in inline structures are Sluice Gates, Radial Gates, etc. Refer to this article in our Knowledge base to learn how to define gates using the Gates panel.

Gates data panel

Rating Curve

In HEC-RAS, the rating curve is a fundamental concept used to relate water surface elevations (stage) to corresponding discharge (flow rate) in inline structures. It provides a functional relationship between the water level and the flow capacity of a particular structure. The rating curve is typically derived through a combination of field data collection, hydraulic modeling, and analysis. It represents the hydraulic performance of the inline structure and is specific to its geometry, dimensions, and operational characteristics.

Rating Curve data panel

This data panel contains the following sections:

Rating Curve Outlet Flow Computation

This section provides the following options that are used to define rating curve computations:

  • Rating Curve ID
    This entry field is used to assign an ID to the rating curve.
  • Outlet flow horizontal station
    This entry field is used to select the horizontal station for the outlet discharge location on the weir geometry. The user can also click the [Pick] button to interactively select an outlet flow horizontal station from the Map View.
  • Outlet width (perpendicular to flow)
    This entry field is used to enter the outlet width from the connection weir. The user can also click the [Pick] button to interactively measure the outlet width from the Map View.
  • Inlet location
    The user can click the [Pick] button to select the inlet location upstream of the weir from the Map View. The [Clear] button clears the selected inlet location.
  • Outlet location
    The user can click the [Pick] button to select the outlet location downstream of the weir from the Map View. The [Clear] button clears the selected outlet location.
  • Outlet flow based upon upstream
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the computation type for the rating curve, either in the form of Water Surface Elevation or Flow.

Outlet Flow Rating Curve Data and Plot

The rating curve can be expressed in the form of a table under the Outlet Flow Rating Curve Data section and its corresponding plot under the Outlet Flow Rating Curve Plot section. The graph or a table shows the relationship between water surface elevation (stage) and the corresponding discharge (flow rate) passing through the structure.

Outlet Time Series

In HEC-RAS, the outlet time series for inline structures refers to the hydraulic data recorded at the downstream end of a structure or a reach in a river or channel model. Inline structures are typically defined as structures that are located within a river reach, such as bridge piers, culverts, weirs, or gates. The outlet time series for an inline structure provides information about the flow rate, water level, velocity, or other hydraulic parameters at the downstream end of the structure over a specified time period. It is generated as part of the HEC-RAS simulation and represents the hydraulic response of the inline structure to the input hydrologic and hydraulic conditions.

Outlet Time Series data panel

This data panel contains the following section:

Time Series Specifications

This section contains the following options:

  • Time series ID
    This entry field is used to assign an ID to the outlet time series.
  • Horizontal station for outlet flow
    This entry field is used to select the horizontal station for an outlet discharge location on weir geometry. The user can also click the [Pick] button to interactively select an outlet discharge location from the Map View.
  • Outlet width (perpendicular to flow)
    This entry field is used to enter the outlet width from the connection weir. The user can also click the [Pick] button to interactively measure the outlet width from the Map View.
  • Outlet location
    The user can click the [Pick] button to select the outlet location downstream of the weir geometry from the Map View.

The [Delete All] button can be used to clear all the data specified within this section.

Ineffective Flow Areas

Ineffective flow areas allow the user to define areas of the cross section that will contain water that is not actively being conveyed. Ineffective flow areas are often used to describe portions of a cross section in which water will pond and the velocity of that water, in the downstream direction, is close to zero. This water is included in the storage calculations and other wetted cross section parameters but is not included as part of the active flow area. When using ineffective flow areas, no additional wetted perimeter is added to the active flow area. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to define ineffective flow areas using the Ineffective Flow Areas panel.

Ineffective Flow Areas data panel

Dam Breach

In order to plan for the possibility of a dam break, dam breach information is entered to simulate the dam break. The dam breach data is only used for unsteady flow models and is ignored in steady flow models. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to define dam break data using the Dam Breach panel.

Dam Breach data panel

Geometry Adjustment

Using this data panel, the user can adjust the geometry of the inline structure at any time during the modeling. Typically, this panel is used to revise the inline structure geometry where there is insufficient terrain data available to adequately define the inline structure geometry.

Geometry Adjustment panel

This data panel contains the following sections:

Adjust Inline Structure Geometry

This section allows the user to define the type of adjustment to be applied to the inline structure geometry.

This section contains the following options:

  • No change
    This option is selected by default and results in no changes to the inline structure geometry.
  • Adjust elevations
    This option allows the user to adjust the inline structure geometry elevations by the defined amount.
  • Adjust stations
    This option allows the user to adjust the inline structure geometry stations by the defined amount.
  • Shift stationing
    This option allows the user to shift the inline structure geometry stationing using an existing reference point. The user selects the corresponding reference point from the dropdown combo box and then assigns the station to be assigned to the reference point. The following reference points are provided in the dropdown combo box entry:
    1. Leftmost Station
    2. Left Bank
    3. Thalweg (lowest elevation between channel banks)
    4. Centered Between Banks
    5. River Reach Intersection
    6. Right Bank
    7. Rightmost Station

Adjustment Extents

This section is used to select which inline structure and river reaches are to be changed by the specified adjustment. If bridge structures or inline structures are defined for selected reach(s), then their corresponding cross section geometry is also adjusted. Clicking the [Apply] button applies the defined inline structure adjustment method.

Geometry Point Reduction

This data panel allows the user to automatically filter out unnecessary station elevation. HEC-RAS limits the number of geometry points for cross sections, lateral structures, high chord and low chord geometry of cross section, and inline structures to a maximum of 500 geometry points. These point limitations may appear sufficiently large, but when these HEC-RAS entities are computer generated from Light Detection and Ranging (LiDAR) or Digital Elevation Models (DEMs) or data is acquired with equipment such as an echo sounder, the number of data points can be fairly high. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to implement geometry point reduction using the Geometry Point Reduction panel.

Geometry Point Reduction panel

Profile Results

This data panel allows the user to select the analysis results on the inline structure plot. The table displayed under the Profile Results section lists all of the analyzed water surface profiles for the steady state and maximum water surface for the unsteady state. This allows the user to specify for which profiles the results should be displayed.

Profile Results data panel

This data panel contains the following sections:

Profile Results

This section contains the following options:

  • Profile
    This read-only table column lists the profile name.
  • Water Surface
    This table column lists a checkbox option that controls the display of computed water surface on the inline structure geometry.
  • Energy Grade
    This table column lists a checkbox option that controls the display of the computed energy grade line on the inline structure geometry.
  • Critical Depth
    This table column lists a checkbox option that controls the display of computed critical depth on the inline structure geometry.
  • Filled-in water surface
    This checkbox option causes the selected water surface to be filled in on the inline structure geometry. If more than one profile has been selected and both have the water surface checkbox option selected, then the lowest water surface elevation value is used.

Clicking the [Remove All] button removes all profile results from the inline structure plot.

Other Options

This section allows the user to enable additional curves for the plot terrain surface, fixed sediment, and pilot channel in the inline structure plot.

Hydraulic Structures › Inline Structures (Weirs/Spillways)

Draw and Assign Inline Structures Command

In GeoHECRAS, inline structures are used to model inline dams, weirs, and gated structures with radial gates (often called tainter gates), vertical lift gates (sluice gates), overflow gates (open to the air or with a closed top), gates modeled with user-defined curves, culverts, culverts with flap gates, user-defined outlet rating curves, and user-specified outlet time series. The spillway crest of the gates can be modeled as an ogee shape or broad crested weir.

Water being released from all 28 spillway gates

Inline structures are used to locate the centerline of hydraulic structures that span a water course (e.g., dam, weir, etc.). The inline structure should be created from left to right when looking downstream, crossing a river line exactly once.

HEC-RAS inline structures can be defined by either drawing or assigning the polyline using the following commands:

  • Draw Inline Structures
  • Assign Inline Structures

The following conditions should be met in order to draw or assign inline structure polylines:

  • Inline structure polylines cannot be drawn without an underlying river reach alignment, which has already been defined. At least two bounding cross sections must have already been defined for the underlying river reach.
  • Inline structure polylines must not overlay more than one river reach.
  • Inline structure polylines should not cross another cross section.
  • Inline structure polylines must be continuous (not broken into separate segments).

Drawing Inline Structures

The Draw Inline Structures command is used to manually draw polylines, one-by-one, as inline structures. Generally, these polylines are drawn along the centerline of the dam structure across the river.

Follow the steps below to draw inline structures:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, expand the Inline Structures dropdown combo box and select the Draw Inline Structures command.Draw inline structure ribbon menu command
  2. The Draw Inline Structures dialog box will be displayed.Draw inline structure dialog box

The following sections describe how to draw inline structures and interact with the above dialog box.

Drawing Inline Structure Polyline

The Draw Inline Structure Polyline section allows the user to interactively draw individual polylines on the Map View to associate as inline structures.

The user can click the [Draw] button to interactively draw the inline structure centerline (polyline) on the Map View. Use the Create curvilinear polygon checkbox to draw the polyline using curvilinear segments.

[Draw] button

After clicking the [Draw] button, the Draw Inline Structures dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next. The user can interactively draw the inline structure polyline on the Map View. While drawing elements, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between linear and curvilinear digitizing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about drawing elements on the Map View.

When drawing the inline structure polyline, click on a starting station for the inline structure and click on station locations where the inline structure changes direction. Finally, click an ending station for the inline structure and then press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.

After the polyline is drawn, the dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Structure centerline read-only field will change to Drawn. In addition, the drawn polyline will be highlighted on the Map View. The user can then proceed with entering the remaining data.

Note that the software is able to determine the direction of the inline structure (left to right, looking in a downstream direction) by referencing the flow direction of the underlying river reach.

Inline Structure General Specifications

This section is used to enter general specifications for the drawn inline structure.

Inline structure general specifications

The software automatically defines the river station for the drawn inline structure polyline in the Inline structure river station numerical field. This field represents a unique value (lookup key) for the current river reach, used to identify an inline structure among other cross sections, roadway crossings, inline structures, and lateral structures.

Alternatively, the user can use the Description field to describe the current inline structure in more detail.

General Options

The General Options tabbed panel is used to specify the structural dimensions and weir overflow specifications of the inline structure.

General options tabbed panel

Inline Structure Dimensional Specifications

This section defines the dimensions of the inline structure.

  • Structure width (parallel to flow)
    This entry field specifies the width of the inline structure (measured along the flow direction). By default, the software uses a value of 46 feet. The user can enter a different value or click the [Pick] button to interactively measure this width from the Map View.
  • Distance from US face to US XS
    This entry field specifies the distance from the upstream side of the inline structure to the cross section immediately upstream of the inline structure. By default, the software uses a value of 10 feet. The user can enter a different value or click the [Pick] button to interactively measure this distance from the Map View.
  • Upstream embankment side slope (V:H)
    This entry field specifies the embankment side slope of the inline structure (measured in the direction of flow) on the upstream face of the structure. The slope is represented by the number of horizontal units per vertical unit. For vertical side slope embankments, enter a value of 0. By default, the software uses a value of 3.0 (i.e., 1:3).
    Note that this variable is generally not used in the computations but is used for display purposes in the profile plot. However, if the user has selected the FHWA WSPRO Method for low flow, this field will be used in the computation of the bridge discharge coefficient. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the FHWA WSPRO Method.
  • Downstream embankment side slope (V:H)
    This entry field specifies the embankment side slope of the inline structure (measured in the direction of flow) on the downstream face of the structure. The slope is represented by the number of horizontal units per vertical unit. For vertical side slope embankments, enter a value of 0. By default, the software uses a value of 3.0 (i.e., 1:3).
    Note that this variable is generally not used in the computations but is used for display purposes in the profile plot. However, if the user has selected the FHWA WSPRO Method for low flow, this field will be used in the computation of the bridge discharge coefficient.

Inline Structure Weir Specifications

This section defines the parameters defining spillway flow through the inline structure.

  • Spillway weir crest shape
    This dropdown combo box defines spillway shape at the inline structure. The following options are provided:
    1. Broad Crested (default) – This option should be used with typical spillways.
    2. Ogee – This option should be used with ogee spillways.
      If the user selects the Ogee shaped weir, two additional parameters: Spillway approach height and Design energy head are displayed in the Inline Structure Weir Specifications section.
      Spillway approach height and design energy head fields
  • Spillway approach height
    This entry field is used to specify the height that is equal to the elevation of the spillway crest minus the mean elevation of the ground just upstream of the spillway.
  • Design energy head
    This entry field is used to specify the height that is equal to the energy grade line elevation (at the design discharge) minus the elevation of the spillway crest.
  • Weir coefficient (Cd)
    This entry field specifies the coefficient of discharge for use in the weir flow equation for spillway flow. By default, the software uses a value of 2.60. The user can click the [...] browse button to display a weir coefficient reference dialog box.Weir coefficients dialog box


    If an ogee shaped spillway is defined, then after the Spillway Approach Height and Design Energy Head have been defined, clicking on the [Compute] button causes the software to calculate the weir coefficient at the design discharge (corresponding to the design head).

Other Specifications

This section contains an optional field: Pilot (low base) flow. This field is used only for unsteady flow computations. This entry defines the minimum flow that will be released from the structure. The HEC-RAS unsteady flow computations require no cross sections to go dry during the simulation. Therefore, if water is not flowing over the spillway at an inline structure, the user can use this field to ensure that there is always some minor flow going through the structure.

Terrain Options

This tabbed panel is used to define the specifications for extracting the weir crest geometry of the drawn inline structure.

Terrain options tabbed panel

Extract Weir Crest Geometry

This optional section is used to define the elevation data source(s) to be used for extracting the weir crest geometry.

The user can use the Primary and Secondary Elevation Data panels to define the primary and secondary (if available in the project) elevation data sources for extracting the weir crest geometry. Depending on the selected elevation data source type, different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base for information on the types of terrain elevation data that can be used.

When a secondary elevation data source is available, the software will form a concave hull around the primary elevation data source to identify its bounds. For locations where elevation data from the primary data source is unavailable, the software will use the elevation data from the secondary data source.

Note that the user cannot utilize the same data source for defining the primary and secondary elevation data.

The user can click the [Swap Sources] button to swap the selected elevation source from primary elevation data to secondary elevation data and vice versa.

If the section checkbox is unchecked, then the subsequent panels below it will be unavailable (i.e., grayed out). In addition, no geometry will be created when the inline structure is created. The inline structure will just be a flat horizontal line at elevation 0.

When the data has been defined in the Draw Inline Structure dialog box, click the [Apply] button. The software will create an inline structure where the user has drawn the centerline.

Assigning Inline Structures

The Assign Inline Structures command is used to manually associate, one by one, previously drawn polylines as an inline flow control structure (i.e., dam). Generally, these polylines are drawn along the centerline of the structure, across the river.

Follow the steps below to assign a polyline as an inline structure centerline:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, expand the Inline Structures dropdown combo box and select the Assign Inline Structures command.Assign inline structure ribbon menu command
  2. The Assign Inline Structures dialog box will be displayed.Assign inline structure dialog box

The below section describes how to associate individual polylines with specific inline structures and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Inline Structure Polyline

This section allows the user to interactively select individual polylines on the Map View to be associated as inline structures.

Follow the steps below to select the inline structure polyline from the Map View:

  1. Click the [Pick] button adjacent to the Structure centerline field.
  2. The Assign Inline Structures dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user what to do next.
  3. Select the inline structure polyline from the Map View.
  4. After selecting the polyline, the dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Structure centerline read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.Structure centerline read-only field
  5. The remaining sections of the Assign Inline Structures command are similar to that of the Draw Inline Structures command. Refer to the above sections to learn how to define the data for these sections.

Note that if the user has first selected a polyline from the Map View before running this command, then the Structure centerline read-only field will show Selected. Otherwise, the field will show Not Selected, and the user can interactively select the inline structure polyline from the Map View.

When the data has been defined, click the [Apply] button. The software will create the inline structure and associate the selected polyline as the structure’s centerline.

Hydraulic Structures › Inline Structures (Weirs/Spillways)

Inline Structure Gated Spillway Hydraulic Computations

The program is capable of modeling both radial gates (often called tainter gates), vertical lift gates (sluice gates), and overflow gates. The equations used to model the gate openings can handle both submerged and unsubmerged conditions at the inlet and the outlet of the gates. When the gates are opened to an elevation greater than the upstream water surface elevation, the program automatically switches to modeling the flow through the gates as weir flow. When the upstream water surface is greater than or equal to 1.25 times the height of the gate opening (with respect to the gates spillway crest), the gate flow equations are applied. When the upstream water surface is between 1.0 and 1.25 times the gate opening, the flow is in a zone of transition between weir flow and gate flow. The program computes the upstream head with both equations and then calculates a linear weighted average of the two values (this is an iterative process to obtain the final headwater elevation for a flow in the transition range). When the upstream water surface is equal to or less than 1.0 times the gate opening, then the flow through the gate opening is calculated as weir flow.

Radial Gates

An example radial gate with an ogee spillway crest is shown in Figure 1.

Figure-8-6.png


Figure 1. Example Radial Gate with an Ogee Spillway Crest

The flow through the gate is considered to be “Free Flow” when the downstream tailwater elevation (ZD) is not high enough to cause an increase in the upstream headwater elevation for a given flow rate. The equation used for a Radial gate under free flow conditions is as follows:

unknown node

Where:

Equation-Notes-8-1.png


Equation-8-6.png

When the downstream tailwater increases to the point at which the gate is no longer flowing freely (downstream submergence is causing a greater upstream headwater for a given flow), the program switches to the following form of the equation:

unknown nodeNew-image-inline-gated-structure.png

Submergence begins to occur when the tailwater depth divided by the headwater energy depth above the spillway, is greater than 0.67. Equation 2 is used to transition between free flow and fully submerged flow. This transition is set up so the program will gradually change to the fully submerged Orifice equation when the gates reach a submergence of 0.80. The fully submerged Orifice equation is shown below:

unknown node

Where:

Equation-8-3-Notes.png

Sluice Gate

An example sluice gate with a broad crest is shown in Figure 2.

Figure-8-7.png


Figure 2. Example Sluice Gate with Broad Crested Spillway

The equation for a free flowing sluice gate is as follows:

unknown node

Where:

Equation-Notes-8-4.png


Equation-Notes-8-4-second-part.png


When the downstream tailwater increases to the point at which the gate is no longer flowing freely (downstream submergence is causing a greater upstream headwater for a given flow), the program switches to the following form of the equation:

unknown node

Where:

Equation-8-5-Notes.png


Submergence begins to occur when the tailwater depth above the spillway divided by the headwater energy above the spillway, is greater than 0.67. Equation 5 is used to transition between free flow and fully submerged flow. This transition is set up so the program will gradually change to the fully submerged Orifice equation (Equation 3) when the gates reach a submergence of 0.80.

Overflow Gates

Overflow gates represent a gate in which the bottom of the gate moves up and down. Overflow gates can be completely open to the air at the top, or the top can be closed off. An example of an overflow gate is shown below in Figure 3.

Figure-8-8.png


Figure 3. Example Overflow Gate

Overflow gates are generally modeled with the standard weir equation:

unknown node

Where:

C = Weir flow coefficient, typical values will range from 2.6 to 4.0 depending upon the shape of the spillway crest (i.e., broad crested, ogee shaped, or sharp crested). Most overflow spillways tend to be sharp crested, so a value of 3.2 is typical.
L = Length of the spillway crest.
H = Upstream energy head above the spillway crest.

For overflow gates in which the Sharp Crested spillway crest shape is selected, the user has the option of using the standard weir equation, The Rehbock equation (Henderson, 1966), or the Kindsvater and Carter equation (1957).

Low Flow Through The Gates

When the upstream water surface is equal to or less than the top of the gate opening, the program calculates the flow through the gates as weir flow. An example of low flow through a gated structure is shown in Figure 4.

Figure-8-9.png

Figure 4. Example Radial Gate Under Low Flow Conditions

The standard weir equation used for this calculation is shown below:

unknown node

Where:

C = Weir flow coefficient, typical values will range from 2.6 to 4.1 depending upon the shape of the spillway crest (i.e., broad crested, ogee shaped, or sharp crested).
L = Length of the spillway crest.
H = Upstream energy head above the spillway crest.

The user can specify either a broad crested, ogee, or sharp crested weir shape for the spillway crest of the gate. If the crest of the spillway is ogee shaped, the weir coefficient will be automatically adjusted when the upstream energy head is higher or lower than a user specified design head. The adjustment is based on the curve shown in Figure 5 (Bureau of Reclamation, 1977). The curve provides ratios for the discharge coefficient, based on the ratio of the actual head to the design head of the spillway. In Figure 5, He is the upstream energy head; Ho is the design head; Co is the coefficient of discharge at the design head; and C is the coefficient of discharge for an energy head other than the design head.

Ratio-Image.jpg

Submerged Weir Flow Through the Gates

The program automatically accounts for submergence on the weir when the tailwater is high enough to slow down the flow. Submergence is defined as the depth of water above the weir on the downstream side divided by the headwater energy depth of water above the weir on the upstream side. As the degree of submergence increases, the program reduces the weir flow coefficient. Submergence corrections are based on the shape of the spillway crest (broad crested, ogee shaped weir, or sharp crested). If the spillway is a broad crested shape, then the same submergence curve that is used for flow over a roadway at a bridge is used, as shown in Figure 6. If the spillway crest is ogee shaped, a submergence curve from the USACE EM 1110-2-1603 (plate 3-5, A-A) is used. If the spillway is sharp crested, then the Villemonte equation (Villemonte, 1947) is used to compute the flow reduction coefficient.

Figure-6.jpg

Figure 6. Factor for Reducing Weir Flow for Submergence

Hydraulic Structures › Lateral Structures

Connecting River to Off-Channel Storage Area Using Lateral Structure

Off-Channel Storage Areas

Upstream and downstream boundaries of a river reach can be connected to a reservoir, lake, or other types of large water bodies. These water bodies are called storage areas in HEC-RAS. In addition, off-channel ponding areas that exchange water with the adjacent river can be modeled as storage areas. A lateral structure is required to exchange water between the river and the storage area. Off-channel storage areas are important parts of hydraulic modeling that can be used for understanding rivers and floods. The following diagram represents the three different situations where a storage area can be connected to a river reach.

Off-Channel Storage Areas

These storage areas are also important for figuring out flood risks and optimal water management strategies. This article explains how rivers can be connected to off-channel storage areas using lateral structures, which facilitates the understanding of flood events and associated water planning.

Typically, lateral structures and storage areas are used in unsteady flow modeling, where quantification of storage and hydrograph attenuation is very important. However, it is possible to use lateral structures and storage areas while doing steady flow modeling. The following project shows how a lateral structure can be used to connect a river to an off-channel storage area.

River connection to off-channel storage area using lateral structure - Map View

Connecting River to Storage Area Using Lateral Structure

Defining Cross Sections

Before starting to connect rivers to the storage area using lateral structures, the modeler should ensure that all the required cross sections are correctly defined in the project. In GeoHECRAS, the Draw Cross Sections command enables the user to draw a cross section on the Map View as well as extract the cross section geometry from the underlying ground terrain. Alternatively, the Assign Cross Sections command can be used to select an existing polyline on the Map View, assign it as a cross section, and have the software extract the cross section geometry from the underlying ground terrain.

Notes:

  • Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Draw Cross Sections command.
  • Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Assign Cross Sections command.

Defining Storage Area

Once the cross sections are correctly defined in the project, the user can draw a storage area interactively on the Map View or assign the already imported GIS shapefiles as a storage area. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to define HEC-RAS storage areas.

Defining Lateral Structures

Once the required HEC-RAS elements such as cross sections and storage areas are defined, lateral structures can also be drawn/assigned to the project. The lateral structure is used to model flow being transferred between a river and adjacent elements, such as another river, storage area, or 2D flow area. The lateral structure acts as an internal boundary element between the above model elements and can represent a levee or flood wall, a flow diversion structure, or the natural terrain. The lateral structures are stationed from upstream to downstream river stations. In GeoHECRAS, the user can draw lateral structures interactively on the Map View or assign the already imported GIS shapefiles as a lateral structure.

While adding the lateral structure to the river reach, GeoHECRAS provides the user the option to link the lateral structure to another river reach, a storage area, or a 2D flow area. In this case, the user would choose to link a lateral structure to a storage area. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Draw Lateral Structures and Assign Lateral Structures command.

After the lateral structure is drawn/assigned, the Lateral Structure Data command can be used to define the properties associated with the lateral structure such as connection data, overflow weir, levee breach, etc. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Lateral Structure Data command.

Defining lateral structures

The headwater river station for a lateral structure is another important parameter because it helps to define where the lateral structure is spatially within the reach. This allows more accurate modeling and prediction of water flow and behavior. The user can specify whether the headwater position is on the right bank, on the rightmost station, on the left bank, or on the leftmost station. This flexibility enables precise placement of the lateral structure, which can be crucial for accurate modeling and simulation.

Defining Tailwater Connection

A tailwater connection is one of the important connection parameters for a lateral structure that refers to the way water interacts or connects with the downstream end of the structure. This connection is important because it influences how water flows through the structure and affects the overall hydraulic behavior of the system. The tailwater connection can significantly impact the efficiency and effectiveness of the lateral structure in managing water flow, especially in terms of controlling floods or regulating water levels. Proper tailwater connections are essential for ensuring the optimal functionality and performance of lateral structures within a water management system.

In the Lateral Structure Data dialog box, make sure that the Tailwater connection dropdown entry selection is set to Adjacent SA/2D Flow Area. Alternatively, you can connect a lateral structure to the adjacent river reach or out of the system (i.e., send the flow over/through the lateral structure out of the system).

Defining Levee Breach

Levee overtopping and breaching can be analyzed within GeoHECRAS by modeling the levee as a lateral structure. When modeling a levee with a lateral structure, the area behind the levee (tailwater side) should not be included in the cross section data of the main river. The cross sections should stop at the top of the levee. The lateral structure (levee) can be connected to a 2D flow area, a storage area, or another river reach. The strategy for modeling the area behind the levee will depend upon what will happen to the water if the levee overtops or breaches. If the water going over or through the levee is likely to take many flow paths and have varying water surface elevations, then a 2D flow area is probably the most appropriate for modeling the area behind the levee. If the water going over or through the levee will fill the level pool water surface, then a storage area would be the most appropriate for modeling the area behind the levee. If the water will continue to flow in the downstream direction (and act like a separate 1D channel), and possibly reconnect with the main river, then it may be more appropriate to model that area as a separate river reach. The below diagram shows a levee modeled as a lateral structure connected to a storage area to represent the area behind the levee.

Defining levee breach

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about levee breach modeling.

Defining Overflow Weir

An overflow weir in lateral structures is a crucial component in modeling lateral flows. It is the part of the structure where the flow passes over. The weir type, which can be broad crested, sharp crested, ogee, or zero height, determines the amount of head loss that the flow encounters as it flows over the structure. Note that when defining a lateral structure, the lateral flow can discharge into an adjacent river, storage area, or 2D flow area. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to define overflow weir data using the Lateral Structure Data command.

Hydraulic Structures › Lateral Structures

Troubleshooting of Lateral Structures Modeling

In HEC-RAS, lateral structures are used to model flow being transferred between a river and adjacent elements, such as another river, storage area, or 2D flow area. A lateral structure can physically represent a wide range of geometric features, including a levee, a flow diversion structure, a spillway, or natural ground. Lateral structures are also used to simulate flow transfer from the river to a tributary during a flood event.

Often, you may encounter certain error warnings in the GeoHECRAS software while modeling lateral structures using the HEC-RAS analysis engine. This article describes how to fix these modeling errors in the GeoHECRAS software.

The following are some of the error warnings you may have come across while modeling lateral structures:

Question: “Lateral structure data specifies a weir line plus upstream distance that equals or exceeds the length of the reach.” How do I fix this error while modeling lateral structure?

Lateral structure data specifies a weir line

Answer: The lateral structure cannot be geo-referenced in the 4.1.0 HEC-RAS analysis engine, and it must be done manually. However, in the 5.0.7 HEC-RAS analysis engine and higher versions, the lateral structure is geo-referenced, so it can read the length of lateral structures automatically. Therefore, it is recommended that you use HEC-RAS analysis engine versions 5.0.7 and higher. Note that the lateral structures in GeoHECRAS are geo-referenced by default.

Note that in the GeoHECRAS software, the user can change the HEC-RAS analysis engine version from the Options backstage page. To learn more about how to change the HEC-RAS analysis engine, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Question: “Lateral structure data spans an internal boundary (bridge, culvert, or inline structure). Lateral structure… around the internal boundaries.” How do I fix this error while modeling lateral structure?

Lateral structure data spans an internal boundary


Answer: This error will be displayed while modeling lateral structures near hydraulic structures (i.e., bridges, culverts, inline structures, etc.) in the 4.1.0 HEC-RAS analysis engine and previous versions. Therefore, it is recommended that you use HEC-RAS analysis engine versions 5.0.7 and higher.

Note that in the GeoHECRAS software, the user can change the HEC-RAS analysis engine version from the Options backstage page. To learn more about how to change the HEC-RAS analysis engine, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Question: I have drawn a lateral structure to make the flow from one river reach to overflow to the adjacent river reach. I am getting this error message—Weir profile length is: 300 and the GIS centerline length is: 364.860. These lengths need to be within 0.3(m) (or 0.5% whichever is smaller). Adjust the weir profile stationing or the centerline GIS data. How do I fix this error?

Weir profile length is: 300 and the GIS centerline length is: 364.860


Answer: The lengths of the Weir profile and GIS centerlines must always be within 0.3 m (or 0.5%, whichever is less). It is recommended that you either change the stationing of the weir or update the GIS centerline of the weir to be the same. You can enter the weir elevations and adjust the stationing so that it matches the length of the GIS centerline.

Question: “The Lateral Structure at BM 1 10643 has a weir elevation lower than the cells they are connected to for 2D Area SA_2D-Mid_2. This is not allowed in HEC-RAS:” How do I fix this error?

The Lateral Structure at BM 1 10643 has a weir elevation


Answer: This error warning will be displayed if the weir elevations are lower than the cell elevations. Therefore, for given cell locations, make sure that you adjust the weir elevations on those stations so that the weir elevations are not lower than the cell elevations. By checking these elevations, you can eliminate this error warning.

Hydraulic Structures › Lateral Structures

Lateral Structure Data Command

Lateral structures are hydraulic structures that run parallel to the river course and are used to model flow being transferred between a river and adjacent elements, such as another river reach, storage area, or 2D flow area. Lateral structures can be used to divert water, control flow, or provide access to a river reach. They can be modeled as culverts, weirs, gated spillways, diversion rating curves, and an outlet time series.

The user can set up a single lateral weir, a weir and separate set of gates, a weir and group of culverts, or any combination of a weir, gates, culverts, rating curves, and a time series outlet. The gated spillways can have either radial gates, vertical lift gates, overflow gates, or user-defined gate curves. The spillway crest of the gates can be modeled as either an ogee shape, broad crested weir, or sharp crested weir shape. The culverts can be any of the available shapes from the standard HEC-RAS culvert capability. The diversion rating curve can be used alone or in conjunction with the other hydraulic outlet types. The rating curve can be used to represent a structure or a particular outlet that could not be directly modeled with HEC-RAS.

The lateral structure should be created in the downstream direction along the edges of cross sections. To learn how to create a lateral structure, refer to this article in our knowledge base. After creating lateral structures, the user can use the Lateral Structure Data command to define the lateral structure data, connection data, overflow weir, culverts, gate openings, rating curves, and more.

This article describes how to use the Lateral Structure Data command in GeoHECRAS software.

Follow the steps below to view or modify lateral structure data:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Lateral Structure Data command.
    Lateral Structure Data Input ribbon menu commandAlternatively, the user can either double-click on the lateral structure from the Map View or choose the Lateral Structure Data command from the Lateral Structures dropdown menu of the Input ribbon menu as shown below.
    Lateral Structure Data command
  2. The Lateral Structure Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Lateral Structure Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Lateral Structure Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Lateral Structure

This section allows the user to specify the river, reach, and corresponding river station along which the lateral structure is drawn in order to define the lateral structure data. The user can create a new lateral structure, copy existing lateral structure data to a new lateral structure, and delete a lateral structure.

Select Lateral Structure section

This section requires the following data:

  • River
    This dropdown combo box lists all of the currently defined rivers in the project. The user can select the desired river name from the dropdown list. Note that when the user changes a river, the Reach dropdown combo box also updates to show a valid corresponding river reach.
  • Reach
    This dropdown combo box lists all of the currently defined reaches that correspond to the selected river.
  • River station
    This editable dropdown combo box lists all the lateral structure river stations defined in the project that correspond to the selected reach. Click the pencil icon to edit the lateral structure river station. The Up and Down arrow buttons adjacent to the dropdown combo box allow the user to switch between the next adjacent downstream and upstream lateral structure. Note that the Up and Down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the project contains only one lateral structure. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to select the lateral structure from the Map View.
  • Node name
    This entry field allows the user to assign an optional text label to the current lateral structure.
  • Description
    This text field allows the user to enter additional information that describes the selected lateral structure.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to draw a new lateral structure on the Map View. Note that the newly created lateral structure name must be unique.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to create a copy of the current lateral structure.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the current lateral structure from the project.
  • Less/More
    The [< Less] and [More >] buttons at the Select Lateral Structure header allow the user to expand or collapse the Lateral Structure Plot section.

Lateral Structure Specifications

The Lateral Structure Specifications dropdown combo box contains several data panel entries that allow the user to define lateral structure data. The following data panel entries are listed in the dropdown combo box:

  • Connection Data
  • Overflow Weir
  • Culverts
  • Gates
  • Rating Curve
  • Outlet Time Series
  • Linear Routing
  • Levee Breach
  • Geometry Point Reduction
  • Profile Results
Lateral Structure Specifications dropdown combo box options

Connection Data Panel

This panel provides connection details for the selected lateral structure. Note that by default, the Connection Data panel is shown when the Lateral Structure Data command is selected.

Connection Data Panel

Lateral Structure Connection Details

This section is used to define the connection details for the selected lateral structure.

This section requires the following data:

  • Structure type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of routing that will be used for the selected lateral structure. The following options are available:
    1. Weir/Gates/Culverts/Rating Curves - This option is used where the software calculates the flow across the structure by performing detailed hydraulic calculations for the weir, gated spillways, culverts, and any rating curve.
    2. Linear Routing - This option is a simplified method in which the user enters a linear routing coefficient. This coefficient can vary between 0.0 and 1.0, with 1.0 representing the maximum flow over the structure and 0.0 representing no flow. The linear routing method is a simple storage accounting method. This method can be very useful when the user has many lateral structures connected to storage areas, and a detailed flow calculation over each structure is not necessary.

Based on the type of routing selected in the Structure type dropdown combo box, the other data panel entries in the Lateral Structure Specifications dropdown combo box get enabled or disabled.

  • Headwater position
    This dropdown combo box is used to define where the headwater section of the lateral structure is spatially located relative to the river reach. The following options are available:
    1. Leftmost Station - Located at the leftmost station of the cross section
    2. Left Bank - Located at the left bank of the river channel
    3. Right Bank - Located at the right bank of the river channel
    4. Rightmost Station - Located at the rightmost station of the cross section
  • Tailwater connection
    This dropdown combo box is used to define what the lateral structure is connected to (i.e., where the water leaving from the main river will be going). The following options are available:
    1. Out of System - On selecting this option, no other information is required.
    2. Adjacent SA/2D Flow Area - On selecting this option, the user is required to select a storage area or a 2D flow area from a dropdown list of the currently defined storage areas.
    3. Adjacent River Reach - On selecting this option, the user is required to select the river, reach, and range of cross sections from which the lateral structure is connected.

Based on the tailwater connection selected in the Tailwater connection dropdown combo box, the other sections of the Connection Data panel get enabled or disabled.

Adjacent Storage Area/2D Flow Area

This section is used to define the connection (with the current or a different river reach) to an adjacent storage area/2D flow area to the lateral structure. Note that this section is enabled when the Adjacent SA/2D Flow Area option is selected in the Tailwater Connection dropdown combo box of the Lateral Structure Connection Details section. Otherwise, it is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

The Storage area/2D flow area ID dropdown combo box lists all the storage areas/2D flow areas defined in the project. Alternatively, the user can click the […] pick button to select the storage area or 2D flow area from the Map View.

Adjacent River Reach Connection

This section is used to define the connection (with the current or a different river reach) to an adjacent river reach to the lateral structure. Note that this section is enabled when the Adjacent River Reach option is selected in the Tailwater Connection dropdown combo box of the Lateral Structure Connection Details section. Otherwise, it is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

This section requires the following data:

  • River
    This dropdown combo box lists all the rivers defined in the project. The user can select the desired river name from the dropdown combo box. When the user changes a river, the Reach dropdown combo box automatically updates to display a valid corresponding river reach.
  • Reach
    This dropdown combo box lists all the reaches defined in the project that correspond to the selected river.
  • Upstream cross section river station
    This dropdown combo box lists all the cross sections defined in the project that correspond to the selected reach. This entry defines the upstream most cross section associated with the adjacent river reach that the lateral structure is connected with. In addition, the Up and Down arrow buttons adjacent to the dropdown combo box allow the user to switch between the next adjacent downstream and upstream cross section. Alternatively, the user can click the […] pick button to select the cross section from the Map View.
  • Tailwater position
    This dropdown combo box is used to define where the tailwater section of the lateral structure is spatially located relative to the cross sections of the selected adjacent river reach. The following options are available:
    1. Leftmost Station - Located at the leftmost station of the cross section
    2. Left Bank - Located at the left bank of the river channel
    3. Right Bank - Located at the right bank of the river channel
    4. Rightmost Station - Located at the rightmost station of the cross section

Culvert Flow Direction

This section is used to define the culvert flow direction for the selected lateral structure. It only affects the flow through the culverts, not flow through the weir or the gated structures.

The All culverts dropdown combo box provides the following options to describe culvert flow:

Culvert Flow Direction dropdown options
  • No Flap Gates - This means that flow can move in both directions through the culverts.
  • No Negative Flow - This means that flow can only move in the positive flow direction through the culverts (downstream).
  • No Positive Flow - This means that flow can only move in the negative direction through the culverts (upstream).

2D Flow Area Internal Overflow Computation

This section is used to control which equations are used to compute the flow across a lateral structure.

This section requires the following data:

  • Computation Type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the overflow computational method. The following options are available:
    Computation Type dropdown options
    1. Weir Equation - This option is used to simulate the flow over a lateral structure, such as a weir, in a river or channel. By default, this option is selected.
    2. 2D Computations (No Gates/Culverts) - This option is used to figure out how much flow is going across the lateral structure and in which direction. When this option is selected, an average water surface elevation is computed on the 1D riverside, in front of each 2D cell that is connected with the lateral structure. This water surface is then applied as a stage boundary condition for each individual cell of the 2D area. So, if water is above the weir profile, and the elevation is higher in the 1D river than the 2D cell, then water will go from the 1D river to the 2D cell. If the 2D cell is higher than the 1D river, then water will go from the 2D cell to the 1D river. If the water is below the elevation of the weir, then the flow is zero for that cell.
  • Use velocity for 2D Boundary
    This checkbox option is used only when a lateral structure is connected to a 2D flow area. In general, for this type of flow connection, flow is computed across the structure and passes into and out of the 2D cells, and no velocity is considered at the face. In addition to flow, a velocity is computed and applied to the face of the 2D cells. If this option is selected, it will produce more accurate flow velocities into the 2D flow area but may be less stable. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked.

Overflow Weir Panel

This panel allows the user to enter the embankment and weir geometry data for the selected lateral structure. These data are used to describe the embankment in which the outlets will be placed, as well as any uncontrolled weirs.

Overflow Weir Panel

Overflow Weir Crest Geometry

This section provides a table for entering and editing lateral structure overflow weir geometry. The geometry of the overflow weir is entered from upstream to downstream in stationing. The user enters stations and corresponding elevations of the top of the embankment and weir. The stationing is relative, so it can be started at any number (i.e., 0, 100, etc.). The stations and elevations should be entered from the upstream end to the downstream end of the lateral structure. Everything below the defined crest geometry elevations is considered solid ground.

By default, the lateral structure will be lined up with the river reach by comparing the stationing entered with the reach lengths of the river reach. If the lateral structure is located at the leftmost stationing of the reach, then the left overbank flow lengths are used. If the lateral structure is located at the right or left bank station of the main channel, then the main channel flow lengths will be used. If the lateral structure is located at the rightmost stationing of the reach, then the right overbank flow lengths are used.

The user can also draw the weir geometry for the lateral structure on the Lateral Structure Plot using the [Draw] button. Click the [Draw] button, and then draw the weir geometry on the Lateral Structure Plot. When finished, the user can press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The software will then automatically compute the overflow weir geometry and fill the computed values in the table.

The right-click context menu of the table displays the commands to cut, copy, and paste cells, and insert and delete rows to and from the table. In addition, the user can also copy the grid data to the clipboard or export it as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document.

Right-click context menu commands

Lateral Structure Dimensional Specifications

This section defines the dimensions of the lateral structure.

This section requires the following data:

  • Structure width
    This entry field is used to define the width of the lateral structure (measured along the flow direction). Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to interactively measure the structure width from the Map View. Note that this value will only be used for graphical plotting and does not have any effect on the computations.
  • HW distance from US weir edge to US XS
    This entry field is used to define the distance from the upstream end of the overflow weir headwater section of the lateral structure and the cross section immediately upstream of the structure on the current river reach. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to interactively measure this distance from the Map View. Clicking the [Calc] button causes the software to automatically calculate the headwater distance from the upstream weir edge to the next upstream cross section.

Lateral Structure Weir Specifications

This section defines the overflow weir specifications of the lateral structure.

This section requires the following data:

  • Weir computations
    This dropdown combo box is used to select the weir equation to be used in the overflow computations. The following options are available:
    1. Standard Weir Equation (default) - This option is used to calculate the flow over lateral structures. On selecting this option, the user must also enter a Weir flow reference elevation and a Weir coefficient.
    2. Hager’s Weir Equation - This option is an improved version of the standard weir equation for calculating the flow over lateral structures. On selecting this option, the user must also enter the default weir coefficient, weir average height, average bed slope, weir angle in degrees if it is not parallel to the stream, and average radius.
  • Weir flow reference elevation
    This dropdown combo box is used to select the reference elevation to be used to determine when weir overflow occurs. This option is available only when the standard weir equation is selected in the Weir computation dropdown combo box. Otherwise, it is disabled (i.e., grayed out). The following options are available:
    1. Energy Gradeline - This option is used when computing the head term of the weir equation.
    2. Water Surface (default) - This option is used when the lateral structure weir is located close to the main channel. In this situation, the energy from the flow is in a downstream direction, and the velocity head is in the same direction and should not be considered in determining the flow over the lateral weir structure. Therefore, the computation of flow over the lateral weir is best computed using the water surface elevation option. By default, this option is selected.
  • Weir crest shape
    This dropdown combo box is used to define a spillway shape at the overflow weir. This is used in reducing the weir flow coefficient due to the submergence effect of weir flow submergence. Weir flow submergence occurs when the tailwater begins to drown out the weir flow. The following options are available:
    1. Broad Crested (default) - This option should be used with typical storage area connections.
    2. Ogee - This option should be used with ogee spillways.
    3. Sharp Crested - This option should be used with sharp crested spillways.
    4. Zero Height - This option should be used when a flat connection exists with no weir flow effects.

If the user selects the Ogee shaped weir, two additional parameters: Spillway approach height and Design energy head are displayed in the Lateral Structure Weir Specifications section as shown below.

Spillway approach height and Design energy head parameters
  • Weir coefficient (Cd)
    This entry field is used to define a coefficient of discharge for use in the weir flow equation for overflow. Clicking on the […] button will display a weir coefficient reference dialog box. This field is available only when the Standard Weir Equation is selected in the Weir computation dropdown combo box. Otherwise, it is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

If the Ogee shaped weir is selected in the Weir crest shape dropdown combo box, the user can compute the weir coefficient based on the approach and design energy head by clicking the [Compute] button.

  • Spillway approach height
    This entry field is used to define the height which is equal to the elevation of the spillway crest minus the mean elevation of the ground just upstream of the spillway. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to interactively measure the spillway approach height above the spillway crest from the lateral structure plot.
  • Design energy head
    This entry field is used to define the height which is equal to the energy grade line elevation (at the design discharge) minus the elevation of the spillway crest. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to interactively measure the spillway design energy head above the spillway crest from the lateral structure plot.

Hager’s Weir Equation Parameters

This section defines the parameters for Hager’s weir equation. Note that this section is only available when Hager’s Weir Equation is selected in the Weir computation dropdown combo box of the Lateral Structure Specifications section.

Hager’s Weir Equation Parameters section

This section requires the following data:

  • Weir coefficient (Cd)
    This entry field is used to define the weir coefficient that will be used for the first iteration of trying the Hager lateral weir equation. The equation is iterative and requires hydraulic results in order to make a weir coefficient calculation. The defined weir coefficient is only used for the first guess at the hydraulic computations. Clicking on the […] button will display a weir coefficient reference dialog box.
  • Average weir height
    This entry field is used to define the average height (not elevation) of the weir above the ground.
  • Average bed slope(optional)
    This entry field is used to define the average slope of the stream bed in the river reach containing the lateral structure. If this entry is left blank, HEC-RAS will compute the slope by estimating an average bed elevation for each cross section and then compute the slope from the average bed elevation. The average bed elevation of the cross sections is obtained by subtracting the hydraulic depth from the water surface elevation.
  • Weir angle(optional)
    This entry field is used to define the angle (in degrees) for the lateral structure overflow weir. If the overflow weir is parallel to the stream, the angle is assumed to be zero. If the weir is angled inwards towards the center of the river, an angle is required. This is used for channels that have a contraction where the weir flow is allowed to go over the contracted section. A diagram showing the angle is shown below.
  • Average radius
    This entry field is used to define the average radius of the ogee weir for Hager’s equation. This field is enabled when the Ogee is selected in the Weir crest shape dropdown combo box of the Lateral Structure Dimensional Specifications section. Otherwise, it is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
    diagram showing the weir angle

Tailwater Stationing Reference

This section defines how the lateral structure discharges to the adjacent river reach cross sections. Note that this section is enabled when the Adjacent River Reach is selected in the Tailwater connection dropdown combo box of the Connection Data panel. Otherwise, it is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

The Tailwater flow discharged to dropdown combo box is used to define where the lateral structure overflow weir flow is discharged in the tailwater reach. The following options are available:

  • Single Point (default) - This option is used when the discharge is set to go into a single point.
  • Multiple Cross Sections - This option is used when the discharge is spread out over multiple cross sections.

Headwater Cross Section Weir Stationing

This section defines the lateral structure headwater cross section weir stationing.

This section contains a table. By default, the table will show the weir stationing that intersects with the cross sections in the river reach where the lateral structure is defined. The software automatically aligns the weir with the cross sections in the reach based on the weir stationing and the reach lengths in the cross sections (i.e., left overbank, main channel, or right overbank reach lengths). However, if the user does not like how the defined weir intersects with the cross sections in the reach, the user can define their own intersection points by entering the desired weir stationing to intersect with each of the cross sections in the reach. Water surface elevations for the lateral structure will then be interpolated based on user-defined stationing.

This section requires the following data:

  • Weir stationing type
    This dropdown combo box is used to define how the weir stationing on the headwater side of the lateral structure overflow weir is to be defined. The following options are available:
    1. Automatic (default) - On selecting this option, the table below it in the section becomes read-only.
    2. Manual Defined - On selecting this option, the table below it in the section becomes editable allowing the user to define their own intersection points.
  • Cross Section River Station
    This column lists the cross sections that are adjacent to the lateral structure, from just upstream of the lateral structure river station, and then on downstream to the end of the river reach.
  • Overflow Weir Station
    This column defines the weir stationing for the headwater overflow weir crest geometry in relation to the current river reach cross section river stationing.

Tailwater Weir Stationing

This section defines the lateral structure tailwater cross section weir stationing.

This section contains a table. The table can be used to manually line up the connected weir to either the 2D flow area or cross sections in another reach in a user-controlled manner. By default, the weir is lined up to any 2D flow area or cross sections of another river reach that it is connected to. However, the user can manually define where the stationing of the weir hits the 2D flow area face points or cross sections. If this option is used, the user must completely define where the entire length of the weir intersects the various tailwater cross sections or 2D flow area.

This section requires the following data:

  • Weir stationing type
    This dropdown combo box is used to define how the weir stationing on the tailwater side of the lateral structure overflow weir is to be defined. The following options are available:
    1. Automatic (default) - On selecting this option, the table below it in the section becomes read-only.
    2. Manual Defined - On selecting this option, the table below it in the section becomes editable allowing the user to define where the stationing of the weir hits the tailwater cross sections or 2D flow area face points.
  • TW distance from US weir edge to US XS
    This entry field is used to specify the distance from the upstream end of the overflow weir tailwater section of the lateral structure and the cross section immediately upstream of the structure on the adjacent river reach. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to interactively measure this distance from the Map View. Clicking the [Calc] button causes the software to automatically calculate the tailwater distance from the upstream weir edge to the next upstream cross section.
  • Cross Section River Station
    This column lists the cross sections that are adjacent to the lateral structure, from just upstream of the lateral structure river station, and then on downstream to the end of the river reach.
  • Overflow Weir Station(ft)
    This column defines the weir stationing for the tailwater overflow weir crest geometry in relation to the adjacent river reach cross section river stationing.

Culverts Panel

This panel is used to define the culvert for the selected lateral structure. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to define culverts using the Culverts panel.

Culverts Panel

Gates Panel

This panel allows the user to add gates to the lateral structure. These can be used to represent flow diversions or locations where a mobile flood gate is rolled into place across a roadway or railway to maintain the levee during a flood. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to define gates using the Gates panel.

Gates Panel

Rating Curve Panel

This panel provides the rating curve specifications for the selected lateral structures. The rating curve can be used alone, or in conjunction with the other lateral structure outlet types (i.e., overflow weir, culverts, and gates) to represent the diversion of flow from the main channel to the lateral structure. Generally, a rating curve can be used to represent a structure or a particular outlet that could not be adequately modeled with HEC-RAS. The rating curve removes flow from the main river reach and diverts it through the lateral structure.

Rating Curve Panel

Diversion Rating Curve Location

This section is used to define general information for the rating curve computations.

This section requires the following data:

  • Rating curve ID
    This entry field is used to assign an ID to the rating curve.
  • Distance from US edge of structure
    This entry field is used to specify the distance of the lateral structure diversion from the upstream edge of the structure. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the horizontal station from the lateral structure weir on the Map View.
  • Outlet width (perpendicular to flow)
    This entry field is used to define the outlet width from connection weir perpendicular to the flow direction. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to measure the outlet width from the connection weir on the Map View.
  • Inlet location
    This read-only field allows the user to select the inlet location where the water is coming from. The user can click the [Pick] button to select the inlet location upstream of the weir from the Map View. The [Clear] button deletes the selected inlet location.
  • Outlet location
    This read-only field allows the user to select the outlet location where the water exits. The user can click the [Pick] button to select the outlet location downstream of the weir from the Map View. The [Clear] button deletes the selected outlet location.
  • Diversion based on channel
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the computation type for the rating curve. The following options are available:
    1. Water Surface Elevation
    2. Flow
      Note that based on the option selected in the Diversion based on channel dropdown combo box, the table contained in a Diversion Rating Curve Data section will be changed.

Diversion Rating Curve Data

This section contains a table for entering and editing lateral structure diversion rating curve data.

  • Channel Water Surface Elevation
    This column of the table defines the water surface elevation in the main channel for the diversion rating curve. Note that this data column is provided when the Water Surface Elevation rating curve option is selected in the Diversion based on channel dropdown combo box.
  • Channel Flow
    This column of the table defines the flow in the main channel for the diversion rating curve. Note that this data column is provided when the Flow rating curve option is selected in the Diversion based on channel dropdown combo box.
  • Diverted Flow
    This column of the table defines the corresponding diverted flow through the lateral structure for the diversion rating curve.

Diversion Rating Curve Plot

This section automatically plots the user-defined diversion rating curve. This visual representation allows the user to assess the behavior of the curve and make adjustments if necessary.

Outlet Time Series Panel

This panel allows the user to specify a name for an outlet time series. Then a flow hydrograph can be specified for the lateral structure in the Unsteady Flow Data command. The flow time series will be labeled in the output based on the user-entered name for the outlet time series. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to use the Unsteady Flow Data command.

Outlet Time Series Panel

Time Series Specifications

This section requires the following data:

  • Time series ID
    This entry field is used to assign an ID to the outlet time series.
  • Horizontal station for outlet flow
    This entry field is used to select the horizontal station for an outlet discharge location on weir geometry. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to interactively select an outlet discharge location from the Map View.
  • Outlet width (perpendicular to flow)
    This entry field is used to enter the outlet width from the connection weir. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to interactively measure the outlet width from the Map View.
  • Outlet location
    The user can click the [Pick] button to select the outlet location downstream of the weir geometry from the Map View.

The [Delete All] button is used to clear all the data specified within this section.

Linear Routing Panel

This panel provides linear routing specifications for the selected lateral structure. The user can choose this panel instead of entering structure information and having the software compute the flow from the structures. Note that this panel is only available when a Linear Routing is selected in the Structure type dropdown combo box of the Lateral Structure Connection Details section under the Connection Data panel. Otherwise, it is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Linear Routing Panel

This panel requires the following data:

  • Positive flow direction routing coefficient
    This entry field is used to define the linear routing coefficient for positive flow direction (in the defined flow direction of the lateral structure i.e., from headwater to tailwater). The user can enter a coefficient ranging from 0.0 and 1.0, with 1.0 representing routing the maximum flow over the lateral structure and 0.0 representing no flow routed over the lateral structure.
  • Negative flow direction routing coefficient
    This entry field is used to define the linear routing coefficient for the negative flow direction (opposite the defined flow direction of the lateral structure i.e., from tailwater to headwater). The user can enter a coefficient ranging from 0.0 and 1.0, with 1.0 representing routing the maximum flow over the lateral structure and 0.0 representing no flow routed over the lateral structure.
  • Overflow crest elevation
    This entry field is used to define the minimum elevation for flow to transfer from one side of the lateral structure to the other. If both water surface elevations are below this crest elevation, then no flow is transferred through the lateral structure.
  • Headwater distance to upstream cross section
    This entry field is used to define the distance from the lateral structure linear routing diversion and the cross section immediately upstream of the structure on the current river reach. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to interactively measure this distance from the Map View.

Levee Breach Panel

This panel is used to enter levee breach data for evaluating the breaching of a selected lateral structure. A levee breach in a lateral structure refers to a situation where there is a failure or breach in a levee along a lateral channel or waterway. The levee breach data is only used for unsteady flow models and is ignored in steady flow models. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to define levee breach data using the Levee Breach panel.

Levee Breach Panel

Geometry Point Reduction Panel

This panel is used to automatically filter out unnecessary station elevation points for the lateral structure. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to define geometry point reduction using the Geometry Point Reduction panel.

Geometry Point Reduction panel

Profile Results Panel

This panel is used to select the analysis results on the lateral structure plot. The table displayed under the Profile Results section lists all of the analyzed water surface profiles for the steady state and maximum water surface for the unsteady state. This allows the user to specify for which profiles the results should be displayed on the lateral structure plot. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to define profile results using the Profile Results panel.

Geometry Point Reduction Panel
Hydraulic Structures › Lateral Structures

Draw and Assign Lateral Structures Command

In HEC-RAS, lateral structures are used to model flow being transferred between a river and adjacent elements, such as another river, storage area, or 2D flow area. The lateral structure acts as an internal boundary element between the above model elements, and can represent a levee or flood wall, a flow diversion structure, or the natural terrain. To learn more about lateral structures, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

In GeoHECRAS, the user can draw lateral structures interactively on the map view or assign the already imported GIS shapefiles as a lateral structure.

Lateral Structure

Creating a Lateral Structure

To create a lateral structure, either the Draw Lateral Structures or Assign Lateral Structures command can be used. Both commands work similarly.

Lateral Structures Command

Draw Lateral Structures

The Draw Lateral Structures command allows the user to interactively draw the centerline of the lateral structure on the Map View. The software will extract the lateral structure geometry from the underlying terrain model.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw Lateral Structures command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Lateral Structures menu item, and then select the Draw Lateral Structures command.Draw Lateral Structures Command
  2. The Draw Lateral Structures dialog box will be displayed.Draw Lateral Structures dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Draw Lateral Structures command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Draw Lateral Structure Polylines

This section is used to draw the lateral structures on the Map View using polylines. To draw a lateral structure polyline, follow the steps below:

  1. Click the [Draw] button adjacent to the Structure centerline field. Use the Create curvilinear polyline checkbox option to make a smooth outline for the drawn polygon.Draw Lateral Structure Polylines
  2. The Draw Lateral Structures dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user to draw the lateral structure centerline.
  3. Draw a polyline representing the lateral structure’s centerline. This polyline must intersect two or more cross sections on the Map view.
  4. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Draw Lateral Structures dialog box will be redisplayed.

Lateral Structure General Specifications

This section is used to specify the river, reach and corresponding river station along which the lateral structure is drawn.

Lateral Structure General Specifications

To specify the river and reach, select the river and reach name from the River name and Reach name dropdown combo boxes, respectively. Alternatively, the user can select a reach by clicking on the [Pick] button from the Map View. The user can use the Description box to describe the location of the lateral structures more specifically.

Note that the software automatically picks up the value for the Lateral structure river station. This river station ID identifies the upstream end of the lateral structure.

Adjoining Cross Section Cleanup

When defining a lateral structure, it is necessary to trim the extended cross sections and extend the shortened cross sections.

Adjoining Cross Section Cleanup

The user should make sure both the Trim overlapping cross sections and Extend shortened cross sections checkboxes are checked by default. This allows the software to automatically trim the extended cross sections and extend the shortened cross section. To learn more about trimming and extending cross sections, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

General Options

This tabbed panel is used to specify the details of lateral structure connections and identify adjacent model elements.

General Options tab

Lateral Structure Connection Details

This section is used to select the structure type, the headwater position of the lateral structure, and the tailwater connection in order to define what the lateral structure is connected to within the reach.

Lateral Structure Connection Details

The user can select the type of routing which will be used for lateral structures by using the Structure type dropdown combo box. The Weir, Culverts, Gates, Rating Curve structure type is selected by default, while the Linear Routing selection can be used in the case of multiple lateral structures that are connected to storage areas, but a detailed flow calculation of each lateral structure is not required.

Using the headwater position, the user can determine where the lateral structure is defined spatially within the reach. The user can then specify whether the headwater position is on the right bank, on the rightmost station, on the left bank, or on the leftmost station by selecting it from the Headwater position dropdown combo box.

The lateral structure can be connected to a storage area, 2D flow area, cross sections in another river reach, or nothing at all. To set the tailwater connection, the user can select the connection type from the following options:

  • Adjacent River Reach
  • Adjacent SA/2D Flow Area
  • Out of System (defined as leaving the system)

When Out of System is selected as the tailwater connection, then no other information is required and hence, both the Adjacent Storage Areas/2D Flow Area and the Adjacent River Reach Connection sections will become inactive.

Adjacent SA/2D Flow Area

When Adjacent SA/2D Flow Area is selected as the tailwater connection, then the user is required to select the Storage area/2D flow area ID from the dropdown combo box. Alternatively, the user can click [...] to go to the Map View and select the required storage area/2D flow area.

Adjacent Storage Area/2D Flow Area

Adjacent River Reach Connection

When the Adjacent River Reach Connection is selected as the tailwater connection, then the user can select the river, reach, and range of cross sections that connect the lateral structure.

Adjacent River Reach Connection

To specify the adjacent river and reach, select the river and reach name from the River name and Reach name dropdown combo boxes, respectively. Then, the user can select the upstream cross section river station using the Upstream cross section river station combo box or by clicking the […] button to pick the station ID from the Map View. This river station ID identifies the tailwater connection of the upstream end of the lateral structure.

The user must specify whether the tailwater position is on the right bank, on the rightmost station, on the left bank, or on the leftmost station by selecting it from the Tailwater position dropdown combo box.

In addition, the user can check the Trim adjacent river reach overlapping cross sections and Extend adjacent river reach shorten cross sections checkboxes to trim the extended cross sections and extend the shortened cross section of the adjacent river.

Culvert Flow Direction

This section determines the direction of the culvert. This option only affects the flow through the culverts, not flow through the weirs or gated structures. The user can select the culvert flow direction from the All culverts combo box.

Culvert Flow Direction

Terrain Options

This tabbed panel is used to define the source elevation data that can be used to extract the weir geometry for the lateral structure defined from the digital terrain layers.

Primary Elevation Data

This section defines the primary elevation data of the lateral structure.

Terrain Options tab

Depending upon the elevation data source type that is selected, different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information. For information on the types of terrain elevation data, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Secondary Elevation Data

As secondary elevation data, the user can use an additional elevation data source if it is available in the same project.

Secondary Elevation Data

Note that the user can switch elevation data sources by clicking the [Swap Sources] button.

The software will now create a structure on the location where the user drew the centerline, and the cross sections length is adjusted automatically.

Assign Lateral Structures

To use the Assign Lateral Structures command, a polyline that can be selected for the purpose of assigning the lateral structure must already exist on the Map View. The software will extract the lateral structure geometry from the underlying terrain model.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Lateral Structures command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Lateral Structures menu item, and then select the Assign Lateral Structures command.Assign Lateral Structures Command
  2. The Assign Lateral Structures dialog box will be displayed.Assign Lateral Structures dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Assign Lateral Structures command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Select Lateral Structure Polyline

This section describes how to assign a lateral structure polyline while using the Assign Lateral Structures command. Follow the steps below:

  1. Click the [Pick] button adjacent to the Structure centerline field.Select Lateral Structure Polyline
  2. The Assign Lateral Structures dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user to click the lateral structure polyline.
  3. Click the lateral structure polyline that represents the structure’s centerline on the Map View. The Assign Lateral Structures dialog box will be redisplayed.

The software will now treat the polyline as a lateral structure and adjust the cross sections accordingly.

Note that the remaining sections of the Assign Lateral Structures command are similar to that of the Draw Lateral Structures command. So, the user can refer to these sections explained above in the article.

Hydraulic Structures › Storage Areas

Storage Area Data Command (HEC-RAS)

Storage areas can be defined by drawing the boundary of the area using the Draw Storage Areas command, or by assigning an already drawn polyline or polygon as the boundary using the Assign Storage Areas command. Refer to this article in our knowledge base on how to create a storage area.

Once a storage area has been defined, the user can enter data to describe the storage area. In GeoHECRAS, the Storage Area Data command can be used to view or modify the storage area data. This data includes the area of storage, the minimum elevation, and the elevation-versus-volume relationship. The elevation-versus-volume relationship is a curve that shows how the volume of the storage area changes as the elevation of the water surface changes.

Storage areas can be connected to other storage areas, cross sections, or lateral structures. When a storage area is connected to another storage area, the flow between the two areas is calculated using the storage area's elevation-versus-volume relationship. When a storage area is connected to a cross section or lateral structure, the flow between the storage area and the cross section or lateral structure is calculated using the cross section's or lateral structure's hydraulic parameters.

Storage areas can be used to model a variety of hydrologic processes, including flood routing, water quality, and sediment transport. By using storage areas, GeoHECRAS can be used to simulate the effects of these processes on a river system.

This article describes how to use the Storage Area Data command in GeoHECRAS software.

Follow the steps below to view or modify the storage area data:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Storage Areas dropdown menu and then select the Storage Area Data command. Alternatively, the user can double-click on the storage area from the Map View.
    Storage Area Data Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Storage Area Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Storage Area Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Storage Area Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Storage Area

The Select Storage Area section allows the user to select the storage area in order to define the storage area data. The user can create a new storage area, copy existing storage area data to a new storage area, and delete a storage area. In addition, the user can navigate between storage areas and enter a description detailing the current storage area.

Select Storage Area section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Storage area ID
    This editable dropdown combo box displays the storage area(s) defined in the current scenario of the project. Click on the edit option (i.e., pencil icon) to edit the storage area ID. The user can navigate between the available storage areas using the Up and Down arrow buttons. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to select the storage area from the Map View. Note that the Up and Down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the current scenario of the project contains only one storage area.
  • Description
    This optional entry field allows the user to add additional information to describe the current storage area.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to draw a new storage area on the Map View. Note that the newly created storage area name must be unique. Otherwise, a warning dialog box is displayed, and the user is then returned to the Storage area ID field to change the ID.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to create a copy of the current storage area on the Map View. When this command is executed, the software automatically provides a unique default name for the duplicated storage area. The cursor is then placed into the Storage area ID. The user can go with the default name or enter a different valid and unique ID before moving on to add any other data.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the current storage area and its associated data from the current scenario of the project.
  • Less/More
    The [< Less] and [More >] buttons at the Select Storage Area section header allow the user to expand or collapse the Storage Area Volume Plot section.
  • Convert to 2D Flow Area
    The [Convert to 2D Flow Area] button allows the user to convert the current storage area to a 2D flow area. Clicking on the [Convert to 2D Flow Area] button will display the following confirmational dialog box.
    [Convert to 2D Flow Area] button - Confirm dialog box
    Click the [Yes] button and the selected storage area will be converted to a 2D flow area. To abort the process, click the [No] button.

Storage Area Specifications

The Storage Area Specifications dropdown combo box contains several data panel entries that allow the user to define storage area data. The following data panel entries are listed in the dropdown combo box:

  • Volume Definition
  • Connections
  • Boundary Conditions
Storage Area Specifications dropdown combo box

Volume Definition

This panel provides different ways of defining the storage area volume. By default, the Volume Definition panel is selected when the Storage Area Data dialog box is displayed.

Volume Definition panel

The following sections describe the Volume Definition data panel:

Defining Storage Volume by Fixed Area

The Define Storage Volume by Fixed Area radio button section allows the volume of the storage area to be defined with a fixed area and a bottom (minimum) elevation. By default, this radio button section is selected.

Note: The storage area is assumed to have the same area at all elevations, therefore the volume is simply the depth times the area.

The following options are provided:

  • Area
    This entry field is used to define a fixed area for the storage area. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to select the polyline/polygon from the Map View to define an area for the storage area. Clicking on the [Measure] button allows the user to manually measure the area from the Map View. Clicking on the [Recalc] button allows the user to recalculate the area of the digitized storage area.
  • Bottom elevation
    This entry field is used to manually define the bottom (minimum) elevation of the storage area.

Defining Storage Volume by Elevation vs. Area

The Define Storage Volume by Elevation vs. Area radio button section allows the volume of the storage area to be defined by a table of elevations and corresponding areas. The Storage area scale factor entry allows the user to adjust the size of the detention pond storage. When the [Apply] button is clicked, the entered scale factor is multiplied by each entry in the Area column. Select the Define Storage Volume by Elevation vs. Area radio button to enable this section.

Define Storage Volume by Elevation vs. Area section

The following data columns are provided:

  • Elevation
    This data column allows the user to manually define the elevation that corresponds to a polyline/polygon area for computing storage.
  • Area
    This data column allows the user to manually define the area for the corresponding elevation and is used to compute the accumulated storage volume.Clicking on the first […] pick button allows the user to select the polyline/polygon from the Map View to define an area.Clicking on the second […] pick button allows the user to manually measure the storage area on the Map View.
  • Computed Volume
    This read-only data column automatically computes the accumulated storage volume as the user enters the elevation and area data.

The right-click context menu of the table displays commands to cut, copy, and paste cells, as well as insert and delete rows to and from the table. In addition, the user can copy the table data to the clipboard or export it as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document.

Right-click context menu commands

Defining Storage Volume by Elevation vs. Volume

The Define Storage Volume by Elevation vs. Volume radio button section allows the volume of the storage area to be defined by a table of elevations and corresponding accumulated volumes. The Storage volume scale factor entry allows the user to adjust the size of the detention pond storage. When the [Apply] button is clicked, the entered scale factor is multiplied by each entry in the Volume column. Select the Define Storage Volume by Elevation vs. Volume radio button to enable this section.

Define Storage Volume by Elevation vs. Volume section

The following data columns are provided:

  • Elevation
    This data column is used to define the elevation that corresponds to an accumulated storage volume for computing storage area.
  • Volume
    This data column is used to define the accumulated storage volume for the corresponding elevation and is used to compute the storage area. Note that the first row of this column is read-only and has a default value of 0.00.
  • Computed Area
    This data column automatically computes the area as the user enters the elevation and volume data. Note that the first row of this column is defined by the user and has a default value of 0.00. The remaining cells of this data column are read-only and computed by the software.

Connections

This data panel displays the connections to and from the current storage area. It provides a central location that lists all of the connections with the current storage area.

Connections Panel

The following sections describe the Connections data panel:

SA/2D Connections

This section provides a table listing all of the SA/2D connections linked to the current storage area.

The following data columns are provided:

  • SA/2D Connection ID
    This read-only column lists the ID of the connected SA/2D connection.
  • Structure Type
    This read-only column lists the type of SA/2D connection that is being used. The following SA/2D connection types are available:
    1. Weir
    2. Weir and Culverts
    3. Weir and Gates
    4. Linear Routing
  • Connection Definition
    This column details the SA/2D connection. Click the [Pick] button to select the SA/2D connection from the Map View. Note that if the selected SA/2D connection already exists in a different row within the table, the following informational dialog box will be displayed.
    Invalid River Reach dialog box
    In addition, a [Define] button is provided that allows the user to jump to where the SA/2D connection is defined. Clicking on the [Define] button closes the Storage Area Data dialog box and displays the SA/2D Connections Data dialog box, providing detailed information about the selected SA/2D connection. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the SA/2D Connections Data dialog box.

River Reach End Connections

This section provides a table listing the river reaches connected to the current storage area.

The following data columns are provided:

  • River & Reach
    These two read-only columns list the river and corresponding reach that is connected to the selected storage area.
  • Cross Section River Station
    This read-only column details the cross section river station that is connected to the storage area. Click the [Pick] button to select the river reach that connects to the storage area from the Map View. Note that if the selected river reach already exists in a different row within the table, the following informational dialog box will be displayed.
    Invalid SA/2D Connection dialog box
    In addition, a [Define] button is provided that allows the user to jump to where the cross section is defined. Clicking on the [Define] button closes the Storage Area Data dialog box and displays the Cross Section Data dialog box, providing detailed information about the selected cross section. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Cross Section Data dialog box.

Lateral Structure Connections

This section provides a table listing the lateral structures connected to the current storage area.

The following data columns are provided:

  • River & Reach
    These two read-only columns list the river and corresponding reach that is connected to the storage area.
  • Headwater River Station
    This read-only column details the lateral structure headwater river station that is connected to the storage area. Click the [Pick] button to select the lateral structure that connects to the storage area from the Map View.Note that if the selected lateral structure already exists in a different row within the table, the following informational dialog box will be displayed.
    Invalid Lateral Structure

    In addition, a [Define] button is provided that allows the user to jump to where the lateral structure is defined. Clicking on the [Define] button closes the Storage Area Data dialog box and displays the Lateral Structure Data dialog box, providing detailed information about the selected lateral structure. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Lateral Structure Data dialog box.

Boundary Conditions

This panel provides a table listing all of the boundary condition lines linked to the current storage area.

Boundary Conditions Panel

The following data columns are provided:

  • Boundary Condition ID
    This read-only column lists the ID of the connected boundary condition lines. Clicking the pencil icon adjacent to the column allows the user to edit the name of the boundary condition lines.
  • Boundary Connection Definition
    This column details the boundary condition lines. The following details are provided in this entry based upon the selected boundary condition types.
    1. Normal Depth
    2. Water Surface Elev
    3. Critical Depth
    4. Rating Curve
    5. Flow Hydrograph
    6. Stage Hydrograph
    7. Stage/Flow Hydrograph
    8. Lateral Inflow Hydrograph
    9. Groundwater Interflow
    10. Precipitation Hydrograph
    11. Time Series Gate Openings

In addition, a [Define] button is provided that allows the user to jump to where the boundary condition line is defined. Clicking on the [Define] button closes the Storage Area Data dialog box and displays the Unsteady Flow Data dialog box, providing detailed information about the selected boundary conditions. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Unsteady Flow Data dialog box.

Hydraulic Structures › Storage Areas

Automated Draw Storage Areas Command

Storage Areas are lake-like regions where water can be channeled in or out. In CivilGEO's software, the user can use the Automated Draw Storage Areas command to define the boundary of a storage area. The software defines the storage area boundary by creating a planar surface at the defined water surface elevation and then intersects it with the defined terrain surface. The resultant clipped polygon represents the storage area (or reservoir).

Storage area

Follow the steps below to use the Automated Draw Storage Areas command.

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Storage Areas dropdown menu and select the Automated Draw Storage Areas command.
    Automated Draw Storage Areas command
  2. The Automated Draw Storage Areas dialog box will be displayed.
    Automated Draw Storage Areas dialog box

The following sections describe the Automated Draw Storage Areas command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Storage Area Specifications

The Storage Area Specifications section is used to define the storage area ID. By default, the storage area ID is automatically suggested in the Storage area ID entry using a predefined format. However, the user can enter a different ID if needed.

General Specifications

The General Specifications section is used to define the general specifications for drawing the storage area.

General Specifications section

The following options are available:

  • Terrain surface
    The dropdown combo box lists the terrain surfaces associated with the project, which are used to define the storage area boundary. By default, the current scenario’s terrain surface is selected. If there is no terrain surface defined for the selected scenario, then this entry is undefined. Note that the dropdown combo box does not list the hybrid terrain surfaces (i.e., composite of different terrain surfaces).
  • Thin boundary polyline (removes redundant vertices)
    This checkbox option removes redundant vertices that do not contribute to the shape of the generated storage area boundary. By default, this checkbox option is checked.
  • Smooth boundary polyline
    This checkbox option controls whether extra vertices are added along the storage area boundary to improve their appearance. By default, this checkbox option is checked.

Defining Storage Area Boundary Limits

The Define Storage Area Boundary Limits section is used to define the maximum limits for generating the storage area boundary.

Define Storage Area Boundary Limits section

The following options are available:

  • Current screen limits
    When this option is selected, the software will use the current extents of the Map View as the boundary limit for generating the storage area boundary.
  • User-defined limits
    When this option is selected, the user can click the [Pick] button to draw a rectangular region to define the storage area boundary limits on the Map View. Clicking the [Pick] button temporarily hides the dialog box. The user can then draw a rectangular region to define the limits on the Map View. After releasing the mouse, the user will be returned to the dialog box. The User-defined limits read-only field will be changed from Undefined to defined.
  • Terrain surface limits
    When this option is selected, the terrain surface area used to generate the storage area boundary will have the same extent as the elevation grid.
  • Model extents
    When this option is selected, the software will create a rectangular bounding region to the extents of the defined model, along with an additional buffer boundary.

Computing Storage Area Boundary

The Compute Storage Area Boundary section is used to define where the software should create a storage area boundary. The software requires the user to select a point within or on the boundary of the storage area to define the parameters for computing the storage area boundary. Note that if there is no terrain surface defined for the selected scenario, then this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Compute Storage Area Boundary section

The following options are available:

  • Select point in storage area
    This option allows the user to select a point within the storage area or on its boundary. Clicking the […] pick button will cause the Automated Draw Storage Areas dialog box to temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select a point on the Map View. After selecting a point, the user is immediately returned to the dialog box, and the read-only field will be changed from Undefined to Defined.
    Select point in storage area read-only option
  • Storage area crest elevation
    This entry field allows the user to define an elevation at which the software will determine the storage area boundary. Alternatively, the user can click the […] pick button to select the crest elevation from the Map View.
  • Compute storage area boundary
    Clicking the [Compute] button causes the software to compute the storage area boundary. Note that this button is disabled until the user defines all the required options in the dialog box needed for computing the storage area boundary.

Computing Storage Area Volume

The Compute Storage Area Volume section is used to define how the software should compute the storage area volume curve. Note that this section is disabled (i.e. grayed out) until the user has computed a storage area boundary.

Compute Storage Area Volume section

The following options are available:

  • Storage area maximum elevation
    This entry field allows the user to define the maximum elevation to be used in computing the storage area volume curve for the selected storage area. Note that the software automatically computes this entry once the storage area boundary has been computed. However, the user can enter a different value if needed. Alternatively, the user can click the […] pick button to select the storage area's maximum elevation from the Map View.
  • Storage area minimum elevation
    This entry field allows the user to define the minimum elevation to be used in computing the storage area volume curve for the selected storage area. Note that the software automatically computes this entry once the storage area boundary has been computed. However, the user can enter a different value if needed. Alternatively, the user can click the […] pick button to select the storage area’s minimum elevation from the Map View.
  • Storage area depth
    This read-only field represents the difference between the Storage area maximum elevation and the Storage area minimum elevation entries.
  • Storage area volume depth increment
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the storage area volume depth increments. The dropdown combo box lists the following storage area volume depth increments:
    • 1
    • 25
    • 50
    • 1 (default)
    • 2
    • 5
    • 5
    • 10
    • 20
  • Compute storage area volume
    Clicking the [Compute] button causes the software to compute the storage area volume. The software will then update the Elevation Area Volume Plot with the extracted storage area volume curve data from the selected terrain surface, as shown below.
    Elevation Area Volume Plot
    The software will also update the corresponding Elevation Area Volume Data Table with the extracted storage area volume curve data from the selected terrain surface, as shown below.
    Elevation Area Volume Data Table

Assigning Storage Area

When all the options have been defined in the Automated Draw Storage Areas dialog box, click the [Assign] button. The software will then define the storage area on the Map View.

Hydraulic Structures › Storage Areas

Georeferencing Storage Areas

When the software imports a model, it automatically places the storage areas on the Map View. However, if the original model was not spatially georeferenced, the storage areas will not align with any loaded background base map. While the software can operate without any issues in this situation, the user may prefer to have the storage areas being georeferenced to the background base map. Therefore, it may become necessary to georeference the imported storage areas.

The Georeference Storage Areas command is used to manually georeference each of the storage areas to the background base map displayed in the Map View. The process of georeferencing a storage area to the Map View can be a trial-and-error process—especially when the exact location of the original storage area is not known. Using the Georeference Storage Areas command, this process is accelerated.

Note that a CRS should be assigned prior to running this command. Otherwise, the software will display the below informational dialog box.

CRS Not Assigned to GST Model

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about how to assign a coordinate reference system to a project.

Follow the steps below to georeference an existing storage area:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Storage Areas dropdown menu and then select the Georeference Storage Areas command.
    Georeference Storage Areas command
  2. The Georeference Storage Areas dialog box will be displayed.
    Georeference Storage Areas dialog box

The following sections describe how to georeference an existing storage area and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Storage Area to Georeference

The Select Storage Area to Georeference section allows the user to interactively select the storage area to georeference.

Follow the steps below to select the storage area to georeference:

  1. Select the storage area from the Storage area ID dropdown combo box that lists all the storage areas contained within the current scenario.
    Storage area ID dropdown combo box
  2. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the storage area from the Map View. On clicking the [Pick] button, the Georeference Storage Areas dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the storage area from the Map View.
    [Pick] button
  3. Upon selecting the storage area, the user is immediately returned to the Georeference Storage Areas dialog box, and the selected storage area will be highlighted on the Map View.

    Notes:
    • The user can select only one storage area at a time.
    • The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

Once the storage area has been selected, the user can choose between the following options to georeference the storage area:

  • Snap to Alignment Polyline/Polygon
  • Draw on Map View

Snapping Storage Area to Alignment Polyline/Polygon

If an existing alignment polyline or polygon for the storage area exists on the Map View, the Snap to Alignment Polyline/Polygon option can be used to snap the storage area to the alignment polyline/polygon.

Follow the steps below to use the Snap to Alignment Polyline/Polygon georeferencing option:

  1. Select the Snap to Alignment Polyline/Polygon radio button option and click the [Pick] button adjacent to the Select alignment polyline/polygon read-only field.
    [Pick] button
  2. The Georeference Storage Areas dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the alignment polyline or polygon.
  3. Select the alignment polyline or polygon on the Map View. Note that the user can select only one alignment polyline or polygon at a time to use for georeferencing.
  4. The Georeference Storage Areas dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Select alignment polyline/polygon read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.
  5. Click the [Snap] button and the software will then snap the storage area to the selected alignment polyline or polygon.
    [Snap] button

Drawing Storage Area on Map View

The Draw on Map View option allows the user to draw an alignment polygon on the Map View and automatically snap the selected storage area to the drawn polygon.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw on Map View option:

  1. Select the Draw on Map View radio button option and click the [Draw] button. Use the Create curvilinear polygon checkbox option to draw the polygon using a curvilinear segment.
    [Draw] button
  2. The Georeference Storage Areas dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw an alignment polygon on the Map View. While drawing a polygon, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between the curvilinear and the linear digitizing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about drawing elements on the Map View.
  3. Once the alignment polygon is drawn on the Map View, press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Georeference Storage Areas dialog box will be redisplayed, and the storage area will then automatically snap to the drawn alignment polygon.
Hydraulic Structures › Storage Areas

Extracting Storage Area Volume Curve

Once the storage area boundary has been defined, the software will automatically compute the fixed area “footprint” that the storage area occupies. However, defining the storage area volume using this approach results in the treatment of the storage area as a “barrel” with vertical walls—where the storage area does not change with depth.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about how to define the storage area boundary.

Extracting-Storage-Area-Volume-Curve-image-1.png

For large storage areas with minimal depth, the fixed area approach is fine. For example, a flat agricultural overbank area can be defined this way. However, there are instances where a more accurate representation of the storage volume is required – such as for a reservoir or detention pond – where the storage area varies greatly with the change in elevation.

Extracting-Storage-Area-Volume-Curve-image-2.png

Extracting Storage Volume from Terrain Model

If the terrain model includes the bathymetry of the storage area, then the software can be used to extract the storage volume from the terrain model. Follow these steps:

  1. Select the storage area on the Map View so it is highlighted. Then, right-click and choose Extract Storage Area Volume Curve from the displayed context menu.
    Right-click context menu - Extract Storage Area Volume Curve
  2. The Extract Storage Area Volume Curve dialog box will be displayed.
    Extract Storage Area Volume Curve dialog box
  3. From the Terrain surface dropdown combo box, select the layer containing the terrain surface to extract the storage area volume curve.
  4. The Storage area maximum elevation and Storage area minimum elevation entry fields define the maximum and minimum elevation to be used in extracting the storage area volume curve for the selected storage area. Note that these values are automatically computed by the software once the storage area boundary has been created.
  5. From the Storage area volume depth increment dropdown combo box, select the elevation increment to be used in computing the storage volume table data for the selected storage area.
  6. Click the [Extract] button, and the software will process the selected storage area polygon region and determine the elevation versus area versus volume from the selected terrain surface.
    [Extract] button
    Note: In GeoSTORM, the table includes an additional Depth column, allowing the user to define elevation versus depth versus area versus volume data.
    Depth column
Hydraulic Structures › Storage Areas

Defining HEC-RAS Storage Areas

Upstream and downstream boundaries of a river reach can be connected to a reservoir, lake, or other types of large water bodies. These water bodies are called storage areas in HEC-RAS.

A-Storage-Area-min.png

In addition, off-channel ponding areas that exchange water with the adjacent river can be modeled as storage areas. A lateral structure is required to exchange water between the river and the storage area.

Off-channel-Ponding-Storage-Areas-min.png

The following diagram represents the three different situations where a storage area can be connected to a river reach.

Scenarios-to-Connect-SA-with-River-Reach.png

HEC-RAS storage areas can be defined by either drawing or assigning the boundary using the following commands:

  • Draw Storage Areas
  • Assign Storage Areas

Existing storage areas can also be georeferenced to a more accurate outline representation of the water body assigned.

Drawing HEC-RAS Storage Areas

HEC-RAS storage areas can be defined by drawing the boundary of the reservoir, lake, or ponded area using the Draw Storage Areas command.

Follow the steps below to draw a storage area:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Storage Areas menu item and choose the Draw Storage Areas command.
    Defining-HEC-RAS-Storage-Areas-image-4.png
  1. The Draw Storage Areas dialog box will be displayed.
    Draw Storage Areas dialog box
  2. Click the [Draw] button adjacent to the Storage area polygon field. By default, the software allows you to draw the storage area polygon using linear segments. Note that the user can use the Create curvilinear polygon checkbox option to draw the polygon using curvilinear segments.
    [Draw] button
  3. The Draw Storage Areas dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  4. Draw the storage area on the Map View. While drawing elements, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between the curvilinear and the linear digitizing. To learn more about drawing elements on the Map View, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  5. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu.
  6. The Draw Storage Areas dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Storage area polygon read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    Storage area polygon read-only field - Drawn
  7. Enter a unique name for the storage area in the Storage area ID entry field.
  8. Click the [Apply] button and the storage area will be created.

Assigning HEC-RAS Storage Areas

HEC-RAS storage areas can be defined by assigning an already drawn polyline or polygon as the boundary of the reservoir, lake, or ponded area using the Assign Storage Areas command.

Follow the steps below to assign a storage area:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Storage Areas menu item and choose the Assign Storage Areas command.
    Defining-HEC-RAS-Storage-Areas-image-8.png
  1. The Assign Storage Areas dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign Storage Areas dialog box
  2. Click the [Pick] button adjacent to the Storage area polyline/polygon field.
    [Pick] button
  3. The Assign Storage Areas dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  4. Select the storage area polygon/polyline on the Map View.
  5. The Draw Storage Areas dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Storage area polyline/polygon read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.
    Storage area polygon read-only field - Selected
  6. Enter a unique name for the storage area in the Storage area ID entry field.
  7. Click the [Apply] button and the software will treat the selected polyline or polygon as a storage area.

Georeferencing HEC-RAS Storage Areas

The Georeference Storage Areas command is used to manually georeference each of the storage areas to the background base map displayed in the Map View. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to use the Georeference Storage Areas command.

Revising HEC-RAS Storage Area Boundary

Existing storage area boundaries can be revised using the Reshape Polygon command. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to use the Reshape Polygon command.

Extracting Storage Area Volume Curve

GeoHECRAS software can be used to calculate how much storage area a site has and what volume it holds. After defining the storage area boundary, the software automatically computes the fixed area “footprint” that the storage area occupies to define the storage volume. This method works well in situations when the storage area does not change with depth. However, defining the storage volume in this manner results in an inaccurate representation of the storage volume for the regions where the storage area varies considerably with the elevation change. For regions where a more accurate representation of the storage volume is required, the user can extract the storage volume from the terrain model if the bathymetry of the storage area is contained in the terrain model.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to extract storage area volume from the terrain model.

Hydraulic Structures › SA/2D Connections

Reverse SA/2D Connection Geometry Command

In GeoHECRAS, the Reverse SA/2D Connection Geometry command is used to reverse the SA/2D connection weir geometry so that horizontal stationing is left to right, looking in a downstream direction.

Follow the steps below to use the Reverse SA/2D Connection Geometry command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the SA/2D Connections dropdown menu and select the Reverse SA/2D Connection Geometry command.
    Reverse SA/2D Connection Geometry command
  2. The Reverse SA/2D Connection Geometry dialog box will be displayed.
    Reverse SA/2D Connection Geometry dialog box
  3. Click on the [Pick] button to select a SA/2D connection from the Map View.
    [Pick] button
  4. The Reverse SA/2D Connection Geometry dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next. The user can then select an SA/2D connection on the Map View.
  5. After selecting a SA/2D connection, the dialog box will be redisplayed. The selected SA/2D connection will be displayed in the SA/2D connection ID dropdown entry.
    SA/2D connection ID dropdown entry
  6. Alternatively, the SA/2D connection available in the project can be directly selected from the SA/2D connection ID dropdown entry.
    SA/2D connection ID dropdown entriesNote that if the user has preselected the SA/2D connection from the Map View before running this command, the selected SA/2D connection will be displayed in the SA/2D connection ID dropdown entry.
  7. Click the [OK] button and the following Reverse SA/2D Connection confirmational dialog box will be displayed.
    Reverse SA/2D Connection confirmational dialog box
  8. Click the [Yes] button and the selected SA/2D connection geometry will be reversed. To abort the process, click the [No] button.
Hydraulic Structures › SA/2D Connections

SA/2D Connection Data Command

Storage areas define the elements (i.e., reservoirs, lakes, detention ponds, storage nodes, etc.) where there are one or more inflows and only one computed outflow. Inflow comes from other elements in the model, such as drainage basins, routing reaches, or diversions. If there is more than one inflow, all inflow is added together before computing the outflow. It is assumed that the water surface in the storage area pool is level.

2D flow areas are regions of a model where the flow through that particular region will be computed with the HEC-RAS two-dimensional flow computation algorithms. 2D flow areas are defined by laying out a polygon representing the outer boundary of the 2D flow area and then specifying the computational mesh.

In GeoHECRAS, SA/2D connections are used to link two storage areas together with a hydraulic structure or two 2D flow areas, or a storage area to a 2D flow area. The user can draw SA/2D connections interactively on the map view or assign the already imported GIS shapefiles as SA/2D connections. The software also allows the user to place a hydraulic structure in the middle of a 2D flow area to control how flow travels from one series of cells to another series of cells. SA/2D connections can consist of a weir and gated spillway, culverts, a bridge, just a weir, rating curves, or a linear routing option. To learn how to draw SA/2D connections, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

To establish a hydraulic connection between two storage areas, 2D flow areas, or inside a 2D flow area, the SA/2D Connection Data dialog box will be used.

Follow the steps below to use the SA/2D Connection Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the SA/2D Connections dropdown menu and select the SA/2D Connection Data command.
    SA/2D Connection Data command
  2. The SA/2D Connection Data dialog box will be displayed.
    SA/2D Connection Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the SA/2D Connection Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting SA/2D Connection

The Select SA/2D Connection section allows the user to select the SA/2D connection for which SA/2D connection data will be defined. In this section, the user can create, delete, and copy existing SA/2D connection data to a new SA/2D connection. In addition, the user can navigate between SA/2D connections and enter a description for each SA/2D connection.

Select SA/2D Connection section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • SA/2D connection ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the SA/2D connections that are defined in the current scenario. Click on the edit option (i.e., the pencil icon) to edit the SA/2D connection ID. The user can navigate between the available SA/2D connections using the Up and Down arrow buttons. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to select the SA/2D connection from the Map View. Note that the Up and Down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the current scenario contains only one SA/2D connection.
  • Description
    This entry field allows the user to enter additional information that describes the selected SA/2D connection.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to create a new SA/2D connection. Note that the SA/2D connection name should be unique. Otherwise, a warning dialog box is displayed, and the user is then returned to the SA/2D connection ID field to change the ID.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to copy existing SA/2D connection data along with its associated data to a new SA/2D connection. When this command is executed, the software automatically provides a unique default name for the copied SA/2D connection. The cursor is then placed into the SA/2D connection ID dropdown combo box. The user can go with the default name or enter a different ID before moving on to add any other data.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the selected SA/2D connection from the current scenario.
  • Less/More
    The [< Less] and [More >] buttons at the Select SA/2D Connection header allow the user to expand or collapse the SA/2D Connection Plot section.
  • Convert to Breakline
    Clicking the [Convert to Breakline] button causes the software to convert the selected SA/2D connection into a breakline.

SA/2D Connection Specifications

The SA/2D Connection Specifications dropdown combo box contains several data panel entries that allow the user to define SA/2D connection data. The following data panel entries are listed in the dropdown combo box:

  • Connection Data
  • Overflow Weir
  • Culverts
  • Gates
  • Outlet Rating Curve
  • Outlet Time Series
  • Dam Breach
  • Linear Routing
  • Geometry Adjustment
  • Geometry Point Reduction.
SA/2D Connection Specifications entry

Connection Data

This panel allows the user to define connection details for the selected SA/2D connection. By default, the Connection Data panel is shown when the SA/2D Connection Data command is selected.

Connection Data Panel

Connection Details

This section is used to define the connection details for the selected SA/2D connection.

Note that if the structure is drawn between two storage areas, a storage area and a 2D flow area, or between two 2D flow areas, the user will need to define the From and To locations. If the structure is drawn completely inside of a single 2D flow area, then the To and From connections are automatically set to the 2D area.

The following entries are provided:

  • From SA/2D area ID
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the storage area or 2D flow area ID that the water flows from. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the storage area or 2D flow area from the Map View.
  • To SA/2D area ID
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the storage area or 2D flow area ID that the water flows to. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the storage area or 2D flow area from the Map View.

Clicking the [Reverse Connection] button causes the software to reverse the SA/2D connection selected in the From SA/2D area ID and the To SA/2D area ID dropdown combo boxes. When the user clicks this button, a confirmation dialog box is displayed as shown below.

Reverse SA/2D Connection confirmation dialog box

Clicking the [Reverse Direction] button causes the software to reverse the geometry of the SA/2D connection. Note that this button is disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the storage area or 2D flow area is not selected. When the user clicks this button, a confirmation dialog box is displayed as shown below.

Reverse SA/2D Connection Geometry confirmation dialog box

2D Weir Polyline Cell Spacing

This section is used to define the cell spacing values along the storage area or 2D flow area connection polyline. The following entries are provided:

  • Cell spacing along weir polyline
    This entry field represents the cell spacing along the storage area or 2D flow area connection polyline. If this entry field is left blank, then the cell spacing used in the vicinity of the storage area or 2D flow area connection will be used. Click the […] button to measure the SA/2D connection cell spacing from the Map View.
  • Relaxed cell spacing in 2D flow area
    This entry field represents the cell spacing further away from the storage area or 2D flow area connection polyline. This value should not be the same as the Cell spacing along weir polyline value, or many cell errors may be introduced along the polyline. Click the […] button to measure the SA/2D connection cell spacing from the Map View.

Connection Structure

This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of routing for the selected SA/2D connection. The following options are provided:

  • Structure type

This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of routing for the selected SA/2D connection from the following options:

    1. Structure Routing: This option is used for both storage area and 2D flow area structures.
    2. Linear Routing: This option is used for storage area structures only.

Based on the type of routing selected by the user, the other data panels in the SA/2D Connection Specifications dropdown combo box get enabled or disabled.

Culvert Flow Direction

This section is used to control the culvert flow direction for all culverts defined for the selected SA/2D connection. The following entry is provided:

  • All culverts

This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the culvert flow direction. The following options are provided:

    1. No Flap Gates: This means that flow can move in both directions through the culverts. By default, this option is selected.
    2. No Negative Flow: This means that flow can only move in the positive flow direction through the culverts (Downstream).
    3. No Positive Flow: This means that flow can only move in the negative direction through the culverts (upstream).

Weir Only Computations

This section is used to define the computational method for the selected SA/2D connection. Note that this dropdown combo box is only available for the weir structure type. For other structure types, it is disabled (i.e., grayed out). The following entry is provided:

  • Computation type

This dropdown combo box allows the user to define the weir computational method. The following options are provided:

    1. At Each Time Step
    2. As Curves (faster)

2D Flow Area Internal Overflow Computation

This section is used to define the computational method for the flow going over the top of the structure to be computed for the selected SA/2D connection. The following entry is provided:

  • Computation type

This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the overflow computational method. The following options are provided:

    1. Weir Equation: If this option is chosen, all flow over the top of the hydraulic structure is computed with the weir equation. By default, this option is selected.
    2. 2D Computation (No Gates/Culverts): If this option is chosen, the flow over the top of the structure is computed as normal 2D flow between cells.

Overflow Weir

This panel allows the user to define overflow weir geometry specifications for the selected SA/2D connection.

Overflow Weir Panel

Overflow Weir Crest Geometry

This section provides a table for entering and editing the storage area or 2D flow area connection overflow weir geometry. The geometry of the overflow weir is entered from the left to right station, looking in a downstream direction. The user enters stations and elevations at the top of the overflow weir. Everything below the defined crest geometry elevations is considered solid ground.

The right-click context menu of the table displays the commands to cut, copy, and paste data to and from the Windows clipboard as well as insert and delete rows to and from the table. In addition, the user can also export the table data to Excel or PDF format and delete the table data.

right-click context menu

Overflow Weir Specifications

This section is used to define the dimensions of the overflow weir. The following entries are provided:

  • Structure width (parallel to flow)
    This entry field is used to specify the width of the overflow weir structure (measured along the flow direction). By default, the software uses a value of 10 ft. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to measure the structure width from the Map View.
  • Overflow weir crest shape
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to define the spillway shape at the overflow weir. This is used to reduce the weir flow coefficient due to the effect of weir flow submergence. Weir flow submergence occurs when the tailwater begins to drown out the weir flow. Two options are available: Broad Crested and Ogee.

    If the user has selected the Ogee as overflow weir crest shape, two additional parameters: Spillway approach height and Design energy head are displayed in the Overflow Weir Specifications section.
SA2D-Connection-Data-Image
  • Spillway approach height
    This entry field is used to define the height, which is equal to the elevation of the spillway crest minus the mean elevation of the ground just upstream of the spillway.
  • Design energy head
    This entry field is used to define the height, which is equal to the energy grade line elevation minus the elevation of the spillway crest.
  • Weir coefficient
    This entry field allows the user to specify the coefficient of discharge for use in the weir flow equation for overflow. Note that different coefficients are used depending on units, such as US Units or Metric (SI) Units. By default, the software uses a value of 2.6. Clicking the […] button will display a lookup dialog box containing weir coefficients.
    Weir coefficient dialog box
    Note that if the Ogee shaped weir is selected, the user can compute the weir coefficient based on the approach and design energy head with a click of the [Compute] button.

Culverts

This panel allows the user to define culvert specifications for the selected SA/2D connection. Note that the contents of this panel are the same as the Culverts panel contained in the Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box, except that the Distance to Upstream Cross Section field is not available in the Culvert Dimensions section. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to define culvert data using the Culverts panel.

SA2D-Connection-Data-Command-Img-12.png

Gates

This panel allows the user to define gate specifications for the selected SA/2D connection.

Gates panel

Gate Definition

This section is used to define the gates within an SA/2D connection, such as at a roadway crossing, spillway, or other flow control structure.

  • Gate group ID
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the gate group defined in the current scenario. Click on the edit option (i.e., the pencil icon) to edit the gate group ID.
  • Type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of gate. The following options are available:
    • Sluice
    • Radial
    • Overflow (Closed Top)
    • Overflow (Open Air)
    • User Defined Curves

Based on the gate type selected, the contents of this panel will be changed to show the required information for that gate type.

The user can also use the buttons provided in this section to add, copy, or delete the gate group(s).

Clicking the [Add] button allows the user to create a new gate group. Every newly created gate group is automatically assigned a unique ID, which can be edited.

Clicking the [Copy] button allows the user to create a copy of the selected gate group. The software automatically provides a unique ID to the copied gate group.

Clicking the [Delete] button allows the user to delete the selected gate group.

Clicking the [Delete All] button allows the user to delete all defined gate groups.

Gate Centerline Stationing

This section provides a table for defining the centerline stationing of the gate openings. The user can manually enter a different centerline stationing for each gate opening in the current gate group. Alternatively, the user can click the […] pick buttons under the Horizontal Station column to select the centerline station from the Map View or the SA/2D connection plot. Clicking the […] pick buttons under the Opening Alignment column allows the user to select the gate opening centerline alignment polyline from the Map View or draw the gate opening centerline alignment on the Map View. All gate openings within the same gate group are identical in every way, except for the centerline stationing. As new centerline stationing values are added, the number of identical gates in the group automatically increases and is reflected in the table. Note that a maximum of 25 gate openings can be defined in the table.

SA2D-Connection-Data-Command-Img-14.png

Gate Dimensions

This section sets the dimensions of the gate group being defined.

Gate Dimensions section

The following entries are provided:

  • Height
    This entry field is used to specify the maximum possible height that the gate can be opened. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to measure gate height from the SA/2D connection plot.
  • Width
    This entry field is used to specify the width of the gate. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to measure gate width from the SA/2D connection plot.
  • Invert elevation
    This entry field is used to specify the elevation of the gate invert. For overflow gates, this is the lowest elevation that the gate will open to. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to select gate invert elevation from the SA/2D connection plot.

Sluice Gate Flow

This section is used to define the flow coefficients for the gate group being defined. Note that this section is only available when the user has selected Sluice and Overflow (Closed Top) gate type in the Type dropdown combo box of the Gate Definition section.

Sluice Gate Flow section

The following entries are provided:

  • Headwater reference
    This dropdown combo box is used to select the reference point from which the upstream energy head will be computed. The following options are provided:
    1. Sill (Invert): This option is normally used when the flow through the gate goes out into a channel. By default, this option is selected.
    2. Center of Opening: This option is used if the gate causes the flow to jet out freely into the atmosphere.
  • Sluice discharge coefficient
    This entry field is used to enter the discharge coefficient for a sluice gate opening. The discharge coefficient typically ranges from 0.5 to 0.7, depending on gate geometry and flow conditions. Clicking the […] button will display a lookup dialog box for gate coefficient assistance.
  • Submerged orifice coefficient
    This entry field is used to enter an orifice coefficient, which will be used for the gate opening when the gate becomes more than 80 percent submerged. Between 67 percent and 80 percent submerged, the software uses a transition between the fully submerged orifice equation and the free flow gate equations. When the flow is less than 67 percent submerged, the software uses the free flow gate equations. Clicking the […] button will display a lookup dialog box containing orifice discharge coefficients
  • Headwater reference

This dropdown option is used to select the reference point from which the upstream energy head will be computed. Two available options are: Sill (Invert) and Center of Opening.

    1. Sill (Invert): This option is normally used when the flow through the gate goes out into a channel. By default, this option is selected.
    2. Center of Opening: This option is used if the gate causes the flow to jet out freely into the atmosphere.
  • Discharge coefficient
    This entry field is used to enter the coefficient of discharge for the gate opening. This coefficient ranges from 0.6 to 0.8 for Radial gates and 0.5 to 0.7 for Sluice gates.
    SA2D-Connection-Data-Command-Img-17.png
  • Submerged orifice coefficient
    This entry field is used to enter an orifice coefficient, which will be used for the gate opening when the gate becomes more than 80 percent submerged. Between 67 percent and 80 percent submerged, the software uses a transition between the fully submerged orifice equation and the free flow gate equations. When the flow is less than 67 percent submerged, the software uses the free flow gate equations.
    SA2D-Connection-Data-Command-Img-18.png

Radial Gate Flow

This section is used to define the flow coefficients for the gate group being defined. Note that this section is only available when the user has selected Radial gate type in the Type dropdown combo box of the Gate Definition section.

Radial Gate Flow section

The following entries are provided:

  • Headwater reference
    This dropdown combo box is used to select the reference point from which the upstream energy head will be computed. The following options are provided:
    • Sill (Invert)
    • Center of Opening
  • Radial discharge coefficient
    This entry field is used to enter the discharge coefficient for a radial gate opening. The discharge coefficient typically ranges from 0.6 to 0.8, depending on gate geometry and flow conditions.
  • Trunnion exponent
    This entry field is used to enter the trunnion height exponent, which is used in the radial gate equation. By default, the software uses a value of 0.
  • Opening exponent
    This entry field is used to enter the gate opening exponent, which is used in the radial gate equation. By default, the software uses a value of 1.
  • Head exponent
    This entry field is used to enter the upstream energy head exponent, which is used in the radial gate equation. By default, the software uses a value of 0.5.
  • Trunnion height
    This entry field is used to enter the height from the spillway crest to the trunnion pivot point. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to measure the radical gate trunnion height above the gate sill from the SA/2D connection plot.
  • Submerged orifice coefficient
    This entry field is used to enter an orifice coefficient, which will be used for the gate opening when the gate becomes more than 80 percent submerged. Between 67 percent and 80 percent submerged, the software uses a transition between the fully submerged orifice equation and the free flow gate equations. When the flow is less than 67 percent submerged, the software uses the free flow gate equations. Clicking the […] button will display a lookup dialog box containing orifice discharge coefficients.
    SA2D-Connection-Data-Command-Img-18.png

Weir Flow Over Gate Sill (Gate Out of Water)

If a gate is opened to the point where the top of the gate is no longer touching the water (or if an open-air overflow gate is being used), then the flow through the gate is modeled as weir flow. The software will automatically transition from gate flow to weir flow when the upstream head is between 1.0 to 1.1 times the height of the gate opening. Note that this section is not available when the user has selected the User Defined Curves gate type in the Type dropdown combo box of the Gate Definition section.

SA2D-Connection-Data-Command-Img-21.png

The following entries are required to model the weir flow through the gate opening:

  • Weir Shape
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the spillway shape at the overflow weir. The following options are provided: Broad Crested, Sharp Crested, and Ogee.
    SA2D-Connection-Data-Command-Img-22.png

Based on the weir shape selected, the contents of the Weir Flow Over Gate Sill (Gate Out of Water) section will change to show the required information for that weir shape.

  • Weir coefficient
    This entry field allows the user to specify the discharge coefficient to be used in the weir flow equation for overflow. Note that different coefficients are used depending on units, such as US Units or Metric (SI) Units. Clicking the […] button will display a lookup dialog box containing weir coefficients.
    Weir coefficient dialog box

If the user has selected the Ogee as weir shape, two additional entries: Spillway approach height and Design energy head are displayed in the Weir Flow Over Gate Sill (Gate Out of Water) section.

Spillway approach height and Design energy head parameters

Note that the [Compute] button adjacent to the Weir coefficient entry field is used to compute the weir coefficient based on spillway approach height and design energy head.

  • Spillway approach height
    This entry field is used to define the height, which is equal to the elevation of the spillway crest minus the mean elevation of the ground just upstream of the spillway. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to measure the spillway approach height above the spillway crest from the SA/2D connection plot.
  • Design energy head
    This entry field is used to define the height, which is equal to the energy grade line elevation minus the elevation of the spillway crest. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to measure the design energy head above the gate sill from the SA/2D connection plot.

If the user has selected the Sharp Crested as weir shape, the following entries will be displayed in the Weir Flow Over Gate Sill (Gate Out of Water) section.

Weir Shape-Sharp Crested shaped weir
  • Weir method
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the weir method. The following options are provided: Weir Coefficient, Rehbock Equation, and Kindsvater-Carter Equation.
    SA2D-Connection-Data-Command-Img-26.png

Based on the weir method selected, the contents of the Weir Flow Over Gate Sill (Gate Out of Water) section will change to show the required information for that weir method.

If the Weir Coefficient option is selected, the user is required to enter a weir coefficient in the Weir coefficient entry field that will be used for weir flow through the gate, for all head ranges.

If the Kindsvater-Carter Equation option is selected, the user is required to enter a spillway approach height in the Spillway approach height entry field. In addition, the Weir coefficient(L/b) dropdown combo box allows the user to select which form of the Kindsvater-Carter equation will be used to compute the weir coefficient. The form of the Kindsvater-Carter equation is based on selecting one of eleven equations that are based on varying L/b, where L is the width of the gate opening, and b is the top width of the approaching water upstream of the gate. If more than one gate is defined at a particular opening, the user must figure out an average approach width for the flow going to each gate.

Sharp Crested shaped weir


If the Rehbock Equation is selected, the user is required to enter a spillway approach height in the Spillway approach height entry field, and the weir coefficient is then computed with the Rehbock equation. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to measure the spillway approach height above the spillway crest from the SA/2D connection plot.

Weir method-Rehbock Equation

User Defined Gate Performance Curves

This section is used to define user-defined gate performance curves. Note that this section is only available when the user has selected User Defined Curves gate type in the Type dropdown combo box of the Gate Definition section. Otherwise, this section is unavailable.

SA2D-Connection-Data-Command-Img-29.png

The following entry is provided:

  • Select curve set
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select a gate performance curve set for the selected gate group. Each curve set represents the headwater versus flow relationship for a single gate opening. When two or more identical gates exist in a group, the same curve set is applied to each gate. Note that user-defined gate curves represent headwater-only control and do not include downstream tailwater effects. To include tailwater influence, a full family of rating curves (headwater, tailwater, and flow) must be defined for each possible gate opening.

    Clicking the [Define] button adjacent to the dropdown combo box displays the User Defined Gate Performance Curves dialog box, which allows the user to create or edit curve sets.
User Defined Gate Performance Curves dialog box

In the above dialog box, the Performance curve dropdown combo box lists all curve sets defined in the current scenario. Click the edit option (i.e., the pencil icon) to edit the curve set name. Click the [New] button to create a new curve set. Click the [Copy] button to copy the existing curve set along with its associated data to a new curve set. Click the [Delete] button to delete the selected curve set.

Under the Performance Curve Set Data section, the Headwater Elev entry defines the headwater elevations of the gate. The Gate Opening entry defines the gate openings for which performance curves are specified. The Flow values represent the discharge for each combination of gate opening and headwater elevation.

The Performance Curve Plot provides a graphical representation of headwater elevation versus flow. It updates dynamically as data are entered, allowing users to visualize gate performance behavior.

Outlet Rating Curve

This panel allows the user to define and manage rating curves for the selected SA/2D connection structure.

Outlet Rating Curve Panel

Rating Curve Specifications

This section is used to define general specifications for the diversion rating curve. The following entries are provided:

  • Rating curve ID
    This entry field allows the user to specify a name for an outlet rating curve.
  • Outlet flow horizontal station
    This entry field is used to define the specific horizontal position or stationing along the outlet structure where flow measurements or ratings are obtained. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to select the horizontal station from the connection weir on the Map View.
  • Outlet width (perpendicular to flow)
    This entry field is used to define the width of the outlet structure perpendicular to the flow direction. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to measure the outlet width from the connection weir on the Map View.
  • Inlet location
    This read-only field allows the user to select the inlet location where the water is coming from. Clicking the [Pick] button allows the user to select the inlet location from the Map View. Clicking the [Clear] button allows the user to delete the inlet location.
  • Outlet location
    This read-only field allows the user to select the outlet location where the water exits. Clicking the [Pick] button allows the user to select the outlet location from the Map View. Clicking the [Clear] button allows the user to delete the outlet location.
  • Outlet flow based upon upstream
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of diversion rating curve data that is to be defined. The following options are provided:
    • Water Surface Elevation
    • Flow

Note that based on the option selected, the contents of the table contained in a Diversion Rating Curve Data section will change.

Diversion Rating Curve Data

This section contains a table to define diversion rating curve data for the SA/2D connection. The following columns are provided in the table:

  • Upstream Reference Water Surface Elev
    This column is used to specify the water surface elevation at a reference location upstream of a connection structure.
  • Outlet Flow
    This column is used to specify the flow values (discharge) for the corresponding diverted flow through the SA/2D connection structure.

Note that if the Flow option is selected in the Outlet flow based upon upstream dropdown combo box of the Rating Curve Specifications section, the following table will be displayed:

Outlet flow based upon upstream dropdown Flow option
  • Channel Flow
    This column is used to specify the flow values for the channel or outlet structure being analyzed.
  • Diverted Flow
    This column defines the corresponding diverted flow through the SA/2D connection structure for the diversion rating curve.

Outlet Rating Curve Plot

This section displays a plot of the user-defined diversion rating curve. This visual representation allows the user to assess the behavior of the curve and make adjustments if necessary. Note that the rating curve axes change based upon the type of rating curve selected.

Outlet Time Series

This panel allows the user to specify a name for an outlet time series to be used as an additional outlet through the SA/2D connection structure. Then, a flow hydrograph can be specified for the SA/2D connection structure in the Unsteady Flow Data command. The flow time series will be labeled in the output based on the user-entered name for the outlet time series. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to use the Unsteady Flow Data command.

Outlet Time Series Panel

Time Series Specifications

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Time series ID
    This entry field is used to define an ID for the outlet time series.
  • Horizontal station for outlet flow
    This entry field is used to select the horizontal station for an outlet discharge location on the weir geometry. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to interactively select an outlet discharge location from the Map View.
  • Outlet width (perpendicular to flow)
    This entry field is used to enter the outlet width from the connection weir. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to interactively measure the outlet width from the Map View.
  • Outlet location
    The user can click the [Pick] button to select the outlet location downstream of the weir geometry from the Map View.

The [Delete All] button can be used to clear all the data specified within this section.

Dam Breach

This panel allows the user to define dam breach specifications for the selected SA/2D connection. Dam breach data are only used for unsteady flow models and are ignored in steady flow models. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to define dam break data using the Dam Breach panel.

Dam Breach Panel

Linear Routing

This panel allows the user to define linear routing specifications for the selected storage area. Note that this panel is only available when Linear Routing option is selected in the Structure type dropdown combo box of the Connection Structure section under the Connection Data panel. Otherwise, this panel is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Linear Routing Panel

Note that the Linear Routing panel can only be used to connect two storage areas.

The following entries are provided:

  • Positive flow direction routing coefficient
    This entry field defines the linear routing coefficient for the positive flow direction (in the defined flow direction of the storage area connection).
  • Negative flow direction routing coefficient
    This entry field defines the linear routing coefficient for the negative flow direction (opposite to the defined flow direction of the storage area connection).
  • Overflow crest elevation
    This entry field defines the minimum elevation of the spillway crest for flow to transfer from one storage area to the other. If both storage areas’ water surface elevations are below this crest elevation, then no flow is transferred between storage areas.

Geometry Adjustment

This panel allows the user to adjust the geometry for the selected SA/2D connection.

Geometry adjustment panel

Adjust Storage Area Connection Geometry

This section defines the type of adjustment to be applied to the SA/2D connection geometry. The following radio button options are provided:

  • No change
    On selecting this option, no change will be found for the SA/2D connection geometry. Note that this radio button option is selected by default.
  • Adjust elevations
    On selecting this option, the entry field next to this option gets enabled, which allows the user to adjust the SA/2D connection geometry elevations by the defined amount.
  • Adjust stations
    On selecting this option, the entry field next to this option gets enabled, which allows the user to adjust the SA/2D connection geometry stations by the defined amount.
  • Shift stationing
    On selecting this option, the dropdown combo box and entry field next to this option get enabled, which allows the user to shift the SA/2D connection 1geometry stationing using an existing reference point. The user can select the corresponding reference point from the dropdown combo box and then assign the station to the reference point. The dropdown combo box contains the following entries:
    • Leftmost Station
    • Thalweg
    • Rightmost Station

Adjustment Extent

After defining all the required parameters, the user can click the [Apply] button under this section to perform the geometry adjustment to the selected SA/2D connection.

Geometry Point Reduction Panel

This panel allows the user to reduce the redundant geometry points so that the SA/2D connection can be analyzed by HEC-RAS.

Geometry Point Reduction panel

Geometry Point Reduction

The Current number of weir geometry points is a read-only field that shows the total number of geometry points associated with the selected SA/2D connection.

The Reduce number of weir geometry points to entry field allows the user to enter the target numeric value (geometry points) for the SA/2D connection. By default, this entry will show 490. However, the user can enter a different value if desired.

Clicking the [Preview] button causes the software to generate a preview of the defined geometry point reduction.

Reduction Extent

This section allows the user to perform the reduction of geometry points. The Apply reduction to dropdown combo box allows the user to specify the river regions for which the ground geometry point reduction should be applied. The user can choose from the following dropdown options:

  • Current SA/2D Area Connection
  • All SA/2D Area Connection

The user can click the [Apply] button to perform geometry points reduction to the specified SA/2D connection.

Hydraulic Structures › SA/2D Connections

Hydraulic Parameters - Storage Area Connections Command

The Hydraulic Parameters - Storage Area Connections command is used to define the hydraulic parameters that are used for building a family of rating curves for storage area connections. This data is only used for unsteady flow simulations and is ignored for steady flow simulations.

Follow the steps below to use the Hydraulic Parameters - Storage Area Connections command:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, click the Rating Curves – Hydraulic Parameters dropdown menu and select the Hydraulic Parameters - Storage Area Connections command.
    Hydraulic Parameters - Storage Area Connections Analysis ribbon menu command
  2. The Hydraulic Parameters - Storage Area Connections dialog box will be displayed.
    Hydraulic Parameters - Storage Area Connections dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Hydraulic Parameters - Storage Area Connections command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Storage Area Connection

This section is used to select the storage area connection for purposes of defining the hydraulic parameters.

The Storage area connection ID dropdown combo box lists the storage area connections for only those connections that are of the following structure type for the current scenario:

  • Weir
  • Weir and Culverts

The user can select the storage area connection from the dropdown menu or click the […] button to select it from the Map View.

Family of Rating Curve Parameters

This section is used to define the limits of the family of rating curves that are developed for the storage area connection. The following parameters are available:

  • Number of points on free flow curve
    This spin-control defines the number of points to be computed on the free flow curve. By default, the software uses a value of 50. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 10 to 100.
  • Number of submerged curves
    This spin-control defines the number of submerged curves to be computed. By default, the software uses a value of 50. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 10 to 100.
  • Number of points on each submerged curve
    This spin-control defines the number of points to be computed on each of the submerged curves. By default, the software uses a value of 20. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 10 to 50.
  • Apply curve parameters to all storage area connections
    Clicking the [Apply] button causes the above parameter values to be applied to all storage area connections contained in the HEC-RAS current scenario.

Storage Area Connection Parameters

This section defines the parameters for computing the rating curves for the selected storage area connection. The following parameters are available:

  • Maximum headwater elevation
    This entry defines the maximum elevation that the water surface can reach on the upstream side of the storage area connection and is used to create the hydraulic property table. By default, this entry is blank.
  • Maximum tailwater elevation, optional
    This optional entry defines the maximum elevation that the water surface can reach on the downstream side of the storage area connection, a parameter used in creating the hydraulic property table. By default, this entry is blank.
  • Maximum flow, recommended
    This optional (but recommended) entry defines the maximum flow expected at the storage area connection, another parameter used in creating the hydraulic property table. By default, this entry is blank.
Hydraulic Structures › SA/2D Connections

Draw and Assign SA/2D Connections Command

In GeoHECRAS, storage areas or 2D flow area connections are used to link two storage areas together with a hydraulic structure or two 2D flow areas, or a storage area to a 2D flow area. The user can draw storage area or 2D flow area connections interactively on the map view or assign the already imported GIS shapefiles as a storage area or 2D flow area connection. The software allows the user to place a hydraulic structure in the middle of a 2D flow area to control how flow travels from one series of cells to another series of cells. Storage area or 2D flow area connections can consist of a weir and gated spillway, culverts, bridge, just a weir, or linear routing option.

Creating SA/2D Connections

To establish a hydraulic connection between two storage areas, 2D flow areas, or inside a 2D flow area, the Draw SA/2D Connections or Assign SA/2D Connections command can be used. Both commands work similarly.

SA/2D connection dropdown menu

Drawing SA/2D Connections

The Draw SA/2D Connections command allows the user to interactively draw the centerline of the storage area or 2D flow area connections on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw SA/2D Connections command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the SA/2D Connections dropdown menu, and then select the Draw SA/2D Connections command.
    Draw SA/2D connection command
  2. The Draw SA/2D Connections dialog box will be displayed.
    Draw SA/2D connection dialog box

The following sections describe how to draw SA/2D connections and interact with the above dialog box.

SA/2D Connection General Specification

This section is used to specify the storage area or 2D flow area connection ID. The SA/2D connection ID field is used to enter the storage area or 2D flow area connection ID to identify each connection location uniquely. The user can use the Description box to describe the location of the storage area or 2D flow area connection in more detail.

Drawing SA/2D Connection Polyline

The Draw SA/2D Connection Polyline section is used to draw the storage area or 2D flow area connection centerline on the Map View using polylines.

To draw a SA/2D connection polyline, follow the steps below:

  1. Click on the [Draw] button adjacent to the Structure centerline field. Note that the user can use the Create curvilinear polyline checkbox option to make a smooth outline for the drawn polyline.
    [Draw] button
  2. The Draw SA/2D Connections dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user what to do next. The user can then draw polylines on the Map View. While drawing elements, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between the curvilinear and the linear digitizing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about drawing elements on the Map View.
  3. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The software will then return the user to the dialog box, and the status of the Structure centerline read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    Structure centerline read-only field drawn
  4. The Cell spacing along polyline entry represents cell spacing along the storage area or 2D flow area connection polyline. If this entry is left blank, then the cell spacing used in the vicinity of the storage area or 2D flow area connection will be used. By default, the software uses a value of 20 ft. The user can enter a different value or click the […] button to measure the cell spacing from the Map View.
  5. The Relaxed cell spacing in 2D flow area entry represents the cell spacing further away from the storage area or 2D flow area connection polyline. This value should not be the same as the Cell spacing along polyline value, or many cell errors may be introduced along the polyline. Click on the […] button to measure the cell spacing from the Map View.

Extract Weir Crest Geometry

This section allows the user to select the source elevation data for extracting the weir crest geometry. By default, the Extract Weir Crest Geometry section is enabled. If this section is disabled, the software does not extract the weir geometry.

Extract Weir Crest Geometry section

The user can use the Primary and Secondary Elevation Data panels to define the primary and secondary (if available in the project) elevation data sources for extracting the weir crest geometry. Depending upon the elevation data source type that is selected, different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base for information on the types of terrain elevation data that can be used for constructing cross sections.

When a secondary elevation data source is available, the software will form a concave hull around the primary elevation data source to identify its bounds. For locations where elevation data from the primary data source is unavailable, the software will use the elevation data from the secondary data source.

Note that the user cannot utilize the same data source for defining the primary and secondary elevation data.

The user can click the [Swap Sources] button to swap the selected elevation source from primary elevation data to secondary elevation data and vice versa.

Overflow Weir Specifications

The Overflow Weir Specifications section is used to define specifications for the overflow weir.

Overflow Weir Specifications section

Structure Width (Parallel to Flow)

The Structure width (parallel to flow) entry field defines the width of the top of the structure. By default, the software uses a value of 10 ft. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to measure the structure width from the Map View.

Overflow Weir Crest Shape

The Overflow weir crest shape dropdown combo box entry allows the user to specify weir types. Two options are available: Broad Crested and Ogee. The user can choose the weir type that best matches the problem.

If the user selects the Ogee shaped weir, two additional parameters: Spillway approach height and Design energy head are displayed in the Overflow Weir Specifications section.

Overflow weir crest shape - Ogee

Spillway Approach Height

The Spillway approach height entry field is used to define the height which is equal to the elevation of the spillway crest minus the mean elevation of the ground just upstream of the spillway.

Design Energy Head

The Design energy head entry field is used to define the height which is equal to the energy grade line elevation minus the elevation of the spillway crest.

Weir Coefficient (Cd)

The Weir Coefficient (Cd) entry field allows the user to enter a weir coefficient that will be used in the weir computations. Note that different coefficients are used depending on units such as US Units or Metric (SI) Units. By default, the software uses a value of 2.6. Clicking on the […] button will display a lookup dialog box containing weir coefficients.

Weir Coefficients dialog box

Note that if the Ogee shaped weir is selected, the user can compute the weir coefficient based on the approach and design energy head by clicking the [Compute] button.

Compute Flow

The Compute flow dropdown combo box entry allows the user to define the computational method, which can be one of the following:

  • At Each Time Step
  • As Curves (faster)

When the data has been defined in the Draw SA/2D Connections dialog box, click the [Apply] button. The software will then create a connection on the location where the user drew the centerline.

Assigning SA/2D Connections

The Assign SA/2D Connections command allows the user to manually assign polylines as storage areas or 2D flow area connections. To use this command, a polyline that can be selected must already exist on the Map View to represent the storage area or flow area connection.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign SA/2D Connections command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the SA/2D Connections dropdown menu, and then select the Assign SA/2D Connections command.
    Assign SA/2D connection command
  2. The Assign SA/2D Connections dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign SA/2D Connections dialog box
  3. From the Select SA/2D Connection Polyline section, click the [Pick] button.
    [Pick] button
  4. The Assign SA/2D Connections dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user what to do next. The user can then select polylines from the Map View.
  5. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  6. The software will then return the user to the Assign SA/2D Connections dialog box and the Structure centerline read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.
    Structure centerline read-only field selected
  7. The software will now treat the polyline as a storage area or 2D flow area centerline connection. Note that the remaining sections of the Assign SA/2D Connections command are similar to that of the Draw SA/2D Connections command. So, the user can refer to these sections explained above for further information.
  8. When the data has been defined in the Assign SA/2D Connections dialog box, click the [Apply] button. The software will then assign the polyline as a storage area or 2D flow area connection.
Hydraulic Structures › SA/2D Connections

2D Flow Area Connection Issues

A flow area connection can be used to model a hydraulic structure between two adjacent storage areas, a storage area and 2D flow area, two adjacent 2D flow areas or within a single 2D flow area. The flow area connection within a single 2D flow area represents how an internal hydraulic structure allows flow to travel from one set of cells to another set of cells. For example, it can be used to model a roadway crossing in the middle of the 2D flow area, or similarly, represent a dam structure within the 2D flow area.

Dam-structure-within-the-2D-flow-area.png

Example of a 2D flow area connection representing a dam structure with a culvert passing through it.

Mesh Alignment Issues

For an internal 2D flow area connection, there should be a breakline that coincides with the 2D flow area connection alignment. Breaklines are used to force the alignment of the computational cell faces along barriers or other features that can significantly affect the 2D flow. GeoHECRAS software automatically verifies that the 2D mesh aligns with the connection element by automatically inserting a breakline coinciding with the 2D flow area connection alignment. This ensures that cell faces are aligned perpendicular to the flow going over the structure. This prevents flow from leaking through a structure if the 2D cell is large enough that it straddles both the upstream and downstream sides of the structure.

2D-cell-straddling-element.png

Example of 2D cell straddling element, causing the flow to leak through the roadway crossing.

cell-faces-with-the-structure.png

By aligning the cell faces with the structure, the leaking of flow is eliminated.

Partial Cell Face Coverage

If the 2D connection element starts or ends on a partial 2D flow area cell face, then the HEC-RAS preprocessor will report the following error message:

There is an error with the model data. The weir station/elevation extends too far beyond the last face point (face intersection).

This is shown below.

Partial-Cell-Face-Coverage.png

This situation occurs when the 2D connection element does not cover a majority of the 2D cell face. This can cause confusion for the computational engine, since it cannot determine if the flow should be through the 2D connection element or between cell faces. This is shown below.

This-2D-flow-area-connection-will-fail-to-run.png

This 2D flow area connection will fail to run.

Correcting the 2D Flow Area Connection Issue

By extending (or shortening) the 2D connection so that it occupies all (or most) of the cell face, the problem is resolved.

Correcting-the-2D-Flow-Area-Connection-Issue.png

This 2D flow area connection will run.

To edit the 2D flow area connection, select the element and then right-click and choose the Edit Vertices command from the displayed context menu (or press Function Key F4).

2D flow area connection

Next, grab the end vertex and resize the 2D connection so it covers the entire cell face.

2D-connection.png

Then, right-click and choose Done from the context menu. Next, select the 2D connection and again right-click to display the context menu. Then, choose the Extract Weir Crest Geometry command.

Extracting the weir crest geometry

The software will then display the Extract Weir Crest Geometry dialog box, allowing you to select the elevation data sources for extracting the weir crest geometry.

Extract weir crest geometry dialog box

The Primary Elevation Data and Secondary Elevation Data panels are used to define the primary and secondary (if available in the project) elevation data sources for extracting the weir crest geometry. Depending on the selected elevation data source type, the content of these panels changes to specify additional elevation data information.

When a secondary elevation data source is available, the software forms a concave hull around the primary elevation data source. For locations where elevation data from the primary data source are unavailable, the software will use the elevation data from the secondary data source.

Note that the user cannot utilize the same data source for defining the primary and secondary elevation data.

The user can click the [Swap Sources] button to swap the selected elevation source from primary elevation data to secondary elevation data and vice versa.

After clicking the [OK] button, the software will then update the weir crest geometry to occupy the cell face.

2D-flow-area-connections.png

Now the model will run successfully.

Hydraulic Structures › Levees

Levee Breach Modeling

Levees, also known as embankments, are earthen structures built along rivers and coastlines to protect surrounding areas from flooding. While levees provide a vital defense against floods, they are not impervious to failure. Levee breaches can occur due to overtopping, erosion, and internal instability. When a levee breaches, water flows uncontrollably into surrounding areas, causing flooding and potential damage to surrounding areas.

Importance of Levee Breach Modeling

Levee breach modeling is essential for flood risk assessment and mitigation planning. It involves simulating levee failure to predict the extent of flood inundation in downstream areas. Accurate modeling helps emergency planners and engineers evaluate potential impacts and develop effective response strategies.

Defining Levee Structure

In GeoHECRAS, levee breaching can be analyzed by modeling the levee as a lateral structure. When defining a levee, the area behind it should not be included in the main river cross section data. Instead, cross sections stop at the top of the levee. The lateral structure (levee) can be connected to a 2D flow area, a storage area, or another river reach. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to draw lateral structures.

The strategy for modeling the area behind the levee depends on how water behaves during overtopping or a piping breach.

  • 2D Flow Area: Suitable when water follows multiple paths with varying water surface elevations.
  • Storage Area: Suitable when water accumulates behind the levee like a reservoir.
  • Separate River Reach: Suitable when water flows in a defined downstream direction before rejoining the main river.

Entering Levee Breach Data

Levee breach data can be entered in the Levee Breach panel of the Lateral Structure Data dialog box. Levee breach data defines the nature of a breach, including breach location, breach width, breach side slopes, breach height, breach progression (linear or non-linear), breach formation time, and failure mode (overtopping or piping). The shape and progression of a levee breach depend on user-defined inputs such as final bottom width, structure height, and breach formation time. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to enter levee breach data.

Levee Breach Types

In GeoHECRAS, the following types of levee breaches can be defined:

  • Overtopping Failure
  • Piping Failure

Overtopping Failure

Overtopping failure occurs when water exceeds the levee crest and erodes the soil, causing the levee to collapse. This can happen during a flood event when water levels rise above the levee.

Causes of Overtopping Failure

  • High water levels
    When the water rises above the levee, it overtops and erodes the soil.
  • Wind waves
    Wind waves increase the height of the water level at the levee, making it more likely that the levee will be overtopped.
  • Debris accumulation
    Floating debris, such as trees and logs, can accumulate against the levee and increase the height of the water level.

Preventing Overtopping Failure

  • Constructing levees at sufficient elevations
  • Protecting levee surfaces with vegetation or riprap
  • Monitoring for signs of erosion or overtopping

Example: Overtopping Failure Mode

Consider a levee modeled as a lateral structure connected to a storage area to represent the area behind the levee. The user defines the levee by entering a series of station and elevation points that represent the top of the levee profile. This station and elevation data is then used as a weir profile for calculating the amount of water flowing over the levee. For example, the image below shows the levee modeled as a lateral structure. As the levee overtops and/or breaches, the storage area fills up until it reaches the same elevation as the water in the river.

Lateral Structure Data Dialog Box

The levee information is entered as station and elevation data in the Overflow Weir panel of the Lateral Structure dialog box. The station elevation data represents the top of the levee. The levee information is entered from the upstream to the downstream end of the levee. For example, the information entered for the overflow weir is shown below.

Overflow Weir Panel of the Lateral Structure Dialog Box

The following information must be entered in the Overflow Weir panel:

  • Station and elevation data representing the top of the levee
  • Headwater distance from the upstream end of the levee to the nearest upstream cross section
  • Width of the levee structure
  • Weir flow reference elevation
  • Weir crest shape
  • Weir coefficient (Cd)

Once the physical data are entered, the Levee Breach panel of the Lateral Structure dialog box is used to define breach parameters. For overtopping levee failure mode, consider a breach with the following parameters:

  • Breach centerline station: 211.29 ft
  • Final breach bottom width: 320.00 ft
  • Final breach bottom elevation: 732.66 ft
  • Formation time: 0.50 hours
  • Breach trigger elevation: 739.29 ft
Levee Breach Panel of the Lateral Structure Dialog Box - Overtopping Mode

In the case of linear breach progression, the breach will start as a tiny trapezoid (or rectangle if side slopes are zero) at the top of the weir based on the center station. If the breach progression is non-linear, the horizontal growth will be adjusted as needed. Progression in the vertical direction will match the horizontal growth.

Piping Failure

Piping failure results from seepage erosion, forming subsurface channels that transport soil particles through porous media. Piping failure begins on the land-facing side as water pressure forces a slit to develop, eventually eroding backward under the levee and causing collapse.

Causes of Piping Failure

  • High hydraulic gradients
    High hydraulic gradients are the force of water pushing through the soil. When the hydraulic gradient is too high, it can erode the soil grains and create a hole in the levee.
  • Fine-grained soils
    Fine-grained soils, such as clays, are more susceptible to piping than coarse-grained soils. This is because fine-grained soils have more surface area, which makes them more vulnerable to erosion.
  • Wetted perimeter
    The wetted perimeter is the length of the levee that is in contact with water. The longer the wetted perimeter, the more vulnerable the levee is to piping.
  • Levee seepage
    Seepage is the movement of water through the soil. If there is too much seepage through a levee, it can increase the risk of piping.

Preventing Piping Failure

  • Designing levees with a low hydraulic gradient
  • Using coarse-grained soils to reduce piping susceptibility
  • Minimizing the wetted perimeter
  • Managing seepage through drainage pipes or geosynthetics

Example: Piping Failure Mode

For piping levee failure mode, users input breach progression data similar to overtopping levee failure mode with additional parameters for internal erosion. Consider a breach with the following parameters:

  • Breach centerline station: 211.29 ft
  • Final breach bottom width: 320.00 ft
  • Final breach bottom elevation: 732.66 ft
  • Formation time: 0.50 hours
  • Piping coefficient: 0.5
  • Initial piping elevation: 736.29 ft
  • Breach trigger elevation: 739.29 ft
Levee Breach Panel of the Lateral Structure Dialog Box - Piping Mode

In the case of linear breach progression, the breach will start as a tiny square (or rectangle) based on the center station and initial piping elevation. If the breach progression is non-linear, the piping breach would be a rectangle that grows vertically.

Estimating Levee Breach Parameters

Estimating the location, dimensions, and development time of a levee breach is crucial to assess the potential risks associated with levee failure. While breach parameters can vary for each levee, engineers typically use standard estimation methods to:

  • Predict peak flow from a breach
  • Assess potential warning times for downstream communities
  • Refine breach estimates using geotechnical analyses and site-specific data

In any levee safety study, it is important to consider a range of parameter estimates for the breach size and development time for each failure event. After that, sensitivity analyses of the breach parameters should be conducted to determine their effect on the outflow hydrograph, downstream water levels, and evacuation planning.

Output for Levee Breach Analysis

GeoHECRAS provides various plots and tables to evaluate breach analysis results, such as profile plots, lateral structure hydrographs, and storage area hydrographs. These plots can be animated on a time step by time step basis to visualize the flood wave propagation.

An example of a profile plot of a levee breach is shown below. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to view water surface profile plots.

Profile Plot Dialog Box

The user can view hydrographs at any location where hydrograph output is required. These hydrographs represent the flow leaving the levee and subsequent flow at downstream locations as the flood wave moves through the river system. The example image below shows a series of hydrographs generated for the modeled levee breaches.

Steady and Flow Hydrograph Dialog Box

The user can also plot the stage and flow hydrographs for the storage area. This allows the user to easily see the amount of flow coming into and out of the storage area, and the change in water surface elevation.

Steady and Flow Hydrograph Dialog Box

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to view the stage and flow hydrographs.

In addition to the graphical plot, users can access tabular results for lateral structures, selecting a specific timeline for detailed analysis by selecting a specific profile. The profiles are labeled by the date and time they occurred in the model simulation. Refer to this link to learn how to view detailed hydraulic information on the lateral structure.

Lateral Structure Output Dialog Box
Hydraulic Structures › Levees

Defining Levees in HEC-RAS

HEC‑RAS allows the user to define levees to constrain the flow to the main channel by defining a left and/or right levee station and corresponding elevation at a cross section.

FEMA 17th Street Canal levees in Louisiana

HEC‑RAS Levee Behavior

Levee locations must be defined explicitly or HEC‑RAS assumes that water can go anywhere within the cross section.

Cross Section with High Bank wo Levee

When levees are defined, water cannot go left of the left levee station or right of the right levee station until the corresponding levee elevation is exceeded.

Cross Section with High Bank Levee

The user may want to add levees to a cross section in order to see what effect a levee will have on the water surface. A simple way to do this is to set a levee station and elevation that is above the existing ground. If a levee elevation is placed above the existing geometry of the cross section, then a vertical wall is placed at that station up to the defined levee elevation.

Cross Section wo High Bank w Levee

Additional wetted perimeter is included when water comes into contact with the levee wall.

How to Define Levees?

The user can use the Cross Section Data dialog box to manually define the levees by selecting horizontal stations and elevations for each of the levees. The user can select the horizontal stations from either the Map View or from the displayed cross section plot.

Levees are defined in the Cross Section Data dialog box, in the Levees panel.

Cross Section Data dialog box Levee Panel

Alternatively, the user can specify that the left and/or right bank stations should act as levees. In that way, water is contained within the channel.

Levee Bank Stations

As another option, the user can utilize GIS polylines to define levees. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Assign Entities menu item and then choose the Assign Levees command. This will display the Assign Levees dialog box.

Assign Levees dialog box

From this dialog box, the user can select GIS polylines to define the levees.

Hydraulic Structures › Pump Stations

Pump Station Modeling

Introduction to Pump Station

Pump stations are used to pump water from one location to another. Some common applications of pump stations are as follows:

  • Pumping water from a water source such as a river, pond, etc.
  • Lifting water (high quantity, low pressure) from a well.
  • Pumping water into a supply system, elevated water tank, or water tower.

In pump station(s), the number of pumps and associated capacity should be selected to provide head capacity characteristics (elevation of a free surface of the water) corresponding to the wastewater quantity fluctuations. This can be accomplished by preparing pump/pipeline system head-capacity curves showing all conditions of head and capacity under which the pumps will be required to operate.

The number of pumps to be installed in the pump station depends largely on the station capacity and range of flow. In small pump stations, two pumps are customarily installed, with each unit having the capacity to meet the maximum influent rate. For larger pump stations, the size and the number of pumps should be selected so that the flow range can be met without frequent starting and stopping of pumps and without requiring excessive wet-well storage.

The pumps are designed to run alternately to keep wear and tear evenly distributed. Additional pumps may be needed to provide intermediate capacities that are better matched to typical daily flows. Another option is to provide flow flexibility with variable-speed pumps. Usually, the single pump peak flow approach is most suitable for stations with relatively high head-losses. Parallel pumping is not as effective for such stations because two pumps operating together yield only slightly higher flows than one pump. Parallel peak pumping is typically used for large pump stations with relatively flat system head curves.

Advantages of Pump Station

The following are some of the advantages of pump stations:

  • A pump station offers convenience when installing a wastewater management system and can cut construction costs.
  • Pump stations are fitted with remote monitoring systems, which keep operators updated on status of operations.
  • Wastewater can be pumped automatically without human contact, eliminating health risks.
  • Different sizes of pumps are available for domestic applications and commercial applications.
  • The intake of the pumps is often wide to prevent obstructions.

Modeling a Pump Station

Pump stations can be connected between the following elements:

  • Two storage areas
  • A storage area and a river
  • A storage area and a 2D flow area
  • Two 2D flow areas
  • A 1D river and a 2D flow area
  • River reaches

In GeoHECRAS, the Pump Station Data command allows users to add pump stations and edit pump data in a project. The Pump Station Data dialog box contains the following data panels that are used to define or modify the pump station(s) data:

  • Connection Data
    This data panel contains the pump connection details, including the source and destination of water being pumped, the pump on/off reference location, and an optional maximum elevation along the pump line.
  • Performance Data
    This data panel defines the pump performance curves for the defined pumps. In this panel, the user can define different pump groups at a pump station, and each of these pump groups can have up to ten identical pumps. Also, each pump can have its own on and off trigger elevation.
  • Advanced Control Rules
    This data panel specifies the rules that override the previously defined pump performance and control data.

To learn more about the Pump Station Data command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

One common practical usage of pump stations is pumping water stored behind a levee (interior sump) into the main river. An example schematic diagram of an interior ponding area behind a levee is shown below. Note that the pump is connected from the storage area to a river station at the downstream end of the levee.

Schematic diagram - Interior ponding area behind a levee

In the above example, a lateral structure was drawn to represent the levee. This structure has a gravity draining culvert with a flap gate. The flap gate only allows water to drain from the storage area to the river. Additionally, a pump station is included to pump flows over the levee during a rainfall event. The pump station was drawn using the Pump Station Data command and the connection from the storage area to the cross section at river station 5.39 was defined in the Connection Data panel.

Connection Data panel

A hydrograph is attached to the upstream end of the river reach, which represents the incoming flood wave to this reach. A lateral inflow hydrograph is attached to the storage area, which represents the local runoff collecting behind the levee. The pumps are used to pump water from the storage area, over the levee, to the river. The top of the levee is at an elevation of 220 feet. Therefore, the pump station is constantly pumping to a head of 220 feet.

In the Performance Data panel, one pump group (Group #1) has been defined with three identical pumps (Pump #1, Pump #2, Pump #3) as shown below.

Performance Data panel

These pumps are of the same size and flow capacity. However, each pump has a different on and off trigger elevation. The pump efficiency curve is used for all three of the pumps.

Two rules: Always Apply and Time & Water Surface Elevation Trigger have been applied to this pump station using the Advanced Control Rules data panel.

The Always Apply rule has an absolute maximum pump flow of 800 cfs and a minimum flow of 1cfs for the entire pump station.

Advanced Control Rules data panel

The Time & Water Surface Elevation Trigger rule has a maximum flow of 700 cfs which is applied only between 12 April 0000 and 18 April 0000, but only if the water surface at storage area Bayou is greater than 209. Also, the second part of this rule sets a minimum flow for the same time period, but only if the stage at storage area Bayou is less than 206.5.

Time & Water Surface Elevation Trigger rule

Viewing Pump Station Output

After running the analysis, the pump station output results can be viewed in the Stage and Flow Hydrographs dialog box. Selecting the Pump Stations option under the Type menu will display the pump station’s stage and flow plots as shown below.

Stage and Flow Hydrographs dialog box - Pump station output

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about Stage and Flow Hydrographs command.

In the pump stations plot, the stage for the tailwater location (Stage TW) is a constant 220 ft. This is due to the fact that the pump is constantly pumping over the levee at elevation 220. The stage at the headwater location (Stage HW) is the water surface elevations in the storage area. The storage area elevation starts at an elevation of 205 ft., goes up to around 206.6, and then back down to around 205.1. The flow through the pumps was zero until an elevation of 206 was reached within the storage area, which triggered the first pump. The second pump turned on when the storage area reached elevation 206.2, and the third at elevation 206.5. On the falling side of the hydrograph, the pumps began to turn off as the stage went down in the storage area. The stage and net inflow to the storage area are shown below.

Stage and Flow Hydrographs dialog box - Storage area output

Here, the net inflow represents all the inflows minus the outflows at each time step.

Pump Station Performance

The overall performance of the pump station depends on the performance of its pumps. All pumps have the following four common performance characteristics:

  • Capacity
    Capacity or flow rate is the quantity of liquid pumped per unit of time.
  • Head
    Head is the energy supplied to the wastewater per unit weight, typically expressed as feet of water.
  • Power
    Power is the energy consumed by a pump per unit time, typically measured as kilowatt-hours.
  • Overall Efficiency
    Overall efficiency is the ratio of useful hydraulic work performed to the actual work input. Efficiency reflects the pump’s relative power losses (i.e., friction, bends, losses, etc) and is usually measured as a percentage of the applied power. The pump efficiency plot uses the static heads versus flow rate curves as shown below.
    Pump station performance curve
    Here, the head represents the total head in the system, which is normally the difference in the water surface elevations between the from and to locations. In general, the pump performance curves are used to define and compare the operating characteristics of a given pump and to identify the best combination of performance characteristics under which the pump station will operate under typical conditions.
Hydraulic Structures › Pump Stations

Pump Station Data Command

Pump stations are used to pump water from one location to another. In GeoHECRAS, the Pump Station Data command allows users to add pump stations and edit pump data in a project. Pump stations can be used to pump water between river reaches, storage areas, and 2D flow areas.

To define a pump station in a HEC-RAS project, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Other Data dropdown menu and then select the Pump Station Data command.
    Pump Station Data command
  2. The Pump Station Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Pump Station Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Pump Station Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Pump Station

The Select Pump Station section allows the user to select, add, copy, and delete pump stations. To add a new pump station, click the [New] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed on the status line, informing the user what to do next. Within the Map View, click on the location where you want to locate a pump station and the software will add a pump station at that location. The Pump Station Data dialog box will be redisplayed. Next, enter the pump station name in the Pump station entry and click the [Accept changes] button.

[Accept changes] button

To select an existing pump station from the Map View, click the […] button adjacent to the Pump station entry. The dialog box will temporarily disappear. Select the pump station on the Map View by clicking on it. The software will return to the dialog box. Alternatively, the user can select the pump station by double-clicking on the pump on the Map View, triggering the Pump Station Data dialog box to be displayed. Or the user can select the pump station from the Pump station dropdown combo box entry.

Pump Station Specifications

The following sections describe the pump station. Click on the dropdown selector at the Pump Station Specifications entry to display the various data panels that define the pump.

Pump Station Specifications section

Connection Data

The Connection Data panel contains details about the pump connection, including where the water is being pumped from and to, the pump on/off reference location, and an optional maximum elevation set point along the pump line.

Connection Data panel

Pump From Location

This section specifies the location where the pump station is pumping from. Select the source type from the Pump from location type dropdown combo box. Based on the selected type, additional data is used to define the source location.

Pump From Location section

Pump To Location

This section specifies the location where the pump station is pumping to. Select the target type from the Pump to location type dropdown combo box. Based upon the selected type, additional data is used to define the target location.

Pump To Location section

Pump On/Off Reference Location (Optional)

This section specifies the monitoring location that is used to determine when the pump should be on or off. The Pump on/off location type dropdown combo box can be used to select the reference type. Based upon the selected type, additional data is used to define the reference location.

Pump On/Off Reference Location (Optional) section

Additional Pump Parameters

This section allows an optional highest elevation to be defined along the pump line. This is useful when defining a model where water is pumped over the top of a levee, and the water surface elevations of the Pump From and Pump To locations do not quantify the required head elevation to pump water over the top of a levee.

Additional Pump Parameters section

Performance Data

The Performance Data panel is used to define the pump performance curves for the defined pumps.

Performance Data panel

Pump Definition

This section allows the user to define multiple pump groups, allowing similar pumps to be grouped together. In that way, the identification of sets of pumps and the specific control of them is more clearly defined.

Specify a group ID in the Pump group ID dropdown combo box. By default, the pump groups are named Group #1, Group #2, Group #3, etc., but can be changed by the user.

Pump Definition section

The Pump spin-up time and Pump spin-down time entries define the time required (in minutes) to turn a pump on and off. By default, pumps turn on and off instantly. In the real world, however, it takes some time for a pump to start up and shut down. In addition, if a pump abruptly turns on or off, a numerical shock in the flow computations might occur and the model may fail to converge to a valid solution. Therefore, it is recommended that a reasonable time-period be defined in which the pump transitions from zero flow to full capacity and transitions from full capacity to zero capacity.

The Pump group biased to ON at the start of simulation checkbox is used to default the selected pump group to an “On State” when the reference water surface is between the defined on/off elevations.

Pump Head Efficiency Specifications

This section contains a table listing pump head versus flow rate. The pump head is the difference in water surface elevation between the Pump From and Pump To locations.

Pump Head Efficiency Specifications section

The user can visually inspect the pump performance graph showing flow rate and pump head in the Pump Head Efficiency Curves plot.

Pump Head Efficiency Curves plot

Pump On/Off Operational Specifications

This section controls the operation of the defined pump. The provided table is used to specify the water surface elevations when a pump is to be turned on or off. Note that the defined pump on elevation (WS Elev On) must be higher than the defined pump off elevation (WS Elev Off).

Pump On/Off Operational Specifications section

Advanced Control Rules

The Advanced Control Rules panel is used to specify rules that override the previously defined pump performance and control data.

Advanced Control Rules panel

This section allows the user to define and set multiple rules for controlling the pumps. These rules are applied as per their listing order in the Defined Rules section. The user can reorder, copy, and delete rules. Depending upon the rule selected, different options are provided to specify the details of the selected rule.

Hydraulic Structures › Gates

Elevation Controlled Gates

The Elevation Controlled Gates is a type of boundary condition that allows the user to adjust the opening and closing of gates based on the water surface elevation at a target location. These gates are commonly used in dams, spillways, flood control channels, and other hydraulic structures where precise water level management is critical. To learn more about boundary conditions, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

In GeoHECRAS software, the user can define the boundary condition data for controlling gate operations in the Elevation Controlled Gates dialog box. This dialog box can be displayed from the Unsteady Flow Data command. To learn more about the Unsteady Flow Data command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Note: In order to use the Elevation Controlled Gates boundary condition, the user must define the gate for the inline structure, lateral structure, or SA/2D connection in the model.

Follow the steps below to use the Elevation Controlled Gates dialog box:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Unsteady Flow Data command.
    Unsteady Flow Data command
  2. The Unsteady Flow Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Unsteady Flow Data dialog box
  3. In the Boundary Condition column dropdown combo box, select the Elevation Controlled Gates boundary condition type.
    Boundary Condition column dropdown combo box
  4. In the Boundary Details column, click on the [Define] button.
    Boundary Details column
  5. The Elevation Controlled Gates dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Elevation Controlled Gates dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the Elevation Controlled Gates dialog box.

Gate Group Selection

This section allows the user to define both the name of the gate group and the reference used for controlling the gate operations (opening and closing of gates).

This section requires the following data:

  • Gate group ID
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the gate group ID defined in the current scenario.
  • Gate control reference
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the reference used to control the opening and closing of gates. The following options are available in this dropdown combo box:
    Gate control reference dropdown combo box
    1. Upstream WSEL (default) - Control gate operations based on the upstream water surface elevation.
    2. Location - Control gate operations based on the water surface elevation at a user-defined cross section or storage area.
    3. Stage Difference - Control gate operations based on the difference in stage between any two user-defined locations.

Upstream Water Surface Elevation Reference

This section allows the user to control the opening and closing of gates based on the water surface elevation upstream of the structure (i.e., inline structure, lateral structure, etc.). Note that this section is enabled when Upstream WSEL is selected in the Gate control reference dropdown combo box of the Gate Group Selection section. Otherwise, this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Upstream Water Surface Elevation Reference section

This section requires the following data:

  • Upstream WSEL when gate starts to open
    This entry field allows the user to define the water surface elevation upstream of the structure at which the gate will begin to open.
  • Upstream WSEL when gate starts to close
    This entry field allows the user to define the water surface elevation upstream of the structure at which the gate will begin to close.

Location Reference

This section allows the user to control the opening and closing of gates based on the water surface elevation at a user-defined cross section or storage area. Note that this section is enabled when the Location is selected in the Gate control reference dropdown combo box of the Gate Group Selection section. Otherwise, this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Location Reference section

This section requires the following data:

  • River station
    This radio button option allows the user to define the river, corresponding reach, and river station (cross section ID). The user can select the river, reach, and river station (cross section ID) from the dropdown combo boxes next to this option.
  • Storage area
    This radio button option allows the user to define the storage area. The user can select the storage area from the dropdown combo box next to this option.
  • Reference WSEL when gate starts to open
    This entry field allows the user to define the reference WSEL at a user-specified cross section or storage area at which the gate will begin to open.
  • Reference WSEL when gate starts to close
    This entry field allows the user to define the reference WSEL at a user-specified cross section or storage area at which the gate will begin to close.

Stage Difference Reference (First Minus Second)

This section allows the user to control the opening and closing of gates based on the difference in stage between any two user-defined reference locations. Note that this section is enabled when the Stage Difference is selected in the Gate control reference dropdown combo box of the Gate Group Selection section. Otherwise, this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Stage Difference Reference (First Minus Second) section

This section requires the following data:

  • First reference elevation
    This subsection allows the user to define the first reference elevation. The following options are provided:
    1. River station
      This radio button option allows the user to define the river, corresponding reach, and river station (cross section ID). The user can select the river, reach, and river station (cross section ID) from the dropdown combo boxes next to this option.
    2. Storage area
      This radio button option allows the user to define the storage area. The user can select the storage area from the dropdown combo box next to this option.
  • Second reference elevation
    This subsection allows the user to define the second reference elevation. The following options are provided:
    1. River station
      This radio button option allows the user to define the river, corresponding reach, and river station (cross section ID). The user can select the river, reach, and river station (cross section ID) from the dropdown combo boxes next to this option.
    2. Storage area
      This radio button option allows the user to define the storage area. The user can select the storage area from the dropdown combo box next to this option.
  • Stage difference when gate starts to open
    This entry field allows the user to define the stage difference (the difference in water levels between the upstream and downstream of the gate) at which the gate will begin to open.
  • Stage difference when gate starts to close
    This entry field allows the user to define the stage difference at which the gate will begin to close.

Gate Group Opening Specifications

This section allows the user to define the specifications of the gate group.

Gate Group Opening Specifications section

This section requires the following data:

  • Gate opening rate
    This entry field allows the user to define the gate opening rate to control how fast the gates can move.
  • Gate closing rate
    This entry field allows the user to define the gate closing rate to control how fast the gates can move.
  • Maximum gate opening height
    This entry field allows the user to define the maximum height up to which the gate can be opened.
  • Minimum gate opening height
    This entry field allows the user to define the minimum height up to which the gate can be opened.
  • Initial gate opening height
    This entry field allows the user to define the initial height of the gate opening. This height will be used during the initial backwater computation. Note that this entry field cannot be left blank.
Hydraulic Structures › Flow Training Structures & Pilot Channels

Pilot Channels Command

The Pilot Channels command allows the user to define a pilot channel along the river reach. Pilot channels are used for unsteady flow modeling. In order to stabilize unsteady flow models, placing a thin pilot channel along the river reach helps the model to converge to a stable solution. A pilot channel acts as a cushion of water during the computations, greatly speeding up the unsteady flow computations. The user can graphically adjust the pilot channel in the river profile view by selecting the region to apply the pilot channel cut along the river reach. This is helpful when the channel bottom is highly irregular along the river reach. Creating a uniform pilot channel slope along the river reach tends to dampen out the effects of the channel bottom irregularities.

Follow the steps below to use the Pilot Channels command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Cross Sections dropdown menu and then choose the Pilot Channels command.
    Pilot Channels command from the Cross Sections dropdown of Input ribbon menu
  2. The Pilot Channels dialog box will be displayed.
    Pilot Channels dialog box

The following sections describe the Pilot Channels command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting River Reach

The Select River Reach section allows the user to select the river and the reach for defining the pilot channels.

Note that if a river reach has been preselected from the Map View prior to running this command, then the selected river reach will be displayed in the River name and Reach name dropdown combo boxes.

If the model contains a single river and reach, then it will automatically be selected in the River name and Reach name dropdown combo boxes. If the model contains multiple rivers and reaches, then the user can select the desired river and the reach from the River name and Reach name dropdown combo boxes.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the river and the reach from the Map View. Clicking on the [Pick] button causes the Pilot Channels dialog box to temporarily disappear. The software will then prompt the user to select the river reach from the Map View. After selecting a river reach, the Pilot Channels dialog box will be redisplayed with the river reach shown as selected. The selected river reach is highlighted on the Map View. To abort the selection process, the user can press the [Esc] key or right-click and select Cancel from the displayed context menu.

In addition, a graphical plotting displaying a longitudinal view of the river reach and the pilot channels along the river reach is provided in this section.

Pilot Channel Editing

This section allows the user to define the parameters for creating a pilot channel. It includes the parameters for defining channel invert over a range of cross sections and the parameters to define a pilot channel cut for the selected cross sections.

The user can select either of the following panels to define pilot channels:

  • Draw Invert
  • Project Slope
  • Interpolate Invert

Draw Invert

This tabbed panel allows the user to draw the channel invert (channel bottom) along the existing river reach. Click the [Draw] button, and then draw channel invert on the graphical plot available under the Select River Reach section. When finished, right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The software will then automatically compute the required channel invert. Note that the drawn pilot invert should be sloped downward going downstream for the best computational result.

Draw Invert panel

After drawing the pilot channel invert, the user should manually specify the pilot channel width and Manning's n value in the Pilot Channel Data section to stabilize unsteady flow models.

Project Slope

This tabbed panel allows the user to enter an elevation for the invert of the pilot channel and project it on a slope over the range of cross sections.

Project Slope panel

Follow the steps below to define a new channel bottom slope:

  1. Click on the Downstream cross section dropdown combo box and then select the cross section that will be used as the downstream most river station. By default, the software selects the cross section at the downstream end of the river reach.
    Downstream cross section dropdown combo box
  2. Click on the Upstream cross section dropdown combo box and then select the cross section that will be used as the upstream most river station. By default, the software selects the cross section at the upstream end of the river reach.
    Upstream cross section dropdown combo box
    Alternatively, click the [Pick] buttons adjacent to the Downstream cross section and Upstream cross section dropdown combo boxes and select the corresponding cross sections from the Map View. After clicking the [Pick] button, the Pilot Channels dialog box will temporarily disappear. The software will then prompt the user to select the associated cross section from the Map View. After selecting the cross section, the Pilot Channels dialog box will be redisplayed with the cross section shown selected.
  3. Define the Pilot channel width.
  4. Specify the Pilot Channel Manning's n value, which should be equal to or higher than the main channel n value. Clicking on the […] lookup button will display a Manning's Roughness lookup table dialog box.
    Manning's Roughness dialog box
  5. Define the Pilot channel invert elevation.
  6. From the Cut options section, select the desired option for applying the pilot cut for each of the cross sections within the selected range. The following options are available:
    • The Same cut to all cross sections radio button option is used to define the same pilot cut for each of the cross section in the selected cross section range.
    • The Project from downstream XS at slope (V:H) radio button option allows the user to enter elevation for the most downstream cross sections and have the invert elevations for other cross sections computed by projecting cuts on a constant slope upstream.
    • The Project from upstream XS at slope (V:H) radio button option allows the user to enter elevation for the most upstream cross section of the range and have the invert elevations for all other cross sections computed by projecting a user-specified slope downstream.
  7. Click the [Apply] button.

Interpolate Invert

This tabbed panel allows the user to define an invert elevation for the downstream most and the upstream most cross sections, and then automatically interpolate invert elevations for all the cross sections in between the selected range.

Interpolate Invert panel

Follow the steps below to interpolate invert elevations:

  1. Click the Downstream cross section dropdown combo box and then select the cross section that will be used as the downstream most river station for applying channel invert.
  2. Click the Upstream cross section dropdown combo box and then select the cross section that will be used as the upstream most river station for applying channel invert.
  3. Define the Pilot channel width.
  4. Specify the Pilot channel Manning's n value, which should be equal to or higher than the main channel n value.
  5. Define the Downstream XS pilot channel invert elevation and the Upstream XS pilot channel invert elevation.
  6. Click the [Apply] button.

Pilot Channel Data

This section provides a table that displays the final pilot channel values for each of the cross sections. The user can modify the table directly and change any value on a cross section-by-cross section basis. Any update in the pilot channel data is automatically reflected in the table.

Pilot Channel Data section

Selected Cells Group Editing

This section allows the user to quickly enter/edit the pilot channel data in the pilot channel summary table (described above).

Follow the steps below to update the pilot channel data:

  1. Select desired cells in the Pilot Channel Data table.
  2. Click the Define change dropdown combo box and then select one of the options for updating the cell's value and enter the change coefficient.
    Define change dropdown combo box
    The following options are available:
    • Add Constant: This option adds a constant value to the selected cell's value.
    • Multiply By Factor: This option multiplies the selected cell's value by a user-defined number.
    • Apply Value: This option replaces the selected cell's value with the user-specified value.
  3. Click the [Apply Change] button to apply the defined pilot channel adjustment. Note that the [Apply Change] button is only available when a group editing option other than the default No Change option is selected.

When all the pilot channel information has been defined in the Pilot Channels dialog box, click the [OK] button, and the software will create a new pilot channel geometry.

Hydraulic Structures › Flow Training Structures & Pilot Channels

2D Flow Training Structures Command

Flow training structures, such as spur dikes, bendway weirs, rock vanes, bank barbs, chevrons, and revertments, can be used to maintain the channel location within a river system in order to prevent or reduce channel migration during a flood event.

These structures can also be used to provide protection to critical infrastructure, such as bridge roadway crossings, by directing river flow through the bridge opening during extreme flow events. To learn more about flow training structures, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

In GeoHECRAS, the user can define the 2D flow training structures by either drawing or assigning the polyline using the following commands:

  1. Draw 2D Flow Training Structures
  2. Assign 2D Flow Training Structures

Drawing 2D Flow Training Structures

2D flow training structures can be defined by manually drawing the polylines on the Map View using the Draw 2D Flow Training Structures command.

Follow the steps below to draw a 2D flow training structure:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the 2D Flow Areas dropdown menu and then select the Draw 2D Flow Training Structures command.
    Draw 2D Flow Training Structures input ribbon menu command
  2. The Draw 2D Flow Training Structures dialog box will be displayed.
    Draw 2D Flow Training Structures dialog box
  3. Click the [Draw] button. Note that the user can use the Create curvilinear polyline checkbox option to draw the polyline using curvilinear segments.
    [Draw] button
  4. The Draw 2D Flow Training Structures dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw the polyline on the Map View. While drawing elements, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between curvilinear and linear digitizing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about drawing elements on the Map View.
  5. Draw a polyline on the Map View representing the centerline of the 2D flow training structure. You can draw the polyline either from the bank into the channel or from the channel into the bank. Make certain to extend the polyline far enough into the overbank area so that the flow structure fully intersects with the terrain surface.
  6. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  7. The Draw 2D Flow Training Structures dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the 2D flow training structure polyline read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    2D flow training structure polyline read-only field drawn
  8. The software automatically names the drawn 2D flow training structure in the 2D Flow Training Structure Specifications section. Note that the user can also change the name to whatever is desired from the Structure name input field.
    Draw 2D Flow Training Structure Specifications section
  9. Define the 2D flow training structure’s dimensions. 2D Flow structures can either have a weir crest that is level or sloped downward towards the channel. The software allows a sloping weir crest geometry.
    • The Structure channel side top elevation entry defines the structure channel side top elevation (lower elevation near the channel).
    • The Structure bank side top elevation entry defines the structure bank side top elevation (higher elevation near the bank).
    • The Structure top width entry defines the structure top width (sloped top elevation). By default, the software uses a value of 10. However, the user can enter a different value or click the […] button to measure the structure top width from the Map View.
    • The Side slope(V:H) entry defines the sloping angle of the structure’s sides.
  10. Click the [Apply] button.
  11. The software will then construct the 2D flow training structure.
  12. Repeat the above steps to draw additional flow training structures.

Assigning 2D Flow Training Structures

2D flow training structures can be defined by manually assigning the polyline(s) on the Map View using the Assign 2D Flow Training Structures command. To use this command, a polyline that can be selected for the purpose of assigning the flow training structures must already exist on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to assign the 2D flow training structures:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the 2D Flow Areas dropdown menu and then select the Assign 2D Flow Training Structures command.
    Assign 2D Flow Training Structures input ribbon menu command
  2. The Assign 2D Flow Training Structures dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign 2D Flow Training Structures dialog box
  3. Click the [Pick] button.
    [Pick] button
  4. The Assign 2D Flow Training Structures dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the 2d flow training structures.
  5. Click on the polylines in the Map View to select them. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  6. The Assign 2D Flow Training Structures dialog box will be redisplayed, and the number of selected polylines will be shown in the 2D flow training structure polyline read-only field.
    2D flow training structure polyline read-only field selected
    Note that if a polyline has been preselected on the Map View before running this command, the number of selected polylines will be displayed in the 2D flow training structure polylines entry.
  7. In the 2D Flow Training Structure Specifications section, define the prefix for the name of the 2D flow training structure in the Auto-name structure, structure prefix entry field.
    Assign 2D Flow Training Structure Specifications section
    Note that the Structure name option is only available when a single polyline is selected. The user can then define the name of the 2D flow training structure in the Structure name entry field. Otherwise, the software auto-names the 2D flow training structures using the defined prefix, for example, BW-##, where ## represents the 2D flow training structures number (i.e., 01, 02, and so on) and BW represents the prefix.
  8. Define the 2D flow training structure’s dimensions. To learn how to define the dimensions, refer to the Drawing 2D Flow Training Structures section of this article.
  9. Click the [Apply] button, and the software will assign the selected polylines as 2D flow training structures.

Deleting 2D Flow Training Structures

The Delete 2D Flow Training Structures command allows the user to selectively delete the user-defined 2D flow training structures from the model.

Follow the steps below to delete the 2D flow training structures:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the 2D Flow Areas dropdown menu and then select the Delete 2D Flow Training Structures command.
    Delete 2D Flow Training Structures input ribbon menu command
  2. The Delete 2D Flow Training Structures dialog box will be displayed.
    Delete 2D Flow Training Structures dialog box
  3. In the 2D Flow Training Structure grid, check the checkboxes corresponding to the 2D flow training structures you want to delete. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to select the 2D flow training structures from the Map View.
    2D Flow Training Structure grid
    Note that the user can click the [Select All] button to select all 2D flow training structures at once.
  4. The number of selected 2D flow training structures will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.
    Total selected read-only field
    Note that the user can click the [Clear All] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.
  5. After selecting the 2D flow training structures, click the [OK] button, and the software will delete all the selected 2D flow training structures.
2D Modeling › 2D Domain & Flow Area

Defining 2D Model Domain

In GeoHECRAS, the 2D model domain defines the area where two-dimensional (2D) hydraulic computations are performed to simulate how water flows across the land surface. Unlike one-dimensional (1D) modeling (where flow is calculated along a predefined path, such as river centerlines), 2D modeling captures flow in all directions over the terrain.

The 2D model domain is represented by a closed polygon that outlines the study area. Accurately defining this polygon is critical for computing water depths, velocities, and other hydraulic parameters across the floodplain or study area.

The image below shows an example of a 2D model domain defined in GeoHECRAS.

2D model domain sample image

Steps to Define a 2D Model Domain

Follow the steps below to define a 2D model domain in GeoHECRAS.

Assigning the Coordinate Reference System (CRS)

The Coordinate Reference System (CRS) ensures all spatial data layers, including terrain and base maps, are correctly georeferenced within the project. Before creating a 2D model domain, the project’s CRS must be defined. The user can assign the CRS using the Map Coordinates option from the File ribbon menu. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the coordinate reference system.

File ribbon menu - Map Coordinates option

Adding a Base Map Layer

A base map provides high-quality background aerial and other imagery to visualize the terrain and land features. The user can add a base map layer using the Add Base Map Layer command from the Map Data ribbon menu. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Add Base Map Layer command.

Add Base Map Layer command

Generating the Terrain Surface

A terrain surface is required to perform 2D flow computations. The user can create a terrain surface using the Generate Terrain command from the Terrain ribbon menu. This command allows the user to import elevation datasets such as DEMs, TINs, or LIDAR data. The terrain is stored in a raster format (.hdf file), which is used for mesh generation and flow calculations. Note that the terrain data covers the entire study area and is in the same CRS as the project. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Generate Terrain command.

Generate Terrain command

Drawing the 2D Flow Area

After generating the terrain surface, define the region for the 2D flow simulation by drawing a polygon that represents the outer boundary of the 2D model domain. When outlining the polygon, ensure it covers the main channel, floodplain boundaries, and any other areas likely to be affected by flooding. Avoid including unnecessarily large regions, as this increases computational time without improving accuracy. The user can draw the 2D flow area using the Draw 2D Flow Areas command from the Input ribbon menu. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Draw 2D Flow Areas command.

Draw 2D Flow Areas command

Defining Upstream and Downstream Boundaries

After defining the 2D flow area polygon, specify the boundary conditions that allow water to enter and exit the 2D model domain. This is typically done by drawing upstream and downstream boundary polylines using the Draw Polylines command from the Map Edit ribbon menu. These polylines will later be assigned flow hydrographs, stage hydrographs, or normal depth conditions depending on the modeling requirements.

Refining the Computational Mesh

After defining the upstream and downstream boundaries, generate and refine the computational mesh for 2D flow calculations. The user can generate a computational mesh using the Draw 2D Mesh Zones command from the Input ribbon menu. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Draw 2D Mesh Zones command.

Draw 2D Mesh Zones command

Once the mesh is generated, it can be refined by adjusting cell sizes or adding breaklines to align the mesh with terrain features such as levees, channels, or roads. These refinements help improve the accuracy of flow simulations. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to refine the mesh within the 2D flow area boundary.

Saving the Project

After refining the mesh, save the project. To do this, click the Save option from the File ribbon menu or press CTRL + S on the keyboard. If the project has not yet been named, the software will display a Save As dialog box to name and save the project. Saving the project stores all edits made to the 2D model domain, including flow areas, boundary conditions, and mesh configurations.

Running the Analysis

Finally, run the project analysis using the Compute Unsteady - Current Scenario command from the Analysis ribbon menu. During the simulation, GeoHECRAS uses the defined 2D model domain and mesh to compute water surface elevations and flow velocities within the specified area. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Compute Unsteady - Current Scenario command.

Compute Unsteady - Current Scenario command
2D Modeling › 2D Domain & Flow Area

2D Flow Area Data Command

A 2D flow area is a region of a model where the HEC-RAS two-dimensional flow computation algorithms will be used to calculate the flow across that region. 2D flow areas are created by constructing polygon areas representing the outer boundary of the 2D flow area and then specifying the computational mesh. Refer to this article in our knowledge base on how to draw 2D flow areas.

Once the 2D flow area is created, the user can modify the 2D flow area data. In GeoHECRAS, the 2D Flow Area Data command allows the user to view or modify the existing 2D flow area data in a project.

Follow the steps below to view or modify the 2D flow area data:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the 2D Flow Area Data command.2D Flow Area Data Command
    Alternatively, the user can either double-click on the 2D flow area polygon from the Map View or choose the 2D Flow Area Data command from the 2D Flow Areas dropdown menu of the Input ribbon menu.2D Flow Area Data Command
  2. The 2D Flow Area Data dialog box will be displayed.2D Flow Area Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the 2D Flow Area Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting 2D Flow Area

The Select 2D Flow Area section allows the user to select the 2D flow area name in order to define the 2D flow area data.

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • 2D flow area ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the 2D flow areas defined in the project. The user can select the desired 2D flow area from the dropdown combo box. Click the pencil icon to edit the 2D flow area ID. The user can navigate between the previous and next 2D flow area using the up and down arrow buttons. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to select the 2D flow area from the Map View. Note that the up and down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) when the model contains only a single 2D flow area.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button is used to delete the current 2D flow area and its associated data from the project.
  • Convert to Storage Area
    Clicking the [Convert to Storage Area] button causes the software to convert the selected 2D flow area into a storage area.

2D Flow Area Specifications

The 2D Flow Area Specifications dropdown combo box contains the following data panel entries that allow the user to define the 2D flow area data:

  • Geometry Data
  • Boundary Conditions
  • Connections
  • Bridge Piers
  • Zonal Meshing
  • Mesh Patches
2D Flow Area Specifications dropdown combo box

Geometry Data Panel

This panel allows the user to define the geometry data of the current 2D flow area. By default, this data panel is shown when the 2D Flow Area Data command is selected.

2D Flow Area Specifications

The following options are provided in this section:

  • 2D meshing scheme
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the mesh type. GeoHECRAS can create the following 2D mesh types:
    1. Uniform Mesh: This option divides the flow area into a grid of regular square or rectangular elements with evenly spaced nodes.
    2. Hexagonal Mesh: This option divides the flow area into hexagonal elements, each sharing six sides with neighboring elements and uniform size.
    3. Adaptive Mesh: This option adjusts the grid resolution locally based on flow characteristics.
  • Default Manning’s n
    This entry field is used to define a default Manning's n value that will be used for the cell faces in the 2D flow area. By default, the software uses a value of 0.0600. However, the user can enter a different value or click the […] button to display the information table for Manning’s roughness that can be assigned.
  • Minimum element angle
    This spin control defines the minimum angle of the mesh element. By default, the software uses a value of 20. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 10 to 25.
  • Maximum element angle
    This spin control defines the maximum angle of the mesh element. By default, the software uses a value of 100. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 100 to 180.
  • Maximum element area
    This checkbox option is used to define the maximum area of the mesh element. The user can enter the area value in the entry field next to this option. Alternatively, click the […] button to measure the maximum area of the mesh element from the 2D Flow Area Preview section. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked.
  • Boundary element spacing
    The entry field is used to define the element spacing used in the 2D flow area generation routine. By default, the software uses a value of 30 feet. However, the user can enter a different value or click the […] button to measure the element spacing from the 2D Flow Area Preview section.
  • Fix adjacent 2D flow area edges
    This checkbox option is used to add internal breaklines between adjacent 2D model domains and causes adjacent 2D elements from the 2D model domains to align with each other.

Note that if the user selects a mesh type other than Uniform Mesh in the 2D meshing scheme dropdown combo box, the 2D Flow Area Specifications section will be changed as shown below.

2D meshing scheme dropdown combo box Uniform Mesh option
  • Element spacing
    The entry field is used to define the cell spacing used in the 2D flow area generation routine. By default, the software uses a value of 100 feet. However, the user can enter a different value or click the […] button to measure the cell spacing from the 2D Flow Area Preview section.

2D Flow Area Element Limits

This section is used to define the limit of the 2D flow area element.

2D Flow Area Element Limits

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Cell volume filter
    This checkbox option is used to reduce the number of points in the 2D cell elevation volume curves that get developed in the 2D pre-processor. By default, the software uses a value of 0.01 feet. The user can also enter a different value as needed.
  • Face profile filter
    This checkbox option is used to reduce the number of points that get extracted from the detailed terrain for each face of a 2D cell. By default, the software uses a value of 0.01 feet. The user can also enter a different value as needed.
  • Face conveyance ratio
    This entry field is used to figure out if more or less points are required at the lower end of the face property tables. The software first computes conveyance at all of the elevations in the face property tables. Then it computes the conveyance at an elevation halfway between the points and compares this value to that obtained by using linear interpolation. If the computed value produces a conveyance within 2% (0.02) of the linear interpolation value, then no further points are needed between those two values. If it is more than 2%, then a new point is added to that table. This reduces the error in computing hydraulic properties, and therefore conveyance due to linear interpolation of the curves. By default, the software uses a value of 0.02.
  • Face laminar depth
    This checkbox option is used to define the depth of water at which turbulent flow would transition to laminar flow for sheet flow flowing over a plane. By default, the software uses a value of 0.20 feet. The user can also enter a different value as needed.
  • Cell min surface area fraction
    This checkbox option is used to define the fraction that is multiplied by the cell area to establish a minimum area at the lowest elevation of the cell. It prevents the cell elevation volume curves from going down to an extremely small area at the bottom of the cell, at which point it creates a curve that is very abrupt at the lowest end. Establishing a reasonable minimum area for the cell helps to ensure the stability of solving that cell when it first starts to get water. By default, the software uses a value of 0.01 percent. The user can also enter a different value as needed.
  • Face area-elev filter
    This checkbox option is used to reduce the number of points in the cell face hydraulic property tables. By default, the software uses a value of 0.01 feet. The user can also enter a different value as needed.
  • Spatially varied Manning’s n on faces
    This checkbox option allows the spatial variation in Manning's n values to be extracted horizontally along the face of 2D cells.
  • Composite classification values in cells
    This checkbox option allows the land classification values to be spatially composited over each cell rather than a single point value at the center.

Enforce Breaklines and Connections

This section is used to create cells that are aligned with the breaklines, which ensures that flow cannot move across that cell's face until the water surface is higher than the terrain along that breakline. The software will create cells spaced along the breakline at the nominal cell size entered by the user.

Enforce Breaklines and Connections

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Breaklines/Connections
    This entry allows the user to add additional breaklines/connections to align 2D mesh cell faces with the breaklines and prevent cells from crossing the breakline. The user can either check the Breaklines/Connections checkbox to select all breaklines/connections or manually check corresponding checkbox entries that are to be added. Alternatively, click the […] button to select breaklines/connections from the 2D Flow Area Preview section. Click the pencil icon to edit the breaklines/connections ID.
  • Cell Spacing (ft)
    This entry represents cell spacing along the breakline. If this entry is left blank, then the cell spacing used in the vicinity of the breakline will be used. By default, the software uses a value of 20. However, the user can enter a different value as needed.
  • Relaxed Cell Spacing (ft)
    This entry represents the cell spacing further away from the breakline. If this entry is left blank, then the cell spacing used in the vicinity of the breakline will be used. This value should not be the same as the Cell Spacing value or cell errors may be introduced along the breakline.
  • Repeat Cells
    This spin control causes additional layers of identically sized cells to be created adjacent to the breakline cells. For example, if the user entered a cell spacing of 50 feet, then the cells on both sides of the breakline would be 50 feet cells.
  • Protect Cells?
    This entry causes the software to leave any manual edits of the cells that align with the breakline as they are.
  • Rebuild
    The [Rebuild] button causes the software to recreate the entire 2D mesh using all the defined features. Any user edits to the 2D mesh elements are discarded.
  • Update
    The [Update] button causes the software to update the 2D flow area including all user-defined edits to the 2D mesh elements.
  • Auto-fix bad elements
    This checkbox option will cause the software to correct any malformed 2D elements.

Boundary Conditions Panel

This panel provides a table listing all of the boundary condition lines linked to the current 2D flow area, allowing editing and defining of the boundary conditions.

Boundary Conditions Panel

Boundary Condition Lines

The following data columns are provided:

  • Boundary Condition ID
    This read-only column lists the ID of the connected boundary condition lines. Click the pencil icon to edit the ID of boundary condition lines.
  • Boundary Connection Definition
    This column details the boundary condition lines. The following details are provided in this entry based upon the selected boundary condition types:
    1. Normal Depth
    2. Rating Curve
    3. Flow Hydrograph
    4. Stage Hydrograph

    In addition, a [Define] button is provided. Clicking this button closes the 2D Flow Area Data dialog box and then displays the Unsteady Flow Data dialog box detailing the selected boundary conditions. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about defining the boundary condition lines.

Note that the Rebuild button, Update button, and Auto-fix bad elements checkbox functionalities are similar to that of the Enforce Breaklines and Connections section of the Geometry Data panel.

Connections Panel

This panel defines connections and references to the currently selected 2D flow area.

Connections Panel

SA/2D Connections

This section provides a table listing all of the SA/2D connections linked to the current 2D flow area. This allows the 2D flow area to daisy chain to other 2D flow areas.

The following data columns are provided:

  • Storage Area Connection ID
    This read-only column lists the ID of the connected SA/2D connection.
  • Structure Type
    This read-only column lists the type of SA/2D connection that is being used. The following SA/2D connection types are available:
    1. Weir
    2. Weir and Culverts
    3. Weir and Gates
    4. Linear Routing
  • Connection Definition
    This column details the SA/2D connection. Click the [Pick] button to select the SA/2D connection from the Map View. Note that if the selected SA/2D connection already exists in a different row within the table, the following informational dialog box will be displayed.
    Invalid SA/2D Connection dialog box
    In addition, a [Define] button is provided. Clicking this button closes the 2D Flow Area Data dialog box and then displays the SA/2D Connections Data dialog box detailing the selected SA/2D connection. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the SA/2D Connections Data dialog box.

River Reach End Connections

This section provides a table listing river reaches connected to the current 2D flow area.

The following data columns are provided:

  • River & Reach
    These two read-only columns list the river and corresponding reach that is connected to the selected 2D flow area.
  • Cross Section River Station
    This read-only column details the cross section river station that is connected to the 2D flow area. Click the [Pick] button to select the river reach connecting to the 2D flow area from the Map View. Note that if the selected river reach already exists in a different row within the table, the following informational dialog box will be displayed.Invalid River Reach dialog box
    In addition, a [Define] button is provided. Clicking this button closes the 2D Flow Area Data dialog box and then displays the Cross Section Data dialog box detailing the selected cross section. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Cross Section Data dialog box.

Lateral Structure Connections

This section provides a table listing lateral structures connected to the current 2D flow area.

The following data columns are provided:

  • River & Reach
    These two read-only columns list the river and corresponding reach that are connected to the 2D flow area.
  • Headwater River Station
    This read-only column details the lateral structure headwater river station that is connected to the 2D flow area. Click the [Pick] button to select the lateral structure connecting to the 2D flow area from the Map View. Note that if the selected lateral structure already exists in a different row within the table, the following informational dialog box will be displayed.

In addition, a [Define] button is provided. Clicking this button closes the 2D Flow Area Data dialog box and then displays the Lateral Structure Data dialog box detailing the selected lateral structure. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Lateral Structure Data dialog box.

Bridge Piers Panel

This panel allows the user to model bridges (without pressure or roadway overflow) by allowing the user to “stamp” in pier structures into the 2D flow area mesh.

Bridge Piers Panel

Bridge Pier Specifications

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Pier type
    This dropdown combo box is used to select the type of bridge pier. The following options are available in the dropdown combo box:
    1. Circular Pier
    2. Rectangular Round Nosed Pier
    3. Rectangular Sharp Nosed Pier
    4. Rectangular Square Nosed Pier
    5. Square Pier

    The user can click the [Place] button to place the defined pier on Map View available under the 2D Flow Area Preview section. After clicking the [Place] button, the user can select the desired pier location on the Map View. The software immediately places the pier within the 2D flow area and lists it in the table available in the Defined Piers section. The software automatically assigns a default name to each new pier added to the table and incremented sequentially for each additional pier.The software also allows the user to relocate the selected pier within the Map View. In addition, the user can rotate and resize the pier shape by pressing the [F2] function key.

  • Diameter
    This entry field is used to define the diameter of the bridge pier. By default, the software uses a value of 2 feet. However, the user can enter a different value or click the […] button to measure the pier diameter from the 2D Flow Area Preview section.

Note that if the user selects the Square Pier type in the Pier type dropdown combo box, the Bridge Pier Specifications sections will be modified as shown below:

Pier type dropdown combo box Square Pier shape
  • Width
    This entry field is used to define the width of the bridge pier. By default, the software uses a value of 2 feet. However, the user can enter a different value or click the […] button to measure the pier width from the 2D Flow Area Preview section.

Note that if the user selects the Rectangular Pier type in the Pier type dropdown combo box, the Bridge Pier Specifications sections will be modified as shown below:

Pier type dropdown combo box Rectangular Pier shape
  • Length
    This entry field is used to define the length of the bridge pier. By default, the software uses a value of 30 feet. However, the user can enter a different value or click the […] button to measure the pier length from the 2D Flow Area Preview section.

Defined Piers

The following data columns are provided:

  • Pier ID
    This column displays the pier name. The user can click the pencil icon to edit the pier name.
  • Pier Type
    This column displays the shape of the pier.
  • Enabled
    This checkbox column allows the user to position pier structures into the 2D flow area mesh. The user can either check the column header checkbox to select all piers or manually check corresponding checkbox entries that are to be positioned into the 2D flow area mesh.

Note that the Rebuild button, Update button, and Auto-fix bad elements checkbox functionalities are similar to that of the Enforce Breaklines and Connections section of the Geometry Data panel.

Zonal Meshing Panel

This panel is used to define mesh zones within a 2D flow area, where each zone can have its own mesh type and corresponding parameters (e.g., element size, etc.). This allows the user to define refinement regions for specific areas of interest. For example, in a critical infrastructure area, a mesh zone could be defined, and a much smaller element size used to capture the flow direction and velocities that occur during a flood event.

Zonal Meshing Panel

2D Mesh Zones

The following data columns are provided:

  • Mesh Zone
    This column displays the mesh zone name. Alternatively, click the […] button to select the mesh zone from the 2D Flow Area Preview section. The user can click the pencil icon to edit the mesh zone name.
  • Mesh Type
    This column displays the mesh type. The following options are available in the dropdown combo box:
    1. Uniform Mesh
    2. Hexagonal Mesh
    3. Adaptive Mesh

The Hard Mesh Zone boundary checkbox option enforces the boundary of mesh zones to be treated much like a breakline.

Note that the Cell Spacing column, Repeat Cells column, Protect Cells column, Rebuild button, Update button, and Auto-fix bad elements checkbox functionalities are similar to that of the Enforce Breaklines and Connections section of the Geometry Data panel.

Mesh Patches Panel

This panel allows the user to refine or coarsen an area of the mesh to model the flow more accurately. A polygon is created to define the boundaries of the mesh patches. Mesh patches can be used to densify an area where more detailed results are required, such as rapid changes in terrain or water surface elevation, or to simplify an area where the water surface elevation will not vary much, and users want to reduce the number of computation points in the 2D flow area.

In addition, mesh patches can also be used to create a functional mesh in the main channel regions of the model.

Mesh Patches Panel

Mesh Patches

The Mesh Patch column displays the mesh patch name. The user can click the pencil icon to edit the mesh patch name.

Note that the Rebuild button, Update button, and Auto-fix bad elements checkbox functionalities are similar to that of the Enforce Breaklines and Connections section of the Geometry Data panel.

To learn how to add mesh patches in a 2D flow area, refer to this video in our knowledge base.

2D Modeling › 2D Domain & Flow Area

2D HEC-RAS Modeling Recommendations

A two-dimensional HEC-RAS model represents the physical conditions and characteristics of a watershed in order to simulate hydrologic and hydraulic processes. A 2D watershed modeling approach in HEC-RAS is being used increasingly to provide economical estimates of flood hazards. This approach can also be used to increase coverage of floodplain mapping and related hazard identification. The user/modeler should follow the below recommendations while preparing a 2D HEC-RAS model.

Model Naming Convention Recommendations

Consistent management of the 2D HEC-RAS input and output data is important for the reusability of the model. For better project management, the user should develop data in a format that is easily recognizable, storage efficient, and user-friendly for uploading and downloading the project data. While naming the model, the user should always remember that HEC-RAS models, their plans, and other modeling components should be consistent and self-explanatory.

For example, the general naming convention recommends the usage of lowercase characters throughout and underscores rather than spaces, etc. The objective of naming conventions is to allow users to locate and understand the modeling data components quickly, which is especially useful for large scale studies with large file sizes.

Project Coordinate System Recommendations

A project area may span multiple coordinate projection systems. The user should select one consistent coordinate system and use the same .prj file for all watershed models within the project footprint to avoid variations or mismatching of input and output data. If a single coordinate system for a project area is not possible, then the best practice is to include the coordinate system projection file within the folder that contains the model files so that the .prj file is retained with the model inputs and outputs. Refer to this article to learn more about the project coordinate system.

2D Mesh Development Recommendations

Creating a HEC-RAS 2D mesh that correctly represents the flow area being modeled can take some time due to the need to add the appropriate details to the model to represent the components and due to the terrain data to be included.

The following model mesh development practices are listed in order of importance in 2D watershed modeling:

  • Watershed Model Mesh Scale
    When uniform spatial precipitation is applied in a 2D model, the recommended model mesh size for most of the area is of scale 20-60 mi2. While setting up a model mesh scale with uniform spatial precipitation, the user must have an assurance that the runoff (flows) and total runoff volume computed for each stream in the watershed is representative of the desired recurrence interval.
  • Watershed Model Mesh Connectivity and Delineation
    Where a project area includes inflows from upstream watersheds, the relationship between inflow and in-watershed hydrologic conditions must be examined. Delineating consistent boundaries among watershed areas is also critical for modeling and mapping flood hazards across large project areas.
  • Mesh Hydro-Enforcement and Refinement
    One advantage of 2D watershed modeling is that the model mesh can be reconfigured by the user iteratively more easily than in 1D modeling. This iterative process is useful for using initial model results to inform mesh configuration. Once the initial model mesh is set and modeling results are available, hydro-enforcement and refinement regions should be applied.
  • Hydro-Enforcing Stream Channels
    The most critical step in model mesh development is to hydro-enforce the mesh so that the channel capacity of the stream can be realized during flow routing and hydraulic calculations. This includes areas where there is assumed hydraulic connectivity through the high ground (e.g., roadways, railroads, and dams) using breaklines or 2D area connections to simulate the effect of culverts, spillways, etc. The mesh breaklines should also be added along the feature of the channel bank that affects channel overflow.

    Effective practices for developing a hydro-enforced model mesh are listed below:

    1. Hydro-enforcing should be accomplished through the addition of refinement regions, breaklines, or terrain modification.
    2. Hydro-enforcing through v-notch, u-notch, or offset breaklines should be enforced with a cell protection radius prior to enforcing any stream centerline or channel bank breaklines so that the hydro-enforcing is preserved as the mesh is refined. Alternatively, stream centerline or channel bank breaklines can be clipped to not interfere with hydro-enforcing breaklines.
      2d-hec-ras-modeling-recommendations-1.png
    3. The user should avoid manual edits to individual computation nodes and should instead use breaklines to reshape the mesh. Manual node edits cannot be reinforced in a consistent manner.
    4. 2D area connections or terrain modification approximations of the channel can be used to simulate flows through the embankments.
    5. 2D area connections should be used to represent dams. The breaklines can be more easily interfered with during model refinement and are dependent on the underlying terrain to accurately capture the spillway geometry.2d-hec-ras-modeling-recommendations-2.png
  • Model Mesh Cell Sizes
    Typically, computation points are created with a 200’ x 200’ cell spacing. This ensures that the cell count is low enough for manageable computation times but detailed enough to pass water through the model. Refinement regions should be added to the model to define populated areas, and steep areas, typically at 50’ x 50’ cell spacing. If the entire watershed area requires smaller cell spacing, then the initial model mesh can be set at 100’ x 100’ or 50’ x 50’ cell spacing. Note that the mesh refinement areas may be desired for reasons beyond their effect on the water surface elevation.
  • Levee Systems
    Where there are levees in a watershed model, two model meshes should be created: One with the mesh updated to account for crest elevations of the levee systems; and one with the mesh updated to eliminate any effects of the levee systems (natural valley) as shown below. Applying this process for each system within the project footprint provides insight into the range of possible flood hazard outcomes for each event.
    2d-hec-ras-modeling-recommendations-3.png
  • Model Mesh Along Streams and Roadways
    Applying refinement regions and breaklines to stream channels typically helps better capture terrain features in the conveyance calculations. Aligning mesh cell edges along channel banks can be important to properly account for the transfer of water between the channel and floodplain, especially if those channel banks are perched or raised relative to the adjacent overbanks.

    If after refinement, the density of cells within the stream channel banks is more than two, the HEC-RAS solver should likely be switched to the full momentum equation; otherwise, the velocity values within the channel can be unrealistically high. The full momentum equation should be used in these cases because the diffusion wave equation disregards certain components of fluid dynamics, such as local acceleration of velocity with time, advective acceleration, and viscosity terms that are important for modeling flow separations and eddies between 2D cells within the channel. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about HEC-RAS 2D flow area modeling.

Unsteady Flow Data Recommendations

Unsteady flow data are required to perform an unsteady flow analysis. Unsteady flow data consists of both external and internal boundary conditions. External boundary conditions are required to run an unsteady model. External boundary conditions must be established at all the open ends of the river system being modeled. These are the boundary conditions that the user must add to the upstream and downstream ends of each reach (or 2D flow area). Internal boundary conditions are optional and allow the user to define gate operations and add flow within a river reach. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about unsteady flow data.

Unsteady Flow Computation Recommendations

GeoHECRAS software provides some default computational options and tolerances for 1D and 2D unsteady flow models. The tolerances are used in the solution of unsteady flow equations. In general, it is recommended that the default computation options and tolerances be maintained. However, the user can override the default computational options to achieve model stability while maintaining computational accuracy. Extra care should be taken while overriding the default calculation tolerances as it could result in computational errors in the water surface profile. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about unsteady flow computational options.

Unsteady flow computations can also be performed using 2D floodplain encroachment and unsteady flow floodplain encroachment methods. These methods automate the placement and analysis of floodplain encroachments along the river reach when performing a 2D steady or unsteady flow computation. This allows the user to have a better understanding of the true flow effects when attempting to determine the floodway in a complex flow situation. The user can also examine the DxV (Depth x Velocity) factor, as this directly indicates greater flood hazard and hydraulic importance.

Model Validation and Calibration

Validation and calibration of rainfall-runoff models provide assurance of accuracy in model results. While the flow routing component of 2D HEC-RAS is much more detailed than a typical rainfall-runoff model, the placement of breaklines and the development of Manning’s n values need to be validated and calibrated (where possible) to confirm realistic results.

Velocity Validation

Users should inspect the maximum velocities along the stream channels and near hydraulic structures to confirm the reasonability of the results. Typically, velocity issues can be resolved by the following:

  • Adjusting 2D area connections
  • Adding breaklines
  • Using full momentum solver, etc.

Peak Flow Validation

The 2D HEC-RAS modeling is an iterative process. After each simulation, the results should be analyzed and adjustments should be made to verify that the model produces the expected results. The breaklines can significantly influence flow routing and should be modified to allow water to pass through (i.e., hydro-enforcing) the model in a realistic way.

For example, if water is known to pond behind the high ground, this behavior should be consistent with how the mesh and terrain allow the area to drain. After each iteration of mesh refinement, stage and flow hydrograph results in HEC-RAS should be compared to flow and water surface elevation data calculated with USGS gages, regression equations, and rating curves for validation.

Viewing 2D HEC-RAS Model Results

After defining the 2D HEC-RAS model and the associated parameters, the analysis should be computed with the incorporated changes in the model. The results for a 2D model can be viewed using the following options:

  • Flood Maps
    Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about flood maps.
  • Stage & Flow Hydrographs
    Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about stage and flow hydrographs.
  • Profile Line Plots
    Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about profile line plots.
2D Modeling › 2D Domain & Flow Area

Draw and Assign 2D Flow Areas Command

2D flow areas are regions of a model in which the flow through that region will be computed with the HEC-RAS two-dimensional flow computation algorithms. 2D flow areas are defined by laying out a polygon representing the outer boundary of the 2D flow area and then specifying the computational mesh. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about 2D flow areas.

The following image shows a 2D flow area polygon boundary for an area that is protected by a levee.

2D flow area polygon boundary map view image

HEC-RAS 2D flow areas can be defined by either drawing or assigning the polygon boundary using the following commands:

  • Draw 2D Flow Areas
  • Assign 2D Flow Areas

Drawing HEC-RAS 2D Flow Areas

HEC-RAS 2D flow areas can be defined by drawing the polygon boundary of the 2D flow area on the Map View using the Draw 2D Flow Areas command.

Follow the steps below to draw a 2D flow area:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the 2D Flow Areas dropdown menu and then select the Draw 2D Flow Areas command. Draw 2D flow areas command input ribbon menu
  2. The Draw 2D Flow Areas dialog box will be displayed. Draw 2D flow areas command dialog box
  3. Click on the [Draw] button adjacent to the 2D flow area polygon field. Note that the user can use the Create curvilinear polygon checkbox option to draw the polygon using curvilinear segments.
  4. The Draw 2D Flow Areas dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user to draw polygons on the Map View. While drawing elements, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between the curvilinear and the linear digitizing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about drawing elements on the Map View.
  5. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  6. The Draw 2D Flow Areas dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the 2D flow area polygon read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn. 2D flow area polygon read-only field drawn
  7. Provide the name for the 2D flow area in the 2D flow area ID entry field.
  8. From the 2D meshing scheme dropdown combo box, select the mesh type. GeoHECRAS can create the following 2D mesh types:
    • Uniform Mesh
    • Hexagonal Mesh
    • Adaptive Mesh
  9. The Element spacing entry allows the user to define the cell spacing used in the 2D flow area generation routine. By default, the software uses a value of 30. However, the user can enter a different value or click the […] button to measure the cell spacing from the Map View.
  10. The Fix adjacent 2D flow area edges checkbox is used to add internal break lines between adjacent 2D model domains and causes adjacent 2D elements from the 2D model domains to align with each other.
  11. Click on the [Apply] button and the 2D flow area will be created.

Assigning HEC-RAS 2D Flow Areas

HEC-RAS 2D flow areas can be defined by assigning an already drawn polyline or polygon as the boundary of the 2D flow area using the Assign 2D Flow Areas command. Follow the steps below to assign an already drawn polyline or polygon as a 2D flow area:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the 2D Flow Areas dropdown menu and then select the Assign 2D Flow Areas command. Assign 2D flow areas command input ribbon menu
  2. The Assign 2D Flow Areas dialog box will be displayed. Assign 2D flow areas command dialog box
  3. Click the [Pick] button adjacent to the 2D flow area polyline/polygon field.
  4. The Assign 2D Flow Areas dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user what to do next.
  5. From the Map View, click on a polyline or polygon representing the 2D flow area boundary.
  6. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Assign 2D Flow Areas dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of 2D flow area polyline/polygon read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected. 2D flow area polyline/polygon read-only field selected Note that the 2D Flow Area General Specifications section of the Assign 2D Flow Areas command is similar to that of the Draw 2D Flow Areas command. Hence, refer to the above section of this article to learn about the options available in this section.
  7. Click on the [Apply] button, and the software will treat the polyline or polygon as a 2D flow area boundary.
2D Modeling › 2D Domain & Flow Area

HEC-RAS 2D Flow Area Modeling

HEC-RAS 2D flow modeling can be used in a variety of different situations:

  • Detailed 2D channel and floodplain modeling
  • Combined 1D channel flow with 2D floodplain flow areas
  • Combined 1D channel and overbank flow with 2D flow areas behind levees
  • Simplified to detailed dam failure (i.e., dam breach) analyses
  • Simplified to detailed levee failure (i.e., levee breach) analyses
  • 1D flow that suddenly expands laterally into the floodplain overbank area
  • Flow outside of well-defined single channel
  • Interconnected or braided streams, meanders, loops
  • Alluvial fans and estuaries
  • And many other situations…

To develop a 2D flow area model, an understanding of how the 2D flow model works is required. This article covers the basics of 2D flow modeling.

HEC-RAS 2D Computational Methods

HEC-RAS provides four methods for computing the flow field in a 2D mesh, each of which may be selected from the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box available from the Analysis ribbon menu.

Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box

Because the user can easily switch between the 2D computational solvers, each solver can be tried for a given model to see if the Shallow Water Equations (also known as Full Momentum equations) provides additional detail over the Diffusion Wave equations.

In total, HEC-RAS has four equation sets that can be used to solve for the flow moving over the computational mesh, as listed below:

  • Diffusion Wave – The default equation.
  • SWE-Eulerian-Lagrangian Method – The original Shallow Water equations solution.
  • SWE-Eulerian Method – A new Shallow Water equations solution that is more momentum conservative.
  • SWE-Local Inertia Method - A simplified version of the Shallow Water equations that ignores the advection, diffusion, and Coliolis terms in the momentum equation.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Unsteady Flow Computational Options command.

2D Diffusion Wave Computational Method

The 2D Diffusion Wave computational method is the default solver and allows the computations to run faster and with greater stability. Most 2D modeling situations, such as flood modelling, can be accurately modeled using this solver, where inertial forces tend to dominate frictional and other forces.

The Diffusion Wave computational method can be used in the following situations:

  • Flow is mainly driven by gravity and friction
  • Fluid acceleration is monotonic and smooth (i.e., no waves)
  • Compute rough global estimates (i.e., flood extents)
  • Assess interior flooding (i.e., levee breach)
  • Quick estimate for using the Full Momentum computational method

2D Full Momentum Computational Method

The 2D Full Momentum computational method (Shallow Water Equations), often referred to as the Saint Venant equations for shallow flow, can account for turbulence and Coriolis effects, making it applicable to a wider set of conditions. However, solving the 2D Saint Venant flow equations requires more computational power and thereby results in longer run times. In addition, the 2D Saint Venant flow equations can become numerically unstable in regions of the 2D mesh where the water surface profile or flow direction is changing rapidly. To avoid an unstable model, a finer mesh and a corresponding smaller time step will need to be used.

The Shallow Water Equations should be used for greater accuracy in several applications. A general approach is to use the Diffusion Wave equations while developing the model. Once the model is working, the user can develop a different scenario and use the Shallow Water Equations to compare the results. A significant difference in results means the Shallow Water Equations solution is more accurate.

The new SWE-Eulerian Method is an explicit solution scheme that is based on a more conservative form of the momentum equation. It produces less numerical diffusion than the original SWE equation. However, in general, the SWE-Eulerian Method is only needed when users are interested in taking a very close look at changes in water surfaces and velocities at and around hydraulic structures, piers/abutments, and tight contractions and expansions. The original SWE-Eulerian-Lagrangian Method is more than adequate for most problems requiring the full momentum equation-based solution scheme. The SWE Local Inertia Method is a simplified version of the SWE equations. It is computationally more efficient. This method neglects the advection, diffusion, and Coliolis terms in the momentum equation, which results in a system of equations that is much simpler to solve.

The Full Momentum computational method should be used in the following situations:

  • Dynamic flood waves (i.e., dam failure, rapid rise, and fall)
  • Sudden expansion or contraction of flow with high velocity changes
  • Detailed flow solutions around hydraulic structures and obstacles (i.e., bridge openings, piers, and abutments)
  • Detailed mixed flow regime (i.e., hydraulic jumps, critical flow, etc.)
  • Wave propagation (i.e., waves reflecting off walls and objects)
  • Tidal boundary conditions (i.e., upstream wave propagation)
  • Super elevation around river bends

Hotstart (or Restart) Initial Conditions

Because the 2D Diffusion Wave computational method runs much faster than the 2D Full Momentum computational method, the Diffusion Wave computational method can be used to create a hotstart (or restart) file to setup the initial conditions for the 2D mesh. The Full Momentum computational method can then use the hotstart file to define the initial water surface elevations and flows throughout the 2D mesh and then analyze the actual flood event.

2D Implicit Finite Volume Solution Algorithm

Both the 2D Diffusion Wave and 2D Saint Venant solvers use an implicit Finite Volume solution algorithm. The implicit solution method allows for larger computational time steps than explicit solution methods. In addition, the Finite Volume method provides a greater degree of stability and robustness over traditional Finite Difference and Finite Element methodologies.

The 2D computational process is as follows:

Computational-Cycle.png

Steps used in computing the flow through each cell in HEC-RAS 2D solver

This computational algorithm is very robust and allows 2D cells to wet and dry. 2D flow areas can start completely dry and can handle a sudden rush of water into them. In addition, this algorithm can handle flow regimes that change with time:

  • Subcritical flow
  • Supercritical flow
  • Mixed flow (contains both subcritical and supercritical flow, including moving hydraulic jumps)

HEC-RAS 2D Modeling Guidance and Assumptions

For the HEC-RAS 2D computational methodology, the following modeling guidance and assumptions are provided:

  • Vertical fluid motion is negligible
  • Velocity is vertically averaged at the cell center (depth averaged flow)
  • Energy head is computed at the cell center
  • Manning’s roughness assigned on cell face using roughness value at cell face center
  • Manning’s roughness assumed constant across each cell face, although each cell face can have its own value
  • Rain on grid is applied uniformly to all cells of the 2D flow area
  • Rainfall initial abstraction and other losses need to be accounted for prior to assigning precipitation data
  • At least one external boundary condition must exist on the 2D mesh
  • Time step selection should consider cell size and wave speed

With HEC-RAS current limitations on modeling 2D pressure flow and road overflow at a bridge, the following methods can be used to model the bridge in a 2D flow situation:

  • Ignore the bridge deck by assuming that the bridge does not experience pressure flow or road overflow
  • Use a SA/2D connection with gate openings and corresponding rating curve to simulate bridge pressure flow and road overflow
  • Use a SA/2D connection with culverts to simulate bridge pressure flow and road overflow

2D Computational Time Step Selection

While developing a 2D model, computational runtime may need to be considered—depending upon the size of the model. The following factors can impact computational runtime:

  • Number of cells that define the 2D mesh
  • 2D mesh cell size
  • Computation time step interval
  • Simulation duration
  • Computational equation selection
  • Output settings

For an initial run, a coarse time step can be used (e.g., 5 minutes) to see how the model behaves and performs.

To further refine the computational results, HEC-RAS provides an adjustable time step option, where the computational engine dynamically recomputes the required time step during the simulation based upon the Courant number specified.

Advanced Time Step Parameters

An advantage of the variable time step option is that when not much flow change is occurring in the model, the software will speed up the computations by automatically selecting a larger time step. Then, when the flow conditions start to suddenly change (e.g., dam failure, levee overtopping, etc.), the software will automatically reduce the time step to capture this change. Overall, the variable time step option can provide significant savings in computational time.

Courant numbers as high as 3.0 can be used when the Full Momentum computational method is selected, while Courant numbers as high as 5.0 can provide enough accuracy and stability when using the Diffusion Wave computational method.

However, there may be instances where a Courant number of 1.0 (or less) is required for accuracy and stability—even when using the more stable Diffusion Wave method. Generally, the computation interval should be small enough such that the time required for water to move through any cell is greater than the time step interval. Most importantly, the time step selected must be sufficiently small to produce stable results, which can be determined by viewing stage and discharge hydrograph plots from within the 2D mesh.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Unsteady Flow Computational Options command.

2D Computational Output Settings

As discussed in the prior section, many items can impact the computational run times. An area that is commonly overlooked is the output interval specified in the Compute Unsteady – Current Scenario dialog box.

Computational Output Settings

The defined output intervals should be small enough to allow the modeler to detect and confirm model stability from a simulation by reviewing the computed stage and discharge hydrograph plots. The Mapping output interval is used for animating the flood results on the Map View. This interval must be equal to or larger than the Hydrograph output interval, and the interval to use depends primarily on how interested a modeler is in an animated visualization of the simulation. The smaller the interval, the more data is written to the HEC-RAS analysis results file. This can have a significant impact on computational runtime. A great deal of information can be provided by visualizing the event, so any final run should consider the Mapping output interval, while also balancing data writing and storage. The Detailed output interval can be set to a very large interval, unless detailed computational information is important.

2D Computational Volume Accounting

After the simulation has run, the user can check the computational results to determine if the conservation of mass (volume) was maintained during the simulation. From the Results ribbon menu, select the View Log File menu item.

View Log File Menu Item


This will display a text window showing the results. Scroll to the bottom of the listing to see the overall volumetric percent error in the 2D computations. Generally, this value should be less than 2 percent, and with additional model tuning (as discussed in this article) the percent error can be reduced even more—as shown in this example with 0.002185% error.

Percent-Error.png


Computational log file

2D Flow Area External Boundary Conditions

2D flow areas are created by constructing polygon areas representing the regions to be modelled. Along the 2D flow area polygon mesh boundary, boundary condition polylines are defined to represent different flow conditions or constraints that are to be applied to the 2D flow area. These boundary conditions represent flux boundaries, where flow enters or leaves the 2D flow area. (Boundary conditions can also be defined within the interior of the 2D flow area, to represent additional discharge that enters the 2D flow area—such as flow from a wastewater treatment plant.)

Examples of flux boundaries are:

  • Inflow hydrograph
  • Stage hydrograph (time series)
  • Fixed water surface elevation
  • Normal depth (given user-defined energy slope)
  • Tidal (time-series)

The polygon edges where no boundary conditions are defined are called slip boundaries. These boundaries basically act as frictionless, infinitely tall “glass” walls. 2D flow that encounters a slip boundary will be contained within the 2D flow area, like the vertical sides of a drinking glass.

hec-ras-2d-flow-area-modeling.png

2D Flow Area Internal Boundary Conditions

Additional flow can be introduced into the 2D flow area interior. Use the Assign SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines or Draw SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines command to add a boundary condition line to the interior of the 2D flow area.

Add Internal Boundary Condition Line Commands


An internal boundary condition line must lie completely within the 2D mesh. It cannot be shared with the exterior boundary of the 2D flow area.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about drawing and assigning SA/2D boundary condition lines.

After adding the 2D boundary condition to the interior of the 2D mesh, the mesh faces need to be aligned with the defined boundary condition line. Select the 2D boundary condition polyline and then right-click. Select Enforce Breakline(s) option from the displayed context menu.

Enforce Breakline(s)

Only flow hydrographs with positive or zero values can be assigned as an internal boundary condition. Negative flow values are not allowed. In addition, pumps can be connected to a 2D mesh cell. To extract flow from the interior of a 2D flow area, such as for a water supply pump, an internal connection can be defined (described in the next section) along with a rating curve or time series representing the extraction rate.

2D Flow Area Internal Connections

It is not uncommon to see unreasonable results at dams during a 2D simulation, including erroneously high-water surface elevations due to a lack of release from the dam. This is generally due to the orientation of 2D mesh cells. In such cases, spillways, gates and culvert openings can be incorporated within the 2D flow area using a SA/2D connection representing the dam. The SA/2D Connection Data dialog box is used to define these structures.

HEC-RAS-2D-Flow-Area-Modeling-Img-10.png

The internal connection weir geometry can be used to represent the dam crest and spillway geometry. When using internal connections, the weir flow equations might cause instability and smaller time steps may be required to model the weir flow over the dam and spillway structure. However, for internal connections along dams and other features that behave as weirs, the weir equations should be examined for the model.

2D Flow Area Elements

The 2D mesh cells consider the underlying ground terrain by creating geometric and hydraulic property tables that represent the elevation versus storage volume of the cell and the elevation versus flow area for each of the cell faces. Unlike other 2D flow models, HEC-RAS 2D flow area element cells do not have a flat bottom or a single depth. Therefore, a cell can be partially wet with the correct water volume for a given water surface elevation. Similarly, each of the cell faces are treated like a cross section where detailed hydraulic property tables are computed for elevation versus flow area, wetted perimeter, roughness, etc. This allows larger 2D cells to be used in the HEC-RAS flow computations without losing too much of the underlying terrain details that govern the movement of flow.

3D-Cube_Sea-Bed.png


Idealized representation of a computational 2D cell used by the HEC-RAS 2D solver

Because larger cells can be used in a HEC-RAS 2D flow model in comparison with other 2D flow models, it is important that cell faces be aligned with controlling terrain features, such as river centerlines, bank lines, roadways and levees in order to capture the hydraulic behavior of the 2D flow. Because larger cells can be used, the result is fewer computations, which directly translates into faster computational time.

2D-computational-mesh-with-breaklines-aligned-to-controlling-terrain-features.png

The above figure shows the computational mesh over elevation color-shaded terrain data. The cell centers are where the water surface elevation is computed for each cell. The elevation-volume relationship for each cell is based on the surface geometry of the underlying terrain. Each cell face is represented internally with a detailed cross section based on the underlying terrain.

Flow of water between cells is based on the details of the underlying terrain, as represented by the cell face geometry and the volume contained within that cell. Hence, a small channel that cuts through a cell, and is much smaller than the cell, is still represented by the cell’s elevation-volume relationship and the hydraulic properties of the cell faces. This means water can run through larger cells but still be represented with its normal channel properties.

Performing-detailed-hydraulic-modeling-with-larger-cells.png

An example of a small channel running through much larger grid cells is shown above. In this example, there are several channels that are much smaller than the cell size used to model the area. The cells are 500 ft square, and the channels are less than 100 ft wide. As shown, flow can travel through the smaller channels using the channel’s hydraulic properties. Flow remains in the channels until the river stage is higher than the bank elevation of the channel, where it then spills out into the overbank areas.

2D Flow Area Mesh Types

GeoHECRAS can create the following 2D mesh types. However, HEC-RAS can only create 2D uniform meshes (i.e., square and rectangular elements).

Mesh-Types..png

Each of the above mesh types have their own advantages and disadvantages. Each of these different mesh types can be incorporated within a single 2D flow area using zonal meshing—as described in a later section.

HEC-RAS Uniform 2D Mesh

HEC-RAS can create a mesh that contains squares and rectangles, although only square elements are created in practice. GeoHECRAS simplifies the process of defining these mesh elements by always creating square-shaped elements. Where breaklines are defined, the HEC-RAS meshing engine will refine the mesh using irregular mesh elements so that the mesh cell faces align with the breaklines.

Part of the difficulty with a uniform mesh is that all the cells throughout the entire mesh are the same size. Therefore, when there are regions where a refined mesh is necessary, there is not an automated way of refining the mesh (i.e., creating smaller cells). Similarly, where there are regions where the mesh cell sizes could be larger, there is not an automated way of relaxing the mesh (i.e., creating larger cells).

HEC-RAS Hexagonal 2D Mesh

Similar to the uniform mesh, a hexagonal mesh creates cells that are 6-sided and of uniform size. This mesh type is a bit better at modeling changes in flow direction since the cell faces are generally perpendicular to any flow entering or leaving the cell. However, this mesh type faces issues similar to that of a uniform mesh, as previously described.

HEC-RAS Adaptive 2D Mesh

For a large and complex 2D flow study area, an adaptive 2D mesh can be used in place of a 2D uniform (i.e., square cells) or 2D hexagonal mesh for a faster and more accurate simulation. Adaptive 2D meshing allows GeoHECRAS to determine what size and shape element should be used, based upon the underlying terrain elevation change and user-defined breaklines. Generating a 2D adaptive mesh takes slightly longer than generating a 2D uniform mesh because of the additional computations that the software performs in creating the mesh while it sizes and shapes the 2D elements. The completed 2D adaptive mesh will have automatically refined elements (i.e., creating smaller elements) in areas where additional detail is required, and relaxed elements (i.e., creating larger elements) in areas where the 2D flow is relatively uniform and not much change is occurring. Because of the inherent advantages of the 2D adaptive mesh, the HEC-RAS 2D flow simulations tend to be more stable (because of smaller element sizes where sudden changes occur) and run quicker (because of smaller total number of elements) than an equivalent 2D uniform mesh.

Mesh Editing

While creating a 2D flow area mesh, it may become necessary to manually edit the mesh. Several mesh editing tools are provided in the 2D Flow Area Preview section of the 2D Flow Area Data dialog box.

2D Mesh Editing Tools


The following tools and editing commands are provided within the 2D Flow Area Data dialog box as well as from the Map View.

  • Add, Move, and Delete Node
  • Draw, Edit and Delete Breakline
  • Draw, Edit and Delete 2D Patch Faces
  • Draw, Edit and Delete 2D Flow Area Connection
  • Draw and Delete 2D Flow Area Boundary Condition

In addition, unlimited undo and redo functionality is provided for all mesh editing commands.

Mesh Development Guidelines

Problematic sharp angles should be avoided when defining the mesh boundary and defining breaklines and other mesh controlling elements (i.e., 2D connections, 2D conveyance obstructions, etc.). If jagged edges exist for a 2D mesh boundary or breakline, significant mesh modifications will be required. Not performing this step could be the difference between minutes versus a day when creating an error-free HEC-RAS 2D mesh.

It is recommended that 2D mesh errors be addressed by first modifying the mesh boundary and breaklines, as opposed to moving mesh cells. Using this approach should help eliminate the need to resolve repeated errors regarding cells along the mesh boundaries and breaklines that would occur when a new mesh is generated (such as if a new cell size is defined).

Mesh Generation – Rebuild and Update Commands

After the user has added additional 2D elements, breaklines, 2D connections, 2D mesh zones, 2D bridge piers, and more, the 2D flow area mesh needs to be updated to include these features and mesh changes. The Rebuild and Update commands in the 2D Flow Area Data dialog box can be used for updating the 2D flow area mesh.

Rebuild Update Commands


The Rebuild and Update commands will cause the software to recreate the 2D flow area mesh.

Descriptions of these commands follow:

Rebuild Command

This command causes the software to recreate the entire 2D mesh using all the defined features. Any user edits to the 2D mesh elements are discarded.

Update Command

This command is like the Rebuild command but retains all user edits to the 2D mesh elements. This is helpful because the user may have performed several manual refinements and edits to the 2D mesh and using this command will cause the mesh generation to include all of these refinements and edits.

Notes:

  • The dialog box has a Protect Cells? option to enforce the cell protection radius around the break line. This option protects the cells immediately around the break line from being deleted or moved due to other break lines that may be very close.
  • There is also an optional Repeat cells field that allows you to repeat the cell size defined in the Cell Spacing field multiple times. For example, if the user entered a Cell spacing of 50 ft, then the cells on both sides of the break line would be 50 ft cells. If the user also entered a value of 2 in the Repeat cells field, then two additional rows of 50 ft cells would be placed on both sides of the break line.

Automatic Correction of 2D Mesh Bad Elements

The HEC-RAS automated 2D mesh generation feature works well but can create meshes that have the following problems.

  • Cells containing more than 8 faces
  • Invalid face points on boundary
  • Duplicate (overlapping) cells
  • Cell faces crossing flow boundary
  • Invalid cell faces on mesh perimeter
  • Self-intersecting cells

HEC-RAS requires that the user manually edit the problematic cells, whereas GeoHECRAS will automatically correct these bad cells. To direct GeoHECRAS to correct these bad cells, make certain that the Auto-fix bad elements checkbox is checked in the 2D Flow Area Data dialog box.

Auto-fix-bad-elements


Auto-fix bad elements option will cause the software to correct any malformed 2D elements.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base for more information on potential mesh generation problems.

2D Flow Area Zonal Meshing

To take advantage of the various 2D mesh types that GeoHECRAS provides, the software allows the user to define mesh zones within a 2D flow area, where each zone can have its own mesh type and corresponding parameters (e.g., element size, etc.). This allows the user to define refinement regions for specific areas of interest. For example, in a critical infrastructure area, a mesh zone could be defined, and a much smaller element size used to capture the flow direction and velocities that occur during a flood event.

Zonal-Meshing-1.png


2D Flow Area Breaklines

Breaklines are used to define sudden breaks in the terrain surface and where interruptions in surface water flow will occur. Breaklines should be added where there is:

  • Sudden change in bathymetry, like top of bank or toe of slope
  • Barrier to flow, such as a levee or roadway embankment
  • Definitive flow direction, such as a stream or river centerline
  • Cell size refinement, such as where there are a lot of changes occurring in a small area

Breaklines force the 2D mesh cell faces to align with the breakline and prevent cells from crossing the breakline. Breaklines are critical to creating an accurate 2D mesh, so that the mesh properly represents an accurate bathymetric model.

When defining a breakline, the user can specify the cell size (or cell spacing) along the line. This can be used to refine the 2D mesh where additional detail needs to be captured in the defined model—such as along a stream or river channel. Breaklines can be used along, and be offset from, elevated roadways and other obstructions to flooding to sculpt the mesh to incorporate these features into the model.

Creating a 2D mesh is often an iterative process, where the modeler revises the 2D mesh to represent the 2D flow characteristics for the region being modelled. Hence, breaklines can be added at any time to the 2D mesh. When drawing breaklines, align them with levees, roads, and any high ground that you want the mesh faces to align with. Breaklines should be placed along the main channel banks in order to keep flow in the channel and until the flow gets high enough to overtop any high ground along the main channel.

When cell edges are situated along the crest of roadway embankments, flow through the obstruction is prevented and instead retained behind these embankments, as dictated by the surrounding topography. The cell size along the breaklines should be defined small enough to model the conveyance being routed along a roadway ditch, etc. Culverts and other roadway crossings can be modeled using SA/2D connections, allowing flow to pass through the roadway embankment to the other side of the roadway.

If an elevation feature, such as a roadway embankment that would impede flow, lies within a grid cell instead of along a cell edge, water will flow across that elevation feature before it gets high enough to overtop that elevation feature. Adding a breakline along the top of the elevation feature will correct this issue, as shown below.

Flow-Leaking-Embankment-Comparison.png


Example of flow jumping through an obstruction when large 2D flow cells are used

Breaklines should be placed along a dam crest, and the cell size for such breaklines may need to be set finer than the nominal 2D mesh cell size. Breaklines along dams can also be converted to internal connections, for which the weir geometry can be used to represent the dam.

After performing an initial simulation, it should become clear where significant trouble spots exist, creating artificial backwater. Care should be taken to refine the 2D mesh at these locations to ensure the mesh accurately represents how the flow travels. A balance between refining the mesh in trouble spots to produce satisfactory results and unnecessary mesh editing is obvious; the point of diminishing returns should be relatively easy to identify after a first pass of refining significant trouble areas. If there are numerous small structures in the area being modeled, defining them using breaklines or internal connections may be hydraulically insignificant and should be avoided.

When using breaklines to account for levees, roadway embankments, and other features that act like levees, consideration should be taken to only apply breaklines where the feature provides realistic flood protection. Modeling non-FEMA accredited levees may produce unreasonable results representing flood protection that really does not exist. Therefore, engineering judgement should be used when defining breaklines for levees and levee-like features.

GeoHECRAS allows you to assign breaklines from previously defined CAD or GIS polylines, or by interactively drawing them on the Map View. From the Input ribbon menu, select the 2D Breaklines menu. You will see commands for assigning or drawing a breakline.

Breakline Menu


The Input ribbon menu contains several commands for creating and editing breaklines.

The Assign 2D Flow Area Breaklines and Draw 2D Flow Area Breaklines commands have similar dialog boxes, as shown below. The software will automatically name the breaklines, but the user can change the name to whatever is desired.

Assign Breaklines dialog boxDraw Breaklines dialog box

The following entries are used to control how 2D cells are created in the vicinity of the breakline:

Cell Spacing along Breakline

This entry represents cell spacing along the breakline. If this entry is left blank, then the cell spacing used in the vicinity of the breakline will be used. Click on the […] button to measure the cell spacing from the Map View.

Relaxed Cell Spacing in 2D Flow Area

This entry represents the cell spacing further away from the breakline. If this entry is left blank, then the cell spacing used in the vicinity of the breakline will be used. This value should not be the same as the Cell spacing along breakline value, or there may be many cell errors introduced along the breakline. Click on the […] button to measure the cell spacing from the Map View. When creating the mesh, the software will automatically gradually transition the cell size from what is defined for the breakline and the area surrounding the breakline.

Breakline Context Menu

Right-clicking on the breakline will display a context menu. This menu contains commands that are specific to the selected breakline. For example, the Enforce Breakline(s) context menu command will cause the software to regenerate the mesh in the vicinity of the breakline so that the cell faces align with the breakline. Note that some bad elements may be reported after enforcing the breakline into the mesh. However, the software will automatically fix these bad elements when the mesh is rebuilt from within the 2D Mesh Area Data dialog box, as described in this article.

Breakline-Context-Menu.png

Double-clicking on a breakline will cause the 2D Flow Area Breakline Data dialog box to be displayed. This dialog box provides some additional information that can be used to define how the breakline influences the 2D mesh.

2D Breakline Data dialog box

The following additional entries control how 2D cells are created in the vicinity of the breakline:

Repeat Breakline Cells

This spin control causes additional layers of identically sized cells to be created adjacent to the breakline cells.

Protect Breakline Cells

This checkbox causes the software to leave any manual edits of the cells that align with the breakline as they are. Regenerating the 2D mesh will not change the cells that are adjacent to the breakline.

The 2D Flow Area Data dialog box also allows the user to edit the breakline data. The Enforce Breaklines and Connections section allow the user to edit some of the breakline data, as well as disable breaklines that are already defined.

2D Flow Area Data Breakline Data dialog box

2D Ineffective Flow Areas

Ineffective flow areas can be assigned to the 2D mesh to account for regions where the water is not actively being conveyed. The water will pond in such areas, and its velocity in the downstream direction will be close to zero. These defined regions are included in the storage calculations but are not included as part of the active flow area. When using ineffective flow areas, no wetted perimeter friction is included at the boundary between the ineffective flow area and active flow area.

Ineffective-flow-at-the-entrance-to-a-culvert-1.png

GeoHECRAS allows the user to define 2D ineffective flow areas using polygons. The software will automatically refine the 2D mesh to accommodate the ineffective flow area shape.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base for further discussion of 2D ineffective flow areas and how to create them.

2D Conveyance Obstructions

Conveyance obstructions can be assigned to the 2D mesh to account for regions that are permanently blocked from conveying flow. Conveyance obstructions, such as buildings and other structures, decrease the flow area and add additional wetted perimeter where the water comes in contact with the obstruction.

GeoHECRAS allows the user to define 2D conveyance obstructions using polygons. The software will automatically refine the 2D mesh to accommodate the conveyance obstruction shape.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about 2D conveyance obstructions and how to create them.

2D Bridge Modeling

When working with bridges with complex geometry, modeling the hydraulics in 2D provides a clearer understanding and a more accurate representation of the flow behavior at the bridge. Water may flow through multiple paths and directions at the bridge opening. A HEC-RAS 1D model will assume that the water surface elevation is constant across the bridge opening, whereas a HEC-RAS 2D model will show that the water surface elevation varies across the bridge opening as the flow makes its way through the opening. In addition, a 1D model assumes an average velocity at the bridge opening, while a 2D model will accurately represent the velocity field at the bridge. This is particularly important when computing potential bridge pier scour. There are other drawbacks to using a HEC-RAS 1D model for bridge analysis:

  • Ineffective flow areas to mark areas of non-conveyance
  • Energy losses from channel bends
  • Energy losses due to eddies at skewed bridges

The above concerns are automatically handled when using a 2D model. Many bridge modeling situations exist that are effectively managed with a 2D model, but that would be problematic with a 1D model. For example, modeling skewed bridges can cause additional energy losses and increased water surface elevations, conditions that would not be apparent when using a 1D model.

Skewed-bridge-opening-1.png

GeoHECRAS provides additional functionality to speed up 2D modeling of bridges, including stamping of bridge piers directly into the 2D flow area mesh.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about HEC-RAS 2D bridge modeling with GeoHECRAS.

2D Culvert Modeling

Culvert roadway crossings can be incorporated into a 2D flow area using internal connections. GeoHECRAS allows the user to draw the internal connection on the Map View, which is used to represent the roadway centerline (weir geometry). The culverts can also be drawn on the Map View, with the culvert invert elevations extracted from the terrain model or assigned from a corresponding GIS shapefile. The 2D flow area cells should be small enough so that the culvert inlet and outlet correspond to different cells. The culvert inlet and outlet cannot reside in the same 2D flow area cell.

Culvert Alignment

After creating the roadway crossing and culverts, the roadway geometry and culverts are shown on the Map View.

Culvert-Crossing-Map-View.png

However, looking at the culvert inlet and outlet locations on the Map View, it may be necessary to refine the cells around the inlet and outlet. Use the Draw Breaklines command and place breaklines a short distance from the culvert inlet and outlet locations. Then update the mesh and culvert inlet and outlet locations to be well within a local cell. Alternatively, the user can use the 2D Flow Area Data dialog box and add and/or move 2D cells to develop a refinement. However, this requires that the user manually edit the cells at the culvert inlet and outlet each time the 2D flow area mesh is rebuilt.

Culvert-Inlet-and-Outlet-Refinement.png

When defining culverts in a 2D flow area, the culvert inverts cannot be lower than the terrain elevation of the 2D cells in which the inlet and outlet are connected. Either the culvert inverts can be adjusted upward, or the Adjust Elevations command contained in the Terrain ribbon menu can be used to lower the cell elevations in which the culvert inlet and outlet are connected.

Adjust Elevations

Adjust Elevations command can adjust the cell elevations at the culvert inlet and outlet.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Adjust Elevations command.

2D Modeling › Mesh Generation & Zones

Draw and Assign 2D Flow Area Breaklines

Breaklines are used to define sudden breaks in the terrain surface and interruptions in surface water flow. Breaklines should be added where there are:

  • Sudden changes in bathymetry, like top of bank or toe of slope
  • Barrier to flow, such as a levee or roadway embankment
  • Definitive flow direction, such as a stream or river centerline
  • Cell size refinement, such as where mutiple changes occur in a small area

Breaklines force the 2D mesh cell faces to align with the breakline and prevent cells from crossing the breakline. Breaklines are critical to create an accurate 2D mesh so that the mesh properly represents an accurate bathymetric model.

In GeoHECRAS 2D, flow area breaklines can be defined by either drawing or assigning breaklines on the Map View using the following commands:

  • Draw 2D Flow Area Breaklines
  • Assign 2D Flow Area Breaklines

Drawing/Assigning 2D Flow Area Breaklines

The Draw/Assign 2D Flow Area Breaklines command is used to manually draw/assign multiple breaklines on the Map View, one after another, until completed.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw/Assign 2D Flow Area Breaklines command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, expand the 2D Breaklines dropdown menu and then choose the Draw/Assign 2D Flow Area Breaklines command.
    [12:50 PM] Abhishek Mishra 1. Draw/Assign 2D Flow Area Breaklines Input ribbon menu command 2. Draw 2D Flow Area Breaklines dialog box 3. Assign 2D Flow Area Breaklines dialog box 4. [Draw] button 5. Breakline polyline read-only field 6. [Pick] button 7. Breakline polylines/polygons read-only field 8. Breakline Parameters (Optional) section Draw and Assign 2D Flow Area Breaklines Images.zip
  2. The following dialog boxes will be displayed.
    • Draw 2D Flow Area Breaklines:
      Draw 2D Flow Area Breaklines dialog box
    • Assign 2D Flow Area Breaklines:
      Assign 2D Flow Area Breaklines dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Draw and Assign 2D Flow Area Breaklines commands and interact with the above dialog boxes.

Drawing 2D Flow Area Breaklines

Drawing Breakline Polyline

The Draw Breakline Polyline section is used to draw 2D flow area breaklines on the Map View using polylines. To draw a breakline polyline, follow the steps below:

  1. Click the [Draw] button.
    [Draw] button
  2. The Draw 2D Flow Area Breaklines dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar informing the user on what to do next.
  3. Draw the breakline polylines on the map View.
    Note: To draw the polyline using curvilinear segments, use Create curvilinear polyline checkbox option.
  4. After the breakline polyline has been drawn, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The Draw 2D Flow Area Breaklines dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Breakline polyline read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    Breakline polyline read-only field
  6. In the Breakline Specifications section, the software automatically names the drawn breakline. Note that the user can also change the name to whatever is desired from the Breakline name entry field.

Assigning 2D Flow Area Breaklines

Selecting Breakline Polylines/Polygons

The Select Breakline Polylines/Polygons section is used to assign breaklines from previously defined CAD or GIS polylines/polygons on the Map View. To assign breakline polylines/polygons, follow the steps below:

  1. Click the [Pick] button.
    [Pick] button
  2. The Assign 2D Flow Area Breaklines dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the CAD or GIS polylines/polygons.
  3. Click on the CAD or GIS polylines/polygons on the Map View to select them.
  4. After the breakline polylines/polygons have been selected, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The Assign 2D Flow Area Breaklines dialog box will be redisplayed and the number of selected polylines/polygons will be displayed in the Breakline polylines/polygons read-only field.
    Breakline polylines/polygons read-only field
  6. In the Breakline Specifications section, define the prefix for the names of the breaklines in the Auto-name breakline, breakline prefix entry field.
    Note that the Breakline name option is only available when a single polyline/polygon is selected. The user can then define the name of the breakline in the Breakline name entry field. Otherwise, the software auto-names the breaklines using the defined prefix, for example, BL-##, where ## represents the breaklines count (i.e., 01, 02, and so on) and BL represents the prefix.

Breakline Parameters (Optional)

This section is common to both the Draw 2D Flow Area Breaklines and Assign 2D Flow Area Breaklines dialog boxes and allows the user to define additional parameters to control how 2D cells are created in the vicinity of the breakline.

Breakline Parameters (Optional) section

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Cell spacing along breakline(s)
    This entry represents cell spacing along the breakline. If this entry is left blank, then the cell spacing used in the vicinity of the breakline will be used. Click on the […] button to measure the breakline cell spacing from the Map View.
  • Relaxed cell spacing in 2D flow area
    This entry represents the cell spacing further away from the breakline. If this entry is left blank, then the cell spacing used in the vicinity of the breakline will be used. This value should not be the same as the Cell spacing along breakline(s) value or cell errors may be introduced along the breakline. Click on the […] button to measure the breakline cell spacing from the Map View.
  • Repeat breakline cells
    This spin control causes additional layers of identically sized cells to be created adjacent to the breakline cells.
  • Protect breakline cells
    This checkbox causes the software to leave any manual edits of the cells that align with the breakline as they are.

When all the data have been defined, click the [Apply] button to complete the process of drawing or assigning breaklines.

2D Modeling › Mesh Generation & Zones

Delete 2D Mesh Zones

The Delete 2D Mesh Zones command allows the user to selectively delete the 2D mesh zones created inside the 2D mesh.

The user can create 2D mesh zones inside a 2D mesh using the Draw or Assign 2D Mesh Zones command. To learn more about these commands, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Follow the steps below to use the Delete 2D Mesh Zones command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the 2D Flow Areas dropdown menu and select the Delete 2D Mesh Zones command.
    Delete 2D Mesh Zones input ribbon menu command
  2. The Delete 2D Mesh Zones dialog box will be displayed.
    Delete 2D Mesh Zones dialog box
  3. From the Select 2D Mesh Zones section, check the checkboxes corresponding to the mesh zones you want to delete. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to select the mesh zones from the Map View.
    Select 2D Mesh Zones section - [Pick] button
    Note: To select/deselect all the mesh zones at once, check/uncheck the 2D Mesh Zone checkbox.
  4. The number of selected mesh zones will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.
    Total selected read-only field
  5. After selecting the mesh zones, click the [OK] button.
    [OK] button
  6. The following confirmational dialog box will be displayed.
    Delete 2D Mesh Zones confirmational dialog box
  7. Click the [Yes] button and the software will delete all the selected mesh zones.
2D Modeling › Mesh Generation & Zones

Draw and Assign 2D Mesh Zones Command

GeoHECRAS allows the user to assign or draw a 2D Mesh Zone polygon boundary and define the meshing scheme and corresponding parameters (e.g., element size, etc.). This allows the user to refine the mesh more easily in areas of interest and maintain that refinement as the model continues to be developed. For example, in a critical infrastructure area, a mesh zone could be created and defined, and a much smaller element size can be used to capture the flow direction and velocities that occur during a flood event.

In order to define a 2D Mesh Zone, a polygon is created to define the boundary of the mesh zone and a cell spacing system is provided to be used in the 2D Mesh Zone generation routine. 2D Mesh Zones can be used to densify an area where more detailed results are desired due to rapid changes in terrain or water surface elevation. Additionally, the 2D Mesh Zones allow the user to simplify an area where the water surface elevation will not change significantly, and users want to reduce the number of computation points in the 2D flow area.

Creating 2D Mesh Zones

To create 2D Mesh Zones, the Draw 2D Mesh Zones or Assign 2D Mesh Zones command can be used. Both commands work similarly.

Draw and Assign 2D Mesh Zones ribbon menu command

Drawing 2D Mesh Zones

The Draw 2D Mesh Zones command allows the user to manually draw individual polygons on the Map View as 2D Mesh Zones.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw 2D Mesh Zones command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the 2D Flow Areas dropdown menu, and then select the Draw 2D Mesh Zones command.
    Draw 2D Mesh Zones ribbon menu command
  2. The Draw 2D Mesh Zones dialog box will be displayed.
    Draw 2D Mesh Zones dialog box
  3. Click the [Draw] button adjacent to the 2D mesh zone polygon field to draw a polygon inside any 2D flow area. Use the Create curvilinear polygon checkbox option to draw the polygon using curvilinear segments.
  4. The Draw 2D Mesh Zones dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user what to do next.
  5. Draw the 2D mesh zone polygon on the Map View. While drawing elements, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between the curvilinear and the linear digitizing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about drawing elements on the Map View.
  6. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Draw 2D Mesh Zones dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the 2D mesh zone polygon read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    2D mesh zone polygon read-only field
  7. The software auto-names the newly created 2D Mesh Zone polygon. However, the user can provide a different name for it in the 2D mesh zone name entry field.
  8. From the 2D meshing scheme dropdown combo box entry field, select the mesh type. GeoHECRAS can create the following 2D mesh types:
    • Uniform Mesh
    • Hexagonal Mesh
    • Adaptive Mesh
  9. The Element spacing entry field defines the cell spacing used in the 2D Mesh Zone generation routine. By default, the software uses a value of 30 ft. The user can enter a different value or click the […] button to measure the cell spacing from the Map View.
  10. The Fix adjacent 2D flow area edges checkbox is used to add internal breaklines between adjacent 2D model domains and prompts adjacent 2D elements from the 2D model domain to align with each other.
  11. Click on the [Apply] button and the 2D Mesh Zone boundary will be created. Repeat the above steps to draw additional 2D Mesh Zones.

Assigning 2D Mesh Zones

The Assign 2D Mesh Zones command allows the user to manually assign individual polygons as 2D Mesh Zones. To use this command, a polygon that can be selected must already exist on the Map View or a polygon shapefile layer must be loaded to represent mesh zones.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign 2D Mesh Zones command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the 2D Flow Areas dropdown menu, and then select the Assign 2D Mesh Zones command.
    Assign 2D Mesh Zones ribbon menu command
  2. The Assign 2D Mesh Zones dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign 2D Mesh Zones dialog box
  3. Click the [Pick] button adjacent to the 2D flow zone polyline/polygon field.
  4. The Assign 2D Mesh Zones dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next. The user can then select polylines or polygons from the Map View.
  5. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Assign 2D Mesh Zones dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the 2D flow zone polyline/polygon read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.
    2D flow zone polyline/polygon read-only field
    Note that the 2D Mesh Zone Specifications section of the Assign 2D Mesh Zones command is similar to that of the Draw 2D Mesh Zones command. Hence, refer to the Draw 2D Mesh Zones command section of this article to learn about the options available in this section.
  6. Click on the [Apply] button and the software will treat the polyline or polygon as a 2D Mesh Zone boundary.
2D Modeling › Mesh Generation & Zones

HEC-RAS 2D Mesh Generation Errors & Corrections

Creating a HEC-RAS 2D mesh that correctly represents the flow area being modeled can take some time due to the need to add the appropriate details to the model to represent the components and due to the terrain data to be included.

When working with complex meshes, there may be times when the mesh generation fails to run. When this situation occurs, the user will need to review the data that has been assigned to construct the mesh.

For example, the below 2D mesh fails to correctly generate an adaptive mesh.

2D mesh generation fail

However, upon review of the polygon boundary used to define the mesh, it becomes evident that the upper boundary contains a large number of unnecessary and redundant vertices.

Simplify elements

In this situation, the Simplify Elements command of the Map Edit ribbon menu can be used to correct this issue by removing the redundant vertices along the 2D mesh boundary.

The following sections describe how to perform this task.

Export 2D Flow Area Mesh as Shapefile

To be able to simplify the 2D flow area mesh boundary, it needs to be exported as a shapefile. Follow the steps below:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Export Data dropdown menu, and then select the Export HEC-RAS to Shapefiles command.
    Export HEC-RAS to Shapefiles input ribbon menu command
  2. The Export HEC-RAS to Shapefiles dialog box will be displayed.
    Export HEC-RAS to Shapefiles dialog box
    The Export HEC-RAS to Shapefiles dialog box is used to export a HEC-RAS model to GIS shapefiles allowing the HEC-RAS model data to be shared with GIS software. Refer to this article in our knowledge base for further discussion on how to export the HEC-RAS elements.
  3. Click the […] button adjacent to the HEC-RAS shapefiles folder entry and then choose the directory to save the exported shapefiles.
  4. Under the HEC-RAS Input Data section, turn off all the HEC-RAS element checkboxes except for the 2D flow area boundaries checkbox.
    HEC-RAS Input Data section
  5. Click the [Export] button.
    [Export] button
  6. The software will export the 2D flow area mesh boundary as a polygon shapefile.

Import Polygon Shapefile

Next, we need to import the polygon shapefile that was exported. Follow the steps below to import the polygon shapefile.

  1. Right-click on the Map Data Layers panel and then select Add Layers from the displayed context menu.
    Add Layers displayed context menu command
  2. Browse and select the exported polygon shapefile, and then click the [Open] button.
    Add Layers - [Open] button
  3. The selected shapefile should be loaded and correctly overlay the HEC-RAS model area.

Polygon Simplification

The imported polygon shapefile will be used to recreate the 2D flow area for the HEC-RAS model. However, the number of vertices that define the shapefile polygon first needs to be simplified. For this, the Simplify Elements command can be used. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to use the Simplify Elements command.

Upon using the Simplify Elements command, the polygon will be simplified, reducing the number of redundant vertices used to describe the polygon boundary.

Simplified Polygon boundary

Assigning Polygon as 2D Flow Area Mesh

After simplifying the polygon, it can be used to define the 2D mesh. In HEC-RAS, generation of the 2D mesh for 2D modeling begins with the 2D flow area. The 2D flow area defines the boundary for which the computation will occur. The user can use the Assign 2D Flow Areas command for assigning the simplified polygon as a 2D flow area. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to use the Assign 2D Flow Areas command.

After the 2D flow area polygon boundary is created, the next step is to begin generating the 2D mesh. Follow the steps below to generate the 2D mesh:

  1. Double-click on the 2D flow area on the Map View to display the 2D Flow Area Data dialog box.
    2D Flow Area Data dialog box
  2. Click the [Update] button.
    [Update] button
  3. The software will generate the 2D mesh without the previously reported error.
    generated 2D mesh without the previously reported error
2D Modeling › 2D Roughness & Land Cover

Edit 2D Roughness Regions Command

In GeoHECRAS, the Edit 2D Roughness Regions command allows the user to edit Manning's roughness regions, such as for channel areas, where the Manning's roughness data override the land cover data used for 2D flow areas.

Follow the steps below to use the Edit 2D Roughness Regions command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Manning’s Roughness dropdown menu and select the Edit 2D Roughness Regions command.
    Input ribbon menu
  2. The Edit 2D Roughness Regions dialog box will be displayed.
    Edit 2D Roughness Regions dialog box
  3. Click on the [Pick] button to select a 2D roughness region from the Map View.
    Edit 2D Roughness Regions dialog box
  4. The Edit 2D Roughness Regions dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user on what to do next. The user can then select a 2D roughness region on the Map View.
  5. After selecting a 2D roughness region from the Map View, the dialog box will be redisplayed. The selected 2D roughness region will be displayed in the Region name dropdown entry.
    Edit 2D Roughness Regions dialog box
  6. Alternatively, the 2D roughness regions available in the project can be directly selected from the Region name dropdown entry.
    Edit 2D Roughness Regions dialog box Note: The up and down arrow buttons next to the dropdown entry allow the user to switch between the available 2D roughness regions.
  7. The edit option (Pencil icon) next to the Region name dropdown entry allows the user to edit the name of the selected 2D roughness region.
    Edit 2D Roughness Regions dialog box
  8. The Fill Color color palette allows the user to select the color fill of the 2D roughness region to be displayed on the Map View.
    Edit 2D Roughness Regions
2D Modeling › 2D Roughness & Land Cover

Draw and Assign 2D Roughness Regions Command

GeoHECRAS allows the user to create their own 2D flow area roughness regions. These regions are user-defined polygons that can be used to override the base Manning's n roughness values within that polygon. For example, the user may want to define a polygon representing the river channel so that the roughness values are more representative of the values found in the channel rather than in the overbank areas.

Creating a Roughness Region

To create a roughness region, either the Draw 2D Roughness Regions or Assign 2D Roughness Regions command can be used. Both commands work similarly.

Draw and Assign 2D Roughness Regions commands from the Manning’s Roughness dropdown menu

Draw 2D Roughness Regions Command

The Draw 2D Roughness Regions command allows the user to interactively draw Manning's roughness region polygons, such as for channel areas, where the Manning's roughness data overrides the land cover data used for 2D flow areas.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw 2D Roughness Regions command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Manning's Roughness dropdown menu, and then select the Draw 2D Roughness Regions command. Draw 2D Roughness Regions Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Draw 2D Roughness Regions dialog box will be displayed. Draw 2D Roughness Regions dialog box
  3. Click the [Draw] button adjacent to the 2D Roughness region polygon field. By default, the software allows the user to draw the roughness region polygon using linear segments. Use the Create curvilinear polygon checkbox to draw the polygon using curvilinear segments.
  4. The Draw 2D Roughness Regions dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user what to do next. The user can then draw 2D roughness region polygons on the Map View. While drawing elements, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between the curvilinear and the linear digitizing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the drawing elements on the Map View.
  5. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  6. The software will then return the user to the Draw 2D Roughness Regions dialog box, and the status of the 2D Roughness region polygon read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn. 2D Roughness region polygon read-only field
  7. Provide the 2D roughness region name in the 2D Roughness region ID entry field.
  8. Click the [Apply] button, and the 2D roughness region will be created. Repeat the above steps to draw additional 2D Roughness regions.

Assign 2D Roughness Regions Command

The Assign 2D Roughness Regions command allows the user to assign Manning's roughness region from polylines and polygons, such as for channel areas, where the Manning's roughness data overrides the land cover data used for 2D flow areas.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign 2D Roughness Regions command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Manning's Roughness dropdown menu, and then select the Assign 2D Roughness Regions command. Assign 2D Roughness Regions Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Assign 2D Roughness Regions dialog box will be displayed. Assign 2D Roughness Regions dialog box
  3. Click the [Pick] button adjacent to the 2D Roughness region polyline/polygon field.
  4. The Assign 2D Roughness Regions dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user what to do next. The user can then select polylines or polygons from Map View.
  5. Upon selecting a polyline or polygon from the Map View, the software will then return the user to the Assign 2D Roughness Regions dialog box, and the status of the 2D Roughness region polyline/polygon read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected. 2D Roughness region polyline/polygon read-only field
  6. Provide the 2D roughness region name in the 2D Roughness region ID entry field.
  7. Click on the [Apply] button, and the software will treat the polyline or polygon as a 2D roughness region.

Assigning Manning’s Coefficient to 2D Roughness Regions

The user can utilize the Edit 2D Land Cover Data command to enter/override the Manning’s roughness coefficient for the assigned/drawn 2D roughness region(s) drawn over the existing 2D land cover layer. Refer to this article in our knowledge base for more information.

2D Modeling › 2D Roughness & Land Cover

Edit 2D Land Cover Data Command

The Edit 2D Land Cover Data command allows the user to manually edit land cover data including overriding Manning’s roughness data for land cover for 2D flow areas. To learn how to create and assign land cover data as Manning’s roughness, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Follow the steps below to use the Edit 2D Land Cover Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Manning Roughness dropdown menu and then select the Edit 2D Land Cover Data command.
    Edit 2D Land Cover Data Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Edit 2D Land Cover Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Edit 2D Land Cover Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Edit 2D Land Cover Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

2D Land Cover Manning’s Roughness Data

This section allows the user to select the desired 2D land cover layer to be edited.

The user can click the dropdown combo box adjacent to the 2D land cover layer entry and select the desired 2D land cover layer.

2D land cover layer dropdown entry

This section also displays a table listing land covers and the respective Manning’s roughness coefficients that have already been assigned in the model. Note that based on the land cover layer selected in the dropdown, the number of columns can be changed in the table.

The user can also export the table as a PDF file or a Microsoft Excel file or copy the table to the clipboard. To copy or export the table data to a different format, right-click anywhere in the table and select the Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF command from the displayed context menu.

Right click context menu commands

Selected Cells Group Editing

This section enables the user to select the desired cells from the table and then edit the coefficients either individually or in a batch.

Selected Cell Group Editing section

The user can edit the coefficients using one of the following radio button options:

  • Add constant: This option adds a constant value to the selected cell's value.
  • Multiply by a factor: This option multiplies the selected cell's value by a user-defined number.
  • Apply value: This option replaces the selected cell's value with the user-specified value. Clicking the […] button will display the Manning’s Roughness information dialog box.

To edit the cell’s coefficient, select the cells by clicking on them while pressing the [Ctrl] or [Shift] key; choose the desired cell editing option; enter the change coefficient, and then click the [Apply Change] button.

[Apply Change] button

Note that the [Apply Change] button is only available when a group editing option other than the No change option and at least one cell have been selected.

Once the edit operation has been completed, click the [OK] button to close the dialog box.

2D Modeling › 2D Obstructions & Ineffective Areas

2D Ineffective Flow Areas

Ineffective flow areas can be assigned to the 2D mesh to account for regions where the water is not actively being conveyed. The water will pond in such areas, and its velocity in the downstream direction will be close to zero. This water is included in the storage calculations, but it is not included as part of the active flow area. When using ineffective flow areas, no wetted perimeter friction is included at the boundary between the ineffective flow area and active flow area.

Ineffective-Flow-Areas.png

2D ineffective flow areas are assigned using polygons. The software will automatically refine the 2D mesh to accommodate the ineffective flow area shape.

2D Ineffective Flow Areas

2D ineffective flow areas can be defined using the following commands:

  • Assign 2D Ineffective Flow Areas
  • Draw 2D Ineffective Flow Areas

Assign 2D Ineffective Flow Areas Command

If polygons have already been drawn on the Map View or a polygon shapefile layer has been loaded to represent ineffective flow areas, then the Assign 2D Ineffective Flow Areas command can be used to assign 2D ineffective flow areas.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign 2D Ineffective Flow Areas command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the 2D Flow Areas menu item, and then select the Assign 2D Ineffective Flow Areas command.
    Assign 2D Ineffective Flow Areas ribbon menu command
  2. The Assign 2D Ineffective Flow Areas dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign 2D Ineffective Flow Areas dialog box

There are two options for assigning ineffective flow areas to a 2D mesh:

  • Select Multiple Polygons
  • Select Polygon Shapefile

The following sections describe how to use these assignment options.

Select Multiple Polygons Option

This option allows multiple polygons to be interactively selected from the Map View and then assigned as ineffective flow areas.

Follow the steps below to assign ineffective flow areas using the Select Multiple Polygons option:

  1. Choose the Select Multiple Polygons radio button option. Then, click the [Pick] button.
    [Pick] button - Assign 2D Ineffective Flow Areas dialog box
  2. The Assign 2D Ineffective Flow Areas dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar informing the user what to do next.
  3. Select the polygons on the Map View. Then, right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Assign 2D Ineffective Flow Areas dialog box will be redisplayed.
  5. Click the [Apply] button. The selected polygons will be assigned as 2D ineffective flow areas.
    [Apply] button - Assign 2D Ineffective Flow Areas dialog box

Select Polygon Shapefile Option

This option allows a polygon shapefile layer to be used to assign 2D ineffective flow areas.

Follow the steps below to assign ineffective flow areas using the Select Polygon Shapefile option:

  1. Choose the Select Polygon Shapefile radio button option.
    Select Polygon Shapefile radio button option
  2. The software will display all loaded polygon shapefile layers in the Shapefile layer dropdown combo box. Select the corresponding shapefile layer representing the 2D ineffective flow areas.
  3. Click the [Apply] button. The polygons on the shapefile layer will be assigned as 2D ineffective flow areas.
    [Apply] button

Draw 2D Ineffective Flow Areas Command

The user can interactively draw polygons on the Map View in order to define the ineffective flow areas.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw 2D Ineffective Flow Areas command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the 2D Flow Areas menu item, and then select the Draw 2D Ineffective Flow Areas command.
    Draw 2D Ineffective Flow Areas ribbon menu command
  2. The Draw 2D Ineffective Flow Areas dialog box will be displayed.
    Draw 2D Ineffective Flow Areas dialog box
  3. Click the [Draw] button. The Draw 2D Ineffective Flow Areas dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar informing the user on what to do next.
  4. Draw the polygon on the Map View.
    Note: To draw the polygon using curvilinear segments, use Create curvilinear polygon checkbox option.
  5. After the polygon has been drawn, the Draw 2D Ineffective Flow Areas dialog box will be redisplayed.
  6. Click the [Apply] button.
    [Apply] button - Draw Ineffective Flow Areas dialog box
  7. Repeat the process for all other polygon areas to be defined as 2D ineffective flow areas.

Incorporating Ineffective Flow Areas into the 2D Mesh

After the ineffective flow area polygons have been defined, the software will stamp them into the 2D mesh flow area and refine the mesh to account for each polygon’s shape.

Follow the steps below to incorporate ineffective flow areas into the 2D Mesh:

  1. Double-click on the 2D mesh on the Map View to display the 2D Flow Area Data dialog box.
  2. Click the [Update] button and the software will incorporate the 2D ineffective flow areas into the 2D mesh.
    [Update] button - 2D Flow Area Data dialog box
2D Modeling › 2D Obstructions & Ineffective Areas

2D Conveyance Obstructions

Conveyance obstructions can be assigned to the 2D mesh to account for regions that are permanently blocked from conveying flow. Conveyance obstructions, such as buildings and other structures, decrease the flow area and add additional wetted perimeter where the water comes in contact with the obstruction.

2D-Conveyance-Obstructions-min-1030x615-1.png

2D conveyance obstructions are assigned using polygons. The software will automatically refine the 2D mesh to accommodate the conveyance obstruction shape.

2D conveyance obstructions are assigned

2D conveyance obstructions can be defined using the following commands:

  • Assign 2D Conveyance Obstructions
  • Draw 2D Conveyance Obstructions

Assign 2D Conveyance Obstructions Command

If polygons have already been drawn on the Map View or a polygon shapefile layer has been loaded, the Assign 2D Conveyance Obstructions command can be used to assign 2D conveyance obstructions.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign 2D Conveyance Obstructions command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the 2D Flow Areas menu item, and then select the Assign 2D Conveyance Obstructions command.
    Assign 2D Conveyance Obstructions command
  2. The Assign 2D Conveyance Obstructions dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign 2D Conveyance Obstructions dialog box

There are two options for assigning conveyance obstructions to 2D mesh:

  • Select Multiple Polygons
  • Multiple Block Conveyance Obstructions from Polygon Shapefile

The following sections describe how to use these assignment options.

Select Multiple Polygons

This option allows multiple polygons to be interactively selected from the Map View and then assigned as conveyance obstructions.

Follow the steps below to assign conveyance obstructions to 2D mesh using the Select Multiple Polygons option:

  1. Choose the Select Multiple Polygons radio button option. Then, click the [Pick] button.
    [Pick] button - Assign 2D Conveyance Obstructions dialog box
  2. The Assign 2D Conveyance Obstructions dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar with next steps.
  3. Select the polygons on the Map View. Then, right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Assign 2D Conveyance Obstructions dialog box will be redisplayed.
  5. In the Elevation assignment section, select the desired option for assigning the conveyance obstruction elevation. Then, enter the elevation value.
    Elevation assignment section
  6. Click the [OK] button. The selected polygons will be assigned as 2D conveyance obstructions.

Multiple Block Conveyance Obstructions from Polygon Shapefile

This option allows a polygon shapefile layer to be used to assign 2D conveyance obstructions.

Follow the steps below to assign conveyance obstructions to 2D mesh using polygon shapefile:

  1. Choose the Multiple Block Conveyance Obstructions from Polygon Shapefile radio button option.
  2. The software will display all loaded polygon shapefile layers in the Shapefile layer dropdown combo box. Select the corresponding shapefile layer.
    Shapefile layer dropdown combo box
  3. In the Elevation assignment section, select the desired option for assigning the conveyance obstruction elevation. Then, enter the elevation value.
    Elevation assignment section - Multiple Block Conveyance Obstructions
  4. Click the [OK] button. The selected polygons will be assigned as 2D conveyance obstructions.
    [OK] button

Draw 2D Conveyance Obstructions Command

The user can interactively draw polygons on the Map View in order to define the conveyance obstructions.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw 2D Conveyance Obstructions command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the 2D Flow Areas menu item, and then select the Draw 2D Conveyance Obstructions command.
    Draw 2D Conveyance Obstructions ribbon menu command
  2. The Draw 2D Conveyance Obstructions dialog box will be displayed.
    Draw 2D Conveyance Obstructions dialog box
  3. Click the [Draw] button. The Draw 2D Conveyance Obstructions dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar with next steps.
  4. Draw the polygon on the Map View.
    Note: To draw the polygon using curvilinear segments, use Create curvilinear polygon checkbox option.
  5. After the polygon has been drawn, the Draw 2D Conveyance Obstructions dialog box will be redisplayed.
  6. In the Elevation assignment section, select the desired option for assigning the conveyance obstruction elevation. Then, enter the elevation value.
    Elevation assignment section
  7. Click the [Apply] button.
    The [Apply] button
  8. Repeat the process for all other buildings to be assigned as 2D conveyance obstructions.

Incorporating the Conveyance Obstructions into the 2D Mesh

After the conveyance obstruction polygons have been defined, the software will stamp them into the 2D mesh and refine the mesh to account for each polygon’s shape.

Follow the steps below to incorporate the conveyance obstructions into the 2D mesh:

  1. Double-click on the 2D mesh on the Map View to display the 2D Flow Area Data dialog box.
  2. Click the [Update] button and the software will incorporate the 2D conveyance obstruction into the 2D mesh.
    [Update] button - 2D Flow Area Data dialog box
2D Modeling › 2D Boundary & Initial Conditions

Draw and Assign SA/2D Initial Condition Points Command

Initial conditions consist of flow and stage information at each of the cross sections and elevations for any storage area or 2D flow area defined in the system. Initial conditions can be established in two different ways. The most common way is to enter flow data for each reach and then have the software compute water surface elevations by performing a steady flow backwater analysis. The second method can only be used if a previous run was made. This method allows the user to write a file of flow and stage from a previous run (Restart File), which can then be used as the initial conditions for a subsequent run.

In GeoHECRAS, the SA/2D flow area initial condition points can be either drawn or assigned as nodes using the following commands:

  • Draw SA/2D Initial Condition Points
  • Assign SA/2D Initial Condition Points

Drawing SA/2D Initial Condition Points

The Draw SA/2D Initial Condition Points command allows the user to manually draw storage area or 2D flow area initial condition points on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to draw the SA/2D initial condition points:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, expand the SA/2D BC Elements dropdown menu, and then choose the Draw SA/2D Initial Condition Points command. Choose the Draw SA/2D Initial Condition Points command
  2. The Draw SA/2D Initial Condition Points dialog box will be displayed. Draw SA/2D Initial Condition Points dialog box
  3. Click the [Draw] button adjacent to the Initial conditions point read-only field.
  4. The Draw SA/2D Initial Condition Points dialog box will temporarily disappear, allowing the user to draw the initial condition node inside a SA/2D flow area on the Map View.
  5. Once done, the drawn node will be highlighted on the Map View, and the Draw SA/2D Initial Condition Points dialog box will be redisplayed. In addition, the status of the Initial conditions point read-only field will change to Drawn. Draw SA/2D initial conditions point read-only field
  6. The software automatically names the drawn SA/2D flow area initial condition point as defined in the Initial Conditions Point Specifications section. Note that the Initial conditions point name entry field is editable.
  7. Click the [Apply] button, and the SA/2D initial condition point will be created.

Assigning SA/2D Initial Condition Points

The Assign SA/2D Initial Condition Points command allows the user to manually assign existing node(s) from the Map View as SA/2D flow area initial condition points.

Follow the steps below to assign nodes as SA/2D initial condition points:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, expand the SA/2D BC Elements dropdown menu, and then choose the Assign SA/2D Initial Condition Points command. Choose the Assign SA/2D Initial Condition Points command
  2. The Assign SA/2D Initial Condition Points dialog box will be displayed. Assign SA/2D Initial Condition Points dialog box
  3. Click the [Pick] button adjacent to the Initial conditions point read-only field.
  4. The Assign SA/2D Initial Condition Points dialog box will temporarily disappear, allowing the user to select an existing node(s) from the Map View.
  5. Once done, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  6. The Assign SA/2D Initial Condition Points dialog box will be redisplayed, and the number of selected nodes will be shown in the Initial conditions point read-only field, as shown below. Assign SA/2D initial conditions point read-only field
  7. The Initial Conditions Point Specifications section is used to name the selected node either manually or automatically. If a single node is selected from the Map View, then the dialog automatically switches to the Initial conditions point name option for naming the selected node individually. Whereas, if multiple nodes are selected from the Map View, then the dialog automatically switches to the Auto-name initial conditions point, prefix option for naming each node as per the defined initial condition point prefix.
  8. After naming the initial condition point(s), click the [Apply] button and the software will assign the selected node(s) as SA/2D initial condition point(s).
2D Modeling › 2D Boundary & Initial Conditions

Initial Flow and Stage Conditions

In order to perform unsteady flow analysis, unsteady flow data are required. Unsteady flow data consist of boundary conditions as well as initial conditions. To learn how to establish boundary conditions for unsteady flow analysis, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

In addition to the boundary conditions, the user must establish the initial conditions of the system at the beginning of the unsteady flow simulation. Initial conditions must be set up appropriately so that the model does not crash or become unstable at the beginning of the modeling exercise. Initial conditions consist of flow and stage information at each of the cross sections and elevations for any storage area or 2D flow area defined in the system. Initial conditions can be established in two different ways. The most common way is to enter flow data for each reach and then have the software compute water surface elevations by performing a steady flow backwater analysis. The second method can only be used if a previous run was made. This method allows the user to write a file of flow and stage from a previous run (Restart File), which can then be used as the initial conditions for a subsequent run.

Note that the user can switch between the steady and unsteady flow data of the model from the Scenario Manager dialog box, as shown below. To learn more about the Scenario Manager command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Scenario Manager dialog box - steady and unsteady flow data options

To establish initial conditions for unsteady flow analysis, follow these steps:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Unsteady Flow Data command.
    Unsteady Flow Data command
  2. The Unsteady Flow Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Unsteady Flow Data dialog box

The user can establish the initial conditions of the system for 1D river reaches using the Initial Flow & Stage Conditions subpanel of the River Reach Data panel. Similarly, the initial conditions for storage areas and 2D flow areas can be defined by specifying the starting water surface elevation using the Initial Stage Elevations subpanel of the SA/2D & Connection Data panel.

The following sections describe how to establish the initial conditions for unsteady flow analysis.

Initial Conditions for 1D River Reaches

For 1D river reaches, the user can establish the initial conditions of the system using either the Use Initial Conditions (Restart or Hotstart) File option or the Define Initial Flows option, as shown below.

River Reach Data panel

Use Initial Conditions (Restart or Hotstart) File

This option allows the user to read in stages and flows from a Restart File. If a previous run has been made, and the option to write out a Restart File was used, then a Restart File can be used to establish the initial conditions for the subsequent run. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to create a Restart File. The user can click the […] button to browse to the location of the desired Restart File and select it.

Generally, this option is used when running a long simulation time that must be divided into shorter periods. The output from the first period is used as the initial conditions for the next period, and so on. In addition, this option may be used when the software is having stability problems at the beginning of a run. Occasionally, the model may go unstable at the beginning of a simulation due to bad initial conditions. When this happens, one way to fix the problem is to run the model with all the inflow hydrographs set to a constant flow and set the downstream boundaries to a high tailwater condition. Then run the model and decrease the tailwater down to a normal stage over time (use a stage hydrograph downstream boundary to do this). Once the tailwater is decreased to a reasonable value, those conditions can be written out to a file and used as the starting conditions for the unsteady flow run.

Define Initial Flows

This option allows the user to enter flow data for each reach and have the software perform a steady flow backwater analysis to compute the corresponding stages at each cross section. This is the most common method for establishing initial conditions.

The user can select the river and corresponding reach for which the flow data are to be entered from the River name and Reach name dropdown combo boxes, respectively. All the river stations belonging to the selected reach will be listed under the Interior river station dropdown combo box.

Initial Flow & Stage Conditions subpanel of River Reach Data panel

The user can enter flow data for any number of river stations under the Initial Flow column, but at a minimum, the user must enter a flow at the upper end of each reach. The software automatically adds the river station at the upper end of the reach into the table. To add additional river station locations, the user can select the desired river station from the Interior river station dropdown combo box and click the [Add Initial Condition Location] button to include it in the table.

If it is necessary to remove all the interior river station locations from the table at once, click the [Remove All Interior Locations] button.

If the river system is dendritic (no loops anywhere in the system), the user can leave all the flow data fields blank. The software will get flow data from the first value of all the boundary condition hydrographs (Upstream and lateral inflows). Flows are set from upstream to downstream by adding flows together at junctions as appropriate.

Initial Conditions for Storage Areas and 2D Flow Areas

For storage areas and 2D flow areas, the user can establish the initial conditions of the system using the Initial Stage Elevations subpanel, as shown below.

Initial Stage Elevations subpanel of the SA/2D & Connection Data panel

Initial conditions for 2D flow areas and storage areas can be set in several ways. They can start completely dry or be set to a constant water surface elevation or set by using a Restart File from a previous run (as discussed in the first section).

The Initial Stage Elevations subpanel lists all the storage areas and 2D flow areas contained within the system. The Initial Stage column of this subpanel can be left blank to simulate the area “starting dry.” Alternatively, the user can start with a constant water surface elevation by entering an elevation value for each storage area and 2D flow area in the Initial Stage column. Additionally, the user can click the [Invert] button to assign an invert elevation for the storage area.

Note that the area connected directly to the upstream or downstream end of a 1D reach cannot start dry.

The GeoHECRAS default setting does not perform a warm up period. However, if a model becomes unstable at the beginning of a run, users can direct the software to run several iterations before the start of the simulation in which all inflows are held constant (warm up). The warm up run does not advance in time, and the actual simulation only starts after the warm up run ends. By default, the water surface level in storage areas is allowed to change during the warm up period based on the net flow. If the Keep storage area initial elevations constant during warm up checkbox is checked, then the water surface levels in the storage areas will be held at the user entered value during the warm up period (e.g., a dry storage area will still be dry at the end of the warm up even if it had incoming flow). If a warm up period is not used, then this option will have no effect.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to perform a warm up run.

The warm up option is for the entire HEC-RAS model element, including 1D and 2D. However, 2D flow areas have an additional option called ramp up option. This option is used to ramp up the water surface from dry to wet conditions within a 2D area. If there is water flowing into or out of a 2D area at the beginning of the simulation, this option must be turned on to establish initial conditions. Normally, the 2D ramp up happens before the start of the overall model warm up. The ramp up option allows users to specify a time (in hours) to run the computations for the 2D flow area, by slowly transitioning the flow boundaries from zero to their initial value, and the stage boundaries from a dry elevation up to their initial wet elevation. Users specify the total Initial Conditions Time (2 hours, for example) and a fraction of this time (Initial Condition Ramp-up Fraction) for ramping up the boundary conditions. A value of 0.1 means that 10% of the Initial Conditions time will be used to ramp up the boundary conditions to their initial values, the remaining time will be used to hold the initial boundary conditions constant but allow the flow to propagate through the 2D flow area, thus giving it enough time to stabilize to a good initial condition throughout the entire 2D flow area.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about how to turn on the ramp up option.

2D Modeling › 2D Boundary & Initial Conditions

Initial Conditions Flow Optimizations

The Initial Conditions Flow Optimizations command is used to optimize (or balance) the split of flow at stream junctions, lateral structures, pump stations, and upstream boundary storage areas during the initial backwater computations in order to establish reasonable initial conditions for unsteady flow computations. This command is used for unsteady flow computations and is disabled for steady flow computations.

Follow the steps below to use the Initial Conditions Flow Optimizations command:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, select the Initial Conditions Flow Optimizations command.
    Initial Conditions Flow Optimizations command
  2. The Initial Conditions Flow Optimizations dialog box will be displayed.
    Initial Conditions Flow Optimizations dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Initial Conditions Flow Optimizations command and interact with the above dialog box.

Junctions with Flow Splits

This section lists all junctions contained within the model that have flow splits. To have the software optimize the flow split at a junction, check the Optimize checkbox corresponding to that junction. Otherwise, leave it unchecked. By default, the checkboxes are left unchecked.

Flow optimizations at junctions are performed by computing the water surface profiles for all of the reaches, then comparing the computed energy gradelines for the cross sections just downstream of the junction. If the energy gradeline elevation in all the reaches below a junction is not within a specified tolerance (0.02 feet), then the flow to each reach is redistributed, and the profiles are recalculated. This methodology continues until the energy gradeline elevations are balanced.

Pump Stations

This section lists all of the locations where pump stations are connected to the main rivers. To have the software optimize the flow split between the main river and the pump station, check the Optimize checkbox corresponding to that pump station. Otherwise, leave it unchecked.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about pump stations.

Lateral Structures

This section lists all lateral structures contained within the model. To have the software optimize the flow split between the main stream and the lateral structure, check the Optimize checkbox corresponding to that lateral structure. Otherwise, leave it unchecked.

For the first iteration of the flow split optimization, the software assumes that zero flow is going out of the lateral structure. Once a water surface elevation profile has been computed, the software will compute flow over the lateral structure. It will then iteratively reduce the flow in the main channel until a balance is reached between the main stream and the lateral structure.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about lateral structures.

Upper Boundary Storage Areas

This section lists all the storage areas located at upstream boundaries to the river reaches.

Note that only those storage areas that are at the upper end of a river reach with no other reaches feeding into them are listed. Storage areas that are in the middle of a model, at the downstream end of a model, or adjacent to a reach are not listed.

In order to have the software optimize the amount of flow coming out of the storage area based upon the user-specified storage area's initial water surface elevation, check the Optimize checkbox corresponding to that storage area. Otherwise, leave it unchecked.

When the required options have been selected in the dialog box, click the [OK] button. The software will optimize (or balance) the flow split at the selected locations.

2D Modeling › 2D Boundary & Initial Conditions

Draw and Assign SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines Command

Boundary condition lines are defined to represent different flow conditions or constraints for 2D flow areas or storage areas. Boundary conditions consist of external boundary conditions along the perimeter of the 2D area and internal boundary conditions. Internal boundary conditions are used to attach a Flow Hydrograph inside of the computational domain. External boundary conditions are used for a Flow Hydrograph, Stage Hydrograph, Rating Curve, and Normal Depth. When creating a boundary condition line, the line outside of the storage area or 2D flow area will be considered as an external boundary. Otherwise, it will be treated as an internal boundary.

In GeoHECRAS, the user can define boundary condition lines just outside or entirely inside a 2D flow area and storage area. This is accomplished by drawing or assigning the polyline(s) on the Map View using the following commands:

  • Draw SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines
  • Assign SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines

After drawing or assigning the boundary condition lines along the storage areas or 2D flow areas, the user can define the boundary condition types/data for each of these boundary condition lines using the Unsteady Flow Data command. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about how to define the boundary condition types and data.

Drawing SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines

The Draw SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines command allows the user to manually draw storage area or 2D flow area boundary condition lines on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to draw the SA/2D boundary condition lines:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the SA/2D BC Elements menu item, and then choose the Draw SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines command.Draw SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines input ribbon menu command
  2. The Draw SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines dialog box will be displayed.Draw SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines dialog box
  3. Click the [Draw] button adjacent to the SA/2D boundary condition polyline field. Use the Create curvilinear polyline checkbox option to draw the polyline using curvilinear segments.
  4. The Draw SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user on what to do next.
  5. Draw the boundary condition polyline just outside or entirely inside a 2D flow area/storage area from left to right looking downstream direction on the Map View. While drawing elements, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between the curvilinear and the linear digitizing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about drawing elements on the Map View. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  6. The Draw SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the SA/2D boundary condition polyline read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.SA/2D boundary condition polyline read-only field
  7. The software automatically names the drawn storage area or 2D flow area boundary condition line in the SA/2D Boundary Condition General Specification section. Note that the user can also change the name to whatever is desired in the SA/2D boundary condition name entry field.
  8. Click the [Apply] button and the SA/2D boundary condition line will be created.

Assigning SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines

The Assign SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines command allows the user to manually assign individual polyline(s) as a storage area or 2D flow area boundary condition line. To use this command, a polyline that can be selected for the purpose of assigning the SA/2D boundary condition line must already exist on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to assign the SA/2D boundary condition lines:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the SA/2D BC Elements menu item, and then choose the Assign SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines command.Assign SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines input ribbon menu command
  2. The Assign SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines dialog box will be displayed.Assign SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines dialog box
  3. Click the [Pick] button adjacent to the SA/2D boundary condition polyline field.
  4. The Assign SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user what to do next.
  5. From the Map View, click on the boundary condition polyline(s) along the edge or interior of the storage area or 2D flow area to select them. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  6. The Assign SA/2D Boundary Condition Lines dialog box will be redisplayed, and the number of selected polylines will be shown in the SA/2D boundary condition polyline entry, as shown below.SA/2D boundary condition polyline read-only entry
  7. In the SA/2D Boundary Condition General Specifications section, define the prefix for the names of the SA/2D boundary condition lines in the Auto-name SA/2D boundary condition, prefix entry field.
    Note that the SA/2D boundary condition name option is only available when a single polyline is selected. The user can then define the name of the storage area or 2D flow area boundary condition lines in the SA/2D boundary condition name entry field. Otherwise, the software auto-names the SA/2D boundary condition lines using the defined prefix, for example BC-##, where ## represents the boundary condition lines count (i.e., 01, 02, and so on) and BC represents the prefix.
  8. Click the [Apply] button, and the software will treat the selected polyline(s) as SA/2D boundary condition line(s).
2D Modeling › 1D-2D Coupling

Connecting 2D Flow Areas to 1D Hydraulic Elements

2D flow areas are regions of a model in which the flow through that region will be computed with the HEC-RAS two-dimensional flow computation algorithms. 2D flow areas are defined by laying out a polygon representing the outer boundary of the 2D flow area and then specifying the computational mesh. To learn more about 2D flow areas, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

In GeoHECRAS, the 2D flow area elements can be connected to 1D hydraulic elements in several ways, as described below:

  • Laterally to 1D river reaches using a lateral structure(s)
  • Directly to the downstream or the upstream end of a river reach
  • Directly to another 2D flow area or storage area using a Hydraulic Structure (SA/2D Area Connection)

Connecting a 2D Flow Area to a 1D River Reach with a Lateral Structure

2D flow areas can be used to model areas behind levees or overbank flow by connecting a 1D river reach to the 2D area using a lateral structure.

2D Flow Area to a 1D River Reach viaa Lateral Structure

While adding lateral structure to the 1D river reach, the user can link it to another 1D river reach, a storage area, or a 2D flow area. If the user elects to link the lateral structure to a 2D flow area, in that case, the stationing of the lateral structure will be linked to the 2D area’s face points automatically (this is analogous to the lateral structure automatically determining the location and intersection of the 1D cross sections). To learn how to add a lateral structure to your model, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Once the lateral structure is drawn, the user can double-click on it in the Map View to display the Lateral Structure Data dialog box. The Overflow Weir data panel of this dialog box defines the top profile of the embankment as well as the lateral structure’s connection to the 1D river cross sections (the headwater side of the structure) and 2D area face points (the tailwater side of the structure).

Lateral Structure Data dialog box

The first three sections in the data panel display the weir station and elevation points (Overflow Weir Crest Geometry), weir width (Structure width), headwater distance to upstream cross section (HW distance from US weir edge to US XS), and weir coefficient (Weir coefficient (Cd)). This defines the top profile of the lateral structure. The software automatically computes these values while adding lateral structure. However, the user can modify these values to whatever is desired.

For the headwater (HW) connection to the 1D cross sections, the software automatically computes the intersection of the 1D cross sections with the lateral structure based on the cross section overbank reach lengths (or based on the lateral structures geospatial data) and the lateral structure weir profile stationing. The user can select the Manual Defined option from the Weir stationing type dropdown combo box to enter the user’s own intersection locations between the 1D cross sections and the lateral structure weir stationing.

Weir stationing type - Headwater Cross Section Weir Stationing

For the tailwater connection to the 2D flow area, the software automatically computes the connection between the lateral structure weir stationing and the 2D flow area face points. The software finds the 2D flow area face points that start at the upstream end of the structure and go along the structure to the downstream end. Generally, a lateral structure will not start exactly at a 2D flow area face point. So, the software will pick the face point just upstream of the lateral structure to start the connection. This point will generally be given a negative weir stationing, meaning that it is upstream of the lateral structure by that distance. So, the zero weir stationing is actually in between two face points. The second face point in the table will be the next point downstream, and it will have a positive weir stationing. This stationing will represent how far the upstream end of the lateral weir is from that face point, along the length/stationing of the lateral weir. The user can choose the Manual Defined option from the Weir stationing type dropdown combo box to define the user’s own connection between the lateral structure weir station and the 2D flow area face points.

Weir stationing type - Tailwater Weir Stationing

Note that the “Manual Defined” weir stationing is not available when the lateral structure is georeferenced.

Directly Connecting a Downstream 2D Flow Area to an Upstream River Reach

Users can connect a 1D river reach directly to a 2D flow area. When this type of boundary condition is used, the last cross section of the 1D river reach must be lined up with the upstream boundary of the 2D flow area (i.e., the last cross section of the 1D reach is directly linked to the boundary of the 2D area, so they need to be at the exact same location).

Downstream 2D Flow Area Directly Connected to Upstream River Reach

For this type of boundary condition, the 1D river reach passes flow each time step to the 2D flow area. The stage in the cross section is based on the water surface elevation in the 2D cells that it is connected to. Flow is distributed to the 2D cells based on the conveyance distribution in the cross section and the stationing of the cells linked to the cross section. The computed stage for the 1D cross section is based on computing a conveyance weighted stage from the connected boundary cells in the 2D flow area and then forcing that stage on the 1D cross section each time step.

Note that the connection between the 2D flow area and 1D river reach should only be placed in areas where the flow and stage are highly one-dimensional.

If the flow is not highly one-dimensional, the model can have stability issues. To overcome the stability issues, the user can turn on the Maximum iterations between 1D/2D interface option in the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box.

Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box

Enabling the Maximum iterations between 1D/2D interface option allows the software to iterate back and forth between the 1D and the 2D computations during each time step until the computed flow and stage at the boundary connection converges within a user-specified tolerance. However, this may not solve the issue for highly two-dimensional areas where the water surface varies significantly.

To learn how to turn on the Maximum iterations between 1D/2D interface option, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Follow the below steps to connect an upstream 1D river reach to a downstream 2D flow area:

  1. Draw the 2D area polygon such that the outer boundary at the upstream end is right on top of the last cross section of the 1D river reach.
  2. Select the river reach and right-click anywhere on the Map View. From the displayed context menu, select the Edit vertices option. River reach and right-click context menu
  3. Move the last point of the stream centerline inside of the 2D flow area. The software will ask you to connect the 1D river reach to the 2D flow area. Confirmation dialog box for connecting 1D river reach to 2D flow
  4. Click the [Yes] button.

This type of connection between a 1D cross section and a 2D area requires the following to be true:

  • The location for this type of connection should be placed where the flow is highly one-dimensional (water surface is relatively horizontal and flow lines are perpendicular to the 1D cross section).
  • The 1D cross section is exactly on top of the boundary of the 2D area that it is connected to.
  • The terrain defining the 1D cross section must be the same as the terrain along the boundary of the 2D flow area where it is connected to the 1D cross section.
  • The Manning’s roughness coefficients must be the same spatially along the cross section and the 2D flow area boundary that it is connected to.

Directly Connecting an Upstream 2D Flow Area to a Downstream River Reach

Users can directly connect an upstream 2D flow area to a downstream 1D river reach. When this type of boundary condition is used, the first cross section of the 1D river reach must be lined up with the downstream boundary of the 2D flow area (i.e., the first cross section of the 1D reach is directly linked to the downstream boundary of the 2D area, so they need to be at the same exact location).

Upstream 2D Flow Area to a Downstream River Reach

For this type of boundary condition, the 2D flow area passes flow each time step to the 1D river reach. The stage in the 2D flow area is based on the stage in the 1D cross section that it is connected to. Flow is passed to the 1D section by adding all of the flows leaving the 2D cells at the boundary for each time step. The stage for the 2D flow area downstream boundary is set to the computed stage of the 1D cross section each time step.

The procedure to connect an upstream 2D flow area directly to a downstream 1D river reach is similar to what was shown in the above section. Here, the only difference is that the user is required to draw the 2D flow area polygon such that the outer boundary at the downstream end is right on top of the first cross section of the 1D river reach.

This type of connection between a 1D cross section and a 2D area also requires the conditions mentioned in the previous section to be true.

Connecting a 2D Flow Area to a Storage Area using a Hydraulic Structure

A 2D flow area can be directly connected to a storage area using a hydraulic structure called a Storage Area/2D Flow Area Hydraulic Connector (SA/2D Area Connections).

2D Flow Area to a Storage Area using a Hydraulic Structure

When defining the hydraulic structure that connects the two areas, the storage area will form the headwater side, and the 2D flow area will form the tailwater side. This can also be done the other way, in which the 2D flow area is on the upstream side (Headwater) and the storage area is on the downstream side (Tailwater).

To hydraulically connect a storage area to a 2D flow area, follow these steps:

  1. Draw the storage area polygon right up to the edge of the hydraulic structure. This can be as close to the hydraulic structure as desired for mapping purposes. To learn how to draw a storage area, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  2. Draw the outer boundary of the 2D flow area right up to the other side of the hydraulic structure. This can also be very close to the hydraulic structure. However, keep in mind that the computed water surface elevations of the boundary cells of the 2D area will be used in the hydraulic calculations over/through the structure. Therefore, don’t put very small cells down the face of a steep embankment because the small boundary cells may end up with a transitional water surface that is between the “headwater” and the “tailwater” surfaces. If this happens, the accuracy of the hydraulic computations across the structure may be reduced.
  3. Next, draw the hydraulic connector that will connect the above drawn elements.
    • From the Input ribbon menu, expand the SA/2D Connections dropdown combo box and select the Draw SA/2D Connections command. Draw SA/2D Connections ribbon menu command
    • The Draw SA/2D Connections dialog box will be displayed. Draw SA/2D Connections dialog box
    • From the Draw SA/2D Connection Polyline section, click the [Draw] button.
    • Draw a line directly down the center of the hydraulic structure that will be used to connect the two flow areas. Draw this line from left to right looking downstream. This is how the software will detect what is upstream (headwater) and what is downstream (tailwater).
    • Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
    • The Draw SA/2D Connections dialog box will be redisplayed. The status of Structure centerline read-only field will change to Drawn.
    • Provide the name of the hydraulic structure in the SA/2D Connection ID entry field. SA/2D Connection ID entry field
    • Click the [Apply] button.
  4. Once the hydraulic structure’s centerline is drawn, double-click on it in the Map View. The SA/2D Connection Data dialog box will be displayed. Connection details for connecting storage area and 2D flow area
  5. In the Connection Details section, select the upstream element (Storage Area or 2D Flow Area) from the From SA/2D area ID dropdown combo box and the downstream element (Storage Area or 2D Flow Area) from the To SA/2D area ID dropdown combo box. Alternatively, the user can click the corresponding [Pick] buttons to interactively select the storage area and 2D flow area from the Map View.
  6. In the remaining sections, enter all the hydraulic structure information for the connection. This will consist of a Weir/Embankment profile and any additional hydraulic outlets, such as culverts, gates, etc.

This is all that is needed for this type of hydraulic connection. GeoHECRAS will automatically compute the stationing along the centerline drawn for the hydraulic structure, and then line it up with the outer boundary of the 2D flow area based on its spatial location.

Connecting a 2D Flow Area to another 2D Flow Area using a Hydraulic Structure

2D flow areas can also be directly connected to other 2D flow areas by using a hydraulic structure.

2D Flow Area connected using a Hydraulic Structure

When defining the hydraulic structure that connects the two areas, the upstream 2D flow area will be considered the headwater side, and the downstream 2D flow area will be considered the tailwater side.

To hydraulically connect one 2D flow area to another, follow these steps:

  1. Draw the upstream 2D flow area polygon right up to the edge of the hydraulic structure. This should be relatively close to the hydraulic structure for mapping purposes.
  2. Draw the outer boundary of the downstream 2D flow area right up to the other side of the hydraulic structure as was done in the previous section.
  3. Follow step 3 of the previous section to draw the centerline of the hydraulic structure.
  4. Once the hydraulic structure’s centerline is drawn, double-click on it in the Map View to display the SA/2D Connection Data dialog box.
  5. From the Connection Details section, select the upstream 2D flow area from the From SA/2D area ID dropdown combo box and the downstream 2D flow area from the To SA/2D area ID dropdown combo box. Alternatively, the user can click the corresponding [Pick] buttons to interactively select the 2D flow areas from the Map View. Connection Details for connection 2D flow areas
  6. Enter all the remaining hydraulic structure information for the connection.

This is all that is needed for this type of hydraulic connection. GeoHECRAS will automatically figure out the stationing along the centerline drawn for the hydraulic structure, and then line it up with the outer boundary of the upstream and downstream 2D flow areas based on their spatial location.

Multiple 2D Flow Areas in a Single Geometry File

GeoHECRAS can have any number (within the computer’s memory limitations) of separate 2D flow areas within the same geometry file. Multiple 2D flow areas can be added in the same way as storage areas. Hydraulic connections can be made from 2D flow areas to 1D elements and between 2D flow areas.

Multiple 2D Flow Areas
2D Modeling › 2D Analysis Tools

2D Floodplain Encroachments Command

Encroachments are activities or construction within the floodway including fill, new construction, substantial improvements, and other development. These activities are prohibited within the adopted regulatory floodway unless it has been demonstrated through hydrologic and hydraulic analyses that the proposed encroachment would not increase flood levels.

The 2D Floodplain Encroachments command automates the placement and analysis of floodplain encroachments along the river reach when performing a 2D steady or unsteady flow computation. This allows the user to have a better understanding of the true flow effects when attempting to determine the floodway in a complex flow situation. The user can also examine the DxV (Depth x Velocity) factor, as this directly indicates greater flood hazard and hydraulic importance.

Follow the steps below to use the 2D Floodplain Encroachments command:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, select the Floodplain Encroachments dropdown menu and then choose the 2D Floodplain Encroachments command.
    2D Floodplain Encroachments command
  2. The 2D Floodplain Encroachments dialog box will be displayed.
    2D Floodplain Encroachments dialog box
    Note that certain conditions need to be fulfilled before using the 2D Floodplain Encroachments command. If the conditions are not met, the following message will be displayed while opening the 2D Floodplain Encroachments dialog box.
    Unable to compute 2D floodplain encroachments message

The following sections describe the 2D Floodplain Encroachments command and how to interact with its dialog box.

Natural (Unencroached) Model Parameters

This section is used to define the existing flood results (water surface elevation), without any applied encroachment on the floodplain. The water surface elevation in this section is used to compute the amount of water surface rise due to floodplain encroachments.

This section contains the following entries:

Natural (Unencroached) Model Parameters section
  • Natural unencroached scenario (plan)
    This dropdown combo box entry lists the user-defined scenarios. The user needs to select the scenario that represents the unencroached conditions. Once the unencroached scenario has been selected, the Natural terrain grid layer entry displays the 2D terrain layer associated with the scenario.
  • Natural terrain grid layer
    This read-only field lists the elevation grid associated with the unencroached scenario. If the unencroached model is not computed and there is no associated terrain surface for the selected scenario, the read-only field will display Undefined.
  • HEC-RAS 2D unencroached analysis
    This field displays the analysis status for the unencroached scenario. If the analysis of the selected scenario is already computed, the read-only field will display the status as Computed. Alternatively, the user can click the adjacent [Compute] button to compute the analysis of the scenario.
  • Natural max WSEL results grid layer
    This dropdown combo box entry is used to reference the natural, unencroached computed maximum water surface elevation (max WSEL) grid. If there is no existing computed water surface elevation grid layer or the existing water surface elevation grid layer data is inaccurate (e.g., out of date), the following can be performed:
    1. The user can click the [New Layer] button to define the name of the new grid layer to be used for storing the water surface elevation data. Alternatively, the user can select the [Add New Layer] option from the Natural max WSEL results grid layer dropdown combo box.
    2. The user can click the [Compute] button to compute and store the water surface elevation grid data in the newly created grid layer.

2D Floodplain Encroachments Model Parameters

This section is used to define the 2D floodplain encroachments to be applied to the model. This can be performed by selecting one or more polygons that represent the edge of the water that are desired for the encroachment. The software then uses the region outside of the polygons and raises the elevation of the terrain surface sufficiently so that the encroachments act as walls. The software then computes the analysis using this new terrain surface and computes the resultant water surface elevation grid.

The section contains the following entries:

2D Floodplain Encroachment Model Parameters section
  • Encroached scenario (plan)
    This dropdown combo box entry lists the user-defined scenarios. The user needs to select the scenario that represents the encroached conditions. Once the encroached scenario is selected, the Encroached terrain grid layer entry displays the 2D terrain layer associated with the selected scenario.Note that the Encroached scenario (plan) dropdown combo box does not list the scenario that is already defined in the Natural unencroached scenario (plan) dropdown combo box.
  • Pick encroachment polygons
    This entry is used to select the encroachment polygons from the Map View. Note that the user must select at least two polygons, one for the left overbank area and one for the right overbank area.
  • Encroached terrain grid layer
    This dropdown combo box lists the elevation grids associated with the selected scenario.

Note that the Encroached terrain grid layer dropdown combo box does not list the elevation grid that is already defined in the Natural terrain grid layer dropdown combo box. If there is no existing encroached terrain elevation grid assigned or if the existing encroached terrain elevation grid is inaccurate (e.g., out of date), the following can be performed.

    1. The user can click the [New Layer] button to define the name of the new grid layer to be used for storing the encroached terrain elevation grid. Alternatively, the user can select the [Add New Layer] option from the Encroached terrain grid layer dropdown combo box.
    2. The user can click the [Compute] button to compute and store the encroached terrain elevation grid data in the newly created grid layer. This computation determines the encroachment elevation to be applied to the elevation grid, which will be equal to the maximum elevation value contained within the Natural max WSEL results grid layer, plus an additional buffer of 100 feet.
  • HEC RAS 2D encroached analysis
    This field displays the analysis status for the encroached scenario. If the analysis of the selected scenario is already computed, the read-only field will display the status as Computed. Alternatively, the user can click the adjacent [Compute] button to compute the analysis.
  • Encroached max WSEL results grid layer
    The Encroached max WSEL results grid layer dropdown combo box is used to reference the encroached computed water surface elevation grid.If there is no existing water surface elevation grid layer computed or if the existing water surface elevation grid layer data is inaccurate (e.g., out of date), the following can be performed.
    1. The user can click the [New Layer] button to define the name of the new grid layer to be used for storing the water surface elevation data.
    2. The user can click the [Compute] button to compute and store the water surface elevation grid data in the newly created grid layer.
  • WSEL elevation change grid layer
    The WSEL elevation change grid layer dropdown combo box lists the available elevation grid layers. However, by default, this dropdown combo box remains blank and requires the user to define a new layer to store the results.Clicking the adjacent [New Layer] button causes the software to create a placeholder layer for storing the results. Alternatively, the user can select the [Add New Layer] option from the WSEL elevation change grid layer dropdown combo box.Clicking on the [Compute] button causes the software to perform raster arithmetic on the below grid layers:
    Grid layer raster arithmeticNote that the user can apply the coloring scheme to the contours of the resultant WSEL elevation change grid layer to see the impact of the defined encroachment. To learn more about HEC-RAS flood result raster grids, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

2D Depth x Velocity Results

The Depth x Velocity (D x V) approach takes both the flood depth and velocity components to graphically show the higher conveyance areas within a calculated floodplain. This approach considers an equitable reduction in flow from either side of the flood area for a single DxV area contour.

After completing a 2D floodplain encroachment analysis, the following three resultant grid layers are obtained:

2D Depth x Velocity Results section
  • Encroached Depth x Velocity grid layer
    This field represents the resultant Depth x Velocity grid layer obtained for an encroached surface. Clicking the adjacent [New Layer] button causes the software to create a placeholder layer for storing the results. Alternatively, the user can select the [Add New Layer] option from the dropdown combo box. Clicking the [Compute] button computes the resultant grid.
  • Unencroached Depth x Velocity grid layer
    This field represents the resultant Depth x Velocity grid layer obtained for an unencroached surface. Clicking the adjacent [New Layer] button causes the software to create a placeholder layer for storing the results. Alternatively, the user can select the [Add New Layer] option from the dropdown combo box. Clicking the [Compute] button computes the resultant grid.
  • Depth x Velocity change grid layer
    This field represents the resultant Depth x Velocity grid layer obtained by calculating the difference between the Depth x Velocity grid layer of WSEL Max (encroached) and the Depth x Velocity grid layer of WSEL Max (natural/unencroached).Clicking the adjacent [New Layer] button causes the software to create a placeholder layer for storing the results. Alternatively, the user can select the [Add New Layer] option from the dropdown combo box. Clicking the [Compute] button computes the resultant grid.

Floodplain Encroachment Options

The Overwrite existing elevation grids checkbox option is used to overwrite all the previously defined terrain grids used in this command with the newly created terrain grids.

2D Modeling › 2D Analysis Tools

2D Profile Lines

Profile lines are another way of extracting linear data from a 2D flow area. Profile lines are frequently used to delineate the plot of terrain and computed water surface elevation down the centerline of a channel. Profile lines are also used to plot the time series output. In order to plot time series data for the flow crossing the line, the profile line should be drawn perpendicular to the flow direction left to right looking in the downstream direction.

In GeoHECRAS, the user can create 2D profile lines on the Map View using the Assign Profile Lines and Draw Profile Lines commands. Both commands have similar functionality but somewhat distinct workflows.

Note that these commands can only be used after a successful HEC-RAS analysis run.

Assigning Profile Lines

The Assign Profile Lines command allows the user to define a profile line from previously imported CAD or GIS data.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Profile Lines command:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, click the Profile Plots dropdown menu and select the Assign Profile Lines command.
    Assign Profile Lines command
  2. The Assign Profile Lines dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign Profile Lines dialog box
  3. Click the [Pick] button adjacent to the Profile polylines read-only field.
    [Pick] button
  4. The Assign Profile Lines dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select a CAD or GIS polyline(s) from the Map View.
  5. Select CAD or GIS polyline(s) from the Map View. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  6. The Assign Profile Lines dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Profile polylines read-only field will display the number of selected polyline(s).
    Profile polylines read-only
    Notes:
    • If the user selects only one polyline from the Map View, then the dialog box will be redisplayed with the Profile line name radio button option selected.
    • If the user selects more than one polyline from the Map View, then the dialog box will be redisplayed with the Auto-name profile line, prefix radio button option selected.
  7. If a single polyline is selected, then the entry field next to the Profile line name radio button option allows the user to name the selected polyline.
  8. If multiple polylines are selected, then the entry field next to the Auto-name profile line, prefix radio button option allows the user to define the prefix for auto-naming the selected polylines. The software auto-names the profile lines using the defined prefix, for example, PL-##, where ## represents the profile lines count (i.e., 01, 02, and so on) and PL represents the prefix.
  9. The select Enforce Profile Line as Breakline (optional) checkbox option allows the user to enforce the profile line as a breakline.
    Enforce Profile Line as Breakline (optional) checkbox option
    Enforcing a profile line as a breakline helps in the quick reorientation of orthogonal cells around the profile line in order to remove jaggies from a skewed profile line.Note that the analysis of the model should be re-run after enforcing the profile line as a breakline.
  10. In the Cell spacing along the breakline input field, define the cell spacing value along the breakline. By default, the software uses a value of 20 ft. Alternatively, click the […] browse button to measure the cell spacing from the Map View. If this entry is left blank, then the cell spacing value in the vicinity of the breakline will be used.
  11. In the Relaxed cell spacing in 2D flow area input field, define the relaxed cell spacing value that will represent the cell spacing further away from the breakline. Alternatively, click the […] browse button to measure the cell spacing from the Map View. If this entry is left blank, then the cell spacing value in the vicinity of the breakline will be used.
  12. The values in the Relaxed cell spacing in 2D flow area and Cell spacing along breakline input fields should not be the same due to the risk of introducing cell errors along the breakline. When creating the mesh, the software will automatically and gradually transition the cell size from what is defined for the breakline and the area surrounding the breakline.
  13. Once all options are configured properly, click the [Apply] button. The selected polyline(s) from the Map View will be assigned as 2D profile line(s).
    [Apply] button

Drawing Profile Lines

The Draw Profile Lines command allows the user to manually draw a 2D profile line on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw Profile Lines command:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, click the Profile Plots dropdown menu and select the Draw Profile Lines command.
    Draw Profile Lines command
  2. The Draw Profile Lines dialog box will be displayed.
    Draw Profile Lines dialog box
  3. Click the [Draw] button adjacent to the Profile polylines read-only field. Use the Create curvilinear polyline checkbox option to draw the polyline using curvilinear segments.
    [Draw] button
  4. The Draw Profile Lines dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw a profile line.
  5. Draw the profile line on the Map View. While drawing elements, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between the curvilinear and the linear digitizing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about drawing elements on the Map View.
  6. Always draw the profile line from left to right looking in the downstream direction. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  7. The Draw Profile Lines dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Profile polyline read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    Profile polyline read-only field
  8. The software automatically displays the name of the drawn profile line in the Profile line name entry field of the Profile Line Specifications section.
  9. The Enforce Profile Line as Breakline section of this dialog box is similar to that of the Assign Profile Lines dialog box. Refer to the Assigning Profile Lines section of this article to learn about the Enforce Profile Line as Breakline (optional) option.
  10. Once all options are configured properly, click the [Apply] button to assign the drawn polyline as a 2D profile line.

Displaying Profile Line Plot

The Profile Line Plot command of the GeoHECRAS software allows the user to view various types of output such as water surface elevation and terrain profile, velocity profile, flow depth profile, etc. along the 2D profile lines.

Follow the steps below to use the Profile Line Plot command.

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, click the Profile Plots dropdown menu and select the Profile Line Plot command. Alternatively, the user can double-click on the profile line in the Map View.
    Profile Line Plot command
  2. The Profile Line Plot dialog box will be displayed.
    Profile Line Plot dialog box

Note that while viewing the water surface elevation profile, the terrain profile is included in the plot for reference.

The following sections describe how to use the Profile Line Plot command and interact with the above dialog box.

Scenarios

The Scenarios dropdown combo box allows the user to view output results from different scenarios. To learn more about working with multiple scenarios, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Scenarios dropdown combo box

Profiles

The Profiles dropdown combo box allows the user to view output results for multiple profiles at the same time. By default, the software selects the Max option.

Profiles dropdown combo

Note that the Profiles dropdown combo box will be disabled, if time series plot types are selected in the Plot type dropdown combo box.

Profile Lines

The Profile Lines dropdown combo box allows the user to select the profile line(s) and view their corresponding output results.

Profile Lines dropdown combo box

Plot type

The Plot type dropdown combo box allows the user to select the types of output results to be viewed for the selected profile line(s). The following output results options are listed in the dropdown combo box:

  • Discharge
  • Flood Depth
  • Shear Stress
  • Stream Power
  • Terrain Surface
  • Velocity
  • Velocity Against Terrain
  • Water Surface Elevation
  • Time Series - Flow
  • Time Series - Rating Curve
  • Time Series - Volume Accumulation
Plot type dropdown combo box

The GeoHECRAS software also allows the user to create professional printouts of profile line plots and to save them as image files as well as export them to PDF files. To print or export the results of a profile line plot into a different format, right-click anywhere on the plot and select the Export to PDF, Save as Image, or Print option.

right-click context menu commands

Profile Data

The Profile Data tab contains a table that displays results associated with the selected profile line(s).

Profile Data tab

Display Properties of Profile Lines

The user can also configure the display properties of profile line plots and their IDs on the Map View. To learn more about this feature, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

2D Modeling › 2D Bridge Modeling

HEC-RAS 2D Bridge Modeling

GeoHECRAS can model roadway crossing bridges and culverts inside of 2D flow areas. Bridges inside 2D flow areas can handle the full range of flow regimes, from low flow to pressure flow, combined pressure flow, and flow going over the top of the bridge deck or roadway.

The user can define bridge data for 2D flow areas in the same way that bridge data is defined for a 1D model. HEC-RAS provides the same low flow (energy, momentum, and Yarnell) and high flow (energy and pressure/weir) bridge modeling approaches for both 1D and 2D bridge modeling.

For 2D bridge modeling, the software takes the user input bridge data and modeling approaches to develop a family of rating curves for the bridge, similar to what it does for 1D bridge modeling. However, for 2D bridge modeling, the bridge’s curves are used to obtain a water surface difference through the bridge for each set of cells being used to model the bridge. This difference in water surface is then equated to a force, which is distributed and put into a special version of the momentum equation for each set of cells spanning the bridge centerline. So instead of calculating friction forces, pressure forces, and spatial acceleration forces, these forces are obtained from the bridge curves. Then the 2D equations are solved as they are normally solved at any cell/face in the model. This approach used for 2D bridge modeling allows for equivalent forces to be computed for low flow, pressure flow, combined pressure flow/weir flow, or even low flow/weir flow.

Note that the amount of force given to each cell is based on the percentage of the total flow passing through that particular set of cells. This 2D bridge modeling approach allows for varying flow, water surface, and velocity at each of the cells around the centerline of the bridge opening. Therefore, the flow is still computed as a two-dimensional flow through and over the top of the bridge. Flow can pass at any angle through the bridge opening based on the hydraulics of the flow and the number of cells being used to represent the bridge opening.

Note that the WSPRO low flow method is not available for 2D bridge modeling.

This article explains how to perform 2D bridge modeling in GeoHECRAS.

Defining 2D Roadway Crossing Centerline

The roadway crossing centerline must be first defined to represent a bridge or culvert in a 2D model. The roadway crossing centerline must be drawn from left to right looking in a downstream direction.

To define the roadway crossing centerline, the user can use the Draw Roadway Crossings or Assign Roadway Crossings commands of the Input ribbon menu. The user can either manually draw the roadway crossing centerline or assign an already existing polyline as the roadway centerline. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about these commands.

2D Roadway Crossing Interior and Exterior Cross Sections

The software will construct two parallel interior roadway crossing cross sections that represent the upstream and downstream interior geometry of the roadway deck using the roadway width value. The software assumes that the upstream and downstream interior cross sections are parallel to the roadway centerline, dividing the defined roadway width in half to determine their placement.

The software will construct two parallel exterior roadway cross sections that represent the upstream and downstream full valley geometry using the distance from face to full valley value. This value represents the distance that the upstream and downstream exterior roadway cross sections are placed relative to the roadway crossing exterior faces.

2D Roadway Crossing Interior and Exterior Cross Sections

Enforcing Roadway Crossing as a Breakline

After defining the centerline of the roadway crossing, the user needs to enforce the structure as a breakline into the 2D mesh. This is done using the Enforce as Breakline command available from the 2D roadway crossing right-click context menu.

Enforce as Breakline context menu command

The Enforce as Breakline command aligns the 2D mesh faces with the roadway crossing centerline, guaranteeing that the flow computations are perpendicular to the roadway crossing.

Entering Bridge Data

Once the 2D roadway crossing is defined, the user can enter the data for a 2D bridge in the 2D Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box.

Follow the steps below to enter the bridge data:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the 2D Bridge & Culvert Data command.
    2D Bridge & Culvert Data input ribbon menu commandAlternatively, the user can either double click the roadway structure on the Map View or choose the 2D Bridge & Culvert Data command from the Roadway Crossings dropdown menu of the Input ribbon menu as shown below.
    2D Bridge & Culvert Data from Roadway Crossings dropdown menu of input ribbon menu command
  2. The 2D Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box will be displayed.
    2D Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to enter the bridge data and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting 2D Roadway Crossing

The Select 2D Roadway Crossing section allows the user to select the 2D roadway crossing to edit. The user can select the 2D roadway crossing from the 2D roadway crossing ID dropdown combo box or click the […] button to graphically select the roadway crossing from the Map View.

Note that if the user opens the 2D Bridge and Culvert Data dialog box by double-clicking the roadway crossing on Map View, that roadway crossing will be selected by default.

Defining General Specifications

The General Specifications data panel is displayed by default when the 2D Bridge and Culvert Data dialog box is displayed.

2D Bridge and Culvert Data General Specifications data panel

In the above data panel, the user must enter the following data:

  • Structure type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to specify the roadway structure type. The following options are provided to the user:
    1. 2D Bridge
    2. Culvert

Based on the option selected by the user, the other data panels in the 2D Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box gets enabled or disabled.

    1. If the user selects the 2D Bridge option, then all data panels get enabled except the Culverts data panel.
    2. If the user selects the Culvert option, then all the data panels get disabled except the Deck Roadway and Culverts data panels.
  • Roadway width (parallel to the flow)
    This field is used to define the roadway width in the direction of flow.
  • Distance from face to full valley
    This field is used to define the distance from the upstream (and downstream) side of the roadway deck to the upstream (and downstream) full valley cross section.
  • Upstream embankment side slope (V:H)
    This field is used to define the roadway crossing upstream embankment side slope. If this field is left blank, the software assumes a vertical embankment.

Note that this variable is generally not used in the computations, but is used for display purposes in the profile plot. However, if the user has selected the FHWA WSPRO Method for low flow, this field will be used in the computation of the bridge discharge coefficient. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the FHWA WSPRO Method.

  • Downstream embankment side slope (V:H)
    This field is used to define the roadway crossing downstream embankment side slope. If this field is left blank, the software assumes a vertical embankment.

Note that this variable is generally not used in the computations, but is used for display purposes in the profile plot. However, if the user has selected the FHWA WSPRO Method for low flow, this field will be used in the computation of the bridge discharge coefficient.

  • [Extract Geometry] button
    Clicking the [Extract Geometry] button allows the user to extract cross section geometry from the selected cross sections defined in the Cross Section Geometry panel (explained below). This allows the user to quickly update the geometry at the roadway crossing when changing either the Roadway width or the Distance from face to full valley values.
  • Minimum weir elevation (optional)
    This field is used to define the minimum elevation at which weir overflow over the roadway begins. If this field is left blank, software will scan through the specified roadway geometry to determine the minimum roadway elevation. Generally, this field is used to artificially raise or lower the minimum elevation at which weir flow is considered. Click the [Pick] button to interactively select the minimum elevation from the roadway crossing plot.
  • Maximum submergence ratio
    This spin control entry is used to specify the maximum allowable submergence ratio that can occur during weir overflow over the roadway. If this ratio is exceeded, the software will automatically switch to an energy-based (standard step method) flow calculation rather than standard pressure and weir flow calculation.
  • Weir crest shape
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the weir crest shape. By default, the weir crest shape is set to "Broad Crested," which is appropriate for a roadway crossing.
  • Weir coefficient (Cd)
    This field is used to specify the discharge coefficient to be used in the weir flow equation for roadway overflow computations. Typical values range from 2.50 for a broad-crested rectangular shaped weir to 3.00 for a trapezoidal shaped weir. However, a value between 2.50 and 2.60 should be used for typical roadway crossings. By default, the software uses a value of 2.60. Click the […] browse button to display a weir coefficient reference dialog box.
  • From SA/2D area ID, To SA/2D area ID
    These fields are used to specify the upstream to downstream connection details of the roadway crossing. These fields are used if there are two different storage areas or 2D meshes that the roadway connection is connected to.
  • Cell spacing along roadway centerline
    This entry represents cell spacing along the roadway centerline. If this entry is left blank, then the cell spacing used in the vicinity of the roadway centerline will be used. Click the […] button to measure the cell spacing from the Map View.
  • Relaxed cell spacing for roadway centerline
    This entry represents the cell spacing further away from the roadway centerline. If this entry is left blank, then the cell spacing used in the vicinity of the roadway centerline will be used. This value should not be the same as the Cell spacing along roadway centerline value, or there may be many cell errors introduced along the roadway centerline. Click on the […] button to measure the cell spacing from the Map View.

Note:

While importing a model from HEC-RAS, the 2D bridge structure will be imported to the 2D Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box. If the user has defined a culvert, then by default, the structure will get imported as the 2D bridge and culvert unless the user has specified some parameters that are specific to the SA/2D connection. In that case, the culvert will be imported as the SA/2D connection. For example, if the user has defined the following items, then the culvert will be imported as the SA/2D connection:

  • Culvert Flow Direction (Flap Gates)
  • Overflow Computation Method
  • Gates
  • Outlet Rating Curves
  • Outlet Time Series

Defining Deck Roadway Geometry

To specify the deck roadway geometry, select the Deck Roadway option from the 2D Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box.

2D Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box - Deck Roadway option

The Deck Roadway data panel will be displayed.

Deck Roadway data panel

The above panel provides a table for entering and editing the roadway high chord and bridge opening low chord geometry. The data in the table are used to describe the area that is blocked due to the roadway bridge deck, road embankment, and bridge opening vertical abutments.

Note that there are two tabs at the top of the geometry table that correspond to the upstream and downstream faces of the roadway crossing. The user can copy the current bridge deck and roadway geometry from the upstream cross section to the downstream cross section (or vice versa) by clicking on the [Copy to Downstream Cross Section] button.

Defining Piers and Sloping Abutments

After entering the deck roadway data, the user must define bridge piers and sloping abutments that are inside of the bridge opening.

Bridge Piers

Select the Bridge Piers option from 2D Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box.

2D Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box - Bridge Piers option

The Bridge Piers data panel will be displayed.

Bridge Piers data panel

In the above panel, the user can enter the pier data in the same exact manner as required for a 1D bridge. A centerline station is required for both the upstream and downstream side of the bridge pier. The pier is formed by entering pairs of elevations versus pier widths, starting below ground, and continuing up past the low chord of the bridge deck. To learn more about 1D bridge modeling, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

The paired elevation and pier width values must be completed for both the upstream side and downstream side of the bridge. However, if the upstream and downstream sides are the same, then fill in the upstream side and use the [Copy to Downstream] button to copy the data to the downstream side (or vice versa).

The user can add abutments inside of the bridge opening that are different than the natural ground. For example, “Spill through Abutments” are abutments that have a slope and often a rounded or angled approach to guide the flow through the opening.

Sloping Abutments

Select the Sloping Abutments option from the 2D Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box.

2D Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box - Sloping Abutments option

The Sloping Abutments data panel will be displayed.

Sloping Abutments data panel

The Sloping Abutments data panel is the same as for 1D bridges and works the same way. The user can enter station and elevation data going from left to right and proceed accordingly for each consecutive abutment in order to modify the terrain through the bridge opening.

After entering the bridge deck/roadway and piers/abutments data, the 2D Roadway Crossing Plot section will display the bridge information graphically.

Enter Manning’s Roughness for 1D Cross Section

The user can enter Manning’s n values for all of the 1D cross sections that are automatically formed as a result of the user entered bridge data.

To enter Manning’s n values for the 1D cross sections, select the Cross Section Geometry options from the 2D Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box.

2D Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box - Cross Section Geometry option

The Cross Section Geometry data panel will be displayed.

Cross Section Ground Geometry section

In the above panel, the user must enter Manning’s n values for each of the four bridge cross sections (External upstream and downstream cross sections, internal face upstream and downstream cross sections). Manning’s n values are entered as horizontally varying values, starting with the very first station within the cross section. At least one n value must be entered for each cross section.

The user can modify the station/elevation data, Manning's n values, and the main channel bank station locations. However, the length of the cross section must stay the same as what is spatially laid out from the bridge centerline data and other bridge information. The left and right main channel bank stations can also be changed. By default, they are set to the first and last point of each cross section.

Geometry Bank Stations

This section defines the additional cross section geometry data.

Geometry Bak Stations Section

The Bank Stations field defines the left and right bank stations. The defined bank station must match an existing ground station. The user can click the […] pick buttons under the Left and Right entry fields to select the left and right bank stations from either Map View or the cross section plot.

The Manning’s checkbox entry defines Manning’s n roughness values for left overbank, channel, and right overbank. Clicking the […] lookup button displays a Manning’s roughness lookup table. Unchecking this checkbox entry disables the underlying fields and enables the Horizontal Roughness column under the Cross Section Ground Geometry table.

Extracting Cross Section Geometry

From the Extract Elevation Data section, the user can extract the cross section geometry at any time to account for changes in Roadway width and Distance from face to full valley values.

Extract Elevation Data section

The Primary Elevation Data and Secondary Elevation Data panels are used to define the primary and secondary (if available in the project) elevation data sources for extracting the cross section geometry. Depending on the selected elevation data source type, the content of these panels changes to include the additional elevation data information.

When a secondary elevation data source is available, the software forms a concave hull around the primary elevation data source to identify its bounds. For locations where elevation data from the primary data source is unavailable, the software will use elevation data from the secondary data source.

Note that the user cannot utilize the same data source to define both the primary and secondary elevation data.

The user can click the [Swap Sources] button to swap the selected elevation source from primary elevation data to secondary elevation data and vice versa.

The software allows the user to extract the cross section geometry from each of the following cross sections associated with the bridge opening:

  • Upstream full valley cross section
  • Upstream internal face cross section
  • Downstream internal face cross section
  • Downstream full valley cross section

The user can check the respective checkboxes. Additionally, for upstream and downstream internal face cross sections, the user can elect to either extract the cross section geometry using the roadway edges or roadway centerline. By default, the Extract From Roadway Edge option is selected.

upstream internal face cross sections dropdown combo box

Once all the options have been defined, the user can click the [Extract Geometry] button to extract the cross section geometry.

Defining Bridge Modeling Approach

To define which computational methods HEC-RAS will use at a bridge opening, select the Bridge Methodology option from the 2D Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box.

2D Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box - Bridge Methodology option

The Bridge Methodology data panel will be displayed.

Bridge Methodology data panel

The following sections are available in this data panel:

Support Pier Shape

This section allows the user to select the bridge pier shape. By default, the Select pier shape entry will be set to None for new bridges. However, the following options will be available:

  • None (Default)
  • Dual-Column Circular Piers
  • Dual-Column Square Nose Piers
  • Dual-Column Triangular Nose Piers
  • Hammerhead Pier
  • Single-Column Circular Pier
  • Wall-Type Round Nose Pier
  • Wall-Type Square Nose Pier
  • Wall-Type Triangular Nose Pier

When importing a HEC-RAS model, the software will automatically set the pier shape by reviewing the defined pier drag coefficient value. Based upon the defined pier shape, the software will render the bridge pier to match. Circular piers, square piers, and triangular nose piers are roughly the same—just the leading (upstream) edge looks different.

Low Flow Computational Methods

This section allows the user to instruct HEC-RAS to use any or all low flow computational methods by selecting the checkboxes under the Compute label. If the Momentum and/or Yarnell methods are selected, the user must enter pier loss coefficients corresponding to each method.

The following table lists the drag coefficient for different pier shapes:

unknown node

The following table lists the Yarnell K coefficient for different pier shapes:

unknown node

Once the user has selected the low flow bridge methods to be computed, a specific method muse be selected that will be used as the final answer to continue the computations upstream. Only one of the methods can be chosen as the answer, which is accomplished by selecting the corresponding radio button under the Use label to continue the computations upstream.

An alternative to selecting a single method is to instruct HEC-RAS to use the answer with the highest computed upstream energy elevation. This is accomplished by selecting the Highest energy answer radio button option under the Use label. By default, the software selects the Highest energy answer radio button option.

High Flow Computational Methods

This section allows the user to instruct HEC-RAS on how to compute high flows (flow at or above the maximum low chord elevation). For high flows, the user can choose between Energy only (Standard step) or Pressure and/or weir flow calculations.

If Pressure and/or weir flow is selected as the high flow method, the user must enter coefficients for the pressure flow equations. The first coefficient (Submerged inlet discharge coefficient) applies to the equation that is used when only the upstream side (inlet) of the bridge is submerged. If this coefficient is left blank, HEC-RAS selects a coefficient based on the amount of submergence. If the user enters a coefficient, that value is used for all degrees of submergence. The second coefficient (Submerged inlet & outlet discharge coefficient) applies to the equation that is used when both the upstream and downstream end of the bridge is submerged. By default, this coefficient is defined as 0.8.

The Pressure flow trigger elevation (optional) field is used to set the maximum elevation of the deck low chord and defines the elevation at which pressure flow calculations will begin. If this field is left blank, then the elevation that triggers pressure flow calculations is based on the highest low chord elevation on the upstream side of the bridge deck. If the user enters a value in this field, the entered value will be the trigger for pressure flow calculations to begin.

Pressure flow is triggered when the energy elevation exceeds the maximum low chord. When pressure flow is calculated, the answer is compared to the low flow answer, and the highest energy elevation of the two is selected. Alternatively, the user can tell the program to use the water surface elevation instead of the energy elevation to trigger pressure flow calculations.

Defining Ineffective Flow Areas

The user can define ineffective flow areas for the upstream and downstream cross sections outside of the bridge. If the user has included the left and right roadway approaches as part of the bridge, then it may be necessary to define ineffective flow areas for the outside cross sections to compute accurate headwater and tailwater elevations for the bridge curves.

Select the Ineffective Flow Areas option from the 2D Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box.

2D Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box - Ineffective Flow Areas option

The Ineffective Flow Areas data panel will be displayed.

Ineffective Flow Areas data panel

This data panel is similar to the Ineffective Flow Areas data panel of the 1D Bridge & Culvert Data dialog box. Multiple Blocks Ineffective Flow Areas are not supported in 2D bridge modeling. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to define ineffective flow areas.

Note that this panel is disabled when the user selects Culvert as the structure type.

Adjusting Roadway Geometry

The user can adjust the roadway geometry at any time during the modeling.

Select the Geometry Adjustment option from the 2D Roadway Crossing Specifications section.

2D Roadway Crossing Specifications dropdown combo box - Geometry Adjustment option

The Geometry Adjustment panel will be displayed.

Geometry Adjustment panel

Typically, this panel is used to revise the roadway geometry where there is insufficient terrain data available to adequately define the roadway geometry. The user can adjust the elevations or stations of roadway geometry as well as shift the horizontal stationing at a bridge. Additionally, the user can also define the extent of adjustments in the Adjustment Extent section.

Defining HTAB Parameters

After the user has defined the necessary data for the roadway crossing structure, the user needs to define the parameters necessary to create the HTAB (hydraulic table of rating curves). To define these parameters, the user can select the Hydraulic Parameters – 2D Bridges & Culverts command from the Rating Curves – Hydraulic Parameters dropdown menu of the Analysis ribbon menu as shown below.

Hydraulic Parameters – 2D Bridges & Culverts from Rating Curves – Hydraulic Parameters dropdown menu of Analysis ribbon menu command

The Hydraulic Parameters – 2D Bridges & Culverts dialog box will be displayed.

Hydraulic Parameters – 2D Bridges & Culverts dialog box

In the above dialog box, the following parameters must be entered by the user:

  • Number of points on free flow curve
  • Number of submerged curves
  • Number of points on each submerged curve
  • Maximum headwater elevation

The Maximum tailwater elevation and Maximum flow parameters are optional. However, entering a maximum flow value is recommended as it will help control the limits of the connection hydraulic property table.

To learn more about the various parameters provided in this dialog box, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

When the data is defined, the user can click the [OK] button to save the entered data and close the dialog box.

Performing the Analysis

After the user has entered the roadway crossing data and has ensured that the 2D mesh and cell faces are well-formed around the bridge, the user must run the analysis by selecting the Compute Unsteady command from the Analysis ribbon menu.

Compute Unsteady Analysis ribbon menu command

When the analysis run is complete, the software will then generate a family of rating curves for any 2D bridge openings and then perform the 2D flow analysis.

Viewing Output Results

Once the model has finished running, the user can begin to view the output related to the 2D bridge hydraulics.

The software provides several types of output results for 2D bridges, as described below:

  1. Inundation maps including water surface, velocity, etc.
    Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to view inundation maps.
  2. Profile line plots
    Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to view profile line plots.
  3. Stage and flow hydrographs
    Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to view stage and flow hydrographs.
  4. Cross section plots
    Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to view cross section plots.
2D Modeling › 2D Computational Theory

HEC-RAS 2D Grid & Subgrid Computations

In 2D models, HEC-RAS simulates how water flows across a surface by dividing the terrain into a computational mesh (grid). Each cell in the grid represents a portion of the ground surface and stores hydraulic information, including water depth, flow velocity, and water surface elevation. Since these values depend on the terrain within each cell, the software uses a combination of 2D grid and subgrid bathymetry to improve accuracy. This approach allows finer terrain details to be represented within each grid cell.

At larger scales of river flow modeling, grid cells often simplify subgrid-scale boundary structures by representing them as uniform roughness values. These structures are treated as equivalent to grid cells, leading to a loss of spatial variation in surface roughness due to limitations in turbulence modeling. As a result, grid-scale representations focus on capturing the overall flow behavior across broad areas.

At smaller scales of river flow modeling, e.g., when analyzing flow around buildings, the user can simulate flow patterns around individual structural elements. However, modeling every boundary structure at such a fine resolution is often impractical.

This article explains how HEC-RAS performs 2D grid and subgrid computations to efficiently model floods while capturing detailed terrain features.

Grid and Dual Grid

In 2D flow areas, the grid is a network of rectangular or square cells laid over the terrain. The boundaries between cells are known as cell faces. These faces act as the connection points through which water flows from one cell to another. During the simulation, the software calculates flow across each face by comparing the water surface elevations of the two adjacent cells. The greater the difference, the more water tends to flow in that direction.

To support accurate and efficient hydraulic calculations, HEC-RAS uses a dual grid system:

  • The primary grid consists of user-defined mesh cells.
  • The dual grid is formed along the cell faces.

Each cell face in the dual grid serves as a virtual cross section, where the software applies subgrid terrain data to compute flow area, wetted perimeter, hydraulic radius, and conveyance. This dual-grid framework allows the software to simulate the hydraulic connectivity of the terrain more realistically than models relying solely on uniform or planar cells.

In the image below, grid nodes and edges are represented by dots and solid lines, while dual grid nodes and edges are shown as crosses and dashed lines.

Primal Grid and Dual Grid

From the mathematical point of view, sometimes the primary grid is extended with a cell “at infinity” and similarly, the dual grid is extended with a node “at infinity.” With these extra additions, the grid and its dual have some interesting properties. For example, the dual edges intersect the regular edges, and the two groups are in a one-to-one correspondence. Similarly, the dual cells are in one-to-one correspondence with the grid nodes, and the dual nodes are in one-to-one correspondence with the grid cells.

However, in the context of a numerical simulation, extending the grid to infinity is impractical. Therefore, the dual grid is truncated by adding dual nodes at the center of the boundary edges and dual edges along the boundary joining the boundary dual nodes. The one-to-one correspondences of the infinite model do not carry over to the truncated model, but some slightly more complex relations can be obtained. For example, the dual nodes are now in one-to-one correspondence with the set of grid cells and grid boundary edges. For this reason, the boundary edges are set up as a sort of topological artificial cell with no area, which are extremely useful when setting up boundary conditions.

Subgrid Bathymetry

Modern advances in the field of airborne remote sensing can provide very high-resolution topographic data. In many cases, the data are too dense to be practically used directly as a grid for the numerical model. This situation presents a dilemma whereby a coarse computational grid must be used to produce a water simulation, but the fine topographic features should be incorporated into the computation.

The solution to this problem is the use of a subgrid bathymetry approach. Each computational grid cell contains additional pre-computed information, such as hydraulic radius, volume, and cross sectional area from the fine bathymetry. Though the high-resolution details are lost, there is enough information available so that the numerical method can account for the fine bathymetry through mass conservation. This approach is effective for many applications because the water surface is smoother than the bathymetry. Therefore, a coarser grid can effectively be used to compute spatial variability in free surface elevation.

In the image below, the fine grid is represented by the Cartesian grid in gray, and the computational grid is shown in blue.

Subgrid Bathymetry

Subgrid Bathymetric Approach to Terrain Surface Discretization

HEC-RAS, like many 2D hydraulic models, performs the calculation from cell center to cell center (i.e., from cell computation point to cell computation point). However, momentum is determined at the cell faces, which are defined by cutting from the terrain with irregular geometry at the cell face based on the underlying terrain. Each cell also contains a detailed elevation–volume relationship, created directly from the underlying terrain.

This means that flow entering or leaving a cell along with its momentum is shaped by both the internal volume of the cell and the specific terrain where the flow crosses the cell boundaries. The irregular geometry at these faces affects how velocity, pressure gradients, and momentum are computed, leading to a more realistic simulation of hydraulic behavior.

By incorporating these terrain details, the software can identify preferential flow paths across the grid and apply wetting only to portions of a cell that falls below the calculated water surface at a given time step. These subgrid details help guide the flow more precisely, influence the direction and magnitude of velocity vectors, and improve the accuracy of intercell momentum transfer based on features like cell face shape and the effective distance between cells, as shown in the example below.

Subgrid bathymetric discretization

Many 2D models simplify the terrain representation by assigning each cell a single average elevation or as a sloped triangular or rectangular surface, and the cell faces are flat or sloped surfaces. This simplification means that finer grids with smaller cells are required to capture the same level of detail, volume variation, and face velocity that HEC-RAS can achieve using subgrid terrain data. Additionally, when a model represents a cell with a single elevation, the cell is considered either fully wet or fully dry at any given time, which reduces the accuracy of partial cell wetting and flow routing through complex terrain.

The use of detailed terrain data in hydraulic computations allows for a more accurate momentum solution, as it avoids oversimplifying conditions at the cell faces and can capture preferential flow paths into and out of each cell. This approach makes it possible to use larger cells while still producing results comparable to models that represent each cell with a single elevation or a simplified planar surface.

Comparing two models using the same number of cells is only meaningful when evaluating computational speed, not when assessing how accurate the simulation is. A fair comparison should focus on how effectively each model represents terrain in its hydraulic calculations. If HEC-RAS can produce an equal or more accurate result with fewer cells, then performance comparisons should be based on equivalent terrain representation in the hydraulic computations, not simply on the number of cells or their nominal size. Focusing solely on running time with a limited number of elements can be misleading and ignores the advantages provided by incorporating subgrid terrain detail into both cells and cell faces.

Why Subgrid Computation Is Important

Without subgrid bathymetry, important terrain details can be lost within a coarse grid. For example, a 100 ft wide road embankment might disappear in the average elevation of a large cell, causing the model to incorrectly allow water to pass through it.

Subgrid modeling helps preserve terrain details by:

  • Maintaining the effect of narrow features such as ditches, berms, or levees.
  • Producing more accurate water surface elevations and flow velocities.
  • Reducing the need for overly fine meshes that increase simulation time.
2D Modeling › 2D Computational Theory

HEC-RAS 2D Computational Equations Comparison

Defining HEC-RAS 2D Computational Equations

HEC-RAS can perform two-dimensional unsteady flow routing using 2D computational equations. HEC-RAS provides four methods for computing the flow field in a 2D mesh, each of which may be selected from the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box.

Follow the steps below to use the various 2D computational equation options:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, select the Unsteady Flow Computational Options command.
    Unsteady Flow Computational Options command
  2. The Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box will be displayed as shown below.Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box
    Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Unsteady Flow Computational Options command.
  3. Select the 2D Flow Options panel of the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box as shown below.
    2D Flow Options panel
  4. The 2D Flow Area Computational Parameters section of the 2D Flow Options panel allows the user to set computational options and tolerances for the 2D computational module.
    2D Flow Area Computational Parameters section of the 2D Flow Options panel

The following sections describe the various advantages and disadvantages of the HEC-RAS 2D computational equations.

2D Computational Equations in HEC-RAS

The Computational Equation dropdown combo box of the 2D Flow Area Computational Parameters section allows the user to select one of the four available 2D computational equations for computing the flow field in a 2D mesh. The following 2D computational equations are provided in the dropdown combo box:

  • Diffusion Wave
  • SWE-Eulerian-Lagrangian Method
  • SWE-Eulerian Method
  • SWE-Local Inertia Method
Computational Equation dropdown combo box

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about 2D computational equations.

Advantages and Disadvantages of HEC-RAS 2D Computational Equations

Each 2D computational equation has specific applications depending on the modeling requirements and the nature of the hydrodynamic processes involved. Choosing the right computational equation is always crucial for achieving accurate and efficient modeling outcomes. It is important to understand that each 2D computational equation has distinct advantages and disadvantages.

The following sections describe the benefits and drawbacks of various 2D computational equations.

Diffusion Wave Equation

The Diffusion Wave equation method is the default solver, and it allows the user to model various modeling situations accurately. In general, many flood applications will work fine with the Diffusion Wave equations. The Diffusion Wave equation is one of the computational methods used for modeling the 2D flow area. Some of the advantages and disadvantages of using the Diffusion Wave equation are as follows:

Advantages

  • This computational method is suitable for scenarios where flow is primarily driven by gravity and friction, such as flood extent estimation.
  • This computational method allows computations to run faster and with greater stability and the methodology can handle larger time steps.
  • This computational method is good for assessing the potential effects of dam breaks and interior areas due to levee breaches.
  • The methodology is good for computing approximate global estimates, such as flood extent.
  • The methodology is good for quick estimations before a full momentum equation (SWE) run.

Disadvantages

  • It does not account for fluid acceleration changes and is less accurate for detailed hydrodynamic studies where wave propagation is significant.
  • This computational method is not suitable for sharp contractions and expansions.
  • This methodology is not effective for predicting detailed velocity distributions in channels or around objects.
  • This computational method does not work well for mixed flow regimes and hydraulic jumps.

Because the user can easily switch between 2D computational equations, each solver can be tried for a given model to see whether the usage of the Diffusion Wave equation is preferable to the Shallow Water Equations.

The decision to use the Diffusion Wave equation should be based on the specific requirements of the user, considering factors like the level of detail required, computational resources available, and the nature of the hydraulic phenomena being modeled.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about scenarios in which the Diffusion Wave equation can be used.

SWE-Eulerian-Lagrangian Method

The SWE-Eulerian-Lagrangian Method (SWE-ELM) is the original solution for the Shallow Water Equations in HEC-RAS modeling and is suitable for a wide range of conditions. Some of the advantages and disadvantages of the SWE-Eulerian-Lagrangian Method are as follows:

Advantages

  • This computational method provides detailed and accurate hydrodynamic modeling.
  • The SWE-Eulerian-Lagrangian Method also has options for modeling turbulence and Coriolis effects.
  • This computational method requires smaller computational intervals than the Diffusion Wave method in order to run stably.
  • This computational method is suitable to use for flat-sloping river systems where slopes are usually less than 1 ft/mile.

These advantages make the SWE-Eulerian-Lagrangian Method a robust choice for complex hydraulic modeling, thus providing engineers with a powerful computational tool for detailed analysis and decision-making in water resources projects.

Under certain types of modeling conditions, the SWE-Eulerian-Lagrangian Method should be used for greater accuracy. The users can try the multiple equation sets and efficiently compare the answers by selecting the equation set to use and running the simulation. It is suggested that users first create a new Plan file and then use a different equation set to easily compare the results.

Disadvantages

  • This computational method requires more computational power, resulting in longer run times.
  • This computational method can become numerically unstable in rapidly changing flow directions.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about scenarios in which the Shallow Water Equation can be used.

SWE-Eulerian Method

The SWE-Eulerian Method is one of the computational equations used for 2D flow area modeling. Some of the advantages and disadvantages of the SWE-Eulerian Method are as follows:

Advantages

  • This computational method is very effective in conserving mass and momentum over the computational domain.
  • This computational method produces less numerical diffusion than the original Shallow Water equation.
  • This computational method provides a very detailed look at specific areas. For example, it is particularly useful for examining changes in water surfaces and velocities at and around hydraulic structures, piers/abutments, and areas with tight contractions and expansions.

Disadvantages

  • More complex and computationally intensive than simpler methods, potentially leading to longer computational times.
  • The increased complexity of the equations used in the SWE-Eulerian Method might require a deeper understanding of fluid dynamics and numerical modeling.

Though the SWE-Eulerian Method solution method is more momentum-conservative, it may require smaller time steps and produce longer run times. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about scenarios in which the SWE-Eulerian Method can be used.

SWE-Local Inertia Method

The SWE-Local Inertia Method has specific advantages and disadvantages that make it suitable for certain modeling scenarios. Some of the advantages and disadvantages of the SWE-Local Inertia Method are as follows:

Advantages

  • This method is computationally more efficient due to its simplified approach.
  • This computational method ignores the advection, diffusion, and Coriolis terms in the momentum equation, which results in a system of equations that is much simpler to solve.
  • The simplification of the equations makes this method easier to implement and understand, especially for straightforward modeling scenarios where high precision in momentum conservation is not critical.

Disadvantages

  • For detailed studies involving complex interactions of flow with structures or in highly variable flow conditions, this method might not capture all the necessary dynamics, leading to less accurate results.
  • This computational method has a limited application scope.
  • This method ignores certain dynamic aspects of fluid motion (like advection, diffusion, and Coriolis effects), and it may not be suitable for scenarios where these factors significantly influence the flow, such as in highly dynamic and turbulent waters.

This method is a good choice for simpler, less dynamic modeling scenarios where speed and computational efficiency are more critical than capturing complex flow dynamics. For more complex scenarios, other methods like the SWE-Eulerian-Lagrangian Method or SWE-Eulerian Method equations may be more appropriate.

2D Modeling › 2D Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting 2D Fragmented Inundation

2D Fragmented Inundation

In fragment inundation, the hydraulic parameters between two cell centers are based on the higher of the two neighboring water surface elevations. An average between the two cell center elevations makes more sense hydraulically. But computationally, this can cause problems, particularly if there is an inflection (i.e., high ground) over the length between the cell centers, which could result in a water surface elevation lower than the lowest ground point in the 2D cell face. This produces a small amount of error, particularly in steeper terrain, but is not the reason for fragmented inundation.

2D Fragmented Inundation

The HEC-RAS project results use a single water surface elevation computed per 2D cell. Normally, with sufficient water depths, this would go unnoticed. However, when water first enters a portion of a 2D flow area, depths are very low, and fragmentation may show up initially, especially if the terrain is steep and the cell size is relatively large. See the following diagram of a 2D mesh where 2D cells are too large on a steep slope.

2D mesh where 2D cells are too large on a steep slope.

As shown in the above diagram, there are two neighboring cells with water flowing from left to right over steep terrain. The computed water surface elevation is a graphical representation of how the conservation of momentum and continuity equations are solved. In reality, the 2D cell face hydraulics are based on the water surface elevation from the upper cell center and the depth difference between the mapped water surface elevation. The computed water surface elevation at a cell face can be considered a schematization error. However, computationally, a water surface gradient is realized between the 2D cell centers, but when plotted, a single average water surface elevation is used for the entirety of each 2D cell. If the depth is too low, the modeler will notice dry portions in between wet portions, resulting in fragmented inundation. See the following terrain with smaller 2D cells.

2D mesh where 2D cells are too small on a steep slope.

With the smaller 2D cell size, each 2D cell will be completely wetted for the same computed hydraulic gradient, resulting in a smoother, more realistic-looking inundation map. Decreasing cell size helps to reduce or eliminate fragmented inundation and the schematization error associated with how cell face hydraulics are computed.

The modeler should first analyze the requirement of reducing the size of 2D cells to troubleshoot the affected 2D flow area. Note that computationally, a hydraulic gradient is still realized over the length between cell centers, even when the modeler observes the fragmented inundation. The visualized fragmentation shows how the GeoHECRAS computational scheme arrives at a single water surface elevation for a given 2D cell and plots the corresponding water surface elevation. If the modeler is interested in the maximum inundation, then eliminating fragmentation at the beginning of the flood event may not be necessary.

If fragmented inundation is observed while checking the inundation maps, the underlying terrain of the project should also be checked. Note that 2D mesh leaking is another serious mapping error that can look similar to the fragmented inundation.

2D Mesh Leaking

In 2D HEC-RAS modeling, 2D mesh leaking is different from fragmented inundation. Leaking is an issue in the 2D mesh in situations where terrain features do not align properly with cell faces or when cells are too large, leading to incorrect results in flood simulations. As shown in the below diagram, a high-ground feature is overlapped by a large cell. In this scenario, GeoHECRAS preserves the underlying terrain on the cell faces, but the cell itself is resolved to a volume-elevation curve.

High-ground feature is overlapped by a large cell.

Because the high ground feature runs diagonally through the cell, GeoHECRAS does not recognize it as a barrier to water flow before it is overtopped. This results in water leaking through the high-ground feature prematurely. To address the leaking issue in 2D mesh, cell faces in the area of high-ground features should be aligned with the terrain to prevent leakage. By manually refining 2D mesh and aligning cell faces with high-ground contours, a higher-resolution flood map can be created that prevents leakage before overtopping.

High-resolution flood map that prevents leakage before overtopping.

Manually adding cell centers to align cell faces is imprecise and time-consuming. GeoHECRAS allows users to define breaklines along high-ground terrain features, which automatically generates 2D mesh, aligns cell faces with the defined breaklines, simplifies the process, and improves precision.

Handling 2D Mesh Leaking with 2D Area Breaklines

The 2D area breaklines in 2D HEC-RAS modeling are designed to address issues with leaking in 2D meshes, particularly when cell faces need to align with high-ground features, such as levees or berms, to properly represent the terrain in the mesh.

In 2D HEC-RAS modeling, the user is allowed to draw breaklines along the crest of high-ground features in topography, creating barriers to water flow. The breaklines help ensure that cell faces align with these high-ground features. As shown in the below diagram, there is a high-ground feature with an overflow section. If cell faces are not aligned properly, the model can allow flow to leak through the high-ground feature even before it is overtopped.

High-ground feature with an overflow section.

The user can select points on the schematic to draw breaklines, specify breaklines cell center spacing, and enforce the breaklines in the 2D flow area, as shown below.

2D breakline enforced in the 2D flow area.

The use of 2D flow area breaklines ensures that high-ground features no longer leak, allowing water to pass only after overtopping occurs, as shown below.

High-ground features with no leaks

There may still be some fragmentation downstream of the crest when water flows over steep terrain. The user can adjust cell sizes to address this issue but should consider the trade-offs based on the study objectives. Overall, 2D flow area breaklines offer a more efficient way to handle mesh alignment and reduce leaking in 2D models, enhancing the accuracy of flood simulations.

2D Modeling › 2D Troubleshooting

HEC-RAS 2D Analysis Error – Weir Stationing Not Increasing

When performing a 2D HEC-RAS analysis that contains storage areas and 2D connections, the HEC-RAS program might report the following error message.

Error-Message-Dialog-Box.png

When this error message is reported, it might not be obvious what is wrong with the model or how to correct it. The below example illustrates this problem and how to correct it.

Original-Mesh-min.png

Revising the mesh so that the mesh boundary is adjacent to the storage area/2D connection will correct the problem and remove the error message.

Revised-Mesh-min.png

The below image shows a close-up of the revised mesh boundary and the adjacent connection element.

Revised-Mesh-Close-Up.png
Flow Data & Boundary Conditions › Steady Flow Data

Steady Flow Data Command

In GeoHECRAS, the Steady Flow Data command allows the user to define the flow profiles and corresponding boundary conditions data to perform a steady flow analysis.

A steady flow model can have several river reaches and by using the Steady Flow Data command, the user can define the steady flow data for each river reach. Steady flow data consists of boundary conditions, initial conditions, and discharge information (peak flows or flow data from a specific period in time).

This article explains how to enter steady flow data and boundary conditions using the Steady Flow Data command.

Follow the steps below to use the Steady Flow Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Steady Flow Data command.Steady Flow Data input ribbon menu command
  2. The Steady Flow Data dialog box will be displayed.Steady Flow Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Steady Flow Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

River Reach Data

This section contains Downstream Boundary Conditions, Upstream Boundary Conditions, Flow Data, Interior Change, and Gate Openings panels to enter flow profiles and corresponding boundary conditions data for performing the steady flow analysis.

River Reach Data section

Downstream Boundary Conditions

This panel allows the user to define downstream boundary conditions for each profile.

The Select River Reach section allows the user to select a river reach for defining the downstream boundary conditions. Note that if a river reach has been preselected from the Map View before running this command, the selected river and reach will be displayed in the River and Reach dropdown combo boxes.

If the model contains a single river and reach, it will automatically be selected in the River and Reach dropdown combo boxes. If the model contains multiple rivers and reaches, the user can select the desired river and reach from the River and Reach dropdown combo boxes.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the river reach from the Map View. Clicking on the [Pick] button causes the dialog box to temporarily disappear, and the user will be prompted to select the river reach from the Map View. Note that only one river reach can be selected at a time. After selecting a river reach, the dialog box will be redisplayed with the river reach shown as selected. The selected river reach is highlighted on the Map View.

The Downstream Boundary Conditions panel contains a table that defines the downstream boundary conditions on a profile-by-profile basis. Note that connections to junctions are considered internal boundary conditions. Internal boundary conditions are automatically listed in the table based on how the river system was defined. The user is only required to enter the necessary external boundary conditions.

The following data are defined in this table:

  • Profile
    This read-only column displays the profile number.
  • Profile Name
    This column displays the profile name. The user can rename any profile when needed.
  • Boundary Condition
    This column contains a read-only dropdown combo box that allows the user to select the type of boundary condition for each profile. There are four boundary conditions available for steady flow analysis: Critical Depth, Normal Depth, Rating Curve, and Water Surface Elev.Boundary Condition dropdown entry

    Selecting the Rating Curve option causes the following informational dialog box to be displayed.

    Assign Boundary Condition dialog box 1

    Changing a boundary condition from a rating curve to a different option causes the following confirmational dialog box to be displayed.

    Assign Boundary Condition dialog box 2

    Click the [Yes] button and the rating curve boundary condition will be deleted. To abort the process, click the [No] button.To learn about boundary condition types in detail, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

  • Boundary Detail
    This column provides additional data for the selected boundary condition. This entry changes based upon the selected boundary condition type.The following table shows what is included in this entry:


    Boundary Condition

    Boundary Details Field Descriptions



    Normal Depth

    The user is required to enter the energy slope value. This value represents the energy grade slope at the downstream boundary. In addition, a [Calc] button is provided. If the energy is unknown, the user could approximate it by clicking the [Calc] button. Note that if the computed slope is less than 0.000010, the software will assign a default (minimum) value of 0.000010.

    Water Surface Elev

    The user is required to enter a known water surface elevation value for each of the profiles to be computed. This value represents the water surface elevation at the downstream boundary.

    Critical Depth

    Nothing is to be entered. The software automatically calculates the critical depth for each of the profiles and uses that as the boundary condition.

    Rating Curve

    The user is required to enter an elevation versus flow rating curve. When this type of boundary condition is selected, a [Define…] button is provided in the first row of the Boundary Details column. The other rows of this column do not show a [Define…] button. Clicking a [Define…] button will display a Rating Curve dialog box to define the boundary condition data. Note that there can be separate rating curves for each boundary in a river reach. However, there is only one rating curve defined for a boundary (not separate rating curves for each profile).


Upstream Boundary Conditions

This panel allows the user to define upstream boundary conditions data. It should be used only when a supercritical or mixed flow regime is being analyzed.

Note that this panel is similar to that of the Downstream Boundary Conditions panel. Refer to the Downstream Boundary Conditions Panel part of this article to learn more about the Upstream Boundary Conditions panel.

Upstream Boundary Conditions panel

Flow Data

This panel allows the user to define the flow to be analyzed for the selected river reach. It contains a flow data table that has rows corresponding to profiles to be analyzed and columns corresponding to cross section river stations.

Flow Data Panel

The Select interior location section provides read-only dropdown combo boxes to select the river, reach, and river station. The [Pick] button is used to select the interior cross section river stations from the Map View.

Note that the River station dropdown combo box lists all of the interior cross section river stations for the current river reach, including the downstream most cross section. It does not list the upstream most cross section (at the upstream end of the current river reach), nor roadway crossing or inline structure river stations. In addition, it excludes cross sections already added as interior cross sections in the table to prevent the addition of duplicate entries.

The Flow Data panel contains a table that defines flow data. The following data are defined in this table:

  • Profile
    This is a read-only field that displays the profile number.
  • Profile Name
    This column displays the profile name. The user can edit the profile name when needed.

The remaining fields of the table are used to define the discharge to be analyzed in the river reach.

The software automatically adds the cross section river station corresponding to the upstream end of the selected river reach next to the Profile Name column of the table. Note that a flow value must be defined for this column. This flow value is assumed to remain constant and is internally propagated to subsequent downstream cross sections until another flow value is defined.

To change the flow along the current river reach, select the interior cross section river station from the River station dropdown combo box and then click the [Add Flow Change Location] button. A column will be added in the table corresponding to the selected cross section river station. The new flow value will be assumed to remain constant for subsequent downstream cross sections until another flow change location is defined. Note that the flow data columns are automatically sorted with the left corresponding to upstream river stationing and the right corresponding to downstream river stationing.

To delete a flow change location column from the table, click on the [X] close button at the top of the column. The software will display the following confirmational dialog box:

Remove Flow Change Location dialog box

Click the [Yes] button and the flow change location column will be deleted from the table. To abort the process, click the [No] button.

Interior Change

This panel allows the user to set specific changes in the water surface and energy between any two cross sections in the steady flow model. The changes in water surface and energy can be set for a specific profile in a multiple-profile model.

Interior Change Panel

The Select interior location section provides read-only dropdown combo boxes to select the river, reach, river station, and profile to which the user would like to add an internal change. The [Pick] button is used to select the river station from the Map View.

Once the user has established a location and profile, click the [Add Change Location] button. The software will add data in the table corresponding to the River Name, Reach Name, River Station, and Profile columns.

Note that the River station dropdown combo box excludes river stations already added in the table to prevent the addition of duplicate entries.

In the Change Type column, the user can select one of the following options:

  • Additional EG: This option allows the user to add an additional energy loss between two cross sections. This energy loss will be used in the energy balance equation in addition to the normal friction and contraction and expansion losses.
  • Change in EG: This option allows the user to set a specific amount of energy loss between two cross sections. When this option is selected, the software does not perform an energy balance. It simply adds the specified energy loss to the energy of the downstream cross section and computes a corresponding water surface.
  • Known WS: This option allows the user to set a water surface at a specific cross section for a specific profile. During the computations, the software will not compute a water surface elevation for any cross section where a known water surface elevation has been found.
  • Change in WS: This option allows the user to force a specific change in the water surface elevation between two cross sections. When this option is selected, the program adds the user specified change in water surface to the downstream cross section and then calculates a corresponding energy to match the new water surface.
  • K Loss: This option allows the user to calculate an additional energy loss to be added to the solution of the energy balance. The user-entered K coefficient can range from 0.0 to 1.0.

In the Value column, the user can enter a number, which represents the magnitude of the internal change or required coefficient.

Gate Openings

This panel allows the user to control gate openings for any inline or lateral gated spillways that have been added to the geometric data.

Gate Openings Panel

The Select inline/lateral structure location section provides read-only dropdown combo boxes to select the river, reach, and river station. The [Pick] button is used to select the inline or lateral structure location from the Map View.

Once the user has established an inline/lateral structure location, the software will add corresponding gate opening data along with the profile name in the table. The user can then specify how many gates are opened per gate group in the Open Gates column and at what elevation they are opened in the Open Height(ft) column.

For example (in the above image), there are two gate groups labeled "Gate #1", and "Gate #2." Each gate group has one identical gate opening. "Gate #1"has a maximum opening height of five feet and "Gate #2" has a height of seven feet. For profile number 1, all gate groups are opened. This type of information must be entered for all of the profiles being computed.

Other Data

This section contains Storage Area Stages, Inline Gate Optimization, and Initial Lateral Flows panels to enter additional data for performing the steady flow analysis.

Other Data - Storage Area Stages panel

Storage Area Stages

This panel allows the user to enter water surface elevations for the defined storage areas. Storage areas are most often used in unsteady flow modeling, but they may also be part of a steady flow model. When using storage areas within a steady flow analysis, the user is required to enter a water surface elevation for each storage area for each profile.

This panel contains an elevation data table that has rows corresponding to profiles to be analyzed and columns corresponding to each of the defined storage areas.

By default, the software will keep the initial stage to the invert of the storage area in the column corresponding to each of the defined storage areas. However, the user can enter different water surface elevation values. In addition, the user can select a cell and then click the [Invert] button and the software will overwrite the value with the invert of the storage area.

Note that if a minimum elevation is not defined for the storage area, the following informational dialog box will be displayed on clicking the [Invert] button:

Cannot Assign Invert Elevation dialog box

If a minimum elevation data is defined for the storage area, the following confirmational dialog box will be displayed on clicking the [Invert] button:

Overwrite Boundary Condition dialog box

Click the [Yes] button and the storage area stage elevation will be overwritten with the invert elevation. To abort the process, click the [No] button.

Inline Gate Optimization

This panel allows the user to direct the software to compute a gate setting at a structure in order to obtain a user-specified water surface upstream of the structure. After defining the upstream stage for each profile, the software will iterate with different gate settings until the desired upstream water surface is obtained.

Inline Gate Optimization Panel

Initial Lateral Flows

This panel allows the user to enter initial estimates of the flow that is leaving the main river through a lateral structure. Flow values can be entered for each profile. The user-entered flow is subtracted from the main river before the first profile is computed. This panel is very handy in reducing the required computation time or allowing the software to reach a solution that may not have been achievable.

Initial Lateral Flows Panel
Flow Data & Boundary Conditions › Steady Flow Data

Steady Flow Calibration Command

The Steady Flow Calibration command is used to perform HEC-RAS steady flow model calibration using observed water surface elevations. Using this command, the user can adjust the cross section Manning's roughness to match an existing flood event so that the HEC-RAS model accurately predicts future floods.

Follow the steps below to use the Steady Flow Calibration command:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, select the Steady Flow Calibration command.
    Steady Flow Calibration Analysis ribbon menu command
  2. The Steady Flow Calibration dialog box will be displayed.
    Steady Flow Calibration dialog box

The following sections describe the Steady Flow Calibration command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting River Reach

For an HEC‑RAS model with multiple river reaches, the user can select the desired river reach to perform the steady flow model calibration. The River name and Reach name dropdown combo boxes display a listing of the river and corresponding reaches contained within the model. The user can select the preferred river reach using these dropdown combo boxes.

Alternatively, click the [Pick] button adjacent to the Reach name entry to directly select a river reach from the Map View. On clicking the [Pick] button, the Steady Flow Calibration dialog box will temporarily disappear. The software will then prompt the user to select the river reach from the Map View. After selecting a river reach, the user will be returned to the dialog box with the river reach selected.

[Pick] button

Selecting Profile

The Profile dropdown combo box displays a listing of all the computed water surface profiles contained within the selected model. The user can select the profile for which the HEC-RAS steady flow model calibration is to be performed.

Profile dropdown combo box

Selecting Manning’s Roughness Data

The Manning’s Roughness Data dropdown combo box allows the user to select the cross section subareas on which the Manning’s adjustments are to be applied. The following options are provided in the dropdown combo box.

Manning’s Roughness Data dropdown combo box

Based on the selected subareas, the data table will be updated and will show only those values that correspond to the selected subarea.

Data Table

The data table in the Steady Flow Calibration dialog box lists the observed and computed water surface elevations and the roughness coefficients corresponding to the respective cross sections.

The data table displays the following data:

  • River station
    This column lists all of the river stations contained in the selected river reach.
  • Type
    This column defines the river station type. The river stations can be one of the following types:
    1. Cross Section
    2. Inline Structure
    3. Lateral Structure
    4. Roadway Crossing/Bridge and Culvert

    Note that this column defines the river station types that are other than cross-section. If the river station is a type of cross-section, the column will be empty.

  • Observed WSEL
    This column allows the user to define the observed water surface elevations for each cross section (including bridges and inline structures) within each profile.
  • Downstream Distance
    This column allows the user to define a distance downstream of the specified river station, to further define the actual location of the observed water surface data. Click the [...] button to measure the downstream distance from the river station to the observed water surface elevation from the Map View.
  • Interpolated WSEL
    This column lists the interpolated water surface elevation for each cross section. It is determined by interpolating the computed water surface elevation at the defined offset by looking at the water surface elevation at the two bounding cross sections and then using similar triangles to interpolate the elevation.
  • Computed WSEL
    This column lists the computed water surface elevation for each river station.
  • WSEL Change
    This column lists the differences between the Computed WSEL and Observed WSEL for each cross section.
  • Roughness Coefficients
    The n1, n2,..., and n7 columns allow the user to define Manning's roughness coefficients.

In addition, the data contained in the table can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document. To do this, right-click on the table and select the Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF command from the displayed context menu.

Right-click context menu command

Selected Cells Group Editing

This section allows the user to select the type of adjustment to be performed on the selected river reach(es) and cross section subareas. The user can select the desired cells from the data table and then edit the cell’s coefficient either individually or in a batch.

Selected Cells Group Editing section

The user can edit the coefficients using:

  • Add Constant: This option adds a constant value to the selected cell's value.
  • Multiply By Factor: This option multiplies the selected cell's value by a user-defined number.
  • Apply Value: This option replaces the selected cell's value with the user-specified value.

To edit the cell’s coefficient, select the cell by clicking on it while pressing the [Ctrl] or [Shift] key; choose the desired cell-editing option; enter the change coefficient, and then click the [Apply Change] button. Note that the [Apply Change] button is only available when the group editing option other than the No Change option is selected and at least one cell is selected.

[Apply Change] button

Performing Analysis

When all the options have been defined, click the [Analyze] button to perform the HEC-RAS steady flow model calibration. While the analysis is running, the button changes to [Cancel] so that the user can cancel the analysis if desired. When finished, the computed values will be shown in the Steady Flow Calibration data table. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.

Flow Data & Boundary Conditions › Steady Flow Data

Import Steady Flow Data Command

The Import Steady Flow Data command allows the user to import shapefile steady flow data and assign it to existing HEC-RAS river reaches.

A steady flow model can have hundreds of river reaches, and the user may want to define the steady flow data for these reaches via GIS rather than defining it manually, river reach by river reach. For this, the Import Steady Flow Data command can be used to import the GIS node data and map the steady flows defined at the GIS nodes to the underlying HEC-RAS model.

Follow the steps below to use the Import Steady Flow Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Import Data dropdown menu and select the Import Steady Flow Data command.
    Import Steady Flow Data ribbon menu command
  2. The Import Steady Flow Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Import Steady Flow Data dialog box
  3. Select the GIS shapefile from the Node shapefile dropdown combo box.
  4. From the dropdown boxes provided under the Select Flow Attribute column, select the flow attribute data that you want to map.
    Select Flow Attribute dropdown combo box
    The dropdown combo boxes show attribute fields contained within the shapefile. It allows the user to define more than one discharge for the HEC-RAS model, like when modeling the 10-year, 25-year, 50-year, and 100-year storm events.
    Note that the profile name for the selected flow attribute is automatically defined in the Define Profile Name column. The user can type in a different profile name if required.
  5. Check the Override existing flow values checkbox to override any existing flow values. By default, this checkbox is checked.
  6. Check the Set downstream boundary to Normal Depth checkbox to set the downstream boundary condition to Normal Depth. By default, this checkbox is checked.
  7. Click the [Import] button, and the software will import and assign the shapefile steady flow data to existing HEC-RAS river reaches.
    [Import] button
Flow Data & Boundary Conditions › Unsteady Flow Data

Unsteady Flow Data Command

In GeoHECRAS software, the Unsteady Flow Data command allows the user to define the boundary conditions data necessary to perform an unsteady flow analysis. Unsteady flow data consists of external boundary conditions, internal boundary conditions, and global boundary conditions (Meteorological Data).

External boundary conditions are required to run an unsteady model. External boundary conditions must be established at all open ends (i.e., upstream and downstream ends) of each river reach (or 2D flow area) being modeled.

Internal boundary conditions are optional and allow the user to define gate operations and add flow within a river reach.

Global boundary conditions allow the user to define spatial precipitation and evapotranspiration data.

Follow the steps below to use the Unsteady Flow Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Unsteady Flow Data command.
    Unsteady Flow Data command
  2. The Unsteady Flow Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Unsteady Flow Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Unsteady Flow Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

River Reach Data

This panel allows the user to define boundary conditions and initial flow and stage conditions data for performing the unsteady flow analysis. Note that the River Reach Data panel is used for 1D unsteady flow modeling.

The following subpanels are provided:

  • Boundary Conditions
  • Initial Flow & Stage Conditions

Boundary Conditions

This subpanel allows the user to define external and internal reach boundary conditions to be used in the unsteady flow analysis.

The Select interior location section allows the user to select the river, reach, and corresponding internal river cross section. Note that if a cross section has been preselected from the Map View before running this command, then the River name, Reach name, and Interior river station dropdown combo box fields will show the corresponding river, reach, and selected cross section.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to manually select the cross section from the Map View. Clicking the [Pick] button causes the dialog box to temporarily disappear, and the user will be prompted to select an interior cross section from the Map View. Note that only one cross section can be selected at a time. After selecting a cross section, the dialog box will be redisplayed and the River name, Reach name, and Interior river station dropdown combo box fields will automatically update corresponding to the selected cross section. In addition, the selected cross section is highlighted on the Map View.

After selecting an interior cross section, the [Add Boundary Condition Location] button becomes enabled. Click the [Add Boundary Condition Location] button and a row will be added to the boundary conditions table defining the internal boundary condition location.

The Boundary Conditions subpanel contains a table that defines the boundary condition data. The software automatically lists the external boundary condition locations (most upstream and downstream cross sections) and inline/lateral structures in the table. The user is only required to enter the internal boundary condition locations. Note that the external boundary condition locations cannot be deleted from the table. However, the user can delete the interior boundary condition locations from the table.

To delete an interior boundary condition location from the table, click the [X] close button adjacent to the internal boundary condition row. The Remove Interior Location dialog box will be displayed.

Remove Interior Location dialog box


Click the [Yes] button and the selected interior boundary condition location will be deleted from the table. To abort the process, click the [No] button.

The table in this subpanel contains the following data column entries:

  • River
    This read-only entry lists the river name.
  • Reach
    This read-only entry lists the reach name.
  • River Station
    This read-only entry lists the cross section river station.
  • Boundary Condition
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to select the type of boundary condition for each river station (cross section). The dropdown combo box provides the boundary condition types based upon the cross section location, as shown in the table below:

    Boundary Condition

    Available for Locations

    Blank

    (empty entry, default)

    Normal Depth

    Downstream boundary

    Flow Hydrograph

    Downstream & upstream boundary

    Stage Hydrograph

    Downstream & upstream boundary

    Stage/Flow Hydrograph

    Downstream & upstream boundary

    Rating Curve

    Downstream boundary

    Lateral Inflow Hydrograph

    Interior cross section

    Uniform Lateral Inflow

    Interior cross section

    Interior Boundary Stage/Flow

    Interior cross section

    Groundwater Interflow

    Interior cross section

    Time Series Gate Opening

    Inline/Lateral structure

    Elevation Controlled Gates

    Inline/Lateral structure

  • Boundary Details
    This entry provides additional data for the selected boundary condition. This entry changes based upon the selected boundary condition type, as shown in the table below:

    Boundary Condition

    Descriptions

    Empty

    Empty

    Normal Depth

    The user is required to enter the energy slope value. This value represents the energy grade slope at the downstream boundary. In addition, a [Calc] button is provided. If the energy slope is unknown, the user could approximate it by clicking the [Calc] button.

    Flow Hydrograph

    It can be used as either an upstream boundary or a downstream boundary condition. When this type of boundary condition is selected, a [Define…] button is provided. Clicking a [Define…] button will display a Flow Hydrograph dialog box to define the boundary condition data.

    Stage Hydrograph

    It can be used as either an upstream boundary or a downstream boundary condition. When this type of boundary condition is selected, a [Define…] button is provided. Clicking a [Define…] button will display a Stage Hydrograph dialog box to define the boundary condition data.

    Stage/Flow Hydrograph

    It can be used together as either an upstream or downstream boundary condition. When this type of boundary condition is selected, a [Define…] button is provided. Clicking a [Define…] button will display a Stage/Flow Hydrograph dialog box to define the boundary condition data.

    Rating Curve

    It can be used as a downstream boundary condition. When this type of boundary condition is selected, a [Define…] button is provided. Clicking a [Define…] button will display a Rating Curve dialog box to define the boundary condition data.

    Lateral Inflow Hydrograph

    It can be used as an internal boundary condition that allows the user to bring in flow at a specific point along the stream. When this type of boundary condition is selected, a [Define…] button is provided. Clicking a [Define…] button will display a Lateral Inflow Hydrograph dialog box to define the boundary condition data.

    Uniform Lateral Inflow Hydrograph

    It can be used as an internal boundary condition that allows the user to bring in a flow hydrograph and distribute it uniformly along the river reach between two user-specified cross section locations. When this type of boundary condition is selected, a [Define…] button is provided. Clicking a [Define…] button will display a Uniform Lateral Inflow Hydrograph dialog box to define the boundary condition data.

    Groundwater Interflow

    It is similar to a uniform lateral inflow in that the user enters an upstream and a downstream river station in which the flow passes back and forth. When this type of boundary condition is selected, a [Define…] button is provided. Clicking a [Define…] button will display a Groundwater Interflow dialog box to define the boundary condition data.

    Interior Boundary Stage/Flow

    It allows the user to enter a known stage hydrograph and/or a flow hydrograph, to be used as an internal boundary condition. When this type of boundary condition is selected, a [Define…] button is provided. Clicking a [Define…] button will display an Interior Boundary Stage/Flow dialog box to define the boundary condition data.

    Time Series Gate Openings

    It allows the user to enter a time series of gate openings for an inline gated spillway, a lateral gated spillway, or a gated spillway connecting two storage areas. When this type of boundary condition is selected, a [Define…] button is provided. Clicking a [Define…] button will display a Time Series Gate Openings dialog box to define the boundary condition data.

    Elevation Controlled Gates

    It allows the user to control when each gate will open and close as well as the opening and closing rates. When this type of boundary condition is selected, a [Define…] button is provided. Clicking a [Define…] button will display an Elevation Controlled Gates dialog box to define the boundary condition data.


    Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about boundary condition types

Initial Flow & Stage Conditions

This subpanel allows the user to define the initial flow and stage conditions for each reach to be used in the unsteady flow analysis. The user can establish the initial conditions of the system using either the Use Initial Conditions (Restart or Hotstart) File option or the Define Initial Flows option. To learn more about the Initial Flow & Stage Conditions subpanel, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Initial Flow & Stage Conditions subpanel

SA/2D & Connection Data

This panel allows the user to define storage area, 2D flow area, and SA/2D connection data for performing the unsteady flow analysis. Note that this panel is used for the storage area and 2D unsteady flow modeling.

SA/2D & Connection Data panel

The following subpanels are provided:

  • SA/2D Flow Areas
  • SA/2D BC Lines
  • SA/2D Connection Gates
  • Initial Stage Elevations

SA/2D Flow Areas

This subpanel provides a table in which the storage area and 2D flow area boundary conditions are defined.

The table in this subpanel contains the following data column entries:

  • Storage Area/2D Flow Area
    This read-only entry lists the IDs of the storage area and 2D flow area.
  • Boundary Condition
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to select the boundary condition types.
  • Boundary Details
    This entry provides additional data for the selected boundary condition. This entry changes based upon the selected boundary condition. Refer to the River Reach Data panel part of this article to learn more about the Boundary Details entry.

SA/2D BC Lines

This subpanel provides a table in which the 2D flow area boundary conditions lines are defined.

SA/2D BC Lines subpanel

The table in this subpanel contains the following data column entries:

  • Boundary Condition Line ID
    This read-only entry lists the IDs of the 2D flow area boundary conditions lines.
  • Boundary Condition
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to select the boundary condition types.
  • Boundary Details
    This entry provides additional data for the selected boundary condition. This entry changes based upon the selected boundary condition. Refer to the River Reach Data panel part of this article to learn more about the Boundary Details entry.

SA/2D Connection Gates

This subpanel provides a table that lists the SA/2D connections in which the gates and outlet time series are defined.

SA/2D Connection Gates subpanel

The table in this subpanel contains the following data column entries:

  • SA/2D Connection
    This read-only entry lists the IDs of the SA/2D connections.
  • Boundary Condition
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to select the boundary condition types.
  • Boundary Details
    This entry is adjacent to the Boundary Condition entry that provides additional data for the selected boundary condition. This entry changes based upon the selected boundary condition. Refer to the River Reach Data panel part of this article to learn more about the Boundary Details entry.

Initial Stage Elevations

This subpanel allows the user to define the initial stage elevations for storage areas and 2D flow areas defined in the model.

Initial Stage Elevations subpanel

The table in this subpanel contains the following data column entries:

  • SA/2D Flow Area/Initial Condition Point
    This read-only entry lists the IDs of the storage area, 2D flow area, and initial condition point.
  • Initial Stage
    This entry can be left blank to simulate the area “starting dry.” Alternatively, the user can start with a constant water surface elevation by entering an elevation value for each storage area and 2D flow area. By default, the software will use the initial stage of the storage area and 2D flow area.
  • Assign Invert
    This entry allows the user to overwrite the stage elevation of the storage area with the invert elevation in the Initial Stage column by clicking the [Invert] button.
  • Keep storage area initial elevations constant during warmup
    This checkbox option allows the software to keep water surface levels in storage areas at the user-entered value during the warmup period (e.g., a dry storage area will still be dry at the end of the warmup even if it had incoming flow). If a warmup period is not used, then this checkbox option will have no effect. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to perform a warmup run.

Meteorology Data

This panel allows the user to utilize meteorology (i.e., precipitation and evapotranspiration) data for unsteady flow modeling.

Meteorology Data panel

The following subpanels are provided:

  • Precipitation Data
  • Evapotranspiration Data
  • Rasterization Specifications

Precipitation Data

This subpanel allows the user to define the spatial precipitation data for unsteady flow modeling. By default, the checkbox at this subpanel is unchecked and contents are disabled (i.e., grayed out). Check the checkbox at the Precipitation Data subpanel to enable the contents of this subpanel.

The following sections are provided in this subpanel:

  • Constant Precipitation
  • Rain Gage Data

Constant Precipitation

This section allows the user to define the constant precipitation rate and scale factor for the precipitation rate.

The following options are provided:

  • Precipitation rate
    This entry field defines the constant precipitation rate. Click the [Retrieve Data] button to retrieve the precipitation data. On clicking the [Retrieve Data] button, the Unsteady Flow Data dialog box will temporarily disappear, and the Lookup Rainfall Intensity dialog box will be displayed.
    Lookup Rainfall Intensity dialog box

    In the above dialog box, the user can select the location from which the rainfall intensity data are to be retrieved. Once the desired location is selected, click the Precipitation data source dropdown combo box to select the precipitation data sources that are available. After selecting the precipitation data source, click the [Retrieve] button to retrieve the rainfall intensity data for the selected location.

    Upon successful retrieval of the rainfall intensity data, the software populates the data in the table provided under the Rainfall intensity subsection. This table displays the rainfall intensity values for various storm frequencies and durations. Select the required rainfall intensity rate, then click the [OK] button. The Unsteady Flow Data dialog box will be redisplayed, and the selected rainfall intensity rate will be displayed in the Precipitation rate entry. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about how to retrieve rainfall intensity data.

    Constant Precipitation section
  • Scale factor
    This entry field defines the scale factor that will adjust the defined rain gage data. By default, the software uses a default value of 1.00.
  • Precipitation source and description
    This read-only field displays the reference information of the precipitation data retrieved (i.e., precipitation data source, storm frequency and duration, etc.).

Rain Gage Data

This section allows the user to define the precipitation data that varies with time using a rain gage and then interpolates over the model area using a raster grid. Select the Rain Gage Data radio button option to enable this section. Otherwise, this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Rain Gage Data section

The table in this section contains the following data column entries:

  • Use Rain Gage?
    This checkbox entry allows the user to specify whether to use the defined rain gage. The checkboxes allow the user to turn on or off various rain gages to experiment with the effect of different rain gages being included in the simulation. By default, this entry is unchecked.
  • Rainfall Depth
    This entry allows the user to specify the total rainfall depth for the defined rain gage. Click the [...] button to retrieve the rainfall depth to be assigned to the defined rain gage. On clicking the […] button, the Unsteady Flow Data dialog box will temporarily disappear, and the Lookup Rainfall Depth dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box allows the user to select the rainfall depth. After selecting the rainfall depth, the Unsteady Flow Data dialog box will be redisplayed, and the selected rainfall depth will be displayed in the Rainfall Depth entry. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about how to retrieve rainfall depth.
    Lookup Rainfall Depth dialog box
  • Frequency and Storm Duration
    This read-only entry displays the reference information of the rainfall data retrieved (i.e., frequency (years) and storm duration).
  • Rainfall Distribution
    This entry allows the user to select the rainfall distribution to be used for creating a rain gage. Click the [...] button to select the rainfall distribution to be applied for creating rain gage. On clicking the […] button, the Unsteady Flow Data dialog box will temporarily disappear, and the Rainfall Distribution dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box allows the user to retrieve the rainfall distribution. After selecting the rainfall distribution, the Unsteady Flow Data dialog box will be redisplayed, and the selected rainfall distribution will be displayed in the Rainfall Distribution entry. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about how to retrieve rainfall distribution.
    Rainfall Distribution dialog box
  • Rain Gage ID
    This dropdown combo box entry lists all the rain gages that are defined in the current scenario. The edit option (i.e., pencil icon) allows the user to edit the rain gage ID. Click the [...] button to define rain gage point locations and corresponding precipitation data. On clicking the […] button, the Unsteady Flow Data dialog box will temporarily disappear, and the Rain Gage Data dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box allows the user to define the rain gage data. After defining the rain gage data, the Unsteady Flow Data dialog box will be redisplayed, and the defined rain gage will be listed in the Rain Gage ID dropdown combo box entry. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about how to define rain gage time series data.
    Rain Gage Data dialog box
  • Override Scale Factor
    This entry contains an optional scale factor that will adjust the defined rain gage data. This scale factor will override the defined value of the Global scale factor entry for an individual rain gage.

    In addition, the following additional options are provided in this section:

  • Interpolation method
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the interpolation method that defines how the rain gage data will be interpolated across the 2D precipitation grid. The following interpolation methods are available:
    Interpolation method dropdown combo box
    1. Inverse Distance Squared
      This interpolation method computes a weighted rainfall depth for each rainfall time-step individually by using the inverse square of the distance weighting method to all rain gages near a specific 2D precipitation cell. If the defined rainfall data have an hourly time-step, then the inverse square of the distance weighting method is applied individually at each one-hour time-step.
    2. Inverse Distance Squared (Restricted)
      This interpolation method works similarly to the Inverse Distance Squared method but with an additional step. Initially, it triangulates all rain gages. Then, when a 2D precipitation cell lies inside of a specific triangle, only the three gages that form the triangle are used in the storm weighting process. This method prevents rain gages that are far away from a 2D precipitation cell from being used and limits the interpolation to the three closest rain gages to each 2D precipitation cell.
    3. Peak Preservation
      This interpolation method tries to retain rainfall intensities within a storm as it moves across a watershed. The Inverse Distance Squared and Inverse Distance Squared Restricted methods have the problem of diminishing the rainfall intensities when the rainfall timing is different at each rain gage being used for the interpolation. In such cases, the Peak Preservation method can be utilized. The Peak Preservation method takes all the rain gages being used for a particular 2D precipitation cell and finds the center of mass of the precipitation for each of the rain gages. Next, all gaged data is lined up by the center of mass. Then the data are interpolated on a time-step by time-step basis. Finally, the interpolated data are shifted back to the correct time to account for the location of the 2D precipitation cell between the rain gages.
    4. Thiessen Polygon
      This interpolation method is a traditional method often used in hydrologic modeling. This method draws a line between two rain gages and finds the half distance between each rain gage. This distance calculation process is repeated for all rain gages. Polygons are then formed by the linear bisection lines between the rain gages. The software does this to figure out which rain gage should be used to determine the rainfall event pattern. For 2D precipitation cells that are closest to a rain gage (i.e., inside that rain gage’s Thiessen polygon), the rain gage will be used to define the rainfall pattern (intensity versus time). However, the storm total rainfall applied to each 2D precipitation cell is computed using the Inverse Distance Squared method to determine a weighted storm total rainfall for each 2D precipitation cell. The storm total rainfall is then applied to the previously determined nearest rain gage’s rainfall event pattern to define the rainfall distribution for that specific 2D precipitation cell.
  • Global scale factor
    This entry field defines the scale factor that will adjust all defined rain gage data. However, this scale factor can be overridden at an individual rain gage from the Override Scale Factor column entry.

Evapotranspiration Data

This subpanel allows the user to define the evapotranspiration data for unsteady flow modeling. By default, the checkbox at this subpanel is unchecked and contents are disabled (i.e., grayed out). Check the checkbox at the Evapotranspiration Data subpanel to enable the contents of this subpanel.

Evapotranspiration Data subpanel

The following sections are provided in this subpanel:

  • Constant Evapotranspiration
  • Evapotranspiration Gage Data

Constant Evapotranspiration

This section allows the user to define the constant evapotranspiration rate and scale factor for the evapotranspiration rate.

The following options are provided:

  • Evapotranspiration rate
    This entry field defines the constant evapotranspiration rate.
  • Scale factor
    This entry field defines the scale factor that will adjust the defined evapotranspiration gage data. By default, the software uses a default scale factor of 1.00.

Evapotranspiration Gage Data

This section allows the user to define the evapotranspiration data that vary with time using an evapotranspiration gage and then interpolated over the model area using a raster grid. Select the Evapotranspiration Gage Data radio button option to enable this section. Otherwise, this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Evapotranspiration Gage Data section

The table in this section contains the following data column entries:

  • Use Evapotranspiration Gage?
    This checkbox entry allows the user to specify whether to use the defined evapotranspiration gage. The checkboxes allow the user to turn on or off various evapotranspiration gages to experiment with the effect of different evapotranspiration gages being included in the simulation. By default, this entry will be unchecked.
  • Evapotranspiration Gage ID
    This dropdown combo box entry lists all the evapotranspiration gages that are defined in the current scenario. The edit option (i.e., pencil icon) allows the user to edit the evapotranspiration gage ID. Click the [...] button to define evapotranspiration gage point locations and corresponding precipitation data. On clicking the […] button, the Unsteady Flow Data dialog box will temporarily disappear, and the Evapotranspiration Gage Data dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box allows the user to select the evapotranspiration gage data. After selecting the evapotranspiration gage data, the Unsteady Flow Data dialog box will be redisplayed, and the selected evapotranspiration gage will be listed in the Evapotranspiration Gage ID dropdown combo box entry. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about how to define evaporation gage time series data.
    Evapotranspiration Gage Data dialog box
  • Summary
    This entry defines additional information to describe the selected evapotranspiration gage.
  • Override Scale Factor
    This entry contains an optional scale factor that will adjust the defined evapotranspiration gage data. This scale factor will override the defined value of the Global scale factor entry for an individual evapotranspiration gage.

    In addition, the following additional options are provided in this section:

  • Interpolation method
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the interpolation method that defines how the evapotranspiration gage data will be interpolated across the 2D precipitation grid. The following interpolation methods are available:
    Interpolation method dropdown combo box
    1. Inverse Distance Squared
      This interpolation method computes a weighted depth of rainfall for each time period individually by using the inverse square of the distance weighting method for all of the gages near a specific cell. If the rainfall data are hourly, then the inverse square of the distance weighting method is done individually for each one-hour time step.
    2. Inverse Distance Squared (Restricted)
      This interpolation method does the same thing as the Inverse Distance Squared method, except it first triangulates all the gages. Then, if a cell lies inside of a specific triangle, only the three gages that form the triangle are used in the storm weighting process. This method prevents gages that are far away from being used and limits the interpolation to the three closest gages to the cell.
    3. Nearest Neighbor
      This interpolation method uses a simple approach to interpolate cell values. Rather than computing a weighted depth or triangulating the gage network, it just finds out the nearest neighboring cell with a known value and assumes the same value to its neighboring cell, thereby interpolating the whole rain gage domain.
  • Global scale factor
    This entry field defines the scale factor that will adjust all defined evapotranspiration gage data. However, this scale factor can be overridden at an individual evapotranspiration gage from the Override Scale Factor column entry

Rasterization Specifications

This subpanel allows the user to define the extents (or limits) for how the point gage data will be rasterized. This extent will depend on the location of the HEC-RAS model, rain gages, and/or the evapotranspiration gages created.

Rasterization Specifications subpanel

Defining Raster Extents

The Define Raster Extents section allows the user to define the extent of the raster file to be generated.

The following radio button options are provided:

  • HEC-RAS model and gage extents
    This option causes the raster to be equal to the extent of the HEC-RAS model and defined gages, plus a 1,000 ft (300 meters) buffer outside these limits. By default, this option is selected.
  • Gage extents
    This option causes the raster to be equal to the extent of the defined gages, plus a 1,000 ft (300 meter) buffer outside these limits.
  • User-defined limits
    This option allows the user to manually define the raster limits from Map View. After selecting this option, the user can click the [Pick] button to draw a rectangular region on the Map View that will define the meteorology raster grid limits.

Defining Grid Resolution

The Define Grid Resolution section allows the user to define the coordinate extents for how the point gage data will be rasterized.

The following options are provided:

  • Number of columns
    This read-only field displays the number of columns contained in the raster grid.
  • Number of rows
    This read-only field displays the number of rows contained in the raster grid.
  • Total number of cells
    This read-only field displays the total number of cells contained in the defined raster grid.
  • Raster cell size
    This entry field is used to manually define the size of raster grid cells. The finer the grid resolution (or smaller the cell size) defined, the greater the detail that can be represented in the generated raster grid. Note that if the user changes the raster cell size value, the software will automatically recompute the number of columns, rows, and total number of cells based on the defined raster extents. By default, the software uses a default value of 1000 ft (300 meters).

Defining Data Extrapolation Methods

The Define Data Extrapolation Methods section allows the user to define the extrapolation methods of the defined rain gage (or evapotranspiration gage) data to the 2D meteorology grid.

The following options are provided:

  • TIN extrapolation method
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the extrapolation method used to generate the precipitation map. The following extrapolation methods are provided:
    TIN extrapolation method dropdown combo box
    1. None
      If this option is selected, no extrapolation will be used to generate the precipitation map.
    2. Nearest Segment
      This extrapolation method extends the Triangulated Irregular Network (TIN) beyond its original data points to estimate surface values in areas without data. This method involves identifying the two nearest TIN segments to each extrapolation point and calculating weights based on their distances. These weights are used to interpolate the surface value at the extrapolation point, considering the linear variation within the TIN triangle. This process is repeated for all extrapolation points in the defined area. While this method provides a straightforward approach, its accuracy may be limited when dealing with highly irregular or complex data.
    3. Nearest Triangle
      This extrapolation method is used for Triangular Irregular Network(TIN) extrapolation. This method estimates values outside the known data points by finding the nearest triangle in the TIN containing the target point and assuming a smooth variation within that triangle. The method involves identifying the target point, finding the nearest triangle, calculating barycentric coordinates, interpolating the value using the weights of the triangle vertices, and considering the interpolated value as an estimate for the target point. However, it has limitations in modeling complex or non-linear surfaces and carries inherent uncertainty in extrapolated results.
  • Resampling method
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the resampling method used to create the precipitation map. The following resampling methods are provided.
    Resampling method dropdown combo box
    1. None/Nearest
      This resampling method is used to convert point data into raster format. It can be used to assign a single value to each raster cell based on the nearest data point without considering attributes using the nearest neighbor algorithm. This method is suitable when attribute information is not required or when it does not need to be preserved.
    2. Linear/Render Block
      This resampling method involves dividing the area into smaller blocks, performing linear interpolation within each block to estimate values, rendering the estimated values onto a grid, and resampling the grid, if necessary, to a different resolution.
Flow Data & Boundary Conditions › Boundary Conditions

Boundary Conditions

Boundary conditions are an important part of hydraulic modeling as they allow hydraulic modeling software such as GeoHECRAS to begin performing calculations. In GeoHECRAS, boundary conditions for steady and unsteady flow analysis are entered using the Steady Flow Data and Unsteady Flow Data commands, respectively. These commands are displayed based on the Steady Flow Data or Unsteady Flow Data radio button selected in the Scenario Manager dialog box, as shown below. To learn more about the Scenario Manager dialog box, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Scenario Manager dialog box

Entering Boundary Conditions for a Steady Flow Analysis

Steady flow data are required to perform a steady water surface profile calculation. Steady flow data consist of flow regime, boundary conditions, and discharge information (peak flows or flow data from a specific period in time).

Steady flow analysis can be run with a subcritical, supercritical, or mixed flow regime. Depending on the flow regime, the user is required to enter an upstream boundary condition, a downstream boundary condition, or both. Boundary conditions are necessary to establish the starting water surface at the ends of the river systems (upstream and downstream). A starting water surface is necessary for the software to begin calculations.

For a subcritical flow regime, boundary conditions are only necessary at the downstream ends of the river system. For a supercritical flow regime, boundary conditions are only necessary at the upstream ends of the river system. For a mixed flow regime, boundary conditions must be entered at all ends of the river system.

To enter boundary conditions for the steady flow analysis, select the Steady Flow Data command from the Input ribbon menu.

Steady Flow Data command

The Steady Flow Data dialog box will be displayed.

Boundary-Conditions-img-2.png

The Steady Flow Data dialog box has separate panels for entering downstream and upstream boundary conditions. Every river and the corresponding reach in the project are listed under the Select river reach section. Each reach has an upstream and downstream boundary condition. After selecting the reach for which boundary conditions are to be entered, the user can enter the boundary conditions for numerous profiles in the table displayed in the corresponding Upstream Boundary Conditions and Downstream Boundary Conditions panels.

Note that connections to junctions are considered internal boundary conditions. Internal boundary conditions are automatically listed in the table, based on how the river system was defined. The user is only required to enter the necessary external boundary conditions.

Boundary-Conditions-img-3.png

To define the external boundary condition, select the cell location in which you would like to enter a boundary condition. Define the profile name under the Profile Name column. Select the type of boundary condition from within the Boundary Condition column. There are four external boundary conditions available for steady flow analysis: Critical Depth, Normal Depth, Rating Curve, and Water Surface Elev.

Boundary-Conditions-img-4.png

For the selected boundary conditions, enter the corresponding boundary condition data under the Boundary Details column.

Boundary-Conditions-img-5.png

To learn more about the Steady Flow Data command, refer to this article in our knowledge base

Entering Boundary Conditions for an Unsteady Flow Analysis

Unsteady flow data are required to perform an unsteady flow analysis. Unsteady flow data consist of both external and internal boundary conditions. External boundary conditions are required to run an unsteady model. External boundary conditions must be established at all the open ends of the river system being modeled. These are the boundary conditions you must add to the upstream and downstream ends of each reach (or 2D flow area). Internal boundary conditions are optional and allow the user to define gate operations and add flow within a river reach.

To enter the boundary conditions for unsteady flow analysis, select the Unsteady Flow Data command from the Input ribbon menu.

Unsteady Flow Data command

The Unsteady Flow Data dialog box will be displayed.

Unsteady Flow Data dialog box

In this dialog box, the river, reach, and river station locations of the external bounds as well as any gated structures that are defined within the system (inline, lateral, or between storage areas and/or 2D flow areas) will be automatically entered into the table. Any SA/2D flow areas, boundary condition lines, and connection gate locations in the project will be listed in the SA/2D & Connection Data panel.

The user can select the desired boundary condition type for the selected location using dropdown combo boxes provided under the Boundary Condition column. Not all boundary condition types are available for use at all locations. The software automatically filters out and lists only those boundary conditions that are relevant to the selected location. After selecting the boundary condition type, the user can define the boundary condition data by clicking the [Define] button.

[Define] button

Clicking on the [Define] button causes the software to open a dialog box (each of which is illustrated in the next section) corresponding to the selected boundary condition where the user can enter the boundary condition data. Once the boundary condition data are defined, the status of the corresponding cell changes from Undefined to Defined.

Boundary Condition column from Undefined to Defined


The GeoHECRAS software also allows the user to add additional river station locations for entering internal boundary conditions. To add an additional river station location, select the river station from the Interior river station dropdown combo box and then click the [Add Boundary Condition Location] button. The selected river station location along with the corresponding river and reach will be added to the table.

[Add Boundary Condition Location] button

To learn more about the Unsteady Flow Data command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Boundary Conditions in HEC-RAS

Several different types of boundary conditions are available for steady and unsteady flow analysis. In addition, unsteady flow analysis includes several internal boundary conditions. The table below summarizes all available boundary conditions.

unknown node

Normal Depth

The normal depth is the most widely used boundary condition for both steady and unsteady flow analysis. For this type of boundary condition, the user is required to enter the energy slope value. This value is used to calculate normal depth (Manning’s equation) at that location. A normal depth can be calculated for each profile based on the user-entered slope. If the energy is unknown, the user could approximate it by clicking the [Calc] button. When applying this boundary condition, it should be placed far enough downstream, such that any errors it produces will not affect the results at the study reach.

Boundary-Conditions-img-10.png

Critical Depth

In critical depth boundary conditions, the user is not required to enter any further information. The software automatically calculates the critical depth for each of the profiles and uses that as the boundary condition. However, critical depth does not occur very often in streams or channels. Using critical depth is only appropriate if there is a significant elevation change or drop structure. It does not matter if you use critical depth as long as your model extends far enough upstream or downstream of the area of interest.

Boundary-Conditions-img-11.png

Known Water Surface Elevation

The known water surface elevation boundary condition is typically based on observed data. Alternatively, the user may enter a known water surface elevation to make the current model consistent with another existing model. Just make sure that the water surface elevation that is entered into the model is referenced to the correct vertical datum.

Boundary-Conditions-img-12.png

Rating Curve

The rating curve boundary condition can be used as a downstream boundary condition. Rating curve boundary conditions are typically used where a channel or stream flows into a pond or lake. Rating curves can be constructed using the data available on the United States Geological Survey (USGS) website. Alternatively, one can develop a steady-state model to produce a rating curve.

The user can enter boundary condition data for the rating curve boundary condition type in the Rating Curve dialog box. The user can either read rating curve data from HEC-DSS or enter it manually into the editor. To read rating curve data from the DSS file, the user needs to enable the DSS Rating Curve Data section and click the [Select] button. Note that the DSS Rating Curve Data section is unavailable when using the rating curve boundary condition type with the Steady Flow Data command.

Rating Curve Boundary Condition

Clicking on the [Select] button will cause the software to open the DSS Data File & Path dialog box.

DSS Data File & Path dialog box

In the above dialog box, the [Select] button allows the user to browse to the location where the desired DSS file is located and select it. Once a DSS file is selected, all available DSS pathnames within the file are displayed in the table. The user can select the desired data path from the table and click the [Add to Selected Data Paths] button to add it to the Selected Data Paths list. The dialog box also displays the graphical plot of the selected data path in the DSS Data Plot panel and the corresponding data table in the DSS Data Table panel under the DSS Data Plot and Table section. To learn more about the DSS Data File & Path dialog box, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Flow Hydrograph

A flow hydrograph can be used as either an upstream boundary or a downstream boundary condition, but it is most commonly used as an upstream boundary condition. The user can enter boundary condition data for the flow hydrograph boundary condition type in the Flow Hydrograph dialog box. The user can either read data from an HEC-DSS (HEC Data Storage System) file as done in the case of a rating curve boundary condition, or enter the hydrograph ordinates manually into a table.

Flow Hydrograph Dialog Box

To enter the hydrograph ordinates manually, the user needs to first select the appropriate date-time interval from the list of allowable time intervals shown in the Date time interval dropdown combo box. Currently, the software only supports regular interval time series data.

Date time interval dropdown combo box

To enter data into the table, the user is required to select either the Use Simulation Time or Fixed Start Time option. If the user selects the Use Simulation Time option, then the hydrograph that is entered will always start at the beginning of the simulation time window. The simulation starting date and time is shown in the table. If the user selects the Fixed Start Time option, then the hydrograph is entered starting at a user-specified time and date. Once a starting date and time is selected, the user can then begin entering data.

Hydrograph Data Starting Time Reference Pane

The Hydrograph Data Adjustment section provides two options: Minimum flow (override) and Flow multiplier (scale factor). Both options apply to user-entered hydrographs or hydrographs read from HEC-DSS.

The Minimum flow (override) option allows the user to specify a minimum flow to be used in the hydrograph. This option is very useful when too low of a flow is causing stability problems. Rather than edit the user-entered hydrograph or the DSS file (depending upon where the hydrograph is coming from), the user can enter a single value, and all values below this magnitude will be changed to that value. The Flow multiplier (scale factor) option allows the user to multiply every ordinate of the hydrograph by a user-specified factor.

The Other Data section provides two options: BC line flow distribution energy slope and Perform BC tailwater check for adjoining cells.

The BC line flow distribution energy slope option allows the user to specify the energy slope used to compute velocity at the boundary condition. If the computed velocity is too high (resulting in a water surface that is too low), decrease the energy slope. If the velocity is too low (resulting in a water surface that is too high), increase the energy slope. Alternatively, click the [Measure] button to automatically compute the terrain slope along the user-defined path from the Map View.

The Perform BC tailwater check for adjoining cells checkbox option performs a tailwater check for upstream boundary conditions. This option first computes a water surface elevation using Manning’s equation and compares it to the water surface in the adjoining boundary cells. If the adjoining cell water surface is higher than the computed value, the software uses the higher water surface to distribute flow and compute velocity at the boundary condition.

Alternatively, the user can enable the Monitor as Critical Boundary Condition section to make the selected boundary a Critical Boundary Condition. When this section is enabled, the software will monitor the inflow hydrograph to see if a change in flow rate from one time step to the next is exceeded. The user must enter a maximum allowed flow change value in the Maximum flow changes allowed input field. If the change in flow rate does exceed the user-entered maximum value, the software will automatically cut the time step in half until the change in flow rate does not exceed the user-specified value. Large changes in flow can cause instabilities. The use of this feature can help to keep the solution of the model stable. This feature can be used for multiple hydrographs simultaneously. The software will initially evaluate all the hydrographs, then calculate a time slice based on the hydrograph with the largest percentage increase over the user-specified maximum flow change.

Stage Hydrograph

A stage hydrograph can be used as either an upstream or downstream boundary condition. The user can enter the boundary condition data for stage hydrograph boundary condition type in the Stage Hydrograph dialog box. Similar to the flow hydrograph boundary condition, the user has the choice of either attaching an HEC-DSS file and pathname or entering data manually into a table.

Stage Hydrograph dialog box

In addition, the 2D Flow Area Initialization section provides three radio button options: Fill 2D flow area with initial stage WSEL, Start with dry 2D flow area, and Upstream boundary condition.

The Fill 2D flow area with initial stage WSEL fills the 2D flow area using the water surface elevation from the specified stage boundary at the start of the simulation. This option is generally recommended because it provides a stable and realistic initial water surface condition. The Start with dry 2D flow area option initializes the 2D flow area without any water. The simulation begins with all cells dry, and water enters the area only through defined boundary conditions or connections. The Upstream boundary condition option initializes the 2D flow area based on the upstream stage boundary condition. It is used when a stage boundary is applied at the upstream end of the 2D flow area.

Stage/Flow Hydrograph

The stage and flow hydrograph can be used together as either an upstream or downstream boundary condition. The upstream stage and flow hydrograph is a mixed boundary condition where the stage hydrograph is inserted as the upstream boundary until the stage hydrograph runs out of data; at this point, the software automatically switches to using the flow hydrograph as the boundary condition. This type of boundary condition is primarily used for forecast models where the stage is observed data up to the time of the forecast, and flow data is a forecasted hydrograph. The user can enter boundary condition data for this boundary condition type in the Stage/Flow Hydrograph dialog box. The user has the choice of either attaching an HEC-DSS file and pathname or entering data manually into a table.

Stage/Flow Hydrograph dialog box

Internal Boundary Condition Stage/Flow Hydrograph

The internal boundary stage and flow hydrograph (IB Stage/Flow) is an internal boundary condition that can be used at a cross section immediately upstream of an inline structure to force a known stage and/or flow for part or all of a simulation. It can also be used at an open cross section (one not associated with a hydraulic structure). For example, to force the water surface to match the water surface from known gage data, boundary condition data for the internal boundary condition stage/flow hydrograph are entered in the Interior Boundary Stage/Flow dialog box. The user has the choice of either attaching an HEC-DSS file and pathname or entering data manually into a table.

Interior Boundary Stage/Flow dialog box

If the user enters only a stage hydrograph, then the software will force the stage at the cross section, and it will solve for the appropriate flow (to balance the unsteady continuity and momentum equations). Similarly, if the user enters only a flow hydrograph, then the software will force the flow at the cross section, and it will solve for the appropriate stage. The user may also enter both stage and flow data. As long as there is stage data, the software will force the stage (and solve for flow). When stage data runs out, the software will begin to use flow data (force the flow and solve for stage). This can often be useful when performing a forecast. Regardless of whether a stage and/or flow hydrograph is entered, if all time series data run out before the end of the simulation, then the software will treat the cross section as a regular cross section and will solve for both flow and stage in the normal manner.

Lateral Inflow Hydrograph

The lateral inflow hydrograph is used as an internal boundary condition. This boundary condition type allows the user to bring in flow at a specific point along the stream. The user attaches this boundary condition to the river station of the cross section just upstream of where the lateral inflow will come in. The actual change in flow will not show up until the next cross section downstream from this inflow hydrograph. The user can enter boundary condition data for the lateral inflow hydrograph boundary condition type in the Lateral Inflow Hydrograph dialog box. The user can either read the hydrograph for this boundary condition type from the DSS file or enter it manually.

Lateral Inflow Hydrograph dialog box

Uniform Lateral Inflow Hydrograph

The uniform lateral inflow hydrograph is used as an internal boundary condition. This boundary condition allows the user to bring in a flow hydrograph and distribute it uniformly along the river reach between two user-specified cross section locations. The user can enter boundary condition data for the uniform lateral inflow hydrograph condition type in the Uniform Lateral Inflow dialog box. The hydrograph for this boundary condition type can be either read from a DSS file or entered manually into a table. The user can specify the two cross section locations where the flow hydrograph is to be distributed uniformly along the river reach in the Uniformly Distribute Inflow Hydrograph section.

Uniform Lateral Inflow dialog box

Groundwater Interflow

The groundwater interflow boundary condition can be applied to a river reach or a storage area. Groundwater can flow into or out of a reach or storage area, depending on the water surface head. The stage of the groundwater reservoir is assumed to be independent of the interflow from the river and must be entered manually or read from DSS. The groundwater interflow is similar to a uniform lateral inflow in that the user enters an upstream and a downstream river station, in which the flow passes back and forth. The user can enter boundary condition data for the groundwater interflow boundary condition type in the Groundwater Interflow dialog box. The hydrograph for this boundary condition type can be either read from a DSS file or entered manually into a table.

Groundwater Interflow dialog box

The groundwater interflow boundary condition can also be linked directly to a storage area for modeling groundwater exchange with ponding areas. The computed flow is proportional to the head between the river (or storage area) and the groundwater reservoir.

The computation of the interflow is based on Darcy’s equation. The user is required to enter the coefficient of permeability (Groundwater interflow hydraulic conductivity (K)), and the distance between the river and the location of the user-entered groundwater aquifer stages (Thickness (or length) of groundwater interflow).

Time Series Gate Openings

The time series (T.S.) gate openings boundary condition is probably the simplest gate boundary condition. The user simply enters a gate opening height for each time step of the entire simulation period. This boundary condition allows the user to enter a time series of gate openings for an inline gated spillway, a lateral gated spillway, or a gated spillway connecting two storage areas. Boundary condition data for time series gate openings is entered in the Time Series Gate Openings dialog box. The user first needs to select a gate group and then read data either from a DSS file or enter data manually. This is done for each of the gate groups contained within the hydraulic structure.

Time Series Gate Openings dialog box

Elevation Controlled Gates

The elevation controlled gates boundary condition is a little more complicated. The user must tell the software when each gate will open and close as well as the opening and closing rates. Based on this information as well as the reference point, the software will decide what the gate setting should be at a particular time step. This boundary condition allows the user to control the opening and closing of gates based on the elevation of the water surface upstream of the structure (Upstream WSEL) or based on the water surface at a user-specified cross section or storage area (Location Reference) or based on a difference in water surface elevation from any two user-defined reference locations (Stage Difference). Boundary condition data for elevation controlled gates are entered in the Elevation Controlled Gates dialog box. In this dialog box, different sections for gate operating criteria are enabled based on the Gate control reference choice. To learn more about the Elevation Control Gates dialog box, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Elevation Controlled Gates dialog box

Precipitation

The precipitation boundary condition allows the user to enter a precipitation hydrograph between cross sections, a storage area, or a 2D flow area. This boundary condition allows the user to enter incremental precipitation vs time data. Precipitation data are used for the entire storage area or 2D flow area, with no spatial variability. Boundary condition data for precipitation are entered in the Precipitation Hydrograph dialog box. The hydrograph for this boundary condition type can be either read from a DSS file or entered manually into a table.

Precipitation Hydrograph dialog box
Flow Data & Boundary Conditions › Flow Optimizations

Flow Optimizations Command

The Flow Optimizations command is used to optimize (or balance) the split of flow at stream junctions, lateral structures, storage areas, and pump stations in order to determine how much flow is going through each reach. This command is used for steady flow computations and is disabled for unsteady flow computations.

The user can provide an initial estimate of the flow distribution for each reach in the Steady Flow Data dialog box. Then using the Flow Optimizations command, the software will use an iterative procedure to calculate the flow in each reach. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Steady Flow Data command.

Follow the steps below to use the Flow Optimizations command:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, select the Flow Optimizations command.
    Flow Optimizations Analysis ribbon menu command
  2. The Flow Optimizations dialog box will be displayed.
    Flow Optimizations dialog box

The Flow Optimizations dialog box contains four tabs as described below:

  • Junctions
  • Lateral Structures
  • Storage Areas
  • Pumps

Junctions

This tab lists all junctions contained within the model that have flow splits. To have the software optimize the split flow at a junction, check the Optimize checkbox corresponding to that junction. Otherwise, leave it unchecked. By default, the checkboxes are unchecked.

Flow optimizations at junctions are performed by computing the water surface profiles for all of the reaches, then comparing the computed energy gradelines for the cross sections just downstream of the junction. If the energy gradeline elevation in all the reaches below a junction is not within a specified tolerance (0.02 feet), then the flow going to each reach is redistributed and the profiles are recalculated. This methodology continues until the energy gradeline elevations are balanced.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about junctions.

Lateral Structures

This tab lists all lateral structures contained within the model. To have the software optimize the split flow between the main stream and the lateral structure, check the Optimize checkbox corresponding to that lateral structure. Otherwise, leave it unchecked. By default, the checkboxes are unchecked.

Lateral Structures panel

For the first iteration of the split flow optimization, the software will assume that zero flow is going out of the lateral structure. Once a water surface elevation profile has been computed, the software will compute flow over the lateral structure. It will then iteratively reduce the flow in the main channel until a balance is reached between the main stream and the lateral structure.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about lateral structures.

Storage Areas

This tab lists all storage areas located at upstream boundaries of the river reaches.

Storage Areas panel

Note that only those storage areas that are at the upper end of a river reach with no other reaches feeding into them are listed. Storage areas that are at the downstream end of a model or adjacent to a reach are not listed.

In order to have the software optimize the amount of flow coming out of the storage area based upon the user-specified storage area water surface elevation, check the Optimize checkbox corresponding to that storage area. Otherwise, leave it unchecked. By default, the checkboxes are unchecked.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about storage areas.

Pumps

This tab lists all of the locations where pump stations are connected to the main rivers. To have the software optimize the flow split between the main river and the pump station, check the Optimize checkbox corresponding to that pump station. Otherwise, leave it unchecked. By default, the checkboxes are unchecked.

Pumps panel

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about pump stations.

After selecting the required options, click the [OK] button. The software will optimize (or balance) the flow split at the selected locations.

Flow Data & Boundary Conditions › Lateral Flow Modeling

Modeling Lateral Flows

In HEC-RAS, lateral structures are used to model flow being transferred between a river and adjacent elements, such as another river, storage area, or 2D flow area. The lateral structure acts as an internal boundary element between the above model elements, and can represent a levee or flood wall, a flow diversion structure, or the natural terrain.

Modeling-Lateral-Flows-Img-1.jpg

Lateral structures primarily describe the weir geometry, representing how water overflows into the adjacent flow element. These structures can also include other outlet elements, such as culverts, flood gates, and overflow spillways. Additionally, breaching failure of a lateral structure either from overtopping erosion or underground piping erosion can be modeled.

Modeling-Lateral-Flows-Img-2.jpg

The lateral structure is generally placed along a physical element in the terrain, such as a roadway, as shown in the above figure. A lateral structure models the exchange of flow between a main river reach and an adjacent river reach, a main river reach and an adjacent storage area, or a main river reach and an adjacent 2D flow area. To model the exchange of flow between a storage area and a 2D flow area, a SA/2D connection internal boundary element is used.

Creating a Lateral Structure

To create a lateral structure, either the Assign Lateral Structures or Draw Lateral Structures command can be used. Both commands operate similarly.

Draw and Assign Lateral Structures commands

The Assign Lateral Structures command allows the user to assign the already imported GIS shapefiles as a lateral structure polyline. To learn more about the Assign Lateral Structures command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

The Draw Lateral Structures command allows the user to interactively draw the lateral structures on the Map View. To learn more about the Draw Lateral Structures command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

River Reach Lateral Structure Definition

At a minimum, there must be at least one cross section upstream and downstream of the lateral structure. The upstream cross section can either be at the beginning of the lateral structure or a short distance upstream. The downstream cross section can be at the downstream end of the lateral structure or a short distance downstream. Additional cross sections should be placed between these two bounding cross sections to model the change in the conveyance area of the river reach and to model the flow as it exits or enters along the lateral structure.

Modeling-Lateral-Flows-Img-6

Lateral structures can be on either side or both sides of the river. The lateral structures can be adjacent to the channel bank or located along the far overbank. A lateral structure can extend along a river reach for up to 100 cross sections. For lateral structures that exceed this length, an additional lateral structure can start at the point where the other lateral structure ends. Lateral structures cannot exist beyond the downstream most or upstream most cross section in a river reach, nor can they exist where a river reach junction is defined.

Modeling-Lateral-Flows-Img-7.png

Flow over the lateral weir can be computed using either the energy grade line elevation or water surface elevation. Water surface elevation is the most appropriate when the lateral structure weir is located close to the main channel. In this situation, the energy from the flow is in a downstream direction, and the velocity head is in the same direction and should not be considered in determining the flow over the lateral weir structure. Therefore, the computation of flow over the lateral weir is best computed using the water surface elevation option, which is the default computation option.

Trimming & Extending Cross Sections

When defining a lateral structure, it is important that the river reach cross sections extend out to the lateral structure, but do not extend beyond it. The cross sections should end at the inside top of the lateral structure. That is why the lateral structure alignment should coincide with something in the terrain model that corresponds to a bifurcation of the flow, such as a roadway or levee.

GeoHECRAS will automatically trim and extend the adjacent river reach cross sections, while defining the lateral structure, so that the cross sections extend to the inside top of the lateral structure.

Modeling-Lateral-Flows-Img-8.png

If the lateral structure is between two adjacent river reaches, the software will automatically trim or extend the cross sections for both reaches.

Lateral Structure Overflow Weir

When defining a lateral structure, it is necessary for the modeler to define where the lateral overflow weir discharges. Lateral flow can discharge into an adjacent river, storage area, or 2D flow area.

Modeling-Lateral-Flows-Img-9.png

The geometry of the lateral weir structure representing the overflow terrain ground geometry or levee geometry along the main river reach is defined within the Lateral Structure Plot section of the Lateral Structure Data dialog box.

Modeling-Lateral-Flows-Image-10

When defining the weir geometry, the weir type must be specified. The weir type dictates the amount of head loss that the flow encounters as it flows over the structure. The weir type is specified in the Weir crest shape dropdown combo box entry contained in the Overflow Weir panel of the Lateral Structure Data dialog box.

Weir Crest Shape

Available weir shapes include:

  • Broad Crested
  • Sharp Crested
  • Ogee
  • Zero Height

Broad Crested Weir

Broad crested weirs are very common and are typically represented by overflow over a roadway, levee, or other flat crested structure. The broad crested weir structure represents a rectangular obstruction across the flow, causing head loss as the flow passes over the obstruction.

Modeling-Lateral-Flows-Img-12.png

Sharp Crested Weir

Sharp crested weirs are generally used to measure flow rates, and the weir is constructed from steel plate or other metal. The crest of the weir is very sharp so that the water will spring clear of the crest.

Modeling-Lateral-Flows-Img-13.png

Ogee

An ogee shaped (S-shaped) weir is commonly used for dams and flow diversion structures. This weir shape is typically used in spillway design because its shape naturally follows the lower surface of a horizontal jet emerging from a sharp crested weir, thereby limiting the amount of spalling damage that can occur due to the rapid flow of water over the concrete spillway.

Modeling-Lateral-Flows-Img-14.png

Zero Height

When using lateral structures to model discharge from a main river reach into an adjacent overflow area (i.e., river reach, storage area, 2D flow area) without an elevated structure (e.g., roadway or levee) separating the two elements, then a zero-height weir can be defined to represent the non-elevated overbank terrain. This corresponds to flow traveling overland with no weir at all.

Modeling-Lateral-Flows-Img-15.png

Weir Flow Computations

Weir flow over a lateral structure can be quite different from flow over a normal spillway. If the water flow near the lateral structure is predominantly in the direction of the main river reach, then there is not much of a momentum component over the lateral structure weir and a lateral weir coefficient should be utilized. This value can be looked up using the Weir coefficient entry contained in the Overflow Weir panel of the Lateral Structure Data dialog box, as shown above.

If the weir flow is perpendicular to the flow direction of the river, and the lateral structure is located near the main flow area of the river, then a lateral weir coefficient should be used. If the weir flow is in an area where the water is fairly stagnant and not located near the main flow area of the river, then an inline weir coefficient should be used. Both of these coefficients are provided in the Overflow Weir panel described above.

There are two different equations available for computing weir flow for lateral structures:

  • Standard weir equation
  • Hager’s lateral weir equation

The Hager’s lateral weir equation is the same as the standard weir equation, except the weir discharge coefficient is computed automatically based on the physical and hydraulic properties of the lateral structure.

When Hager’s lateral weir equation is selected, the user can enter the following parameters:

Hagers Parameters
  • Weir coefficient (Cd)
    This field defines the weir coefficient that will be used for the first iteration of trying the Hager’s lateral weir equation. The default weir coefficient is 2.6. The Hager’s weir equation is iterative and requires hydraulic results in order to make a weir coefficient calculation. The defined weir coefficient is only used for the first guess at the hydraulic computations. Clicking on the […] button will display the Weir Discharge Coefficient reference dialog box as shown below.
    Weir Discharge Coefficient Dialog Box
  • Average weir height
    This field defines the average height (not elevation) of the weir above the ground.
  • Average bed slope (optional)
    This field defines the average slope of the stream bed in the river reach containing the lateral structure. If this entry is left blank, then software will compute the slope by estimating an average bed elevation for each cross section and then compute the slope from the average bed elevations. The average bed elevation of the cross sections is obtained by subtracting the hydraulic depth from the water surface elevation.
  • Weir angle (optional)
    This field defines the angle (in degrees) for the lateral structure overflow weir. If the overflow weir is parallel to the stream, then the weir angle is assumed to be zero. If the weir is angled inwards towards the center of the river flow, then a weir angle is required. This is used for channels that have a contraction where the weir flow is allowed to go over the contracted section. A diagram showing the weir angle is shown below.
    Weir angle (optional)
  • Average radius
    This field defines the average radius of the ogee weir for Hager’s equation. This entry is disabled (grayed out) when an Ogee weir crest shape is not specified.

Lateral Structure Culverts

In addition to the weir geometry, lateral structures can include culverts. These are commonly used in levees to allow ponded stormwater contained in the overbank areas to flow back into the river. These culverts typically have flap gates to prevent flow reversal so that the flood in the main river channel does not flow out into the overbank areas.

Modeling-Lateral-Flows-Img-17.png

Within the Lateral Structure Data dialog box, the Connection Data panel is used to define the culvert flap gates.

Lateral Structure Culverts

The following flap gate options are available to describe culvert flow:

  • No Flap Gates – Flow is allowed to flow in either direction through the culvert
  • No Negative Flow – Allows water to flow from the river into the overflow area
  • No Positive Flow – Allows water to flow into the river from the overflow area

Lateral Structure Gates

Manually controlled gates can be added to the lateral structure. These can be used to represent flow diversions or locations where a mobile flood gate is rolled into place across a roadway or railway to maintain the levee during a flood.

Modeling-Lateral-Flows-Img-19.png

Closed flood gate during May 2017 flood in St. Louis, MO

Within the Lateral Structure Data dialog box, the Gates panel is used to define gates. A number of different gate types are supported.

Gate Panel

Diversion Rating Curve

A diversion rating curve can be defined to represent how flow is removed from the main river. The diversion rating curve is defined as water surface elevation in the river versus the amount of diverted flow from the river.

Rating Curve Panel

Linear Routing

The software provides a linear routing option, which is a simplified storage accounting method in which the user enters a linear routing coefficient. This coefficient ranges between 0.0 and 1.0, with 1.0 representing routing the maximum flow over the lateral structure and 0.0 representing no flow routed over the lateral structure. Typical values range from 0.05 to 0.2, although this coefficient needs to be calibrated to be accurate. This calibration is typically done using historical flooding data.

The linear routing option is useful when there are a lot of lateral structures connected to storage areas, and a detailed flow calculation over each lateral structure is not necessary. In addition, the linear routing method is computationally faster and more stable.

Split Flow Optimization

When performing a steady flow analysis or computing unsteady flow initial conditions with a model containing a lateral structure, the flow optimization option must be enabled (i.e., turned on) for the HEC-RAS software to compute how much river reach flow is lost or gained from the adjacent overflow area through the lateral structure. To access the flow optimization option, select Flow Optimizations from the Analysis ribbon menu.

Flow Optimizations Analysis ribbon menu command

The Flow Optimizations dialog box will be displayed.

Flow Optimizations dialog box

When the Optimize option is enabled (i.e., turned on), the software calculates the flow out of the lateral structure or back into the river, depending upon the adjacent river reach, storage area or 2D flow area water surface elevation. The result of this calculation either reduces or increases the flow in the main river. The software then recalculates the water surface profile in the main river and the whole operation repeats itself. This iteration continues until there is a balance between the calculated and assumed flows in the main river.

If the Optimize option is not enabled (i.e., turned off), the HEC-RAS software will assume all the water in the main river is still going downstream, although it will calculate what could have gone out of the lateral structure based upon the computed water surface elevation in the main river channel.

Rainfall, Infiltration & Hydrology › Rainfall Data

Rain Gage Data Command (GeoHECRAS)

Rain gages supply rainfall data for the selected location in the study area. The rainfall data can either be user-defined or described in an external file. Rain gages are part of the project and can be shared by multiple meteorologic models.

In GeoHECRAS software, the user can define the rain gage data using the Rain Gage Data command. The defined rain gage data can later be used to define the precipitation point data that are then interpolated over the raster grid. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how precipitation point data are interpolated over the raster grid.

Follow the steps below to use the Rain Gage Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Meteorology Data dropdown menu and select the Rain Gage Data command.
    Rain Gage Data Command
  2. The Rain Gage Data dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Rain Gage Data Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Rain Gage Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Rain Gages

The Select Rain Gage section allows the user to select the rain gage for which rain gage data will be defined. In this section, the user can create, delete, or copy existing rain gage data to a new rain gage. In addition, the user can navigate between rain gages and enter a description for each rain gage.

Select Rain Gage Section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Rain gage ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the rain gages that are defined in the current scenario. Click on the edit option (i.e., pencil icon) to edit the rain gage ID. The user can navigate between the previous and next rain gage using the Up and Down arrow buttons. Note that the Up and Down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the current scenario contains a single rain gage.
  • Description
    This optional text field allows the user to enter additional information that describes the selected rain gage.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to create a new rain gage on the Map View. The ID of every newly created rain gage must be unique.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to copy an existing rain gage along with its associated data to a new rain gage. The software automatically provides a unique ID to the copied rain gage.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the selected rain gage from the current scenario.

Rain Gage Location

This section allows the user to provide a precise description of the rain gage’s location. The location is specified for each gage in terms of latitude and longitude. The latitude and longitude can be entered in decimal degrees in the Latitude and Longitude fields, respectively. Upon entering the latitude and longitude, the software will provide the location's physical address in the Location read-only field. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to pick the location interactively from the Map View. The software will then display the physical address, longitude, and latitude values for the selected location in the respective fields. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

Rain Gage Location Section

Constant Precipitation Data

This section allows the user to define a constant precipitation rate. Click the [Retrieve Data] button to retrieve the rainfall data using the Lookup Rainfall Intensity dialog box. By default, the radio button on the Constant Precipitation Data section is selected. This section is disabled (i.e., grayed out) if either the DSS Data or Time Series Data radio button is selected. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Lookup Rainfall Intensity dialog box.

Constant Precipitation Data Section

DSS Data

This section allows the user to select a DSS data file to define the rain gage time series data. Select the radio button on the DSS Data section to enable the content of this section. Otherwise, this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

DSS Data Section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • DSS file
    This entry denotes the file directory path to the DSS data file. Clicking on the [Select] button allows the user to select the directory path and data path using the DSS Data File & Path dialog box. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the DSS Data File & Path dialog box.
  • DSS path
    This entry denotes the data path within the DSS data file, which contains the rain gage data.

Time Series Data

This section allows the user to manually enter time series data for the selected element. Select the radio button on the Time-Series Data section to enable the content of this section. Otherwise, this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Time Series Data Section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • Select control
    This dropdown combo box is used to define the control data set to use. The following options are available:
    1. Manual date and time - This option is used to define precipitation time series data for irregular time intervals.
    2. Manual simulation time - This option is used to define precipitation time series data for irregular time intervals.
    3. Regular Interval (default) - This option is used to define precipitation time series data for regular, fixed-time intervals.
      Select Control Dropdown Combo Box
  • Data type
    This dropdown combo box is used to define the type of data that is to be entered. The following options are available:
    1. PER-AVER
    2. PER-CUM
    3. INST-VAL
      Data Type Dropdown Combo Box
  • Precipitation data starting date time
    This subsection is used to select the simulation date and the start time to define the time series data. This subsection is enabled only when the Regular interval is selected in the Select control dropdown combo box. Otherwise, this subsection is disabled (i.e., grayed out). The following radio button options are available in this subsection:
    1. Use simulation time - Selecting this radio button option allows the software to use the simulation date and time as the starting time.
    2. Fixed start time - Selecting this radio button option allows the user to enter a specific date and time to define the simulation period as the starting time.
  • Date time interval
    This dropdown combo box is used to select the time interval that defines the time series data. The following options are available:

    Seconds

    Minutes

    Hours

    Days

    Weeks

    Months

    Years

    1 second

    1 minute

    1 hour

    1 day

    1 week

    1 month

    1 year

    2 seconds

    2 minutes

    2 hours





    3 seconds

    3 minutes

    3 hours





    4 seconds

    4 minutes

    4 hours





    5 seconds

    5 minutes

    6 hours





    6 seconds

    6 minutes

    8 hours





    10 seconds

    10 minutes

    12 hours





    12 seconds

    12 minutes






    15 seconds

    15 minutes






    20 seconds

    20 minutes






    30 seconds

    30 minutes






  • Units
    This dropdown combo box is used to define the unit for the time series data. The following options are available:
    1. Inches
    2. In/hr
  • Time Series Table
    The Date & Time and Simulation Time data grid columns automatically get filled in based on the option selected in the Precipitation data starting date time subsection. The user can manually enter data values into the Precipitation data grid column fields.

Rainfall Time Series Plot

This section displays the Precipitation (in) vs Date time plot of the selected rain gage data. If no time series data is available, the graph will not show any data.

Rainfall Time Series Plot
Rainfall, Infiltration & Hydrology › Rainfall Data

Lookup Rainfall Command (GeoHECRAS)

In GeoHECRAS, the Lookup Rainfall command retrieves rainfall (depth or intensity) data for any location within Austria, Canada, Germany, and the United States.

Follow the steps below to use the Lookup Rainfall command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Meteorology Data dropdown menu and select the Lookup Rainfall command.
    Lookup Rainfall command
  2. The Lookup Rainfall Depth dialog box will be displayed.
    Lookup Rainfall Depth dialog box

Note that the Meteorology Data dropdown menu will only be enabled for unsteady flow data. Otherwise, this dropdown menu will be disabled. To enable it, select the Unsteady Flow Data radio button option in the Scenario Manager dialog box.

The following sections describe how to interact with the Lookup Rainfall Depth dialog box.

Location Selection

This section allows the user to select the location from which the rainfall data are to be retrieved.

Location Selection section

The following options are available in this section:

  • Centered on current view extents
    If this radio button option is selected, the software will pick the central location of the region displayed in the current Map View extents to retrieve rainfall data.
  • Centered on HEC-RAS model extents
    If this radio button option is selected, the software will pick the central location of the HEC-RAS model defined in the current scenario. If no HEC-RAS model is defined, this option will be disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Select location
    This radio button option allows the user to pick the desired location from the Map View interactively by using the [Pick] button. The address of the selected location will be displayed in the read-only field next to this option. The latitude and longitude values for the selected location will be displayed in the Latitude & longitude fields. The user can click the [Clear] button to clear the defined location and redo the entire process.
    Select location radio button

Note that if the user selects either the Centered on current view extents or the Centered on HEC-RAS model extents option, the software will display the information of the selected location after successfully retrieving the rainfall data.

Perform Rainfall Lookup

Once the project location for which the rainfall data are to be retrieved is selected, the user can select the precipitation data type and precipitation data sources available for the selected project location.

Perform Rainfall Depth Lookup section

The following entries are available in this section:

  • Precipitation data type
    This dropdown combo box entry lists the precipitation data types to be used for retrieving rainfall data. The following entries are available:
    • Rainfall Depth
    • Rainfall Intensity
      Precipitation data type dropdown combo box

Note that the section header name changes based on the precipitation data type selected by the user.

Change in the Perform Rainfall Lookup section header name
  • Precipitation data source
    This dropdown combo box entry lists the precipitation data sources available for the selected location.
    Precipitation data source dropdown combo box

    The following precipitation data sources are available:

    • Austria – Bundesministerium Wasserwirtschaft eHYD Data Service
    • Canada – Environment Canada & Ontario Ministry of Transportation
    • Canada – Ontario Ministry of Transportation
    • Germany – Deutscher Wetterdienst – Klima und Umwelt
    • USA – ISWS (Illinois) Bulletin 75 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server
    • USA – NOAA Atlas 14 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server
    • USA – NOAA Atlas 2 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server
    • USA – NRCC (Northeast Regional Climate Center) PFDS
    • USA – SUDAS (lowa) Bulletin 71 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server

Note that the specific precipitation data source entry will be displayed based on the selected project location.

Retrieving Rainfall Data

Once the precipitation data source is selected, click the [Retrieve] button to retrieve the rainfall data for the selected location.

Retrieving Rainfall Data

Note that the coverage area shown below is current as of April 2023. However, this coverage area will continue to increase as more states are processed.

Rainfall Data- Coverage Area

If the selected location is not within the coverage area available, the software will display the following informational dialog box.

Lookup Rainfall informational dialog box

After successfully retrieving the rainfall data, the software populates the data in the table provided under the Frequency (Years) subsection. This table displays the rainfall depth/intensity values for various storm durations for 1, 2, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 200, 500, and 1000-year storm events.

Retrieved Rainfall Data

In addition, the user can right-click anywhere in the data table to display a context menu with commands for copying rainfall data to the Windows clipboard or exporting the data in different file formats.

Copying or Exporting Rainfall Data
Rainfall, Infiltration & Hydrology › Rainfall Data

Rainfall Distribution

Rainfall distribution refers to the pattern or distribution of rainfall over a specified location for a given time period. It helps to understand how precipitation is distributed among cities or regions over a certain period. Different regions of the Earth's surface receive an uneven distribution of rainfall each year and at different times. Meteorological conditions, geographical location, closeness to water bodies, topographical features, etc., are some of the factors that influence the uneven distribution of rainfall.

The CivilGEO software supports rainfall distributions to define precipitation data. The user can browse the location of interest by selecting the country and then the local region and the software will provide the rainfall distribution for the specified storm frequency. In addition, the user can define “custom” rainfall distributions. The user can either assign the same rainfall to all subbasins or vary the rainfall on a subbasin-by-subbasin basis.

Follow the steps below to select the rainfall distribution or create custom rainfall distributions in the CivilGEO software:

GeoHECRAS

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Unsteady Flow Data command.
    Unsteady Flow Data Command
  2. The Unsteady Flow Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Unsteady Flow Data Dialog Box
  3. From the Meteorology Data panel, select the Precipitation Data checkbox subpanel.
    Meteorology Data Panel
  4. Select the Rain Gage Data radio button option and then click on the […] button under the Rainfall Distribution column.
    Rain Gage Data Radio Button Option
  5. The Rainfall Distribution dialog box will be displayed.
    Rainfall Distribution Dialog Box

GeoHECHMS

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Meteorology Data command.
    Meteorology Data Command
  2. The Meteorology Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Meteorology Data Dialog Box
  3. From the Precipitation type dropdown combo box, select the Rainfall Distribution option.
    Precipitation type Dropdown Combo Box
    Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about other precipitation types.
  4. Select Precipitation Data from the Meteorology Specifications panel selector.
    Precipitation Data - Meteorology Specifications Panel Selector
  5. The Precipitation Data panel will be displayed. Click the [Select] button adjacent to the Rainfall distribution read-only field.
    Precipitation Data Panel
  6. The Rainfall Distribution dialog box will be displayed.
    Rainfall Distribution Dialog Box - GeoHECHMS

GeoSTORM

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Storm Data command.
    Storm Data Command
  2. The Storm Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Storm Data Dialog Box
  3. From the Precipitation type dropdown combo box, select Rainfall Distribution.
    Precipitation Type Dropdown Combo Box - GeoSTORM
  4. The Rainfall Distribution panel will be displayed.
    Rainfall Distribution Panel
  5. Click the [Select] button adjacent to the Rainfall Distribution read-only field.
    [Select] Button - Rainfall Distribution Read-only Field
  6. The Rainfall Distribution dialog box will be displayed.
    Rainfall Distribution Dialog Box - GeoSTORM

Note that the Precipitation type dropdown combo box entry will only be displayed when either EPA SWMM or SCS TR-20/TR-55 is selected as the hydrology analysis engine in the Scenario Manager dialog box.

The below sections explain how to define the rainfall distribution and interact with the Rainfall Distribution dialog box in the CivilGEO software.

Available Rainfall Distributions

The Available Rainfall Distributions panel lists all the rainfall distributions for various world regions in alphabetical order. Both predefined “factory” rainfall distributions and custom rainfall distributions are listed in this panel.

Available Rainfall Distributions Panel

Select Rainfall Distribution

This section allows the user to select rainfall distributions present in the current scenario.

Select Rainfall Distribution Section

Note that more than one checkbox entry can be checked in the list to compare rainfall distributions in the Rainfall Distribution Plot panel.

Rainfall Details

The Rainfall Details section provides various details for the currently selected rainfall distribution.

Rainfall Details Section

The following options are available in this section:

  • Storm duration
    This entry field defines the total duration of the storm, in hours. Note that this entry is read-only for time-based rainfall distributions and editable for percentage-based rainfall distributions.
  • Storm minimum duration
    This read-only field defines the minimum duration of the storm, in hours.
  • Storm maximum duration
    This read-only field defines the maximum duration of the storm, in hours.

Custom Rainfall Distributions

The Custom Rainfall Distributions panel allows the user to define custom rainfall distributions not included in the software’s rainfall distribution database.

Custom Rainfall Distributions Panel

The following sections are provided in this panel:

Select Rainfall Distribution

This section lists all the custom rainfall distributions that are defined. The custom rainfall distributions are also listed in the Available Rainfall Distributions panel.

Importing and Exporting Custom Storm Distributions

The software allows the user to share custom rainfall distributions with other users using the [Import] and [Export] buttons.

Clicking the [Import] button will display the Open dialog box. The user can import *.storm_dist file type, which can contain one or multiple rainfall distributions. When importing a rainfall distribution file with rainfall distributions that are already contained in the software, the software will ignore the duplicate rainfall distributions contained in the imported file.

Clicking the [Export] button will display the Export Custom Storm Distributions dialog box. This dialog box allows the user to export all the custom rainfall distributions that are defined.

Rainfall Distribution Specifications

This panel contains fields that define the custom rainfall distribution. The fields display the details of the already defined custom rainfall distribution selected in the Select Rainfall Distribution section. Additionally, it also allows the user to add, edit, or delete custom rainfall distribution.

Note that the fields in this panel are read-only by default. The fields will become editable by clicking the [Edit] or [Add] button.

The following fields are available in the panel:

  • Name
    This entry field is used to define the unique name for the rainfall distribution. Duplicate names are not accepted.
  • Data type
    This dropdown combo box is used to select the type of rainfall distribution data that will be defined. The following options are available to define the rainfall distribution data:
    • Time-based: For time-based rainfall distribution data, the user needs to define the storm duration. For example, 24-hours.
    • Percentage-based: For percentage-based rainfall distribution data, the user needs to define storm duration and a storm duration range.

Based on the option selected by the user, different parameters will be provided to the user for additional information.

  • Storm duration
    This entry field is used to define the total duration of the data being defined.
  • Minimum duration
    This field is used to define the minimum length of the storm in hours.
  • Maximum duration
    This field is used to define the maximum length of the storm in hours.
  • Time step
    This entry field is used to define the increment to be used in the Time (hours) column of the data grid provided in the Storm Distribution Rainfall panel. This entry converts to the Percentage step entry for percentage-based rainfall distributions. The user can then define the percentage step increment of percentage-based rainfall distribution data.
    Percentage Step Entry
  • Description
    This textbox area is used to describe the custom rainfall distribution in detail.

Clicking the [Edit] button allows the user to edit the already defined custom rainfall distribution selected in the Select Rainfall Distribution section. On clicking the [Edit] button, the [Cancel] button is replaced with the [Update] button, and the [Edit] button is replaced with the [Cancel] button. After editing the field values, the user can click the [Update] button to save the changes.

[Update] Button

Clicking the [Add] button allows the user to define a new custom rainfall distribution to be added to the Select Rainfall Distribution section.

[Add] Button

On clicking the [Add] button, the fields become editable. The user can define the data for the new custom rainfall distribution and then click the [Add] button again to add this rainfall distribution to the Select Rainfall Distribution section.

The user can cancel defining the custom rainfall distribution by clicking the [Cancel] button.

The user can also create a copy of or delete the currently selected custom rainfall distribution using the [Copy] and [Delete] buttons.

Storm Distribution Rainfall

This panel contains a data grid that is used to store the fractional rainfall data for the custom storm distribution.

Storm Distribution Rainfall Panel

The total number of rows in the data grid is calculated using the Time step and Storm duration values.

Total rows in the data grid= Storm duration x Time step + 1

The following columns are provided in the data grid:

  • Time (hours)
    The content of this read-only column is automatically computed based on the defined Time Step and Storm Duration
  • Fractional Rainfall Intensity (per-hour)
    This column is used to enter the custom rainfall intensity data. It accepts values between 0.0 and 1.0. The user can also copy and paste spreadsheet data into this column.

Favorites

The Favorites panel allows the user to store the predefined rainfall distributions that are used on a regular basis.

Favorites Panel

The user can select a favorite rainfall distribution and add it to the Favorites panel. In this manner, the user does not have to scroll through the general listing in the Available Rainfall Distributions panel each time a model is set up.

To add a rainfall distribution to the Favorites panel, the user can select the rainfall distribution from the Available Rainfall Distributions panel. Then, right-click and choose the Add to Favorites option from the displayed context menu. The rainfall distribution will be added to the Favorites panel.

Add to Favorites Option

If the user wants to remove any rainfall distribution from the Favorites panel, select the entry and then right-click and choose Remove from Favorites from the displayed context menu.

Remove from Favorites Option

Rainfall Distribution Plot

The Rainfall Distribution Plot panel on the right side of the dialog box displays a plot for the selected rainfall distribution(s).

Rainfall Distribution Plot Panel

Rainfall Distribution Data

The Rainfall Distribution Data panel shows a data grid with information that is contained in the graphical plot. Note that there are separate data grids for each rainfall distribution since each may have a different Time step and/or Storm duration defined.

Rainfall Distribution Data Panel

The user can right-click anywhere on the data grid to display a context menu. The context menu provides various commands to copy the data to the Windows clipboard and export the data to a spreadsheet or pdf document.

Copying and Exporting the Data

Assigning Rainfall Distribution

Once the desired rainfall distribution is selected, the user can click the [Assign] button. The selected rainfall distribution will be assigned for the meteorological model.

Assigning Rainfall Distribution

Note that only one rainfall distribution can be selected from the Available Rainfall Distributions panel or the Custom Rainfall Distributions panel. If no rainfall distribution or multiple rainfall distributions are selected, then the [Assign] button is disabled.

Rainfall, Infiltration & Hydrology › Soils & Infiltration

Infiltration Grid Properties

The Infiltration Grid Properties dialog box allows the user to define various infiltration grids and their properties, style the border associated with the infiltration grid polygon, change the image’s transparency, and display the infiltration grid legends in the Map Data Layers panel and/or on the Map View.

Follow the steps given below to open the Infiltration Grid Properties dialog box:

  1. Click on the […] button next to the Infiltration grid name in the Map Data Layers panel.
    […] button next to Infiltration grid name in the Map Data Layers panel.
    Note that the Infiltration grid name is generated under the Map Data Layers panel after computing the infiltration using the Compute Infiltration command. To learn about the Compute Infiltration command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  2. The Infiltration Grid Properties dialog box will be displayed.
    Infiltration Grid Properties dialog box.

The Infiltration Grid Properties dialog box contains three tabs as described below:

  • General Options
  • Loss Parameters
  • Spatial Reference

General Options

Various sections of the General Options tab are described below:

  • General Information
    This section contains read-only information about the location of the infiltration grid file, the cell dimensions, the cell count, and the grid dimensions.
  • Default Elevation Grid Stylization
    This section defines the elevation grid stylization. It allows the user to set border color, border size as well as display an infiltration grid legend in the Map Data Layers panel and/or on the Map View after running the Compute Infiltration command. To learn about the Compute Infiltration command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Fill Transparency
    This section is used to change the transparency of the image so that the user can see through the image to the background Base Map. A transparency value of 40 to 50% works well.

Loss Parameters

The Loss Parameters tab consists of the Infiltration Layer Definition table. In this table, the software automatically defines a one-to-one mapping of infiltration parameters such as Land Type, Curve Number, Initial abstraction, and Minimum Infiltration Rate. The user can also edit the infiltration parameters from the table.

Loss Parameters tabbed panel

Clicking on the […] button in the Min Infiltration Rate(in/hr) column will display the Typical Exfiltration Rates lookup table dialog box, which shows the typical infiltration rates.

Typical Exfiltration Rates lookup table dialog box

To learn more about the infiltration methods and associated parameters, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Note that the Loss Parameters tab panel content changes depending upon the infiltration (loss) method (Deficit Constant, SCS Curve Number, or Green and Ampt) used for computations in the Select Infiltration Method of the Compute Infiltration command. To learn about the Compute Infiltration command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Spatial Reference

The Spatial Reference tab allows the user to view the details of the project’s CRS. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about spatial reference.

Spatial Reference tabbed panel
Rainfall, Infiltration & Hydrology › Soils & Infiltration

Compute Infiltration Command

In GeoHECRAS, the Compute Infiltration command allows the user to define the precipitation infiltration method (i.e., SCS Curve Number, Green and Ampt, or Deficit Constant) to be used for computing the 2D surface losses from a storm event.

Follow the steps below to use the Compute Infiltration command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Compute Infiltration command.
    Compute Infiltration Watershed ribbon menu command
  2. The Compute Infiltration dialog box will be displayed.
    Compute Infiltration dialog box

The following sections describe the Compute Infiltration command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Infiltration Method

The Select Infiltration Method section allows the user to define the infiltration method to be used for computations.

Select Infiltration Method section
  • Infiltration method
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the infiltration method. The dropdown combo box contains the following options:
    1. Deficit and Constant
    2. Green and Ampt
    3. SCS Curve Number (default)
  • Time between rainfall events
    This entry field allows the user to define the time between rainfall events. Note that this field will only be enabled if the SCS Curve Number is selected as the infiltration method. Otherwise, this field will be disabled.
  • Infiltration source
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the source for defining the infiltration layer data. The dropdown combo box contains the following options:
    1. Land Cover & Soil Layers (default)
    2. Shapefile LayerNote that based on the infiltration source selected, the contents of the Define Infiltration Data section will be changed.

Defining Infiltration Data

The Define Infiltration Data section contains two panels: Land Use Data and Hydrologic Soil Type Data. These panels are used to define the infiltration parameters for computing the various infiltration methods. Based upon the option selected in the Infiltration source combo box entry in the Select Infiltration Method section, the contents of this section will be modified accordingly.

Note that if the Land Cover & Soil Layers option is selected as the infiltration source, then the Land Use Data panel, as shown below, will be similar for all three infiltration methods (i.e., Deficit and Constant, Green and Ampt, SCS Curve Number).

Define Infiltration Data section

Land Use Data Panel

The Land Use Data panel allows the user to describe the land use data. This panel contains the following subpanels:

NLCD Layer

The NLCD Layer subpanel is used to determine land type with data from the National Land Cover Database (NLCD), which is represented by 75 ft cells throughout the USA. The NLCD map service is used to determine the curve number based upon the hydrologic soil group (i.e., A, B, C, D).

This subpanel contains the NLCD Land Cover Database (USA) checkbox option. By default, this checkbox is unchecked. This subpanel allows the software to download the land cover data from the NLCD Land Cover Database (USA). To learn more about the NLCD Layer subpanel, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Note that the NLCD Layer subpanel is disabled if the Deficit and Constant and Green and Ampt options are selected in the Infiltration method combo box entry in the Select Infiltration Method section.

GIS Polygon Layer

The GIS Polygon Layer subpanel is used for user-defined land use polygon data. The land use data can either directly assign the CN value for each polygon or provide a standard land use type for the software to cross reference. To learn more about the GIS Polygon Layer subpanel, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

GIS Polygon Layer subpanel

Note that the GIS Polygon Layer subpanel is disabled if the Deficit and Constant and Green and Ampt options are selected in the Infiltration method combo box entry in the Select Infiltration Method section.

Land Cover Grid

The Land Cover Grid subpanel allows the user to select an existing land cover grid. The Existing land cover grid dropdown combo box contains all the land cover grids added to the project.

Land Cover Grid subpanel


Note that the Existing Land Cover Grid checkbox must be checked to select an existing land cover grid.

Default Values

The Default Values subpanel is used to define the default CN value or standardized land use values for the land cover. The user can enter float values into these default value fields.

Default Values subpanel

Note that the Default Values subpanel is disabled if the Deficit and Constant and Green and Ampt options are selected in the Infiltration method combo box entry in the Select Infiltration Method section.

Hydrologic Soil Type Data Panel

The Hydrologic Soil Type Data panel contains four subpanels, which are described below:

Hydrologic Soil Type Data panel

NRCS Layer

The NRCS Layer subpanel uses data from the NRCS Soil Survey Database (USA) to determine the hydrologic soil group data for the watershed region.

Note that the contents of this subpanel will change based upon the option selected in the Infiltration method combo box entry in the Select Infiltration Method section.

NRCS Layer — Selecting SCS Curve Number as Infiltration Method

This subpanel allows the software to download the soil type data from the NRCS Soil Survey Database (USA). To learn more about the NRCS Layer subpanel, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

NRCS Layer — Selecting SCS Curve Number as Infiltration Method
NRCS Layer — Selecting Deficit and Constant as Infiltration Method

Under this NRCS Layer subpanel, there are two subpanels, which are described below:

  • Initial Setup:
    This subpanel allows the user to define the setup to be used in computing the Deficit and Constant parameters using the NRCS soil survey database. The Initial soil moisture content estimate radio button selection allows the user to specify the initial soil moisture conditions at the beginning of the simulation in terms of volume ratio.

    Note that the contents of this subpanel will remain the same when the Green and Ampt option is selected in the Infiltration method combo box entry in the Select Infiltration Method section.
    Initial Setup subpanel
  • NRCS Map Layer Data:
    This subpanel is used to see the parameters that were computed from the NRCS soil textures that were determined from the soil classifications.

    The NRCS Map Layer Data subpanel, which appears when the Deficit Constant option is selected in the Infiltration method combo box entry in the Select Infiltration Method section, is shown below.
    NRCS Map Layer Data:
    The NRCS Map Layer Data subpanel, which appears when the Green and Ampt option is selected in the Infiltration method combo box entry in the Select Infiltration Method section, is shown below.
    NRCS Map Layer Data subpanel

GIS Polygon Layer

The contents of the GIS Polygon Layer subpanel will be modified based upon the option selected in the Infiltration method combo box entry in the Select Infiltration Method section.

GIS Polygon Layer — Selecting SCS Curve Number as Infiltration Method

The GIS Polygon Layer subpanel allows the user to select a GIS polygon layer that contains soil type data. The soil map data provides hydrologic soil group data for each defined polygon.

GIS Polygon Layer — Selecting SCS Curve Number as Infiltration Method
GIS Polygon Layer — Selecting Deficit Constant as Infiltration Method

The following input parameters are provided in this subpanel:

GIS Polygon Layer — Selecting Deficit Constant as Infiltration Method
  • Soil map layer
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to select the GIS polygon layer included within the project.
  • Initial moisture deficit
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to select the GIS shapefile field that specifies the initial moisture deficit.
  • Maximum moisture deficit
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to specify the maximum moisture deficit.
  • Constant loss rate
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to define the infiltration and percolation rates.
  • Value type
    This dropdown combo box entry contains the data type of the listed values. If the user specifies a value in the above entry, then this dropdown combo box provides the following options for Initial moisture deficit and Saturated moisture deficit:
    1. Decimal Fraction
    2. Percentage (default)

    For Constant loss rate:

    1. in/hr
    2. mm/hr
GIS Polygon Layer — Selecting Green and Ampt as Infiltration Method

The following input parameters are provided in this subpanel:

GIS Polygon Layer — Selecting Green and Ampt as Infiltration Method
  • Soil map layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the GIS polygon layer included within the project.
  • Initial moisture content
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the GIS shapefile field that contains the initial moisture content for each polygon area.
  • Saturated moisture content
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the GIS shapefile field that contains saturated moisture content.
  • Wetting front suction head
    This dropdown entry allows the user to select the GIS shapefile field that contains the wetting front suction head.
  • Saturated hydraulic conductivity
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the GIS shapefile field that contains saturated hydraulic conductivity.
  • Residual soil water content
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to define the remaining water content after saturated soil is allowed to drain thoroughly for an extended period of time.
  • Pore-size distribution index
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to define the relative abundance of each pore size in a representative volume of soil.
  • Value type
    This dropdown combo box is used to determine how to apply the defined value for computing the Green and Ampt. If the user specifies a value in the above entry, then this dropdown combo box provides the following options for Initial moisture content and Saturated moisture content:
    1. Decimal Fraction
    2. Percentage (default)

    For Wetting front suction head, Residual soil water content, and Pore-size distribution index:

    1. in
    2. mm

    For Saturated hydraulic conductivity:

    1. in/hr
    2. mm/hr

Soils Grid

The Soils Grid subpanel allows the user to select an existing soil grid. The Existing soil grid dropdown combo box contains all the soil grids added to the project.

Soils Grid subpanel


Note that the Existing Soil Grid checkbox must be checked to select an existing soil grid. The contents of this subpanel will remain the same when the Deficit Constant and Green and Ampt option is selected in the Infiltration method combo box entry in the Select Infiltration Method section.

Default Value

The Default Value subpanel is used to define a default hydrologic soil type for the software to cross-reference. The contents of the Default Value subpanel will be modified based upon the option selected in the Infiltration method combo box entry in the Select Infiltration Method section.

Default Value — Selecting SCS Curve Number as Infiltration Method

In this subpanel, the user can define a default value from the hydrologic soil group. The Default Value subpanel, which appears when the SCS Curve Number option is selected in the Infiltration method combo box entry in the Select Infiltration Method section, is shown below.

Default Value — Selecting SCS Curve Number as Infiltration Method
Default Value — Selecting Deficit Constant as Infiltration Method

The Default Value subpanel, appearing when the Deficit Constant option is selected in the Infiltration method combo box entry in the Select Infiltration Method section, is shown below.

Default Value — Selecting Deficit Constant as Infiltration Method

The following input parameters are provided in this subpanel:

  • Initial moisture deficit
    This entry field allows the user to specify the initial moisture deficit.
  • Maximum moisture deficit
    This entry field allows the user to specify the maximum moisture deficit.
  • Constant loss rate
    This entry field defines the rate at which precipitation will be infiltrated into the soil layer after the initial deficit has been satisfied and also includes the rate at which percolation occurs once the soil layer is saturated. Clicking on the […] lookup button displays a lookup table dialog box as shown below.
    Constant loss rate LoopUp button
Default Value — Selecting Green and Ampt as Infiltration Method

The Default Value subpanel, which appears when the Green and Ampt option is selected in the Infiltration method combo box entry in the Select Infiltration Method section, is shown below.

Default Value — Selecting Green and Ampt as Infiltration Method

The following input parameters are provided in this subpanel:

  • Initial moisture content
    This entry field allows the user to specify the initial moisture content.
  • Saturated moisture content
    This entry field allows the user to specify the maximum water holding capacity in terms of volume ratio. It is often assumed to be the total porosity of the soil.
  • Wetting front suction head
    This entry field allows the user to specify the wetting front suction, which describes the attraction of water within the void spaces of the soil column. Clicking on the […] lookup button will display a lookup table dialog box as shown below.
    Wetting front suction head
  • Saturated hydraulic conductivity
    This entry field is used to define the rate at which water will pass through the soil column when completely saturated. Clicking on the […] lookup button will display a lookup table dialog box as shown below.
    Saturated hydraulic conductivity
  • Residual soil water content
    This entry field defines the remaining water content after saturated soil is allowed to drain thoroughly for an extended period of time. Clicking on the […] lookup button will display a lookup table dialog box as shown below.
    Residual soil water content
  • Pore-size distribution index
    This entry field defines the relative abundance of each pore size in a representative volume of soil. Clicking on the […] lookup button will display a lookup table dialog box as shown below.
    Pore-size distribution index

Selecting Shapefile Layer as Infiltration Source

If the user selects the Shapefile Layer option as an infiltration source in the Select Infiltration Method section, the contents of the Compute Infiltration dialog box will be changed as shown below.

Shapefile Layer option from Infiltration Source dropdown combo box

Selecting Classification Shapefiles

The Select Classification Shapefile section controls the selection of shapefile layers to be used for computing the infiltration. In this section, the user can add already loaded shapefiles using the Shapefile layer dropdown combo box.

From the Shapefile layer dropdown combo box, select the shapefile layers, one at a time, and click the [Add] button. The selected shapefile(s) will be added to the Selected shapefiles grid. Alternatively, click the [Add All] button to add all the shapefiles available in the project.

To change the order of the added shapefile(s) in the grid, select the appropriate row and right-click to display a context menu. Then, select the Move Layer Up or Move Layer Down context menu command to change the order of the highlighted shapefile layers. Alternatively, select the up or down arrows option adjacent to the highlighted layer to change the layer order.

Select Classification Shapefile section

Note that shapefile layers that are higher in the listing have precedence over layers that appear lower in the list.

Attribute Mapping

This section allows the user to select the corresponding shapefile fields to map to the required attributes. Based upon the option selected in the Infiltration method combo box entry in the Select Infiltration Method section, the dropdown entries contained in this section will be modified accordingly.

The following dropdown combo box attribute entries are provided when the SCS Curve Number option is selected as an infiltration method in the Select Infiltration Method section.

Attribute Mapping section for SCS Curve Number method

The following dropdown combo box attribute entries are provided when the Deficit Constant option is selected as an infiltration method in the Select Infiltration Method section.

Attribute Mapping section for Deficit Constant method

The following dropdown combo box attribute entries are provided when the Green and Ampt option is selected as an infiltration method in the Select Infiltration Method section.

Attribute Mapping section for Green and Ampt method

Infiltration Layer Definition

The user can view and edit various mapped parameters using the [Infiltration Layer Definition] button. Clicking on this button will display the Infiltration Layers Definition dialog box specific to the infiltration method selected in the Select Infiltration Method section.

Infiltration Layer Definition

Infiltration Layer Limits

This section allows the user to define the limits of the infiltration layer to be generated. Note that this section is enabled when the user selects the Shapefile Layer option as an infiltration source in the Select Infiltration Method section.

Infiltration Layer Limits section

The following options are provided:

  • User-defined limits
    Selecting this option allows the user to manually define the limits of the infiltration layer from the Map View. After selecting this option, the user can click the [Pick] button and draw a rectangular region on the Map View to define the limits of the infiltration layer.
  • Clipping polygons
    Selecting this option allows the user to select the polygon shape regions on the Map View to define the limits of the infiltration layer. After selecting this option, the user can click the [Pick] button to select one or more clipping polygons from the Map View, and the software will then clip the boundary of the selected polygons. The software will set the limits of the layer to the extent of the selected polygons.
  • Model extents
    Selecting this option causes the software to use the current model extent to define the infiltration layer limits. If a project model has been defined, this option will create a bounding rectangular region to correspond to the extent of the defined model, plus an additional buffer boundary.

Infiltration Layer Processing Specifications

This section details how the infiltration layer data should be processed.

Infiltration Layer Processing Specifications

The Infiltration grid file entry is used to define the name and the directory address where the infiltration layer grid file will be saved.

The Load grid as map layer checkbox option causes the software to add the infiltration grid as a layer in the Map Data Layers panel. By default, this checkbox option is checked. The software automatically defines the name of the map data layer based on the infiltration grid file name provided by the user. However, the user can edit the map layer name using the edit tool present next to the Load grid as map layer entry field.

The Infiltration grid CRS dropdown combo box allows the user to define the layer’s CRS (Coordinate Reference System). If there is only one CRS in the project, the software automatically selects it.

The Infiltration grid cell size spin control button allows the user to manually define the grid cell size. The finer the grid resolution (or smaller the cell size) defined, the greater the detail that can be represented in the infiltration grid. By default, the software uses a value of 10 ft. Note that this option is enabled when the user selects the Shapefile Layer option as an infiltration source in the Select Infiltration Method section.

Based on the defined grid cell size and the extent of the infiltration layer, the Grid resolution details pane displays the total number of cells and the number of columns and rows that the infiltration layer grid file will contain.

Infiltration Layer Grid Computation

After defining the required infiltration parameters in the Compute Infiltration dialog box, click the [Create] button. The software will then combine the source infiltration layers to create a single composite infiltration layer grid file. This layer will be an HDF file created by the intersection of the different land use and soil group data polygons, thereby creating sub-polygons containing a corresponding land use and soil group.

In the Map Data Layers panel, the software provides a data legend for each created infiltration layer that lists the infiltration data included within that layer. The user can expand the layer to view the data legend.

Infiltration Layer in Map Data Layers panel

Clicking on the […] button adjacent to the created Infiltration Layer will display the Infiltration Grid Properties dialog box, allowing the user to define the color and style of the infiltration layers. The users can also view and edit the computed loss parameters of the infiltration layers.

Infiltration Grid Properties dialog box

To learn more about the Infiltration Grid Properties dialog box, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Rainfall, Infiltration & Hydrology › Soils & Infiltration

Create Soils Layer Command

Soil data can be used to define infiltration parameters for rainfall runoff modeling. The Create Soils Layer command allows the user to add multiple soil layer data input files to create a single soil coverage layer.

Follow the steps below to use the Create Soils Layer command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Manning’s Roughness dropdown menu and select the Create Soils Layer command.
    Create Soils Layer command
  2. The Create Soils Layer dialog box will be displayed.
    Create Soils Layer dialog box

The following sections describe the Create Soils Layer command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Select Soils Layers

This section allows the user to select an already loaded GIS shapefile map layer containing hydrologic soil data.

To select one or more GIS shapefile map layers, expand the GIS soils map layer dropdown combo box and select the desired GIS shapefile. Click the [Add] button to add more GIS soil layers from the dropdown combo box.

GIS soils map layer dropdown

Selected soils layers

In this section, the added soil map layer(s) will be displayed in the Soils Layers table. The user can select the soil group attribute of the added soil layer shapefile from the Hydrologic Soil Group Attribute field. If more than one GIS soil layer is added, the user can use the up and down arrow options of the Soils Layers table to set the order of the added soil layers.

Selected soils layers

Selected soils layer mapping

This section consists of the Soils Layer Definition table. In this table, the software automatically defines a one-to-one mapping of soil attributes such as Soils Layer Field Value, Soils Layer Label, and associated Soils Layer ID. The user can also edit the Soils Layer Label and Soils Layer ID attributes from the table.

Note that the green-colored table cells are read-only fields.

Soils Layer Definition table

Soils Layer Limits

This section allows the user to define the extent of the soil layer grid file to be generated.

Soils Layer Limits

The following options are provided:

  • Soils layer source limit – Selecting this option causes the software to use the extent of the soil layer to define the soil layer limits of the composite soil layer grid.
  • User-defined limits – Selecting this option allows the user to manually define the limits of the soil layer from the Map View. After selecting this option, the user can click the [Pick] button to select a rectangular region from the Map View that will define the soil layer limits of the composite soil layer grid file.
  • HEC-RAS model extents – Selecting this option causes the software to use the current model’s extent to define the soil layer limits of the composite soil layer grid. By default, the software selects this option.

Soils Layer Processing Specifications

This section allows the user to define the processing options for generating the composite soil layer grid.

Soils Layer Processing Specifications

The Soils layer grid file input field is used to define the name and the directory address where the composite soil layer grid file will be saved.

The Load grid as map layer checkbox option causes the software to add the composite soil layer in the Map Data Layers panel. By default, this checkbox option is checked. The software automatically defines the name of the map data layer based on the soil layer grid file name provided by the user. However, the user can edit the map layer name using the edit tool present next to the Load grid as map layer entry field.

The Soils layer grid CRS dropdown combo box allows the user to define the layer’s CRS (Coordinate Reference System). If there is only one CRS in the project, the software automatically selects it.

The Soils layer grid cell size spin control button can be used to define the cell size of the soil layer grid. By default, the software uses a value of 10 ft.

Based on the defined grid cell size and the extent of the soil layer, the Grid resolution details section displays the total number of cells and number of columns and rows that the soil layer grid file will contain.

Once all the options in the Create Soils Layer dialog box are configured, click the [Create] button. The software will then combine the source soil layers to create a single composite soil layer grid file.

Single composite soil layer grid file
Rainfall, Infiltration & Hydrology › Specialty Flow

Non-Newtonian Flow Options

In GeoHECRAS, the Non-Newtonian Flow Options panel of the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box allows the user to define the parameters necessary for performing a Non-Newtonian flow analysis with HEC-RAS.

Non-Newtonian Flow Options panel of the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box

By default, the Non-Newtonian Flow Options checkbox is unchecked, and the content of this panel is disabled (i.e., grayed out). The user can select the Non-Newtonian Flow Options checkbox to enable the content of this panel and perform the Non-Newtonian flow computations.

The following sections describe how to interact with the Non-Newtonian Flow Options panel of the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box.

Computational Options

This section allows the user to define the Non-Newtonian flow computational method to be used for computations.

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Flow computational method: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select one of the five available computational methods: Bingham Equation, Clastic Grain-Flow, Herschel-Bulkley Equation, Newtonian Flow (Clear Water), and O’Brien Quadratic Equation, as shown below.
    Flow computational method dropdown combo box

Concentration and Bulking

This section allows the user to define the volumetric concentration of the solid particles in the flow and select the appropriate bulking method.

The following parameters are provided:

  • Volumetric concentration (Cv): This entry field is used to define the volumetric concentration in percent. Clicking on the [Convert Concentration] button displays the Convert Concentration Calculator dialog box, which converts various concentration conventions to percentage volumetric concentration (%).
    Convert Concentration Calculator dialog box
    The user is required to enter the following options in the Convert Concentration Calculator dialog box for the concentration conversion.
    1. Input concentration units: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select one of the four available concentration conventions. The four available options are Concentration by Weight (%), mg/l, ppm, and Water Content (wt) (%).
    2. Input concentration: This entry field allows the user to enter the concentration value.
    3. Specific gravity: This entry field allows the user to enter the specific gravity value of the solids.
    4. Volumetric concentration (Cv): Clicking the [Compute] button places the computed value of volumetric concentration in this read-only field.

      The software will then close the dialog box, convert the defined input concentration to volumetric concentration (%), and place the computed value into the Volumetric concentration (Cv) input field.

  • Select bulking method: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the appropriate bulking method depending on whether the volume of solids is included in the flow or not. Two available options are as follows:
    1. Bulk Fluid Volume
    2. Do Not Bulk (default)

Shear Stress Components

This section allows the user to define the various parameters which will be used in the computation.

Note that based on the Flow computational method selected, the options of this section get enabled or disabled, as described below.

unknown node

The following options are provided for the user:

  • Yield Strength Method: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select one of the following yield strength methods: Coulomb, Exponential, and User Yield.
     Yield Strength Method dropdown combo box
    1. Coulomb: This method is used when the concentration is very high and particle interactions transition from collision to inter-particle friction. On selecting this method, the software enables the Coulomb model of the Clastic Methods dropdown combo box.
      Coulomb model of the Clastic Methods dropdown combo box
    2. Exponential: This method incorporates two empirical parameters into an exponential function of the volumetric concentration. On selecting this method, the software enables the Calibration coefficient a and Calibration coefficient b entry fields, as shown below.
      Calibration coefficient a and Calibration coefficient b entry fields
      These coefficients vary widely, so they are often calibration parameters. But these values can serve as a starting point for calibration. Clicking on the […] button will display a Calibration Coefficients lookup table dialog box.
      Calibration Coefficients lookup table dialog box
    3. User Yield: On selecting this method, the software enables the Yield strength entry field to enter the yield strength value. The yield strength value represents the range of stress over which the mixture does not move.
      Yield strength entry field
  • Mixture Dynamic Viscosity: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select one of the following mixture dynamic viscosity methods: Defined Viscosity, Exponential, Maron and Pierce, and Viscosity Ratio, as shown below.
    Mixture Dynamic Viscosity dropdown combo box
    Based on the type of Mixture Dynamic Viscosity selected by the user, the following options will be enabled or disabled.
    1. Max Cv: This entry field gets enabled when the user selects the Maron and Pierce option for Mixture dynamic viscosity. It defines the maximum possible concentration. By default, the software uses 61.5 %. However, the user can enter a different value. Note that Max Cv is always greater than Volume concentration (Cv).
    2. Exponential multiplier B: This entry field gets enabled when the user selects the Exponential option for Mixture dynamic viscosity. It allows the user to specify the exponential multiplier to compute the viscosity. Clicking on the […] button will display an Exponential Multiplier coefficient lookup table dialog box.
      Exponential Multipliercoefficient lookup table dialog box
    3. Dynamic viscosity: This entry field gets enabled when the user selects the Defined Viscosity option for Mixture dynamic viscosity. It allows the user to enter the viscosity.
    4. Viscosity ratio: This entry field gets enabled when the user selects the Viscosity Ratio option for Mixture dynamic viscosity. It allows the user to enter the viscosity ratio used to compute the dynamic viscosity of the mixture as the water viscosity times the user-specified ratio.
    5. Dynamic temperature: This option gets enabled when the user selects the Viscosity Ratio option for Mixture dynamic viscosity. Clicking on the [Define] button displays the Time Series Water Temperature dialog box, which allows the user to define a new time series water temperature data.
      Time Series Water Temperature dialog box
  • Representative grain size: This entry field allows the user to enter the representative grain (particle) size.
  • Generalized Herschel-Bulkley parameter K: This entry field allows the user to enter the consistency factor.
  • Generalized Herschel-Bulkley parameter n: This entry field allows the user to enter the power index or exponent, which can be greater or less than 1. Note that when n < 1, the fluid/mixture is shear-thinning, and when n > 1, the fluid/mixture is shear thickening.
  • Clastic method: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select one of the following clastic methods: Coulomb and Voellmy, as shown below.
    Clastic method dropdown combo box
    Based on the type of Clastic methods selected, the following options will be enabled or disabled.
    1. Friction angle F: This entry field allows the user to enter the angle of friction to compute the threshold of the motion. This field is enabled for both Coulomb and Voellmy Clastic methods.
    2. Voellmy coefficient x: This entry field gets enabled when the user selects the Voellmy option for Clastic methods. It allows the user to enter the voellmy coefficient for performing the unsteady flow computation.
      Notes:
      • The Voellmy Clastic method is enabled only when the user selects the Clastic Grain-Flow flow computational method
      • For other Non-Newtonian flow computational methods, the Clastic methods dropdown combo box is enabled when the user selects the Coulomb option for the Yield strength method. However, the Voellmy option of Clastic methods dropdown remains disabled.
Rainfall, Infiltration & Hydrology › External Hydrology Integration

Meteorology Map Command

The Meteorology Map command allows the user to create 2D precipitation/evapotranspiration map layers from the computed 2D precipitation and evapotranspiration input data. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about precipitation and evapotranspiration data.

Follow the steps below to use the Meteorology Map command:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, select the Meteorology Map command.
    Meteorology Map command
  2. The Meteorology Map dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Meteorology Map dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Meteorology Map command and interact with the above dialog box.

General Specifications

This section allows the user to define general specifications for the 2D precipitation/evapotranspiration map layer that is to be created.

General Specifications section

The following options are available in this section:

  • Meteorology map type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of precipitation/evapotranspiration map that is to be generated. The following entries are listed in this dropdown combo box:
    1. Accumulated Precipitation
    2. Evapotranspiration
    3. Precipitation
    Meteorology map type dropdown combo box
  • Meteorology profile type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the precipitation/evapotranspiration profile for which the map layer is to be generated.
    Meteorology profile type dropdown combo box
    The following entries are listed in this dropdown combo box:
    1. Animated Time Series: This option displays the generated precipitation, accumulated precipitation, and evapotranspiration map layer as an animation over the simulation time period. When this option is selected, the Map View animation control is displayed, which allows the user to view the animation directly on the Map View.
    2. Maximum Value: This option generates the precipitation map with the maximum accumulated precipitation values. Note that this option is enabled when Accumulated Precipitation is selected as the meteorology map type. Otherwise, this option is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
    3. Minimum Value: This option generates the precipitation map with the minimum accumulated precipitation values. Note that this option is enabled when Accumulated Precipitation is selected as the meteorology map type. Otherwise, this option is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Layer name
    This entry field allows the user to define the layer name that will be displayed in the Map Data Layers panel. The software uses the default layer name based upon the selected meteorology map type, which can be changed by the user. The following table provides the default layer name for all meteorology map types:

    Meteorology Map Type

    Default Layer Name

    Accumulated Precipitation

    Accum-Precip

    Evapotranspiration

    Evapotranspiration

    Precipitation

    Precipitation

  • Delete previous meteorology map
    This checkbox option allows the user to delete any previously computed precipitation/evapotranspiration map layers. By default, this checkbox option is checked.

Meteorology Map Display Options

This section allows the user to define the display properties of the precipitation/evapotranspiration map layer that is to be generated.

Meteorology Map Display Options section

The following options are available in this section:

  • Maximum precipitation
    This entry field allows the user to define the maximum value to be used to compute the generated map layer. Note that this entry field label name changes based upon the meteorology map type selected in the Meteorology map type dropdown combo box. The following table provides the default label name of this entry field for all meteorology map types:

    Meteorology Map Type

    Label Name

    Accumulated Precipitation

    Maximum precipitation

    Evapotranspiration

    Maximum evapotranspiration

    Precipitation

    Maximum precipitation

  • Minimum precipitation
    This entry field allows the user to define the minimum value to be used to compute the generated map layer. Note that this entry field label name changes based upon the meteorology map type selected in the Meteorology map type dropdown combo box. The following table provides the default label name of this entry field for all meteorology map types:

    Meteorology Map Type

    Label Name

    Accumulated Precipitation

    Minimum precipitation

    Evapotranspiration

    Minimum evapotranspiration

    Precipitation

    Minimum precipitation

  • Intervals
    This spin control option allows the user to specify the number of colors that will be used to represent the different precipitation/evapotranspiration data for the generated map layer. The software uses a default value of 5. However, the user can increase or decrease this value to get a better representation of the data.
  • Color scheme
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the color scheme to be used to generate the color ramp.

The user can change the default color values for the selected color ramp scheme from the table as shown below. Clicking the [Reverse Colors] button will reverse the colors defined in the table.

precipitation color data grid

Other Display Options

This section allows the user to define additional options for the 2D precipitation/evapotranspiration map layer that is to be generated.

Other Display Options section

The following options are available in this section:

  • Color blending
    This checkbox option allows the user to perform color blending of the generated map image. This is helpful when there is not enough tonal range to represent all the different colors between the brightest and darkest gradient values. By default, this checkbox option is checked.
  • Map Data Layers legend
    This checkbox option allows the user to create a color legend for the generated map layer in the Map Data Layers panel. By default, this checkbox option is checked.
  • Map View legend
    This checkbox option allows the user to create a color legend for the generated map layer in the Map View. By default, this checkbox option is checked.
  • Transparency
    This checkbox option allows the user to adjust the transparency of the map layer that is to be generated. The software uses a default value of 50. However, the user can change the transparency value using the horizontal slider control or spin control button. By default, this checkbox option is checked.

Generating Meteorology Map Layer

When all the options have been properly defined, click the [OK] button. The software will then load and display the generated precipitation or evapotranspiration map layer on the Map View.

In the Map Data Layers panel, the software provides a data legend for each meteorology layer that lists the precipitation or evapotranspiration map data included within that layer. The user can expand the layer to view the data legend.

Map Data Layers panel

In the Map Data Layers panel, clicking on the […] button adjacent to the created meteorology map layer will display the Meteorology Map Layer Properties dialog box. This dialog box allows the user to edit the display properties for the meteorology layer on the Map View. The content of the Meteorology Map Layer Properties dialog box is similar to as explained above in this article.

Meteorology Map Layer Properties dialog box
Rainfall, Infiltration & Hydrology › External Hydrology Integration

Evapotranspiration Gage Data Command

Evapotranspiration is the combination of evaporation from the ground surface and transpiration by vegetation. It includes both evaporation of free water from the surface of vegetation and the land surface. It also includes transpiration, which is the process of vegetation extracting moisture from the soil through the plant root system. Both processes return water from the land or subsurface to the atmosphere. Even though evaporation and transpiration are considered together, transpiration is responsible for a larger portion of water movement than evaporation. Combined evapotranspiration is often responsible for up to 60% of precipitation returning to the atmosphere. The theoretical evapotranspiration, also called the potential evapotranspiration, serves as the upper limit for what can happen on the land surface based on atmospheric conditions.

Evapotranspiration example

Evapotranspiration gages are utilized to define evapotranspiration point data. In GeoHECRAS software, users can define evapotranspiration gage point locations and corresponding precipitation data using the Evapotranspiration Gage Data command. This data can later be used in the meteorological model to define one or more gages. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to define a meteorological model. This article describes how to use the Evapotranspiration Gage Data command in the GeoHECRAS software. Follow the steps below to use the Evapotranspiration Gage Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Meteorology Data dropdown menu and select the Evapotranspiration Gage Data command. Evapotranspiration Gage Data command
  2. The Evapotranspiration Gage Data dialog box will be displayed, as shown below. Evapotranspiration Gage Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Evapotranspiration Gage Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Evapotranspiration Gage

The Select Evapotranspiration Gage section allows the user to select the evapotranspiration gage for which evapotranspiration gage data will be defined. In this section, the user can create, delete, or copy existing evapotranspiration gage data to a new evapotranspiration gage. In addition, the user can navigate between evapotranspiration gages and enter a description for each evapotranspiration gage.

Select Evapotranspiration Gage section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • Evapotranspiration gage ID This dropdown combo box lists all the evapotranspiration gages that are defined in the current scenario. Click on the edit option (i.e., pencil icon) to edit the evapotranspiration gage ID. The user can navigate between the previous and next evapotranspiration gage using the Up and Down arrow buttons. Note that the Up and Down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the current scenario contains a single evapotranspiration gage.
  • Description This optional text field allows the user to enter additional information that describes the selected evapotranspiration gage.
  • New The [New] button allows the user to create a new evapotranspiration gage. The ID of every newly created evapotranspiration gage must be unique.
  • Copy The [Copy] button allows the user to copy an existing evapotranspiration gage along with its associated data to a new evapotranspiration gage. When this command is executed, the software automatically provides a unique default name for the duplicated evapotranspiration gage. The cursor is then placed into the Evapotranspiration gage ID entry field. The user can go with the default name or enter a different valid and unique ID before moving on to add any other data.
  • Delete The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the selected evapotranspiration gage from the current scenario. Clicking the [Delete] button displays the following confirmational dialog box: Delete Evapotranspiration Gage dialog box Click the [Yes] button to delete the selected evapotranspiration gage. To abort the deletion process, click the [No] button.

Evapotranspiration Gage Location

This section allows the user to provide a precise description of the evapotranspiration gage’s location. The location is specified for each gage in terms of latitude and longitude. The latitude and longitude can be entered in decimal degrees in the Latitude and Longitude fields, respectively. Upon entering the latitude and longitude, the software will provide the physical address in the Location read-only field. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to pick the location interactively from the Map View. The software will then display the physical address, longitude, and latitude values for the selected location in the respective fields.

Evapotranspiration Gage Location section

Constant Evapotranspiration Data

This section allows the user to define a constant evapotranspiration rate. By default, the radio button on the Constant Evapotranspiration Data section is selected. This section is disabled (i.e., grayed out) if either the DSS Data or Time Series Data radio button is selected.

Constant Evapotranspiration Data section

DSS Data

This section allows the user to select a DSS data file to define the evapotranspiration gage time series data. By default, the content of this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Select the radio button on the DSS Data section to enable the content of this section.

DSS Data section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • DSS file This entry denotes the file directory path to the DSS data file. Clicking on the [Select] button allows the user to select the directory path and data path using the DSS Data File & Path dialog box. To know more about the DSS Data File & Path dialog box, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • DSS path This entry denotes the data path within the DSS data file, which contains the evapotranspiration gage data.

Time Series Data

This section allows the user to manually enter time series data for the selected element. By default, the content of this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Select the radio button on the Time Series Data section to enable the content of this section.

Time Series Data section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • Select control This dropdown combo box is used to define the control data set to use. The following options are available: Select control This dropdown combo box
    1. Manual date and time - This option is used to define evapotranspiration time series data for irregular time intervals.
    2. Manual simulation time - This option is used to define evapotranspiration time series data for irregular time intervals.
    3. Regular interval (default) - This option is used to define evapotranspiration time series data for regular, fixed-time intervals.
  • Data type This dropdown combo box is used to define the type of data that are to be entered. The following options are available: Data type This dropdown combo box
    1. PER-AVER (default)
    2. PER-CUM
    3. INST-VAL
  • Evapotranspiration data starting date time This subsection is used to select the simulation date and the start time to define the time series data. This subsection is enabled only when the Regular interval is selected in the Select control dropdown combo box. Otherwise, this subsection is disabled (i.e., grayed out). The following radio button options are available in this subsection:
    1. Use simulation time - Selecting this radio button option allows the software to use the simulation date and time as the starting time.
    2. Fixed start time - Selecting this radio button option allows the user to enter a specific date and time that defines the simulation period as the starting time.
  • Date time interval This dropdown combo box is used to select the time interval that defines the time series data. The following options are available:

    Seconds

    Minutes

    Hours

    Days

    Weeks

    Months

    Years

    1 second

    1 minute

    1 hour

    1 day

    1 week

    1 month

    1 year

    2 seconds

    2 minutes

    2 hours





    3 seconds

    3 minutes

    3 hours





    4 seconds

    4 minutes

    4 hours





    5 seconds

    5 minutes

    6 hours





    6 seconds

    6 minutes

    8 hours





    10 seconds

    10 minutes

    12 hours





    12 seconds

    12 minutes






    15 seconds

    15 minutes






    20 seconds

    20 minutes






    30 seconds

    30 minutes






  • Time Series Table The Date & Time and Simulation data grid columns automatically get filled in based on the option selected in the Evapotranspiration data starting date time subsection. The user can manually enter data into the Evapotranspiration data grid column field.

Evapotranspiration Time Series Plot

This section displays the Evapotranspiration (in/hr) vs Date time plot of the selected evapotranspiration gage data. If no time series data are available, the graph will not show any data.

Evapotranspiration Time Series Plot section
Computational Options & Engine Analysis › Steady Flow Computations

Compute Steady - Current Scenario Command

When all geometric data and flow data are entered in the model, the user can perform the hydraulic calculations. In GeoHECRAS, the Compute Steady - Current Scenario command allows the user to perform an analysis of the current scenario (plan) for steady flow models.

This command also allows the user to select specific profiles to analyze, rather than analyzing all of the defined profiles. For example, the steady flow model contains the 2-Year, 5-Year, 10-Year, 25-Year, 50-Year, and 100-Year profiles. The user can select any profile(s) to analyze from the list of available profiles.

Follow the steps below to use the Compute Steady – Current Scenario command for steady flow analysis:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, click the Compute Steady dropdown combo box and select the Current Scenario command.
    Compute Steady Current Scenario Analysis ribbon menu command
  2. The Compute Steady – Current Scenario dialog box will be displayed.
    Compute Steady - Current Scenario dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Compute Steady – Current Scenario command and interact with the above dialog box.

Scenario Data

This section allows the user to define the scenario data to be used in the steady flow simulation.

The following parameters are provided in the Scenario Data section:

  • Scenario (plan)
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the scenario for which the analysis will be performed. The dropdown combo box lists all the steady flow scenarios that are already defined in the project. By default, the current scenario is selected.
  • Geometry
    This read-only field contains the corresponding geometry for the selected scenario.
  • Steady flow
    This read-only field contains the corresponding steady flow for the selected scenario.

Computational Options

This section allows the user to define the flow regime to be computed by the HEC-RAS steady flow analysis engine. In addition, the computational log file can be created from this section.

Computational Options section


The following options are provided in the Computational Options section:

  • Flow regime
    This dropdown combo box is used to select a flow regime for which the model will perform calculations. The following options are available in the dropdown combo box:
    Flow regime dropdown options
    1. Subcritical flow: This option requires only downstream boundary conditions. By default, this option is selected.
    2. Supercritical flow: This option requires only the upstream boundary conditions.
    3. Mixed flow: This option requires both upstream and downstream boundary conditions.

  • Create computational log file, detail level
    This checkbox option is used to create a computational log file computed by the HEC-RAS steady flow analysis engine. The spin control defines the level of the log file for a steady flow analysis. By default, the software uses a value of 3. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 0 to 10, with 0 resulting in no log output and 10 resulting in the maximum log output.

    Note that the computational results log file can be seen from the View Log File command of the Results ribbon menu.
    View Log File Results ribbon menu command

Profile Analysis Selection

This section allows the user to select the profile to be analyzed.

Profile Analysis Section section

This section has a table that lists all profiles defined in the project. The user can select the desired profile by checking the checkboxes available in the Perform Analysis column corresponding to each profile name available in the Profile Name column to display the output result. By default, all profiles are selected.

The user can click the [Select All] button to analyze all selected profiles listed in the table.

The user can click the [Clear All] button to cancel all the profiles selected in the table and redo the entire process.

Computing Steady Flow Analysis

When all the options have been properly defined, click the [Compute] button. This will cause HEC‑RAS to perform the analysis for the current scenario. Note that the Compute Steady – Current Scenario dialog box will be closed on clicking the [Compute] button.

If a problem is detected in the model data or analysis, the software will display a dialog box detailing the issue and will stop the process. Otherwise, the HEC-RAS Finished Computations dialog box will be displayed once the computations are finished. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.

HEC-RAS Finished Computations dialog box
Computational Options & Engine Analysis › Steady Flow Computations

Steady Flow Computational Options Command

The Steady Flow Computational Options command of GeoHECRAS software allows the user to define steady flow computational options and tolerances. The software provides some default computational options and tolerances for 1D steady flow models. The tolerances are used in the solution of steady flow equations. In general, it is recommended that the default computation options and tolerances be maintained. However, the user can override the default computational options to achieve model stability while maintaining computational accuracy. Extra care should be taken while overriding the default calculation tolerances as it could result in computational errors in the water surface profile.

Follow the steps given below to use the Steady Flow Computational Options command:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, select the Steady Flow Computational Options command.Steady Flow Computational Options Command Image 1
  2. The Steady Flow Computational Options dialog box will be displayed.Steady Flow Computational Options Dialog Box Image 2

The following sections describe how to interact with the above dialog box.

Computational Options

This section allows the user to select friction slope method, critical depth computation method, and conveyance method from various options.

The following options are provided in the Computational Options section:

  • Friction slope method: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select one of six available friction slope equations, or to allow the software to select the method based on the flow regime and profile type. The six equations are:
    1. Automatic Selection
    2. Average Conveyance (Default)
    3. Average Friction Slope
    4. Geometric Mean
    5. Harmonic Mean
    6. HEC-6 Slope Averaging
  • Critical depth computation: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select one of the two available methods for calculating critical depth. By default, the software selects the Parabolic Method. This method utilizes a parabolic searching technique to find the minimum specific energy. This method is very fast, but it can only find a single minimum on the energy curve. The second method, i.e., Multiple Critical Depth, can find up to three minimums on the energy curve. If more than one minimum is found, the software selects the answer with the lowest energy.

Note that the Multiple Critical Depth method takes a lot of computation time. Since critical depth is calculated often, using this method will slow down the computations. This method should only be used when you feel the software is finding an incorrect answer for critical depth.

  • Conveyance method: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select one of the two available methods for calculating conveyance in the overbanks. The first option, Roughness Subareas, instructs the software to sum wetted perimeter and area between breaks in Manning’s n values, and then to calculate conveyance at these locations. If n varies in the overbank, the conveyance values are then summed to get the total overbank conveyance. The second option, Every Coordinate Point, calculates wetted perimeter, area, and conveyance between every coordinate point in the overbanks. The conveyance values are then summed to get the total left overbank and right overbank conveyance. These two methods can provide different answers for conveyance, and therefore different computed water surfaces. The Roughness Subareas method is the default.
  • Composite channel manning’s: Checking this checkbox causes the software to combine all the main channel Manning’s n values into a single n value, as long as the side slopes of the main channel are greater than 1V:5H. The user has the option to change this slope criterion.
  • Always compute critical depth: Checking this checkbox causes the software to calculate the critical depth at all locations.

Computational Tolerances

This section allows the user to set values for various tolerances. These tolerances are used in the solution of the energy equation. Note that increasing the default value for tolerances could result in computational errors in the water surface profile. The following options are provided in the Computational Tolerances section:

  • Water surface calculation tolerance: This tolerance value is used to compare against the difference between the computed and assumed water surface elevations. When the difference is less than the tolerance, the software assumes that it has a valid numerical solution. The default value is 0.01.
  • Critical depth calculation tolerance: This tolerance value is used during the critical depth solution algorithm. The default value is 0.01.
  • Maximum number of iterations: This variable defines the maximum number of iterations that the software will make when attempting to balance a water surface profile. The default value is 20.
  • Maximum difference tolerance: This tolerance is used during the balance of the energy equation. As the software attempts to balance the energy equation, the solution with the minimum error (assumed minus computed water surface) is saved. If the software goes to the maximum number of iterations without meeting the specified calculation tolerance, the minimum error solution is checked against the maximum difference tolerance. If the solution at minimum error is less than this value, then the software uses the minimum error solution as the answer, issues a warning statement, and then proceeds with the calculations. If the solution at minimum error is greater than the maximum difference tolerance, then the software issues a warning and defaults the solution to critical depth. The computations then proceed from there. The default value is 0.33.
  • Flow tolerance factor: This factor is only used in the bridge and culvert routines. The factor is used when the software attempts to balance weir flow and flow through the structure. The factor is multiplied by the total flow. The resulting value is then used as a flow tolerance for the balance of weir flow and flow through the structure. The default value is 0.001.
  • Maximum split flow iterations: This variable defines the maximum number of iterations that the software will use during the split flow optimization calculations. The default value is 30.
  • Weir split flow tolerance factor: This tolerance is used when running a split flow optimization with a lateral weir/gated spillway. The split flow optimization continues to run until the estimate of the lateral flow and the computed value are within a percentage of the total flow. The default value for this is 2 percent (.02).
  • Maximum junction split flow difference: This tolerance is used during a split flow optimization at a stream junction. The software continues to attempt to balance flow splitting from one reach into two until the energy gradelines of the receiving streams are within the specified tolerance. The default value is 0.02.
Computational Options & Engine Analysis › Unsteady Flow Computations

Compute Unsteady - Current Scenario Command

HEC-RAS analysis refers to a simulation that analyzes the flow of water in a river or channel over a specific time period. The simulation computes the evaluation of water levels, velocities, and other hydraulic parameters at different locations along the river during unsteady flow conditions, such as floods or varying discharges.

When all geometric and unsteady flow data are entered in the project, the user can perform the hydraulic calculations. In GeoHECRAS, the Compute Unsteady - Current Scenario command allows the user to perform an analysis of the current scenario (plan) for unsteady flow models.

Follow the steps below to use the Compute Unsteady - Current Scenario command:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, click the Compute Unsteady dropdown menu and select the Current Scenario command. Alternatively, click the upper half part of the Compute Unsteady button.

    Compute Unsteady - Current Scenario command
  2. The Compute Unsteady - Current Scenario dialog box will be displayed.

    Compute Unsteady - Current Scenario dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Compute Unsteady - Current Scenario command and interact with the above dialog box.

Scenario Data

This section allows the user to define the scenario data to be used in the unsteady flow simulation.

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Scenario (plan)
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the scenario for which the analysis will be performed. The dropdown combo box lists all the unsteady flow scenarios that are already defined in the project. By default, the current scenario is selected.
  • Geometry
    This read-only field contains the corresponding geometry for the selected scenario.
  • Unsteady flow
    This read-only field contains the corresponding unsteady flow for the selected scenario.

Disregard following Elements during Analysis

This section allows the user to select elements to be disregarded or not considered in the simulation. The user can check/uncheck the checkbox(s) corresponding to each element to select/deselect them.

The following checkbox options are provided in this section:

  • Lateral Structures
    Selecting this checkbox causes the lateral structure elements, such as levees, flood walls, or lateral weirs to be disregarded from the simulation.
  • Storage Area Connection
    Selecting this checkbox causes the storage areas such as lakes, reservoirs, or ponds connected with river or channel systems to be disregarded, assuming they have minimal impact on flow dynamics and are treated as isolated bodies of water.
  • Inline and Lateral Structure Breaches
    Selecting this checkbox causes the inline and lateral structure breaches to be disregarded, assuming no structural failures or breaches along the river or channel system during the simulation.
  • Pumping
    Selecting this checkbox causes the artificial extraction or addition of water to the river or channel system to be considered independently of the simulation to simplify the model.

Execute Processes

This section contains three components to be used in performing an unsteady flow analysis within HEC-RAS.

Execute Processes section

The following checkbox options are provided in this section:

  • Geometric preprocessor
    This checkbox option is used to process the geometric data into a series of hydraulic properties tables, rating curves, and a family of rating curves. This is done in order to speed up the unsteady flow calculations. During each iteration, the software interpolates the hydraulic variables from the tables instead of calculating hydraulic variables for each cross-section.
  • Unsteady flow simulation
    This checkbox option is used to simulate the unsteady flow in the river system.
  • Output postprocessor
    This checkbox option is used to post-process the output from the unsteady flow simulation. It computes detailed hydraulic information for a set of user-specified timelines during the unsteady flow simulation period. In general, unsteady flow computations only compute stage and flow at all of the computation nodes, as well as stage and flow hydrographs at user-specified locations. If this option is unchecked, then the user will only be able to view the stage and flow hydrographs and inundation mapping, no other output from HEC-RAS. By using this option, the user will have all of the available plots and tables for unsteady flow that HEC-RAS normally produces for steady flow.
  • Close dialog box while computing
    This checkbox option allows the user to close the dialog box on clicking the [Compute] button.

Simulation Time Window

This section defines the starting date and time and ending date and time of the HEC-RAS hydrology simulation. The user can click on the [Date] button, which displays a calendar date selector from which the user can select a specific date. Similarly, the user can click on the [Time] button, at which point the software displays a 24-hour time selector from which the user can select a specific time.

Simulation Time Window section

Simulation Time Settings

This section contains the computational time step interval, hydrograph output interval, detailed output interval, and mapping output interval for defining the simulation time settings.

Simulation Time Settings section

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Computation time step interval
    This option allows the user to define a fixed computational time step. The value for the fixed computational interval should be chosen with care and consideration as to how it will affect the simulation. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how time step values can affect the stability of the model.
    Clicking on the [Advanced] button will display the Advanced Time Step Control panel of the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box. This panel allows the user to use the Courant number method for the variable computational time step. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to use the Courant number method.
  • Hydrograph output interval
    This option is used to define at which interval the computed stage and flow hydrographs will be written to HEC-DSS. It should be selected based on adequate number of points needed to define the shape of the computed hydrographs without losing information about the peak or volume of the hydrographs. This interval must be equal to or larger than the selected computation time step interval.
  • Detailed output interval
    This option is used to define the intervals at which profiles of water surface elevation and flow are generated at user-specified intervals during the simulation. Profiles are not written for every computational time step because it would require too much space to store all of the information for most jobs. Also, when the postprocessor is run, the software will compute detailed hydraulic information for each one of the instantaneous profiles that are written. The selected interval must be equal to or greater than the computation time step interval.
  • Mapping output interval
    This option is used to define the interval at which the user will be able to visualize mapping output within HEC-RAS Mapper.

Computational Options

This section allows the user to define the flow regime to be computed by the HEC-RAS unsteady flow analysis engine.

Computational Options section

The Flow regime dropdown combo box lists the following options:

  • Subcritical flow: This option requires only downstream boundary conditions. By default, this option is selected.
  • Mixed flow: This option requires both upstream and downstream boundary conditions.

Computing Unsteady Flow Analysis

When all the options have been properly defined, click the [Compute] button. The dialog box will be closed, and HEC‑RAS immediately starts performing the analysis for the current scenario in a separate window showing the progress of the computations. The information that appears in the window is an indicator of software progress during the computations and a list of any computational messages that come up during the run. When the computations have been completed, the user can click the [Close] button to close the dialog box. If a problem is detected in the model data or analysis, the software will display a dialog box detailing the issue and will stop the process.

HEC-RAS Finished Computations dialog box

Note that a terrain surface must be assigned in the project before running the analysis. Otherwise, the following informational dialog box will be displayed when you click on the [Compute] button.

Missing Terrain Surface confirmational dialog box
Computational Options & Engine Analysis › Unsteady Flow Computations

Restart Options

In GeoHECRAS, the Restart Options panel of the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box allows the user to write out the initial conditions file(s) for an entire simulation, sometimes called a Hot Start file. A Hot Start file can be used to set the system’s initial conditions for a subsequent run. It is commonly used in real-time forecasting, where the user wants to use the results at a specific time from a previous run to be the initial conditions of the next run.

Restart Options panel of the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box

The following section describes how to interact with the Restart Options panel of the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box.

Write Initial Conditions Restart Files During Simulation

The user can check this section to enable the content and define the simulation period for writing the initial conditions file. Note that the user can either check this section or the Write Initial Conditions Restart File At Simulation End checkbox option to write the initial conditions restart files during or after the simulation end.

The following options are provided in this panel:

  • Hours from simulation beginning
    Selecting this option allows the user to define the simulation period in hours from the beginning of the current simulation.
  • At fixed reference
    Selecting this option allows the user to enter a specific date and time for defining the simulation period. This time represents the time at which the conditions of the system will be written to the Hot Start file. The software writes flow and stage at all of the computational nodes and the stage in all of the storage areas to the file.
  • Additional restart files every
    Alternatively, the user can select this checkbox to write multiple restart files from a single run. On selecting this checkbox, the user must enter the number of hours between subsequent writes of the file.
  • Write Initial Conditions Restart File At Simulation End
    Selecting this checkbox causes the software to write the last step as a separate restart file. Note that if the user checks the At fixed reference checkbox option from the Write Initial Conditions Restart Files During Simulation section and selects the ending date and time, then it will be the same as selecting the Write Initial Conditions Restart File At Simulation End checkbox option.
Computational Options & Engine Analysis › Unsteady Flow Computations

Advanced Time Step Control

In GeoHECRAS, the Advanced Time Step Control panel of the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box allows the user to control both fixed and variable computational time steps in unsteady flow computations.

Advanced Time Step Control panel

The above panel provides three different options to control for selecting and controlling the computational time step:

  • Fixed Time Step - Basic method.
  • Allow Variable Time Step Using Courant - A variable time step based on the Courant number.
  • Allow Variable Time Step Using Time Series Divisors - A variable time step based on a user-entered table of dates, times, and time step divisors.

Note that variable time step options can improve model stability and reduce computational time. However, not all models will be faster with the use of the variable time step.

The following sections describe how to interact with the Advanced Time Step Control panel of the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box.

Fixed Time Step (Basic Method)

This option allows the user to define a fixed computational time step. The value for the fixed computational interval should be chosen with care and consideration as to how it will affect the simulation. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how time step values can affect the stability of the model.

Allow Variable Time Step Using Courant

This option allows the user to use the Courant number method for the variable time step. To use this method, select the Allow Variable Time Step Using Courant option.

Allow Variable Time Step Using Courant radio button option

The following entries are provided for the user:

  • Max Courant number before halving time step: This entry field allows the user to define the maximum Courant number allowed at any 2D cell or 1D cross section. By default, the software sets the maximum Courant number value to 3. If the maximum Courant number is exceeded, the time step is cut in half for the next interval. Because the software uses an implicit solution scheme, Courant numbers can be greater than one, and it can still maintain a stable and accurate solution. In general, if the flood wave rises and falls slowly (depth and velocity are changing slowly), the model can handle extremely high Courant numbers. For these types of cases, users may be able to enter a maximum Courant number as high as 5.0 or more. However, if the flood wave is rapidly changing (depth and velocity are changing quickly over time), then the maximum Courant number will need to be set closer to 1.0.
  • Min Courant number before doubling time step: This entry field allows the user to define the minimum Courant number threshold for 2D cells and 1D cross sections. By default, the software sets the minimum Courant number value to 0.5. If the Courant number at all locations goes below the minimum, then the time step will be doubled. However, the time step will only be doubled if the current time step has been used for enough time steps in a row to satisfy the user entered value in the Number of time steps (TS) exceeding above limits before adjusting TS field. The minimum Courant value should always be less than half of the maximum Courant value. If the minimum Courant value is equal to or larger than half the maximum Courant value, the software will just flip back and forth between halving and doubling the time steps.
  • Number time steps (TS) exceeding above limits before adjusting TS: This field allows the user to enter the integer number of time steps for which the Courant number must be below the user-specified minimum Courant value before the time step can be increased. This can prevent the model from increasing the time step too quickly and/or from flipping back and forth between time steps. Typical values for this field may be in the range of 5 to 10. The software uses a default value of 4.
  • Max times a time step can be halved: This field allows the user to enter the maximum number of times the base computation interval can be cut in half. For example, if the base computation interval is 10 seconds, and the user wants to allow it to go down to 2.5 seconds, then he should provide a value of 2 in this field (i.e., the time step can be cut in half twice: 10s to 5s to 2.5s). The software uses a default value of 4. The read-only field next to the right of the user-entered value displays what the entered maximum time step will end up being.
  • Max times a time step can be doubled: This field allows the user to enter the maximum number of times the base time step can be doubled. For example, if the base computation interval is 10 seconds, and the user wants to allow it to go up to 40 seconds, the user should provide a value of 2 for this field (i.e., the time step can be doubled twice: 10s to 20s to 40s). The software uses a default value of 4. The read-only field next to the right of the user-entered value displays what the entered maximum time step will end up being.
  • Courant computation method: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the method used for computing the Courant number. By default, the software selects the Courant (Velocity-based) method. With this method, the software divides the velocity times the time step by the length (between 1D cross sections or two 2D cells). For the 2D module, the velocity is taken from each face, and the length is the distance between the two cell centers across that face. For the 1D module, the velocity is taken as the average velocity from the main channel at the cross section, and the length is the distance between that cross section and the next cross section downstream. The second method is Residence Time (volume-based). With this method, the software computes how much flow is leaving a 2D cell over the time step, divided by the volume in the cell. The Residence Time method is only applied to 2D cells. When this method is selected, it is only used for the 2D cells, whereas 1D cross sections still use the Courant (Velocity-based) method.

Allow Variable Time Step Using Time Series Divisors

This option allows the user to set the variable time step based on a user-defined table of dates and times versus a time step divisor.

Allow Variable Time Step Using Time Series Divisors radio button option

The user can select the Allow Variable Time Step Using Time Series Divisors option to enter date/time values versus time step divisors. The first date/time in the table must be equal to the starting date/time of the simulation period. In the table, the user must enter a base time step equal to the maximum time step desired during the run. Then in the Divisor column, an integer value should be defined using the spin control to divide that time step by the current date/time in the table. Once a time step is set for a date/time, the Unsteady Flow Analysis computation will use that time step until the user sets a new one.

This method requires much more knowledge about the events being modeled, the system being routed through, as well as knowledge of velocities, cross section spacing, and 2D cell sizes. However, this method can be a powerful tool for decreasing model run times and improving accuracy if done correctly.

Computational Options & Engine Analysis › Unsteady Flow Computations

Unsteady Flow Computational Options

GeoHECRAS software provides some default computational options and tolerances for 1D and 2D unsteady flow models. The tolerances are used in the solution of unsteady flow equations. In general, it is recommended that the default computation options and tolerances be maintained. However, the user can override the default computational options to achieve model stability while maintaining computational accuracy. Extra care should be taken while overriding the default calculation tolerances as it could result in computational errors in the water surface profile.

Follow the steps below to override the default computational options and tolerances:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, select the Unsteady Flow Computational Options command.
    Unsteady Flow Computational Options command
  2. The Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box contains separate tabbed panels for 1D/2D Flow Options, 2D Flow Options, Restart Options, Detailed Output, Advanced Time Step Control, and Non-Newtonian Flow Options.
    Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box

The following sections describe how to override the default computational options and tolerances and interact with the above dialog box.

1D/2D Flow Options

By default, the 1D/2D Flow Options tabbed panel is selected when the Unsteady Flow Computational Options command is run.

1D/2D Flow Options tab

The above panel has different options to control the 1D unsteady flow calculation and mixed flow regime capabilities. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the 1D/2D Flow Options panel and its underlying sections.

2D Flow Options

On selecting the 2D Flow Options tab, the following panel will be displayed.

2D Flow Options tab

The above panel contains several computational options and tolerances that can be set for the 2D module and options for controlling iterations between 1D and 2D hydraulic connections. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the 2D Flow Options panel and its underlying sections.

Restart Options

On selecting the Restart Options tab, the following panel will be displayed.

Restart Options tab

The above panel allows the user to write out initial conditions file(s) for an entire simulation, sometimes called a Hot Start file. A Hot Start file can be used to set the system’s initial conditions for a subsequent run. It is commonly used in real-time forecasting, where the user wants to use the results at a specific time from a previous run to be the initial conditions of the next run. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Restart Options panel and its underlying sections.

Detailed Output

On selecting the Detailed Output tab, the following panel will be displayed.

Detailed Output tab

This data panel helps the user to find model stability problems. To pinpoint the stability issues, the user can generate the computational output file and/or detailed log output file. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Detailed Output panel and its underlying sections.

Advanced Time Step Control

On selecting the Advanced Time Step Control tab, the following panel will be displayed.

Advanced Time Step Control tab

The above panel provides three options to control for selecting and controlling the computational time step:

  • Fixed Time Step — Basic method.
  • Allow Variable Time Step Using Courant — A variable time step based on the Courant number.
  • Allow Variable Time Step Using Time Series Divisors — A variable time step based on a user-entered table of dates, times, and time step divisors.

Note that variable time step options can improve model stability and reduce computational time. However, not all models will be faster with the use of the variable time step.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Advanced Time Step Control panel and its underlying sections.

Non-Newtonian Flow Options

On selecting the Non-Newtonian Flow Options tab, the following panel will be displayed.

Non-Newtonian Flow Options tab

The above panel allows the user to define the parameters necessary for performing a Non-Newtonian flow analysis with HEC-RAS. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Non-Newtonian Flow Options panel and its underlying sections.

Note that clicking the [Reset to Defaults] button resets unsteady flow computational options to default values.

When all the data has been defined, click the [OK] button to run the analysis.

Computational Options & Engine Analysis › 2D Flow Options

2D Flow Options

In GeoHECRAS, the 2D Flow Options panel of the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box contains several computational options and tolerances that can be set for the 2D module and options for controlling iterations between 1D and 2D hydraulic connections.

2D Flow Options panel of the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the 2D Flow Options panel of the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box.

1D/2D Interface Computational Options

This section provides various options for controlling 1D/2D iterations, which can be used to improve the computations of flow passing from a 1D element (reach or storage area) to a 2D flow area. Most 1D to 2D connections will not need iterations. However, under specific circumstances such as when the1D/2D hydraulic conditions become highly submerged or there are flow reversals or tidally influenced stages or flows, then iterating between the 1D solution and the 2D solution may be necessary to get an accurate and stable solution.

The options to set the maximum iterations between the 1D and 2D interfaces and tolerances for controlling the convergence criteria are described below:

  • Maximum iterations between 1D/2D interface: Checking this checkbox allows the user to set the maximum iteration between 1D and 2D interface. The maximum iterations can be set from 1 to 20. By default, this checkbox is left unchecked. The user can select this checkbox when there is a stability problem at a 1D/2D hydraulic connection. It is recommended to set the number of 1D/2D iterations as low as possible to get a stable answer between a 1D and 2D connection that is having stability problems. By default, the software uses a value of 10. The number of 1D/2D iterations will cause the entire solution to be calculated multiple times for each time step to get the desired convergence. Note that increasing the maximum number of iterations could dramatically lengthen run time. It is suggested to start with a low value, such as 3 or 4. If the stability problem still exists with that number of iterations, increase the value until a stable solution is achieved.
  • Water surface calculation tolerance: This entry field allows the user to define the water surface tolerance. The water surface tolerance is used when an upstream 1D reach is connected to a downstream 2D flow area. In this situation, the 1D region is computed, then the 2D region. The assumed water surface elevation at the boundary is re-evaluated. The solution will iterate if the water surface has changed more than the water surface tolerance. When the water surface elevation at the boundary has changed less than the tolerance, the solution stops iterating and moves on to the next time step. By default, the software uses a value of 0.01.
  • Flow calculation tolerance: This entry field allows the user to define the flow tolerance percent. The flow tolerance percent is utilized for the following 1D/2D connections:
    1. Lateral structures
    2. SA/2D hydraulic connection (SA to 2D, or 2D to 2D)
    3. 2D flow area to 1D reach connection
    The default value for the flow tolerance percent is 0.1. If the Maximum iterations between 1D/2D interface checkbox was checked, then the flow between 1D/2D connections gets recomputed after each trial. Recomputation helps in checking if the flow has changed more than the user-defined flow tolerance percent. The solution iterates if the flow has changed more than the flow tolerance specified.
  • Minimum flow tolerance: This entry field allows the user to define the minimum flow tolerance. It is a companion tolerance to the flow calculation tolerance. This tolerance aims to prevent the software from iterating when the flow passed between a 1D and 2D element is very small and not significant to the solution. For example, there may be a connection from a 1D reach to a 2D flow area via a lateral structure in which the flow under certain conditions is very low. Hence, the actual change in the flow from one iteration to the next could be very small (but the percent error is very high). Such a small flow may not add significance to the solution, so iterating the entire solution to improve this small flow between the 1D and 2D elements is not recommended and may unnecessarily increase the computational time. It is recommended to set a minimum flow tolerance when turning on 1D/2D iterations. By default, the software uses a value of 1 cfs.

2D Flow Computational Options

This section allows the user to include the Coriolis effect with the momentum equation and use the VRT refinement grid for 2D model elements.

2D Flow Computational Options section

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Include Coriolis effects with Momentum Equation: Checking this checkbox causes the software to turn on the effects of the Earth’s rotation on the solution (Coriolis Effect). When this checkbox is checked, the user is required to enter the latitude of the center of the 2D flow area in degrees in the Coriolis Effect Latitude (-90 to 90) field provided in the 2D Flow Area Computational Parameters section. A latitude with a value greater than zero is considered in the northern hemisphere, and a value less than zero is considered in the southern hemisphere.
    Coriolis Effect Latitude option
  • Use VRT refinement grid for 2D model elements (i.e., bridge piers, conveyance obstructions, etc.): When dealing with larger 2D model areas whereby the use of a high-resolution elevation terrain surface is too large and will utilize too much memory, a multi-resolution elevation raster allows the selective application of additional detail where required. For example, when defining a building footprint or bridge support piers, the original elevation raster that the software uses in its 2D flow computations may be too coarse. This may cause the flow around the structure to appear jagged and not truly representative of actual conditions. Checking this checkbox directs the software to automatically create a higher resolution elevation raster in those areas of the 2D flow area model domain where necessary. The software will automatically recognize bridge piers, conveyance obstructions, flow training structures, and more and generate a VRT (Variable Resolution Terrain) elevation raster in those areas of interest.

2D Flow Area Computational Parameters

This section allows the user to set computational options and tolerances for the 2D computational module.

2D Flow Area Computational Parameters section

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Theta Implicit Weighting Factor (0.6 to 1): This entry field allows the user to define the implicit weighting factor used to weight spatial derivatives between the current solution timeline and the previously solved solution timeline. Theta of 1.0 (Default) uses only the currently solved timeline for the spatial derivatives. This provides for the most stable solution but possibly at the loss of some accuracy. Theta of 0.6 provides the most accurate solution of the equations but tends to be less stable. In general, it has been found that in the application of most real-world flood runoff types of events, Theta of 1.0 will give about the same answers as Theta of 0.6. However, this should be tested for each model due to site-specific geometry and flood propagation.
  • Warm Up Theta (0.6 to 1): This entry field allows the user to define the value of Theta that is used during the model warmup and ramp-up periods. By default, the software uses a value of 1.
  • Water Surface Calculation Tolerance (ft): This entry field allows the user to define the 2D water surface solution tolerance for the iteration scheme. If the solution of the equations gives a numerical answer with less numerical error than the set tolerance, then the solver is done with that time step. If the error is greater than the set tolerance, the solver will iterate to get a better answer. The solver will only iterate up to the maximum number of iterations set by the user. The default value is set to 0.01 ft.
  • Volume Tolerance (ft): This entry field allows the user to define the 2D water volume solution tolerance for the iteration scheme. The volume error is converted to feet (ft) by taking the currently solved water surface elevation into the elevation-volume curve for the cell, then calculating the change in water surface elevation based on the current volume error at that point on the curve. If the solution of the equations gives a numerical answer with less volume error than the set tolerance (in terms of ft), then the solver is done with that time step. If the maximum error is greater than the set tolerance, the software will iterate to get a better answer. The software will only iterate up to the maximum number of iterations set by the user. The default value is set to 0.01 ft.
  • Maximum Iterations: This field allows the user to set the maximum number of iterations that the solver will use while attempting to solve the equations (to get an answer with a numerical error less than the user-specified tolerance at all locations in the 2D computational mesh domain). The default value is set to 20. However, the user can provide any value between 0 and 40. It is not recommended to change the default value unless you are sure that changing the value will either improve the chances that the model will converge (i.e., increase the value) or speed up the computations without causing any significant errors.
  • Computational Equation: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select one of the four available 2D computational methods for computing the flow field in a 2D mesh: Diffusion Wave, SWE-Eulerian-Lagrangian Method, SWE-Eulerian Method, and SWE-Local Inertia Method. To learn more about these methods, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Initial Conditions Time (hrs): This entry field allows the user to ramp up the water surface from a dry condition to a wet condition within a 2D area (or from a flat water surface if an initial water surface elevation was entered). When external boundary conditions such as flow and stage hydrographs (or 1D reaches) are connected to a 2D area, the first value of the connected flow or stage may be too high. If the model were to start this way, such a high discontinuity could cause model instability. The user can specify a time (in hours) to run the computations for the 2D flow area while slowly transitioning the flow boundaries from zero to their initial value and the stage boundaries from a dry elevation up to their initial wet elevation. By default, the software uses a value of 1 hr. After defining the value for this entry field, the user must also specify a fraction of this time to ramp up the boundary conditions in the Initial Conditions Ramp-up Fraction (0 to 1) field.
  • Initial Condition Ramp-up Fraction (0 to 1): This entry field allows the user to enter the fraction of the initial conditions ramp up time used to ramp up the 2D flow area boundary conditions from zero or dry to their initial flow or stage. The user can enter a value between 0.0 and 1.0, representing the decimal fraction of the initial conditions ramp up time. By default, the software uses a value of 0.1. A value of 0.5 means that 50% of the initial conditions time will be used to ramp up the boundary conditions to their initial values. The remaining time will be used to hold the boundary conditions constant but allow the flow to propagate through the 2D flow area. Thus, it gives enough time to stabilize to a good initial condition throughout the 2D flow area.
  • Maximum Time Slices: This field allows the user to set a computational time step for a 2D area that is a fraction of the overall unsteady flow computation interval. For example, suppose the user has set the unsteady flow overall computation interval to 10 minutes. In that case, setting a value of 5 in this field (for a specific 2D area) means that the computation interval for that 2D area will be 1/5 of the overall computation interval, which for this example would be 2 minutes (10/5 = 2). Different values can be set for each 2D flow area. By default, the software uses a value of 1, which means that the 2D flow area is using the same computational time step as the overall unsteady flow solution.
  • Turbulence Model: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select from three available options to perform turbulence modeling. The following options are provided:
    1. None (default) – When this option is selected, no turbulence modeling will be performed.
    2. Conservative – When this option is selected, the software uses a conservative formulation that ensures little to no momentum loss when turbulence is turned on.
    3. Non-Conservative (original) – When this option is selected, the software uses a non-conservative formulation that has some numerical diffusion. However, it is very small when the cell size is small, and the time step is small.
    Note that certain options of this section get enabled or disabled based on the Computational Equation and the Turbulence Model selected by the user, as shown below.
    unknown node
  • Longitudinal Mixing Coefficient: This entry field allows the user to provide a value for the longitudinal mixing coefficient. This coefficient is utilized to compute the contribution of the eddy viscosity from the turbulence and dispersion in the longitudinal direction (i.e., the direction of flow). In practice, this coefficient can differ by several orders of magnitude, depending on the flow. By default, this entry is left blank (i.e., the coefficient value will not be used).
  • Transverse Mixing Coefficient: This entry field allows the user to provide a value for the traverse mixing coefficient. This coefficient is utilized to compute the contribution of the eddy viscosity from the turbulence and dispersion in the transverse direction (i.e., perpendicular to the flow direction). In practice, this coefficient can differ by several orders of magnitude, depending on the flow.
  • Smagorinsky Coefficient: This entry field allows the user to provide a value for Smagorinsky mixing coefficient. This coefficient component of the eddy viscosity represents the turbulence intensity produced by flow shear and assumes that the energy production and dissipation are equal at subgrid scales. The Smagorinsky Coefficient value is typically in the range of 0.05 to 0.2. However, it is best to calibrate this and other mixing parameters using spatially distributed current velocity measurements. By default, this entry is left blank (i.e., the coefficient value will not be used).
  • Boundary Condition Volume Check: Checking this checkbox causes the software to check 2D to 1D boundary connections to ensure there is enough water in a 2D cell over the time step to satisfy the computed flow exchange. If this checkbox is left unchecked, the computed flow exchange will be reduced for the first guess of the flow rate for that time step.
  • Coriolis Effect Latitude (–90 to 90): This entry field allows the user to enter the latitude of the center of the 2D flow area in degrees.
  • Solver Cores: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the number of CPU cores to use to solve the 2D flow area computations. By default, the software selects the All Available.
  • Matrix Solver: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select one of the following sparse matrix solvers:
    1. Pardiso (Direct) (default)
    2. SOR (Iterative)
    3. FGMRES-SOR (Iterative)
    Note that based on the type of Matrix Solver selected by the user, the following options will be enabled or disabled.
    unknown node
  • Convergence Tolerance
    This is an optional field. This entry field allows the user to specify the convergence tolerance for the iterative solver. The tolerance is compared to the root-mean-squared of the normalized residuals. If the value is left blank, the tolerance is set to 10 times the water surface tolerance. Decreasing the tolerance will increase the number of solver iterations and decrease the simulation speed and vice-versa. If the tolerance is too small, the iterative solver may take many iterations to reach the tolerance or never reach it at all. Conversely, the solution will have water volume errors if the tolerance is set too large. Therefore, the user must be careful when setting this parameter.
  • Minimum Iterations
    This is an optional field. The default value is None. This entry field allows the user to specify the minimum number of iterations. The iterative solver will continue to iterate even if the convergence criterion is satisfied until the minimum number of iterations. The minimum number of iterations avoids solution creep or divergence when the solution changes slowly or the convergence tolerance is set too high. The SOR solver generally requires fewer iterations than the FGMRES-SOR solver.
  • Maximum Iterations
    This is an optional field. The default value is None. This entry field allows the user to specify the maximum number of iterations. The maximum number of iterations keeps the iterative solver from iterating too many times past the point of diminishing returns. Generally, iterative solvers will reach a point at which the improvement in the solution for each iteration is relatively small, and the computational cost of each iteration does not outweigh the benefit of continuing to iterate. The SOR solver generally requires fewer iterations than the FGMRESSOR solver.
  • Restart Iterations
    This entry field allows the user to specify the restart iterations used in the FGMRES solver. The default value is 10. Because the amount of storage and computational work required by FGMRES increases with each iteration, the method is typically restarted. The group of iterations between successive restarts is referred to as a cycle. When a cycle has completed the results’, an approximate solution is used as an initial guess for a new cycle of iterations. Generally, the restart iterations are between 8 and 20.
  • Relaxation Coefficient
    This entry field allows the user to specify the relaxation coefficient for the SOR solver. The default value is 1.3. The optimal relaxation value of the relaxation coefficient is generally between 1.1 and 1.5. However, if the value is too large, the solver may diverge. Therefore, it is best to utilize a conservative value that will be relatively fast and not have divergence problems.
  • SOR Preconditioner Iterations
    The SOR method is used both as a solver and as a preconditioner for the FGMRES solver in HEC-RAS. When SOR is used as a preconditioner, the SOR method is applied for a fixed number of iterations, which is specified as the SOR Preconditioner Iterations. The default value is 10. This eliminates the need to specify separate convergence criteria for the auxiliary system of equations for which the SOR method is applied. It also eliminates the need to compute convergence parameters during the SOR iterations. The optimum number of iterations will be problem-specific. However, in general, more iterations will be necessary with a larger mesh.
Computational Options & Engine Analysis › Computational Theory

Computational Differences Between HEC‑RAS and HEC‑2

HEC‑RAS and HEC‑2 are both software programs that are used for computing water surface elevations for rivers, streams, and other open channel networks. While both software programs were developed by the Army Corps of Engineers, the two software programs are completely different. None of the computational routines in the HEC‑2 program were used in the HEC‑RAS software. When HEC‑RAS was being developed, a significant effort was spent improving the computational capabilities of the HEC‑2 program. Because of this, there are computational differences between the two programs.

ItsDifferent

This article describes all of the major areas in which computational differences can occur between the two software programs.

Cross Section Conveyance Calculations

Both HEC‑RAS and HEC‑2 utilize the standard step method for balancing the energy equation to compute a water surface for a cross section. A key element in the solution of the energy equation is the calculation of conveyance. The conveyance is used to determine friction losses between cross sections, the flow distribution at a cross section, and the velocity weighing coefficient alpha. The approach used in HEC‑2 is to calculate conveyance between every coordinate point in the cross section overbank (as show in the first figure). The conveyance is then summed to get the total left overbank and right overbank values. HEC‑2 does not subdivide the main channel for conveyance calculations. This method of computing overbank conveyance can lead to different amounts of total conveyance when additional points are added to the cross section, without actually changing the geometry.

The HEC‑RAS program supports this method for calculating conveyance, but the default method is to make conveyance calculations only at n‑value break points, as shown in below given figure.

Computation-Difference-FigureComputation-Difference-Figure-C-2.png

Testing Using HEC‑2 Conveyance Calculation Approach

Comparisons of HEC‑RAS results with those from HEC‑2 were performed using 97 data sets from the HEC profile accuracy study (HEC, 1986). Water surface profiles were computed for 10% and 1% chance floods using HEC‑2 and HEC‑RAS, both programs using the HEC‑2 approach for computing overbank conveyance. The below table shows the water surface difference in percentage, for approximately 2000 cross sections, within ±0.02 feet (±6 mm). For the 10% chance flood, 53 cross sections had differences greater than ±0.02 feet (±6 mm). For those cross sections, 62.2% were caused by differences in computation of critical depth and 34% resulted from propagation of the difference upstream. For the 1% chance flood, 88 cross sections had elevation differences over ±0.02 feet (6 mm), of which 60.2% resulted from critical depth and 36.4% from the upstream propagation of downstream differences. HEC‑RAS uses 0.01 feet (3 mm) for the critical depth error criterion, while HEC‑2 uses 2.5% of the depth of flow.

Table: Computed Water Surface Elevation Difference (HEC‑RAS and HEC‑2)

unknown node

Testing Using HEC‑RAS and HEC‑2 Approach

The two methods for computing conveyance will produce different answers whenever portions of the overbanks have ground sections with significant vertical slopes. In general, the HEC‑RAS default approach will provide a lower total conveyance for the same elevation and, therefore, a higher computed water surface elevation. In order to test the significance of the two ways of computing conveyance, comparisons were performed using the same 97 data sets. Water surface profiles were computed for the 1% chance event using the two methods for computing conveyance in HEC‑RAS. The results confirmed that the HEC‑RAS default approach will generally produce a higher computed water surface elevation. Out of the 2048 cross section locations, 47.5% had computed water surface elevations within 0.10 feet (30.5 mm), 71% within 0.20 feet (61 mm), 94.4% within 0.40 feet (122 mm), 99.4% within 1.0 feet (305 mm), and one cross section had a difference of 2.75 feet (0.84 m). Because the differences tend to be in the same direction, some effects can be attributed to propagation.

The results from these comparisons do not show which method is more accurate, they only show differences. In general, it is felt that the HEC‑RAS default method is more commensurate with the Manning equation and the concept of separate flow elements. The default method in HEC‑RAS is also more consistent, in that the computed conveyance is based on the geometry, and not on how many points are used in the cross section. Further research, with observed water surface profiles, will be needed to make any final conclusions about the accuracy of the two methods.

Critical Depth Calculations

During the water surface profile calculations, each of the two programs may need to calculate critical depth at a cross section if any of the following conditions occur:

  1. The supercritical flow regime has been specified by the user.
  2. The calculation of critical depth has been requested by the user.
  3. The current cross section is an external boundary cross section and critical depth must be determined to ensure the user defined a boundary condition that is in the correct flow regime.
  4. The Froude number check for a subcritical profile indicates that critical depth needs to be determined to verify the flow regime of the computed water surface elevation.
  5. The program could not balance the energy equation within the specified tolerance before reaching the maximum number of iterations.

The HEC‑RAS program has two methods for calculating critical depth:

  • Parabolic method
  • Secant method

The HEC‑2 program has one method computing critical depth, which is very similar to the HEC‑RAS parabolic method. The parabolic method is computationally faster, but it is only able to locate a single minimum energy. For most cross sections there will only be one minimum on the total energy curve; therefore, the parabolic method has been set as the default method for HEC‑RAS (the default method can be changed from the user interface). If the parabolic method is tried and it does not converge, then the HEC‑RAS program will automatically try the secant method. The HEC‑RAS version of the parabolic method calculates critical depth to a numerical accuracy of 0.01 feet, while HEC‑2's version of the parabolic method calculates critical depth to a numerical accuracy of 2.5 percent of the flow depth. This, in its self, can lead to small differences in the calculation of critical depth between the two programs.

In certain situations it is possible to have more than one minimum on the total energy curve. Multiple minimums are often associated with cross sections that have breaks in the total energy curve. These breaks can occur due to very wide and flat overbanks, as well as cross sections with levees and ineffective flow areas. When the parabolic method is used on a cross section that has multiple minimums on the total energy curve, the method will converge on the first minimum that it locates. This approach can lead to incorrect estimates of critical depth in that the returned value for critical depth may be the top of a levee or an ineffective flow elevation. When this occurs in the HEC‑RAS program, the software automatically switches to the secant method. The HEC‑RAS secant method is capable of finding up to three minimums on the energy versus depth curve. Whenever more than one minimum energy is found, the program selects the lowest valid minimum energy (a minimum energy at the top of a levee or ineffective flow elevation is not considered a valid critical depth solution).

Given that HEC‑RAS has the capability to find multiple critical depths, and detect possible invalid answers, the final critical depth solutions between HEC‑2 and HEC‑RAS could be quite different. In general the critical depth answer from the HEC‑RAS program will always be more accurate than HEC‑2.

Bridge Hydraulic Computations

A vast amount of effort has been spent on the development of the new bridge routines used in the HEC‑RAS software. The bridge routines in HEC‑RAS allow the modeler to analyze a bridge by several different methods with the same bridge geometry. The model utilizes four user-defined cross sections in the computations of energy losses due to the structure. Cross sections are automatically formulated inside the bridge on an as needed basis by combining the bridge geometry with the two cross sections that bound the structure.

The HEC‑2 program requires the user to use one of two possible methods, the special bridge routine or the normal bridge routine. The data requirements for the two methods are different, and therefore the user must decide prior to defining the model on which method to use.

Differences between the HEC‑2 and HEC‑RAS bridge routines are addressed below.

HEC‑2 Special Bridge Methodology

The largest computational differences will be found when comparing the HEC‑2 special bridge routine results to the equivalent HEC‑RAS bridge results. The following list details these differences:

  1. The HEC‑2 special bridge routine use a trapezoidal approximation for low flow calculations (Yarnell equation and class B flow check with the momentum equation). The HEC‑RAS program uses the actual bridge opening geometry for all of the low flow methodologies.
  1. Also for low flow, the HEC‑2 program uses a single pier (of equivalent width to the sum total width of all piers) placed in the middle of the trapezoid. In the HEC‑RAS software, all of the piers are defined separately and the hydraulic computations are performed by evaluating the water surface and impact on each pier individually. While this is more data for the user to enter, the results are much more physically based.
  1. For pressure flow calculations, HEC‑2 requires the net flow area of the bridge opening. The HEC‑RAS software calculates the area of the bridge opening from the bridge and cross section geometry. Because of the potential error involved in calculating the bridge opening area by hand, differences between the programs may occur for pressure flow calculations.
  1. The HEC‑RAS software has two equations that can be used for computing pressure flow. The first equation is for a fully submerged condition (i.e. when both the upstream side and downstream side of the bridge is submerged). The fully submerged equation is also used in HEC‑2. A second equation is available in HEC‑RAS, which is automatically applied when only the upstream side of the bridge is submerged. This equation computes pressure flow as if the bridge opening were acting as a sluice gate. The HEC‑2 program only has the fully submerged pressure flow equation. Therefore, when only the upstream side of the bridge is submerged, the two programs will compute different answers for pressure flow because they will be using different equations.
  1. When using the HEC‑2 special bridge routine, it is not possible for the user to specify bridge low chord geometry data in the bridge table (BT data). The bridge table information is only used for weir flow computations in HEC‑2. When HEC‑2 special bridge data is imported into HEC‑RAS, the user must define the low chord geometry information in order to define the bridge opening. This is due to the fact that the trapezoidal approximation used in HEC‑2 is not used in HEC‑RAS, and therefore the bridge opening geometry must be re-entered.
  1. When entering bridge table (BT records) geometry information in the HEC‑2 special bridge method, the user had to enter stations that followed along the ground in the left overbank, then across the bridge deck/road embankment; and then along the ground of the right overbank. This was necessary in order for the left and right overbank area to be used in the weir flow calculations. In HEC‑RAS this is not necessary. The bridge deck/roadway information only needs to reflect the additional blocked out area that is not part of the ground. HEC‑RAS will automatically merge the ground geometry information and the high chord geometry data of the bridge deck/roadway.

HEC‑2 Normal Bridge Methodology

In general importing HEC‑2 normal bridge data into HEC‑RAS should not cause any problems. The HEC‑RAS program automatically selects the appropriate energy‑based method for low flow and high flow conditions, which is equivalent to the HEC‑2 normal bridge method. The following list details possible differences that may occur:

  1. In HEC‑2 the bridge pier information is either entered as part of the bridge table (BT data) geometry or the ground geometry information (GR data). If the user stays with the energy based methods in HEC‑RAS, the computational results should be about the same. If the user wishes to use either the Momentum or Yarnell methods for low flow, they must first delete the pier geometry information from the BT or GR data, and then re‑enter the pier information in HEC‑RAS. If this is not done, HEC‑RAS will not know about the pier information, and will therefore incorrectly calculate the losses with either the Momentum or Yarnell methods.
  1. The HEC‑2 Normal bridge method utilizes six cross sections. HEC‑RAS uses only four cross sections in the vicinity of the bridge. The two cross sections inside the bridge are automatically formulated from the cross sections outside the bridge and the bridge geometry. In general, it is common for HEC‑2 modelers to repeat cross sections through the bridge opening (i.e., the cross sections used inside the bridge were a repeat of the downstream section). If however, the HEC‑2 modelers entered completely different cross sections inside the bridge than outside, the HEC‑RAS software will add two additional cross sections just outside of the bridge, in order to get the correct geometry inside of the bridge. This gives the HEC‑RAS data set two more cross‑sections than the original HEC‑2 data set. The two cross sections are placed at zero distance from the bridge, but could still cause some additional losses due to contraction and expansion of flow. The user may want to make some adjustments to the data when this happens.
  1. In HEC‑2 the stationing of the bridge table (BT Records) had to match stations on the ground (GR Records) data. This is not required in HEC‑RAS. The stationing of the data that makes up a bridge geometry (ground, deck/roadway, piers, and abutments) does not have to match in anyway; HEC‑RAS will interpolate any points that it needs.

Culvert Hydraulic Computations

The culvert routines in HEC‑RAS and HEC‑2 were adapted from the Federal Highway Administrations Hydraulic Design of Highway Culverts publication, HDS No. 5 (FHWA, 1985). The following is a list of the differences between the two programs.

  1. HEC‑2 can only perform culvert calculations for box and circular culvert shapes. HEC‑RAS can handle the following shapes: box; circular pipe; semi‑circle; arch; pipe arch, vertical ellipse; horizontal ellipse; low profile arch; high profile arch; and ConSpan.
  1. HEC‑RAS also has the ability to mix the culvert shapes, sizes, and all other parameters at any single culvert crossing. In HEC‑2 the user is limited to the same shape and size barrels.
  1. HEC‑RAS has the ability to use two roughness coefficients inside the culvert barrel (one for the top and sides, and one for the bottom). This allows for better modeling of culverts that have a natural bottom, or culverts that were designed for fish passage.
  1. HEC‑RAS allows the user to fill in a portion of a culvert. This allows users to model culverts that are buried.

Floodway Encroachment Calculations

The floodway encroachment capabilities in HEC‑RAS were adapted from those found in HEC‑2. For the most part, encroachment methods 1‑3 in HEC‑RAS are the same as methods 1‑3 in HEC‑2. The following is a list of the differences between the two programs.

  1. HEC‑RAS has an additional capability of allowing the user to specify a left and right encroachment offset. While in general the encroachments can go all the way up to the main channel bank stations, the offset establishes an additional buffer zone around the main channel bank stations for limiting the encroachments. The offset is applicable to methods 2‑5 in HEC‑RAS.
  1. The logic of method 4 in HEC‑RAS is the same as method 4 in HEC‑2. The only difference is that the HEC‑RAS method 4 will locate the final encroachment to an accuracy of 0.01 feet, while the HEC‑2 method 4 uses a parabolic interpolation method between the existing cross section points. Since conveyance is non‑linear with respect to the horizontal stationing, the interpolation in HEC‑2 may not always find the encroachment station as accurately as HEC‑RAS.
  1. Method 5 in HEC‑RAS is a combination of HEC‑2's methods 5 and 6. The HEC‑RAS method 5 can be used to optimize for a change in water surface (HEC‑2 method 5); a change in energy (HEC‑2 method 6); or both parameters at the same time.
  1. At bridges and culverts, the default in HEC‑RAS is to perform the encroachment, while in HEC‑2 the default was not to perform the encroachment. Both programs have the ability to turn encroachments at bridges and culverts on or off.
  1. At bridges where the energy-based modeling approach is being used (similar to HEC‑2's normal bridge method), HEC‑RAS will calculate the encroachment for each of the cross sections through the bridge individually. HEC‑2 will take the encroachments calculated at the downstream side of the bridge and fix those encroachment stations the whole way through the bridge.
  1. In HEC‑2, if the user specifies a fixed set of encroachments on the X3 record, this would override anything on the ET record. In HEC‑RAS, when the data is imported the X3 record, encroachments are converted into blocked obstructions. Therefore any additional encroachment information found on the ET record will be used in addition to the blocked obstructions.

New Computational Features in HEC‑RAS

  1. HEC‑RAS can perform subcritical, supercritical, or mixed flow regime calculations all in a single execution of the program. The cross section order does not have to be reversed (as in HEC‑2), the user simply selects the computational flow regime. When in a mixed flow regime mode, HEC‑RAS will also locate hydraulic jumps.
  1. HEC‑RAS has the ability to perform multiple bridge and/or culvert openings at the same roadway crossing.
  1. At bridges, the user has the ability to use a momentum‑based solution for class A, B, and C low flow. In HEC‑2 the momentum equation was used for class B and C flow, and requires the trapezoidal approximation. The HEC‑RAS momentum solution also takes into account friction and weight forces that HEC‑2 does not.
  1. HEC‑RAS can model single reaches, dendritic stream systems, or fully looped network systems. HEC‑2 can only do single reaches and a limited number of tributaries (up two three stream orders).
  1. At stream junctions, HEC‑RAS has the ability to perform the calculations with either an energy‑based method or a momentum-based method. HEC‑2 only has the energy-based method.
  1. HEC‑RAS has the following new cross section properties not found in HEC‑2: blocked ineffective flow areas; normal ineffective flow areas can be located at any station (in HEC‑2 they are limited to the main channel bank stations); blocked obstructions; and specification of levees.
  1. In HEC‑RAS the user can enter up to 500 points in a cross section. HEC‑2 has a limit of 100.
  1. HEC‑RAS has the ability to perform geometric cross section interpolation. HEC‑2 interpolation is based on a ratio of the current cross section and a linear elevation adjustment.
  1. HEC‑RAS has an improved flow distribution calculation routine. The new routine can subdivide the main channel as well as the overbanks, and the user has control over how many subdivisions are used. The HEC‑2 flow distribution option is limited to the overbank areas and breaks at existing coordinate points.
Computational Options & Engine Analysis › Computational Theory

Flow Distribution Calculations with HEC-RAS

The general cross section output shows the distribution of flow in three subdivisions of the cross section: left overbank, main channel, and the right overbank.

Cross Section Output dialog box

Additional output showing the distribution of flow for multiple subdivisions of the left and right overbanks as well as the main channel can be requested for either steady flow or unsteady flow analysis. Select the Flow Distribution Locations command from the Analysis ribbon menu.

Flow Distribution Locations ribbon menu command


Selecting this ribbon menu command will display the Flow Distribution Locations dialog box.

Flow Distribution Locations dialog box

By default, there is no flow distribution selected. However, the user can either define a flow distribution globally or at specific cross section locations.

Next, the number of flow slices for the flow distribution computations must be defined for the left overbank, main channel, and the right overbank. Up to 45 total flow slices can be defined. Each flow element (i.e., left overbank, main channel, and right overbank) must have at least one flow slice. The user can change the number of slices used at each of the cross sections.

During the HEC‑RAS steady flow or unsteady flow computations, at each cross section where flow distribution is requested, the HEC‑RAS program will calculate the following for each flow slice:

  • Flow (discharge)
  • Flow area
  • Wetted perimeter
  • Percentage of conveyance
  • Hydraulic depth (flow area / top width)
  • Average velocity

The computations for the flow distribution are performed after the program has computed a water surface elevation and energy gradeline by the normal methodology. The flow distribution computations are performed as follows:

  1. First, the water surface is computed in the normal manner using the three flow subdivisions (left overbank, main channel, and right overbank), and balancing the energy equation.
  2. Once a water surface elevation has been computed, the program slices the cross section into the user defined flow distribution slices, and then computes an area, wetted perimeter, and hydraulic depth for each flow slice.
  3. Using the originally computed energy slope (Sf), the cross section Manning’s n values, the computed area, and wetted perimeter for each flow slice, and Manning’s equation, the program computes the conveyance and percentage of discharge for each of the flow slices.
  4. The program sums up the computed conveyance for each of the flow slices. In general, the slice computed conveyance will not be the same as the originally computed conveyance (from the traditional method for computing conveyance subdivision). Normally, as a cross section is subdivided further and further, the computed conveyance for a given water surface elevation will increase.
  5. In order to correct for the difference in computed conveyances, the program computes a ratio of the original total conveyance (from the normal calculations) divided by the total flow slice conveyance. This ratio is then applied to each of the flow slices in order to achieve the same conveyance as was originally computed.
  6. The final step is to compute an average velocity for each slice. The average velocity is computed by taking the discharge and dividing by the flow area for each of the flow slices.

Flow Distribution Output Table

To display the flow distribution output table for a cross section, select Detailed Output command from the Results ribbon menu.

Detailed Output ribbon menu command


The Cross Section Output dialog box will be displayed. From this dialog box, select Flow Distribution in Cross Sections from the Type menu.

Flow Distribution in Cross Sections option of Type menu

The dialog box will change to display the flow distribution output table, as shown below.

Flow Distribution Output dialog box

Flow Distribution Cross Section Plot

To display the flow distribution on the cross section plot, select the Plot Cross Sections command from the Cross Sections menu item of the Results ribbon menu.

Plot Cross Sections ribbon menu command

The Cross Section dialog box will be displayed. From this dialog box, select Velocity Distribution from the Options menu.

Velocity Distribution option of Options menu

The Velocity Distribution Options dialog box will be displayed. Check the Plot Velocity Distribution checkbox option and then click the [OK] button.

Velocity Distribution Options dialog box

The velocity distribution will then be plotted on the cross section plot.

Velocity distribution plot in Cross Section dialog box

By clicking on a specific velocity segment on the cross section plot, the software will report the velocity at the selected location.

Displaying velocity at a selected location

Flow Distribution Computation Concerns

In general, the results of the flow distribution computations should be used cautiously. Specifically, the velocities and percentages of discharge are based on the results of a one‑dimensional hydraulic model. A true velocity and flow distribution varies vertically as well as horizontally. To achieve such detail, the user would need to use a three‑dimensional hydraulic model or go out and measure the flow distribution in the field. While the results for the flow distribution provided by HEC‑RAS are better than the standard three subdivisions (left overbank, main channel, and right overbank), the values are still based on average estimates of the one dimensional results. Also, the results obtained from the flow distribution option can vary with the number of slices used for the computations. In general, it is better to use as few slices as possible.

Computational Options & Engine Analysis › Computational Theory

Modified Puls Routing

For unsteady flow models, the HEC‑RAS Modified Puls Routing option can be used to define portions of a river reach that should be routed with the Modified Puls hydrologic routing method instead of the full St. Venant unsteady flow routing method. This option is very useful when encountering portions of the model that are very steep and the full unsteady flow routing method is either unstable or not feasible to use at all. This option only works as part of an unsteady flow analysis and is ignored when performing a steady flow analysis.

Modified Puls Routing Dialog Box

To display the Modified Puls Routing dialog box, select the Modified Puls Routing command from the Other Data dropdown menu of the Input ribbon menu.

Modified Puls Routing dialog box

To use the Modified Puls hydrologic routing option, the user must first create a steady flow model with the exact same geometry data. The purpose of the steady flow model is to compute a range of water surface profiles from very low to the highest expected flow rate. The results from the steady flow model are then used within the hydrologic routing reaches in order to provide the necessary discharge-volume data required by the Modified Puls hydrologic routing method.

Hydrologic routing reaches can be created almost anywhere in the model. A hydrologic routing reach must be at least two cross sections long. A hydrologic routing reach can be an upstream portion, downstream portion, or an intermediate portion of any existing HEC‑RAS unsteady flow river reach. The hydrologic routing reach can also encompass an entire HEC‑RAS river reach. Hydrologic routing reaches can contain roadway crossings (i.e., bridges and culverts) and lateral structures. However, it cannot contain an inline structure. If an inline structure is contained within a routing reach that is to be routed with the Modified Puls hydrologic routing method, then the hydrologic routing reach must stop at least two cross sections upstream of the inline structure. The hydrologic routing reach can then start immediately downstream of the inline structure.

The following data are defined in this dialog box.

Define Hydrologic Routing Regions

This data table is used to define the starting and ending cross sections where the Modified Puls hydrologic routing method should be applied. The following columns are used to define this data.

  • River and Reach
    These two columns provide dropdown combo boxes that allow the user to select the river and the corresponding reach for defining the hydrologic routing reach segment. If the user has not selected a river from the dropdown combo box, the reach dropdown combo box does not list anything. Once the user selects a river from the dropdown combo box, the reach dropdown combo box automatically populates with the reaches that are associated with the selected river.
  • Upstream Cross Section
    This column provides a dropdown combo box listing all cross section river stations contained within a river reach, except for the downstream most cross section. It does not list river stations corresponding to roadway crossings, inline structures, or lateral structures. Once a river and reach have been selected, this dropdown combo box shows by default the upstream most cross section river station.
  • Downstream Cross Section
    This column provides a dropdown combo box listing all cross section river stations contained within a river reach, except for the upstream most cross section. It does not list river stations corresponding to roadway crossings, inline structures, or lateral structures. Once a river and reach have been selected, this dropdown combo box shows by default the second upstream most cross section river station.
  • Rating Curves Imported
    This read-only column lists the number of entries imported from the selected HEC‑RAS steady flow scenario results. This column is blank until the user elects to import the HEC‑RAS steady flow scenario results.

Options

This section defines the options to be used in the Modified Puls routing.

  • Use Modified Puls routing in unsteady flow analysis
    This checkbox is selected (i.e., checked) by default, and controls whether the Modified Puls routing method should be used in the defined hydrologic routing reaches. Unchecking this option will prevent the Modified Puls routing method from being used in the unsteady flow analysis.
  • Perform tailwater check
    This checkbox is not selected (i.e., unchecked) by default, and controls whether the Modified Puls routing method should look for downstream tailwater elevation issues, creating backwater to upstream affected cross sections.

Import Rating Curves from Steady Flow Analysis Results

This section controls the importing of computed HEC‑RAS results (i.e., discharge vs. water surface elevation) for defining the hydrologic routing rating curve data.

  • Steady flow scenario (plan)
    This dropdown combo box lists only steady flow scenarios (plans). The user can select from the combo box the HEC‑RAS steady flow model scenario (plan) to be used in the Modified Puls routing.
  • Number of profiles
    This read-only field lists the number of profiles defined in the output file (or Steady Flow Data dialog box) for the selected HEC‑RAS steady flow model scenario (plan). This field is automatically updated once the user has selected the steady flow scenario.

Clicking the [Import] button causes the software to read in the computed discharge vs. water surface elevation data. This data is then stored as individual rating curve information at each cross section.

Note that the imported rating curve data for the Modified Puls routing is independent of the rating curve data defined in the Cross Section Data dialog box.

Computational Options & Engine Analysis › Dam Break Analysis

Dam Break Analysis

Dams have produced many benefits for our society, but floods caused by failed dams have also led to some of the most devastating disasters in the past two centuries. A dam break may result in flood waves as deep as tens of meters traveling along a valley at high speeds. The impact of such a wave on developed areas can be very devastating. Regardless of the reason, almost all failures begin with a breach formation. A breach is generally defined as the opening formed in the dam body that causes the dam to fail.

Failure Dam

The types of dams that are commonly built and found are:

  • Earthen embankment/rockfill
  • Concrete arch and multi-arch
  • Concrete gravity
  • Buttress (combination of concrete gravity and arch dam)
  • Steel, timber, and composite materials

Dam break analysis simulates the movement of a dam break flood wave along a valley or any area downstream that would flood due to dam failure. Historically, all types of dams have experienced failures due to one or more types of events. However, most dam failures have occurred in earthen dams caused by some flood levels.

Many mechanisms can be the driving force of a dam failure. Given the different mechanisms that cause dam failures, there can be several possible ways a dam may fail for a given driving force/mechanism. The below table shows a list of dam types versus possible modes of failure.

unknown node

Modeling Dam Structure

GeoHECRAS can be used to model both overtopping and piping failure breaches for earthen dams. Additionally, the more instantaneous type of failures of concrete dams can also be modeled. The resulting flood wave is routed downstream using the unsteady flow equations. Inundation mapping of the resulting flood can be done in the Map View of the software when GIS data (terrain data) are available.

For two-dimensional (2D) HEC-RAS models, a dam can be represented as a SA/2D Connection. This allows the user to enter the breach data they determined when estimating breach parameters. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to draw SA/2D Connections.

Similarly, for 1D HEC-RAS models, a dam can be represented as an Inline Structure. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to draw inline structures.

Each of the above dam representations allow the user to put in an embankment, define overflow spillways and weirs, gated openings (radial and sluice gates), culverts, rating curves, and time series of flow releases. Gated openings can be controlled with a time series of gate openings or using the elevation gate operation feature.

The lake area upstream of the dam can either be modeled with cross sections, a storage area, or a 2D flow area.

lake area upstream of the dam

If cross sections are used, the software will perform full unsteady flow routing through the reservoir pool and downstream of the dam. If a storage area is used, the software uses level pool routing through the lake, then unsteady flow routing downstream of the dam. If a 2D flow area is used, then full 2D modeling can be used within the reservoir pool and downstream of the dam.

When using a storage area to represent a reservoir pool, the software requires two cross sections inside the reservoir pool, then an inline structure to represent the dam, and finally downstream cross sections.

storage area to represent a reservoir pool

The routing reach is hydraulically connected to the reservoir (storage area) with the first (most upstream) cross section. This cross section’s water surface is forced to the elevation of the water surface in the storage area during the unsteady flow routing. The second cross section in the pool area is required as a bounding cross section for the inline structure (the dam).

An example of modeling a dam using an inline structure is shown below. The embankment is shown as the gray-filled-in area above the ground. The overflow spillway is the rectangular notch on the upper left-hand side of the embankment.

Inline Structure Data dialog box

Entering Dam Breach Data

To quantify the incremental effects of a dam break, the dam breach parameters are entered to simulate the dam break and analyze the sensitivities. Breach parameters describe the nature of a dam breach. For example, these parameters include the average breach width, the breach side slope, the breach height, breach progression (e.g., linear or non-linear i.e., sinusoidal), and the breach formation time.

Breach data is entered in the Dam Breach data panel of the Inline Structure Data dialog box.

Dam Breach data panel

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to enter dam breach data for performing dam break analysis.

Breach Growth Shape

In GeoHECRAS, the shape and progression of the breach depend on the data entered by the user. The breach formation shape depends on the breach's final bottom width, the height of the structure, and the breach formation time.

The following sections provide the generalized description of the breach progression for overtopping and piping failure.

Overtopping Dam Failure

For overtopping dam failure mode, consider a breach with the following parameters:

  • Breach final bottom width is 400 feet.
  • Breach final bottom elevation is 100 feet (top of weir is 200 feet—full breach is 100 feet deep).
  • Breach formation time is 4 hours.

The breach has to grow 400 feet wide in 4 hours. So, the growth rate is 100 feet/hour. This growth rate is used for both the horizontal and vertical growth rates.

In the case of linear breach progression, the breach will start as a tiny trapezoid (or rectangle if side slopes are zero) at the top of the weir based on the center station. The trapezoid will grow such that after one hour, the breach will have just reached the final bottom elevation (100 feet deep), and the breach will be 100 feet wide (at the bottom). Over the next three hours, the breach will grow horizontally from 100 feet wide to the final width of 400 feet at the bottom. The side slopes of the trapezoid always remain the same. In the less common situation where the breach is deeper than it is wide, the growth rate is based on the vertical depth divided by the formation time. The maximum width would be reached before the maximum depth.

The user has the option to specify a vertical/horizontal growth rate. By default, the software uses a value of 1.0. However, if the user feels the vertical growth rate should be slower or faster than the horizontal growth rate, they can enter a different vertical to horizontal growth rate ratio. For example, a value of 0.5 would produce a vertical growth rate that is half the speed of the horizontal growth rate.

If the breach progression is non-linear, the horizontal growth will be adjusted as needed. Progression in the vertical direction will match the horizontal growth.

Piping Dam Failure

For piping dam failure mode, consider the same scenario mentioned for overtopping failure with the same growth and an initial elevation of 120 feet.

In the case of linear breach progression, the breach will start as a tiny square (or rectangle) based on the center station and initial piping elevation. The sides of the square will grow at the rate of 100 feet/hour. The vertical growth is split between up and down. After 6 minutes, the square will be 10 feet on a side. The top of the square would be at an elevation of 125 feet and the bottom at an elevation of 115 feet. Once the bottom of the square reaches the final bottom elevation, all of the growth is applied upward. When the elevation of the top of the square is higher than the water surface elevation in the breach, it is assumed the breach will cave in. The breach will now be an open rectangle with the current bottom elevation and current bottom width (the rectangle extending vertically to the top of the weir). If the breach has not yet reached the final bottom elevation, it will grow downward at the full vertical growth rate. The bottom of the breach will continue to grow horizontally at the same rate (or adjusted rate for non-linear).

If the side slopes are not zero (vertical), then the side slopes of the rectangle/trapezoid will progress from vertical to the maximum side slope, linearly over the remaining time (or adjusted for non-linear progression based on user selection). So, if the side slope is 3 and the piping breach becomes an open breach after one hour, then the side slope would be 1 at the end of the second hour, 2 at the end of the third hour, and 3 at the end of the fourth hour. If the water surface remains high enough, then the piping breach will not turn into an open breach until the top of the piping breach reaches the top of the weir. It will then grow to the final trapezoidal shape as in the case of overtopping failure mode.

If the breach progression is non-linear, the piping breach would be a rectangle that grows vertically at 25 feet/hour.

Estimating Dam Breach Parameters

Estimating a dam breach location, dimensions, and development time are crucial in assessing potential risk due to dam break. Although breach parameters are specific to each dam, dam safety professionals use several standard methods to estimate breach parameters. Breach parameters will directly affect the estimate of the peak flow coming out of the dam and any possible warning time available to downstream locations. Unfortunately, the breach location, size, and formation time are often the most uncertain pieces of information in a dam failure analysis.

Dam safety professionals estimate breach parameters for earthen dams and concrete dams. For embankment dams, there are several equations that you can use to estimate the various parameters. However, the most common ones are listed below:

  • Froehlich (1995b)
  • Froehlich (2008)
  • Von Thun and Gillette (1990)
  • MacDonald and Langridge-Monopolish (1984)
  • United States Bureau of Reclamation (1988)

In contrast, dam safety professionals estimate breach parameters for concrete dams based on the dam's construction rather than equations. There are several types of concrete dams. Some of these include gravity dams, arch dams, multi-arch dams, and buttress dams. A gravity dam can also be combined with an arch dam to create what is known as a gravity-arch dam.

The below table shows a range of appropriate breach parameters for various types of concrete dams.

unknown node

Additionally, site-specific information and structural and geotechnical analyses should be used to refine and support the estimates of the breach parameters for each failure scenario/hydrologic event.

In any dam safety study, it is important to consider a range of parameter estimates for the breach size and development time for each failure scenario/event. After that, sensitivity analyses of the breach parameters should be performed to identify their effect on the outflow hydrograph, downstream stages and flows, and warning time to any population at risk.

Output for Dam Break Analysis

Several plots and tables are available for evaluating the results of a dam break analysis, including cross section, profile, and 3-dimensional plots. These plots can be animated on a time step by time step basis to visualize the propagation of the flood wave.

An example of a cross section plot of a dam breach is shown below. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to view cross section plot.

Cross Section Plot

The corresponding water surface profile for the same instance is shown below. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to view water surface profile plots.

Profile Plot

The user can also view hydrographs at any location at which hydrograph output is required. These hydrographs represent the flow leaving the dam and subsequent locations downstream as the flood wave moved through the river system. The below image shows a series of hydrographs from the breach shown in the previous images.

stage and flow hydrographs

Refer to this article in our knowledge to learn how to view the stage and flow hydrographs.

Computational Options & Engine Analysis › Dam Break Analysis

Viewing Breach Time Series Plots

The GeoHECRAS software can generate breach time series plots of the HEC‑RAS unsteady flow computational results for various structure types such as Inline structures, lateral structures, and SA/2D Area Connections. In addition, the time series plots can be copied to the Windows clipboard.

Displaying Breach Time Series Plots

If the user has performed an unsteady flow analysis, then breach time series plots will be available for viewing key information about the breach.

To view a breach time series plot, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, select the Breach Time Series Plots command.

    Breach Time Series Plots command Results ribbon menu
  2. The Breach Hydrograph dialog box will be displayed.

    Breach Hydrograph dialog box

Selecting River Reach

For an HEC‑RAS model with multiple river reaches, the user can select one or more river reaches to plot. The River and Reach dropdown combo boxes display a listing of the river and corresponding reaches contained within the model.

River and Reach dropdown combo boxes

Selecting River Station

The River Station (River Sta.) dropdown combo box displays a listing of all the river stations contained within the selected reach. The user can select the river station to plot the hydrograph. To move to the next downstream or upstream river station, click the [↓] and [↑] buttons.

River Station (River Sta.) dropdown combo box

Selecting Structure Type

The Type menu of the Breach Hydrograph dialog box allows the user to select the specific structure type to view breaching information. This menu item includes the following structure types:

  • Inline Structures
  • Lateral Structures
  • SA/2D Area Connections
Type menu options

Once a Breach Hydrograph Type is selected, the software will only load that type of structure, and the ones that have breach information. By default, the plot comes up with a type of inline structure selected.

Breach Hydrograph Plot Options

The Breach Hydrograph dialog box provides several options for changing the viewpoint of the stage and flow hydrographs. The Plot Stage and Plot Flow checkboxes allow the user to plot the stage and flow hydrographs, respectively. The user can check both checkboxes to plot both hydrographs simultaneously.

Plot Stage and Plot Flow checkboxes

In the Breach Hydrograph plot, the software displays three simultaneous plots and a table within the same window. By default, the plot will come up with a summary table at the top, then three plots as given below:

  • Stage and flow hydrographs for the structure
  • Breach bottom width vs. time
  • Average velocity vs. time through the breach

The summary table of the dialog box provides statistics about the hydrograph plots in a tabular format. The table’s Maximum, Time at Max, and Volume ac-ft columns show the peak of total flow, breach flow, and headwater elevation, as well as the time of peak and volume, respectively.

In addition, there is a Table tab just right of the breach hydrograph plot. When the Table tab is selected, a detailed table will appear on the left half of the window, while the plot appears on the right side. This table contains all of the time series data being shown in the plots. Note that the user can adjust the size of both the table and plots.

Table tab

If the user left-clicks or hovers the mouse over the graphic plot, a series of "Bobbers" along with values will appear on top of each line. This feature is useful for obtaining the magnitude of each piece of data at the same point in time.

Bobbers along with values

Graphical Plot Options

The Options menu of the Breach Hydrograph dialog box provides two options for viewing the graphic plots: Plans and Number of Decimal Places.

Options menu

Viewing Multiple Scenario Plots

The Plans option allows the user to select multiple scenarios to plot. Selecting this option will display the Plan Selection dialog box, which allows the user to select multiple scenarios for comparison.

Plans option - Plan Selection dialog box

Number of Decimal Places

The Number of Decimal Places option allows the user to define the number of decimal places for the numerical values shown on the plot and in the tables. Selecting this option will display the RAS dialog box, which allows the user to enter a value (between 0 and 9) that specifies the number of decimal places.

Number of Decimal Places option-RAS dialog box

In addition, the right-click context menu of the graphic plot will display various options as shown below.

Right-click context menu commands

Zoom In

This option allows the user to zoom in on a portion of the graphic plot.

Zoom Previous

This option allows the user to revert to a previous level of zoom on the graphic plot.

Zoom Out

This option causes the software to double the size of the currently zoomed-in graphic plot.

Full Plot

This option causes the software to re-display the graphic plot at its original size.

Pan

This option allows the user to move the graphic plot around. After selecting the Pan option, the user can press and hold the mouse button over the graphic plot, and then move the graphic plot in the desired direction.

Point Bobber

This option allows the user to enable or disable the point bobbers on the graphic plot.

Sending Graphics to Clipboard

The Copy Vector Plot to Clipboard and Copy Bitmap Plot to Clipboard options allow the user to send the graphic plot to the Windows clipboard. Moving a graphic to the clipboard allows that graphic to then be pasted into another piece of software (i.e., a word processor or another graphics program).

Tabulating Charts

The Tabulate This Chart option causes the software to display a selected chart (Elevation vs. time, Breach bottom width vs. time, or Average velocity vs. time) one at a time on the graphic plot in a table.

Tabulate This Chart option

The Tabulate All Similar Charts option causes the software to display all similar charts on the graphic plot in a single table.

Tabulate All Similar Charts option

Lines and Symbols

This option allows the user to customize the line types, line colors, line widths, symbol types, symbol sizes, symbol colors, fill patterns, and line labels.

Lines and Symbols Editor

Font Sizes and Styles

This option allows the user to control the size of axis labels and title text displayed on the graphic plot.

Font Sizes dialog box

Grid

This option allows the user to overlay a grid on top of the graphic plot. Selecting the Grid option will display the Grid Options dialog box where users can check the desired checkboxes to display both major and minor lines and tics as well as borders around the plot.

Grid Options dialog box

Chart Options

This option allows the user to change the visual appearance of the graphic plot. Selecting the Chart Options will display the Plot Options dialog box where users can select the desired theme for the graphic plot.

Plot Options dialog box
Computational Options & Engine Analysis › Dam Break Analysis

Entering Dam Break Data

Dams are an important part of infrastructure. They are used for a variety of purposes, including water supply, recreation, irrigation, and hydropower generation. If a dam fails, it can cause significant property damage and loss of life. Humans can never be able to prevent a dam break completely. However, they can plan for the possibility of a dam failure.

In order to plan for the possibility of a dam break, dam breach information is entered to simulate the dam break and analyze the risks. This is done to facilitate the evaluation of dam breaching in a real-time river forecasting mode. The dam breach data is only used for unsteady flow models and is ignored in steady flow models.

Follow the steps below to enter the dam breach data:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Inline Structure Data command.
    Inline Structure Data input ribbon menu commandAlternatively, the user can choose the Inline Structure Data command from the Inline Structures dropdown menu of the Input ribbon menu.
    Inline Structure Data command in Inline Structures dropdown of input ribbon menu
  2. The Inline Structure Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Inline Structure Data dialog box
  3. From the Inline Structure Specifications dropdown combo box, select the Dam Breach option.
    Inline Structure Specifications dropdown combo box
  4. The following data panel will be displayed.
    Dam Breach data panel

The following sections describe how to enter dam breach data and interact with the above data panel.

Breach Control

The Breach Control section contains the Breach structure checkbox option. This checkbox is used to control whether the structure should be modeled with a breach failure. Unchecking this checkbox allows the modeler to turn off the structure breach without losing the defined data. By default, this checkbox is unchecked.

Breach Dimensions

This section requires the following data to be entered to define the final breach dimensions:

  • Breach centerline station
    This entry allows the user to enter the centerline station of the breach. The stationing is based on the inline structure. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to graphically select the breach centerline station from the Inline Structure Plot section.
  • Breach final bottom width
    This entry allows the user to enter the bottom width of the breach after it has fully developed. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to graphically select the breach bottom width from the Inline Structure Plot section.
  • Breach final bottom elevation
    This entry allows the user to enter the bottom elevation of the breach after it has fully developed. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the breach bottom elevation from the Inline Structure Plot section.
  • Breach left side slope (V:H)
    This entry allows the user to enter the left side slope of a trapezoidal breach. The values entered in the side slopes represent the horizontal to vertical ratio. By default, the software uses a value of 3.0 (i.e., 1:3).
  • Breach right side slope (V:H)
    This entry allows the user to enter the right side slope of a trapezoidal breach. The values entered in the side slopes represent the horizontal to vertical ratio. By default, the software uses a value of 3.0 (i.e., 1:3).
  • Breach weir coefficient
    This entry allows the user to enter a weir coefficient for the breach. For an overtopping failure or when the top of a piping failure collapses, this coefficient is used with the weir equation to compute the flow through the breach. By default, the software uses a value of 2.6. However, the user can adjust it depending on the type of dam and breaching process ranging from 2.0 to 3.2. Clicking on the […] button will display a Weir Coefficients lookup table dialog box.
    Weir Coefficients dialog box
  • Breach formation time
    This entry allows the user to enter the time required for the breach to fully form, from the start of some significant erosion to completion. The modeler should be very careful in selecting the breach formation time. If a linear breach progression rate is selected, then the breach time should be limited to when the breach begins to erode significantly and up to when the major portion of the breach is formed.

Breach Failure Details

This section requires the following data to be entered to define the breach failure:

  • Breach failure type
    This dropdown combo box provides two different breach failure types:
    1. Piping - This failure type should be selected when the dam fails due to seepage through the dam, which causes erosion, which in turn causes more flow to go through the dam, which results in even more erosion. This failure will grow slowly at first, but will pick up speed as the area of the opening begins to enlarge. At some point during the breach, the embankment above the breach will begin to sluff, at which time a large mass wasting of the embankment will occur.
    2. Overtopping - This failure type should be selected when the water surface overtops the entire dam and erodes its way back through the embankment, or when flow going over the emergency spillway causes erosion that also works its way back through the embankment.
  • Piping coefficient
    The Piping coefficient entry allows the user to enter a piping coefficient. This coefficient is used in the orifice equation while the flow is coming out of the dam in a piping model. This entry is only available when a piping breach failure type is selected. Otherwise, it is grayed out (i.e., unavailable). By default, the software uses a value of 0.5. Clicking on the […] button will display the Orifice Piping Coefficients lookup table dialog box.
    Orifice Piping Coefficients dialog box
  • Initial piping elevation
    The Initial piping elevation entry allows the user to enter an initial piping elevation. This elevation should be entered as the center of the piping flow when the breach begins. The Initial piping elevation entry is only available when a piping breach failure type is selected. Otherwise, it is grayed out (i.e., unavailable). The user can click the [Pick] button to graphically select the piping elevation from the Inline Structure Plot section.
  • Breach trigger
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to select one of three trigger methods for initiating the breach. The three trigger methods are: Exceeds WS Elevation, Exceeds WS Elev & Time, and Date & Time. Based on the option selected, the content of the section below this entry changes to define additional data.
    1. Exceeds WS Elevation
      On selecting this option, the following section will be displayed:
      Exceeds WS Elevation in Breach trigger dropdown combo box
      • The Breach trigger elevation entry allows the user to enter a water surface elevation. Exceed in the water surface above this value triggers the breaching of the structure. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to graphically select the elevation from the Inline Structure Plot section.
    2. Exceeds WS Elev & Time
      On selecting this option, the following section will be displayed:
      Exceeds WS Elev & Time in Breach trigger dropdown combo box
      • The Breach threshold elevation entry allows the user to enter a water surface elevation. Exceed in the water surface over the specified duration triggers the breaching of the structure. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to graphically select the elevation from the Inline Structure Plot section.
      • The Duration above threshold entry allows the user to specify the duration. Exceed in the water surface above the threshold value triggers the breaching of the structure.
      • The Immediate initiation elevation entry allows the user to enter a water surface elevation. Exceed in the water surface immediately triggers the breaching of the structure. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to graphically select the elevation from the Inline Structure Plot section.
    3. Date & Time
      On selecting this option, the following section will be displayed:
      Date & Time in Breach trigger dropdown combo box
      • The Start date entry allows the user to specify the date at which the breach failure will be initiated.
      • The Start time entry allows the user to specify the time at which the breach failure will be initiated.

Breach Progression

This section allows the user to define the progression of the dam breach. There are two different breach progression methods:

  • Linear
  • Sine Wave

Clicking on the [Set to Linear] button will cause the breach to grow in equal increments of depth and width from the beginning to the end of the development time. Clicking on the [Set to Sine Wave] button causes the breach to grow rapidly in the early stage of breach development and slow down as it reaches its maximum size.

This section has a table that allows the user to enter user-specified progression curve data for the formation of the breach. By default, the breach progression is assumed to be linear between the breach initiation and the full breach size. The user can enter user-specific breach progression curve data in the Breach Progression table.

The Breach Progression table contains two columns: Time Fraction and a Breach Fraction. The user can enter data into these columns ranging from 0 to 1. The user-entered data is plotted in the Breach Progression Plot. The breach progression curve data are then used during the breach formation time to adjust the growth rate of the breach.

Breach Progression section

Repair Breach

The Repair Breach section allows the user to have the breach fill back in during the unsteady flow simulation. This could represent attempts to fill a breach during a failure event or repair the breach after the event.

Repair Breach section

The Breach Repair section requires the following data to be entered for breach repair:

  • Start repair after full breach
    This entry defines the amount of time (in hours) it takes to start the repair process after the breach has occurred.
  • Total repair time
    This entry defines the total amount of time that it takes to complete the repair of the breach.
  • Final repaired filled-in elevation
    This entry defines the final elevation of the repaired breach. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to graphically select the repaired filled-in elevation from the Inline Structure Plot section.
Computational Options & Engine Analysis › Performance & Parallelization

Parallelization and CPU Affinity in GeoHECRAS

GeoHECRAS leverages parallel computing to accelerate 2D unsteady flow simulations. It automatically manages CPU affinity (which cores are used during computation) to optimize performance without manual configuration.

This article describes how GeoHECRAS manages parallel processing and CPU affinity to improve performance.

What is Parallelization?

Parallelization is the process of dividing complex tasks, like a 2D flow simulation, into smaller tasks that run at the same time across multiple CPU cores. This enables simulations to complete much faster than running everything on a single core.

In GeoHECRAS, parallelization allows the software to assign computational work to multiple CPU threads, significantly improving the efficiency and speed of model execution.

CPU Cores vs. Logical Processors

CPU cores are the physical processing units within a computer’s processor. Logical processors are virtual execution paths created by technologies like Intel’s Hyper-Threading (HT) or AMD’s Simultaneous Multithreading (SMT), which permit one physical core to handle multiple tasks.

While hyper-threading can improve performance in some applications, it may actually reduce performance for CPU-intensive tasks, such as running large hydraulic simulations. This happens due to resource sharing and extra overhead when managing multiple threads on the same physical core.

To avoid these issues, our software automatically detects and manages hyper-threading, ensuring simulations run primarily on physical cores for best performance.

What is CPU Affinity?

CPU affinity determines which specific CPU cores a process is allowed to use during computation. If CPU affinity is not configured properly, the operating system may assign simulation threads to slower or less efficient cores (such as E-cores or logical threads), resulting in reduced performance.

The following are the advantages of CPU Affinity:

  • Performance Optimization
    Reduces context switching, improves cache usage, and lowers memory latency.
  • Stability and Predictability
    Assigning critical processes to dedicated cores ensures more consistent performance.
  • Resource Management
    Allow better control of CPU resources, especially in virtualized environments where managing the performance of multiple virtual machines is essential.

GeoHECRAS automatically manages CPU affinity in the background. It detects the system’s processor configuration and intelligently selects the optimal number of solver cores, ensuring that simulations run on the faster performance cores while avoiding slower or less efficient cores. This means users do not need to configure anything manually.

Performance Cores vs. Efficiency Cores

Modern CPUs often use a hybrid design with two types of cores, i.e., Performance cores (P-cores) and Efficiency cores (E-cores).

  • Performance cores (P-cores): High clock speed, more memory, best for computationally intensive tasks.
  • Efficiency cores (E-cores): Lower power usage, designed for background or lighter tasks.

Operating systems like Windows 11 automatically balance workloads between P-cores and E-cores. Our software takes this into account by prioritizing P-cores for 2D simulations, ensuring faster and more efficient runs.

Setting the 2D Unsteady Flow Solver Cores

Although GeoHECRAS manages CPU affinity automatically, users can manually adjust the number of cores used for 2D computations. This can be done using the Solver Cores dropdown combo box from the 2D Flow Options panel within the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box. By default, the software selects All Available Cores for computation. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Unsteady Flow Computational Options command.

Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box

When a simulation runs, the analysis window displays which cores are selected and how many cores are assigned for each 2D computation. As shown in the image below, the number of solver cores is limited to 4 cores per 2D computation.

HEC-RAS Simulation Window

Performance Considerations

Selecting "All Available" solver cores does not always produce the fastest simulations. Performance depends on model size and the overhead of distributing tasks.

  • Small models: Using 2–4 cores is usually optimal. Assigning too many cores can reduce performance.
  • Medium models: Performance improves as more solver cores are used.
  • Large models: Benefit the most from higher core counts.

Therefore, users should optimize model runs by running a variety of scenarios with different solver cores selected.

Example Test: On a system with 8 logical processors:

  • Small models ran fastest with 2–4 cores.
  • Assigning more cores slowed performance due to overhead.
  • Only larger models showed consistent speed gains with higher core counts.
Computational Options & Engine Analysis › Performance & Parallelization

Selecting HEC-RAS Analysis Engine Version

GeoHECRAS supports a wide range of HEC-RAS analysis engine versions, ranging from legacy 1D-only releases to newer versions that support 2D unsteady flow modeling. Selecting the correct analysis engine version helps ensure that the model computes accurately and remains compatible with the original HEC-RAS files used to create, import, or exchange the project.

Overview

GeoHECRAS allows the user to select which HEC-RAS version should be used for analysis computations. This selection can be made at two levels:

  • Application level
  • Project level

Selecting an HEC-RAS version at the project level defines which analysis engine will be used for the flow computations for that project only.

Selecting the HEC-RAS version at the application level defines which analysis engine will be used for the flow computations for every newly created project.

For example, if the user has selected HEC-RAS version 6.3.1 at the application level, every new project will use HEC-RAS version 6.3.1 for its flow computations (unless overridden using a different HEC-RAS version selected at the project level). Previously created projects will use the HEC-RAS version that was defined when they were first created.

Supported HEC-RAS Versions

GeoHECRAS provides built-in support for the following HEC-RAS analysis engine versions:

unknown node

unknown node

Selecting HEC-RAS Analysis Engine Version at the Application Level

The application level setting controls which HEC-RAS analysis engine version will be used by default for all newly created projects. This setting can be defined once to establish a consistent default setting across the user’s workflows.

Follow the steps below to select the HEC-RAS analysis engine at the application level:

  1. From the ribbon menu, select File and then click Options. This will display the Options backstage page.
    unknown node
  2. From the HEC-RAS Analysis Engine section under Application Options, select the required HEC-RAS version from the HEC-RAS analysis engine dropdown list. This will define the default HEC-RAS analysis engine that will be used for all newly created projects.
    unknown node
  3. The Lock selected engine for imported models checkbox causes the software to lock the selected HEC-RAS analysis engine for analysis computations in all imported models. By default, this checkbox is checked.

Selecting HEC-RAS Analysis Engine Version at the Project Level

The project level setting allows the user to specify a different HEC-RAS engine version for an individual project. This is useful when working on a project that was originally created with an older engine version, or when the user needs to use a specific version for deliverable compatibility.

Follow the steps below to select the HEC-RAS analysis engine at the project level:

  1. From the ribbon menu, select File and then click Options. This will display the Options backstage page.
    unknown node
  2. From the HEC-RAS Analysis Engine section under Project Options, select the required HEC-RAS version from the HEC-RAS analysis engine dropdown list.
    unknown node
  3. The selected HEC-RAS analysis engine version will be used for all flow computations in the currently open project. This setting will not affect any other projects.

Imported HEC-RAS Models

When the user imports an existing HEC-RAS project into GeoHECRAS, the software automatically reads the HEC-RAS analysis engine version associated with that project. It then selects the same engine version in the HEC-RAS Analysis Engine section under Project Options on the backstage page.

For example, if the user imports an HEC-RAS project that includes 2D flow elements, GeoHECRAS will automatically select HEC-RAS 6.3.1 (or newer version) in the HEC-RAS Analysis Engine section under Project Options to ensure that the 2D computations run correctly.

unknown node
Floodplain Mapping & Encroachments › Steady Flow Encroachments

Assign Floodway Stations Command

The Assign Floodway Stations command is used to automatically assign floodway stations from GIS polyline or polygon shapefiles to HEC-RAS cross sections for floodway computation encroachment method 1.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Floodway Stations command:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, select the Floodplain Encroachments dropdown menu and then choose the Assign Floodway Stations command.
    Assign Floodway Stations command of Floodplain Encroachments dropdown menu from Analysis ribbon menu
  2. The Assign Floodway Stations dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign Floodway Stations dialog box
    Note that if the current scenario is not defined as a steady flow type, the following informational dialog box will be displayed when opening the Assign Floodway Stations dialog box.
    Incorrect Flow Type informational dialog box

The following sections describe the Assign Floodway Stations command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Encroachment Profile

The Select Encroachment Profile section allows the user to select the water surface profile for which the encroachment method 1 floodway station is to be assigned. The Water surface profile dropdown combo box lists all the water surface profiles defined for the current model.

Water surface profile dropdown combo box

Selecting Floodway Shapefile Layer

The Select Floodway Shapefile Layer section allows the user to select either a polyline or polygon shapefile layer. The GIS polyline or polygon layer dropdown combo box lists all the GIS shapefile data defined for the current model.

GIS polyline or polygon layer dropdown combo box

Plot Floodway Stations on Map View

This section allows the user to plot the mapped encroachment floodway stations to the Map View. This will allow the user to validate the encroachment station locations on the Map View relative to the selected GIS shapefile data. By default, the Plot Floodway Stations on Map View section checkbox is checked.

Plot Floodway Stations on Map View section
  • Layer name
    This input field allows the user to name the layer that will be created in the Map Data Layers panel that will define the floodway stations. By default, the layer name is set to 100 yr Floodway Stations, which can be changed by the user.
  • Symbol type
    This option allows the user to define the color, size, and shape of the points that will depict the floodway station locations on the Map View.
  • Delete previously plotted floodway stations
    This checkbox option allows the user to delete any previously generated floodway stations from the model. By default, this checkbox is checked.

Assigning Floodway Stations

Once the options have been properly defined, click the [Assign] button. The software will assign the selected GIS layer as floodway encroachment stations on the Map View.

[Assign] button

After the floodway encroachment stations have been assigned, the software will then identify the assigned floodway encroachment stations as a new group in the Map Data Layers panel. The user can also export the layers to CAD by selecting the Export to CAD command from the right-click context menu.

Export to CAD command from the right-click context menu
Floodplain Mapping & Encroachments › Steady Flow Encroachments

Floodplain Encroachments Command

The Floodplain Encroachments command is used for computing floodplain encroachment stations. This command allows the user to quickly iterate the encroachment station locations while reviewing the computed results. The incremental water surface rise, floodway top width, and flow velocities at each river cross section are shown, thus allowing the user to deliver the best land development solution. This functionality helps the user to recover the maximum amount of land use area for development.

Follow the steps below to use the Floodplain Encroachments command:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, select the Floodplain Encroachments dropdown menu and then choose the Floodplain Encroachments command.
    Floodplain Encroachments Command
  2. The Floodplain Encroachments dialog box will be displayed.
    Floodplain Encroachments dialog box

The following sections describe the Floodplain Encroachments command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Defining Floodplain Encroachments

The Define Floodplain Encroachments section lists each of the cross sections in the selected river reaches.

Based upon the number of steady flow profiles defined, each cross section has many rows displayed in the table. Note that the first row (1st profile) for each cross section is the base profile and the encroachment method is not defined for this row. Between each cross-section group within the table, there is a thicker line displayed to denote the cross-section groups.

Note that if the US unit system is selected on the Options backstage page, the US units will be displayed in the Define Floodplain Encroachments section. The user can also change the unit system to a metric (SI) unit, if necessary. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about setting the model units to metric (SI) or US units.

The table in this section contains the following entries:

  • River: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the river name.
  • Reach: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the corresponding reach name for each river. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select Reach from the Map View. The [Remove All] button removes the defined floodplain encroachments data for all the cross sections.
  • XS ID: This column lists the cross-section IDs of the selected rivers and corresponding river reaches.
  • Profile: This column is used to display the profile number in a year.
  • Encroachment Method: This column contains a read-only dropdown combo box that lists the encroachment method being applied to that cross-section location for that profile.

    Note that the first row (1st profile) for each cross section is considered as un-encroached, and no combo box is shown for this row. By default, the encroachment method is set to None.The following are the other encroachment methods within the Encroachment method dropdown combo box:
    1. Method 1: This method allows the user to specify the exact locations of the encroachment stations for each individual cross section. The encroachment stations can also be specified differently for each profile.
    2. Method 4: This method computes encroachment stations so that conveyance within the encroached cross section (at some higher elevation) is equal to the conveyance of the natural cross section at the natural water level. This higher elevation is specified as a fixed amount (target increase) above the natural (for example, 100 year) profile. The encroachment stations are determined so that an equal loss of conveyance (at the higher elevation) occurs on each overbank, if possible. If half of the loss cannot be obtained in one overbank, the difference will be made up, if possible, in the other overbank, except that encroachments will not be allowed to fall within the main channel.

      A targeted increase of 1.0 indicates that a 1-foot rise will be used to determine the encroachments based on equal conveyance.
    3. Copy 4 to 1: This option is only available, if Method 4 is currently selected and encroachment results are available, otherwise this option is disabled. Selecting the option Copy 4 to 1 in the dropdown combo box, the software displays the below Confirmation dialog box.
      Confirmation dialog box
      After the user has selected the appropriate option from the Confirmation dialog box, the software puts the encroachment Method 4 computed encroachment station values into the Left Station and Right Station data column fields for that cross section and profile. The Target WS Change field also gets cleared and switches the encroachment method to Method 1 for the affected rows within the Floodplain Encroachments dialog box.

  • Target WSEL Change (ft): This column is used to define the requested increase in water surface elevation when encroachment method 4 is selected. This field is disabled for all other encroachment methods.
  • Left Station (ft): This column is used to define the left encroachment station when encroachment method 1 is selected. This field is disabled for all other encroachment methods. Clicking the […] button allows the user to select the left encroachment station from the Map View.
  • Right Station (ft): This column is used to define the right encroachment station when encroachment method 1 is selected. This field is disabled for all other encroachment methods. Clicking the […] button allows the user to select the right encroachment station from the Map View.
  • WSEL (ft): This data column is used to define the water surface elevation.
  • WSEL Change (ft): This data column is used to define the change in water surface elevation.
  • Top Width (ft): This read-only column displays the analysis results for the current cross section and profile. When user performs a floodplain encroachment analysis by clicking the [Analyze] button, the output results field will be updated in the table.
  • Velocity (ft/s): This read-only column displays the analysis results for the current cross section and profile. When user performs a floodplain encroachment analysis by clicking on the [Analyze] button, the output results field will be updated in the table.
  • Froude Number: This column indicates the users whether we are getting close to critical depth or super critical flow. If the Froude Number gets close to or exceeds the value 1, it means the software is encroaching on the floodplain too hard and the flow is becoming super critical.
  • Volume (acre-ft): This column defines the storage volume of the computed floodplain encroachment analysis.
  • Lock: This column displays an unlocked or locked icon. By default, the unlocked icon is displayed. Clicking on the icon changes its state. When it is unlocked, the encroachment input fields contained within the row group are editable. When it is locked, the encroachment input fields contained within the row group are not editable. In addition, when locked, any changes made by the user in the Target WS change value of the Encroachment Method 4 Group Assignment section has no effect on the encroachment input fields contained within the row group.

Encroachment Method 4 Group Assignment

This section allows the user to perform group assignment of encroachment method 4 values for one or more cross sections.

Encroachment Method 4 Group Assignment

The section contains the following entries:

  • Upstream XS river station: This dropdown combo box lists all the corresponding upstream cross sections for the currently selected river reach. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the upstream cross sections from the Map View.
  • Downstream XS river station: This dropdown combo box lists all the corresponding downstream cross sections for the currently selected river reach. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the downstream cross sections from the Map View.
  • Profile: This dropdown combo box lists all the profiles defined for the current model, except for the first defined profile. The listed profile numbers are defined in yearly format.
  • Target WS change: This entry field is used to define the requested increase in water surface elevation increase.

Once the value under this section is defined, click the [Assign] button. Clicking the [Assign] button causes the defined encroachment values to overwrite the existing encroachment values.

Floodplain Encroachment Options

This section allows the user to define other encroachment method options to be used.

Floodplain Encroachment Options

The section contains the following entries:

  • Overbank conveyance distribution: This dropdown combo box details the global option for reducing the conveyance for a cross section overbank. The following options are provided:
    1. Equal Reduction (default)
    2. Proportional Reduction
      Overbank conveyance distribution
  • Left overbank buffer zone offset: This entry field allows the user to enter a distance, which is used to designate a buffer zone in the left overbank by the defined offset from the left bank station. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to measure a distance from the Map View.
  • Right overbank buffer zone offset: This entry field allows the user to enter a distance, which is used to designate a buffer zone in the right overbank by the defined offset from the right bank station. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to measure a distance from the Map View.
  • Maximum WSEL rise: This checkbox entry is used to define when the displayed WSEL Change (ft) values should be highlighted in a red colored background to denote that the computed value(s) is greater than the defined maximum water surface elevation. By default, this checkbox entry is checked, with a value of 1.00 ft.
    Maximum WSEL rise
  • Maximum velocity: This checkbox entry is used to define when the displayed Velocity (ft/s) values are highlighted in a red colored background to denote that the computed value(s) is greater than the defined maximum velocity. By default, this checkbox entry is checked, with a value of 6.00 ft/sec.
    Maximum velocity
  • Cumulative volume: This dropdown option is used to select the unit for the volume column. The following units are provided in the dropdown combo box.
    1. acre-ft (default)
    2. ft3
      Cumulative volume
  • Plot flood map results: This checkbox option is used to plot the flood map results. If this option is checked, then the results are plotted on the Map View. Otherwise, no results are plotted on the Map View. By default, this checkbox option is checked.
    Clicking the [Settings] button will display the Floodway Map Settings dialog box:
    Floodway Map Settings dialog box
    This dialog box allows the user to control how the software will plot the computed floodplain and floodway on the Map View after computing the floodplain encroachment data. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about floodway map settings.

Once all the values have been defined, click the [Analyze] button. After performing the floodplain encroachment analysis, the software will then display the floodplain encroachment results in the table.

Plot Cross Sections

After analyzing the floodplain encroachments data, the user can use this button to view the Plot Cross Sections results. The user can select the [Plot Cross Sections] button causing the HEC-RAS cross section plots to get displayed. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about cross sections plots.

Plot Cross Sections

Profile Plots

After analyzing the floodplain encroachments data, the user can use this button to view the Profile Plots results. The [Profile Plots] button allows the user to display the water surface profile along the selected river reach. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about profile plots.

Profile Plots

Summary Outputs

After analyzing the floodplain encroachments data, the user can use this button to view the Summary Output results. The Summary Outputs button allows the user to display the HEC-RAS profile summary table.

Summary Outputs
Floodplain Mapping & Encroachments › Unsteady Flow Encroachments

Unsteady Flow Floodplain Encroachments Command

The Unsteady Flow Floodplain Encroachments command computes floodplain encroachment stations for the unsteady flow condition and helps the user to have a better understanding of the true flow effects when attempting to determine the floodway in a complex flow situation. This command allows the user to quickly iterate the encroachment station locations while reviewing the computed results. The incremental water surface rise, floodway top width, and flow velocities at each river cross section are shown, thus allowing the user to deliver the best land development solution.

Follow the steps below to use the Unsteady Flow Floodplain Encroachments command:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, select the Floodplain Encroachments dropdown menu and then choose the Unsteady Flow Floodplain Encroachments command. Select the Floodplain Encroachments dropdown menu
  2. The Unsteady Flow Floodplain Encroachments dialog box will be displayed. Unsteady Flow Floodplain Encroachments dialog box

The following sections describe the Unsteady Flow Floodplain Encroachments command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Defining Floodplain Encroachments

The Define Floodplain Encroachments section lists each of the cross sections in the selected river reaches. The first row for each cross section is the base profile and the encroachment method is not defined for this row. Between each cross-section group within the table, there is a thicker line displayed to denote the cross-section groups.

Note that if the US unit system is selected in the Options backstage page, the US units will be displayed in the Define Floodplain Encroachments section. The user can also change the unit system to metric (SI) unit, if necessary. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about setting the model units to metric (SI) or US units.

The table in this section contains the following entries:

  • River: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the river name.
  • Reach: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the corresponding reach name for each river. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the Reach from the Map View. The [Remove All] button removes the defined unsteady flow floodplain encroachments data for all the cross sections.
  • XS ID: This column lists the cross-section IDs of the selected rivers and corresponding river reaches. Cross sections that are bridges or inline structures will have either Bridge or Inline added after the cross-section ID label. The encroachment values are not defined for these types of cross sections.
  • Scenario (Plan): This column list all the previously defined flow scenarios. By default, the current scenario is shown on opening the dialog box.
  • Left Station (ft): This column is used to define the left encroachment station. Clicking the […] pick button allows the user to select the left floodplain encroachment station location from the Map View.
  • Right Station (ft): This column is used to define the right encroachment station. Clicking the […] pick button allows the user to select the right floodplain encroachment station location from the Map View.
  • Max WSEL (ft): This data column is used to define the maximum water surface elevation.
  • WSEL Change (ft): This data column is used to define the rate of change in water surface elevation.
  • Top Width (ft): This read-only column displays the analysis results for the current cross section and profile. When the user performs a floodplain encroachment analysis by clicking the [Analyze] button, the output results field will be updated in the table.
  • Velocity (ft/s): This read-only column displays the analysis results for the current cross section and profile. When the user performs a floodplain encroachment analysis by clicking the [Analyze] button, the output results field will be updated in the table.
  • Froude Number: This column conveys to the user whether calculation results are getting close to critical depth or super critical flow. If the Froude Number approaches or exceeds the value 1, it means the software is encroaching on the floodplain too hard and the flow is becoming super critical.
  • Volume (acre-ft): This column defines the storage volume of the computed floodplain encroachment analysis.
  • Lock: This column displays an unlocked or locked icon. By default, the unlocked icon is displayed. Clicking on the icon changes its state. When it is unlocked, the encroachment input fields contained within the row group are editable. When it is locked, the encroachment input fields contained within the row group are not editable.

Define Floodplain Encroachments

This section contains the following entries:

Define Floodplain Encroachments section
  • Steady flow encroachment scenario: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the encroachment scenario of the steady flow. Note that the dropdown combo box entry list only those scenarios that have steady flow data.
  • Extract floodway stationing for profile: This dropdown combo box lists all the floodway profiles defined for the model. The profile numbers in the dropdown combo box are defined in yearly format. Extract floodway stationing for profile Clicking the [Retrieve] button allows the user to retrieve the floodway stations from the existing steady flow scenario.

Floodplain Encroachment Options

This section allows the user to define other encroachment method options to be used.

Floodplain Encroachment Options section

The section contains the following entries:

  • Unsteady flow comparison scenario: This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the encroachment scenario of the unsteady flow. Note that the dropdown combo box list only those scenarios that have unsteady flow data and should not display the current scenario.
  • Maximum WSEL rise: This checkbox entry shows that when the displayed WSEL Change (ft) values are highlighted in a red colored background, the computed value(s) is greater than the defined maximum water surface elevation. By default, this checkbox entry is checked, with a value of 1.00 ft.
  • Maximum velocity: This checkbox entry shows that when the displayed Velocity (ft/s) value(s) is highlighted in a red colored background, the computed value(s) are greater than the defined maximum velocity. This checkbox entry is checked by default, with a value of 6.00 ft/sec. Maximum velocity
  • Cumulative volume: This dropdown option is used to select the unit for the volume column. The following two units are provided in the dropdown combo box.
    1. acre-ft
    2. ft3
      unknown node
  • Plot flood map results: This checkbox option is used to plot the flood map results. If this option is checked, then the results are plotted on the Map View. Otherwise, no results are plotted on the Map View. By default, this checkbox option is checked. Plot flood map results Clicking the [Settings] button will display the Floodway Map Settings dialog box: Floodway Map Settings dialog box This dialog box allows the user to control how the software will plot the computed floodplain and floodway on the Map View after computing the unsteady flow floodplain encroachment data. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about floodway map settings.

Once all the values have been defined, click the [Analyze] button. After performing the floodplain encroachment analysis, the software will then display the unsteady flow floodplain encroachment results in the table.

Plot Cross Sections

After analyzing the unsteady flow floodplain encroachments data, the user can use the [Plot Cross Sections] button to view the Plot Cross Sections results. Clicking on the [Plot Cross Sections] button will display the HEC-RAS cross section plots. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about cross section plots.

Profile Plots

After analyzing the unsteady flow floodplain encroachments data, the user can use the [Profile Plots] button to view the Profile Plots results. Clicking on the [Profile Plots] button will display the water surface profile along the selected river reach. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about profile plots.

Summary Outputs

After analyzing the floodplain encroachments data, the user can use the [Summary Output] button to view the Summary Output results. Clicking on the [Summary Output] button will display the HEC-RAS profile summary table.

View the Summary Output results
Floodplain Mapping & Encroachments › Flood Map Generation

Flood Map Command

A flood map represents the area of inundation that shows the spatial extent and depth of flooding at specific water-level (stream stage) intervals along an individual stream section. Flood maps are created using the hydraulic data and topographic information of the area. The flood inundation maps are useful for various purposes such as municipal planning, emergency action plans, flood insurance rates, and ecological studies.

In GeoHECRAS, the user can create flood maps from the HEC-RAS computations and user-added digital terrain layers. While GeoHECRAS constructs a flood map representing the area of inundation, it can simultaneously generate an elevation raster grid (or elevation grid) file representing the water surface elevation, flood depth, flood velocity, shear stress, etc. for the mapped area. This raster grid file allows the flood map to be utilized in other software programs, such as ESRI ArcMap and ArcGIS.

Note that the units of the project's CRS and terrain's horizontal and vertical units must be the same to generate an accurate flood map. The XY coordinate units represent the horizontal units of the terrain. Whereas, the elevation represents the vertical units (i.e., Z coordinate unit) of the terrain.

Flood maps can be generated for both steady and unsteady flow models. Under steady flow, the user inputs as boundary conditions a discharge upstream and a stage downstream. The model proceeds to calculate stages throughout the interior points, keeping the discharge constant in space. Under unsteady flow, the user inputs a discharge hydrograph at the upstream boundary and a discharge-stage rating at the downstream boundary. The model calculates discharges and stages throughout the interior points.

To generate a flood map for a steady or unsteady flow model, select the Flood Map command from the Results ribbon menu. Note that this command can only be used after a successful HEC-RAS analysis run.

Flood Map command from the Results ribbon menu

The Flood Map dialog box will be displayed.

Flood Map dialog box

The General Specification section of the above dialog box allows the user to specify several options as described below:

  • The Flood map type dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of flood map that is to be generated.
  • The Flood map computation dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of computation method to use for generating the flood map.
  • The Water surface profile dropdown combo box allows the user to select the water surface profile for which the flood map is to be generated.
  • The Layer group name checkbox allows the user to create a layer group in the Map Data Layers panel that will contain the flood map and any other layers such as the elevation raster grid associated with the generated flood map. The user can define the name of this layer group in the input field provided next to the Layer group name.
  • The Layer name input field allows the user to define the name of the layer that will be created in the Map Data Layers panel that will define the flood extents.
  • The Delete previous flood map checkbox allows the user to delete any previously generated flood map.

Based on the selection of Flood map computation and Flood map type, the remaining sections of the Flood Map dialog box are modified.

Flood Map Computation

The Flood map computation dropdown combo box allows the user to select the flood map computation type. Based on the flow data (steady or unsteady), the software automatically filters out and lists only those computation types that are relevant to the project model.

Flood map computation dropdown combo box

Flood Map Type

In GeoHECRAS, several different types of flood maps can be generated for steady and unsteady flow analysis. The Flood map type dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of flood map that is to be generated. The software automatically filters out and lists only those flood map types that are relevant to the selected flood map computation and project model (steady or unsteady).

Flood map type dropdown combo box

The below table summarizes all the flood map types that the software can generate for various flood map computation types.

unknown node

1D Steady Flow

The 1D Steady Flow computation displays the maximum extent of flooding. It allows the user to create various types of flood maps with particle tracking capabilities to determine the flow’s inconsistency.

Selecting the 1D Steady Flow computation option will display the following Flood Map dialog box.

1D Steady Flow computation option

Note that the content of the Flood Map Options panel changes based on the selection of flood map type.

The below sections describe how to generate a flood map using the 1D Steady Flow computation and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Computation Options for 1D Steady Flow

To specify computation options for 1D Steady Flow computation, follow the steps below:

  1. In the Flood Map dialog box, click the [Options] button next to the Flood map computation dropdown combo box.[Options] button
  2. The Flood Map Computation Options dialog box will be displayed.Flood Map Computation Options dialog box
    Note that the content of the Flood Map Computation Options dialog box changes based on the selection of flood map type.
  3. From the Terrain surface dropdown combo box, select the terrain layer that lies underneath the flood map.
  4. Check the Create Water Surface Elevation Grid section checkbox to create the water surface elevation grid of the flood map in the Map Data Layers panel. By default, the section checkbox is unchecked, and contents are disabled.
  5. Define the layer name of the water surface elevation grid under the corresponding Layer name input field.
  6. Check the Delete previous flood grid checkbox option to delete any previously generated flood grid.
  7. Click the [OK] button.

Flood Map Specifications

The Flood Map Specifications section of the 1D Steady Flow computation type allows the user to define the display properties of the flood map that is to be generated.

Flood Map Specifications section

The Data ramp section identifies the maximum and minimum flood inundation values corresponding to the selected flood map type. For example, in the case of the water surface elevation flood map type, the Data ramp section identifies the maximum and minimum water surface elevation (Max WSEL and Min WSEL). In this section, the user can define the color scheme as well as the interval for the color ramp that will be used to depict the range of flood magnitude. The Intervals spin control button allows the user to specify the number of colors that will be used to represent the different flood depths. The default value is 5. However, the user can increase or decrease this number to get a better representation of the data. The Color scheme dropdown combo box allows the user to select the color scheme for the color ramp.

The user can change the default color values for the selected color ramp scheme in the table shown next to the Data ramp section. Checking the Color blending checkbox causes the software to perform color blending when there isn't enough tonal range to represent all the different colors between the brightest and the darkest points of a gradient.

Flood Map display options

Checking the Map View legend and Map Data Layers legend checkboxes causes the software to create a color legend for the flood map in the Map View and Map Data Layers panel, respectively.

Map View legend and Map Data Layers legend checkboxes

Checking the Contour interval checkbox causes the software to generate contour lines for the flood map. The contour lines for the change in magnitude of flooding are generated based on the defined interval. By default, the software uses a value of 1 unit for the interval. The user can change this value to whatever is desired in the Contour interval input field. Additionally, the user can define the color for contour lines using the Contour color dropdown color palette. Note that this option becomes available after checking the Contour interval checkbox.

Contour interval checkbox

Checking the Transparency checkbox allows the user to adjust the transparency of the flood map that is to be generated. The software uses a default value of 50. The user can change the transparency value to whatever is desired using the bar scale or spin control button.

Transparency checkbox

Once all the options in the Flood Map dialog box are configured, the user can click the [OK] button. The software will generate a flood map for the selected flood map type in the Map View as well as add the corresponding flood map layer to the Map Data Layers panel.

The below image shows a water surface elevation flood map generated using 1D Steady Flow computation.

Flood-Map-Command-image-13.png

Straight Line

The Straight Line computation identifies all the reported river stations across each cross section and connects these river stations to generate a flood map in the form of a straight line polygon.

Selecting the Straight Line computation option will display the following Flood Map dialog box.

Straight Line computation

Note that the software does not provide any computation options for Straight Line computation. Hence the [Options] button next to the Flood map computation field is grayed out (disabled).

The below sections describe how to generate a flood map using Straight Line computation and interact with the above dialog box.

Flood Map Limits

The Flood Map Limits section allows the user to define river reach extent and boundary limits for the flood map.

The River Reach Extents panel is used to define the river reach extent. The All river reaches (entire HEC-RAS model) option causes the software to generate flood maps along all the river reaches present in the entire HEC-RAS model.

River Reach Extents panel

To generate a flood map along a selected river reach, the user can select the Restricted to river and Reach options. Here the user can select the river and the corresponding reach along which the flood map is to be generated.

Restricted to river and Reach options

The user can select the river using the Restricted to river dropdown combo box and the corresponding reach using the Reach dropdown combo box. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button next to the Reach dropdown combo box to interactively select the reach from the Map View. The Upstream XS river station and Downstream XS river station dropdown combo boxes allow the user to define the upstream and downstream river station for the selected river reach. Alternatively, the user can click the corresponding [Pick] buttons to interactively select the upstream or downstream river station from the Map View. By default, the software uses the upstream and downstream river stations at the ends of the reach.

The Flood Boundary Limits panel allows the user to define the flood map boundary limits.

Selecting the Use default flood map boundary limits option causes the software to define the boundary limits based on flow data. By default, the software selects this option.

Use default flood map boundary limits option

Selecting the Extend flood map boundary limits option allows the user to extend the boundary limits of the flood map to any desired range. By default, the software uses a value of 100 ft.

Extend flood map boundary limits option

Checking the Create flood map boundary limits polygon checkbox causes the software to generate a polygon around the flood map representing the flood map boundary. Note that this checkbox is enabled only for the first two options.

Selecting the Use flood map boundary polygon option allows the user to define the boundary limits of the flood map using a polygon drawing.

Use flood map boundary polygon dropdown option

Flood Map Specifications

The Flood Map Specifications section of Straight Line computation allows the user to define the display properties of the flood map that is to be generated. The flood map for Straight Line computation is generated using a single color instead of a color ramp.

Flood Map Specifications section

The Flood Map Stylization panel allows the user to specify the display properties of the polylines and polygon that will comprise the flood map. The Flood Line Stylization section allows the user to define the color, width, and transparency of the polylines that will depict the boundary of the flood map. The Flood Polygon Stylization section allows the user to define the fill color and transparency of the polygon that will depict the flood inundation area.

Note that the Flood Line Stylization and the Flood Polygon Stylization checkboxes are selected by default.

The Flood Contours panel allows the user to generate contour lines for the flood map. Selecting the Flood Contour checkbox enables the content of the Flood Contours section. The contour lines depicting the change in the terrain surface elevation are generated based on the defined interval. By default, the software uses a value of 1 ft for the interval. The user can change the interval value to whatever is desired in the Contour interval input field as well as select the color for the contour lines using the Color dropdown color palette.

Flood Contours pane

The user can also define the width and height of the contour lines using Width and Height spin control buttons, respectively. The Style dropdown combo box allows the user to select the style of contour lines. The Align dropdown combo box allows the user to either align the contour lines horizontally or with the contour. In addition, the user can elect to check the Contour labels checkbox to include the elevation value as a label on the contour line.

Once all the options in the Flood Map dialog box are configured, the user can click the [OK] button. The software will generate a flood map in the Map View for the selected flood map type.

The below image shows a water surface elevation flood map generated using Straight Line computation.

Flood-Map-Command-image-22.png

Detailed Intersection

The main disadvantage of a flood map created using Straight Line computation is that it cannot follow the underlying terrain elevation geometry and hence cannot identify high elevation areas where floodwaters cannot reach. The Detailed Intersection computation identifies the difference between the flood surface and the ground terrain to create accurate flood maps that follow the terrain. Moreover, it can also detect higher elevations within the flood map area and clip it out accordingly.

Selecting the Detailed Intersection computation option will display the following Flood Map dialog box.

Detailed Intersection computation option

The below section describes how to generate a flood map using the Detailed Intersection computation and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Computation Options for Detailed Intersection

To specify computation options for Detailed Intersection computation, follow these steps:

  1. In the Flood Map dialog box, click the [Options] button next to the Flood map computation dropdown combo box.[Options] button
  2. The Flood Map Computation Options dialog box will be displayed.Flood Map Computation Options dialog box
  3. In the above dialog box, specify the following:
    • General Options
      This section allows the user to select the underlying terrain surface and the intersection algorithm that will be used to generate the flood map.General Options
      The Terrain surface dropdown combo box allows the user to select the underlying terrain surface. The Flood map intersection algorithm dropdown combo box allows the user to select the algorithm for generating the flood map. By default, the software selects the Approximate (Fast) method. This method uses the default grid resolution of 5ft to generate the flood map. On selecting the Precise (Slow) option, the Flood map grid resolution input field becomes editable. The user can define the grid resolution in the range of 5 to 20 ft.
      Flood map intersection algorithm dropdown combo box
    • Additional Map Layers
      This section allows the user to generate a water surface elevation or flood depth raster grid of the flood map in the Map Data Layers panel. The generated grid can be later utilized in other software programs, such as ESRI ArcMap and ArcGIS.Additional Map Layers

Checking the Create flood water surface elevation grid checkbox causes the software to generate a water surface elevation raster grid. The user can define the name of this layer under the corresponding Layer name input field.

Checking the Create flood depth grid checkbox causes the software to create a flood depth raster grid. The user can define the layer name for this grid under the corresponding Layer name input field.Flood Map Cleanup Options

This section provides the user with various flood map cleanup options to remove ponded areas, holes, and/or buildings from the flood map.

Flood Map Cleanup Options section

Checking the Remove ponded areas and holes ≤ checkbox allows the user to define a maximum area value. The software will remove any ponded areas or holes that have area coverage of less than the defined area value.

Checking the Clip out buildings using polygons checkbox allows the user to select the polygon shapefile representing the buildings in the flood plain area and clip these buildings out from the flood map.

  1. Once all the options are configured, click the [OK] button

The Food Map Limits and Flood Map Specifications sections for Detailed Intersection computation type are similar to what was shown in Straight Line computation type.

Once all the options in the Flood Map dialog box are configured, the user can click the [OK] button. The software will generate a flood map for the selected flood map type in the Map View.

The below image shows a water surface elevation flood map generated using Detailed Intersection computation.

Flood-Map-Command-image-30.png

The below image shows the overlap view of the flood maps generated using Straight Line and Detailed Intersection computation.

Flood-Map-Command-image-31.png

The blue-colored flood map is generated using the Straight Line computation, and the red-colored flood map is generated using the Detailed Intersection computation. The callout points 1, 2, 3, and 4 represent the high grounds in the flood map that were not identified during Straight Line computation.

Time Series Animation

Time Series Animation is a visual way to illustrate the flood flow with respect to time. It allows the user to view data between certain time intervals in animated format. The user can generate time series flood map animation for various flood map types such as water surface elevation, flood depth, shear stress, and Froud number.

Selecting the Time Series Animation computation option will display the following Flood Map dialog box.

Time Series Animation computation option

Note that the content of the Flood Map Options panel changes based on the selection of flood map type.

The below sections describe how to generate a flood map using Time Series Animation computation and interact with the above dialog box.

Computation Options for Time Series Animation

To specify computation options for Time Series Animation computation, follow these steps:

  1. In the Flood Map dialog box, click the [Options] button next to the Flood map computation dropdown combo box.[Options] button
  2. The Flood Map Computation Options dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box allows the user to create a raster grid in the Map Data Layers panel corresponding to the selected flood map type.Note that the content of the Flood Map Computation Options dialog box changes based on the selection of flood map type. Below is the Flood Map Computation Options dialog box for water surface elevation flood map type.
    Flood Map Computation Options dialog box
  3. Select the Create Water Surface Elevation Grid checkbox to enable the content of this section. To generate a raster grid of the flood map in the Map Data Layers panel, select any of the following criteria:
    • Maximum flood inundation of selected flood map type (Maximum water surface elevation grid).
    • Flood inundation at the last time step (Last time step water surface elevation grid).
    • Flood inundation at any manually selected time step (Water surface elevation grid for the time step). On selecting this option, the user needs to select the desired time step from the dropdown combo box provided next to this option.
  4. Define the name of the raster grid layer in the Layer name input field.
  5. Check the Delete previous flood grid checkbox to allow the software to delete any previously generated flood map raster grid.
  6. Once finished, click the [OK] button.

Flood Map Specifications

The Flood Map Specifications section of the Time Series Animation computation type allows the user to define the display properties of the flood map, velocity vectors, and particle tracking. Note that the content of the Flood Map Options panel changes based on the selected flood map type.

Flood Map Specifications section
  • Flood Map Options
    The Flood Map Options panel is similar to what was shown in the 1D Steady Flow computation type.
  • Particle Tracking
    The Particle Tracking panel allows the user to define the speed, density, particle width, and lifetime of flow particles representing the flow field in the flood map. The user can use the bar scale, or the spin control button provided next to the corresponding particle property to define its value.Particle Tracking panel
    Checking the Anti-aliased particles checkbox causes the software to remove any jaggies from the particle flow field.
  • Velocity Vectors
    The Velocity Vectors panel allows the user to define the display properties for the particle velocity vector shown in the flow field.Velocity Vectors panel
    The user can select the color for the velocity vector using the Color dropdown color palette and define the spacing between the two velocity vectors using the Spacing spin control button.

Once all the options are configured in the Flood Map dialog box, the user can click the [OK] button. The software will generate a time series animation of the flood map corresponding to the selected flood map type in Map View.

The below image shows a flood map generated using Time Series Animation computation. The animation control panel shown at the top left of the flood map allows the user to control the flow animation.

Flood-Map-Command-image-38.png
Floodplain Mapping & Encroachments › Flood Map Generation

Flood Map Contours

Flood map contours help the user visualize how flood elevations vary across a study area. Instead of relying only on color-banded inundation polygons, contour lines connect points of equal water surface elevation, making it easier to understand flood stages across the floodplain. GeoHECRAS supports flood contour generation for both 1D and 2D HEC-RAS analyses and allows the user to control contour interval, appearance, labeling, and export format.

The Flood Map command of GeoHECRAS software can be used to create Base Flood Elevation (BFE) contour lines at a specified elevation interval for the generated flood map. These elevation contours help the user review flood elevation changes, identify floodplain patterns, and communicate flood modeling results more effectively. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to create flood maps for 1D and 2D projects.

Creating Flood Map Contours for 1D Steady/Unsteady Projects

For 1D steady/unsteady projects, flood contours can be displayed on the Map View using the Flood Contours panel of the Flood Map command.

Follow the steps below to create flood contours for 1D steady/unsteady projects:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, select the Flood Map command.
    unknown node
  2. The Flood Map dialog box will be displayed.
    unknown node
  3. In the Flood Map Specifications section, select the Flood Contours panel.
    unknown node
  4. Checking the Flood Contours checkbox enables the following options under the Flood Contours panel:
    • Layer name: This entry field is used to define the layer name to be created in the Map Data Layers panel for storing the flood contours. The default layer name is BFE Contours, which can be edited.
    • Contour interval: This entry field is used to define the interval (elevation difference) between the flood contour lines. A smaller interval produces more contour lines and provides more detailed results.
    • Contour treatment: This dropdown entry is used to select the type of contour lines to be generated for the flood contours. The available options are Original Line, Smoothed Line, and Straight Line.
    • Color: This option displays a color palette, which is used to select the color of the flood contour lines on the Map View.
    • Width: This spin control entry field is used to select the width of the flood contour lines.
    • Style: This dropdown entry is used to select the style of the flood contour lines.
    • Contour labels: Enabling this checkbox option displays the elevation value label along each flood contour line.
    • Height: This spin control entry field is used to select the text height for contour labels.
    • Align: This dropdown entry is used to select the alignment of the label with respect to the flood contour lines. The available options are With Contours and Horizontal.
  1. After defining all the required data, click the [OK] button.
  2. The software will then generate the flood Map along with the flood contours for a 1D steady or unsteady project. In addition, the flood contours layer will also be created in the Map Data Layers panel.
    unknown node

Notes:

  • For 1D steady projects, selecting 1D Steady Flow from the Flood map computation dropdown changes the content of the Flood Map dialog box. In addition, the Flood Contours panel will not be displayed in the Flood Map Specifications section.
  • For 1D unsteady projects, selecting Time Series Animation from the Flood map computation dropdown changes the content of the Flood Map dialog box. In addition, the Flood Contours panel will not be displayed in the Flood Map Specifications section.
  • For 1D Steady Flow and Time Series Animation flood map types, the flood contours can be generated similarly to the 2D unsteady projects as described in the section below.

Creating Flood Map Contours for 2D Unsteady Projects

For 2D unsteady projects, flood contours can be displayed on the Map View using the Flood Map Options panel of the Flood Map command.

Follow the steps below to create flood contours for 2D unsteady projects:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, select the Flood Map command.
    unknown node
  2. The Flood Map dialog box will be displayed.
    unknown node
  3. In the Flood Map Specifications section, select the Flood Map Options panel.
    unknown node
  4. Check the Contour interval checkbox option and define the intervals at which the flood contour lines should be displayed. The defined interval is used as a basis for generating contour lines that represent changes in the magnitude of flooding. The user can also select the color of the generated flood contours from the Contour color palette.
    unknown node
  5. After defining all the required data, click the [OK] button. The software will then generate the flood map along with the flood contours for a 2D unsteady project.

Note that generating the flood contours for a 2D project using the above steps only displays the flood contours on the Map View and does not create any contour layer in the Map Data Layers panel, as shown below.
unknown node

To create the contour layer in the Map Data Layers panel, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Flood Map dialog box, select the flood map type and other required options for generating a flood map.
  2. Then, click the [Options…] button adjacent to the Flood map computation dropdown combo box.
    unknown node
  3. The Flood Map Computation Options dialog box corresponding to the selected flood map type will be displayed. The dialog box provides advanced options such as generating a flood elevation grid for the selected flood map type. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to generate an elevation data grid along with the flood map using the Flood Map Computation Options dialog box.
  4. After generating the flood elevation grid along with the flood map, the elevation grid layer will also be created in the Map Data Layers panel.
  5. The user can further utilize the generated flood elevation grid in the Generate Contours command to generate flood contours for 2D unsteady projects. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to use the flood elevation grid as the terrain surface to generate flood contours.
  6. After generating the flood contours, a flood contours layer will also be created in the Map Data Layers panel.

Exporting Flood Map Contours to CAD or Shapefile

The flood contours created for a 1D or 2D project can be further exported to CAD or a GIS shapefile. To export flood contours, right-click on the flood contours layer created in the Map Data Layers panel and choose Export to CAD or Export to Shapefile from the displayed context menu.
unknown node

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Export to Shapefile command.

Alternatively, the user can export the entire project to CAD or a shapefile along with the flood map contours using the Export HEC-RAS to Shapefile or Export HEC-RAS to CAD command.

  • Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Export HEC-RAS to Shapefiles command.
  • Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Export HEC-RAS to CAD command.

Note: The Flood result contours option should be checked in the Export HEC-RAS to CAD and Export HEC-RAS to Shapefile dialog boxes for exporting the generated flood contours.
unknown node

Floodplain Mapping & Encroachments › Flood Map Generation

HEC-RAS Flood Result Raster Grids

While GeoHECRAS constructs a flood map representing the area of inundation, it can simultaneously generate an elevation raster grid (or elevation grid) file representing the water surface elevation for the mapped area. This raster grid file allows the flood map to be utilized in other software programs, such as ESRI ArcMap and ArcGIS. Each grid cell within the elevation raster contains a single value representing the computed water surface elevation. Areas that are not flooding are marked as “NODATA” in their grid cells.

HEC-RAS Flood Map Types

In addition to creating a flood map elevation raster grid, the software can generate raster grid files for any of the available flood maps that GeoHECRAS can produce, including:

  • Maximum Water Surface Elevation
  • Maximum Water Depth
  • Maximum Velocity
  • Shear Stress
  • Arrival Time
  • Flood Duration
  • And many other flood map types

It is a simple process to direct the software to generate a corresponding raster grid file while generating a flood map. The following section details how this is done.

Creating a Water Surface Elevation Raster Grid

This section describes the process used to generate a water surface elevation raster while generating the flood map. Take note that this same process can be used to generate raster grids for other flood results, such as maximum velocity flood maps.

For the flood map and corresponding water surface elevation raster grid to be generated, the HEC-RAS model analysis results must be available. If not, first perform a HEC-RAS flow analysis for the defined model.

Follow the steps below to create the water surface elevation raster grid:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, select the Flood Map command.
    Results ribbon menu - Flood Map command
  2. The Flood Map dialog box will be displayed.
    Flood Map dialog box
  3. From the General Specifications section, click on the Flood map type dropdown combo box, and then select the Water Surface Elevation option.
    Flood map type dropdown combo box - Water Surface Elevation option
  4. Then click on the Flood map computation dropdown combo box and select either the Detailed Intersection or Time Series Animation option.
    Flood map computation dropdown combo box - Time Series Animation option
  5. Now, click the [Options…] button adjacent to the Flood map computation dropdown combo box.
    Options button adjacent to the Flood map computation dropdown combo
  6. The Flood Map Computation Options dialog box will be displayed.
    Flood Map Computation Options dialog box
  7. Select the Create Water Surface Elevation Grid checkbox to enable the content of this section. To generate a raster grid of the flood map in the Map Data Layers panel, select any of the following options:
    • Maximum water surface elevation grid: This will create a raster grid of maximum water surface elevation for the selected flood map type.
    • Last time step water surface elevation grid: This will create a raster grid of water surface elevation at the last time step.
    • Water surface elevation grid for the time step: This will create a raster grid of water surface elevation at any manually selected time step. On selecting this option, the user needs to select the desired time step from the dropdown combo box provided next to this option.
  8. Define the name of the raster grid layer in the Layer name input field.
  9. Check the Delete previous flood grid checkbox to allow the software to delete any previously generated flood map raster grid.
  10. Once finished, click the [OK] button and the software will then generate a water surface elevation grid that corresponds to the flood results from HEC-RAS.

Displaying the Water Surface Elevation Raster Grid

Once the elevation raster grid has been created, it will be automatically added to the Map Data Layers panel. If desired, the user can change the way the computed water surface elevation raster grid is displayed on the Map View.

  1. From the Map Data Layers panel, click on the […] Properties button adjacent to the raster grid layer.
    Map Data Layers panel - raster grid layer - Properties button
  2. The Elevation Grid Properties dialog box will be displayed.
    Elevation Grid Properties dialog box
  3. Turn on the Elevation Color Fill checkbox and select the desired elevation color fill option.
    Elevation Color Fill checkbox option
  4. Then, click the [OK] button.

If the elevation raster is not displayed, turn off the display of other raster layers or online map layers that lie above the elevation raster in the Map Data Layers panel. The order of the layers listed in the Map Data Layers panel determines the display order of each layer, and there might be another layer that overlays the elevation raster layer. Alternatively, drag the elevation raster above the other layers listed in the Map Data Layers panel so that the elevation raster can be seen on the Map View.

Map View - elevation raster
Floodplain Mapping & Encroachments › Floodway Map Settings

Floodway Map Settings Command

The Floodway Map Settings command allows the user to control how the software will plot the computed floodplain and floodway on the Map View after computing the floodplain encroachment data. To learn more about computing floodplain encroachment data, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Follow the steps below to use the Floodway Map Settings command:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, click the Floodplain Encroachments dropdown menu and select the Floodway Map Settings command.
    Floodway Map Settings command
  2. The Floodway Map Settings dialog box will be displayed.
    Floodway Map Settings dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Floodway Map Settings command and interact with the above dialog box.

General Specifications

The General Specifications section allows the user to define the specifications for the floodway maps.

General Specifications section

The following options are available in this section:

  • Floodway profile
    This dropdown combo box lists all profiles defined in the current scenario of the project, excluding the first profile. By default, profile number 2 is selected. This dropdown combo box option is only available for steady flow data.
    Floodway profile dropdown combo box
    Note that the user can view all profiles available in the project by clicking the [Profiles] button in the Profile Plot command. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Profile Plot command.
    Profile Plot command - [Profiles] button
  • Layer group name
    This entry field defines the name of the layer group that will be created in the Map Data Layers panel, which will contain the floodplain extent, flood contour, and floodway extent layers. Note that this layer group is created only after the floodplain encroachment data have been successfully computed.

Flood Map Results

This section allows the user to choose which flood map results to generate. This section contains two panels:

  • Floodplain Extents
  • Floodway Extents

Floodplain Extents

This panel allows the user to define the boundary of the floodplain extents based on the floodway profile. Note that the contents of the Floodplain Extents panel will only be enabled if the checkbox at this panel is checked.

Floodplain Extents panel

The following sections are available in the Floodplain Extents panel:

Floodplain Edge

This section allows the user to specify how the floodplain edge is computed between cross sections.

Floodplain Edge section

The following options are available in this section:

  • Straight line between cross sections
    This radio button option allows the software to connect floodplain edges at cross sections using straight lines to generate the flood map polygon.
  • Detailed intersection with terrain surface
    This radio button option allows the software to compute the floodplain edge by intersecting the floodway profile with the selected terrain surface. This option is typically used when higher precision is required for flood map areas, especially when working with high-resolution terrain data such as LiDAR-based surfaces. The user can select from the terrain surfaces available in the project using the adjacent dropdown combo box.
    • Create flood depth grid
      This checkbox option causes the software to create a flood depth raster grid. By default, this checkbox is unchecked. Note that this checkbox is only enabled when the Detailed intersection with terrain surface option is selected.
  • Delete previous flood map
    This checkbox option allows the user to delete any previously generated flood map.

Layer Specifications

This section allows the user to define the name of the layer in the Layer name entry field that will be created in the Map Data Layers panel to store floodplain extents. The default layer name is Floodplain Extents, which is editable.

Floodplain Line Stylization

This section allows the user to define the color, width, and transparency of the polylines that will depict the boundary of the floodplain. By default, the checkbox at the Floodplain Line Stylization section header is checked.

Floodplain Line Stylization section

Floodplain Polygon Stylization

This section allows the user to define the fill color and transparency of the polygon that will depict the floodplain area. By default, the checkbox at the Floodplain Polygon Stylization section header is checked.

Flood Contours

This section allows the user to generate contour lines for the floodplain extents. By default, the checkbox at the Flood Contours section header is unchecked.

Flood Contours section

The following options are available in this section:

  • Layer name
    This entry field defines the name of the layer that will be created in the Map Data Layers panel to store the flood contours. The default layer name is BFE Contours, which may be edited.
  • Contour interval
    This entry field defines the interval between the flood contour lines. By default, the software uses a value of 1 ft for the interval.
  • Contour treatment
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of contour lines to be generated for the flood contours. The available entries are Original Line, Smoothed Line, and Straight Line.
  • Color
    This color palette allows the user to select the color of the flood contour lines.
  • Width
    This spin control entry field allows the user to select the width of the flood contour lines. By default, the software uses a value of 5. The user can enter a different value ranging from 1 to 100.
  • Style
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the style of the flood contour lines.
  • Contour labels
    This checkbox option allows the user to display labels on the flood contour lines.
  • Height
    This spin control entry field allows the user to select the height of the labels on the flood contours. By default, the software uses a value of 10. The user can enter a different value ranging from 1 to 100.
  • Align
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the alignment of the label with respect to the flood contour lines. The available alignment options are Horizontal and With Contours.

Floodway Extents

This panel allows the user to define the boundary of the floodway extents based on the floodway profile.

Floodway Extents panel

The following sections are available in the Floodway Extents panel:

Floodway Edge

This section connects floodway edges between cross sections with straight lines to create the flood map polygon. The Delete previous flood map checkbox option allows the user to delete any previously generated flood map.

Layer Specifications

This section allows the user to define the name of the layer in the Layer name entry field that will be created in the Map Data Layers panel to store the floodway extents. The default layer name is Floodway, which is editable. The Prefix profile number checkbox option allows the software to automatically add the selected profile number to the beginning of the layer name. By default, the Prefix profile number checkbox is checked.

Floodway Line Stylization

This section allows the user to define the color, width, style, and transparency of the polylines that will depict the boundary of the floodway. By default, the checkbox at the Floodway Line Stylization section header is checked.

Floodway Polygon Stylization

This section allows the user to define the fill color and transparency of the polygon that will depict the floodway area. By default, the checkbox at the Floodway Polygon Stylization section header is checked.

Note: The user can click the [Default] button to restore floodway map settings to their original default values.

Once all the options have been defined, click the [OK] button to save the floodway map settings.

Floodplain Mapping & Encroachments › Velocity Mapping

Horizontal Velocity Mapping Command

The Horizontal Velocity Mapping command is used to define velocity mapping subareas on the cross sections that plot velocity fields for unsteady flow models. These subareas are used to compute more detailed velocity estimates within a cross section, rather than the default single average value in the left overbank, main channel, and right overbank. The flow elements (i.e., left overbank, main channel, and right overbank) are sliced, and the number of slices is entered for each flow element to further discretize the computation of average velocities within a cross section. These averaged velocities are used for mapping velocity within the 1D cross sectional flow fields.

Follow the steps below to use the Horizontal Velocity Mapping command:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, select the Horizontal Velocity Mapping command.
    Horizontal Velocity Mapping command
  2. The Horizontal Velocity Mapping dialog box will be displayed.
    Horizontal Velocity Mapping dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Horizontal Velocity Mapping command and interact with the above dialog box.

River Stationing Velocity Distribution

In this tabular section, the river name, reach name, and the corresponding river stations of the current project are displayed under River Name, Reach Name, and River Station columns. The user can enter the number of slices for each flow element (i.e., left overbank, main channel, and right overbank) under LOB, Channel, and ROB columns. By default, the software sets up five slices for each flow element. However, the user can alter these values as per modeling requirements. The number of total slices for each cross section is displayed under the Total column.

Note that each cross section can have a maximum of 45 slices in total, and a minimum of 1 slice for each flow element (i.e., left overbank, main channel, and right overbank).

Selected Cells Group Editing

This section allows the user to edit the number of slices at multiple cross sections at once. The user can select the desired cells from the River Stationing Velocity Distribution data table and then edit the number of slices using one of the following options:

  • No change: This radio button entry is selected by default. When this option is selected, the number of slices remains unchanged.
  • Add constant: This radio button entry allows the user to add a constant value to the existing slice count. The new value will be the sum of the previous value and a constant value provided by the user.
  • Apply value: This radio button entry allows the user to provide a new slice count for the selected cells.

After selecting the preferred option, click on the [Apply Change] button to update the new values in the cells.

[Apply Change] button

Note that clicking on the [Defaults] button will reset the number of slices to the default value (i.e., 5).

Once the number of slices is defined, the user can click on the [OK] button. The software will create 1D interpolated velocity results using the computed velocities at each cross section.

Sediment & Specialty Analysis › Sediment Transport

Fixed Sediment Elevations Command

In GeoHECRAS, the Fixed Sediment Elevations command allows the user to define filled-in sediment elevations for a river channel. This command is used to fill in portions of cross sections with sediment. The sediment is assumed to be at a constant elevation in any particular cross section.

Follow the steps below to use the Fixed Sediment Elevations command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Cross Sections dropdown menu and select the Fixed Sediment Elevations command.
    Fixed Sediment Elevations Command
  2. The Fixed Sediment Elevations dialog box will be displayed.
    Fixed Sediment Elevations Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Fixed Sediment Elevations command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting River Reach

The Select River Reach section allows the user to select the river and reach to be assigned for sediment elevation.

Follow the steps below to manually select the river and reach to be assigned for sediment elevation:

  1. Click on the River dropdown combo box and select the river to be assigned for sediment elevation.
    River Dropdown Combo Box
  2. Then, click the Reach dropdown combo box and select the reach to be assigned for sediment elevation.
    Reach Dropdown Combo Box

Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to select the river and reach from the Map View as shown below. The Fixed Sediment Elevations dialog box will temporarily disappear, allowing the user to select the river reach from the Map View. After selecting the river reach, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The dialog box will be redisplayed with the river and reach shown as selected in the respective dropdown combo boxes.

[Pick] Button - Select River Reach Section

In addition, a graphical plot showing a longitudinal view of the river reach and the sediment elevation along the river reach will be displayed in this section.

Notes:

  • If a river reach is preselected from the Map View prior to running this command, then the selected river reach will be displayed in the River and Reach dropdown combo boxes.
  • If the model contains a single river and reach, they will be automatically selected in the River and Reach dropdown combo boxes.

Sediment Elevation Editing

This section allows the user to set or edit the sediment values over a range of cross sections that define filled-in sediment elevation for the selected river channel.

Sediment Elevation Editing Section

The following options are provided to have a sediment fill over a range of cross sections:

  • Draw
  • Project Slope
  • Interpolate Elevation

Draw

This panel allows the user to manually draw the sediment elevation along the selected river channel.

Follow the steps below to define sediment elevation:

  1. Click the [Draw] button.
    [Draw] Button
  2. Place the cursor over the graphical plot available under the Select River Reach section. The cursor will change into a crosshair. Now, draw the sediment elevation on the graphical plot available under the Select River Reach section.
  3. After drawing the sediment elevation, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The software will then automatically draw and compute the sediment elevation along the selected river channel.
    Drawn Sediment Elevation

Note that the drawn sediment elevation should be sloped downwards for best computational results.

Project Slope

This panel allows the user to define the sediment elevation at the upstream and the downstream cross sections and then project the sediment fill on a slope over the range of selected cross sections.

Project Slope Panel

The following subsections are available in this panel:

Select Cross Section Range

This subsection allows the user to select the downstream-most and upstream-most river stations. The following entries are available in this subsection:

  • Downstream cross section
    Click on this dropdown combo box to select the cross section that will be used as the downstream-most river station. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button adjacent to the Downstream cross section dropdown combo box to select the downstream cross section from the Map View.
    Downstream Cross Section Dropdown Combo Box
    Note that by default, the software selects the cross section at the downstream end of the river reach.
  • Upstream cross section
    Click on this dropdown combo box to select the cross section that will be used as the upstream-most river station. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to select the upstream cross section from the Map View.
    Upstream Cross Section Dropdown Combo Box
    Note that by default, the software selects the cross section at the upstream end of the river reach.

Define Sediment Elevation

This subsection allows the user to define the sediment elevation for the cross sections along the river channel.

Define Sediment Elevation Subsection

The sediment elevation can be defined by manually entering the value in the Sediment Elevation entry field.

The Options subsection allows the user to select a specific option in order to define the sediment elevation for each of the cross sections within the selected range. The following options are available:

  • The Same fill for all cross sections radio button option allows the user to define the same sediment elevation for each cross section in the selected range.
  • The Project from upstream XS at a slope (V:H) radio button option allows the user to project the sediment fill at a slope from the selected upstream cross section.
  • The Project from downstream XS at a slope (V:H) radio button option allows the user to project the sediment fill at a slope from the selected downstream cross section.

After defining the sediment elevation, click the [Apply] button to define the filled-in sediment elevation for the selected river channel.

Interpolate Elevation

This panel allows the user to define the sediment elevation for the downstream-most and the upstream -most cross sections and then automatically interpolate sediment elevations for all the cross sections in between the selected range.

Interpolate Elevation Panel

The following subsections are available in this panel:

Select Cross Section Range

This subsection allows the user to select the downstream-most and upstream-most river stations. The following entries are available:

  • Downstream cross section
    Click on Downstream cross section dropdown combo box to select the cross section that will be used as the downstream-most river station. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to select the downstream cross section from the Map View.
    [Pick] Button - Downstream Cross Section
    Note that by default, the software selects the cross section at the downstream end of the river reach.
  • Upstream cross section
    Click on Upstream cross section dropdown combo box to select the cross section that will be used as the upstream-most river station. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to select the upstream cross section from the Map View.
    [Pick] Button - Upstream Cross Section
    Note that by default, the software selects the cross section at the upstream end of the river reach.

Define Sediment Elevation Parameters

This subsection allows the user to define the sediment elevation for the upstream and downstream cross sections to be used for linear interpolation.

Define Sediment Elevation Parameters Subsection

The user can define the downstream and upstream sediment elevation by manually entering the values in the Downstream sediment elevation and Upstream sediment elevation entry fields, respectively.

After defining the sediment elevation, click the [Apply] button to define the filled-in sediment elevation for the selected river channel.

Sediment Elevation Data

This section provides a table that displays the final sediment elevation values for each cross section. The user can further modify these sediment elevation values for the cross sections populated in the table.

Sediment Elevation Data Section

Selected Cells Group Editing

This section allows the user to enter/edit the sediment elevation data in the Sediment Elevation Data summary table (described above).

Selected Cells Group Editing Section

Follow the steps below to update the sediment elevation data:

  1. Select the cell in the Sediment Elevation Data table whose data is to be updated. Hold down the [Ctrl] key to select multiple cells.
  2. Click the Define change dropdown combo box and select one of the options to update the cell’s value.
    Define Change Dropdown Combo Box

    The following options are available:

    • No Change: This option will not make any changes to the selected cell’s value.
    • Add Constant: This option adds a constant value to the selected cell’s value.
    • Multiply By Factor: This option multiplies the selected cell's value by a user-defined number.
    • Apply Value: This option replaces the selected cell's value with the user-specified value.
  3. Enter the change coefficient in the adjacent entry field.
  4. Click the [Apply Change] button to apply the defined sediment elevation adjustment. Note that the [Apply Change] button is disabled when No Change option is selected.

When all the sediment elevation information is defined in the Fixed Sediment Elevations dialog box, click the [OK] button to define the filled-in sediment elevation for the selected river channel.

Sediment & Specialty Analysis › Shear Stress Diagnostics

Troubleshooting Shear Stress Results

Profile line plot shear stress results are not available unless shear stress results have been computed for the flood map. HEC-RAS computes the flood map shear stress results independently of the simulation and then retrieves these results when displaying the profile line plot.

This issue can be easily corrected by displaying shear stress on the flood map, as detailed below:

  1. Right-click on the project name tab at the top of the Map View window and select the Open Folder Containing Project command.
    Shear-stress-3.png
  2. The project folder will be displayed. Look for the folder with the current Scenario name (1% Scenario in this example) and delete the folder and its contents.
    2020-11-30_18-29-43-New.png
  3. Then, from the Results ribbon menu, click the Flood Map command.
    2020-11-30_18-30-16-New.png
  4. The Flood Map dialog box will be displayed.
    2020-11-30_18-30-34-New.png
  5. From the General Specifications section, click on the Flood map type dropdown combo box, and then select the Shear Stress option.
    Shear-stress-5-latest.png
  6. Click the [OK] button.
  7. The software will take some time to calculate the shear stress for the flood map.
  8. Once the shear stress flood map has been computed, right-click on the Profile Line and then select the Profile Line Plot command.
    Shear-stress-8.png
  9. The software will then display the shear stress results for Profile Line Plot.
    2020-11-30_18-41-34-new.png

If you are still having issues, contact our technical support. They will be glad to assist you further.

Output, Reporting & Visualization › Cross Section Plots

HEC‑RAS Cross Section Plot Options

The HEC‑RAS cross section plots can be customized for specific requirements, as described below.

Custom Labels

The labels used in the cross section plot can be customized. Select Labels from the Options menu to display the Plot Labels dialog box. This dialog box allows the user to control what labels are displayed as well as change the axes label and plot title text.

Plot Labels dialog box


In addition, the user can change the size of the text displayed on the plot. Select Font Sizes from the Options menu to display the Graphics Font Point Sizes dialog box that allows the font sizes to be specified.

Graphics Font Point Sizes dialog box

Lines, Symbols, and Fill Styles and Colors

The plotted lines, symbols, and fills can be customized. Select Lines and Symbols from the Options menu to display the Line Style Options dialog box. This dialog box provides numerous stylization and color options for lines, symbols, and fill patterns.

Line Style Options dialog box

To restore the cross section plot back to the default settings, click the [Reset Defaults] button. The software will then reset the plotted lines, symbols, and fills back to the installed default values.

Specifying a Plot Region

The software allows the user to specify a region of the cross section plot to view. Select Zoom In from the Options menu and the cursor will change to a Magnifying Glass unknown node Zoom tool. Click and drag with the cursor a rectangular region on the cross section plot to view. To zoom back, select Zoom Out or Full Plot from the Options menu to reset the cross section plot view area to the extents of the model data.

For additional control in specifying a region for viewing, select Set Temporary Scaling or Set Permanent Scaling from the Options menu. The HEC-RAS dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box allows the user to specify the starting and ending stations for the horizontal X axis and the minimum and maximum elevations for the vertical Y axis. In addition, the user can specify the axis labeling increment for the defined axes.

HEC-RAS dialog box for entering the scaling factors


To restore the cross section plot region back to the default settings, click the [Defaults] button. The software will then reset the cross section plot region back to the extents of the model data.

Grid Lines and Border Options

The software allows the user to specify the major and minor grid lines as well as the plot border to be displayed. Select Grid from the Options menu to display the following HEC-RAS dialog box.

HEC-RAS dialog box for selecting grid options

unknown node

Output, Reporting & Visualization › Profile Plots

HEC‑RAS Profile Plot Options

The HEC‑RAS profile plots can be customized for specific requirements, as described below.

Cross Section Landmarks

The defined cross sections along the selected river reaches can be displayed on the profile plot. Select Options | Landmarks and the following context menu is displayed. Select the options desired for displaying the cross section locations along the river reach. A checkbox will be displayed adjacent to the selected options.

Cross-Section-Results.png

The selected cross section landmark options will then be shown along the bottom of the profile plot.

Profile-Plot-with-Landmarks.png

X Axis Horizontal Stationing

The X axis can be labeled for specific requirements for the river horizontal stationing. Select Options | X Axis to display the X axis labeling dialog box. The units that are displayed in the dialog box are dependent upon the base units selected (i.e., Metric, US) for the project.

Profile-Plot-X-Axis-Stationing.png

Custom Labels

The labels used in the profile plot can be customized. Select Options | Labels to display the Plot Labels dialog box. This dialog box allows the user to control what labels are displayed as well as change the axes label and plot title text.

Profile-Plot-Label-Options-1.png

In addition, the user can change the size of the text displayed on the plot. Select Options | Font Sizes to display a dialog box that allows the font sizes to be specified.

Profile-Plot-Font-Sizes.png

Lines, Symbols, and Fill Styles and Colors

The plotted lines, symbols, and fills can be customized. Select Options | Lines and Symbols to display the following dialog box. This dialog box provides numerous stylization and color options for lines, symbols, and fill patterns.

Profile-Plot-Line-Symbol-Fill-Options.png

To restore the profile plot back to the default settings, click the [Reset Defaults] button. The software will then reset the plotted lines, symbols, and fills back to the installed default values.

Specifying a Plot Region

The software allows the user to specify a region of the profile plot to view. Select Options | Zoom In and the cursor will change to a Magnifying Glass unknown node Zoom tool. Click and drag with the cursor a rectangular region on the profile plot for viewing. To zoom back, select Options | Zoom Out or select Options | Full Plot to reset the profile plot view area to the extents of the model data.

For further control in specifying a region for viewing. Select Options | Scaling and the following dialog box is displayed. This allows the user to specify the starting and ending stations for the horizontal X axis and the minimum and maximum elevations for the vertical Y axis. In addition, the user can specify the axis labeling increment for the defined axes.

Profile-Plot-Axes-Specifications.png

To restore the profile plot region back to the default settings, click the [Defaults] button. The software will then reset the profile plot region back to the extents of the model data.

Grid Lines and Border Options

The software allows the user to specify the major and minor grid lines as well as the plot border to be displayed. Select Options | Grid and the following dialog box is displayed.

Profile-Plot-Grid-Tick-Marks-1.png
Output, Reporting & Visualization › Profile Plots

HEC‑RAS Output Water Surface Profile Plots

The software can generate profile plots (sometimes called long sections or longitudinal profiles) of the HEC‑RAS steady flow and unsteady flow computational results, displaying the water surface elevation, energy gradeline elevation, critical depth elevation, channel invert, bank stations, structures and more. In addition, the profile plots can be printed and exported to AutoCAD.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about additional options for customizing the profile plots.

Displaying Profile Plots

To display the analysis output results in a profile plot, select Profile Plot command from the Results ribbon menu.

Profile Plot ribbon menu command

Selecting this menu command will display the HEC‑RAS analysis results in a profile plot.

Profile Plot dialog box

Selecting Profiles to Plot

To change which water surface profiles should be displayed on the profile plot, click the [Profiles] button at the top of the window to display a dropdown combo box listing the computed profiles. To plot, select the checkboxes corresponding to specific profiles.

Profiles dropdown combo box

Selecting River Reaches to Plot

For a HEC‑RAS model with multiple river reaches, the user can select one or more river reaches to plot. Click the [Reaches] button at the top of the window to display a dropdown combo box listing the river reaches contained within the model. To plot, select the checkboxes corresponding to specific river reaches.

Reaches dropdown combo box

Profile Plot Variables

To change the variables to be displayed on the profile plot, select Variables from the Options menu. The software will display the Select Variables dialog box which allows the user to select variables to plot.

Displaying Select Variables dialog box

Printing Profile Plot

The cross section plots can be printed with one or more cross sections per page. To print a single current cross section, select Print from the File menu. The Print Options dialog box will be displayed.

Displaying Print Options dialog box

From the displayed dialog box, the user can define the horizontal and vertical print scale to use for printing the profile plots. If the profile plot occupies more than one page, the software will automatically paginate the profile plot across multiple pages.

Exporting Profile Plots to AutoCAD

The profile plot can be exported to AutoCAD. To export a profile plot to AutoCAD, select Write DXF File from the File menu. A dialog box will be displayed which allows a specific DXF file name to be exported.

Write DXF File option of File menu
Output, Reporting & Visualization › Hydrographs & Time Series

Time Series Nodes

In hydraulic modeling, a time series node refers to a specific point or location within a hydraulic system where time series data are collected, analyzed, or specified. These nodes are used to define the time-varying boundary conditions or parameters at a particular location along a river or channel.

Time series nodes are commonly used to represent water levels, flow rates, velocities, or any other variable that changes over time. This information helps in project simulation and analysis, and sheds light on how these parameters fluctuate at different points in the hydraulic system, all of which provides insights into:

  • Dynamic behavior of water flow
  • Flood propagation
  • Sediment transport
  • Other hydraulic phenomena

In GeoHECRAS, the user can create time series nodes on the Map View using the Assign Time Series Nodes and Draw Time Series Nodes commands. Both commands have similar functionality but somewhat distinct workflows.

Assigning Time Series Nodes

The Assign Time Series Nodes command allows the user to manually assign an existing node on the Map View as a time series node.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Time Series Nodes command:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, click the Time Series Plots dropdown menu and select the Assign Time Series Nodes command.
    Assign Time Series Nodes command
  2. The Assign Time Series Nodes dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign Time Series Nodes dialog box
  3. Click the [Pick] button adjacent to the Time series nodes read-only field.
  4. The Assign Time Series Nodes dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select node(s) from the Map View.
  5. Select node(s) from the Map View. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  6. The Assign Time Series Nodes dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Time series nodes read-only field will display the number of selected node(s).
    Time series nodes read-only field
    Notes:
    • If the user selects only one node from the Map View, then the dialog box will be redisplayed with the Time series node name radio button option selected.
    • If the user selects more than one node from the Map View, then the dialog box will be redisplayed with the Auto-name time series node, prefix radio button option selected.
  7. If a single node is selected, then the entry field next to the Time series node name radio button option allows the user to name the selected node.
  8. If multiple nodes are selected, then the entry field next to the Auto-name time series node, prefix radio button option allows the user to define the prefix for auto-naming the selected nodes. The software auto-names the time series nodes using the defined prefix, for example, TS-##, where ## represents the time series nodes count (i.e., 01, 02, and so on) and TS represents the prefix.
  9. Click the [Apply] button, and the software will assign the selected node(s) as time series node(s).

Drawing Time Series Nodes

The Draw Time Series Nodes command allows the user to manually draw a time series node on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw Time Series Nodes command:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, click the Time Series Plots dropdown menu and select the Draw Time Series Nodes command.
    Draw Time Series Nodes command
  2. The Draw Time Series Nodes dialog box will be displayed.
    Draw Time Series Nodes dialog box
  3. Click the [Draw] button adjacent to the Time series node read-only field.
  4. The Draw Time Series Node dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw a node on the Map View.

    Notes:

    • If the Time series node name radio button option is selected, the user can draw only one time series node at a time.
    • If the Auto-name time series node, prefix radio button option is selected, the user can draw multiple time series nodes one after another.
  5. Draw node(s) on the Map View. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  6. The Draw Time Series Nodes dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Time series node read-only field will change from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    Time series node read-only field
  7. If a single time series node is drawn, then the entry field next to the Time series node name radio button option allows the user to name it.
  8. If multiple nodes are drawn, then the entry field next to the Auto-name time series node, prefix radio button option allows the user to define the prefix for auto-naming the time series nodes. The software auto-names the time series nodes using the defined prefix, for example, TS-##, where ## represents the time series nodes value (i.e., 01, 02, and so on) and TS represents the prefix.
  9. Click the [Apply] button, and the software will create time series node(s) on the Map View.

Displaying Time Series Plot

The Time Series Plot command of the GeoHECRAS software allows the user to request various types of output such as water surface elevation, velocity time series, and flow depth time series along the user-defined time series nodes.

Follow the steps below to use the Time Series Plot command:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, click the Time Series Plots dropdown menu and select the Time Series Plot command. Alternatively, the user can double-click on the time series node in the Map View.
    Time Series Plot command
  2. The Time Series Plot dialog box will be displayed.
    Time Series Plot dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Time Series Plot command and interact with the above dialog box.

Scenario

The Scenario dropdown combo box allows the user to view output results from different scenarios. To learn more about working with multiple scenarios, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Scenario dropdown combo box

Time Series Nodes

The Time Series Nodes dropdown combo box allows the user to select which output results from time series node to display. The plot can display output results for multiple time series nodes at the same time.

Note that the user can check the Select All checkbox to select all the time series nodes at once.

Time Series Nodes dropdown combo box

Plot type

The Plot type dropdown combo box allows the user to view various types of data output along the selected time series node(s). The following options are listed in the dropdown combo box:

  1. Flood Depth
  2. Velocity
  3. Water Surface Elevation
Plot type dropdown combo box

The GeoHECRAS software also allows the user to create professional printouts of time series node plots and to save them as image files as well as export them to PDF files. To print or export the results of a time series node plot into a different format, right-click anywhere on the plot and select the Export to PDF, Save as Image, or Print options.

Right-click context menu commands

Time Series Data

The Time Series Data tab contains a table that displays results for the selected time series node(s).

Time Series Data tab

Deleting Time Series Nodes

The Delete Time Series Nodes command allows the user to selectively delete the user-defined time series nodes from the project.

Follow the steps below to use the Delete Time Series Nodes command:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, click the Time Series Plots dropdown menu and select the Delete Time Series Nodes command.
    Delete Time Series Nodes command
  2. The Delete Time Series Nodes dialog box will be displayed.
    Delete Time Series Nodes dialog box
  3. In the Available Time Series Nodes grid, check the checkboxes corresponding to the time series nodes you want to delete. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to select the time series nodes from the Map View.
    [Pick] button
    Note: To select all the time series nodes at once, click the [Select All] button..
  4. The number of selected time series nodes will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.
    Total selected read-only field
    Note: To cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process, click the [Clear All] button.
  5. After selecting the time series nodes, click the [OK] button.
  6. The following confirmational dialog box will be displayed.
    Delete Time Series Nodes confirmational dialog box
  7. Click the [Yes] button and the selected time series nodes will be deleted. To abort the process, click the [No] button.

Zooming Time Series Nodes

The Zoom to Time Series Node command allows the user to selectively zoom to the user-defined time series nodes on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to use the Zoom to Time Series Node command:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, click the Time Series Plots dropdown menu and select the Zoom to Time Series Node command.
    Zoom to Time Series Node command
  2. The Zoom to Time Series Node dialog box will be displayed.
    Zoom to Time Series Node dialog box
  3. In the Select Time Series Nodes section, select the time series node you want to zoom to. Click the [Ok] button.
    [Ok] button
  4. The software will then zoom to the selected time series node and the time series node will be highlighted on the Map View.
Output, Reporting & Visualization › Hydrographs & Time Series

Viewing Stage and Flow Hydrographs

The GeoHECRAS software can generate stage and flow hydrographs of the HEC‑RAS unsteady flow computational results for various node types such as Bridges/Culverts, Inline Structures, Lateral Structures, and Storage Areas. In addition, the hydrographs can be copied to the Windows clipboard and printed for later use.

Displaying Stage and Flow Hydrographs

If the user has performed an unsteady flow analysis, then stage and flow hydrographs will be available for viewing.

To view a stage and/or flow hydrograph, follow these steps:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, expand the Time Series Plots dropdown combo box and choose the Stage & Flow Hydrographs command.
    Viewing-Stage-and-Flow-Hydrographs-Imag-1.png
  2. The Stage and Flow Hydrographs dialog box will be displayed.
    Stage and Flow Hydrographs dialog box

Selecting River Reach

For an HEC‑RAS model with multiple river reaches, the user can select one or more river reaches to plot. The River and Reach dropdown combo boxes display a listing of the river and corresponding reaches contained within the model. The user can select the preferred river reach using these dropdown combo boxes.

River and Reach dropdowns

Selecting River Station

The River Station (River Sta.) dropdown combo box displays a listing of all the river stations contained within the selected reach. The user can select the river station to plot the hydrograph. To move to the next downstream river station, click the [↓] button. To move upstream, click the [↑] button.

River Station (River Sta.) dropdown

Selecting Node Type

The Type menu of the Stage and Flow Hydrograph dialog box allows the user to select the specific node type to be viewed.

Type menu


By default, the plot comes up with a node type of cross section selected. This allows the user to view hydrographs at cross sections only.

Other available node types include:

  • Bridges/Culverts
  • Inline Structures
  • Lateral Structures
  • Storage Areas
  • SA/2D Connections
  • Pump Stations
  • Ground Water Interaction
  • SA/2D Flow Area – BCLines

Stage and Flow Hydrograph Plot Options

The Stage and Flow Hydrographs dialog box provides several options for changing the viewpoint of the stage and flow hydrographs. The Plot Stage and Plot Flow checkboxes allows the user to plot the stage and flow hydrograph, respectively. The user can check both the checkboxes to plot both the hydrographs simultaneously. Checking the Obs Stage and Obs Flow checkboxes allows the user to plot the observed stage and flow hydrograph data at locations where gaged information is stored in a DSS file. The Use Ref Stage checkbox can be checked to plot the stage hydrograph using a reference stage.

Stage and flow hydrographs plot options

The user can switch between three tabbed panels: Stage Flow, Table and Rating Curve to view the graphical plot, data in tabular form or the rating curve plot of the event. Additionally, the dialog box also provides statistics about the hydrograph plots in a tabular form. The table’s Maximum, Time at Max and Volume (acre-ft) columns shows the peak stage and flow, and time of peak and volume, respectively.

Stage Flow, Table and Rating Curve panels

Graphical Plot Options

The Options menu of the Stage and Flow Hydrographs dialog box provides several plotting features for viewing the graphical plots.

Options menu


The below sections describe how to use each of the above shown plotting features.

Zoom In

This option allows the user to zoom in on a portion of the graphic plot. The user can select the Zoom In command from the Options menu and specify the area to zoom in with the mouse.

To define the zoom area, the user can place the mouse pointer at a corner of the desired zoom area. Then the user can press and hold the mouse button and drag the mouse to define a box containing the desired zoom area.

Zoom In command

On releasing the mouse button, the viewing area will display the zoomed-in graphic plot. A small window showing the entire plot will be placed in one of the corners of the plotting area. This window is called the Zoom Window. The Zoom Window shows the entire graphic plot with a box around the zoomed in area. The user can move the zoom box or resize it to change the viewing area.

Zoom Window

Zoom Out

Selecting the Zoom Out option causes the software to double the size of the currently zoomed in graphic plot.

Full Plot

Selecting the Full Plot option causes the software to re-display the graphic plot at its original size.

Pan

This option allows the user to move the graphic plot around. After selecting the Pan option, the user can press and hold the mouse button over the graphic plot, then move the graphic plot in the desired direction. Alternatively, the user can hold down the [Shift] key to put the pointer into the Pan mode. Releasing the [Shift] key turns the Pan mode off.

Animate

This option is generally used for unsteady flow output analysis but can also be used for steady flow output. This option works with the cross section, profile, and X, Y, Z perspective plots. To learn more about the Animate option, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Plans

This option allows the user to select from the available plans (Scenarios) for plotting. The default plan is the currently opened plan. The user can select additional plans to compare results graphically.

Plan Selection dialog box

View Interpolated XS’s

This option allows the user to view the interpolated cross sections. To learn how to interpolate cross sections, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Number of Decimal Places

This option allows the user to define the number of decimal places for the flow and hydrograph table. Selecting the Number of Decimal Places option will display the RAS dialog box where the user can enter the value (between 0 and 9) to define the number of decimal places.

RAS dialog box for entering decimal places

Lines and Symbols

This option allows the user to customize the line types, line colors, line widths, symbol types, symbol sizes, symbol colors, fill patterns, and line labels. To learn more about the Lines and Symbols option, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Scaling

The Set Temporary Scale and Set Persistent Scale options allow the user to define the scaling used for the plot. The user can set the minimum, maximum, and labeling increment for the X and Y axis. Scaling can be set temporarily, or to be persistent (scaling stays constant for all river stations). Persistent scaling is only available for the cross section and rating curve plots. Selecting either of the options will display the HEC-RAS dialog box where the user can enter the scaling factor for minimum, maximum and labeling increment values for the X and Y axis.

HEC-RAS dialog box for entering scale factors

Grid

This option allows the user to overlay a grid on top of the graphic plot. Selecting the Grid option will display the HEC-RAS dialog box where users can check the desired checkboxes to display both major and minor tics as well as borders around the plot.

HEC-RAS dialog box for displaying grid lines

Zoom Window Location

This option allows the user to control the placement and size of the Zoom Window. Selecting the Zoom Window Locations option will display the Zoom Window Location and Size dialog box. In this dialog box, the user can select the corner where the Zoom Window will be displayed as well as enter the height and width for the Zoom Window.

Zoom Window Location and Size dialog box

Font Sizes

This option allows the user to control the size of all of the text displayed on the graphic. Selecting the Font Sizes option will display the Graphics Font Point Sizes dialog box. In this dialog box, the user can define text size for captions, legend, axis labels and titles, Manning’s n and Reach labels.

Graphics Font Point Sizes dialog box

View List of DSS Paths

This option allows the user to view the DSS file paths used to define the unsteady flow data. Selecting the View List of DSS Paths option will display the List of paths in the flow and stage editor dialog box that lists the DSS pathnames along with DSS file location.

List of paths in the flow and stage editor dialog box

Sending Graphics to the Windows Clipboard

The user can send the graphic plot to the Windows clipboard. Moving a graphic to the clipboard allows that graphic to then be pasted into another piece of software (i.e., a word processor or another graphics program).

To transfer the graphic plot to the Windows clipboard, the user can select the Copy to Clipboard command from the File menu. The graphic plot will automatically be sent to the Windows clipboard.

Copy to Clipboard command

Printing Graphic Plot

The software also allows the user to send the graphical plots directly to a printer. Selecting the Print command from the File menu will display the Print Options dialog box. This dialog box allows the user to modify the default print options. After selecting the desired options, the user can click the [Print] button. The graphic plot will be sent to the Windows print manager. The print manager will then send the plot to the default printer.

Print Options dialog box

The software also allows the user to print multiple graphic plots at one time. Selecting the Print Multiple command from the File menu will display the Multiple Location Print – Select Locations dialog box. In this dialog box, the user can select the node type and the corresponding river stations whose stage and flow hydrographs are to be printed.

Multiple Location Print - Select Locations dialog box
Output, Reporting & Visualization › Tabular & Detailed Output

Detailed Output

In GeoHECRAS, the Detailed Output panel of the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box helps the user to find model stability problems. To pinpoint the stability issues, the user can generate the computational output file and/or detailed log output file. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box.

Detailed Output panel of the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the Detailed Output panel of the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box.

Write Computational Output File

This section allows the user to write out a limited list of variables at the computational time step level. This is a very useful tool for assisting in debugging an unsteady flow model. It is often very helpful to see a few output variables, like water surface and flow, at the detailed computational time step in order to see when and where a model is going unstable.

Write Computational Output File section

By default, only the water surface and the flow rate will be written out when no options are selected. This section allows the user to select additional variables to be written to the output file. There is also a Reporting Time Window (Optional) section for controlling the time period for writing this data.

The user can select from the following list of variables available to be written to the computational level output file:

  • Water surface elevation error
  • Flow error: Numerical error in computed flow
  • Depth: Depth of the water from channel invert
  • Invert elevation: Elevation of main channel invert
  • Channel velocity: Average velocity in main channel
  • Total velocity: Average velocity of entire cross section
  • Channel Courant Number: Courant Number for main channel only
  • Total Courant Number: Courant Number for entire cross section
  • Differential Equation Parts: Separate components of the unsteady flow equations (Momentum and Continuity equations)

Write Detailed Log Output File

If there is a possible stability problem, and the user cannot find the location using the graphical output discussed above, another option for finding the location of the problem is to use the detailed log output for debugging.

Write Detailed Log Output File section

The user can check the Write Detail Log Output File checkbox to allow the software to generate the detailed log output file.

The following options are provided to write output information to a log file:

  • Defined input hydrographs
    This checkbox option can be used to write the input hydrographs to the log file. This can be used to ensure that the model is receiving the correct flow data.
  • Defined parameter option and initial conditions
    This checkbox option can be used to write the parameter options and initial conditions to the log file.
  • Computed output hydrographs
    This checkbox option can be used to write the computed hydrographs to the log file. This is a good option for checking what was computed. However, if the user has selected to have hydrographs computed at many locations, this could end up taking a lot of file and disk space.
  • Detailed log output for debugging
    This checkbox option can be used to control the detailed output of results from the unsteady flow simulation. Selecting this option will cause the software to write detailed information on a time step by time step basis. This option is useful when the unsteady flow simulation is going unstable or completely blowing up (stopping). Checking this checkbox turns on the detailed output for every time step. The user can use the Reporting Time Window (optional) subsection to limit this output to a specific time window during the unsteady flow simulation. Limiting the log output is accomplished by entering a starting date and time and an ending date and time. Additionally, the user can request that the detailed log output only be written when the program reaches a certain number of iterations.

After selecting the required options in the Detailed Output panel, run the unsteady flow simulation. Then, click the View Log File command from the Results ribbon menu to view the detailed log output. The software displays the detailed log output in a default text editor (e.g., Notepad).

View Log File command from the Results ribbon menu
Troubleshooting & Best Practices › General Modeling Problems

Fixing HEC-RAS Modeling Problems

Introduction

An unstable numerical model is one in which either the types and quantity of numerical errors grow to the point that the solution begins to oscillate, or the errors become so large that the computations can no longer be performed. This is a problem that is fairly typical of unsteady flow models of variable size or complexity.

In order to develop a good unsteady flow model of a river system, the user must understand the factors that often lead to unsteady flow equation solutions. Therefore, the objective of this article is to provide information on how to find, detect, and fix model stability problems using the tools in the CivilGEO software.

Detecting Model Stability Problems

One of the hardest things about working with an unsteady flow model is getting the model to be stable as well as accurate for the range of events to be modeled. When the user first starts putting together an unsteady flow model, the software will likely run into some stability problems.

The following is a list of common stability problem indicators:

  • Program stops running during the simulation with a math error, or states that the matrix solution went unstable.
  • Program goes to the maximum number of iterations for several time steps in a row with large numerical errors.
  • Program generates unrealistic oscillations in the computed stage and flow hydrographs or in the water surface profiles.
  • The computed error in the water surface calculation is very large.

What to Do When a Stability Problem Occurs?

The following steps should be taken when the stability problem occurs:

  1. Note the simulation time and location from the computation window when the program either blew up or first started to go to the maximum number of iterations with large water surface errors.
  2. Use the HEC-RAS Profile and Cross Section Plots as well as the Tabular Output to find the problem location and issue.
  3. If you cannot find the problem using the normal HEC-RAS output, turn on the Write Computational Output File option in the Detailed Output panel of the Unsteady Flow Computational Options command.
  4. View the time series and profile output associated with the Detailed Output computations. Locate the simulation output at the simulation time when the solution first started to go bad.
  5. Find the river station locations that did not meet the solution tolerances. Then check the data in this general area.

Computational Window

The Computational Window is the first place to look for problems:

  • When the maximum number of iterations is reached, and the solution error is greater than the predefined tolerance, the time step, river, reach, river station, water surface elevation, and the amount of error is reported.
  • When the error rate increases too much, the solution will stop and say that the Solution Solver Failed.
  • Usually, the first river station to show up on the window will give clues to the source of instabilities.

An example of the Computation Window with an unstable model solution is shown below.

Example of the Computation Window

In this Computations Window, the red progress bar indicates the point at which the model became unstable and could not complete the simulation. The Computation Messages window provides a running dialog of what is happening in the simulation at a given time step in each location. This allows the user to watch as errors occur during the simulation. Once the simulation has crashed, don't close the Computations Window. Rather, scroll up through the messages and try to find where the series of errors begins to accelerate and at what time.

Sometimes the first error that occurs at the beginning of the simulation is a result of the model settling out after the transition from initial conditions to the first-time step. Mainly this kind of error only occurs once for that given river station. Focus on reoccurring or compounding errors first. Note that the relatively small, isolated errors are generally not problematic.

Utilizing the Profile Plot

The profile plot is typically the first graphical tool used to identify problem areas. Visible errors are shown distinctly in this plot, and you can see what is going on in the entire reach at the same time. Stepping through each profile using the animation tool allows you to see changes over time, including the progression of the flood wave as well as the initial appearance and frequency of errors.

To display the Animation Control dialog box, select Animate from the Options menu in the Profile Plot.

Animation Control dialog box

The profile output is taken from the detailed output file. Therefore, it is sometimes necessary to refine the detailed output interval to effectively see the beginning of instabilities. The profile plot allows the user to click on a given node to determine its river stationing. Find the node where the instability occurred first and then investigate further.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about how to use HEC‑RAS profile plots.

Computational Level Output for Debugging

In the CivilGEO software, the Write Computational Output File section of the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box helps users to find the source of model stability problems. The user can optionally enable this section to view output at the computation interval level when performing an unsteady flow analysis using the Unsteady Flow Computational Options command. This is accomplished by checking the checkboxes in the Write Computational Output File section.

The Write Computational Output File section allows the user to write out a limited list of variables at the computational time step level. This is a very useful tool for assisting in debugging an unsteady flow model. It is often very helpful to see a few output variables, like water surface and flow, at the detailed computational time step scale in order to see when and where a model is going unstable.

Write Computational Output File section

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about using the Write Computational Output File section.

Time Series Plots

The software allows the user to request various types of output, such as water surface elevation, velocity time series, and flow depth time series along the time series nodes.

The Time Series Plot command is used to view computed results for user-defined time series nodes. These time series nodes are used in the software for generating a time series plot and the time series data at that node. The time-series data are helpful for calibrating a model and are required for optimization.

To learn more about working with the Time Series Plot command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Viewing Stage and Flow Hydrographs

If the user has performed an unsteady flow analysis, then stage and flow hydrographs will be available for viewing. The software can generate stage and flow hydrographs of the HEC‑RAS unsteady flow computational results for various node types, such as Bridges/Culverts, Inline Structures, Lateral Structures, and Storage Areas.

To learn more about working with the Viewing Stage and Flow Hydrographs command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Utilizing the Cross Section Plot

Using the cross section plot, the user can identify isolated problems such as incorrect bank station locations, incorrect manning’s n values, and incorrect station-elevation points. It also helps identify transition problems such as contraction and expansion areas, ineffective flow areas, and levees.

The software can generate cross section plots of the HEC‑RAS steady flow and unsteady flow computational results, displaying the water surface elevation, energy gradeline elevation, critical depth elevation, as well as a velocity distribution plot on the cross section.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about how to use cross section plots.

Profile Summary Tables

Sometimes visual clues are not available. In such situations, tabular outputs are a great help for the users to identify problems. Tabular output allows the user to display large amounts of detailed information in a concise format.

Profile summary tables are one of the tabular outputs used to show a limited number of hydraulic variables for several cross sections. The Summary Outputs command allows the user to display the HEC-RAS profile summary table.

To display this table, select the Summary Output command from the Results ribbon menu.

Select the Summary Output command

The HEC-RAS profile summary table will be displayed.

HEC-RAS profile summary table

Several standard table (Std. Tables) types are available to the user. Some of the tables are designed to provide specific information on hydraulic structures (for example, bridges and culverts), while others provide generic information at all cross sections.

To change the profile summary table to the desired tabular output, select the Std. Tables menu, and then choose the desired table option from the list. The software will then display the desired profile summary output. By default, the Standard Table 1 type of table is displayed. This table gives a summary of some of the key output variables.

Standard Table 1 type of table

The following standard table types are available to users:

  • Standard Table 1 (default)
  • Standard Table 2
  • Four XS Culvert
  • Culvert Only
  • Six XS Bridge
  • Bridge Only
  • Bridge Comparison
  • Multiple Opening
  • Four XS Inline Structure
  • Inline Structure
  • Lateral Structure
  • Encroachment 1
  • Encroachment 2
  • Encroachment 2
  • HEC-FDA
  • Ice Cover
  • Junctions
  • Storage Area
  • Conn with Culverts
  • Conn with Weir and Gates
  • Pump Stations

Note that the user can view the profile summary output table in either US unit system or metric (SI) unit. The user can select the desired unit system from the Options backstage page. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about setting the model units to metric (SI) or US units.

Detailed Output Tables

Detailed output tables are another basic type of tabular output that show hydraulic information at a single location for a single profile. The Detailed Output command allows the user to display the HEC-RAS detailed output table. To display this table, select the Detailed Output command from the Results ribbon menu.

Detailed Output command

The HEC-RAS detailed output table will be displayed.

HEC-RAS detailed output table

By default, this table displays the detailed output for cross sections. The user needs to select the appropriate river, reach, and river station from the dropdown combo boxes provided at the top of the table to display any cross section in the table. The computed profiles can be displayed by selecting the desired profile in yearly format from the Profile dropdown combo box. Additionally, different plans can be viewed by selecting a plan from the Plan dropdown combo box.

The user can also view detailed hydraulic information for other types of nodes. Select the Type menu provided on the detailed output table window to select the desired table type.

Cross Section Output

The following table types are available in the Type menu:

  • Cross Sections (default)
  • Culvert
  • Bridges
  • Multiple Openings
  • Inline Structures
  • Lateral Structures
  • Storage Areas
  • SA/2D Connections
  • Pump Stations
  • Flow Distribution in Cross Sections

Turning on Detailed Log Output for Debugging

If the user detects a possible stability problem, and is unable to find the location using the graphical output discussed above, the detailed log output for debugging is another option for finding the location of the problem. The detailed log output can be turned on by checking the Detailed log output for debugging checkbox in the Detailed Output panel of the Unsteady Flow Computational Options command.

This checkbox option can be used to control the detailed output of results from the unsteady flow simulation. This option is useful when the unsteady flow simulation is becoming unstable or completely blowing up (stopping).

To learn more about Detailed log output for debugging option, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Viewing Detailed Output

The Detailed Output panel of the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box helps the user find model stability problems. To pinpoint stability issues, the user can generate a computational output file and/or a detailed log output file.

The Detailed Output panel of the Unsteady Flow Computational Options dialog box is available in the Unsteady Flow Computational Options command. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Detailed Output panel.

DSS Output

The DSS Output shows all the hydrograph data that will be used as input to the model, including data read from HEC-DSS. For any project, the DDS output file gets stored in the folder containing the project.

DSS Output

Unsteady Flow Computations Output

The CivilGEO software provides some default computational options and tolerances for unsteady flow models. The tolerances are used in the solution of unsteady flow equations. In general, it is recommended that the default computation options and tolerances be maintained. However, the user can override the default computational options to achieve model stability while maintaining computational accuracy. Extra care should be taken while overriding the default calculation tolerances, as it could result in computational errors in the water surface profile.

Using the Unsteady Flow Computational Options command, the user can implement the following computational options for detailed unsteady flow calculations:

  • Job control parameters
  • Initial conditions calculations
  • Detailed output for each time step

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Unsteady Flow Computational Options command and its functions.

Table Output

The Table Output represents the final computed hydrographs that are written to HEC-DSS. The program lists the computed initial conditions from a backwater calculation for each of the rivers/reaches. These conditions are listed in the order they were computed during the backwater analysis, which is downstream to upstream.

An example of the initial conditions output is shown below.

Example of the initial conditions output

During the unsteady flow computations, the program will output detailed information for cross sections, bridges/culverts, inline weir/spillways, lateral weir/spillways, storage areas, and storage area connections. This information should be reviewed closely when the software is having stability issues.

An example of the detailed output for cross sections is shown below.

Example of the detailed output for cross sections

When the program has stability problems, it will generally try to solve them by iterating. For example, in a few cases, the program iterated to the maximum number of iterations. By default, the number of iterations is 20.

A warning message will appear at the end of the iterations, stating, WARNING: USED COMPUTED CHANGES IN FLOW AND STAGE AT MINIMUM ERROR. MINIMUM ERROR OCCURRED AT ITERATION XX. This message means that the program could not solve the unsteady flow equations to the required tolerance within the specified number of iterations. Therefore, the program used the iteration that had the least number of errors in the numerical solution.

Warning message dialog box

Another way to find and locate potential stability problems with the solution is to do a search in the file for the word WARNING. The user must then carefully examine the detailed output to detect where and why the solution is failing.

Following is a list of variables that are printed out during the iterations:

  • Iter = Iteration number
  • River = The name of the river in which the largest stage error is occurring
  • Station = River station with the largest error in the calculated stage
  • Elev = Computed water surface elevation at that river station
  • DZ = The Numerical Error in the computed stage at that location
  • Storage = Name of the storage area
  • Zsa = Computed elevation of the storage area
  • Dzsa = The Numerical Error in the computed storage area elevation
  • Q = Computed flow
  • DQ = The Numerical Error in the computed flow at the listed river station

After the iterations output, the program will show the computed stages and flows for all the cross sections in which the user has selected to have hydrographs computed. This is also useful information for detecting model stability problems. It is not always clear which cross section or modeling component is causing the problem. Sometimes the program may blow up at one cross section, but the real problem is caused by a cross section upstream or downstream from this location.

Troubleshooting & Best Practices › Engine/Import Errors

HEC-RAS Engine Loading Error

This article describes how to fix the HEC-RAS analysis engine loading error when launching the GeoHECRAS software.

While GeoHECRAS is starting up, it checks to see if everything is properly installed and functioning. Part of that startup check is to make certain that the HEC-RAS controller and analysis engine DLLs are registered for use with GeoHECRAS. If not, the software will display the following error message.

HEC-RAS-Engine-Loading-Error.png

Sometimes installing other software or other versions of HEC-RAS can cause Microsoft Windows registry entries for the HEC-RAS controller and analysis engine DLLs to be changed so that GeoHECRAS cannot access them.

The following methods can be used to resolve this issue.

Method 1 – Update HEC-RAS Registry Entries

This method uses a batch file to update the HEC-RAS registry entries so that GeoHECRAS can load the HEC-RAS controller and analysis engine DLLs.

  1. Exit GeoHECRAS if it is running.
  2. Download the file HECReg.txt from here. (To download the file, right click on the text "here" and then select Save link as... from the context menu options.)
  3. Start Windows Explorer and navigate to where the file has been saved to.
  4. Rename the downloaded HECReg.txt file to HECReg.bat.
  5. Right click on the HECReg.bat file and select Run as administrator from the context menu options.
    Register Run-as-Administrator-2.png
  6. A User Account Control message box will be displayed.
    Allow-to-Make-Changes.png
  7. Click on the Yes button.
  8. The batch file will update the registry entries and then quit.

Method 2 – Reinstall GeoHECRAS

If Method 1 did not work, then uninstall and reinstall GeoHECRAS. This should correct the issue.

Method 3 – Forceful Reinstall GeoHECRAS

In certain conditions, a simple reinstall of GeoHECRAS will not correct the issue. In this situation, a forceful reinstall of the software will correct the issue.

  1. Uninstall GeoHECRAS.
  2. Click on the Windows Start button to display the Windows Start menu.
  3. Open the Run dialog box and type CMD. Then click on the [OK] button. A command window will be displayed.
  4. Type the following at the command prompt (as a single line of text): reg delete "HKEY_CURRENT_USERSoftwareVB and VBA Program SettingsC:Program Files (x86)CivilGEO" /f
    CMD-1-1.png
  5. Press the Enter key.
  6. The command prompt should display the message The operation completed successfully.
    CMD-2-1.png
  7. Close the command window and reinstall GeoHECRAS.

Method 4 – Contact Technical Support

If the previous methods did not work or you want assistance, please contact our technical support. A team member will gladly assist you by logging on to your computer remotely and performing the necessary steps to correct the issue.

Troubleshooting & Best Practices › Engine/Import Errors

HEC-RAS File Name and Directory Path Issues

This article describes how to fix problems encountered with HEC-RAS file names and directory paths where the software will not run correctly.

When working on a HEC-RAS model in a network environment, where the project data resides in a project folder on a network server, the user might encounter issues where the analysis fails to run or there are other strange behaviours that are run into.

Because parts of HEC-RAS are written in the FORTRAN computer language, there exists length limits to the directory path and file names. The total length of the directory path and file name must be less than 260 characters. In addition, the directory path cannot be longer than 248 characters, because HEC-RAS writes out temporary files during its computations. This is similar to the file name and directory length limits in FORTRAN and Microsoft Windows. In Fortran 90/95 the maximum file name length is 31 characters, whereas in Microsoft Windows a directory path length can be a maximum of 247 characters long.

The file name and directory length limit can be difficult to handle when using HEC-RAS—especially in a network environment. HEC-RAS will report the following error message when the directory path and file name length is exceeded.

HEC-RAS-File-Name-Directory-Path-Issues.png

Solving the Long Directory Path and File Name Issue

These are some ways to solve the long directory path and file name issue when running HEC-RAS:

  1. Move the HEC-RAS project folder up several levels so that the directory path is not as long.
  2. In a network environment where the HEC-RAS project folder is on a network file server, move the folder to the local computer workstation.
  3. Map a drive letter to the HEC-RAS project folder.

Mapping a Drive Letter to a Local or Network HEC-RAS Project Folder

If the HEC-RAS project folder resides on the local workstation, then the SUBST command can be used to create a drive letter mapping to the project folder. If the HEC-RAS project folder resides on the local workstation or a network file server, then the NET USE command can be used.

Another difference between these two commands is that the SUBST command expects the location to always be available. If for some reason that location can’t be found, the SUBST command will try desperately to reconnect at the expense of your computers performance.

On the other hand, the NET USE command is more fault tolerant, which is why it can be used to connect to a network file server. When a mapped path appears to be disconnected, the NET USE command will gracefully disable that mapping until you try to access it again, at which point it will attempt to connect again.

Using the SUBST Command

To create mapping using the SUBST command:

  1. Open a Command Prompt There are numerous ways to open a Command Prompt window, but perhaps the easiest is to hold down the Windows key and then press the letter R on the keyboard.
  2. At the Command Prompt window, type-in the following:
    subst s: c:HEC-RAS Project Directory Path
    where S: is the drive letter to assign to the HEC-RAS project directory path and
    c:HEC-RAS Project Directory Path
    is the actual path on your computer workstation.
  3. Then, close the Command Prompt window.

To remove the mapping, at the Command Prompt window type-in the following:

subst s: /D

Note that when you reboot your computer, all mapped drive letters will be reset. To automatically map your folder when your system starts, put the SUBST command in a batch file, and put the batch file in your Autostart folder in the start menu. Advanced users can use the Windows Task Scheduler, however this is not covered here.

Note that you should execute the SUBST command using the account that issued it. These drive mappings are created only for the user who originally issued the SUBST command. For example, if you login as "Fred", and you open a command prompt as "Administrator" and execute the SUBST command, then "Fred" will not be able to see any mapped drive letters because the mapping was created for "Administrator". When using the Windows Task Scheduler to execute this command, make sure that the command is executed under the default user account.

Using the NET USE Command

To create mapping using the NET USE command:

  1. Open a Command Prompt
  2. For mapping a local folder to a drive letter, type-in the following at the Command Prompt window:net use s: c:HEC-RAS Project Directory Pathwhere S: is the drive letter to assign to the HEC-RAS project directory path and c:HEC-RAS Project Directory Path is the actual path on your computer.
  3. For mapping a network file server folder to a drive letter, type-in the following at the Command Prompt window:net use s: \ServerNameHEC-RAS Project Directory Pathwhere \ServerNameHEC-RAS Project Directory Path is the full UNC path to the shared folder on the network file server.
  4. Then, close the Command Prompt window.

To remove the mapping, at the Command Prompt window type-in the following:

net use s: /delete

You can use the asterisk as a wildcard character to delete all mapped drives in one command:

net use * /delete

By default, mapped drives using the NET USE command are not persistent, meaning that the mapped drive will disappear when you restart your computer. If you want the mapped drive stick around, you can make them persistent by using the /PERSISTENT switch. The switch works as a toggle:

  • /persistent:Yes Makes the mapped drive persistent. Future connections you make using the command during the same session are also persistent (you do not need to keep using the switch) until you use the /persistent:No switch to turn it off.
  • /persistent:No Turns off the persistency toggle. Future connections you make are not persistent until you turn the toggle back on.

So, to create a persistent mapped drive, type something like the following in the Command Prompt window:

net use s: c:HEC-RAS Project Directory Path /persistent:Yes

Note that if there are issues regarding getting connected to a network drive or folder, it might be because the computer the user is trying to connect to is turned off, or the user does not have the correct access permissions.

Using File Explorer to Map a Drive Letter to a Network Folder

In addition to the methods shown above to map a drive letter to a network file server folder, File Explorer provides an easy-to-use way to do the same thing. See the below video.

unknown node

Or, you can follow these steps to use File Explorer to map the HEC-RAS project folder to a unused drive letter:

  1. Open File Explorer. There are numerous ways to open File Explorer, but perhaps the easiest is to hold down the Windows key and then press the letter E on the keyboard. File-Explorer.png
  2. Select This PC from the left pane. Then, select the Computer ribbon menu and click on the Map network drive menu command. This-PC-command.png
  3. The Map Network Drive dialog box will be displayed. Map-Network-Drive-dialog-box.png
  4. Click the dropdown combo box adjacent to the Drive entry, and select an available drive letter. (Any available drive letter will work.) Drive-dropdown-combo-box.png
  5. Enter directory path in the text box adjacent to the Folder entry. Example: \ServerNameFolderName. Alternatively, click the Browse button and interactively select the HEC-RAS project folder. Browse-For-Folder.png
  6. Turn on the Reconnect at sign-in check box to enable automatically connecting to the HEC-RAS project folder every time the user logs on to the computer. Reconnect-at-sign-in-check-box.png
  7. The Connect using different credentials check box can be used if there are multiple users that use the same computer workstation and need to access the same HEC-RAS project folder. Connect-using-different-credentials-check-box.png
  8. Click the Finish button.
Troubleshooting & Best Practices › Engine/Import Errors

HEC‑RAS Analysis Base Engine Troubleshooting

This article describes how to fix the HEC‑RAS base engine if you cannot get the HEC‑RAS analysis to run.

When GeoHECRAS performs a HEC‑RAS analysis of the model, it checks to see that the HEC‑RAS base engine is correctly configured and registered. If not, the software will display the following dialog box.

Error-Loading-HEC-RAS-Engine-1.png

Installing other software or other versions of HEC‑RAS can cause the registry entries for the HEC‑RAS base engine to become corrupted.

You can try one of the following methods to resolve the issue.

Method 1

Uninstalling and reinstalling GeoHECRAS should correct the issue.

Method 2

  1. Uninstall GeoHECRAS.
  2. Click on the Windows Start button to display the Windows Start menu.
  3. Open the Run dialog box and type CMD. Then click on the [OK] button. A command window will be displayed.
  4. Type the following at the command prompt: reg delete "HKEY_CURRENT_USERSoftwareVB and VBA Program SettingsC:Program Files (x86)CivilGEO" /f
    CMD-1.png
  5. Press the Enter key.
  6. The command prompt should display the message The operation completed successfully.
    CMD-2.png
  7. Close the command window and re-install GeoHECRAS.

Method 3

  1. Exit GeoHECRAS if it is running.
  2. Download the file HECReg.txt from here. (To download the file, right click on the text "here" and then select Save link as... from the context menu options.)
  3. Start Windows Explorer and navigate to where the file has been saved to.
  4. Rename the downloaded HECReg.txt file to HECReg.bat.
  5. Right click on the HECReg.bat file and select Run as administrator from the context menu options.
    Run-as-Administrator.png
  6. A User Account Control message box will be displayed.
    Batch-File-User-Account-Control.png
  7. Click on the Yes button.

Method 4

  1. Press Windows+R to open the Run dialog box.
    RunDialog.png
  2. Type in "%programfiles(x86)%CivilGEOGeoHECRASHEC‑RAS Engines" and press enter to open the HEC‑RAS Engines folder in file explorer.
  3. Right click on the Register.bat file and select Run as administrator from the context menu options.
    RegisterBatRun.png

This article should resolve your HEC‑RAS computational issues. If you are still having problems, contact our technical support. They will be glad to assist you further.

Troubleshooting & Best Practices › Unsteady Flow Issues

Unsteady Flow HEC‑RAS Model Troubleshooting

The following sections describe various issues that should be considered when troubleshooting an unsteady flow HEC‑RAS model.

Time Step Issues

  1. Model stability can be very sensitive to the computational time step. Lowering the computation time step may reduce computational instabilities and make the model more stable.
  2. Unsteady flow HEC‑RAS computational time steps are generally equal to or greater than the representative cross section spacing distance / maximum flow velocity.
  3. Too large of a computational time step can cause the hydrograph peak flow to miss some of the cross sections, causing the model to become unstable.
  4. Too small of a computational time step can cause the model to become unstable. For example, defining too short of a time step can cause a stable model to suddenly become unstable. In addition, the computational run times can get overly long.
  5. A practical rule of thumb is to define the computational time step equal to the inflow hydrograph time to rise / 24. For example, if the time to rise for the inflow hydrograph (from base flow to peak flow) is 4 hours, then set the computational time step to 4 / 24 = 0.1666 hrs or 10 minutes.
  6. However, for dam failure models a much shorter time step is required to account for the steep rise in the flood wave being routed down the river. Typical time steps for dam failure models range from 1 minute on down to 1 second due to the fast flood wave velocity and change in discharge.
  7. A trial and error method can be used to test various computational time steps to see what the largest time step is that will work while providing accurate results and minimal convergence errors. For example, try 10 minutes, then 5 minutes, then 2 minutes, etc.

Cross Section Issues

  1. Place additional cross-sections at locations where the model cannot converge on several time steps. However, if the cross sections are placed too close together, then the numerical solution will cause wave steepening and the model will go unstable on the rising limb of the routed flood wave.
  2. Generally, additional cross sections are required (i.e., cross sections closer together) for the following situations:
    • Transition zones where flow is flowing out of the channel into the overbank area, or vice versa.
    • Vertical slope changes, where the flow is going from flat mild slope to steep slope, or vice versa.
    • Steep river reaches where supercritical flow is possible.
  3. It is better to use real terrain geometry for constructing additional cross sections rather than just interpolating cross sections.
  4. Check the ineffective flow areas top elevations at roadway crossing structures. If a roadway structure is overtopped, the ineffective flow area on the downstream side of the structure should also overtop and not be blocked.
  5. Ineffective flow areas should be marked as "permanent" so that during the routing, the ineffective flow areas do not "suddenly disappear" during an iteration or time step. If the water surface temporarily overtops the ineffective flow area, this flow area will suddenly cause the large increase in conveyance area and cause the model solution to oscillate by having an ineffective flow area for one iteration or time step and then having no ineffective flow area in the next iteration or time step.
  6. Inserting a pilot channel at wide flat cross sections can stabilize the model during low flow conditions.
  7. Adjust the cross section hydraulic parameters starting elevation (used for computing hydraulic flow property tables for each cross section) so that the starting elevation matches the cross-section invert.
  8. Revise the hydraulic parameters for every cross-section and structure to provide additional refinement to provide smooth conveyance curves. Abrupt changes in the computed conveyance curves can be reduced by adding additional horizontal Manning's roughness locations.

Boundary Condition Issues

  1. A HEC‑RAS unsteady flow model cannot have a zero base flow. There must be water present in the model.
  2. A HEC‑RAS unsteady flow model cannot go dry during a simulation. Adding additional flow to the initial base flow, keeping it as small as possible, may improve stability during low flow conditions. In addition, make certain that the defined initial flow matches the defined inflow hydrograph value at start up.
  3. A minimum flow threshold value can be used at inflow boundaries to prevent the base flow from falling below the defined threshold.
  4. If the inflow hydrograph time to rise is too short, this can cause the model to experience a numerical shock. For example, change the flow from 100 cfs to 10,000 cfs in just a few time steps can cause the model to fail. Take the rising limb hydrograph data and manually stretch it out for a longer time period.
  5. Inconsistent initial conditions can cause the model to go unstable immediately upon model start up.
  6. Initial condition flows must be consistent with the boundary condition flows at time zero. However, internal reaches, such as in a dendritic model, do not require initial flows to be specified. The HEC‑RAS software will compute these initial flows automatically based upon the flows coming into each connected junction.
  7. Downstream boundaries cannot have a flat or adverse (negative) slope. If necessary, extend the downstream end of the model to provide positive (downward) slope for the channel bed. Otherwise, the software will not be able to compute an accurate loop rating curve (aka, hysteresis loop) at the downstream boundary of the model.
  8. Storage areas initial water surface elevations need to be consistent with the initial flows and gate settings defined.

Computational Options Issues

  1. Increase the maximum number of iterations from the default value of 20 to the maximum allowable value of 40. Increasing the number of iterations will generally improve the convergence accuracy of the model—especially when the model has lateral weirs and storage areas.
  2. Adjusting the Theta implicit weighting factor (0.6 to 1.0) can improve model stability or increase the accuracy of the output. Increasing this value towards 1.0 will increase model stability, decreasing this value towards 0.6 will increase model accuracy. A default Theta weighting factor value of 1.0 is used by HEC‑RAS.
  3. Do not use the "Convert Bridges to Lids" option. This option often causes model instability and was removed in HEC‑RAS version 5.0.
  4. Decrease the computational tolerances (increase the values) used in the software to determine when convergence has occurred. While the default values are good for most unsteady flow models, slightly increasing these values might suddenly help in getting the model to stabilize. The default values used for unsteady flow routing are:
    • Water surface elevation = 0.02 ft
    • Storage area elevation = 0.05 ft
    • Discharge = BLANK (not used)

Other Issues

  1. If a drop structure is present in the HEC‑RAS model, the best way to represent this is as an inline structure.
  2. Lateral and inline structure stability factors can improve model stability. To improve model stability, try to get the stability factors close to a value of 1.0.
  3. Check the weir coefficient used for roadway decks.
  4. If the model crashes at the beginning of a simulation, check the initial conditions such as discharge values, storage area elevations, and downstream boundary conditions. If the model crashes during the simulation, check the computed water surface profiles to pinpoint the model stability locations.
  5. For models that start up unstable, define the model so that the river network is flooded (i.e., high downstream boundary condition). Then, gradually lower the downstream water surface elevation to match initial conditions for model.

Other Tips

  1. Try running the unsteady flow model with steady state flow conditions (i.e., a hydrograph with a constant flow value over time). This will help you identify what other issues could be causing the model to fail in its computations.
  2. Eliminate structures (i.e., roadway crossings, inline structures, lateral structures) in the model. Perhaps one of the structures is causing the model to fail. If the model suddenly runs after removing the structures, then place the structures back in, one at a time, to see which structure(s) are causing the instability.
  3. Replace any steep reaches with an artificial inline structure. This will help in transitioning the flow from an upper reach to a lower reach, bypassing the steep reach where supercritical flow could be occurring which often causes model instability.
  4. Use the Modified Puls Routing option to represent steep river sections or low flow conditions.
  5. Use the Variable Time Step option where the HEC-RAS computational engine dynamically recomputes the required time step during the simulation based upon the Courant number specified.
Troubleshooting & Best Practices › Best Practices

HEC‑RAS Modeling Best Practices

The following best practices should be used when defining, analyzing, and reviewing a HEC‑RAS model:

  1. The model results should be reviewed for consistency and accuracy.
  2. The cross section detailed output warning messages should be reviewed and be able to be explained.
    Cross-Section-Results.png
  3. The profile plot should be checked, especially at roadway crossings. The energy gradeline should be plotted along with the computed water surface elevation.
  4. Bridge opening results should be closely reviewed to make certain that the low chord clears the computed energy gradeline elevation.
  5. Cross sections should be tall enough to contain the defined discharge values. Otherwise, the software will extend the cross section ends vertically to contain the flow.
  6. Cross sections need to be placed at representative locations to describe changes in geometry.
  7. Additional cross sections should be added at locations where changes occur in discharge, slope, velocity, and roughness.
  8. Cross sections need to be added just upstream and downstream of roadway crossings (bridges and culverts), inline structures (dams and spillways), and levees (flood walls).
  9. Steeper channels require more cross sections.
  10. Streams flowing at high velocities may require cross sections every 100 ft (30 m) or less.
  11. Large uniform rivers with flat slopes in rural areas require cross sections every 1000 to 1500 ft (300 to 500 m).
  12. Rivers in urban regions require cross sections every 500 ft (150 m) or less.
  13. As a starting point, cross sections can be spaced at 5 times the active channel width.
  14. Review any cross sections where the computed water surface elevation is equal to critical depth. Likely these cross sections are flowing as supercritical flow and the mixed flow (subcritical and supercritical) HEC‑RAS analysis should be performed.
  15. Downstream boundaries cannot have a flat or adverse (negative) slope. If necessary, extend the downstream end of the model to provide positive (downward) slope for the channel bed.
  16. Check the ineffective flow areas top elevations at roadway crossing structures. If a roadway structure is overtopped, the ineffective flow area on the downstream side of the structure should also overtop and not be blocked.
  17. Start out with a simplified model and confirm the model is running successfully. Then add complexity to the model in iterative steps, confirming for each iteration that the model is running successfully.
Platform & GIS Tools › Coordinate Reference Systems

Spatial Reference

Within CivilGEO’s software, every data layer has its own coordinate reference system (CRS) which is used to integrate it with other data layers within the Map View.

If a data layer has been added to a project and does not have a CRS defined for it, it will display in its own local coordinate reference system. This might happen, for example, when importing an elevation grid data file to the project. After loading the data layer, only that data layer will be shown in the Map View. The other data layers lie in a different projection of the Map View.

The user can then manually assign the project’s CRS to the non-CRS referenced data layer using the Spatial Reference feature if the data layer coordinates lie within the project’s CRS.

To use the Spatial Reference feature, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Map Data Layers panel, click on […] button next to the layer name.
    Spatial-Reference-image-1.png
  2. The layer Properties dialog box will be displayed.
    Spatial-Reference-image-2.png
  3. Select the Spatial Reference tab.
    Spatial-Reference-image-3.png

The following sections describe the use of the Spatial Reference tab and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Current Spatial Reference

This section provides information such as CRS name, Units, Projection, and Datum related to the current CRS of the layer. In the event the CRS assigned to the layer is different from the project’s CRS, the [Assign Current CRS] button becomes active, which otherwise remains inactive. For example, in the image shown below, the elevation layer CRS is different from the project’s CRS. On clicking the [Assign Current CRS] button, the software will assign the project’s CRS to this layer.

Spatial-Reference-image-4.png

Assign Map Coordinate Reference System

This section allows the user to change the current CRS of the layer to selected CRS of choice. As there are multiple coordinate reference systems to choose from, this section provides you with two options to filter the various applicable coordinate reference systems as described below:

  1. Projected CRS Regions
    Using the Projected CRS Regions tab, the user can browse to the supported CRS for the location of interest by selecting the continent, country, and then local region from the available drop-down lists. The software will then list all the coordinate reference systems that correspond to the selected location in a drop-down list box next to Map CRS label.
    Spatial-Reference-image-5.pngNote: Some countries straddle the Europe, Asia, and Africa boundaries, and are grouped into Asia, Middle East subregion. Countries located in the southwest Pacific Ocean region are grouped into the Australasia continent.
    Once the required CRS is selected, the user can then select the measurement unit for the selected CRS using the Units drop-down list box available under the Map Coordinate Reference System Information section.
    Units dropdown combo box
  2. Projected CRS Listings
    Using the Projected CRS Listings tab, the user can browse through all the supported CRS by selecting the projection from the drop-down list available next to the Projection label. After selecting the required projection, the user can then select the CRS that corresponds to the selected projection using the drop-down list box available next to Map CRS label.
    Spatial-Reference-image-7.pngOnce the required CRS is selected using either of the above options, the [Assign] button under Map Coordinate Reference System Information section will become active, as shown below.
    Spatial-Reference-image-8.pngClick on the [Assign] button and then the [OK] button to assign the selected CRS to the layer.
Platform & GIS Tools › Coordinate Reference Systems

Google Mercator Coordinate Reference System

If projected coordinate reference system (CRS) has yet been assigned to the project, then assigning a base map layer (i.e., Hybrid Map Bing, etc.) will automatically assign the Google Mercator coordinate reference system to the project. The Google Mercator CRS allows any location on the globe to be represented as X-Y coordinates.

Advantages of the Google Mercator CRS

  • The entire spherical globe can be represented by one map.

Disadvantages of the Google Mercator CRS

  • Regions near the earth's north and south poles are greatly exaggerated. For locations further away from the equator, the amount of X-Y exaggeration increases the further away from the equator the location exists. Therefore, in more northern and southern locations, it would be advisable to switch to a regional (i.e., state plane, etc.) coordinate reference system.518px-Tissot_mercator.png
  • Only Europe and parts of Asia and Africa lie within the 1st quadrant of the Google Mercator CRS. Therefore, areas outside of the 1st quadrant will have negative coordinates. For example, North America lies within the 2nd quadrant and will have negative X coordinates. Therefore, it would be advisable to switch to a regional (i.e., state plane, etc.) coordinate reference system.
    tmpD35_thumb2-1.png
Platform & GIS Tools › Coordinate Reference Systems

Custom Coordinate Reference Systems

CivilGEO’s software provides support for custom projected coordinate reference systems. Select File | Map Coordinates from the ribbon menu to view the Map Coordinates backstage page. From the Map Coordinates backstage page, select the Import CRS Projection tab.

Custom-Coordinate-Reference-Systems-image-1.png

From the displayed panel tab, select the CRS projection file to import. The following projection file formats are supported:

  • Shapefile projection files (*.prj)
  • Well-Known-Text projection files (*.wkt)

After the custom projection file is loaded, the software will check to see if it already exists in the CRS database. If not, the software will prompt the user to define the physical location of the imported CRS so that it can be readily reused later.

Custom-Coordinate-Reference-Systems-image-2.png
Platform & GIS Tools › Coordinate Reference Systems

Local Coordinate Reference Systems

When CivilGEO’s software starts up, a new, empty project Map View is created using a local coordinate reference system (CRS). However, to display external data correctly on the Map View, a projected CRS should be assigned to the Map View.

A local coordinate reference system is well suited for simple engineering models that contain only basic geometry that is not georeferenced. Importing an external engineering model without an assigned CRS will cause the imported model to be assigned a local CRS. Similarly, importing any external data without a corresponding coordinate system will cause the data to be assigned a local CRS.

See this article for information on georeferencing an external engineering model to a location on the map.

Platform & GIS Tools › Coordinate Reference Systems

Supported Coordinate Reference Systems

There are two common types of coordinate reference systems (CRS) used in engineering:

  • A geographical coordinate reference system uses latitude–longitude coordinates to map the earth’s spherical surface. More information on geographic coordinate reference systems is provided here.

  • A projected coordinate reference system uses X-Y coordinates (commonly called Northing and Easting) to project maps of the earth’s spherical surface onto a two-dimensional Cartesian coordinate plane. More information on projected coordinate reference systems is provided here.

Because an engineering project model utilizes X-Y coordinates to define elements of the model, only projected coordinate reference systems can be used. However, CivilGEO’s software will automatically reproject data sets that use geographical coordinate reference systems to the assigned Map View projected coordinate reference system if the data lies within the projected CRS bounds.

Platform & GIS Tools › Layer Management

Raster Image Layer Properties

The Raster Image Layer Properties dialog box allows the user to customize the display properties of a raster image (such as an aerial photo, scanned map, or other background image used for visual reference) within the project. This dialog box provides options to define the raster image’s visibility, color, border styling, and transparency. Additionally, it allows the user to change the current CRS (Coordinate Reference System) of the project and automatically apply the transformation scale factor on any particular layer to accurately map it to the project CRS. To learn more about the coordinate reference system (CRS), refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Follow the steps below to view and edit the raster image properties:

  1. Under the Map Data Layers panel, click the […] button next to the raster image layer.
    Map Data Layers panel - Raster image layer button
  2. The Raster Image Layer Properties dialog box will be displayed.
    Raster Image Layer Properties dialog box

The Raster Image Layer Properties dialog box contains three tabs, as shown below:

  • General Options
  • Spatial Reference
  • Transformation

General Options

The General Options tabbed panel allows the user to control the general settings and stylization options of the raster image layer. This tabbed panel contains the following two sections:

  • General Information
  • Stylization Options

General Information

This section contains read-only information about the directory location and name of the raster image file.

Stylization Options

This section allows the user to customize how the raster image is visually displayed on the Map View.

Stylization Options section

The following options are available in this section:

  • Border color
    This checkbox option allows the user to select the border color of the raster image. The user can define the border color using the Border color dropdown color palette. By default, the Border color checkbox is checked.
  • Border size
    This spin control entry field allows the user to define the thickness of the raster image border. By default, the software uses a value of 1. The user can enter a different value ranging from 1 to 11.
  • Apply transparency
    This checkbox option allows the user to adjust the transparency of the raster image so that the background Base Map or other underlying layers remain visible on the Map View. By default, the Apply transparency checkbox is unchecked. The user can modify the transparency value using the horizontal slider control or spin control button. A transparency value of 40 to 50% works well. A preview displayed within the dialog box provides real-time visual feedback of how the image will appear on the Map View after applying the selected transparency.

Spatial Reference

The Spatial Reference tabbed panel allows the user to manually assign the project’s CRS to the non-CRS referenced data layer if the data layer coordinates lie within the project’s CRS. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about spatial reference.

Transformation

The Transformation tabbed panel allows the user to automatically apply the transformation scale factor to any particular layer and accurately map it to the project coordinate reference system (CRS). Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about layer transformation.

Modifying Raster Image Properties from the Ribbon Menu

Raster image layer properties can also be modified directly from the ribbon menu. Selecting a raster image layer in the Map Data Layers panel displays a dedicated Display Options ribbon menu, enabling quick and precise customization of its properties. To learn more about project layer display properties, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Raster Image Properties - Display Options Ribbon Menu


Platform & GIS Tools › Layer Management

Adding an Elevation Layer

CivilGEO’s software can construct an elevation terrain surface from online elevation data sources or through a local elevation data file.

Adding Online Elevation Data

CivilGEO’s software can utilize elevation data directly from either the USGS or NASA elevation data servers:

  • US Elevation (10m) – USGS: Accesses the elevation data from the USGS National Elevation Dataset (NED) data server. Elevation data with a resolution of 10m is limited areas within the borders of the United States. Different parts of the United States have different elevation resolutions. The National Elevation Dataset (NED) is the primary elevation data product of the USGS, and is a seamless dataset with the best available raster elevation data of the conterminous United States, Alaska, Hawaii, and territorial islands.
  • World Elevation (30m) – NASA: Accesses the elevation data from the NASA elevation data server. This is elevation data with a resolution of 30m, derived from the Shuttle Radar Topography Mission (SRTM) data. Different parts of the world have different elevation resolutions. The SRTM obtained elevation data on a near-global scale to generate the most complete high-resolution digital topographic database of Earth. The SRTM consisted of a specially modified radar system that flew onboard the Space Shuttle Endeavour during an 11-day mission in February 2000.

To add the online elevation data from the USGS or NASA Elevation Data Server, follow the steps below:

  1. Right-click on the Map Data Layers panel and select Add Elevation Layer from the displayed context menu.
    Map Data Layers Panel
    Alternatively, the user can select the Add Elev Layer command from the Map Data ribbon menu.
    Add Elev Layer Command
  2. The Add Elevation Layer dialog box will be displayed.
    Add Elevation Layer Dialog Box
  3. Select the Online Elevation Data tab.
    Online Elevation Data Tab
  4. Check the Use online elevation data source checkbox.
  5. Provide the name for the layer group in the Layer name input field. By default, the layer name is set to Online Elevation, which can be changed by the user.
  6. Click the [OK] button.
  7. The software will start to pull elevation data tiles from the selected elevation data source in order to construct an elevation terrain surface.
  8. When finished, the software will identify the Online Elevation data as a new layer in the Map Data Layers panel.
    Online Elevation Data as a New Layer

Downloading Elevation Data

The software also allows the user to download data on the local computer as an elevation grid DEM. To download the elevation data on the local computer, follow the steps below:

  1. Select the Download Elevation DEM tab.
    Download Elevation DEM Tab
  2. From the Terrain source dropdown combo box, select the terrain source. The following options are available in the dropdown combo box: Austria DEM Data, Canada DEM Data, US USGS DEM Data, and World DEM Data.
    Terrain Source Dropdown Combo Box
    Note that the options in the dropdown combo box will change based on the selected coordinate reference system (CRS). Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about how to assign a coordinate reference system to a project.
  3. In the Elevation Data Boundary Limits section, the user can choose one of the four options appearing below to define the limit of data to be downloaded:
    • Current screen limits: The software will use the existing extent of the Map View screen display as a boundary limit for the elevation data to be downloaded.
    • User-defined limits: The user can click on the [Pick] button and draw a rectangle on the Map View representing the user-defined limits for the elevation data to be downloaded.
    • Clipping polygons: The user can click on the [Pick] button to select polygon shape regions from the Map View to define the processing area for the elevation data to be downloaded.
    • Model extents: If a project model has been defined, this option will create a bounding rectangular region corresponding to the extent of the defined model, plus an additional buffer boundary.
  4. From the Available DEM resolutions dropdown combo box, the user can select the required DEM resolution to be downloaded. Click the [Search Available DEMs] button to search the available grid resolutions for the selected limit. The software will then list all the DEM resolutions available for the selected limits in the Available DEM resolutions dropdown combo box.
    Available DEM Resolutions Dropdown Combo Box
  5. Check the Fill-in missing regions with lower resolution DEM data checkbox option to use the higher resolution DEM data cell size when merging the lower resolution DEM data with the higher resolution DEM data. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked.
    Fill-in missing regions with lower resolution DEM data Checkbox Option
    Note that this checkbox option is only enabled when the Available DEM resolutions dropdown combo box has DEM resolutions.
  6. In the Terrain Grid Specifications section, click the […] button beside the DEM Elevation file to specify the file location, name, and format to save the downloaded DEM elevation file.
  7. Click the [OK] button.
    [OK] Button
  8. The Download DEM dialog box will be displayed with the progress status of the downloaded DEM.
    Download DEM Dialog Box
    Note that if the user clicks on the [Cancel] button before completion of the DEM download, the following confirmational dialog box will be displayed.
    [Cancel] Button - Confirmational Dialog Box
    Click the [Yes] button and the Download DEM dialog box will close. To continue the process, click the [No] button.
  9. If there are multiple elevation DEMs downloaded, the software will immediately start merging them into a single elevation DEM and will convert elevation units to feet.
  10. Once finished, the DEM Download Completed informational dialog box will be displayed.
    DEM Download Completed Informational Dialog Box
    Click the [OK] button to close this dialog box.
  11. The Download DEM dialog box will be redisplayed and the [Cancel] button changes to the [Done] button. Click on the [Done] button to close the dialog box.
    [Done] Button
    Clicking on the [Copy to Clipboard] button allows the user to copy the DEM download status messages to the Windows clipboard.
  12. The software will create a new elevation grid file at the specified location and load the downloaded elevation grid file as a new layer in the Map Data Layers panel.
    Downloaded Elevation Grid File as a New Layer

Note that the elevation DEM data that are downloaded using this command have a resolution of 10 meters in the USA and Canada, and 30 meters everywhere else. In comparison, the USGS National Map website has DEM elevation data of 10 meter, 3 meter, and 1 meter resolution, although availability varies. The user needs to zoom into an area and see the elevation data that the USGS provides, which is constantly being updated as the USGS collects and uploads more elevation data to their elevation data server.

In addition, keep in mind that in a region where 1 meter data are available, 3 meter data are not available. Similarly, where 3 meter data are available, 1 meter data are not available.

For example, the USGS lists 10 meter elevation data available everywhere in the USA.

10 Meter Elevation Data by USGS

3 meter elevation data are available in the regions shown below.

3 Meter Elevation Data

1 meter elevation data are available in the regions shown below.

1 Meter Elevation Data

Adding Local Elevation Grid Data

CivilGEO’s software supports most major elevation grid data file formats, such as:

  • ArcInfo ASCII Elevation Grids
  • ArcInfo Binary Elevation Grids
  • GeoTIFF Elevation Grids
  • USGS DEM Elevation Grids
  • USGS NED Elevation Grids – BIL Format
  • USGS NED Elevation Grids – Float Format

To add elevation data using a local elevation grid data file, follow the steps below:

  1. Right-click on the Map Data Layers panel and select Add Elevation Layer from the displayed context menu.
    Add Elevation Layer Option
  2. The Add Elevation Layer dialog box will be displayed.
    Add Elevation Layer Dialog Box (Local File Elevation Data Tab)
  3. From the Local File Elevation Data tab, click on the […] browse button beside the Select elevation file and select the elevation grid data file to load.
  4. Provide the name for the layer group in the Layer name input field. By default, the layer name is set to Elevation Data, which can be changed by the user.
  5. Click the [OK] button.
  6. The software will load the elevation grid data file as an elevation terrain surface and identify the Elevation Data as a new layer in the Map Data Layers panel.elevation grid layer in the Map Data Layers panel

Using Other Elevation Data

Other local elevation data files can be processed within the software to create an elevation terrain surface. This includes:

  • ArcInfo Contour Shapefiles
  • ArcInfo Elevation Point Shapefiles
  • ArcInfo GDB File Geodatabases
  • ArcInfo MDB Personal Geodatabases
  • AutoCAD Civil 3D Terrain Surfaces†
  • AutoCAD Contours
  • Bentley MicroStation Terrain Surfaces†
  • Bentley MicroStation Contours
  • LandXML Terrain Models
  • XYZ ASCII Point Terrain Data

†Civil 3D and Bentley MicroStation terrain surfaces imported as LandXML terrain models.

Platform & GIS Tools › Layer Management

Point Layer Properties

The Point Layer Properties dialog box allows the user to define various point layers and their properties, style the border associated with the point objects, and display the color fill legend in the Map Data Layers panel and/or on the Map View. It also allows the user to change the current CRS (coordinate reference system) of the project and automatically apply the transformation scale factor to any point layer to accurately map it to the project CRS. Furthermore, the Point Layer Properties dialog box allows the user to view and update the point data associated with a point layer file.

Follow the steps below to use the Point Layer Properties dialog box:

  1. In the Map Data Layers panel, click on the […] button next to the desired point layer.

    Map Data Layers Panel
  2. The Point Layer Properties dialog box will be displayed.

    Point Layer Properties dialog box

The Point Layer Properties dialog box contains four tabs as described below:

  • General Options
  • Spatial Reference
  • Transformation
  • Point Table

General Options

Various sections of the General Options tab are described below.

General Information

This section contains read-only information about the system location and name of the point layer file as well as the total number of points within the selected point layer file.

Default Point Stylization

This section is used to define various point object stylizations, such as shape of a point object, border color, border size, and color fill options.

Default Point Stylization section

The 3D display mode dropdown combo box allows the user to specify the appearance of the point in 3D view mode. The 3D display mode dropdown combo box lists the following options:

  • Use Point Elevation
  • Drape on Terrain Surface
  • Easting
  • Elev
  • Northing
  • Point
3D Display Mode dropdown combo box

Other options

This section is divided into the following three panels:

  • Elevation Color
  • Annotation Mapping
  • Map Scale Display

Elevation Color

This panel allows the user to utilize different tools that help improve the color rendering of the point layer. Note that this panel is enabled only when the Elevation Color section checkbox is checked.

Elevation Color section

In the Elevation range subsection, the user can define a custom color fill scheme for the entire elevation grid. By default, the Max elev and Min elev fields display the terrain’s maximum and minimum elevations. The user can also change these maximum and minimum elevations, and their corresponding elevation differences will be displayed in the Range read-only field.

In the Data ramp subsection, the user can define the color scheme as well as the interval for the color ramp that will be used to depict the range of elevation color fill. The Intervals spin control button allows the user to specify the number of colors that will be used to represent the different elevations of the point objects. The default value is 5. The Color scheme dropdown combo box allows the user to select the color scheme for the color ramp.

The user-defined maximum and minimum elevation range then can be utilized for the elevation color fill. In the Elevations and Color table, the user can then select the desired colors for the entire elevation range defined. Note that the Intervals defined in the Data ramp subsection create the same number of elevations in the Elevations and Color table.

Note that clicking the [Compute Ramp] button causes the software to reset the intervals and corresponding color style in the Elevations and Color table. Clicking the [Reverse Colors] button reverses the color values in the Elevations and Color table.

If there is an upper elevation range that does not fall under the user-defined elevation range, then all those elevations can also be assigned a color using the Above upper limit dropdown color palette.

Checking the Display legend and Display Map View legend checkboxes causes the software to create a color fill legend for the Elevations and Color table in the Map Data Layers panel and on the Map View respectively.

Annotation Mapping

This panel allows the user to change and display the labels of the point attributes on the Map View.

Annotation Mapping subpanel

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about annotation mapping.

Map Scale Display

This panel allows the user to transform the scale factor of the data to be displayed on the Map View. The user can select the maximum map scale ratio from the Maximum map scale dropdown combo box. Similarly, with the Minimum map scale dropdown combo box, the minimum map scale ratio can be selected. By default, the maximum and minimum map scales ratios are set to None.

Map Scale Display subpanel

Spatial Reference

The Spatial Reference tab allows the user to manually assign the project’s CRS to the non-CRS referenced data layer coordinates if the data layer lies within the project’s CRS. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about spatial reference.

Transformation

The Transformation tab allows the user to automatically apply the transformation scale factor to any particular layer and accurately map it to the project coordinate reference system (CRS). Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about layer transformation.

Point Table

The Point Table tab allows the user to view and edit point data of the selected point layer file.

Point Table panel

Edit Point Data

This section displays the table listing the point data (Easting, Northing, Elevation, Description, etc.). By default, this table is in read-only mode. Check the Edit Point Data section checkbox to make the table editable.

The user can export the table as a PDF file or a Microsoft Excel file or copy the table to the clipboard. To copy or export the table data to a different format, right-click anywhere in the table and select the Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF command from the displayed context menu.

Point Table tab

Note that the Elevation and Description columns allow the user to filter the table contents.

Selected Cells Group Editing

This section allows the user to edit multiple cells in the Edit Point Data table at once. The user can select the desired cells from the Edit Point Data table and then edit the data using one of the following options:

  • No change: This radio button option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the point data remain unchanged.
  • Add constant: This radio button entry allows the user to add a constant value to the existing point data. The new value will be the sum of the previous value and a constant value provided by the user.
  • Multiply by factor: This radio button entry allows the user to multiply the existing point data by a factor. The new value will be the product of the previous value and a constant value provided by the user.
  • Apply value: This radio button entry allows the user to replace the existing point data by a new value. The new value entered in the adjacent entry field will replace all previous values.

After selecting the preferred option, click on the [Apply Change] button to update the new values in the cells.

Platform & GIS Tools › Layer Management

Add Layers Command

In CivilGEO software, layers aid in visualizing map data used to construct the model and various output types. The use of layers organizes your project and enables you to temporarily hide the display of unwanted graphical data. The Add Layers command allows the user to select and add an additional layer of map data (i.e., AutoCAD drawings, GIS data, elevation data, survey data, etc.) as layers in the Map View.

Note that the order of layers in the Map Data Layers panel determines how they appear on the Map View. The layer at the top of the Map Data Layers panel is granted priority and will be displayed on top of those layers that are at the bottom. This article describes how to use the Add Layers command in the CivilGEO software.

Follow the steps below to use the Add Layers command:

  1. Right-click on the Map Data Layers panel to display the context menu and then select the Add Layers command.Select the Add Layers command Alternatively, select the Add Layers command from the Map Data ribbon menu.
    Map Data ribbon menu
  2. The Add Layers dialog box will be displayed.Add Layers dialog box
  3. Select the desired layer file from the Add Layers dialog box and click the [Open] button.Select a file from the Add Layers dialog box
  4. The software will load and display the selected layer on the Map View. In addition, the corresponding layer will be placed in the Map Data Layers panel.Selected layer is displayed on the Map View
Platform & GIS Tools › Layer Management

TIN Surface Properties

The TIN Surface Properties dialog box allows the user to manage different TIN surface properties such as the color of the TIN layer points, edge and border styles associated with the TIN surface, surface transparency, etc. In addition, the user can assign the project’s CRS to the non-CRS referenced TIN layer and can also map the TIN surface according to the project CRS.

Follow the steps given below to open the TIN Surface Properties dialog box:

  1. In the Map Data Layers panel, click on the […] button next to the TIN surface layer.
    Click on the […] button
  2. The TIN Surface Properties dialog box will be displayed.
    TIN Surface Properties dialog box

The TIN Surface Properties dialog box contains three tabs as described below:

  • General Options
  • Spatial Reference
  • Transformation

General Options

Various sections of the General Options tab are described below:

General Information

This section contains read-only information about the surface file directory and file name.

TIN Points

This section is used to define the color of the points for the TIN surface. By default, the TIN Points checkbox is checked.

TIN Edge Stylization

This section is used to define the color, width, style, and transparency of the polylines that will depict the edge of the TIN surface. By default, the TIN Edge Stylization checkbox is checked.

TIN Border Outline

This section is associated with the border of the TIN surface on the drawing layer. It allows the user to set its color, width, style, and transparency. By default, the TIN Border Outline checkbox is checked.

Spatial Reference

The Spatial Reference tab allows the user to manually assign the project’s CRS to the non-CRS referenced data layer if the data layer coordinates lie within the project’s CRS. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about spatial reference.

Transformation

The Transformation tab allows the user to automatically apply the transformation scale factor to any particular layer and accurately map it to the project coordinate reference system (CRS). Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about layer transformation.

Platform & GIS Tools › Layer Management

Creating a New Layer

The New Layer command allows the user to create a new drawing or GIS entities layer. When a GIS shapefile layer is created, then the GIS feature objects (i.e., nodes, polylines, or polygons) are saved as a shapefile.

Follow the steps below to create a new drawing or GIS layer:

  1. From the Map Data ribbon menu, select the New Layer command.
    Map Data ribbon menu - New Layer command
    Alternatively, right-click under the Map Data Layers panel and select New Layer from the displayed context menu.
    Map Data Layers panel - New Layer command
  2. The New layer dialog box will be displayed.
    New Layer dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the New Layer dialog box and interact with the above dialog box.

Map Layer Details

This section defines the name and type of map layer to be created. The Layer name entry field allows the user to define the name of a new layer to be created and displayed in the Map Data Layers panel.

The Layer type dropdown combo box is used to select the type of layer to be created. The following layer types are available in the dropdown combo box:

  • Drawing (Default)
  • GIS
Map Layers Details section

GIS Layer Details

This section is only enabled when GIS is selected as the Layer type in the Map Layer Details section. Otherwise, the options available in this section are disabled (i.e., grayed out).

GIS Layer Details section

The Directory field defines the path and name of the shapefile to be created. The user can click the […] browse button to select the shapefile directory location and file name.

The Feature type dropdown combo box contains Points, Polylines, and Polygons GIS entries.

Feature type selection

The Schema definition data table allows the user to define the fields to include for the shapefile layer. The data table requires the following data:

Field Name
This data column is used to define the field name of the shapefile layer to be created for the GIS entities.

Field Type
This dropdown combo box is used to select the data type of the field name. The following data types are available:

  • Floating Point
  • Integer
  • Text
  • Date

Width
This spin control button is only available for text field types and has a default value of 80. This spin control can range from 1 to 255.

Assign Elevations

This section is used to assign the elevation to the elements of the drawing or GIS layer. The following options are available:

Assign Elevation section

Drape onto terrain
On selecting this option, elements on the drawing/GIS layer appear to drape onto the surface terrain representing the ground surface. This option is selected by default.

Float above terrain
On selecting this option and viewing the layer’s elements in 3D view mode, the user can drag the selected element vertically up and down by holding down the [Shift] key.

Assign elevation
On selecting this option, the user can enter a fixed elevation to the elements of the drawing/GIS layer.

Display Properties

This section defines the default display properties for both Drawing and GIS layers.

Note that when GIS is selected as the Layer type in the Map Layer Details section, then the corresponding tab (i.e., Points, Polygons, or Polylines) gets enabled/disabled based on the Feature type selected in the GIS Layer Details section.

Points display properties

The different stylizations for Points, Polylines, and Polygons feature types are as follows:

Point Stylization
The Points panel is used to define the shape, size, border color, and fill color of the point entities.

Polyline Stylization
The Polylines panel is used to define the color, width, style, and transparency of the polyline entities.

Polylines display properties

Polygon Border Stylization
This section of the Polygons panel allows the user to set the color, width, style, and transparency of the polygon entities.

Polygons display properties

Polygon Fill Stylization
This section of the Polygons panel allows the user to set the fill color and the transparency of the polygon entities. A transparency value of 40 to 50% works well for the polygon color fills.

After defining all the required fields, click the [OK] button. The software will then create a new layer of the desired layer type and place it in the Map Data Layers panel.

Platform & GIS Tools › Layer Management

Drawing Layer Properties

The Drawing Layer Properties dialog box allows the user to define various elements and their properties on the drawing layer, style the border associated with the element, change the image’s transparency, change the current CRS (coordinate reference system) of the project and automatically apply the transformation scale factor on any particular layer to accurately map it to the project CRS.

Follow the steps given below to open the Drawing Layer Properties dialog box:

  1. In the Map Data Layers panel, click on the […] button next to Default Drawing Layer. […] button next to Default Drawing Layer
  2. The Drawing Layer Properties dialog box will be displayed. Drawing Layer Properties dialog box

The Drawing Layer Properties dialog box contains three tabs as described below:

  • General Options
  • Spatial Reference
  • Transformation

General Options

Various sections of the General Options tab are described below:

  • Point Stylization
    This section is used to define the shape, size, border color, and fill color of the point objects on the drawing layer. Note that the Point Stylization checkbox is selected by default.
  • Polyline Stylization
    This section is used to define the color, width, style, and transparency of the polylines that will depict the boundary of the elements. Note that the Polyline Stylization checkbox is selected by default.
  • Polygon Border Stylization
    This section is associated with the border of the polygon on the drawing layer. It allows the user to set its color, width, style, and transparency. Note that the Polygon Border Stylization checkbox is selected by default.
  • Polygon Fill Stylization
    This section is used to define the fill color and the transparency of the image so that you can see through the image to the background Base Map. A transparency value of 40 to 50% works well. Note that the Polygon Fill Stylization checkbox is selected by default.
  • Assign Elevations
    This section is used to assign elevation to elements on the drawing layer. The following options are available:
    1. Drape onto terrain: On selecting this option, elements on the drawing layer appear to drape onto the surface terrain representing the ground surface. Note that this radio button section is selected by default.
    2. Float above terrain: On selecting this option and viewing in 3D mode, the user can drag the selected element vertically up and down by holding down the shift key.
    3. Assign elevation: On selecting this option, the user can assign a fixed elevation to the selected element on the drawing layer. The user can enter the elevation value in the entry field next to this radio button option.

Spatial Reference

The Spatial Reference tab allows the user to manually assign the project’s CRS to the non-CRS referenced data layer if the data layer coordinates lie within the project’s CRS. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about spatial reference.

Transformation

The Transformation tab allows the user to automatically apply the transformation scale factor to any particular layer and accurately map it to the project coordinate reference system (CRS). Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about layer transformation.

Platform & GIS Tools › Layer Management

Elevation Grid Properties

In CivilGEO’s software, the user can include more than one terrain surface or elevation grid in the project. Each added elevation grid can be independently stylized. The software can compute a color ramp and generate a color fill display for each grid, making it easier to differentiate terrain surfaces on the Map View. The color fill settings are saved with the project, so they are available the next time the project is opened.

Elevation Grid Properties Img 1

The Elevation Grid Properties dialog box provides control over how each terrain surface is displayed, including border style, color fill scheme, transparency, and hillshading. The dialog box also allows the user to view elevation grid metadata, assign a spatial reference, and access layer transformation settings.

Follow the steps below to view and edit elevation grid properties.

  1. From the Map Data Layers panel, click the […] button next to the elevation grid layer.
    unknown node
  2. The Elevation Grid Properties dialog box will be displayed.
    unknown node

The following sections describe how to use the Elevation Grid Properties dialog box.

General Options

The General Options tabbed panel contains the display and visualization settings for the elevation grid. The different sections within this tabbed panel are described below:

General Information

This section contains read-only information about the elevation grid file, including the system file path, cell dimensions, cell count, and overall grid dimensions. The units shown for the cell and grid dimensions change based on the current project unit settings.

Default Elevation Grid Stylization

This section is used to define various elevation grid stylizations, such as border color, border size, and color fill options. If the Enable grid smoothing option is checked, the software improves the color shading used to display colorized (i.e., color ramp) elevation grids. This option makes the colorization sharper and clearer, showing more details relative to elevation changes within the grid.

Elevation Color Fill

This section provides options for rendering the terrain surface using an elevation-based color ramp. This helps the user visually identify high and low areas, terrain breaks, drainage pathways, and relative elevation changes across the project area. By default, this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Check the checkbox at the Elevation Color Fill section to enable the content of this section.

Elevation Grid Properties Img 4

If the Dynamically resample elev range option is selected, then the software dynamically renders the color shading based on the terrain’s elevation range. As the user zooms into a flat area, the software automatically adjusts the maximum and minimum elevations for the visible raster extents, producing a full range of color shades that show fine elevation detail in the current view. By default, this option is selected.

If the Automatic elevation range option is selected, then the software automatically utilizes the maximum and minimum elevation values across the entire raster grid to define the color fill range. This provides a consistent color scheme regardless of the current zoom level.

If the User-defined option is selected, then the underlying options are enabled, allowing the user to define a custom color fill scheme for the entire elevation grid. By default, the Max elev and Min elev fields display the terrain’s maximum and minimum elevations, respectively. The user can also change these maximum and minimum elevations, and their corresponding elevation differences are displayed in the Range read-only field. Clicking the [Reset] button resets the elevation values to their default values.

In the Data ramp subsection, the user can define the color scheme and interval for the color ramp that will be used to depict the range of elevation color fill. The Interval’s spin control option allows the user to define the interval of the color ramp. The default data ramp interval is 5. The Color scheme dropdown combo box allows the user to select the color scheme for the color ramp.

In the data grid containing Elevations values and Color palette columns, the user can select specific colors for the defined elevation range. Note that the number of intervals defined in the Data ramp subsection determines the number of rows created in the Elevation values and Color palette table.

Any elevations above the user-defined upper elevation limit can be assigned a color using the Above upper limit dropdown color palette.

Checking the Map Data Layer legend and Map View legend checkboxes causes the software to create a color fill legend for the elevation grid in the Map Data Layers panel and on the Map View, respectively.

The Color blending checkbox causes the software to enable color blending when there is not enough color range to represent all colors between the brightest and darkest points of a gradient.

If the Hillshading option is checked, the terrain is rendered using a hillshading effect that produces shadows based on a directional light source, enhancing the 3D appearance of the terrain surface.

Fill Transparency

This section is used to change the transparency of the elevation grid color fill, allowing the base map or other layers beneath the terrain to show through. A transparency value of 40 to 50% works well.

unknown node

Spatial Reference

The Spatial Reference tabbed panel allows the user to manually assign the project's coordinate reference system (CRS) to an elevation grid that does not contain embedded CRS information, provided the grid's coordinates fall within the project's CRS extent. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about spatial reference.

Transformation

The Transformation tabbed panel allows the user to automatically apply a transformation scale factor to the elevation grid layer, so it maps accurately to the project's coordinate reference system (CRS). Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about layer transformation.

Layer Metadata

The Layer Metadata tabbed panel displays descriptive metadata associated with the elevation grid, including the layer name, resolution, source grids, grid dimensions, data type, and pixel format. The user can use the [Copy Text] button to copy the elevation grid metadata to the clipboard for use in reports or documentation.

Elevation Grid Properties Img 5.pngunknown node
Platform & GIS Tools › Layer Management

External Map Layers Command

Maps are composed of a series of map layers drawn in a particular order. A map layer defines how a GIS dataset is symbolized and labeled in the Map View. Examples of map layers include streams and lakes, terrain, roads, subbasins, building footprints, orthophoto imagery, and more.

In CivilGEO’s software, the user can use the External Map Layers command to add an additional map layer on the Map View using external map services.

Follow the steps below to use the External Map Layers command:

  1. From the Map Data ribbon menu, select the External Map Layers command.
    External Map Layers-Map Data ribbon menu command
  2. The External Map Layers dialog box will be displayed.
    External Map Layers dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the External Map Layers command and interact with the above dialog box.

Adding an External Map Layer

The Map Layer Catalog panel allows the user to add external map layers on the Map View, import the map layer from the catalog file (collection of map files), or export the map layer into the catalog file.

To add additional map layers on the Map View, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Select Map Layers to Load section, select the desired map layers by checking the checkboxes corresponding to the map layer to be loaded on the Map View. Two available map layers catalogs are:
    • FEMA Flood Data: This option contains all the layers from the FEMA map service.
    • National Levee Database: The option contains information about the location and condition of levees and floodwalls, displayed in an easy-to-use map interface.
      Note that the user can expand these options to see the available map layers.
  2. The user can see the details of the selected map layer (Name, Version, and Abstract) in the Map layer details section.
  3. After selecting the map layer(s), click the [Load Catalog] button.
  4. The software will then add the selected map layers as a new group in the Map Data Layers panel and display it on the Map View, as shown below.
    Map Data Layers panel - Map View

Importing a Map Layer

The user can click the [Import Catalog] button to import the map layers on the Map View.

[Import Catalog] button

On clicking the [Import Catalog] button, the software will display the Import Catalog dialog box. The user can select the catalog file (it should have a file extension of .cat) and click the [Open] button.

Import Catalog dialog box

This will add the selected map layer catalog in the Select Map Layers to Load section of the Map Layer Catalog panel. The user can then select the sublayers of this newly added catalog and add them to the Map View.

Exporting a Map Layer

The user can click the [Export Catalog] button to export a map layer in a catalog file.

[Export Catalog] button

On clicking the [Export Catalog] button, the software will display the Export Catalog dialog box. The user can browse to the desired location to save the file, enter the file name, and then click the [Save] button to save map layers as a catalog file.

Export Catalog dialog box

Creating a New Map Layer

The Create New Map Layer tabbed panel allows the user to create a new map layer using the WMS (Web Map Service) services. A Web Map Service is the standard protocol for transferring map layers over the Internet.

Create New Map Layer panel

To create a new map layer, follow the steps below:

  1. In the Map Server Connection section, enter the map server URL in the Map server URL input field to load the map layer. By default, the software uses the NLD WMS service URL.
  2. From the Data source type dropdown combo box, select the data source type. By default, the software uses the WMS (Web Map Service) data source type.
    Note that the software currently supports WMS (Web Map Service) data source type only.
  3. From the Version dropdown combo box, select the appropriate version of the map service. By default, Auto is selected.
    Map Server Connection section - Version dropdown
    Sometimes the service requires authentication for establishing the connection. Follow the steps below to authenticate a connection:
    1. Select the Authentication panel under the Map Server Connection section.
      Authentication panel
    2. Enter the username in the User name input field.
    3. Enter the password in the Password input field.
    4. Alternatively, check the Save password checkbox option. Checking the Save password checkbox option does not require relogging every time you go to that URL..
    5. The software will automatically attempt the authentication when trying to download the sublayers.
  4. Click the [Get Sublayers] button. When the connection to the map service is successful, the software will download all the available sublayers corresponding to the specified URL and list them in the Select Sublayers to Use section.
    [Get Sublayers] button
  5. From the Select Sublayers to Use section, check the checkboxes corresponding to the sublayers to include them in the map layer catalog.
  6. From the Image format dropdown combo box, select the image format that will be used to represent the map layers on the Map View. By default, Auto is selected.
    Image format dropdown
  7. From the Projection dropdown combo box, select the projection to assign the CRS (coordinate reference system) for the loaded map layers. By default, WGS 84 (deg) is selected.
  8. In the Add Defined Map Layer to Catalog section, enter the source name into the Source name input field. This name identifies the map layer group that will be created in the Map Layer Catalog panel that will contain the selected sublayers.
  9. Click the [Store Map Layer] button. Note that this button is enabled only when at least one sublayer is selected in the Select sublayers to Use section, and the source name is defined in the Source name input field.
  10. The newly created map layer information will be created in the Map Layer Catalog panel, as shown below.
    Map Layer Catalog panel
Platform & GIS Tools › Layer Management

Layer Transformation

CivilGEO’s software uses a projected coordinate reference system (CRS) to create an engineering model. It lets the user bring in GIS, CAD, TIN, and other data files which are in a different coordinate system, and automatically map them according to the project CRS.

However, sometimes when a projection file layer with data that has been converted from 3D spheroid (Earth) survey data into a projection map is added to a project, it may not necessarily map in the same coordinate space as the rest of the data. This issue occurs because all map projections have distortions.

The transformation scale factor is a way to reduce the distortion over a particular area, so that a dimension on the flat projection map is as close as it can get to the spherical Earth measurement. AutoCAD Civil 3D provides support for the transformation scale factor in its Drawing Settings dialog box.

In our software, the transformation scale factor is supported throughout the software, including CAD layers, TIN layers, and other layers. This is accomplished by using the layer properties dialog boxes to automatically apply transformation scale factor on any particular layer and accurately map it to the project coordinate reference system (CRS).

In addition, a layer’s position may be registered manually by providing two coordinate points (i.e., the source and the target location).

Follow the steps below to apply a layer transformation and its registration on the desired layer:

  1. From the Map Data Layers panel, click the […] button of the desired layer.
    Layer-Transformation-im-1.png
  2. The layer Properties dialog box will be displayed.
    Layer-Transformation-im-2.png
  3. Select the Transformation tab.
    Layer Properties Dialog Box - Transformation Tab

The following sections describe how to use the Transformation tab and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Apply Grid Scale Factor

This option permits the application of grid scaling factor on a layer to match the layer’s dimensions to the project CRS. The Grid scale factor is the measure of distortion at a point on a projected map. It is used to calculate the actual ellipsoidal distances as per the true shape of the Earth, which is not a perfect sphere. To apply grid scale factor on a layer, follow these steps:

  1. Turn on the Apply Gird Scale Factor checkbox to enable layer transformation using a grid scale factor.
    Layer-Transformation-im-4.png
  2. Enter the Grid scale factor value.
    Grid Scale Factor Value
  3. Click on [OK] button. Now, this grid scale factor will be applied on the layer’s dimension.
    Layer-Transformation-im-6.png

Apply Reference Point Shift

This option allows quick registration of a layer that is not mapped correctly according to the project CRS. The user can specify the coordinate points for the target and the source locations. To apply reference point shift on a layer, follow these steps:

  1. Turn on the Apply Reference Point Shift checkbox to enable the option.
    Apply Reference Point Shift Checkbox
  2. Enter the corresponding Easting and Northing coordinates in the Local reference point (target) and the Grid reference point (source) entry fields.
    Layer-Transformation-im-8.png

Alternatively, the user can interactively pick the target and source locations from the Map View to automatically register the layer. To use this alternate method, follow these steps:

  1. Click the [Pick] button corresponding to the Local reference point (target) section.
    Local Reference Point (Target) Section
  2. The layer Properties dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar “Pick target reference point.”
  3. Click the point on the Map View that will serve as the reference for the target location.
  4. The layer Properties dialog box will be redisplayed.
  5. Click the [Pick] button corresponding to the Grid reference point (source) section.
    Layer-Transformation-Image-10.png
  6. The layer Properties dialog box will again temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar “Pick source reference point.”
  7. Click the point on the Map View that will serve as the reference for the source location.
  8. The layer Properties dialog box will be redisplayed.
    Layer Properties Dialog Box
  9. After defining the locations, click the [OK] button, and the software will automatically transform and register the selected layer based on the user-defined criteria.
Platform & GIS Tools › Layer Management

Reload Layer command

CivilGEO software allows the user to reload a layer by right-clicking on the layer and selecting the Reload Layer command. For example, to reload an external AutoCAD drawing that has just been modified, use the Reload Layer command. This prevents the user from having to unload the drawing and then reopen the new drawing. Similarly, if you have made changes to the HEC‑RAS model outside of GeoHECRAS using the US Army Corps HEC‑RAS software, then reloading the HEC‑RAS model will cause those changes to be reflected in the HEC‑RAS model contained within GeoHECRAS.

Similarly, if the user has made modifications to the HEC-HMS model outside of the GeoHECHMS application using the US Army Corps HEC-HMS software, then reloading the HEC‑HMS model will cause those changes to be reflected in the HEC‑HMS model contained within GeoHECHMS.

Note that any modified layer options, such as AutoCAD layer visibility, color changes, assigned coordinate reference system, and other options are retained for the newly reloaded layer.

Follow these steps to see the before and after changes while reloading a modified layer:

  1. From the Map Data Layers panel, right-click on the layer to reload, and then select Reload from the displayed context menu.
    Reload-Layer-Command-image-1.png
  2. From the displayed Reload Layer dialog box, click on [Select] button.
    Reload-Layer-Command-image-2.png
  3. The following dialog box will be displayed. Browse to the folder and select the file to reload. Then click on [Open] button.
    Reload-Layer-Command-image-3.png
  4. After loading the file, the user can see the changes on the Map View as shown below.
    • Before reloading a layer:Reload-Layer-Command-image-4.png
    • After reloading a layer:Reload-Layer-Command-image-5.png

Reloading an AutoCAD Drawing

The CivilGEO software also allows the user to reload a modified external AutoCAD drawing file.

Follow the steps below to reload a modified AutoCAD drawing file:

  1. From the Map Data Layers panel, right-click on the AutoCAD drawing file, and select Reload from the displayed context menu.
    Reload-Layer-Command-image-6.png
  2. The AutoCAD drawing file will get reloaded on the Map View as per the applied modifications.
    Reload-Layer-Command-image-7.png
Platform & GIS Tools › Layer Management

Layer Display Order

The order of layers listed in the Map Data Layers panel determines how layers are drawn on a map. The layers listed at the top of the Map Data Layer panel will draw over those listed below them, and so on, down the list. You can easily move layers around to adjust their drawing order.

How to Change a Layer's Draw Order

Follow these steps to change a layer's draw order:

  1. From within the Map Data Layers panel, click and drag the layer up or down in the layer listing. A black line indicates where the layer will be placed.
    12-22-2014-6.35.21-PM-1.png
  2. Release the mouse pointer to drop the layer in its new position.
Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Copy & Paste Element Properties

In CivilGEO’s software, users can use the Copy Properties and Paste Properties commands to copy and paste the hydrologic/engineering properties between similar Map View elements, such as subbasins, reaches, storage areas, manholes, pipes, and more.

Copy and Paste Element properties commands

Follow the steps below to copy and paste properties from one element to another element:

  1. On the Map View, select the element whose properties are to be copied.
  2. Right-click the selected element and choose Copy Properties from the displayed context menu.
  3. Right-click the target element on the Map View where the copied properties will be pasted.
  4. Select Paste Properties from the displayed context menu.
  5. The properties will now be pasted to the target element.

Notes:

  • You can only copy and paste properties between elements of the same type.
  • Geometric properties, such as elevations, area, lengths, etc., along with the computed results, cannot be copied and pasted since they are considered element specific. Only engineering properties, such as curve numbers, percent impervious, routing methods, etc., can be copied.
  • The hydrologic results of project elements, such as Junction and Sink, obtained after computing the analysis, cannot be copied and pasted among similar element types.

HEC-HMS Element Properties

The following list outlines the engineering properties eligible for copying and pasting among similar HEC-HMS elements.

unknown node

GeoSTORM Element Properties

The following list outlines the engineering properties that can be copied and pasted among similar GeoSTORM elements.

unknown node
Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Create Holes Command

This article describes how the Create Holes command of CivilGEO software allows the user to create holes within an existing polygon.

Follow the steps below to use the Create Holes command:

  1. From the Map Edit ribbon menu, select the Create Holes command.
    Create Holes Command
  2. The Create Holes dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Create Holes Dialog Box

Selecting Polygon to Create Holes Inside

The Select Polygon to Create Holes Inside section allows the user to select a polygon in which the holes are to be created.

Follow the steps below to select a polygon:

  1. Click the [Pick] button.
    [Pick] Button
  2. The Create Holes dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select a polygon on the Map View to create holes.
  3. After selecting the polygon, the user is immediately returned to the Create Holes dialog box, and the status of the Pick polygon read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.
    Pick Polygon Read-only Field
    Note: Click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

Defining Holes to be Created

The Define Holes to be Created section allows the user to define the polygons that will be used to create holes.

Define Holes to be Created Section

The following options are provided to define the polygon holes:

Drawing Polygon Hole

The Draw polygon hole radio button option allows the user to draw a polygon hole on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to draw a polygon hole:

  1. Select the Draw polygon hole radio button option and click the [Draw] button. The Create curvilinear polygon hole checkbox option can be used to draw the polygon hole using curvilinear segments.
    Create Curvilinear Polygon Hole Checkbox Option
  2. The Create Holes dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw the polygon hole.
  3. Draw the polygon hole on the Map View. Note that the user can draw only one polygon hole at a time.
    While drawing a polygon hole, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between linear and curvilinear digitizing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the drawing elements on the Map View.
  4. After drawing the polygon hole, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The Create Holes dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Draw polygon hole read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    Draw Polygon Hole Read-only Field

Pick Polygon Holes

The Pick polygon holes radio button option allows the user to manually select single or multiple polygon holes from the Map View.

Follow the steps below to select the polygon holes:

  1. Select the Pick polygon holes radio button option and click the [Pick] button.
    Pick Polygon Holes Radio Button Option
  2. The Create Holes dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the polygon to create holes.
  3. After selecting the polygon holes, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Create Holes dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected polygon holes will be displayed in the Pick polygon holes read-only field.
    Pick Polygon Holes Read-only Field

Creating Polygon Holes

Once the options have been defined, click the [OK] button and the software will create holes in the selected polygon.

Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Editing Element IDs & Descriptions

CivilGEO software allows the user to edit the ID and description of project elements so that they can be clearly identified throughout the model. This article describes how to update element IDs and descriptions and explains how meaningful naming conventions can improve model organization, review, troubleshooting, and project handoff.

Why Element Naming Matters

Project elements should be named in a way that is easy to recognize and easy to manage. A meaningful element ID can describe the element type, location, stationing, drainage area, or modeling purpose. A useful description can provide additional context that does not need to be included in the element ID itself.

  • Improved model review: Reviewers can quickly understand what each element represents.
  • Better troubleshooting: Meaningful names make warnings, errors, tables, and profile plots easier to interpret.
  • Cleaner exports and reports: Element IDs often appear in reports, CAD exports, shapefiles, and modeling data files.
  • Consistent project handoff: A clear naming convention helps other team members continue model development without guessing what each element means.

Editing Element ID on the Map View

The quickest way to rename an element ID is directly from the Map View. To do this, double-click the element’s ID label shown on the Map View. An inline editing field will appear directly over the label, allowing the user to edit the existing element ID.

Editing Element IDs & Descriptions Img 1unknown node

Editing Element ID & Description in Data Dialog Box

Each project element’s data dialog box also allows the user to edit the element ID and description. This is useful when the user is already working in a data dialog box and wants to update the element ID without returning to the Map View.

For example, from the Map View, double-clicking a Reach displays the Reach Data dialog box. Alternatively, from the Input ribbon menu, click the Routing Reaches dropdown menu and select the Reach Data command.

Editing Element IDs & Descriptions Img 2

The Reach Data dialog box will be displayed.

Editing Element IDs & Descriptions Img 3

The user can select any reach available in the project from the Reach ID dropdown entry. After selecting a reach, clicking the edit option (i.e., Pencil icon) next to the Reach ID dropdown entry enables the editing field, allowing the user to type a new reach ID. In addition, the user can edit the description associated with the selected reach in the Description field.

Editing Element IDs & Descriptions Img 4

Similarly, the user can edit the ID and description of other project elements, such as subbasins, junctions, diversions, sources, and sinks using the data dialog boxes of the corresponding elements.

Edit Element IDs & Descriptions Command

For projects with many elements of the same type, CivilGEO software provides an Edit Element IDs & Descriptions command. This command displays a dedicated editing dialog box that lists all elements of the selected type in a single table, making it easier to edit element IDs and descriptions in one place.

The Edit Element IDs & Descriptions command is available for the following project elements:

  • Subbasins
  • Junctions
  • Reaches
  • Manholes
  • Terminal Outfalls
  • Diversions
  • Sources
  • Sinks, etc.

For example, from the Input ribbon menu, click the Routing Reaches dropdown menu and select the Edit Reach Names & Descriptions command.

Editing Element IDs & Descriptions Img 5

The Edit Reach IDs & Descriptions dialog box will be displayed. All available reaches in the project are listed in the table, and the user can edit the ID and description of each reach directly within the table.

Editing Element IDs & Descriptions Img 6unknown node

Conclusion

CivilGEO software provides three flexible methods for editing element IDs and descriptions: inline on the Map View for quick single-element edits, within each element’s data dialog box when reviewing or entering data, and through the dedicated Edit Element IDs & Descriptions command for efficient table-based editing. Using clear, consistent element IDs early in a project helps simplify navigation, improve collaboration, and make model results easier to interpret.

Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Trim Polylines Command

In CivilGEO software, the Trim Polylines command cuts and deletes selected portions of one or more selected polylines at the intersection with a drawn polyline or selected polyline.

Note that this command can only be used for the drawing elements. It cannot be used for the HEC-RAS and HEC-HMS entities.

Follow the steps below to use the Trim Polylines command:

  1. From the Map Edit ribbon menu, select the Trim Polylines command.
    Trim Polylines command
  2. The Trim Polylines dialog box will be displayed.
    Trim Polylines dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Trim Polylines command and interact with the above dialog box.

Defining Trim Polyline

The Define Trim Polyline section allows the user to define a polyline that should be used in the Trim Polylines command. The user can define a polyline to be trimmed by either drawing a new trim polyline or by selecting the previously drawn polyline from the Map View.

Drawing Trim Polyline

The Draw trim polyline radio button option allows the user to interactively draw a single trim polyline on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to draw a trim polyline on the Map View:

  1. Select the Draw trim polyline radio button option and then click the [Draw] button.[Draw] button
  2. The Trim Polylines dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next.
  3. Draw a trim polyline on the Map View. While drawing a polyline, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between linear and curvilinear digitizing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about drawing elements on the Map View.
  4. After drawing a trim polyline, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Draw trim polyline read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn as shown below.Draw trim polyline read-only field

Selecting Trim Polyline

The Select trim polyline radio button option allows the user to select an existing polyline from the Map View as a trim polyline. Note that only one polyline can be selected at a time.

Follow the steps below to select a trim polyline from the Map View:

  1. Choose the Select trim polyline radio button option and then click the [Pick] button.[Pick] button
  2. The Trim Polylines dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next.
  3. Select a trim polyline for trimming polylines from Map View.
  4. After clicking a polyline, the dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Select trim polyline read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected, as shown below.Select trim polyline read-only field

Selecting Polylines to Trim

The Select Polylines to Trim section allows the user to manually select the existing polylines to be trimmed from the Map View. Note that this section is enabled only when the user has defined a trim polyline in the Define Trim Polyline section.

Follow the steps below to select polylines to be trimmed:

  1. Click the [Pick] button.[Pick] button
  2. The Trim Polylines dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next.
  3. Select polylines to be trimmed from the Map View.
  4. After selecting the trim polylines, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The Trim Polylines dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected polylines will be shown in the Pick polylines read-only field as shown below.Pick polylines read-only field
  6. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.

Trimming Polylines

Once the options have been properly defined in the Trim Polylines dialog box, click the [OK] button.

[OK] button

A prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the side of the polylines to be trimmed (i.e., removed). After clicking on a polyline, the side that is clicked on will be displayed in a red color. Now, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The selected polylines will be trimmed to the specified cutting edges.

Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Merge Polylines Command

In CivilGEO software, the Merge Polylines command allows the user to merge two or more connected polylines into a single polyline. This can be useful when working with complex shapes that have several individual elements that need to be combined into a single entity.

The following illustration shows how this command operates to merge connected pipes (i.e., polylines).

Illustration of Merge Polylines command

Note that if more than two polylines are connected to the same node, then the Merge Polylines command will not work.

Follow the steps below to use the Merge Polylines command:

  1. From the Map Edit ribbon menu, select the Merge Polylines command.Merge Polylines command Map Edit ribbon menu
  2. The Merge Polylines dialog box will be displayed.Merge Polylines dialog box
  3. Click the [Pick] button to select polylines from the Map View.[Pick] button


    Note that if the user has preselected the polylines from the Map View prior to running this command, the same number of selected polylines will be displayed in the Pick polylines read-only field. Proceed to step 7 to merge the selected polylines.

  4. The Merge Polylines dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select polylines.
  5. Select the connected polylines from the Map View. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  6. The Merge Polylines dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected polylines will be displayed in the Pick polylines read-only field.Pick polylines read-only field


    Note that the user can click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.

  7. In the Merge Options section, check the Merge polylines with same attribute value checkbox and select an attribute from the dropdown combo box. This causes the software to merge only those polylines that have the same value for the selected attribute. By default, this checkbox is left unchecked.Merge polylines with same attribute value checkbox option


    Note that the attribute dropdown combo box lists all of the non-geometric attributes associated with the first selected polyline.

  8. When all the options have been defined, click the [OK] button. The software will then merge the selected polylines.
    To cancel the command, the user can click the [Cancel] button.[OK] button
  9. Once all the selected polylines are merged, the [Cancel] button changes to the [Close] button. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.[Close] button
  10. If the user has selected polylines that have different values for the attribute selected in the Merge Options section, then the following informational dialog box will be displayed on clicking the [OK] button.Cannot Merge Polylines dialog box
Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Extend Polylines Command

In CivilGEO software, the Extend Polylines command allows the user to extend one or more selected polylines in order to intersect it with a drawn polyline or selected polylines or polygons.

The following example illustrates how the Extend Polylines command can be used to extend polyline B to meet polyline A.

example to illustrates the Extend Polylines command

This article explains how to use the Extend Polylines command.

From the Map Edit ribbon menu, select the Extend Polylines command and the Extend Polylines dialog box will be displayed.

Extend Polylines dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Extend Polylines command and interact with the above dialog box.

Defining Extend Polylines

The Define Extend Polylines section allows the user to define the polylines (and polygons) that should be used in the Extend Polylines command. The user can define the polylines to be extended by either drawing a new extend polyline or by selecting the previously drawn polylines or polygons from the Map View.

Drawing Extend Polyline

The Draw extend polyline radio button option allows the user to interactively draw a single extend polyline on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to draw the extend polyline on the Map View:

  1. Select the Draw extend polyline radio button option and then click the [Draw] button.

    [Draw] button
  2. The Extend Polylines dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  3. Draw the extend polyline on the Map View. While drawing a polyline, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between linear and curvilinear digitizing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about drawing elements on the Map View.
  4. After drawing the extend polyline, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Draw extend polyline read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn as shown below.

    Draw extend polyline read-only field

Selecting Extend Polylines/Polygons

The Select extend polylines/polygons radio button option allows the user to select one or more existing polylines or polygons from the Map View as extend polylines.

Follow the steps below to select the extend polylines/polygons from the Map View:

  1. Choose the Select extend polylines/polygons radio button option and then click the [Pick] button.

    [Pick] button
  2. The Extend Polylines dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  3. Select the extend polylines/polygons from the Map View.
  4. After selecting the extend polylines/polygons, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected polylines/polygons will be shown in the Select extend polylines/polygons read-only field as shown below.

    Select extend polylines/polygons read-only field

Selecting Polylines to Extend

The Select Polylines to Extend section allows the user to manually select the polylines to be extended from the Map View. Note that this section is enabled only when the user has defined extend polylines in the Define Extend Polylines section.

Follow the steps below to select polylines to be extended:

  1. Click the [Pick] button.

    [Pick] button
  2. The Extend Polylines dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  3. Select the polylines to be extended from the Map View.
  4. After selecting the extend polylines, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The Extend Polylines dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected polylines will be shown in the Extend polylines read-only field as shown below.

    Extend polylines read-only field
  6. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.

Extending Polylines

Once the data have been properly defined in the Extend Polylines dialog box, click the [OK] button. The software will extend the selected polylines along the defined clipping polylines or polygons.

Note that if the selected polylines to be extended do not intersect with the clipping polylines or polygons, the following informational dialog box will be displayed on clicking the [OK] button.

Cannot Extend Polylines
Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Deleting Project Elements

In CivilGEO software, the user can create projects that can have various HEC-HMS or HEC-RAS project elements such as:

  • Subbasins
  • Sources
  • Junctions
  • Cross Sections
  • River Junctions
  • River Reaches
  • Lateral Structures, etc.

The user can delete these project elements directly from the Map View. Select the element to be deleted from the Map View. Then, either press the [Delete] key or right-click and choose Delete command from the displayed context menu, as shown below.

Context menu Delete command

Alternatively, the user can delete these project elements using the Delete command from the ribbon menu, as explained in the following sections.

Note: The Delete command does not delete other project elements connected to the deleted elements.

Deleting Project Elements in GeoHECHMS

The user can delete HEC-HMS project elements such as Subbasins, Sources, Cross Sections, Junctions, etc. using the corresponding Delete command.

For example, follow the steps below to manually delete subbasins using the Delete Subbasins command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Drainage Subbasins dropdown menu and select the Delete Subbasins command.Delete Subbasins command
  2. The Delete Subbasins dialog box will be displayed.Delete Subbasins dialog box
  3. All the subbasins of a project will be displayed under the Select Subbasins section.
    Note: If subbasins are already selected on the Map View prior to running this command, the same subbasins will be shown selected within the dialog box.
  4. The user can check the corresponding checkbox entries of the subbasins that are to be deleted.
  5. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to manually select the subbasins from the Map View. Clicking the [Pick] button causes the dialog box to temporarily disappear and allows the user to manually select the subbasins from the Map View. After selecting the subbasins, press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu.
  6. The Delete Subbasins dialog box will be redisplayed. The count of selected subbasins will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.Total subbasins selected
  7. Clicking the [OK] button displays the following confirmational dialog box.Delete Subbasins confirmation
  8. Click the [Yes] button to confirm deletion or click the [No] button to abort the deletion.
    Note: The displayed confirmational dialog box can be turned off using the Confirm deletion checkbox option from the Options Backstage Page.

Similarly, the user can delete other HEC-HMS project elements using the corresponding Delete command.

Note: The Delete Cross Sections dialog box contains additional options that allow the user to delete the corresponding reaches and downstream connection junctions while deleting the selected cross sections.

Delete Cross Sections dialog box GeoHECHMS

Deleting Project Elements in GeoHECRAS

The user can delete various HEC-RAS elements such as River Reaches, 2D Flow Areas, Lateral Structures, River Junctions, Cross Sections, etc. using the corresponding Delete command.

For example, follow the steps below to manually delete cross sections using the Delete Cross Sections command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Cross Sections dropdown menu and select the Delete Cross Sections command.Delete Cross Sections command GeoHECRAS

    Note: The user can press the [Ctrl+Shift+D] keys on the Map View to directly open the Delete Cross Sections dialog box.

  2. The Delete Cross Sections dialog box will be displayed.Delete Cross Sections dialog box GeoHECRAS
  3. All the cross sections on the river stations and the associated rivers and reaches of the project will be displayed under the Select Cross Sections section.
    Note: If the cross sections are already selected on the Map View prior to running this command, the same entity will be shown selected within the dialog box.
  4. The user can check the River Station checkbox entries from the dialog box to select the corresponding cross sections. The user can also click the [Select All] button to select all the River Station checkbox entries at once.
  5. Click the [Pick] button to manually select cross sections from the Map View. Clicking the [Pick] button causes the dialog box to temporarily disappear and allows the user to manually select the cross sections from the Map View. Alternatively, click on the river reach and all associated cross sections will be selected. After selecting the cross sections or river reach, press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu.
  6. The Delete Cross Sections dialog box will be redisplayed. The count of selected cross sections will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.
    Note: Click the [Clear All] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.
    Total cross sections selected
  7. The Adjust upstream cross section flow lengths checkbox option is used to determine if the flow lengths will be adjusted for the cross section that is immediately upstream of a cross section being deleted.
  8. After selecting the cross sections, clicking the [OK] button displays the following confirmational dialog box.Delete Cross Sections confirmation
  9. Click the [Yes] button to confirm deletion or click the [No] button to abort the deletion.

Similarly, the user can delete other HEC-RAS project elements using the corresponding Delete command.

Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Rotating and Resizing Polyline and Polygon Elements

In CivilGEO’s software, the following basic element types are used to create engineering entities:

  • Nodes Nodes can be represented by a simple filled circle or a symbol. Selecting a node element causes the element to be highlighted on the Map View. Sources, sinks, etc are typical examples of node entities.
  • Polylines Polylines can be represented by different colors, line types (solid, dashed, etc.), and line widths. Cross sections, roadway crossings, etc are typical examples of polyline entities.
  • Polygons Polygons can be represented by different external line colors and widths, as well as different color fills and fill patterns (or no fill at all). Detention ponds, subbasins, etc are typical examples of polygon entities.

Rotating Selected Elements

The user can select multiple project elements while pressing and holding down the [Ctrl] key during the element selection. To rotate the selected elements, right-click and choose Graphic Edit from the displayed context menu. Alternatively, press the [F2] key to directly enable the Graphic Edit option for the selected element.

Rotating Selected Elements

Note that graphical editing can be performed only on the polyline and polygon project elements.

Once the graphical editing option is enabled, hovering/clicking on the rotation grip (i.e., a yellow color node) will cause the rotation center/pivot point (i.e., a green color node) to be then shown at the center of the selection bounding box. In addition, the selected rotation grip will be highlighted, and the cursor will change to a rotation cursor.

rotation grip

The user can then drag the rotation grip and the selected elements will then rotate around the rotation center reference point.

rotate around

To reposition the rotation center reference point, click and drag it to a new location.

rotation center reference point

Resizing Selected Elements

To resize the selected elements, click on one of the corners or side grips of the selection bounding box and drag. The selected elements will then be resized. Clicking on a grip causes it to become selected and highlighted. Releasing the mouse cursor from the side grip causes the grip to become non-selected and non-highlighted.

Resizing Using Corner Grips

When resizing the selected elements using the corner grips, the selected elements are resized proportionally with the opposite corner grip acting as an anchor point.

Resizing Using Corner Grips

To resize the selected elements non-proportionally using the corner grips, hold down the [Shift] key while dragging the corner grip.

Resizing Using Side Grips

When resizing the selected elements using the side grips, the selected elements are resized non-proportionally with the opposite edge side grip acting as an anchor point.

Resizing Using Side Grips

To resize the selected elements proportionally using the side grips, hold down the [Shift] key while dragging the side grip.

Note that clicking the mouse cursor at a random Map View location or pressing the [ESC] key disables the Graphic Edit mode for the selected elements.


Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Polyline and Polygon Vertices Editing

Polylines and polygons are constructed with individual line segments and connecting vertices. When working with polylines and polygons, the user may sometimes need to edit vertices, or points that define the shape of the polyline and polygon feature. Editing vertices allows the user to modify the shape and size of the polyline and polygon, as well as add, remove, move, or merge vertices as needed. This article describes how to edit the vertices that make up polylines and polygons.

Vertex Tracking

In the vertex editing mode, as the user moves the cursor over the selected polyline or polygon edge, a tracking vertex follows the cursor along the polyline and polygon edge. If the user moves outside of the selected polyline or polygon boundary, the tracking vertex is no longer displayed. If the user moves back within the polyline or polygon boundary, the tracking vertex is again displayed.

Notes:

  • When the cursor is over an existing vertex (including the ends of the polyline), the tracking vertex is displayed as red.
  • When the cursor is not over an existing vertex, the tracking vertex is displayed as green.

The following example illustrates vertex tracking:

vertex tracking illustration

Follow the steps below to edit polyline or polygon vertices:

  1. Click on the polyline/polygon to be edited. The selected polyline/polygon will be highlighted on the Map View.
  2. Press the function key [F4] or right-click and select the Edit Vertices command from the displayed context menu.

    Edit Vertices right-click context menu command
  3. The selected polyline/polygon will remain highlighted, and its vertices will be ready to be graphically edited.
  4. Click on the vertex that you want to edit to select it.
  5. The user can move a vertex to a new location, add new vertices, merge vertices, or delete vertices that are no longer needed.
  6. To move a vertex:
    • Position the pointer on the vertex to be moved, the tracking vertex will be displayed as red.
    • Click and hold down the mouse button to drag the selected vertex to a new position.
    • Once finished, release the mouse button to stop moving the selected vertex.
  7. To add a vertex:
    • Position the cursor along the polyline or polygon edge and click on it to add a new vertex.
    • Reposition the new vertex as described above, if needed.
  8. To merge vertices:
    • Click and hold down the mouse button to drag the selected vertex over an adjacent vertex.
    • The following confirmational dialog box will be displayed.

      Merge Vertices dialog box
    • Click the [Yes] button to merge the vertices.
  9. To delete a vertex:
    • Select the vertex to be deleted.
    • Press the [Backspace] key or right-click and choose the Delete Vertex command from the displayed context menu.

      Delete Vertex right click context menu command
    • The following confirmational dialog box will be displayed.

      Delete Vertex dialog box
    • Click the [Yes] button to delete the vertex.
  10. Once finished, the software will save the changes and update the feature with the new shape.
  11. The user can press the [Esc] key to abort the editing process.
Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Reshape Polyline Command

The Reshape Polyline command allows the user to reshape an already drawn polyline by drawing a new polyline that intersects it or by selecting a trace line that intersects the polyline to be reshaped.

Follow the steps below to use the Reshape Polyline command:

  1. From the Map Edit ribbon menu, select the Reshape Polyline command.

    Reshape Polyline command
  2. The Reshape Polyline dialog box will be displayed.

    Reshape Polyline dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Reshape Polyline command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Polyline to Reshape

The Select Polyline to Reshape section allows the user to select the already drawn polyline from the Map View to be reshaped.

Follow the steps below to reshape a polyline:

  1. Click the [Pick] button. The Reshape Polyline dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user to select the polyline to be reshaped.

    Selecting Polyline to Reshape
  2. Select the polyline on the Map View. Note that the user can select only one polyline at a time.
  3. The Reshape Polyline dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Pick polyline read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to 1 Selected.

    Pick polyline read-only fieldNote that if a polyline has been preselected before running this command, then the selected polyline will be displayed in the Pick polyline read-only field.
  4. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.

Draw Intersecting Reshape Polyline

This section allows the user to draw a polyline on the Map View that the reshaped polyline should follow. The drawn polyline must intersect the original polyline two or more times. The start and end portions of the original polyline to be reshaped will be retained.

Follow the steps below to draw an intersecting reshape polyline on the Map View:

  1. Select the Draw Intersecting Reshape Polyline radio button. Note that this radio button section is selected by default.
  2. Click the [Draw] button. Use the Draw curvilinear reshape polyline checkbox option to draw the polyline using a curvilinear segment.

    Draw Intersecting Reshape Polyline
  3. The Reshape Polyline dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user to draw a trace polyline that intersects with the polyline to be reshaped.
  4. Draw a polyline on the Map View representing the change in shape for the selected polyline. While drawing the polyline, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between curvilinear and linear digitizing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about element digitizing on the Map View.
  5. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  6. The Reshape Polyline dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Draw reshape polyline read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.

    Draw reshape polyline read-only field
  7. Click the [OK] button and the software will then reshape the selected polyline.

Use Intersecting Trace Polyline

This section allows the user to select an existing polyline on the Map View that the reshaped polyline should follow. The selected polyline must intersect the polyline two or more times. The start and end portions of the original polyline to be reshaped will be retained.

Follow the steps below to select a trace polyline from the Map View:

  1. Select the Use Intersecting Trace Polyline radio button to enable this section.
  2. Click the [Pick] button.

    Use Intersecting Trace Polyline
  3. The Reshape Polyline dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user to select the trace polyline that intersects with the polyline to be reshaped.
  4. Select the trace polyline from the Map View. Note that the user can select only one trace polyline at a time.
  5. The Reshape Polyline dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Pick trace polyline read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.

    Pick trace polyline read-only field
  6. Click the [OK] button and the software will then reshape the selected polyline.
Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Explode Multipart Command

In CivilGEO software, the Explode Multipart command is used to break multipart polylines and polygons into separate individual parts with attribute values that match the original multipart feature. The selected polylines or polygons that are not multipart polylines or polygons are unaffected. This would be useful if the user needed to alter the attributes of one of the elements in a multipart feature.

The following image shows four singlepart features (polygons) generated by separating one multipart input feature (polygons).

Explode Multipart command illustration

This article describes how to use the Explode Multipart command in the CivilGEO software.

Follow the steps below to use the Explode Multipart command:

  1. From the Map Edit ribbon menu, select the Explode Multipart command.

    Explode Multipart Map Edit ribbon menu command
  2. The Explode Multipart dialog box will be displayed.

    Explode Multipart dialog box
  3. Click the [Pick] button to select the multipart polyline(s)/polygon(s) to be exploded.

    [Pick] button
  4. The Explode Multipart dialog will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  5. Select multipart polylines/polygons to explode from the Map View.
  6. After selecting the multipart polylines/polygons, press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu.
  7. The dialog box will be redisplayed and the total number of selected polylines/polygons will be displayed in the Pick polygons/polylines read-only field.

    Pick polygons/polylines read-only fieldNote that if the user has preselected the polylines/polygons from the Map View prior to running this command, the same number of selected polylines/polygons will be displayed in the Pick polygons/polylines read-only field.
  8. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.
  9. When all the options have been defined, click the [OK] button.

    [OK] button
  10. The software will then break multipart polylines/polygons into their individual polylines or polygons.
  11. If the user has selected non-multipart features, then the following informational dialog box will be displayed on clicking the [OK] button.

    Cannot Explode Multipart Feature informational dialog box
Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Build Polygons Command

The Build Polygons command allows the user to create polygons from the existing polylines drawn on the Map View. This is useful when a complex boundary, such as a watershed boundary, study area boundary, or land use zone, is too large or intricate to digitize as a single polygon and needs to be constructed in stages using multiple polyline segments. For example, the user might want to digitize a complex watershed boundary in stages, in order to break down the work into manageable tasks.

unknown node

Follow the steps below to use the Build Polygons command:

  1. From the Map Edit ribbon menu, select the Build Polygons command.
    unknown node
  2. The Build Polygons dialog box will be displayed.
    unknown node

The following sections describe how to use the Build Polygons command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Polylines/Polygons

The Select Polylines/Polygons section allows the user to select the polylines/polygons to create new polygons by digitizing the polyline/polygon edges to form a closed edge polygon.

Click the [Pick] button to select the polylines/polygons from the Map View. After clicking the [Pick] button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select polylines/polygons to build. The user can then interactively select polylines/polygons from the Map View.

After selecting the polylines/polygons, press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The number of selected polylines/polygons will be displayed in the Pick polylines/polygons read-only field, as shown below.

Build Polygons Command Img 3unknown node

The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selections and redo the entire process.

Map Layer Details

This section allows the user to create a new general drawing layer or a GIS layer for the newly created polygons. By default, the software places the newly created polygons in the Default Drawing Layer. When creating a GIS layer, the polygons are saved as an external shapefile.

Build Polygons Command Img 4

The following entries are available in this section:

  • Layer type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of layer to be created for the resulting polygons. The following options are available:
    • Drawing
      This option draws a vector entity of the newly created polygons. This type of layer is similar to the Default Drawing Layer defined in the Map Data Layers panel. By default, this option is selected.
    • GIS
      This option creates a GIS layer as a shapefile for the newly created polygons. The polygon data is stored in an external shapefile.
  • Layer name
    This dropdown combo box is used to select the layer name that will be displayed in the Map Data Layers panel. Duplicate layer names are not permitted. The user can click the [New] button to define a new layer name.

GIS Layer Details

This section is enabled when the GIS layer type is selected in the Map Layer Details section. Otherwise, this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Build Polygons Command Img 5

The Directory entry field defines the path and file name of the shapefile to be created. Click the […] browse button to select the shapefile directory and file name.

The Schema definition table allows the user to define the attribute fields to include in the shapefile layer. The following columns are available in this table:

  • Field Name
    This column is used to define the field name to be added to the shapefile layer.
  • Field Type
    This column contains a dropdown combo box that is used to select the data type of the field defined above. The following data types are available:
    • Date
    • Floating Point
    • Integer
    • Integer Array
    • Long
    • Long Array
    • Text
    • Text Array
  • Width
    This spin control column is used to define the maximum character length for a text field. It is enabled only when the Text field type is selected. Otherwise, it is disabled (i.e, grayed out). By default, the software uses a value of 80. However, the user can enter the maximum character length ranging from 1 to 255. Text strings longer than the specified width will be truncated.

Creating Polygons

When all the options have been defined, click the [OK] button. The software will then create new polygons by digitizing the edges of the selected polylines/polygons.

unknown node
Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Intersect Polygons Command

Sometimes it becomes necessary to intersect two (or more) polygons with each other. For example, polygons representing a watershed catchment and a parking lot may overlap, and it may be desirable to intersect the two polygons so that there is no overlap. The original polygons are intersected and divided so that each overlap area becomes a single, separate polygon. If necessary, the user can merge subdivided polygons into a single polygon of the same type.

The Intersect Polygons command can be used to create new polygons from the common overlapping areas between the intersecting polygons. This command causes the intersecting polygons to be split into smaller polygons along the edges of the intersection. The following illustration shows how this command works.

Working of Intersect Polygons Command

Note: After using the Intersect Polygons command, the attribute values defined in the original polygons will be retained. However, area and perimeter attribute values are adjusted to reflect the change in polygon size and shape. Newly created polygons will contain attribute values corresponding to area and perimeter. Specific attribute data, such as Curve Number, % Impervious, etc will be undefined.

Follow the steps below to use the Intersect Polygons command:

  1. From the Map Edit ribbon menu, select the Intersect Polygons command.

    Intersect Polygons command
  2. The Intersect Polygons dialog box will be displayed.

    Intersect Polygons dialog box

The following sections describe the Intersect Polygons command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Polygons to Intersect

The Select Polygons to Intersect section allows the user to select the polygons to create new polygons from the common overlapping areas between the intersecting polygons. Click the [Pick] button to select the polygons from the Map View. After clicking the [Pick] button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next. The user can then interactively select polygons from the Map View.

After selecting the polygons, the number of selected polygons will be displayed in the Pick polygons read-only field. Click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.

Note that if polygons were pre-selected prior to running this command, then the Pick polygons read-only field will display the number of selected polygons.

Map Layer Details

This section allows the user to create a new general drawing layer or a GIS layer for the polygons created after the intersection. By default, the software places the newly created polygons in the Default Drawing Layer. When creating a GIS layer, the polygons are saved as a shapefile.

Map Layer Details

The following entries are provided in this section to define the type and name of the map layer:

  • Layer type
    This dropdown combo box defines the type of layers that can be created. The following options are provided:
    1. Drawing
      This option is used to draw a vector entity of the intersected polygon. This type of layer is identical to the Default Drawing Layer that is defined in the Map Data Layers panel. By default, this option is selected.
    2. GIS
      This option is used to create a GIS layer for the shapefile of the intersected polygons. This data is stored within an external shapefile.
  • Layer name
    This field defines the layer name that will be displayed in the Map Data Layers panel. Duplicate layer names are not permitted. The user can click the [New] button to define a new layer name.

GIS Layer Details

This section gets enabled when the user selects a GIS layer type. Otherwise, the options in this section are not available.

GIS Layer Details

The Directory field defines the path and name of the shapefile to be created. Click the […] browse button to select the shapefile directory and file name.

The Schema definition data table allows the user to define the fields to include for the shapefile layer.

This data table requires the following data:

  • Field Name
    This data column is used to define the field name to add to the shapefile layer.
  • Field Type
    This dropdown combo box describes the data type of the field defined above. The following data types are provided:
    1. Floating Point
    2. Integer
    3. Text
    4. Date
  • Width
    This spin control button is only available for text field types and has a default value of 80. This spin control can range from 1 to 255. The strings longer than the field width that do not fit into the field format will be truncated.

Creating Intersecting Polygons

When all data have been defined in the dialog box, click the [OK] button and the software will create new polygons from the common overlapping areas between the intersecting polygons.

Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Detach Polygons Command

The Detach Polygons command of CivilGEO’s software allows the user to detach one or more polygons from a set of adjoining (adjacent) polygons that share common boundary polylines. The command creates independent boundaries for the selected polygons. For example, subcatchment areas, storage regions, or floodplain zones may have been drawn as a connected group with shared edges. Detaching a polygon allows the user to edit, reposition, or modify it independently without changing the boundaries of the adjoining polygons.

Follow the steps below to use the Detach Polygons command:

  1. From the Map Edit ribbon menu, select the Detach Polygons command.
    unknown node
  2. The Detach Polygons dialog box will be displayed.
    unknown node
  3. Click the [Pick] button. The Detach Polygons dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the polygon(s) to be detached.
    unknown node
  4. Click on the polygon(s) in the Map View to select them. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The Detach Polygons dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected polygon(s) will be displayed in the Pick polygons read-only entry, as shown below.
    unknown node
unknown node
  1. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.
  2. Click the [OK] button.
  3. The software will then detach the selected polygon(s) by offsetting them a short distance away from the adjoining polygons.
unknown node
Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Detach Polylines Command

The Detach Polylines command of CivilGEO’s software allows the user to detach one or more polylines from their connection points—whether or not the polylines are connected to nodes or directly to other polylines.

Detach Polylines Example Image

Once the polyline(s) have been detached from their connection points, the user can then drag the polyline(s) away and connect the polyline(s) to different nodes or polylines.

Follow the steps below to use the Detach Polylines command:

  1. From the Map Edit ribbon menu, select the Detach Polylines
    Detach Polylines Map Edit ribbon menu command
  2. The Detach Polylines dialog box will be displayed.
    Detach Polylines dialog box
  3. Click on the [Pick] button. The Detach Polylines dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the CAD or GIS polyline(s) to be detached.
    [Pick] button
  4. Click on the CAD or GIS polyline(s) in the Map View to select them. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.

  5. The Detach Polylines dialog box will be redisplayed and the total number of selected polyline(s) will be displayed in the Pick polylines read-only entry, as shown below.
    Pick polylines read-only entry
    Note that if a polyline(s) has been preselected before running this command, the same number of selected polyline(s) will be displayed in the Pick polylines read-only entry.

  6. Then, click on the [OK] button. The software will detach the selected polyline(s) by offsetting the selected polyline at the connection point by a short distance.

  7. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

Note that the selected polyline(s) to detach must be connected to other polylines. Otherwise, the following informational dialog box will be displayed.

Cannot Detach Polylines informational dialog box
Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Split Polylines Command

The Split Polylines command of CivilGEO’s software allows the user to split one or more selected polylines into separate polylines using a cut polyline. When splitting polylines, make sure the cut polyline intersects completely through the selected polyline.

Split Polylines command example

Note that when splitting a 3D element (i.e., 3D polyline), the software will automatically linearly interpolate the invert elevation at the cut location.

Follow the steps below to use the Split Polylines command:

  1. From the Map Edit ribbon menu, select the Split Polylines command.
    Split Polylines Map Edit ribbon menu command
  2. The Split Polylines dialog box will be displayed.
    Split Polylines dialog box

The following sections describe the Split Polylines command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Polylines to Split

This section is used to manually select the polylines to be split from the Map View. Click the [Pick] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the polyline(s) to split. The user can then select the polyline(s) from the Map View.

Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Split Polylines dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected polylines will be shown in the Pick polylines read-only entry, as shown below.

Pick polylines read-only entry

The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

Note that if a polyline(s) has been preselected before running this command, the same number of selected polylines will be displayed in the Pick polylines read-only entry.

Defining Cut Polyline

The Define Cut Polyline section allows the user to either draw a cut polyline or select an existing cut polyline from the Map View.

The following options are provided for defining the cut polyline:

Drawing Cut Polyline

The Draw cut polyline radio button option allows the user to interactively draw a cut polyline on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to draw a cut polyline on the Map View:

  1. Select the Draw cut polyline radio button option and then click the [Draw] button.
    [Draw] button
  2. The Split Polylines dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  3. Draw the cut polyline on the Map View. While drawing polylines, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between linear and curvilinear digitizing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the drawing elements on the Map View.

    Note that the drawn cut polyline and the selected polyline(s) must be intersected.
  4. After drawing the cut polyline, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Draw cut polyline read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    Draw cut polyline read-only field

Selecting Cut Polyline/Polygon

The Pick cut polyline/polygon radio button option allows the user to select an existing cut polyline/polygon from the Map View.

Follow the steps below to select a cut polyline/polygon from the Map View:

  1. Select the Pick cut polyline/polygon radio button option and then click the [Pick] button.
    [Pick] button
  2. The Split Polylines dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  3. Select the cut polyline/polygon from the Map View.
  4. After selecting the cut polyline/polygon, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Pick cut polyline/polygon read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.
    Pick cut polyline/polygon read-only field

Note that the selected polyline(s) to split and the cut polyline should be different. Otherwise, the following informational dialog box will be displayed.

Cannot Split Polylines informational dialog box

Splitting Polylines

Once the data have been properly defined in the Split Polylines dialog box, click the [OK] button. The software will split the selected polyline(s) along the defined cut polyline.

Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Fill Holes Command

Sometimes, small holes can exist within polygons when importing polygonal models from other applications or exporting a generated flood map in shapefiles. These holes keep the polygons from forming a continuous coverage and should be identified and corrected where possible.

In CivilGEO’s software, the Fill Holes command can be used to fill interior holes within selected polygons. This command will basically merge the holes contained within the selected polygons to eliminate the selected holes.

The Fill Holes dropdown combo box comprises two commands: Fill By Hole Size and Fill By Hole Selection.

Fill Holes dropdown combo box

Fill By Hole Size

The Fill By Hole Size command allows the user to fill holes contained in polygons by defining the maximum hole fill area.

Follow the steps below to use the Fill By Hole Size command:

  1. From the Map Edit ribbon menu, click the Fill Holes dropdown menu, and select the Fill By Hole Size command.
    Fill By Hole Size command
  2. The Fill By Hole Size dialog box will be displayed.
    Fill By Hole Size dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Fill By Hole Size command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Polygons to Fill

The Select Polygons to Fill section allows the user to select the polygons that have interior holes to be filled from the Map View.

To select the polygons, follow the steps below:

  1. Click the [Pick] button adjacent to the Pick polygons read-only field.
    [Pick] button
  2. The Fill By Hole Size dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select polygons with interior holes from the Map View.
  3. Click the polygons that have interior holes on the Map View to select them.
  4. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The Fill By Hole Size dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected polygons will be displayed in the Pick polygons read-only field, as shown below.
    Pick polygons read-only field
    Note that if the polygons have been preselected before running this command, the same number of selected polygons will be displayed in the Pick polygons read-only field.
  6. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.

Polygon Fill Options

This section allows the user to define the maximum hole area to fill polygon holes.

The Maximum hole fill area input field allows the user to define the area to fill polygon holes. The user can either enter the area manually or click the [Measure] button to measure the fill area from the Map View.

Filling Polygon Holes

When all the options have been defined, click the [OK] button. The software will then fill all holes that are equal to or smaller than the maximum defined fill hole area contained in the polygon.

Note that the [OK] button is disabled until all options have been defined.

[OK] button

Fill By Hole Selection

The Fill By Hole Selection command allows the user to fill holes contained in polygons by manually selecting the holes from the Map View.

Follow the steps below to use the Fill By Hole Selection command:

  1. From the Map Edit ribbon menu, click the Fill Holes dropdown menu, and select the Fill By Hole Selection command.
    Fill By Hole Selection command
  2. The Fill By Hole Selection dialog box will be displayed.
    Fill By Hole Selection dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Fill By Hole Selection command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Polygons to Fill

The Select Polygons to Fill section allows the user to select the polygons that have interior holes to be filled from the Map View.

Note that this section is similar to that of the Select Polygons to Fill section of the Fill By Hole Size command. Hence, refer to the first section of the Fill By Hole Size command to learn more about it.

Polygon Hole Selection

This section allows the user to select the hole where the polygon filling is to occur.

To select the holes, follow the steps below:

  1. Click the [Pick] button adjacent to the Select hole to fill read-only field.
    [Pick] button
    Note that the [Pick] button is disabled until the user has selected at least one polygon.
  2. The Fill By Hole Selection dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the polygon holes from the Map View.
  3. Click the polygon holes on the Map View to select them.
  4. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The Fill By Hole Selection dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected polygon holes will be displayed in the Select holes to fill read-only field, as shown below.
    Select holes to fill read-only field

Filling Polygon Holes

When all the options have been defined, click the [OK] button. The software will then fill the selected holes contained in the polygons.

[OK] button
Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Selection Sets

Selection sets are groups of elements (i.e., a subset of the entire network model) that have been selected by the user and saved in the project. A selection set allows the user to recall the selected elements later in order to perform some sort of operation. For example, the user might create a selection set of representative junctions to perform a fire flow analysis.

In CivilGEO, the Selection Set ribbon menu allows the user to open the existing selection sets, define new selection sets, edit the saved selection sets, and merge the selected selection sets. The Selection Set ribbon menu contains four commands:

  1. Open Selection Set
  2. Save Selection Set
  3. Edit Selection Set
  4. Merge with Selection Set

These commands can be used for all the available HEC-HMS/HEC-RAS element types – diversions, junctions, nodes, reaches, sinks, sources, storage areas, and subbasins.

Opening a Saved Selection Set

The Open Selection Set command allows the user to load a previously saved selection set.

To open the saved selection set, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Selection Set dropdown menu and then select the Open Selection Set command.
    Open Selection Set Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Open Selection Set dialog box will be displayed.
    Open Selection Set dialog box

The following sections describe the Open Selection Set command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting a Selection Set

The Choose Selection Set section contains a data grid listing all the existing selection sets in the model. The user can select any selection set in the data grid to load them on the Map View.

The user can select the selection set in one of the following ways:

  • Click any of the selection sets in the data grid, the command will select those selection set elements and highlight them on the Map View. Note that the dialog box still appears and the user can select another selection set.
  • Double-click any element of the selection set in the data grid and the selected selection set elements will be highlighted on the Map View. Note that the dialog box will be closed on double-clicking the selection set.
  • Select any of the selection sets in the data grid and click the [Select] button. The selected selection set elements will be highlighted on the Map View. Note that the dialog box will be closed on clicking the [Select] button.
    [Select] button
    Note that the [Select] button is enabled only when any one of the listed selection sets is selected.

Deleting a Selection Set

This section allows the user to delete the selection set listed in the Choose Selection Set data grid.

To delete a selection set, follow the steps below:

  1. Select the selection set that you want to remove.
  2. Click on the [Delete] button.
    [Delete] button
    Note that this button is enabled only when any one of the listed selection sets is selected.
  3. The Confirm Deleting Selection Set dialog box will be displayed.
    Confirm Deleting Selection Set dialog box
  4. Click the [Delete] button and the selected selection set will be deleted.

Saving a Selection Set

The Save Selection Set command allows the user to define and save the currently selected elements to an element selection set.

To save the selection set, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Selection Set dropdown menu and then select the Save Selection Set command.
    Save Selection Set Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Save Selection Set dialog box will be displayed.
    Save Selection Set dialog box

The following sections describe the Save Selection Set command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Elements

The Select elements entry field allows the user to manually select elements from the Map View. Click the [Pick] button and the Selection Sets dialog box will temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next. The user can then select elements from the Map View. While selecting elements, the user can use the [Shift] key to deselect any previous element selection. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected elements will be displayed in the Select elements entry.

Select elements read-only entry

The user can click the [Clear] button to deselect the selected elements from the selection set and redo the entire process.

Note that the user can also preselect the elements from the Map View before running this command. If the elements were preselected on the Map View, the number of selected elements will be displayed in the Select elements entry.

Element Type

The Element type dropdown combo box option allows the user to select the type of elements for the selection set. The following elements are provided in the dropdown combo box.

Element type dropdown combo box option

Notes:

  • If the user has selected a similar type of element from the Map View, then this dropdown combo box will list the type of element selected.
  • If the user has selected a mixture of element types from the Map View, then this dropdown combo box will list All Element Types.

After selecting elements from the Map View, the user can further refine the selection set. For example, suppose that the user has selected a mixture of element types and the dropdown combo box lists these as All Element Types. The user can then choose Junctions element in the dropdown combo box and select junctions on the Map View. The element count in the Select elements entry will then reflect only the selected junctions. Again, if the user has chosen Reaches in the dropdown combo box, the element count in the Select elements entry will then update to reflect only the selected reaches.

Selection Set Name

The Selection set name entry field allows the user to provide the name for the selection set. After entering the name, click the [Save] button. The selection set is then saved to the project database.

Note that each defined selection set must have a unique name. Otherwise, the following confirmational dialog box will be displayed by clicking the [Save] button.

Confirm Overwriting Existing Selection Set dialog box

Adding & Removing Selection Set Elements

The Edit Selection Set command allows the user to add and remove elements contained in the already defined selection set.

To edit the selection set, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Selection Set dropdown menu and then select the Edit Selection Set command.
    Edit Selection Set Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Edit Selection Set dialog box will be displayed.
    Edit Selection Set dialog box

The following sections describe the Edit Selection Set command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Existing Selection Set

The Existing selection set dropdown combo box allows the user to select the selection set to edit. The dropdown combo box lists all the selection sets that are available in the project.

Element Type

The Element type read-only field lists the element type(s) contained within the selection set.

For example, if the selection set contains a junction element, then this read-only field will display the Junction. If the selection set contains a mixture of elements, then this read-only field will display All Elements.

Add/Remove Elements

The Add/remove elements read-only field will display the number of elements contained within the selected selection set. Click the [Pick] button to select elements from the Map View to add or remove from the selection set. Clicking on the [Pick] button causes the Selection Sets dialog box to temporarily disappear, and all the elements contained within the selection set will be highlighted on the Map View. The user can then add and remove elements from the selection set by interactively selecting elements on the Map View. While selecting elements, the user can use the [Shift] key to deselect any previous element selection. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected elements will be displayed in the Add/remove elements entry.

Add/remove elements read-only entry

The user can click the [Clear] button to deselect the selected elements from the selection set and redo the entire process.

When all the options have been properly defined, click the [Save Changes] button, and the software will update the selected selection set in the project.

Merging a Selection Set

The Merge with Selection Set command allows the user to merge the currently selected elements into a single selection set.

To merge the selection sets, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Selection Set dropdown menu and then select the Merge with Selection Set command.
    Merge with Selection Set Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Merge Selection Set dialog box will be displayed.
    Merge with Selection Set dialog box
  3. From the First selection set dropdown combo box, select the first selection set.

    Note that the dropdown combo box displays only those selection sets that have already been created in the current project.
  4. From the Second selection set dropdown combo box, select the second selection set.

    Note that the dropdown combo box does not display the selection set selected in the First selection set dropdown.
  5. Provide a name to the merged selection set in the Selection set name input field.
  6. Click the [Merge] button.
    [Merge] button
    Note that the [Merge] button is enabled only when the selection sets are selected in the First and Second selection set dropdown combo boxes.
  7. On clicking the [Merge] button, the Merge Selection Sets confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
    Merge Selection Sets confirmation dialog box
    Click the [Yes] button to merge the selected selection sets into a single selection set.
    Click the [No] button to abort the merge operation.
  8. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.
Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Merge Polygons Command

The Merge Polygons command of CivilGEO’s software can be used to merge one or more selected polygons that are on the same layer.

Notes:

  • When merging polygons, non-geometric attributes (i.e., area, perimeter, etc.) are assigned from the first selected polygon.
  • If the selected polygons overlap or are adjacent (share a common edge), then a single polygon is created.

Follow the steps below to use the Merge Polygons command:

  1. From the Map Edit ribbon menu, select the Merge Polygons command.
    Merge Polygons command
  2. The Merge Polygons dialog box will be displayed.
    Merge Polygons dialog box
  3. Click the [Pick] button to select the polygons (or other polygon shape elements) from the Map View.
    Pick button
    Note that if the user has preselected the elements from the Map View prior to running this command, the number of selected elements will be displayed in the Pick polygons read-only field. Proceed to step 7 for merging the selected polygons.
  4. The Merge Polygons dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select polygons.
  5. Select the polygons from the Map View. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  6. The Merge Polygons dialog box will be redisplayed, and the number of selected polygons will be displayed in the Pick polygons read-only field.
    Pick polygons read-only field
    Note that the user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.
  7. Check the Create multipart for non-adjacent/non-overlapping polygons checkbox to create a multi-part polygon for non-overlapping and non-adjacent polygons. By default, this checkbox is left unchecked.
  8. Check the Merge polygons with same attribute value checkbox and select an attribute from the dropdown combo box. This causes the software to merge only those polygons that have the same value for the selected attribute. By default, this checkbox is left unchecked.
    Merge polygons with same attribute value
    Note that the attribute dropdown combo box lists all of the non-geometric attributes contained for the first selected polygon.
  9. When all the options have been defined, click the [OK] button. The software will merge the selected polygons.
    OK button
    To cancel the command, the user can click the [Cancel] button.
  10. Once all the selected polygons are merged, the [Cancel] button changes to the [Close] button. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.
    Close button
  11. If the user has selected polygons that have different attribute values, then the following informational dialog box will be displayed on clicking the [OK] button.
    Cannot merge polygon
Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Buffer Polylines Command

The Buffer Polylines command of CivilGEO’s software allows the user to create new polygons around the selected polylines using a specified buffer distance.

Note that the user can also create a buffer around selected polygons using the Buffer Polygons command. To learn more about this command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Buffered features are stored in user-specified target layers, which must contain either line or polygon features. For instance, the user might use buffers to show an ecological zone around a waterway or the area around a contaminated well. More than one feature can be buffered at once, but a separate buffer will be created around each feature.

Follow the steps below to use the Buffer Polylines command:

  1. From the Map Edit ribbon menu, select the Buffer Polylines command.
    Map edit ribbon menu
  2. The Buffer Polylines dialog box will be displayed.
    Buffer polylines dialog box

The following sections describe the Buffer Polylines command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Polylines

The Select Polylines section allows the user to select polylines to buffer from the Map View. The user can click the [Pick] button to select polylines from the Map View.

Selecting polylines

After selecting the polylines, the number of selected polylines will be displayed in the Pick polylines read-only field. Note that if polylines were pre-selected prior to running this command, then the Pick polylines read-only field will display the number of selected polylines.

The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel any previous selection and redo the entire process.

Buffer Polyline Options

This section allows the user to specify the buffer distance, corner type and shape of the buffer at the end of the polylines.

Buffer polyline options

The following entries are provided in this section:

  1. Buffer distance
    This field allows the user to enter the buffer distance. The buffer distance can be entered as a number (equal for all input polylines) or a numeric field. No negative buffer distance is accepted. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to measure the buffer distance from the Map View.
  2. Corner type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the shape of the buffer at corners where two polylines join. The following options are provided:
    • Bevel – The buffer shape for inner corners will be squared while the outer corner will be cut perpendicular to the furthest point of the corner.
    • Miter – The buffer corner shape will be a square or sharp around corners.
    • Round – The buffer shape for inner corners will be squared while the outer corner will be round. By default, this option is selected.
  3. End cap type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the shape of the buffer at the end of the polyline. The following options are provided:
    • Butt – The buffer will have an end cap perpendicular to the end of the selected polyline.
    • Round – The buffer will have an end cap that is round at the end of the selected polyline. By default, this option is selected.
    • Square – The buffer will have a square end cap around the end of the selected polyline.
  4. Dissolve (merge) overlapping buffered polygons
    On checking this checkbox, the boundaries of the intersecting buffers will be dissolved. The original attributes will not be preserved if this option is used. This option will merge overlapping buffered objects into a single object.

Map Layer Details

This section allows the user to create a new general drawing layer or a GIS layer for the buffer polygons. By default, the software places the buffer polygons in the Default Drawing Layer. When creating a GIS layer, the polygons are saved as a shapefile.

Map layer details

The following entries are provided in this section to define the type and name of the map layer:

  1. Layer type
    This dropdown combo box defines the type of layers that can be created. The following options are provided:
    • Drawing
      This option is used to draw a vector entity of buffer polygon. This type of layer is identical to the Default Drawing Layer that is defined in the Map Data Layers. By default, this option is selected.
    • GIS
      This option is used to create a GIS layer for creating a shapefile of the buffer polygons. This data is stored within an external shapefile.
  2. Layer name
    This field defines the layer name that will be displayed in the Map Data Layers panel. Duplicate layer names are not permitted. The user can click the [New] button to define a new layer name.

GIS Layer Details

This section gets enabled when the user selects a GIS layer type. Otherwise, the options in this section are not available.

GIS layer details

The Directory field defines the path and name of the shapefile to be created. The user can click the [...] browse button to select the shapefile directory and file name.

The Schema definition data table allows the user to define the fields to include for the shapefile layer.

This data table requires the following data:

  1. Field Name
    This data column is used to define the field name to add to the shapefile layer.
  2. Field Type
    This dropdown combo box is used to select the data type of the field defined above. The following data types are provided:
    • Floating Point
    • Integer
    • Text
    • Date
  3. Width
    This spin control button is only available for text field types and has a default value of 80. This spin control can range from 1 to 255. The strings longer than the field width that do not fit into the field format will suffer truncation.

Creating Buffer Polygons

When all the data have been defined in the dialog box, the user can click the [OK] button and the software will create buffer polygons around the selected polylines.

Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Buffer Polygons Command

The Buffer Polygon command of CivilGEO’s software allows the user to create new polygons around the selected polygon using a specified buffer distance.

Buffered features are stored in a user-specified target layer, which must contain either line or polygon features. For instance, the user might use buffers to show an ecological zone around a waterway or the area around a contaminated well. More than one feature can be buffered at once, but a separate buffer will be created around each feature.

Follow the steps below to use the Buffer Polygons command:

  1. From the Map Edit ribbon menu, select the Buffer Polygons command.
    Buffer Polygons map edit ribbon command
  2. The Buffer Polygons dialog box will be displayed.
    Buffer Polygons dialog box

The following sections describe the Buffer Polygons command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Polygons

The Select Polygons section allows the user to select polygons to buffer from the Map View. The user can click the [Pick] button to select polygons from the Map View.

[Pick] button

After selecting the polygons, the number of selected polygons will be displayed in the Pick polygons read-only field. Note that if polygons were pre-selected prior to running this command, then the Pick polygons read-only field will display the number of selected polygons.

The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel any previous selection and redo the entire process.

Buffer Polygon Options

This section allows the user to specify the buffer distance and corner type of the polygons.

Buffer Polygons Options

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Buffer distance
    This field allows the user to enter the buffer distance as a numeric value (applicable to all selected polygon(s)). Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to measure the buffer distance from the Map View.

    Note that If the user enters a negative value, then it will reduce the area of the polygon feature by the specified distance. Moreover, if the negative distance is large, the geometry will be null, resulting in the creation of no element.
  • Corner type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the shape of the buffer at the corners where two polygons join. The following options are provided.
    1. Bevel
      The buffer shape for inner corners will be squared while the outer corner will be cut perpendicular to the furthest point of the corner.
    2. Miter
      The buffer corner shape will be a square or sharp around corners.
    3. Round
      The buffer shape for the inner corners will be squared while the outer corner will be round. By default, this option is selected.

  • Dissolve (merge) overlapping buffered polygons
    On checking this checkbox option, the boundaries of the intersecting buffers will be dissolved. The original attributes will not be preserved if this option is used. This option will merge overlapping buffered objects into a single object.

Map Layer Details

This section is similar to what is provided in the Buffer Polylines command. To learn more about this section, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

GIS Layer Details

This section is similar to what is provided in the Buffer Polylines command. To learn more about this section, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Creating Buffer Polygons

When all the data have been defined in the dialog box, the user can click the [OK] button and the software will create the buffer polygons around the selected polygons.

Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Distribute Vertices Command

The vertices define the geometry of the polyline. Generally, vertex spacing has no strategic importance. However, vertex spacing is important when the polylines are used for automatic mesh generation. In this situation, the vertex spacing defines the mesh density, and each mesh element is defined by a pair of adjacent vertices. The mesh gradation is controlled by the vertex spacing. In areas where a finer mesh is required, the vertices need to be closer together. By contrast, the vertices need to be farther apart in areas where a coarse mesh is required.

In CivilGEO’s software, the Distribute Vertices command can be used to control the vertex spacing and their distributions to define the polyline geometry.

Follow the steps below to use the Distribute Vertices command:

  1. From the Map Edit ribbon menu, select the Distribute Vertices command.
    Distribute Vertices ribbon menu command
  2. The Distribute Vertices dialog box will be displayed.
    Distribute Vertices dialog box

The following sections describe the Distribute Vertices command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Polylines

If one or more polylines have been selected before running the Distribute Vertices command, the selected polyline(s) data will be displayed in the dialog box. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the polyline from the Map View. The dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the polyline(s).

Note that the user can also select polyline edges that are arranged in a polygon shape.

After selecting the polyline(s) from the Map View, either right-click and select Done from the context menu or press the [Enter] key to complete the selection. The user will be returned to the dialog box, and the Pick polylines read-only field will display the number of the selected polyline(s).

Pick polylines read-only field - number of the selected polyline(s)

The following Polyline Data will be displayed for the selected polyline(s):

  • Number of polyline segments
    This field displays the number of segment(s) of the selected polyline(s).
  • Total length of polylines
    This field displays the combined (total) length of the selected polyline(s).
  • Maximum segment length
    This field displays the length of the longest segment of the selected polyline(s).
  • Average segment length
    This field displays the average length of the segment(s) of the selected polyline(s).
  • Minimum segment length
    This field displays the length of the minimum segment of the selected polyline(s).

Vertex Redistribution

This section is used to control the redistribution of the existing vertices in the polyline(s). The following options are available:

  • Maximum segment length
    This radio button option allows the user to specify the maximum segment length (defined by the two vertices that bound that segment) that will be used to redefine the polyline geometry. The user can enter the maximum segment length manually or measure it from the Map View using the [Pick] button. By default, this field displays the maximum segment length of the selected polyline(s).

    Note that when this radio button option is not selected, it acts as a read-only field showing the maximum segment length of the selected polyline(s).
  • Number of segments
    This radio button option allows the user to specify the number of segments that will be used for redefining the polyline geometry of selected polyline(s). By default, this field displays the number of segments present in the selected polyline.

    Note that when this radio button option is not selected, it acts as a read-only field showing the number of segments for the currently selected polyline.
  • Weighted spacing
    This option is enabled if the Number of segments radio button option is selected. The Weighted spacing slider bar allows the user to adjust the vertex spacing along the selected polyline. By default, the Weighted spacing field value is set to 0, which means the software will uniformly distribute the vertices.

    The values range from –50% (leftmost side of the slider) to +50% (rightmost side of the slider). Moving the slider to the left or right changes the distribution of the vertices along the selected polyline. For the specified weighted spacing, the corresponding distribution of the vertices can be seen in the Preview pane.
    Vertex Redistribution section

After defining the vertex distribution parameters, click the [OK] button, and the software will redistribute the vertices of the selected polyline(s) as per the user-defined parameters.

Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Offset Polyline Command

The Offset Polyline command is used to make a copy of a selected polyline using an offset distance on a specified side of the selected polyline. The user can offset a polyline to create a new polyline whose shape is parallel to the original polyline. Furthermore, the tool allows the user to create multiple offsets of a selected polyline where all offset polylines will be separated by a standard distance.

Note that the users can offset any polyline in their model, for example, a river reach or a cross section. While doing so, the new offset polyline will be placed on the Default Drawing Layer.

Follow the steps below to use the Offset Polyline command:

  1. From the Map Edit ribbon menu, select the Offset Polyline command.
    Offset Polyline command
  2. The Offset Polyline dialog box will be displayed.
    Offset Polyline dialog box

The following sections describe the Offset Polyline command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Offset Polyline Options

This section allows the user to select an existing polyline and define an offset distance to make a copy of this selected polyline.

The following entries are provided in this section:

  1. Pick polyline
    The user can click the [Pick] button to select an existing polyline from the Map View. After selecting the polyline, the status of the Pick polyline read-only field will change from Not Selected to Selected. Note that if a polyline was already selected prior to running this command, then the read-only field will display the status as Selected.

    The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel any previous selection and redo the entire process.
  2. Offset distance
    This field allows the user to define the offset distance at which the copy of the selected polyline will be created. The user can either enter the distance manually or click the [Pick] button to measure the distance from the Map View.

Placing Offset Polylines

The Place Offset Polylines section allows the user to create the offset polylines on either side of the selected polyline.

Click the [Place] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear. The user can then select a point on either side of the selected polyline to place the offset polylines.

Place] button

Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The user will be returned to the Offset Polyline dialog box, and the Place polyline read-only field will display the number of polylines placed on the Map View.

Place polyline read-only field

Note that after the first offset polyline is placed, the software remembers the originally selected polyline (i.e., selected under the Offset Polyline Options section) and allows the user to place the subsequent offset polylines on either side of the selected polyline.

Map Layer Details

Consider defining the data for this section before placing offset polyline on the Map View. This section allows the user to create a new general drawing layer or a GIS layer for the offset polylines. By default, the software places the offset polylines in the Default Drawing Layer. When creating a GIS layer, the polylines are saved as a shapefile.

Map Layer Details section

The following entries are provided in the section to define the type and name of the map layer:

  1. Layer type
    This dropdown combo box defines the type of layers that can be created. The following options are provided:
    • Drawing
      This option is used to draw a vector entity of the offset polyline. This type of layer is identical to the Default Drawing Layer that is defined in the Map Data Layers. By default, this option is selected.
    • GIS
      This option is used to create a GIS layer for creating a shapefile of the offset polylines. This data is stored within an external shapefile.
  2. Layer name
    This dropdown combo box defines the layer name that will be displayed in the Map Data Layers panel. Duplicate layer names are not permitted.

GIS Layer Details

This section is enabled when the user selects a GIS layer type. Otherwise, these options are not available.

GIS Layer Details section

The Directory field defines the path and name of the shapefile to be created. The user can click the [...] browse button to select the shapefile directory and file name.

The Schema definition data table allows the user to define the fields to include for the shapefile layer.

This data table requires the following data:

  1. Field Name
    This data column is used to define the field name to add to the shapefile layer.
  2. Field Type
    This dropdown combo box is used to select the data type of the field defined above. The following data types are provided:
    • Floating Point
    • Integer
    • Text
    • Date
  3. Width
    This spin control button is only available for text field types and has a default value of 80. This spin control can range from 1 to 255. Any strings longer than the field width that do not fit into the field format will suffer truncation.
Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Split Polygons Command

The Split Polygons command of CivilGEO’s software allows the user to split one or more selected polygons into separate polygons using a cut polyline. When splitting polygons, make sure the cut polyline intersects completely through the selected polygon.

Note that because the software defines the storage areas, subbasins, and 2D flow areas using polygon shapes, the Split Polygons command can be used to divide them even further into smaller subareas.

Follow the steps below to use the Split Polygons command:

  1. From the Map Edit ribbon menu, select the Split Polygons command.2.png
  2. The Split Polygons dialog box will be displayed.Split polygons dialog box

The following sections describe the Split Polygons command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Polygons to Split

The Select Polygons to Split section allows the user to select the polygons to be split.

The user can click the [Pick] button to select the polygons (or other polygon shape elements) from the Map View. After selecting the polygons, the Pick polygons/storage areas/2D flow areas read-only field will display the number of selected polygons.

Pick polygons storage areas 2D flow areas read-only field

Alternatively, the user can preselect the polygons on the Map View prior to running this command. Upon running the command, the number of preselected polygons will be displayed in the Pick polygons/storage areas/2D flow areas read-only field.

Defining Cut Polyline

The Define Cut Polyline section allows the user to either draw or select an existing cut polyline from the Map View.

The following options are provided for defining the cut polyline:

Draw Cut Polyline

The Draw cut polyline radio button option allows the user to interactively draw a cut polyline on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to draw a cut polyline on the Map View:

  1. Select the Draw cut polyline radio button option and then click the [Draw] button. Alternatively, check the Create curvilinear polyline checkbox to draw the cut polyline using curvilinear segments.
    Draw Button
  2. The Split Polygons dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  3. Draw the cut polyline on the Map View. While drawing polylines, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between linear and curvilinear digitizing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the drawing elements on the Map View.
  4. After drawing the cut polyline, right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Draw cut polyline read-only field will change from Not Drawn to Drawn.

Pick Cut Polyline

The Pick cut polyline radio button option allows the user to select an existing cut polyline from the Map View.

Follow the steps below to select a cut polyline from the Map View:

  1. Select the Pick cut polyline radio button option and then click the [Pick] button.
    Pick button
  2. The Split Polygons dialog will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  3. Select the cut polyline from the Map View. After selecting the cut polyline, right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Pick cut polyline read-only field will change from Not Selected to Selected.

After the cut polyline has been defined, the user can click the [OK] button. The software will split the selected polygon(s) along the defined cut polyline.

Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Smooth Elements Command

The Smooth Elements command is used to smooth out sharp angles of polylines/polygons to improve aesthetic and mapping cartographic quality. This command uses the Chaiken Algorithm, which smooths a polygon (or polyline) by inscribing a polygon boundary (or polyline) touching the original polygon boundary such that the points on the new polygon boundary are separated by at least a threshold value. The smoothed polygon boundary always touches the center of the original polygon boundary line segment between two consecutive vertices.

Follow the steps below to use the Smooth Elements command:

  1. From the Map Edit ribbon menu, select the Smooth Elements command.Map Edit ribbon menu - Smooth Elements command
  2. The Smooth Elements dialog box will be displayed.Smooth Elements dialog box
  3. Click the [Pick] button to select the polylines/polygons from the Map View onto which the smoothing is to be done. After selecting the element(s), right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu, or press the Enter key to complete the selection process.
  4. The number of selected polylines/polygons will be displayed in the Select polylines/polygons read-only field. The user can unselect the element(s) using the [Clear] button and redo the entire process.Number of polylines/polygons Selected
  5. The software uses a threshold value that controls how much portion of the piecewise linear line should be cut off from the corners of the original polyline/or polygon boundary. Enter this threshold value in the Threshold field. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to measure the threshold value directly from the Map View. By default, software uses 3 meters as the default threshold value.
  6. Using the Iterations spin control button, the user can adjust the iterations for element smoothing.
    Note that increased iterations create a smoother polyline/polygon approaching that of a Bezier spline, but have the disadvantage of adding additional vertices to the smoothed polyline/or polygon boundary.
  7. After defining the options, click on the [OK] button and the software will smooth out the sharp edges for the selected element(s).Smoothened Element
Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Simplify Elements Command

The Simplify Elements command allows the user to simplify the selected polylines or polygons boundary by identifying and removing unnecessary vertices, ultimately reducing feature complexity while retaining inherent character and shape.

Follow the steps below to use the Simplify Elements command:

  1. From the Map Edit ribbon menu, select the Simplify Elements command.Simplify Elements Command
  2. The Simplify Elements dialog box will be displayed.Simplify Elements Dialog Box 1

The following section describes how to use the Simplify Elements command and interact with the above dialog box.

Select Polylines/Polygons

This section is used to manually select polylines or polygons from the Map View. Click the [Pick] button adjacent to the Select polylines/polygons entry. The Simplify Elements dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user on what to do next. The user can then select the polylines or polygons from the Map View. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Simplify Elements dialog box will be redisplayed. The total number of selected polylines or polygons will be displayed in the Select polylines/polygons entry.

Simplify Elements Dialog Box 2

The user can click the [Clear] button to deselect the selected polylines or polygons and redo the entire process.

Note that the user can also preselect the polylines or polygons from the Map View prior to running this command. If the polylines or polygons were preselected on the Map View, the number of selected polylines will be displayed in the Select polylines/polygons entry.

The value in the Threshold entry field represents the degree of vertex displacement relative to adjacent vertices. By default, the software uses a value of 10 ft. The user can enter a different value or use the [Pick] button to measure the threshold value from the Map View. A larger threshold value results in fewer vertices defining the polyline or polygon.

The software uses the Douglas-Peucker algorithm to reduce the number of redundant vertices that define polylines and polygons, thereby simplifying the geometry. An illustration of how the Douglas-Peucker algorithm iteratively simplifies a polyline is shown below.

Douglas-Peucker algorithm

The threshold value is depicted as the radius of the green circle. Critical vertices are first identified, which define the representative shape of the element. Then, redundant vertices are discarded.

A reasonable starting threshold value would be 10 feet (3 meters). This value can be increased to remove additional vertices. Engineering judgment should be used when deciding on a final value.

Polyline/Polygon Simplification

When the data has been defined in the Simplify Elements dialog box, click the [OK] button. Internally, the software will simplify the polyline or polygon boundary by reducing the number of redundant vertices used to describe the polyline or polygon, while preserving its essential shape.

Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Intersect Polylines Command

The Intersect Polylines command is used to connect two polylines at the point of intersection, which results in four polylines and a newly inserted junction.

Intersect Polylines command illustration

When intersecting 3D polylines, the software automatically interpolates the elevation at the point of intersection based upon the selection order. The first selected polyline is used to interpolate the elevation. The first selected polyline's interpolated elevation will be assigned at the point of intersection for the other polylines and inserted junction. Note that for 2D polylines, there is no assignment of elevations.

To use the Intersect Polylines command, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Map Edit ribbon menu, select the Intersect Polylines command.Intersect Polylines command
  2. The Intersect Polylines dialog box will be displayed.Intersect Polylines dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Polylines to Intersect

This section is used to manually select the intersected polylines from the Map View. Click the [Pick] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user what to do next. The user can then select the intersecting polylines from the Map View.

Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Intersect Polylines dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected polylines will be shown in the Pick polylines entry, as shown below.

Intersect Polylines command dialog box

The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

Note that the user can also preselect the intersecting polylines from the Map View prior to running this command. If the intersecting polylines were preselected on the Map View, the number of selected polylines will be displayed in the Pick polylines entry.

Intersect Options

This section provides Intersect polylines with the same attributes value checkbox option and an attribute dropdown combo box that lists all of the non-geometric attributes for the first selected polylines. If this checkbox is checked and an attribute is selected, then the software will connect polylines and place a junction at the point of intersection only when the selected polylines have the same value for the selected attribute.

Intersecting Polylines

Once the data have been properly defined in the Intersect Polylines dialog box, click the [OK] button. The software will insert a junction at the point of intersection on the current drawing layer (if it can support points, otherwise the "Default Drawing Layer" is used), and intersect the selected polylines.

Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Stamp Multiple Command

The Stamp Multiple command allows the user to perform bulk stamp geometry operations. Similar to the Stamp Geometry command, this command allows the user to define multiple stamp geometry operations to be applied at one time to the terrain surface. This allows the stamp terrain modifications to be defined before applying the changes to the terrain. To learn more about Stamp Geometry command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

The Stamp Multiple command is helpful in situations where the user may need to edit the terrain surface multiple times—especially when working with large DEM files where stamping one feature causes the entire terrain surface to be recreated each time.

The command supports various options for defining the stamping operation, including:

  • Terrain cut or fill
  • End cap styles
  • Interpolation path
  • Starting and ending elevations
  • Template or user-defined cross section

The user can specify the merge order of the stamp operations, which will determine the stamp order of the composite terrain surface. In addition, the user can edit and modify the defined stamp geometry entities so that an iterative, trial and error approach can be used in constructing the updated terrain surface.

For example, the below image shows three false dams in the running ditch that need to be removed. The Stamp Multiple command can be used to remove all three false dams simultaneously.

Stamp Multiple example

To use the Stamp Multiple command, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Terrain ribbon menu, select the Stamp Multiple command.Stamp Multiple Terrain ribbon menu command
  2. The Stamp Multiple dialog box will be displayed.Stamp Multiple dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Stamp Multiple command and interact with the above dialog box.

General Specifications

From the Terrain surface dropdown combo box, the user can select a source terrain file from the existing elevation layers within the current project. The elevation layer which is used in extracting cross sections and 2D model elevation data is selected by default.

Terrain surface dropdown combo box

Define Stamp Operations

This section presents a table summarizing the assigned stamp operations. This table appears after the user has defined the terrain interpolation path so that multiple stamp operations can be displayed.

Define Stamp Operations section


This Assigned stamp operations table displays the list of stamp operations assigned. This table includes the Name, Operation Type, Defined Elevations, and XS Stamp Shape of the assigned stamp operations. In the first column, the user can change the name by clicking on the pencil icon and checking the appropriate checkboxes required for an operation. The last column allows the user to delete, move up/down, or zoom to a particular stamp operation. The user can add additional stamp operations by selecting the next row. The type, elevation, and shape of the corresponding stamp operation can be defined using the following sections:

  • Define Operation
  • Define Path
  • Define Elevations
  • Define Shape

Define Operation

This section defines the general parameters used to stamp terrain geometry and the type of stamping operation.

Define Operation

From the Terrain stamping operation dropdown combo box, select the type of stamping operation. The following options are available:

  • Terrain Cut: This option cuts the terrain geometry to burn-in a channel where one is missing, or to remove a false dam, etc.
  • Terrain Fill: This option fills in a levee or a dam structure, where one is proposed, by stamping it on the terrain geometry.

Note that the Fill void space below terrain cut and the Leave existing ground above terrain checkboxes are checked by default. They facilitate creating a more accurate representation of the stamped terrain geometry by daylighting the stamping operation into the source terrain geometry.

Define Path

This section defines the path to which the terrain surface stamping is to be applied.

There are two options for defining the path:

  • Assign polyline: This option allows the user to select a polyline from the Map View and use it to define the terrain interpolation path.
  • Draw polyline: This option allows the user to interactively draw a polyline on the Map View and use it as the terrain interpolation path.

If there is an existing polyline on the Map View that can be used for the stamping operation, the user can click the [Pick] button adjacent to the Assign polyline radio button and select a polyline from the Map View.

Define Path - [Pick] button


Alternatively, the user can click the [Draw] button adjacent to the Draw polyline radio button to draw a polyline on the Map View.

Define Path - [[Draw] button


The Create curvilinear polyline checkbox can be used to create a smooth terrain interpolation path while drawing the polyline.

Define Elevations

This section defines how the interpolated terrain elevations will be assigned along the polyline path.

Define Elevations section


There are four radio button options for defining how the elevations are assigned:

  • Interpolate using end point elevations: This option allows the user to use the elevations at the ends of the assigned/drawn polyline and then cuts or fills-in the terrain geometry while automatically interpolating the elevation along the polyline path. The software also calculates the longitudinal slope using start and stop points and displays the value in the Longitudinal Slope (V:H) read-only field. The total length of the assigned (or drawn) polyline will be displayed in the Length field.
  • Use constant elevation: This option defines a specific elevation that will be applied across the terrain interpolation path.
  • Use start point elevation and slope: This option sets the starting point elevation of a polyline that can be used to cut or fill terrain geometry, but the stopping point elevation remains fixed.
  • Use stop point elevation and slope: This option sets the stopping point elevation of a polyline that can be used to cut or fill terrain geometry, but the starting point elevation remains fixed.

The user can first click the [Retrieve] button to automatically extract the start and end elevation values, length, and slope data for the selected polyline and then choose any of the above options to define the way elevations will be interpolated along polyline paths.

Define Shape

This section defines how the interpolated terrain region will be shaped along the polyline path. There are two options for defining the interpolation path shape. The user can either choose the Use end point terrain geometry or the Use trapezoid geometry option.

  • Use end point terrain geometry: This option uses the terrain geometry at the two ends of the assigned/drawn polyline. This software will then interpolate the shape of the cut/fill along the polyline path.

    By default, the Cross section sample width (entire width) is set to 0 ft. However, the user can define a new value or click the [Pick] button and then measure the width from the Map View.

    Define Shape - [Pick] button
  • Use trapezoid geometry: This option uses the user-defined values to create a trapezoidal shape along the polygon path.

    By default, the Terrain path width (flat section) is set to 50 ft (15 m). However, the user can define a new value or click the [Pick] button, then measure it from the Map View.

    Use trapezoid geometry option


    The Side slope (V:H) ratio value is set to 1:1 by default, which corresponds to a 1 ft (m) rise to a 1 ft (m) run. A ratio of 1:0 represents a vertical wall. However, many times a flatter slope is required, such as 1:2 or 1:3. The user can define the ratio to represent the slope.

    Stamp-Geometry-Command-img-10.png

The Start path end-cap type and End path end-cap type dropdown combo boxes allow the user to choose different end cap styles from the following options:

  • Flat Sloped
  • Flat Vertical (default)
  • Round Sloped
  • Wingwall Vertical

Note that the sloped end cap option causes the defined side slope to be applied on the end cap. The vertical end cap option has no side slope and is vertical.

End Cap Types

Modified Terrain Surface

This section is used to define the specifications of the revised terrain grid.

Modified Terrain Surface
  • Current Terrain Surface: This radio button option allows the software to stamp the terrain geometry on the source terrain file.
  • New Terrain Surface: This subsection allows the software to stamp the terrain geometry in a new terrain file. By default, the New Terrain Surface radio button is selected when the dialog box is displayed.

    Click the […] browse button for the Terrain file entry to specify the file name and directory location to save the revised terrain grid file.

    By default, the Load terrain as map layer checkbox option is checked to load the revised terrain grid as a layer in the Map Data Layers panel. Click the pencil icon to rename the layer.

    The user can select the CRS to be used for the revised terrain grid. By default, the software uses the project CRS.

    The user can check the Overwrite existing terrain layer checkbox option to overwrite an existing terrain layer (if one exists) with the revised terrain layer.

After the options for stamping the terrain geometry have been defined, click the [Stamp] button and the software will generate the revised terrain grid with multiple terrain stamping. In addition, the software loaded the DEM file as a new layer in the Map Data Layers panel.

Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Format Painter Command

The Format Painter command allows the user to quickly apply the same formatting, such as color, font style and size, and border style, to multiple pieces of text or graphics. It allows you to copy all the formatting from one object and apply it to another one – think of it as the copying and pasting of a formatting style.

To use the Format Painter command, follow these steps:

  1. Select the text or graphics element that has the formatting that you want to copy.
  2. From the Home ribbon menu, select the Format Painter command. The pointer will change to a paintbrush icon.
    Format Painter Command
  3. Select the text or graphics element to which the formatting will be applied. Note that this will allow you to format only a single element.
  4. To change the format of multiple elements, double-click the Format Painter command and then select other similar elements to automatically apply that same formatting.
  5. To stop formatting, press the [ESC] key.
Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Stamp Geometry Command

The Stamp Geometry command is used to draw a polyline, prompt the software to automatically sample the cross sectional geometry at the ends of the polyline, linearly interpolate the cross section shape along the drawn polyline, and revise the terrain model accordingly. This can be used to quickly “burn-in” a channel where one is missing, or “fill-in” a levee or dam structure where one is proposed. For example, when performing a laser scan, the bridge deck will cause a false dam to be inserted into the terrain, which will later need to be removed. Users can use the Stamp Geometry command in such a case.

stamp-geomatry-command-1-1030x641-1.png

Follow these steps to use the Stamp Geometry command:

  1. From the Terrain ribbon menu, select the Stamp Geometry command.
    Select the Stamp Geometry command
  2. The Stamp Geometry dialog box will be displayed.
    Stamp Geometry dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the above dialog box.

Stamping Parameters

This section is used to define general parameters used for stamping terrain geometry. This includes type of stamping operation to be processed, source terrain surface to be updated, and daylighting method for terrain stamping.

From the Terrain stamping operation dropdown combo box, select the type of stamping operation. The following options are available:

  • Terrain Cut: This option cuts the terrain geometry to burn-in a channel where one is missing, or to remove a false dam, etc.
  • Terrain Fill: This option fills in a levee or dam structure, where one is proposed, by stamping it on the terrain geometry.
    Stamping Parameters section

From the Terrain surface dropdown combo box, select the source terrain file. The dropdown combo box will list all the elevation layers that are currently added to the project. The elevation layer which is used to extract cross sections and 2D model elevation data is selected by default.

The Fill void space below terrain cut and the Leave existing ground above terrain checkbox options are checked by default. They facilitate creating a more accurate representation of the stamped terrain geometry by daylighting the stamping operation into the source terrain geometry.

Define Interpolation Path

This section defines the path to which the terrain surface stamping is to be applied. There are two radio button options for defining the path:

  • Assign polyline: This option allows the user to select a polyline from the Map View and use it to define the terrain interpolation path.
  • Draw polyline: This option allows the user to interactively draw a polyline on the Map View and use it as the terrain interpolation path.

If there is an existing polyline on the Map View that can be used for the stamping operation, the user can click the [Pick] button adjacent to the Assign polyline radio button and select a polyline from the Map View.

Define Interpolation Path

Alternatively, the user can click the [Draw] button adjacent to the Draw polyline radio button to draw a polyline on the Map View.

Click the [Draw] button

The Create curvilinear polygon checkbox option can be used to create a smooth terrain interpolation path while drawing the polyline.

Define Elevations

This section defines how the interpolated terrain elevations will be assigned along the polyline path. There are four radio button options available to define how the elevations are assigned:

  • Read terrain surface elevations: Enabling this checkbox will cause the software to automatically read the terrain surface to determine what elevations to use. If this option is unchecked, then the software will not override the elevation value that the user has manually entered into the elevation fields. By default, this checkbox will be checked.
  • Interpolate using end point elevations: This option allows the user to use the elevations at the ends of the assigned (or drawn) polyline and then cuts or fills-in the terrain geometry while automatically interpolating the elevation along the polyline path. The software also calculates the longitudinal slope using start and stop points and displays the value in the Longitudinal Slope (V:H) read-only field. The total length of the assigned (or drawn) polyline will be displayed in the Length field.
  • Use constant elevation: This option allows the user to define a specific elevation which will be applied across the terrain interpolation path.
  • Use start point elevation and slope: This option allows the user to set the start point elevation of the assigned (or drawn) polyline. The Stop Point elevation value is fixed.
  • Use stop point elevation and slope: This option allows the user to set the stop point elevation of the assigned (or drawn) polyline. The Start Point elevation value is field.
    Define Elevations section

Define Interpolation Path Shape

This section defines how the interpolated terrain region will be shaped along the polyline path. There are two radio button options for defining the interpolation path shape. The user can either choose the Use end point terrain geometry or the Use trapezoid geometry option.

  • Use end point terrain geometry: This option uses the terrain geometry at the two ends of the assigned (or drawn) polyline. The software will then interpolate the shape of the cut (or fill) along the polyline path.

    By default, the Cross section sample width (entire width) is set to 0 ft. However, the user can define a new value or click the [Pick] button and then measure a width from the Map View.
    Click the [Pick] button
  • Use trapezoid geometry: This option uses user-defined values to create a trapezoidal shape along the polygon path.

    By default, the Terrain path width (flat section) is set to 50 ft (15 m). However, the user can define a new value or click the [Pick] button, and then measure a width from the Map View.
    Terrain path width (flat section)
  • The Side slope (V:H) ratio value is set to 1:1 by default, which corresponds to 1 ft (m) rise to a 1 ft (m) run. A ratio of 1:0 represents a vertical wall. However, many times a flatter slope is required, such as 1:2 or 1:3. The user can define the ratio to represent the slope.
    Stamp-Geometry-Command-img-10.png

The Start path end-cap type and End path end-cap type dropdown combo boxes allow the user to choose different end cap styles from the following options:

  • Flat Sloped
  • Flat Vertical (default)
  • Round Sloped
  • Wingwall Vertical

Note that the sloped end cap option causes the defined side slope to be applied on the end cap. The vertical end cap option has no side slope and is vertical.

Stamp-Geometry-Command-img-11.png

Modified Terrain Surface

This section is used to define the specifications of the revised terrain grid. The section contains the following options:

  • Current Terrain Surface
    If this radio button option is selected, then the software performs the stamping operation on the current terrain surface selected in the Terrain surface dropdown combo box. Note that selecting the Current Terrain Surface option disables the New Terrain Surface option.
  • New Terrain Surface
    If this radio button option is selected, then the software allows the user to create a new terrain surface to save the stamping operation into it.

    Click the […] browse button for the Terrain file entry to specify the file name and directory location to which to save the revised terrain grid file.

    By default, the Load terrain as map layer checkbox option is checked to load the revised terrain grid as a layer in the Map Data Layers panel. Click the pencil icon to rename the layer.

    The user can select the CRS to be used for the revised terrain grid. By default, the software uses the project CRS.

    The Overwrite existing terrain layer checkbox option is checked by default to automatically overwrite an existing terrain layer (if one exists) with the revised terrain layer.

    After the options for stamping the terrain geometry have been defined, click the [Apply] button and the software will generate the revised terrain grid and, as an additional option, load the DEM file as a layer in the Map Data Layers panel.
    New Terrain Surface checkbox option
Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Digitizing Elements

Digitizing (or drawing) elements on the Map View can be performed using various model specific commands (e.g., Draw Storage Areas) or generic draw commands (e.g., Draw Polylines).

Digitizing Modes

The following digitizing modes commands are located at the bottom of the application:

  • Enable/ disable ortho mode (or press Function Key F8)
    Enabling ortho mode causes the software to restrict cursor movement to specific directions. It allows cursor movement only in the vertical and horizontal directions.
  • Enable/ disable snap mode (or press Function Key F3)
    Enabling the snap mode causes the software to snap the vertex of the drawn segment to a nearby existing vertex and/or an edge when the user releases the mouse button.
Digitizing Modes Image 1

Curvilinear Digitizing

When digitizing polylines, polygons, and other model elements, the user is given the option to create curvilinear elements. This option provides a more naturally looking element. The software will fit a cubic spline through the digitized points, as shown below.

Digitizing Modes Image 1

Once the user has completed digitizing the curvilinear element, the software automatically inserts intermediate vertices to represent the curved element using short straight-line polyline segments.

While digitizing using the curvilinear option, additional vertices need to be digitized to transition between straight-line sections and curved sections. These additional vertices anchor the straight-line section and prevent it from becoming curved.

Linear and Orthogonal Modes in Curvilinear Digitizing

While drawing the curvilinear elements, the user can press and hold the [Shift] key to activate the orthogonal mode and the [Ctrl] key to switch to linear digitizing. This provides more control over the placement of the polylines where additional detail is needed.

Linear and Orthogonal Modes in Curvilinear Digitizing Image 3

Note that the tooltips for drawing the linear, curvilinear, and orthogonal segments are displayed on the status bar.

Linear Digitizing

The software, by default, allows the user to draw polygons and other model elements with linear elements. Linear elements are formative design elements used to represent linear features of model elements such as river stretches, roadway crossings, and bridge piers.

Curvilinear and Orthogonal Modes in Linear Digitizing

While drawing the linear elements, the user can press and hold the [Shift] key to activate the orthogonal mode and [Ctrl] key to switch to curvilinear digitizing.

Curvilinear and Orthogonal Modes in Linear Digitizing Image 4

Canceling the Digitizing Command

While the digitizing command is active, press the Esc key to cancel the command. The software will cancel the digitizing command.

Undo a Segment during Digitizing

While digitizing an element, press the CTRL+Z key (for Undo) to undo the last segment of the element being digitized. The CTRL+Z key can be pressed multiple times to undo multiple segments of the element while digitizing.

Platform & GIS Tools › Drawing & Editing Tools

Copying and Pasting Model Elements

The software allows you to copy and paste model elements within a project. For example, to duplicate a cross section along a river reach, select a cross section and then right-click and choose Copy from the displayed context menu.

Copy Paste 1

The software will display the copied cross section connected to the cursor. Then, position the cross section along the river reach where you want it to be pasted and then click with the mouse.

Copy Paste 2

The copied cross section will then be placed at the selected location.

Copy Paste 3

The software will automatically align the copied cross section thalweg with the river reach and position the cross section perpendicular to the river reach. In addition, the software will update the copied cross section river station ID and adjust the flow lengths for the copied cross section and the next upstream cross section.

Additionally, the user can use the Global Copy command to copy elements from one scenario to other existing scenarios and add these elements to other loaded projects. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about how to use the Global Copy command.

Platform & GIS Tools › GIS Data Import/Export

Exporting Your Project to AutoCAD or MicroStation

It is quite easy to export a project to an AutoCAD or MicroStation drawing file, allowing the HEC‑RAS or HEC-HMS project data to be shared with CAD and other software.

unknown node

To export a project to AutoCAD or MicroStation, select the Export HEC-RAS to CAD or Export HEC-HMS to CAD command from the Export Data dropdown menu of the Input ribbon menu. This will display the following dialog boxes:

GeoHECRAS

Export HEC-RAS to CAD Command

GeoHECHMS

Export HEC-HMS to CAD Command


The following sections describe how to interact with the above dialog boxes.

General Options

This tabbed panel is used to specify the project input and output data to be exported to CAD.

CAD Drawing File

This section is used to define where the exported results are to be saved.

Click the […] button for the File name entry to specify the directory location and the drawing file name to save the exported results. Make certain to select the file type, which includes whether to save the file as an AutoCAD or MicroStation drawing file, as well as what drawing file version.

Input Data

HEC-RAS Input Data

This section allows the user to select the HEC‑RAS input data to be exported. The checkbox option at the HEC-RAS Input Data section header allows the user to enable or disable the section and its underlying elements to be exported.

Each HEC‑RAS element type is placed in its own layer. For example, cross sections are placed in a cross-section layer, whereas river reaches are placed in a river reach layer. Also, 3D polyline elements, such as cross sections, are written out as 3D polylines. In addition, profile lines and time series nodes can also be exported to plot results from a 2D flow area and generate a time series plot at node, respectively.

HEC‑HMS Input Data

This section allows the user to select the HEC‑HMS input data to be exported. Each HEC‑HMS element type is placed in its own layer. HEC-HMS elements that can be exported to a CAD file include subbasins, river reaches, storage areas, junctions, sources, sinks, flow paths, etc.

Output Data

HEC-RAS Output Data

This section allows the user to select which flood map profiles to export. The checkbox option at the HEC-RAS Output Data section header allows the user to enable or disable the section and its underlying output options to be exported. In addition, it provides the user with options to remove ponded areas and holes as well as display flood result contours, water edge points, and velocity vectors.

Other Options

This section allows the user to include the base map image with a choice of imagery resolution. In addition, the Overwriting existing CAD drawing file checkbox option allows the software to overwrite an existing CAD file with the same file name.

Spatial Reference

This tabbed panel allows the user to specify the Coordinate Reference System (CRS) for the CAD drawing.

Export Project to CAD - Spatial Reference Tab

Exported Coordinate Reference System

This section allows the user to select the CRS for the CAD drawing. The user can choose between the following options:

  • Use project CRS: When this option is selected, the project’s CRS is assigned to the CAD drawing.
  • Use local CRS: This option can be used when the project does not have its own CRS defined. When this option is selected, the local CRS of the data layer is assigned to the CAD drawing.
  • Select different CRS: When this option is selected, the Select Coordinate Reference System section gets enabled. From this section, the user can browse through all the supported CRS contained within the software and select the desired CRS.

Coordinate Reference System Information

This section displays information related to the CRS of the project such as CRS units, projection and its code, CRS datum, projection file format (*.prj, *.wkt), etc.

Select Coordinate Reference System

This section is used to define a custom CRS. This section gets enabled when the user has selected the Select different CRS option from the Exported Coordinate Reference System section.

Select Coordinate Reference System Section
  • Projected CRS Regions: Using this tab, the user can browse to the supported CRS for the location of interest by expanding the continent, country, and then local region.
  • Projected CRS Listings: Using this tab, the user can browse through all the supported CRS pertaining to a selected projection.

To learn more about coordinate reference systems, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Exporting the Project

After the options have been defined, click the [Export] button and the software will export the project model to CAD.

Only the current scenario (or plan) will be written out to the CAD drawing file. Separate drawing files will need to be created if multiple scenarios are to be exported to AutoCAD.

Platform & GIS Tools › GIS Data Import/Export

Automated GIS Mapping Functions

GeoHECRAS provides several GIS mapping functions that will automatically map GIS attribute data to the HEC‑RAS model. These functions include:

  • Assigning channel banks
  • Assigning flow lengths
  • Assigning ineffective flow areas
  • Assigning conveyance obstructions
  • Assigning levees
  • Assigning Manning's roughness

To access these GIS mapping functions, select the Assign Entities dropdown menu item from the Input ribbon menu.

Assign Entities dropdown menu item


In addition, there are additional GIS mapping functions available in the Manning's Roughness dropdown menu item of the Input ribbon menu.

Manning's Roughness dropdown menu item
Platform & GIS Tools › GIS Data Import/Export

Exporting Your Project to Google Earth

It is quite easy to export a project to Google Earth. The Export HEC-RAS to Google Earth and Export HECH-HMS to Google Earth commands allow the user to export a current project and analysis results to Google Earth. This allows the project data to be viewed in Google Earth.

unknown node

To export a project to Google Earth, select the Export HEC‑RAS to Google Earth or Export HECH-HMS to Google Earth command from the Export Data dropdown menu of the Input ribbon menu. This will display the following dialog boxes:

GeoHECRAS

The Export HEC‑RAS to Google Earth dialog box will be displayed.

Export HEC‑RAS to Google Earth dialog box

GeoHECHMS

The Export HEC‑HMS to Google Earth dialog box will be displayed.

Export HEC‑HMS to Google Earth dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the above dialog boxes.

Google Earth File

This section is used to identify where the exported results are to be saved.

Click the […] button at the File name entry to specify the directory location and Google Earth file name to save the exported results.

Input Data

HEC‑RAS Input Data

This section allows the user to select the HEC‑RAS input data to export. The checkbox option at the HEC-RAS Input Data section header allows the user to enable or disable the section and its underlying elements to be exported. Each HEC‑RAS element type is placed in its own layer. For example, cross sections are placed in a cross-section layer, whereas river reaches are placed in a river reach layer. Also, 3D polyline elements, such as cross sections, are written out as 3D polylines.

HEC‑RAS Output Data

This section allows the user to select the HEC‑RAS output results to export. The checkbox option at the HEC-RAS Output Data section header allows the user to enable or disable the section and its underlying output options to be exported. In addition, the user can select which flood map profiles to export, export BFE contours, as well as 2D flow velocity arrows for the selected profile into Google Earth format. Note that the software does not permit the export of contours with time series flood maps.

Animated flood results are exported as animated results to Google Earth.

HEC‑HMS Input Data

This section allows the user to select what HEC‑HMS element data should be exported. Each HEC‑HMS element type is placed in its own layer. For example, subbasins are placed in the subbasin layer, whereas storage areas are placed in the storage area layer.

Other Options

The Overwriting existing Google Earth file checkbox option allows the software to overwrite an existing Google Earth file with the same file name. Also, the View in Google Earth checkbox option causes the software to launch Google Earth from the user’s computer, load the exported Google Earth file, and then zoom into the project area in Google Earth.

Exporting the Project

After the options have been defined, click the [Export] button and the software will export the project to Google Earth.

Only the current scenario (or plan) will be written out to a Google Earth file. Separate Google Earth files will need to be created if multiple scenarios are to be viewed in Google Earth.

Platform & GIS Tools › GIS Data Import/Export

GIS Shapefile Common Restrictions

Shapefile is ESRI’s vector data format for storing data and attribute information for a geographical object. The geographical data of a shapefile can be represented in points, lines, or polygons, such as rivers, lakes, or water wells. The three major shapefile formats/extensions that define the geometry and attributes of geographically referenced objects are:

  • shp: This shapefile format is a main file that stores the geometric data, such as points, lines, or polygons.
  • .shx: This shapefile format is an index file that allows GIS software to quickly access the geometric data stored in the .shp file.
  • .dbf: This shapefile format is a file that stores attribute data of the shapefile in a tabular format.

Some other important shapefile formats are—.sbn/.sbx, .fbn/.fbx, .ixs, .mxs, .prj, .cpg, etc.

When working with the above shapefile formats along with their associated field names, the following restrictions must be followed:

  • All extensions/file formats associated with the shapefile must be stored in the same project workspace/directory.
  • Each shapefile format must have the same prefix, for example, shp, object.shx, and object.dbf.
  • While copying a shapefile across different GIS software, all file formats that compose a shapefile must be copied to ensure compatibility and proper functioning of the entire project.
  • The size of both .shp and .dbf file formats cannot exceed 2 Gigabytes.
  • The maximum permissible length for a field name in .dbf file is 10 characters.
  • The maximum number of allowable shapefile fields in .dbf file is 255.
  • For .dbf file, floating point numbers may contain rounding errors since they are stored as text.
  • The field names of the .dbf file provide inadequate support for Unicode.
  • The supported field types for the .dbf file are—floating point (13-character storage), integer (4 or 9-character storage), date (8-character storage), and text (maximum 254-character storage).
  • For all shapefile formats, only alphanumeric characters (letters and numbers) and underscores (_) are allowed for field names. In addition, underscores (_) are only allowed as separators between words, but not at the beginning or end of the field name.
  • Spaces and special characters are not allowed in field names.
  • For the field names, avoid using reserved keywords that have special meanings in GIS software or its database.
Platform & GIS Tools › GIS Data Import/Export

GIS Element Properties

The GIS Element Properties dialog box allows the user to define various GIS elements and their properties, style the border associated with the element, and change the image’s transparency. Furthermore, it also allows the user to change the CRS (coordinate reference system) of the current project and automatically apply the transformation scale factor to any layer to accurately map it to the project CRS.

Following are the types of GIS Element Properties dialog boxes for the GIS elements: polygons, polylines, and points, respectively:

  • GIS Polygon Properties
  • GIS Polyline Properties
  • GIS Point Properties

In this article, we will use the GIS Polygon Properties dialog box to demonstrate and describe the GIS Element Properties dialog box of the CivilGEO software.

Follow the steps below to use the GIS Polygon Properties dialog box:

  1. In the Map Data Layers panel, click on the […] button next to the desired GIS layer.
    Map Data Layers Panel
    Note that the user must follow the same step to access the GIS Element Properties dialog box for the other GIS element types, such as point and polyline.
  2. The GIS Polygon Properties dialog box will be displayed.
    GIS Polygon Properties dialog box

The GIS Polygon Properties dialog box contains three tabs as described below:

  • General Options
  • Spatial Reference
  • Transformation

General Options

Various sections of the General Options tab are described below:

General Information

This section contains read-only information about the location of the element properties file and the file name.

Polygon Border Stylization

This section is associated with the border of the polygon. It allows the user to set its color, width, style, and transparency. Note that the Polygon Border Stylization checkbox is selected by default.

Default Polygon Fill Stylization

This section provides options for the user to fill the polygon with color and adjust the transparency so that you can see through the polygon to the background Base Map. A transparency value of 40 to 50% works well. Note that the Default Polygon Fill Stylization checkbox is selected by default.

Assign Elevation

This section is used to assign elevation to elements. The following radio button options are available:

  • Drape onto terrain
    On selecting this option, elements appear to drape onto the surface terrain representing the ground surface. This radio button option is selected by default.
  • Offset above terrain
    On selecting this option, the user can apply the offset value to raise the terrain of the selected elements by a specified amount. The user can enter the offset value in the entry field next to this radio button option.
  • Assign fixed elevation
    This option allows the user to assign a fixed elevation value for the selected polygon. The user can enter the elevation value in the entry field next to this radio button option. This radio button option is unchecked by default.
  • Assign height attribute
    This option allows the user to assign a height attribute from the selected shapefile metadata. The user can choose the desired height attribute from the dropdown combo box. By default, the dropdown combo box is set to None.
  • Assign elevation attribute
    This option allows the user to assign an elevation attribute from the selected shapefile metadata. The user can choose the desired elevation attribute from the dropdown combo box. By default, the dropdown combo box is set to None.

In addition, the following options are available in this section. Note that these options are available only when the user has selected an option other than the Drape onto terrain option.

Assign Elevation Section
  • Extrude walls
    This option is used to include sidewalls for the subbasins.
  • Use map layer imagery for roofs
    This option is used to replace roofs with base map imagery.
  • Wall type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the desired wall type. The Wall type dropdown combo box lists the following types: Horizontal stripes, Random, Solid Color, Vertical Stripes, and Windows.
    Wall type dropdown combo box

Other Options

This section is divided into the following three panels:

  • Attribute Mapping
    This panel allows the user to provide different colorization styles to a selected attribute. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about attribute mapping.
  • Annotation Mapping
    This panel allows the user to change and display the labels of the attributes of GIS elements on the Map View. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about annotation mapping.
  • Map Scale Display
    This panel allows the user to transform the scale factor of the data to be displayed on Map View. The user can select the maximum map scale ratio from the Maximum map scale dropdown combo box. Similarly, with the Minimum map scale dropdown combo box, the minimum map scale ratio can be selected. By default, the maximum and minimum map scales ratios are set to None.
    Map Scale Display Panel

Spatial Reference

The Spatial Reference tab allows the user to manually assign the project’s CRS to the non-CRS referenced data layer coordinates if the data layer lies within the project’s CRS. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about spatial reference.

Transformation

The Transformation tab allows the user to automatically apply the transformation scale factor to any particular layer and accurately map it to the project coordinate reference system (CRS). Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about layer transformation.

Platform & GIS Tools › GIS Data Import/Export

Export To Shapefile Command

The Export to Shapefile command of CivilGEO software allows the user to export a specific layer or set of features of the defined model as shapefiles. Saving the data in the shapefile format allows the user to use it with other applications effortlessly.

Follow the steps below to use the Export to Shapefile command:

  1. Right-click on the layer in the Map Data Layers panel and then select the Export to Shapefile command from the displayed context menu.
    Export to Shapefile right-click context menu command in the Map Data Layers panel
  2. The Export to Shapefile dialog box will be displayed.
    Export to Shapefile dialog box

The following sections describe the Export to Shapefile command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

General Options

This tabbed panel is used to define the general options for exporting the layer as a shapefile.

Selecting Shapefile

The Select Shapefile section allows the user to define the location where the user can save the exported results. Click the […] button beside the File name entry to specify the directory location and file name to save the exported results. The software will display the Select Shapefile dialog box. From the displayed dialog box, browse to the location to save the file, enter the file name (it should have a file extension of .shp), and then click the [Save] button.

Select Shapefile dialog box

On clicking the [Save] button, the Export to Shapefile dialog box will be redisplayed, and the complete directory path and file name will be shown in the File name entry.

File name entry

Shapefile Limits

This section is used to define the maximum limits for exporting the shapefile.

Shapefile Limits section

The following options are available:

  • Layer source extents
    On selecting this option, the exported shapefile will have the same extents as the original source data.
  • User-defined limits
    This option allows the user to draw a rectangular extent which defines the shapefile limits. Click the [Pick] button to select the shapefile limits on the Map View. The dialog box will temporarily disappear, and an informational message will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw the rectangular extent. Click and drag a rectangular region to define the limits. After releasing the mouse, the Export to Shapefile dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the User-defined limits read-only field will be changed from Undefined to Defined.
  • Clipping Polygons
    This option allows the user to select one or more existing polygons to define the shapefile limits. Click the [Pick] button to select the polygon shape region(s) on the Map View. The dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the clipping polygons. Select the clipping polygons on the Map View and press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Export to Shapefile dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected polygons will be displayed in the Clipping polygons read-only field.
  • Model extents
    Select this radio button option to use the model extents to define the shapefile limits. If a project model has been defined, this option will create a bounding rectangular region to correspond to the extent of the defined model, plus an additional buffer boundary.

Modify Schema

This optional section contains a data table that allows the user to add/edit shapefile attributes such as name, values, and data types.

Modify Schema section

This data table requires the following data:

  • Field Name
    This data column is used to define the field name to add to the shapefile layer.
  • Field Type
    This dropdown combo box is used to select the data type of the field defined above. The following data types are provided:
    1. Date
    2. Floating Point
    3. Integer
    4. Text
  • Width
    This spin control button is only available for text field types. This spin control can range from 1 to 255. Any strings longer than the field width that do not fit into the field format will suffer truncation.

Filter Geometry Entities

This section allows the user to select single or multiple shapes when exporting the layer as a shapefile. The user can check the checkboxes corresponding to the shapes to export them in the shapefile.

Filter Geometry Entities section

Spatial Reference

This tabbed panel allows the user to specify the Coordinate Reference System (CRS) for the layer.

Spatial Reference panel

Note that this panel works similar to that of the Spatial Reference panel of the Export HEC-HMS to CAD command. Hence, refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about it.

Exporting the Layer

When all the options have been defined, click the [Export] button. The software will then export the layer as a shapefile at the specified location.

Platform & GIS Tools › GIS Data Import/Export

Conflate Point Data Command

The Conflate Point Data command allows the user to define a buffer distance for the selected cross sections, roadway crossings, lateral structures, inline structures, and SA/2D flow area connections for mapping elevation point data.

This article describes how to use the Conflate Point Data command in GeoHECRAS software. This command can also be used for the HEC-HMS cross sections.

Mapping Elevation Point Data to Adjacent Cross Sections

The Conflate Point Data command for cross sections allows survey point data to be merged into cross sections in order to define cross section geometry. This is especially helpful in projects where there is no cross section bathymetry data available for the cutting of cross sections. This command works with XYZ point files, AutoCAD drawings, and GIS point shapefiles.

Follow the steps given below to use the Conflate Point Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Cross Sections dropdown menu and then select the Conflate Point Data command.Conflate Point Data Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Conflate Point Data dialog box will be displayed.Conflate Point Data dialog box

The following sections describe the Conflate Point Data command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Cross Sections

This section is used to manually select the cross sections for mapping elevation point data. If a cross section is already selected on the Map View prior to running this command, the same cross section will be shown selected within the table.

Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to interactively select the cross sections from the Map View. Clicking the [Select All] button causes all the cross sections to be selected. Clicking the [Clear All] button causes all the cross sections to be deselected. The Total selected read-only field will show the number of selected cross sections.

Point Data Source

This section is used to define the survey cross section point data source to be used for mapping elevation point data. Depending upon the point data source type that is selected, different options are provided to specify additional point data information.

The user can select from the following survey cross section point data available in the Point source dropdown combo box:

  • CAD Drawing
  • GIS Points
  • Point Elevation Data

Filter Point Data

This optional section allows the user to sort survey cross section point data based upon attribute type. The user can select from the following attribute types available in the Point code attribute dropdown combo box:

  • Elevation
  • Layer
  • ObjectID
  • PointCode
  • Type

Clicking the [Select All] button causes all the survey cross section point code to be selected. Clicking the [Clear All] button causes all the survey cross section point code to be deselected.

Cross Section Conflation Parameters

This section allows the user to define the buffer distance for the selected cross sections which identifies where the surveyed cross section data should be snapped to the cross sections in the Cross section buffer distance entry field. Snapping of survey data can be either perpendicular to the cross section or parallel to the river reach polyline. The assignment of the surveyed cross section data can be assigned based upon the following methods listed under the Point assignment to cross section dropdown combo box:

  • Parallel to River Reach (default)
  • Perpendicular to Cross Section
Cross Section Conflation Parameters

Assign Bank Stations

This optional section is used to construct channel bank locations based upon an assumed normal flow depth entered in the Channel depth entry field and a maximum channel width search distance entered in the Maximum channel width entry field. The software will first determine where the thalweg location is on a cross section. It will then move outward from the thalweg until the requested channel depth is reached within the maximum channel width specified.

Cross Section Region Conflation Control

This section allows the user to control the extent of the surveyed cross section data to be assigned as geometry data to the selected cross sections. The user can choose from the following options available in the Conflate cross section geometry for dropdown combo box:

  • Both Overbanks
  • Channel Only (default)
  • Entire Cross Section
  • Left Overbank Only
  • Right Overbank Only

The Replace existing overlapping geometry data checkbox option allows the user to replace the existing cross section geometry data with the surveyed cross section data.

Similar to mapping elevation point data for cross sections, the user can map elevation point data for the following structures:

  • Inline structures
  • lateral structures
  • SA/2D flow area connections
  • Roadway crossings

Mapping Elevation Point Data to Adjacent Inline Structure

Using the Conflate Point Data command of the Inline Structures menu item, the user can map elevation point data to adjacent inline structure weir crest geometry within a buffer area region.

Conflate Point Data command of the Inline Structures menu item

Selecting this command will cause the software to display the following dialog box.

Conflate Point Data dialog box

Mapping Elevation Point Data to Adjacent Lateral Structure

Using the Conflate Point Data command of the Lateral Structures menu item, the user can map elevation point data to adjacent lateral structure weir crest geometry within a buffer area region.

Conflate Point Data command of the Lateral Structures menu item

Selecting this command will cause the software to display the following dialog box.

Conflate Point Data dialog box

Mapping Elevation Point Data to Adjacent SA/2D Flow Area Connections

Using the Conflate Point Data command of the SA/2D Connections menu item, the user can map elevation point data to storage area/2D flow area connections weir crest geometry within a buffer area region.

Conflate Point Data command of the SA/2D Connections menu item

Selecting this command will cause the software to display the following dialog box.

Conflate Point Data dialog box

Mapping Elevation Point Data to Adjacent Roadway Crossing

Using the Conflate Point Data command of the Roadway Crossings menu item, the user can map elevation point data to adjacent roadway crossing geometry within a buffer area region.

Conflate Point Data command of the Roadway Crossings menu item

Selecting this command will cause the software to display the following dialog box.

Conflate Point Data dialog box

Note that if the model contains only 2D elements, then 1D Roadway Crossing panel will be disabled.

Platform & GIS Tools › GIS Data Import/Export

Supported External Data Formats

Our software can utilize a variety of external data, such as:

  • AutoCAD and AutoCAD Civil 3D Drawing Files (*.dwg, *.dxf)
  • Bentley MicroStation Drawing Files (*.dgn)
  • AutoCAD Civil 3D and Bentley MicroStation Terrain Surfaces (via LandXML)†
  • 3D Models (via SketchUp)
  • Elevation Data (numerous formats detailed below)
  • GIS Data (*.shp, *.gdb, *.mdb)
  • Survey Data (numerous formats detailed below)
  • Raster Imagery Data (numerous formats detailed below)

CivilGEO’s products also supports model data such as:

  • HEC-RAS Projects (*.prj)
  • HEC-HMS Projects (*.hms)

Elevation Data

Elevation data can come in a variety of different formats. The following elevation data file formats are supported:

  • ArcInfo ASCII Elevation Grids
  • ArcInfo Binary Elevation Grids
  • ArcInfo Contour Shapefiles
  • ArcInfo Elevation Point Shapefiles
  • ArcInfo GDB File Geodatabases
  • ArcInfo MDB Personal Geodatabases
  • AutoCAD Civil 3D Terrain Surfaces†
  • AutoCAD Contours
  • Bentley MicroStation Terrain Surfaces†
  • Bentley MicroStation Contours
  • GeoTIFF Elevation Grids
  • LandXML Terrain Models
  • USGS DEM Elevation Grids
  • USGS NED Elevation Grids – BIL Format
  • USGS NED Elevation Grids – Float Format
  • XYZ ASCII Point Terrain Data
  • LiDAR Point Clouds (*.las, *.laz)

GIS Data

GIS data consists of two components:

  • Spatial Data: This component contains coordinate information that describes the element. For example, this could be a manhole location.
  • Attribute Data: This component is used to store information about the element. For example, this could be the manhole invert and rim elevations.

The following GIS data file formats are supported:

  • ArcInfo Shapefiles
  • ArcInfo GDB File Geodatabases
  • ArcInfo MDB Personal Geodatabases

Survey Data

Survey data can be used to import alignments, cross-section geometries, terrain surfaces, and much more.

The following survey data formats are supported:

  • AutoCAD 3D Points
  • AutoCAD Civil 3D COGO Points
  • ENZ (Easting, Northing, Elevation) Point Files
  • ENZD (Easting, Northing, Elevation, Description) Point Files
  • NEZ (Northing, Easting, Elevation) Point Files
  • NEZ (Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description) Point Files
  • PENZ (Point, Easting, Northing, Elevation) Point Files
  • PENZD (Point, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Description) Point Files
  • PNEZ (Point, Northing, Elevation) Point Files
  • PNEZD (Point, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description) Point Files
  • XYZ ASCII Point Files

Raster Imagery Data

In its simplest form, a raster imagery file consists of a matrix of cells (or pixels) organized into rows and columns (or a grid) where each cell contains a color value. Rasters can be digital aerial photographs, images from satellites, digital pictures, or even scanned maps.

The following raster imagery data file formats are supported:

  • Bitmap (*.bmp)
  • ERDAS IMAGINE (*.img)
  • GeoTIFF Georeferenced TIFF (*.tif, *.tiff)
  • JPEG 2000 (*.jp2, *.j2k, *.jpg2)
  • JPEG (*.jpeg, *.jpg)
  • MrSID (*.sid)
  • Portable Network Graphic (*.png)
  • TIFF Tagged Image File Format (*.tif, *.tiff)

†Civil 3D and Bentley MicroStation terrain surfaces imported as LandXML terrain models

Platform & GIS Tools › GIS Data Import/Export

Attribute Table Command

CivilGEO’s engineering software allows the user to easily review and edit GIS attribute data using the Attribute Table command. The Attribute Table can be used to filter, sort, and highlight specific geospatial elements on the Map View. When changes are made to the attribute data, the changes are dynamically updated on the Map View. For example, changing a pipe size in the Attribute Table would cause the pipe size to change on the Map View.

This section describes how to use the Attribute Table command:

  1. From the View ribbon menu, select the Attribute Table command.
    View Ribbon Menu
  2. Selecting this command will split the Map View into two parts, with the upper part being the Map View and the lower part containing the Attribute Table.
    Attribute table in the Map View

The following sections describe the Attribute Table command and how to interact with the above features of the table.

Resizing Attribute Table

The user can resize the Attribute Table’s height by clicking on and dragging the horizontal splitter that separates the two views. The minimum height for the Attribute Table is two rows whereas the maximum height can be 50% of the height of the entire tabbed view frame. The default height of the Attribute Table is 25% of the entire tabbed view frame.

Data Layer

The user can change which data layer should be displayed in the Attribute Table by selecting the data layer of interest in the Data layer dropdown combo box entry. In addition, selecting a different element type on the Map View will cause the Data layer dropdown combo box entry to change and display the data table for the selected element type.

Lock to Layer

If the [Lock to Layer] option is selected, then the software will not change to a different data layer when the user clicks on a different element type on the Map View. Note that there are two icons for the corresponding button states (i.e., locked and unlocked).

Auto-Zoom

If the user clicks on any element row in the data table view, the selected element will be highlighted on the Map View. If the [Auto-Zoom] button is enabled, the Map View will zoom to show the bounds of the selected element when a new element row is selected in the data table view.

Auto-Scroll

Clicking on a data element within the Map View will cause the corresponding data table to be displayed in the Attribute Table view. If the [Auto-Scroll] button is enabled, the selected element’s attribute row will be highlighted in the data table view. The user can click on multiple elements from the Map View, and the corresponding rows in the Attribute Table will become highlighted.

Select Columns & Release All Filters

The user can use the [Select Columns] button to filter and display only the desired data fields in the Attribute Table.

Attribute Table fields are reset to show all fields when any of the following actions is performed:

  • A different element type is selected in the Map View.
  • A different data layer is selected in the Data layer dropdown combo box entry.
  • The [Release All Filters] button is clicked.

Row Index

The leftmost column represents which data row the user is working on within the data table.

Closing Attribute Table

To close the Attribute Table, the user can either click the [X] close button on the upper right of the table view or deselect the Attribute Table menu item from the View ribbon menu.

Editing Values

If the data layer is editable, then the user can edit values contained within the data table.

Platform & GIS Tools › GIS Data Import/Export

Exporting Your Project to Shapefiles

It is quite easy to export a project to GIS shapefiles. The Export HEC-RAS to Shapefiles and Export HEC-HMS to Shapefiles commands allow the user to export current project elements and analysis results to ESRI shapefiles. This functionality allows project data to be shared with GIS and other software.

To export a project to shapefiles, select the Export HEC-RAS to Shapefiles or Export HEC-HMS to Shapefiles command from the Export Data dropdown menu of the Input ribbon menu. This will display the following dialog boxes:

GeoHECRAS

Export HEC-RAS to Shapefiles dialog box

GeoHECHMS

Export HECH-HMS to Shapefiles dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the above dialog boxes.

Selecting Shapefile Type to Export

The Select Shapefile Type to Export section allows the user to select whether the GIS shapefiles should be saved into a directory folder or packaged together as a single ZIP compressed file.

Clicking on the […] browse button adjacent to the HEC-RAS shapefiles folder or HEC-HMS shapefiles folder radio button option allows the user to specify the directory location to export the GIS shapefiles.

Clicking on the […] browse button adjacent to the HEC-RAS shapefiles archive (ZIP) file or HEC-HMS shapefiles archive (ZIP) file radio button option allows the user to define the zip archive file for storing all GIS shapefiles.

Note: Saving the shapefiles in a .zip file makes it easier to share the shapefile data with other users and to archive the project.

Input Data

HEC‑RAS Input Data

This section allows the user to select which HEC‑RAS input data should be exported. The checkbox option at the HEC-RAS Input Data section header allows the user to enable or disable the section and its underlying elements to be exported. HEC-RAS elements that can be exported to a shapefile include cross sections, storage areas, 2D flow areas, internal boundary elements, river reaches, flowlines, nodes, etc. Each HEC‑RAS element type is placed in its own shapefile. For example, cross sections are placed in a cross-section shapefile, whereas river reaches are placed in a river reach shapefile.

HEC‑HMS Input Data

This section allows the user to select which HEC‑HMS input data should be exported. HEC-HMS elements that can be exported to a shapefile include subbasins, river reaches, storage areas, junctions, sources, sinks, nodes, flow paths, etc. Each HEC‑HMS element type is placed in its own shapefile. For example, subbasins are placed in the subbasin shapefile, whereas storage areas are placed in the storage area shapefile.

Output Data

HEC‑RAS Output Data

This section allows the user to select which HEC‑RAS output results to export. The checkbox option at the HEC-RAS Output Data section header allows the user to enable or disable the section and its underlying elements to be exported. In addition, the user can select which flood map profiles to export; write out the water edge points (points at the edge of the main channel of the water) as a point file; and export flood map contours and 2D flow velocity arrows in a shapefile.

While exporting flood map results, the software removes ponded areas and holes with areas less than 1000 square feet from the exported results. However, the user can interactively measure the area from the Map View by clicking on the [Measure] button.

HEC‑HMS Output Data

This section contains the Export HEC-HMS results checkbox. This checkbox option allows the software to export only the current scenario results. By default, this checkbox is selected when the dialog box is displayed.

Note: The current scenario name will be displayed next to the Export HEC-HMS results checkbox option.

Other Options

This section contains the Overwrite existing shapefiles checkbox. This checkbox option allows the software to overwrite existing shapefiles with the same file name. By default, this checkbox is selected when the dialog box is displayed.

Exporting the Project

After the options have been defined, click the [Export] button and the software will export the project data to shapefiles.

Note that the cross sections are exported out as 3D polylines. These 3D polylines represent the 3D horizontal stationing and elevation of the cross section geometry.

Note: Only the current scenario (or plan) will be exported to shapefiles. Separate shapefiles will need to be created if multiple scenarios are to be exported.

Platform & GIS Tools › GIS Data Import/Export

Viewing and Editing GIS Attribute Data using Data Explorer

GIS software uses two basic types of data:

  • Spatial Data — the coordinates and identifying information describing the map elements.
  • Attribute Data — additional information that describes the map elements, such as pipe diameters and manhole invert elevations.

Spatial Data

Spatial data consists of the coordinates and identifying information for various spatial elements. Three types of features can be represented on the Map View:

  • Points
  • Polylines
  • Polygons

The various physical aspects of the GIS map—watershed boundaries, rivers, sewer pipes, manholes, and so forth—are organized into layers according to their common features.

For example, the collection of points that represent stormwater manholes can be organized into a Manhole layer, the collection of polylines that represent stormwater sewer pipes can be organized into a Pipes layer, and the collection of polygons that represent watershed basins can be organized into a Watersheds layer.

A layer can be either static or thematic. Static layers use the same graphical attributes (color, line width, and so forth) for all features in a layer. Thematic layers can use different graphical attributes to classify the features in the layer. For example, a thematic polygon layer representing watersheds could use different colors to show the composite curve number of each watershed. A thematic polyline layer representing stormwater pipes could use different line widths and/or colors to differentiate between pipe diameters.

Attribute Data

The second type of data used in GIS is attribute data. With GIS software, data views can be associated with the Map View through links to the spatial data. For instance, the spatial data might represent a water distribution pipe network and contain information for each pipe, such as when it was installed, last inspected, pipe material (i.e., cast iron, PVC, etc.), pressure rating, roughness coefficient, and so forth.

Data Explorer

The Data Explorer panel is used to view the attribute data of elements displayed in the Map View model. Select the element (river reach, cross section, stormwater pipe, manhole, AutoCAD element, etc.) from Map View, and the software will automatically display the corresponding attribute data in the Data Explorer panel.

Viewing-Editing-GIS-Attribute-Data-using-Data-Explorer-Image-1_Updated.png

The user can adjust the Data Explorer panel’s height by dragging the top of the panel splitter bar up (or down) to see more information about the selected element.

The Data Explorer contains two columns: the attribute fields (Field Name) of the selected geometric element and the corresponding attribute values (Field Value). The user can edit the attribute data of the selected element—Manning’s roughness value, for example—if the selected element’s layer is unlocked. Note that CAD layers are not editable.

Viewing-Editing-GIS-Attribute-Data-using-Data-Explorer-Image-2_Updated.png

If the selected geometric element’s layer is locked, then the attribute values will be read-only and will appear green.

Viewing-Editing-GIS-Attribute-Data-using-Data-Explorer-Image-3_Updated.png

Editing Attribute Data

The following methods can be used to edit the GIS attribute data:

  • To modify an attribute value for a selected GIS entity, click on the GIS entity in the Map View and make your changes in the attribute value column.
  • To modify attribute values for all entities in a layer at the same time, click on one of the GIS entities in the Map View and then right-click and choose Select Similar from the displayed context menu. This will select all entities of the same type. Then, make your changes in the attribute value column.
  • To modify attribute values for just a few entities in a layer, multi-select the entities in the Map View for the layer that you want to update. Then, make your changes in the attribute value column.

Attribute Table

The Attribute Table feature allows you to search, view and edit attribute data independently. The table is useful for working on the elements contained in a specific layer. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Attribute Table feature.

Saving GIS Attribute Data Changes

When the project is saved, the software will update any edits to the GIS data.

Platform & GIS Tools › Terrain & Elevation Data

Elevation Profile Command

The Elevation Profile command is used to display the elevation profile plot, profile line details, and profile line geometry for a selected polyline and terrain surface.

Follow the steps below to use the Elevation Profile command:

  1. From the Terrain ribbon menu, select the Elevation Profile command.
    Elevation Profile command
  2. Selecting this command splits the Map View into two sections: the top shows the Map View, and the bottom displays the Elevation Profile panel.
    Elevation Profile panel
  3. Now, select a polyline from the Map View and the corresponding elevation profile will be displayed in the Elevation Profile panel. Note that only one polyline can be selected at a time.
    Elevation Profile panel with polyline

Station - Elevation Point Tracking

In the Elevation Profile panel, dragging the mouse over the Elevation Profile plot displays a vertical line with a tracker, and the corresponding station and elevation values appear in the plot legend. In addition, a vertical arrowhead is also shown on the Map View that updates dynamically over the mouse drag. The arrowhead displays the same station and elevation readings as displayed in the Elevation Profile plot.

Elevation Profile panel - Station - Elevation Point Tracking

To turn off the active elevation profile tracking from both the Map View and Elevation Profile panel, uncheck the Track surface checkbox option in the top right corner of the panel.

Note that if the user grabs the polyline from the Map View and moves it around the terrain surface, the Elevation Profile panel is dynamically updated to show the new elevation profile.

Elevation Data Source Selection

The Elevation Data panel allows the user to select the elevation data source(s) to be used to extract the elevation profile. By default, this panel will reference the selected terrain surface in the Scenario Manager (if one is defined). If no terrain surface is selected in the Scenario Manager, then this entry will be undefined (i.e., blank). Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Scenario Manager dialog box.

Elevation Data panel

In the Elevation Data panel, the user can select the elevation data source from the Extract Elevation Data section. This section is enabled by default and allows the user to select primary and secondary elevation sources.

Note that if the checkbox at the Extract Elevation Data section is unchecked, then the options contained within this section will be disabled (i.e., grayed out).

The Primary Elevation Data and Secondary Elevation Data panels are used to define the primary and secondary (if available in the project) elevation data sources for extracting the elevation profile. Depending on the elevation data source type selected, the content of these panels changes to specify the additional elevation data information.

The software supports the following surface types, each differing in how terrain data are represented and processed:

  • CAD Drawing
  • Elevation Grid
  • GIS Contours
  • LandXML Data
  • Terrain Surface
  • TIN surface

For example, the following table provides a comparison between TIN and DEM in terms of how terrain data are represented and processed:

unknown node

When a secondary elevation data source is available, the software forms a concave hull around the primary elevation data source to identify its bounds. For locations where elevation data from the primary data source are unavailable, the software will use elevation data from the secondary data source.

Note that the user cannot utilize the same data source to define both the primary and secondary elevation data.

The user can click the [Swap Sources] button to swap the selected elevation source from primary elevation data to secondary elevation data and vice versa.

Extract Options

This section contains the Ignore zero elevation values checkbox option. This checkbox option allows the software to prevent bad (i.e., zero value) elevation points from impacting the plotted profile. By default, this checkbox option is checked.

Extract Options section

Profile Line Properties

The Selected Profile Line Details section displays the profile line properties when an elevation data source is defined for the selected polyline.

Selected Profile Line Details section
  • Polyline length
    This read-only field displays the total length of the selected polyline.
  • Maximum elevation
    This read-only field displays the maximum elevation along the entire polyline.
  • Minimum elevation
    This read-only field displays the minimum elevation along the entire polyline.
  • Elevation range
    This read-only field displays the difference between the maximum and minimum elevations along the polyline.

Note that if the selected polyline does not lay entirely over the defined elevation data source, then only the length property will be displayed and other properties will remain blank and shown as “NA” (i.e., Not Available).

Profile Line Station - Elevation Data Grid

The Profile Line Geometry section contains a data grid that displays the profile line station-elevation data for the selected elevation source. By default, the Elevation source dropdown combo box selects the default elevation source selected in the Scenario Manager dialog box. If the user selects a different elevation source from the dropdown combo box (if available), then its corresponding profile line geometry will be displayed.

Profile Line Geometry section

The profile line geometry is covered along the length of the selected polyline. The top right corner of the above panel displays the total points into which a selected polyline would have been divided. In addition, the Horizontal Station present at the last point in the Profile Line Geometry grid denotes the length of the selected polyline.

Profile Line Geometry grid - Horizontal Station

The length of the selected polyline can also be seen in the Data Explorer panel of the software. Refer to this article in our knowledge base for more information about viewing and editing the GIS attribute data using Data Explorer.

Selecting Other Elevation Sources

The Other Sources panel lists all the available elevation source(s) present in the project. In addition, if the user selects multiple elevation sources from the list, the software will then display the corresponding plots in the Elevation Profile panel.

Other Sources panel
Platform & GIS Tools › Terrain & Elevation Data

Terrain Elevation Geometry Sources

CivilGEO’s engineering software can utilize elevation data for creating and generating:

  • Terrain surfaces
  • Cross sections
  • Roadway crossing high chord geometry
  • Inline structure weir crest geometry
  • Lateral structure weir crest geometry
  • Flood maps

Elevation Grid Data

Our software supports most major elevation grid data file formats, such as:

  • ArcInfo ASCII Elevation Grid
  • ArcInfo Binary Elevation Grid
  • ArcInfo Float Grid
  • ENVI BSQ Band Sequential Grid
  • ERDAS ER Mapper Grid
  • ERDAS Imagine Grid
  • GeoTIFF Elevation Grid
  • Intergraph Raster Grid
  • JPEG 2000 Elevation Grid
  • USGS DEM Elevation Grid
  • USGS NED Elevation Grid – BIL Format
  • USGS NED Elevation Grid – Float Format

Other Elevation Data

Other elevation data files can be processed within the software to create an elevation terrain surface. This includes:

  • ArcInfo Contour Shapefiles
  • ArcInfo Elevation Point Shapefiles
  • ArcInfo GDB File Geodatabases
  • ArcInfo MDB Personal Geodatabases
  • AutoCAD Civil 3D Terrain Surfaces†
  • AutoCAD Contours
  • Bentley MicroStation Terrain Surfaces†
  • Bentley MicroStation Contours
  • LandXML Formats
  • LIDAR Point Cloud Formats
  • XYZ ASCII Point Terrain Data
  • 2DM files

Adding Elevation Data

Refer to this article in our knowledge base on how to add elevation data as well as how to construct an elevation terrain surface from online elevation data sources or through a local elevation data file.

†Civil 3D and Bentley MicroStation terrain surfaces imported as LandXML terrain models.

Platform & GIS Tools › Terrain & Elevation Data

Download DEM Data Command

Downloading DEM (Digital Elevation Model) data is a fundamental step in acquiring detailed information about the Earth's topography. DEM data provide elevation values for various geographic locations, allowing for the creation of 3D terrain models. These models find applications in fields such as environmental analysis, urban planning, hydrological modeling, and more.

In CivilGEO software, the Download DEM Data command allows the user to download elevation data for the project area. If a coordinate reference system (CRS) is defined and the user is zoomed into an area that is no more than 100 square miles (260 square kilometers) in size, this command can be used to download high-resolution DEM data for various countries around the world, including:

  • Australia
  • Austria
  • Canada
  • France
  • Germany
  • Portugal
  • USA

Note: The horizontal spatial resolution of DEM data varies, depending upon the region being modeled, but typically varies from 0.5 to 9 meters. For example, most of Canada and about one-half of the USA are available in 1-meter resolution. Another quarter of the USA is available in 3-meter resolution and the entire USA is available in 9-meter resolution.

Follow the steps below to use the Download DEM Data command:

  1. From the Map Data ribbon menu, click the Download DEM Data command.Download-DEM-Data-Command-Image-1.png
  2. The Add Elevation Layer dialog box will be displayed. Note that the Download Elevation DEM tab is already selected.Add Elevation Layer dialog box with selected Download Elevation DEM tab
  3. From the Terrain Elevation Source section, the user can select the terrain source to download the DEM data for the project area.
    Note: Based on the terrain source selected in the Terrain source dropdown entry, the contents of the data panel will be changed.
  4. From the Elevation Data Boundary Limits section, the user can choose an option to define the elevation data limit as well as desired DEM resolution to be downloaded.
  5. From the Terrain Grid Specifications section, the user can specify the file location, name, and format to save the downloaded DEM elevation file by clicking the […] button beside the DEM Elevation file entry.
  6. After specifying all the required options, click the [OK] button.
  7. The software will create a new elevation grid file at the specified location and load the downloaded elevation grid file as a new layer in the Map Data Layers panel.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about this command.

Platform & GIS Tools › Terrain & Elevation Data

Add Survey Points Command

Survey points are a collection of elevation points with x-, y-, and associated z-values. These points generally represent a series of points showing the high and low extremes in the terrain that define topographic features such as streams, levees, ridges, and other phenomena.

In CivilGEO's software, the Add Survey Points command is used to add survey point data as a layer to the Map View. This command also allows the user to add new points to an existing point layer as well as filter out duplicate points.

Follow the steps below to use the Add Survey Points command:

  1. From the Map Data ribbon menu, select the Add Survey Points command.
    Add Survey Points command
  2. The Select Survey Points File dialog box will be displayed. Now, from the folder containing the supported survey points file, select the desired file type and then click the [Open] button.
    Select Survey Points File dialog box
  3. The Add Survey Points dialog box will be displayed showing the content details of the selected survey points file.
    Add Survey Points dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Add Survey Points command and interact with the above dialog box.

Point Layer Details

This section allows the user to create a new point layer in the Map Data Layers panel. New Points is the default point layer name, which can be changed by the user. The user can also add points to the existing point layer by using the Add points to existing point layer option. Note that the Add points to existing point layer option is only enabled when the user has already defined the point layer.

Point Layer Details section

Point File Format Specifications

This section is used to define the specifications of the point file to be imported.

Point File Format Specifications section

The Point file format dropdown combo box is used to select the file format into which the survey points data are to be imported. The file needs to be in an ASCII text file format, with either commas, tabs, or spaces delineating the data fields contained within each row of the survey points file.

Point file format dropdown combo box

The software will attempt to determine the selected survey points file format based on the file extension. However, the user can change the file format to be used after the file is selected.

For reference, Easting = X coordinate and Northing = Y coordinate.

The following survey points file formats are supported:

  • ASC (ASCII text file)
  • CSV (Comma-Separated Variables)
  • ENZ (Easting, Northing, Elevation)
  • ENZD (Easting, Northing, Elevation, Description)
  • LLZ (Lat-Long, Elevation)
  • LLZD (Lat-Long, Elevation, Description)
  • NEZ (Northing, Easting, Elevation)
  • NEZD (Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description)
  • PENZ (Point, Easting, Northing, Elevation)
  • PENZD (Point, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Description)
  • PLLZD (Point, Lat-Long, Elevation, Description)
  • PNEZ (Point, Northing, Easting, Elevation)
  • PNEZD (Point, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description)
  • PTS (XYZ Survey Alignment Data)
  • PNT (XYZ Survey Alignment Data)

However, changing the file format also changes the column header(s) of the point file format table. For example, changing the file format from ENZ (Easting, Northing, Elevation) to PENZD (Point, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Description) will display the additional column header(s) in the table as shown below.

Point file format selection

The Lat-Long order dropdown combo box is used to select the order of latitude (Lat) and longitude (Long) values into which the survey points data are to be imported.

Note that by default, this dropdown combo box is disabled. To enable this dropdown combo box, select one of the following options from the Point file format dropdown combo box:

  • LLZ (Lat-Long, Elevation)
  • LLZD (Lat-Long, Elevation, Description)
  • PLLZD (Point, Lat-Long, Elevation, Description)

The following options are available in the Lat-Long order dropdown combo box:

  • Latitude - Longitude (default)
  • Longitude - Latitude
    Lat-Long order dropdown combo box

The Lat-Long degree format dropdown combo box is used to select the display format for latitude and longitude coordinates. It determines how degrees, minutes, and seconds will be displayed when working with geographical coordinates.

Note that by default, this dropdown combo box is disabled. To enable this dropdown combo box, select one of the following options from the Point file format dropdown combo box:

  • LLZ (Lat-Long, Elevation)
  • LLZD (Lat-Long, Elevation, Description)
  • PLLZD (Point, Lat-Long, Elevation, Description)

The following options are available in the Lat-Long degree format dropdown combo box:

  • DDDMMSS.S (default)
  • DDDMM.SS
  • DDD.MMSS
  • DDD.MM.SS
    Lat-Long degree format dropdown combo box

Elevation Data Adjustment

This section allows the user to adjust the survey points data elevation values if the elevation data is in a different unit system or needs to have a datum adjustment.

Elevation Data Adjustment section


The user can select the desired elevation cells from the Point File Format Specifications data table and then edit the values using one of the following options:

  • No change: This radio button option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the elevation values remain unchanged.
  • Convert feet to meters: This radio button option allows the user to convert the elevation values from feet to meters. If this option is selected, the user must click the [Apply] button to update the new values in the cells. The changes will be immediately reflected in the Elevation column of the table in the Point File Format Specifications section.
  • Datum adjustment: This radio button entry allows the user to add a constant value to the existing elevation values. If this option is selected, an offset value should be entered. Then the user must click the [Apply] button to update the new values in the cells. The new value will be the sum of the previous value and a constant value provided by the user. The changes will be immediately reflected in the Elevation column of the table in the Point File Format Specifications section.

Duplicate Point Removal

In this section, the Ignore duplicate points, tolerance checkbox option is used to ignore/filter out the duplicate points from the survey file based upon the distance between points. The user can enter the desired distance/tolerance value (in feet) in the entry field next to this option by which the duplicate points are to be removed from the survey file. Alternatively, the user can check the Load as Point Cloud (LIDAR) checkbox option to import the survey points as a point cloud.

Duplicate Point Removal section

Importing Survey Points

After specifying all the required importing details, click the [Import] button. The software will then add the survey points to the Map View and load the point file as a new group in the Map Data Layers panel.

Platform & GIS Tools › Terrain & Elevation Data

Grid Calculator Command

The Grid Calculator command allows the users to perform algebraic computations on raster grids based on existing raster pixel values. The user can perform mathematical operations on each cell in a raster. This can be useful for converting and manipulating raster grids. For example, the user may want to see the difference in water surface elevations in the form of an elevation difference grid by subtracting two elevation grids from each other. Or a user may want to generate a "custom" flood hazard map by multiplying the depth raster grid with another factor.

Note that the raster grids must be loaded into the software before performing any operations on them.

Follow the steps below to use the Grid Calculator command:

  1. From the Terrain ribbon menu, select the Grid Calculator command.Select the Grid Calculator command
  2. The Grid Calculator dialog box will be displayed.Grid Calculator dialog box

The below sections describe how to perform algebraic computations on raster grids and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Raster Grids

The Grid Layers dropdown combo box lists all the loaded raster grids that can be used. To add a raster grid to the Grid Calculator Expression box, click the [Add Layer] button.

Grid Layers dropdown combo box

Available Grid Operators

This section contains all the available operators.

Available operators


The following operators are available:

  • Mathematical (+, –, *, /, sqrt)
  • Trigonometric (sin, cos, tan, asin, acos, atan)
  • Comparison (<, >, =, <=, >=, ≠)
  • Logarithmic (log, log 10)
  • Logical (And, Or)

Click the appropriate button to add an operator to the Grid Calculator Expression box.

Defining Grid Calculator Expression

The Grid Calculator Expression section is used to define the grid calculator expression.

Grid Calculator Expression section

The user can add a raster grid to the Grid Calculator Expression box and then use the operators from the Available Grid Operators section to either construct calculation expressions or type them into the box.

Defining Raster Grid Limits

The Output Grid Limits section allows the user to define the extent of the output raster grid. The user can choose to operate only on a portion of a source raster grid or use the entire extent of the source raster grid.

Output Grid Limits section


The following options are available to define the extents of the output raster grid:

  • Grid source extents: On selecting this option, the output raster grid will have the same extents as the source raster grid.
  • User-defined limits: This option allows the user to draw rectangular regions on the Map View in order to define the extent of the output raster grid and make the output grid smaller and easier to work with. Click the [Pick] button to define the extent of the output raster grid. On clicking the [Pick] button, the Grid Calculator dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next. The user can then click and drag the mouse to define the rectangular region limits of the output raster grid. Upon releasing the mouse button, the user will be returned to the dialog box and a rectangular box will be created on the source raster grid representing the user-defined region.
  • Clipping polygons: This option allows the user to select one or more polygons to define the extent of the output raster grid. Click the [Pick] button to select the polygon region from the Map View. The Grid Calculator dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next. Select the clipping polygons on the Map View. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The user will be returned to the dialog box. The area underneath the selected polygons will be factored in by the software as it processes the raster grid. Additionally, the user can check the Crop terrain to polygon boundary checkbox to clip the source raster grid to the boundary of the selected polygons.

Defining Raster Grid Specifications

The Output Grid Specifications section is used to define the specifications for the output raster grid.

Output Grid Specifications section

Click the […] button next to the Grid file entry to specify the file name and directory location to save the output raster grid file.

By default, the Load grid as map layer checkbox option is checked to load the output raster grid as a layer in the Map Data Layers panel. Click the pencil icon to rename the layer.

The user can select the CRS to be used for the output raster grid from the Grid CRS dropdown combo box. If there is only one CRS in the project, the software automatically selects it.

The user can check the Overwrite existing grid layer checkbox option to automatically overwrite an existing raster layer (if one exists) with the revised raster layer. By default, this option is unchecked.

Performing Calculations on Raster Grids

After the options have been defined, click the [Generate] button. The software will perform calculations on the selected raster grids based on the expression defined in the Grid Calculator Expression box. An output raster grid file will be created at the specified location after the computations are finished. If the Load grid as map layer checkbox was left checked, the newly created raster grid would be added in the Map Data Layers panel.

Worked-out Examples

The below sections describe various scenarios in which the grid calculator can be useful.

Convert Elevation Values from Meters to Feet

To change a raster in meters to a raster in feet, the user can use the conversion factor (3.28084) for meters to feet and create the following expression in the Grid Calculator Expression box:

"USGS DEM Meters" * 3.28084

By clicking the [Generate] button, the software will create a new raster with elevations in feet.

Using a mask

Sometimes the user might want to mask out parts of a raster. For example, consider a raster grid with elevations varying from sea level to mountain peaks. If the user is only interested in the elevation above sea level, the grid calculator can be used to create a mask, which can then be applied to the raster in a single step.

The expression will be as follows:

("USGS DEM Meters" >= 0) * "USGS DEM Meters"

The first part of the expression in parentheses sets the value of every cell greater than or equal to zero to 1 with all other cell values set to 0. This creates the mask on the fly. The raster (USGS DEM Meters) is then multiplied by the mask values. This sets every cell with an elevation less than zero to zero.

On clicking the [Generate] button, the software will create a new raster with the mask applied.

Creating Depth Raster Grid

Depth raster grids are used to depict the depth of the river's inundation. Grid calculator can be used to create depth raster grids by subtracting the source elevation raster grid from the water surface elevation (WSEL) raster grid. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to create a water surface elevation raster grid in HEC-RAS.

Once the source elevation and water surface elevation raster grids are available, the user can create the following expression in the Grid Calculator Expression box:

("WSEL 100yr" – "Elev DEM Feet")

On clicking the [Generate] button, the software will create a depth raster grid. Depth raster grids can be created for a variety of flood events illustrating the changing flood depths throughout the selected flood extent for each event.

Platform & GIS Tools › Terrain & Elevation Data

Adjust Elevations Command

The Adjust Elevations command is used to set or adjust elevations for a portion of an existing elevation grid. The user can interactively draw (or select) polygons on the Map View and then define the corresponding elevation value, which can then be merged with the source elevation grid in order to create a revised elevation grid. In addition, this command allows the user to specify the coordinate reference system (CRS) of the final revised elevation grid. The command facilitates creating a more accurate representation of a model’s geometry, for example by setting a lake or reservoir bottom elevation.

Follow the steps below to use the Adjust Elevations command:

  1. From the Terrain ribbon menu, select the Adjust Elevations command.
    Adjust Elevations command
  2. The Adjust Elevations dialog box will be displayed.
    Adjust Elevations dialog box

The following sections describe the Adjust Elevations command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Elevation Grid

The Elevation Grid section allows the user to select the elevation grid layer that is to be revised.

From the Select elevation grid layer dropdown combo box, select the source elevation grid. The dropdown combo box will list all the elevation layers that are currently used in the project.

Select elevation grid layer dropdown combo box

Defining Areas to Adjust Elevations

The Define Areas to Adjust Elevations section allows the user to define the portions of the existing elevation grid where the elevation value needs to be adjusted. The user can directly draw a polygon on the Map View or select existing closed polylines or polygons from the Map View to define the areas where elevation values will be adjusted.

When ready to draw a polygon on the Map View, click the [Draw] button. Use the Create curvilinear polygon checkbox option to make a smooth curvilinear boundary for the drawn polygon.

[Draw] button

The Adjust Elevations dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar informing the user what to do next. Draw a polygon on the Map View, and then right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The Adjust Elevations dialog box will be redisplayed.

Alternatively, click the [Pick] button and then select polygons or closed polylines from the Map View. Then, right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Adjust Elevations dialog box will be redisplayed.

Apply Elevation Change to Polygon Areas

This section controls the elevation adjustment to be applied to the drawn or selected polygon areas. Three options are provided for adjusting the elevation, including:

  • Set elevation: This option defines a specific elevation for the selected region.
  • Add elevation offset: This option raises or lowers the elevation of the selected region by the specified value.
  • Multiply with scale factor: This option modifies the elevation by multiplying it by the defined scaling factor.
Apply Elevation Change to Polygon Areas section

Terrain Slope Intersect

The Cut slope (V:H) and Fill slope (V:H) checkbox fields allow the user to match the elevation of the newly formed terrain with an existing terrain surface so that the newly formed terrain does not start or end gradually. By default, the Cut slope (V:H) and Fill slope (V:H) ratios are set to 1:1, which corresponds to a 1 ft (m) rise/down to a 1 ft (m) run. A ratio of 1:0 represents a vertical wall. However, many times a flatter slope is required, such as 1:2 or 1:3 for a smoother transition between terrains.

Terrain Slope Intersect section

If the Cut slope (V:H) or Fill slope (V:H) checkbox entries are left unchecked, then the software will create a vertical face to intersect with the existing terrain and will not compute a daylight line to intersect with the ground terrain.

Revised Elevation Grid

This section is used to define the specifications of the revised elevation grid.

Click the […] browse button for the Elevation grid file entry to specify the file name and directory location to save the revised elevation grid file.

By default, the Load elevation grid as map layer checkbox option is checked to load the revised elevation grid as a layer in the Map Data Layers panel. Click the pencil icon to rename the layer.

The user can select the CRS to be used for the revised elevation grid. By default, the software uses the project CRS.

The Overwrite existing elevation layer checkbox option is checked by default to automatically overwrite an existing elevation layer (if one exists) with the revised elevation grid layer.

After the elevation grid options have been defined, click the [Adjust] button and the software will generate the revised elevation grid file and optionally load the DEM file as a layer in the Map Data Layers panel.

Revised Elevation Grid section
Platform & GIS Tools › Terrain & Elevation Data

Generate Contours Command

The Generate Contours command creates equally spaced contour lines from loaded elevation grid data. The user can specify major and minor contour line spacing, line weight, line colors, and more. Elevation contours help the user decide where to place cross sections on the Map View to capture the flow area most effectively as the flow travels downstream.

Follow the steps below to generate contours:

  1. From the Terrain ribbon menu, select the Generate Contours command.
    Generate-Contours-Command-image-1.png
  2. The Generate Contours dialog box will be displayed.
    Generate-Contours-Command-image-2.png

The following sections describe the Generate Contours command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

General Specifications

This section describes how to save the generated contours shapefiles and controls the selection of DEMs for contour generation from the available loaded elevation grids.

Click the […] button from the Shapefile directory entry to specify the directory location to store the generated contour shapefiles.

By default, the Layer group name is Contours and it can be changed by the user.

From the Terrain surface entry, select the DEM layer from which the contours are to be generated.

The Remove noisy contours checkbox allows the software to remove the contour layers whose elevation lies outside the range specified by the user.

The Overwriting existing contours checkbox allows the software to overwrite an existing contour layer with the same layer name.

The Thin contours (remove redundant vertices) checkbox removes redundant vertices that do not contribute to the shape of the generated contour polylines.

The Smooth contours option controls whether extra vertices are added along the contour polyline to improve their appearance.

Contour Generation Boundary Limits

The user can define the rectangular extents along which the contours are to be generated. The following options are available for defining the rectangular extents of the elevation grid:

  • Current screen limits: The software will use the Map View screen display as the boundary limit for generating contours.
  • User-defined limits: The user can draw a rectangle to define the contour limits. Click the [Pick] button to define the contour limits. The dialog box will temporarily disappear, and an information message will be displayed on the status line. Click and drag a rectangular region to define the limits. After releasing the mouse, the user will be returned to the dialog box. A layer will be created with a rectangular box to represent the user-defined selected region.
  • Clipping polygons: The user can select one or more polygons from the Map View to define the contour limits. Click the [Pick] button to select the polygon region. The dialog box will temporarily disappear, and an information message will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next. Select the clipping polygons on the Map View. After selecting the polygons, the user is immediately returned to the dialog box. The software then displays the total number of selected polygons in the dialog box. In addition, the user can check the Crop contours to polygon boundary checkbox to crop contours to the selected polygon boundary.
  • Contour surface limits: The contours will have the same extent as the elevation grid.
  • Model extents: If a project model has been defined, this option will create a bounding rectangular region to correspond to the extents of the defined model, plus an additional buffer boundary.

Contour Processing Specifications

The Generated contours CRS dropdown combo box allows the user to select the Coordinate Reference System (CRS) that the generated contours will be created with. By default, the software selects the project’s CRS. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about coordinate reference systems.

Minor Contours

This section allows the user to create minor contours by specifying layer name, interval, width, and color. The Minor Contours checkbox is enabled by default.

Generate-Contours-Command-image-3.png
  • Layer name: If the user chooses to create minor contours, then by default, the layer name will be shown as Minor Contours in the Layer name entry and the same name will be displayed in the Map Data Layers panel.
  • Interval: Specify the distance between minor contours.
  • Width: Specify the line weight of the minor contours.
  • Color: Specify the line color of the minor contours.

Major Contours

This section allows the user to create major contours by specifying layer name, interval, width, and color.

Generate-Contours-Command-image-4.png
  • Layer name: By default, the layer name will be shown as Major Contours in the Layer name entry and the same name will be displayed in the Map Data Layers panel.
  • Interval: Specify the distance between major contours. The value entered here is divisible by the minor interval.
  • Width: Specify the line weight of the major contours.
  • Color: Specify the line color of the major contours.

Contours Elevation Limits

This section allows the user to define elevation limits for generating contours. For example, the user may not be interested in generating contours above the river valley in very steep terrain. This option limits the contours that are generated, thereby speeding up the process and making the size of the project file smaller.

Generate-Contours-Command-image-5.png
  • Max elevation: The user can manually specify the maximum elevation limits for generating contours.
  • Min elevation: The user can manually specify the minimum elevation limits for generating contours.
  • Elevation range: This option shows the range of elevation. The [Reset] button allows the user to reset the contour elevation limits back to the extent of the elevation data.

After the contour options have been defined, click the [Generate] button and the software will generate the contours.

From the Map Data Layers panel, expand the Contours group to see the details of the generated contours. The user can also export the contours to AutoCAD or MicroStation by right-clicking on a contour layer and then selecting the Export to CAD command from the displayed context menu.

Generate-Contours-Command-image-6.png
Platform & GIS Tools › Terrain & Elevation Data

Merge DEMs Command

The Merge DEMs command is used to merge multiple elevation grids (sometimes called rasters, DEMs or Digital Elevation Models) into a single elevation grid. The user can prioritize and define preference for use of different elevation grids so that higher resolution (smaller cell size) elevation grids, for example, are used where possible and lower resolution (larger cell size) elevation grids are used to fill-in areas where high resolution elevation data is lacking. In addition, this command allows the user to specify the coordinate reference system (CRS) and grid resolution of the final merged elevation grid.

This command should not be used to merge elevation grids that have different elevation units (i.e., intermixing feet and meter elevations). The Convert Elevations command should be used to create compatible elevation raster grids and to ensure consistency in elevation units before use of the Merge DEMs command.

Follow the steps below to display the Merge DEMs command:

  1. From the Terrain ribbon menu, select the Merge DEMs command.
    Merge DEMs Terrain ribbon menu command
  2. The Merge DEMs dialog box will be displayed.
    Merge DEMs Dialog Box

The following sections describe the Merge DEMs command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Select DEMs to Merge

This section controls the selection of elevation grids to be used for merging into a single elevation grid.

From the Available DEM layers dropdown combo box, select the elevation grids, one at a time, that need to be merged and click the [Add] button. The selected elevation grid will be added to the table listing the elevation grids to be merged.

To change the merge order of the listed elevation grids, select the appropriate row and right-click to display a context menu. Then, select the Move Layer Up or Move Layer Down context menu command to change the merge order of the highlighted elevation grid. Layers that are higher in the listing have precedence over layers that appear lower in the list.

Move added DEM Layers

Merge DEM Limits

The elevation grid that is constructed using this command is a rectangular grid. The user can define the rectangular extents of the merged elevation grid using the criteria described below.

Merged DEM Limits section

The following options are available to define the rectangular extents of the merged elevation grid:

  • DEM source extents: The merged elevation grid will have the same extents as the original source data.
  • User-defined limits: The user can draw the rectangular extents of the merged elevation grid to correspond to a specific area defined by the user. This can make the merged elevation grid smaller and easier to work with. Click the [Pick] button to define the limits of the terrain surface. The dialog box will temporarily disappear, and an information message will be displayed on the status line. Click and drag a rectangular region to define the limits of the merged elevation grid. After releasing the mouse, the user will be returned to the dialog box. A layer will be created with a rectangular box to represent the user-defined selected region.
  • Clipping polygons: The user can select polygon shape regions to define the processing area for the merged DEM. Click the [Pick] button. The dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next. Select the clipping polygons on the Map View and press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The user will be returned to the dialog box. The area underneath selected clipping polygons will be considered by the software in terms of processing the terrain. In addition, the user can check the Crop terrain to polygon boundary checkbox to crop the merged terrain to the selected polygon boundary.
  • Model extents: If a project model has been defined, this option will create a bounding rectangular region to correspond to the extents of the defined model, plus an additional buffer boundary.

Fill Small Gaps Between Grids

This section allows the user to fill-in the small gaps between adjacent elevation grids by interpolating the elevations from the edge cells of each grid. By default, the Fill Small Gaps Between Grids checkbox is checked.

Fill Small Gaps Between Grids section

From the Maximum search distance entry field, the user can define the maximum search radius that will be used for gap filling. The spin control button can be used to define a threshold value between 1 to 50 cells. A gap that is farther away from any cell than this threshold value will remain unfilled.

Overlapping Cells Mosaic Merging

This section allows the user to mosaic merge multiple terrain surface DEMs together. Select the Overlapping Cells Mosaic Merging checkbox to enable this section.

Overlapping Cells Mosaic Merging panel

The user can select from two available options to define how the two surfaces should be merged when there is an overlapping space between terrain surfaces that are to be merged.

The following options are provided for the mosaic merge operation:

  • Use minimum elevation – On selecting this option, the merged cell elevation for the overlapping areas will be the minimum elevation contained in the original terrain surfaces.
  • Use maximum elevation – On selecting this option, the merged cell elevation for the overlapping areas will be the maximum elevation contained in the original terrain surfaces.

DEM Processing Specifications

This section is used to define the specifications for the merged elevation grid.

Overlapping Cells Mosaic Merging section

Click the […] button for the Merged DEM file entry to specify the file name and directory location for purposes of saving the merged elevation grid file.

By default, the Load DEM as map layer checkbox option is checked to load the merged elevation grid as a layer in the Map Data Layers panel. Click the pencil icon to rename the layer.

The user can select the CRS to be used for the merged elevation grid. If there is only one CRS in the project, the software automatically selects it.

From the DEM cell size entry, the user can manually define the elevation grid cell size. The finer the grid resolution (or smaller the cell size) defined, the greater the detail that can be represented in the merged elevation grid. However, there is no benefit to selecting a cell size smaller than the smallest cell size contained within the elevation grids to be merged. The software will automatically select the smallest cell size.

Based on the defined grid cell size and the extent of the merged DEM, the Grid resolution details panel displays the total number of cells and the number of columns and rows that the merged DEM file will contain.

Different Coordinate Reference Systems

The Merge DEMs command supports merging DEMs that have different coordinate reference systems (CRS). For example, the project might be in a State Plane CRS in US Survey Foot and the DEMs being merged might be in a geographic (lat-long) or metric CRS. The software will perform the necessary reprojections to align the selected DEMs so that they can be merged together.

Merging the Elevation Grids

After the options have been defined, click the [Merge] button and the software will merge the elevation grids into a new elevation grid file.

After merging the DEM layer, the software will then place and identify the merged DEM layer as a new group in the Map Data Layers panel.

DEM Processing Specifications

Clicking on the […] button adjacent to the Merged DEM layer will display the Elevation Grid Properties dialog box, allowing the user to define the color and style of the elevation grids.

Map Data Layers panel

To learn more about the the Elevation Grid Properties dialog box, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Platform & GIS Tools › Terrain & Elevation Data

Working with LIDAR

LiDAR (which stands for Light Detection and Ranging), sometimes called laser scanning or 3D scanning, is a remote sensing technology that uses a pulsed laser to generate a 3D spatial representation of the surveyed environment in the form of highly accurate 3D point cloud data.

unknown node

Lidar data is stored in one or more LAS or LAZ (compressed form of the LAS) files—the industry-standard binary format for storing lidar data. Lidar data files can be quite large, containing billions of 3D points. These massive data files can affect the processing speed and responsiveness of software that loads it.

Therefore, sometimes as per the project’s requirements, lidar data needs to be filtered to reduce the size of the overall data. CivilGEO’s software can perform this filtering process using the Process LIDAR command. In addition, this command provides many other functions, including point cloud classification filtering, extraction of buildings and other structures, terrain surface generation, and much more. Some of the command’s functions include:

  • Processing of point cloud files
  • Advanced filtering options to efficiently remove erroneous or unneeded points
  • Merging multiple LIDAR data sets
  • Trimming LIDAR data
  • Thinning LIDAR data

To use the Process LIDAR command, the user must have already loaded the LIDAR data into the project. Refer to this article on how to load a LIDAR elevation layer.

Follow the steps below to process the LIDAR data:

  1. From the Terrain ribbon menu, select the Process LIDAR command.
    Process LIDAR Terrain ribbon menu command
  2. The Process LIDAR dialog box will be displayed.
    Process LIDAR dialog box

The following sections describe the Process LIDAR command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Select LIDAR Layer to Process

This section controls the selection of the LIDAR layer to be processed from loaded LIDAR layers.

From the Existing LIDAR layer entry, select the LIDAR elevation layer that needs to be processed. Upon selecting the LIDAR elevation layer, the software will display the number of points contained in the LIDAR layer as well as the layer’s corresponding coordinate reference system (CRS).

Merge LIDAR Data

This section allows the user to select additional LIDAR layers to include and merge into the selected LIDAR layer, and then export into the final resultant LIDAR file.

Trim LIDAR Data

This section allows the user to trim down the extents of the exported LIDAR file. There are multiple methods for defining the data extents from the Map View.

  • Selected LIDAR data extents: This default option does not trim the extents of the exported LIDAR file.
  • User-defined limits: This option allows the user to define the limits on the Map View for trimming the exported LIDAR file. Click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear. An informational prompt will be displayed on the status line explaining how to define the rectangular clipping region. Click and drag a rectangular region to define the limits of the exported LIDAR data. After releasing the mouse button, the user will be returned to the dialog box. A layer will be created with a rectangular box representing the user-defined region.
  • Clipping polygons: This option allows the user can select polygon shape regions for trimming the exported LIDAR file. Click the [Pick] button. The Process LIDAR dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next. Select the clipping polygons on the Map View and press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The user will be returned to the dialog box. The area underneath the selected clipping polygons will be considered by the software for processing the terrain.
  • Model extents: If a project model has been defined, such as a HEC-RAS model, this option will create a bounding rectangular region to the extents of the defined model, plus an additional buffer around this region.

Filter LIDAR Data

This section is used to filter the LIDAR data based upon each LIDAR’s point classification. By default, the filter is set to filter everything out except for Ground (i.e., Bare Earth). The American Society for Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing (ASPRS) has defined a list of classification codes for LIDAR. Example classes include:

  • Ground
  • Vegetation (low, medium and high)
  • Buildings
  • Water
  • Unassigned

A point can be classified into more than one category.

Thin LIDAR Data

This section is used for thinning large LIDAR data sets.

Point clouds and LIDAR data sets can contain billions and billions of points. Many of the points are redundant and do not add any additional definition to the surface or object that they are describing. Also, loading large data sets can severely slow down the computer as it labors to load the data into memory. These thinning options function to remove redundant LIDAR points.

Processed LIDAR Specifications

This section describes how to save LIDAR data after it has been processed.

Click the […] button for the Processed LIDAR file entry to specify the directory location to save the processed LIDAR file.

Processing the LIDAR Data

After the options have been defined, click the [OK] button, and the software will process the LIDAR data and save it as a new LIDAR file.

In addition, after the LIDAR data has been processed, the software can then load this LIDAR data as a new layer in the Map Data Layers panel.

Display Options for LIDAR Data

The user can change the visualization of the lidar data on the Map View by styling the point cloud objects of the LiDAR 3D point cloud. To view or modify the display properties of the LiDAR data, follow these steps:

  1. In the Map Data Layers panel, click on the […] button next to the LiDAR data layer.
    Current Layer properties
  2. The LIDAR Properties dialog box is displayed.
    LIDAR Properties dialog box
  3. The General Information section contains read-only information about the location of the lidar data file, the minimum and maximum elevation, and the total number of points in the point cloud.
  4. The Default Point Stylization section defines the shape and size of the point cloud object.
    • Select the shape (Circle or Square) of the point cloud object from the Symbol drop-down list.
    • Select the size of the point cloud object using the Size spin control. The size can range from 1 to 11 units.
      Default Point Stylization panel
  5. The color scheme for the lidar 3D point cloud can be defined using either the Single Color section or the Graduated Color Enabling one section disables the other.
  6. Enable the Single Color section to apply a single color to all points in the cloud.
    • Select the preferred color square for the point cloud object from the Symbol color drop-down color palette.
      Single Color panel
  7. Enable the Graduated Color section to assign colors to point cloud objects based on their Z (elevation) value.
    • Select the preferred color ramp for point cloud objects from the Elevation color ramp drop-down list.
    • In the Color ramp min elev and Color ramp max elev input fields, enter the minimum and maximum Z values for the color ramp.
    • Define the transparency value of point cloud objects using the bar slider and spin control in the Apply Transparency section. By default, this section is enabled. If disabled, all the points in the cloud will have zero transparency.
      Graduated Color panel
  8. Once finished, click the [OK] button to apply the stylization of the point cloud objects to all the points in that cloud.
Platform & GIS Tools › Terrain & Elevation Data

ESRI TIN to Elevation Contour Shapefile

This article demonstrates how to convert an ESRI TIN file to an elevation contour shapefile using ArcGIS and the 3D Analyst and (optionally) Spatial Analyst extensions.

TIN versus Elevation Contours

A Triangulated Irregular Network (TIN) is a vector representation of a ground surface. An elevation contour dataset represents lines of equal elevation.

TIN-Surface-with-Contours.png

TIN surface with overlaid contours

While both formats store elevation data, TINs are less widely supported in GIS and CAD packages. They are also more computationally intensive to render, and large datasets can take a long time to draw on screen. In addition, ESRI TIN and Terrain Datasets are in proprietary format and are only supported by ESRI software products making it very difficult to share with other software applications.

Elevation contours on the other hand are faster to render, and are supported by a wider variety of software applications.

Conversion to Elevation Raster Preparation

While it is possible to convert a TIN directly to a contour shapefile, better results are achieved by first converting the TIN to an elevation raster (grid) and then creating contours from the elevation raster. Contours produced directly from a TIN file tend to contain topological errors and have rough jagged edges. Contours produced from an elevation raster tend to be smoother, more aesthetically pleasing, and contain fewer topological errors.

TIN-based-contours-versus-Grid-based-contours.gif

This article will utilize an elevation grid for creation of the contour shapefile. For instructions on how to create an elevation raster from a TIN, see this article.

Filtering of Elevation Grid (optional)

Before creating contours from the elevation raster, it is a good idea to first filter the input raster in order to remove any anomalous cells. This reduces the number of isolations (small, insignificant peaks) created by the contour tool.

Note: This tool requires the Spatial Analyst extension. If this extension is not available, continue on to the next step and use the unfiltered raster.

To enable the Spatial Analyst extension, follow these steps:

  1. Open ArcCatalog.
  2. From the ArcCatalog main menu, select Customize | Extensions to display the Extensions dialog box.
    01_Extensions-1.png
  3. From the displayed dialog box, check the Spatial Analyst option to enable the extension. Then, click the [Close] button.
    Enable3DAnalyst.png
  4. In ArcCatalog, click the Search button. This will open the Search panel.
    SearchButton-1.png
  5. In the displayed Search panel, select Tools, type filter in the search field, and then press Enter. The software will list the Filter (Spatial Analyst) tool in the search results.
    04_Search_Filter.png
  6. Click to blue tool name to open the Filter dialog box.
  7. In the Filter dialog box shown below, select the elevation raster file for the Input Raster field by clicking the browse button.
  8. In the Output Raster field, select a destination folder and file name using the browse button. The file extension determines the type of image that will be created. It is recommended to save the filtered image as an ERDAS Imagine (.img) file, as .img files do not have any file size or file name length limitations.
  9. In the Filter Type dropdown combo box, select the LOW option. High pass filtering enhances the visibility of edges and small features, whereas low pass filtering blends small features into the surrounding pixels.
  10. Check the Ignore NoData in calculations check box. Leaving this check box unchecked would include the NoData (empty) areas in the filter, causing distortions to the edge of the raster.
  11. Click the [OK] button to run the Filter tool.
    05_Filter_Dialog.png

Generating Contours

The next step is to generate the contours from the elevation raster file.

To generate the contours from the elevation raster, follow these steps:

  1. In ArcCatalog, click the Search button. This will open the Search panel.
    SearchButton-1.png
  2. In the displayed Search panel, select Tools, type contour in the search field, and then press Enter. The software will list the Contour (3D Analyst) tool in the search results.
    06_Search_Contour.png
  3. Click the blue tool name to open the Contour dialog box
  4. In the Contour dialog box shown below, select the previously filtered elevation raster file for the Input Raster field by clicking the browse button.
  5. In the Output Polyline Features field, select a destination folder and file name using the browse button.
  6. Enter 2 in the Contour Interval field. The contour interval is measured in the same units as the elevation raster. The contour interval determines how many units will be represented by each contour. In this example, each contour line represents 2 feet.
  7. In the Base Contour field, use the default value of 0.
  8. In the Z Factor field, use the default value of 1.
  9. Click the [OK] button to run the Contour tool.
    07_Contour_Dialog.png

When entering a file name for the Output Polyline Features field, the file extension determines what file format the contour polylines will be saved as. For example, entering "contours.shp" will save the contours as an ESRI shapefile. Shapefiles are more widely supported in other software applications. However, shapefiles have a 2 gigabyte file size limit.

The Base Contour field is used to optionally define a starting elevation for the contour lines. This allows you to limit the number of contours generated. For example, entering 200 will cause contour lines to be created at 200 ft, 202 ft, 204 ft, etc.

The Z Factor field is used to convert between different elevation units. For example, if the elevation raster units are in meters and you need the contours units in feet, you would enter a Z Factor of 3.28084 (i.e., 3.28084 feet = 1 meter). Conversely, if the elevation raster units are in meters and you need the contours units in meters, you would enter a Z Factor of 0.3048 (i.e., 0.3048 meter = 1 foot).

Simplifying Contours

The contours that were created in the previous process can contain spikes and other errors—especially in flat areas. To remove these errors, the simplify filter can be run on the contour lines.

To simplify the contours, follow these steps:

  1. In ArcCatalog, click the Search button. This will open the Search panel.
    SearchButton-1.png
  2. In the displayed Search panel, select Tools, type simplify line in the search field, and then press Enter. The software will list the Simplify Line (Cartography) tool in the search results.
    08_Search_SimplifyLine.png
  3. Click to blue tool name to open the Simplify Line dialog box
  4. In the Simplify Line dialog box shown below, select the previously created contour shapefile for the Input Features field by clicking the browse button.
  5. In the Output Feature Class field, select a destination folder and file name using the browse button. The same file cannot be used as the input file—make certain to define a different file name or file path.
  6. In the Simplification Filter dropdown combo box, select the POINT_REMOVE option. This option works by maintaining the essential shape of the lines and removing any unnecessary vertices.
  7. Enter 1 in the Maximum Allowable Offset field.
  8. Check the Check for topological errors and Resolve topological errors check boxes. These options check for and remove crossed lines, zero length lines, and other topological errors.
  9. Click the [OK] button to run the Simplify Line tool.
    SimplifyLine_Dialog.png

Depending on the size and complexity of the contour line data, this tool can take a few minutes or up to an hour to run.

There is no rule on what value to enter for the Maximum Allowable Offset field. Smaller values remove less vertices, but also retain more detail. Smaller values are generally used in steeper terrain areas. Larger values remove more vertices, but also simplify the lines more. Larger values are generally used in flatter terrain areas. Trial and error is used to determine an appropriate value to use. The Simplify Line tool can be run multiple times on the same dataset; each iteration overwrites the previous results. It is not necessary to run the Simplify Line tool on a fresh copy of the contour shapefile each time.

Check the Contour Results

Once the Simplify Lines tool has completed, open the simplified contour shapefile in ArcMap to check for any errors. The below image shows the computed contours overlaid on the elevation raster.

10_Contours.png
Platform & GIS Tools › Terrain & Elevation Data

Convert Elevations Command

The Convert Elevations command allows elevation grids (also known as digital elevation models, DEMs, and raster elevation grids) to be converted from one vertical unit of measure to another. For example, USGS elevation grids have horizontal units in feet but elevations commonly in meters. This command allows the user to quickly convert the elevations from meters to feet.

To use the Convert Elevations command, the user must have loaded the elevation layer into the project.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to load an elevation layer.

Follow the steps below to use the Convert Elevations command:

  1. From the Terrain ribbon menu, select the Convert Elevations command.
    Convert Elevations ribbon menu command
  2. The Convert Elevations dialog box will be displayed.
    Convert Elevations dialog box
  3. From the Elevation grid dropdown combo box, select the elevation layer that needs to be converted.
  4. In the Elevation Adjustment section:
    • Choose Scale metric (SI) units to US units radio button option to convert the elevation grid file from meters to feet.
    • Choose Scale US units to metric (SI) units radio button option to convert the elevation grid file from feet to meters.
    • Choose Multiply with scale factor radio button option to multiply the original elevation values in the DEM by a predefined scale factor entered in the entry field next to this option.
    • Choose Add elevation offset radio button option to add a predefined value to the original elevation values in the DEM. If this option is selected, an offset value should be entered.
  5. The changes in the elevation range will be reflected in the Elevation Range section.
  6. Click the […] button beside Converted DEM file to specify the file location, name, and format of the converted elevation grid to be stored.
  7. The Load DEM as map layer checkbox option allows the user to include the converted elevation grid as a new layer in the Map Data Layers panel. By default, this checkbox is checked.
  8. From the Converted DEM CRS dropdown combo box, select the CRS to be used for the converted elevation grid. Note that if there is only one CRS in the project, the software automatically selects it.
  9. Click the [Convert] button.
    Click the [Convert] button
  10. The software will create a new elevation grid file at the specified location and load the converted elevation grid file as a new layer in the Map Data Layers panel.
    Map Data Layers panel
Platform & GIS Tools › Terrain & Elevation Data

Importing MicroStation Terrain Surfaces

With so many civil engineering software applications available, each with their own proprietary database structures, data interoperability has become a major problem. Over time, engineering consultants and review agencies called upon the industry to develop a standard design data format that would allow quick and easy data exchange capability from one software application to another. In 2000, LandXML.org, led by an industry-driven consortium of partners, came forward to provide a non-proprietary data exchange standard called LandXML.

CivilGEO’s software utilizes LandXML to share data with many other civil engineering software programs, such as:

  • AutoCAD Civil 3D
  • Bentley MicroStation
  • Carlson Civil Suite
  • And others…

What is LandXML?

LandXML is a file format that has been developed as an industry standard for civil engineering, land planning, and surveying software. This open data file format is readable by various applications. Because of its non-proprietary nature, LandXML files can be easily imported and exported from one application to another, without relying on any specific vendor and their programs.

Using LandXML, you can transfer data from one application to another, archive the project data in a non-proprietary format, view, edit, and report data using web-based tools, as well as adjust the elevation of the data globally.

However, when you are exporting or importing data in the LandXML format, keep in mind that you won’t get data in a “ready to go” condition; you have to carefully incorporate drawing information and other features by taking reference from the original drawing. You must also make sure that the software version of LandXML is compatible while importing and exporting.

Importing MicroStation Surfaces using LandXML

When you are working on MicroStation, specifically OpenRoads, MX Roads, InRoads, and GEOPAK, you can import its surfaces into CivilGEO’s software using the LandXML format. Our software fully supports LandXML files and importing this format into the software is a quick and easy process. Importing MicroStation surface into the software is a two-step process: first exporting the surface into LandXML file format, and then importing it into the software.

Below are the steps described for importing various MicroStation Surfaces into the software.

Importing Terrain Surface from MX Roads

To import terrain surfaces from Bentley MX Roads, you must first export the surface to LandXML format. To export the data to a LandXML file, follow these steps:

  1. Open the project in MicroStation with the terrain surfaces you want to export.
  2. Select File > Export > LandXML… to export the LandXML file.

After exporting the terrain surface as a LandXML file, you can import it into CivilGEO’s software. Refer to this knowledge base article on how to import a LandXML terrain surface file into CivilGEO’s software.

Importing Terrain Surfaces from InRoads

To import terrain surfaces from Bentley InRoads, you must first export the surface to LandXML format. Make sure to model your road before exporting. Further, there are two types of design data that you can export from InRoads: Terrain Surface Data and Geometry Data. Also, there is no default setting for exporting surfaces to LandXML. You have to turn on the feature by following these steps:

  1. Go to the InRoads main menu, select Tools > Application Add-ins.
  2. From the drop-down list, ensure that XML Report Add-In is checked on.
  3. Click the [OK] button.

Then you can proceed to export design data according to your requirement.

Export Terrain Surface from InRoads

Follow these steps to export the terrain surface as a LandXML:

  1. From the InRoads main menu, select File > Translators > LandXML Translator. The LandXML dialog box will be displayed.
    Importing-MicroStation-Terrain-Surfaces-1.png
  2. In the LandXML dialog box, click on the Export Surface tab.
    Importing-MicroStation-Terrain-Surfaces-2.png
  3. In the Surfaces area, select the surfaces to be exported.
  4. According to your requirement, select the checkbox options for Include Triangles, Include Features, and Include Non Triangulated Features.
  5. Go to the Linear Units drop-down combo box and select US feet.
  6. From the State drop-down combo box, select proposed or existing to match the surface being exported.
  7. Click on Save As. The Save As dialog box will appear.
    Importing-MicroStation-Terrain-Surfaces-3.png
  8. Click on the Change… button and browse to the directory where file should be saved.
  9. Fill the relevant details in appropriate fields for Name, File Name, and Description.
  10. Click the Save button.

After exporting the terrain surface as a LandXML file, you can import it into CivilGEO’s software. Refer to this knowledge base article on how to import a LandXML terrain surface file into CivilGEO’s software.

Export Geometry Data from InRoads

Follow these steps to export the geometry or alignment data as a LandXML file:

  1. From the InRoads main menu, select File > Translators > LandXML Translator. The LandXML dialog box will be displayed.
    MicroStation-Terrain-Surfaces-4..png
  2. In the LandXML dialog box, select the Export Alignment tab.
    Importing-MicroStation-Terrain-Surfaces-5.png
  3. In the Alignment Data area, select the Geometry Project you wish to export.
  4. In the Include field, fill in the desired alignment. You can select multiple alignments by using the target button. Please note that you must make the desired vertical alignment active before exporting the file.
  5. Select the radio button beside the LandXML version you want your data to be saved as.
  6. Check the box beside Include Active Children Only.
    • If checked, it will only include the vertical alignment that is active.
    • If unchecked, it will include data for all the vertical alignments under the selected horizontal alignment.
  7. Select the checkbox option Include All Cogo Points. If checked, it will include all the COGO points in the buffer area. If unchecked, it will only include the points associated with the selected alignment.
  8. From the Linear Units drop-down combo box, choose US Feet.
  9. From the State drop-down combo box, choose proposed or existing to match the alignment being exported.
  10. Click on Save As. This will display the Save As dialog box.
  11. Click on the Change… button and browse to the directory where the file should be saved.
  12. Fill the relevant details in appropriate fields for Name, File Name, and Description.
  13. Click the Save button.

After exporting the data as a LandXML file, you can import it into CivilGEO’s software. Refer to this knowledge base article on how to import a LandXML terrain surface file into CivilGEO’s software.

Importing Terrain Surfaces from GEOPAK

To import terrain surfaces from Bentley GEOPAK, you must first export the surface to LandXML format. You have the option to export design data of two types: DTM (terrain surface) and Geometry Data.

Export Terrain Surface (DTM) from GEOPAK

If your DTM is in a TIN format, you can directly export the DTM to a LandXML file. Otherwise, you will need to create a TIN before exporting.

Follow these steps:

  1. From the GEOPAK Applications menu, choose GEOPAK ROAD and select DTM Tools.
    Importing-MicroStation-Terrain-Surfaces-6.png
  2. From the menu bar, select DTM Menu.
    Importing-MicroStation-Terrain-Surfaces-7.png
  3. From the DTM menu, open the Utilities menu and select Export LandXML.
    Importing-MicroStation-Terrain-Surfaces-8.png
  4. The DTM Export LandXML dialog box will appear.
    Importing-MicroStation-Terrain-Surfaces-9.png
  5. In the dialog box, fill the relevant details in appropriate fields:
    • TIN File: Click the magnifying glass to browse to the TIN to be exported.
    • Project Name: Enter a Project Name and Description. It should be Complete 11-digit FPID#. Remember that this name will be further exported to the LandXML file.
    • Description: SR#
    • English Unit: Options are available for US Survey Feet and International feet.
    • LandXML File: Browse to the location and name the LandXML file to be exported. Make sure to follow the naming conventions: DTM_LandXML.xml
  1. Then click on Export.

After exporting the terrain surface as a LandXML file, you can import it into CivilGEO’s software. Refer to this knowledge base article on how to import a LandXML terrain surface file into CivilGEO’s software.

Export Geometry Data from GEOPAK

Follow these steps to export the geometry data as a LandXML file:

  1. Open the GEOPAK Coordinate Geometry dialog, then select File > Export > LandXML 1.0 Geometry.
    Importing-MicroStation-Terrain-Surfaces-10.png
  2. The Export LandXML 1.0 dialog box will appear.
    Importing-MicroStation-Terrain-Surfaces-11.png
  3. In the dialog box, fill in the relevant details:
    • Project Name: Complete 11-digit FPID#
    • Description: SR#
    • LandXML File: Make sure to follow the naming conventions: POINTS_LandXML.xml
    • Output Mode: Create
    • English Unit: US Survey Point
    • Point: Select All
  1. Then, click on Export.

After exporting the data as a LandXML file, you can import it into CivilGEO’s software. Refer to this knowledge base article on how to import a LandXML terrain surface file into CivilGEO’s software.

If you need any assistance on importing MicroStation Surfaces into our engineering software, feel free to contact our technical support team. They will be glad to assist you.

Platform & GIS Tools › Terrain & Elevation Data

How to Convert ESRI TIN to Elevation Raster?

This article and video demonstrates how to convert an ESRI TIN file to an elevation raster using ArcGIS and the 3D Analyst extension.

unknown node

TIN versus Elevation Raster

A Triangulated Irregular Network (TIN) is a vector representation of a ground surface. An elevation raster (grid) dataset represents the height of the ground using pixel values.

TIN-versus-Elevation-Raster.png

While both formats store elevation data, TINs are less widely supported in GIS and CAD packages. They are also more computationally intensive to render, and large datasets can take a long time to draw on screen. In addition, ESRI TIN and Terrain Datasets are in proprietary format and are only supported by ESRI software products making it very difficult to share with other software applications.

Elevation rasters on the other hand are faster to render, and are supported by a wider variety of software applications.

Prepare ArcGIS for Geoprocessing

To manipulate TIN elevation data, the 3D Analyst extension must be enabled.

To enable the 3D Analyst extension, follow these steps:

  1. Open ArcCatalog.
  2. From the ArcCatalog main menu, select Customize | Extensions to display the Extensions dialog box.
    01_Extensions.png
  3. From the displayed dialog box, check the 3D Analyst option to enable the extension. Then, click the [Close] button.
    02_Enable3DAnalyst.png

ArcGIS has two available modes for processing data:

  • Background Geoprocessing
  • Foreground Geoprocessing

Both modes will work for this tutorial; however they will affect what you see on screen. This tutorial will use foreground geoprocessing as it provides more diagnostic information in case of errors.

To enable foreground geoprocessing, follow these steps:

  1. From the main menu, select Geoprocessing | Geoprocessing Options to display the Geoprocessing Options dialog box.
    03_Geoprocessing.png
  2. From the displayed dialog box, uncheck the Enable Background Geoprocessing option. Then click the [OK] button.
    DisableBackgroundGeoprocessing.png

Validate TIN Data

Before converting the TIN to an elevation raster, it is important to check the integrity of the TIN data to determine if any modifications need to be made.

To validate the TIN data, follow these steps:

  1. Create a working directory, and copy the TIN file to this directory.
  2. In ArcCatalog, right click on the TIN file entry and select Properties from the displayed context menu. This will display the TIN Dataset Properties dialog box.
    05_TinProperties.png
  3. From the displayed dialog box, select the XY Coordinate System tab and note down the referenced coordinate system. Do the same for the Z Coordinate System tab.
    06_TinXYCoordinates-320x352-1.png 07_TinZCoordinates-320x352-1.png
    In this example, the XY coordinate system is NAD1983 Arizona State Plane Central FIPS 0202 International Feet. The Z (height or elevation) coordinate system is undefined. However, by comparing the TIN height against other elevation data in the area it is possible to determine the TIN elevation units. In this example the project is near Tucson, AZ and we were able to determine that the TIN elevation units are in feet.
  4. Open ArcMap. Click the Add Data button, and open the TIN file.
    AddDataButton.png
  5. Wait for the TIN to draw. This may take some time. When the TIN has finished drawing, you should see lines and shaded areas.
    09_TIN_ConcaveAreas.png

In the above illustration, the red and blue lines actually represent two different elevation point data sets that were used to construct the TIN. This elevation point data is used as the vertices of the TIN triangles. In the above illustration the TIN triangle edges are not visible. However, the triangle edges represent interpolated elevations and the shaded areas between the the triangle edges represent linear elevation (flat planar) surfaces. ArcGIS uses linear elevation surfaces to compute elevations for locations within the areas between the triangle edges.

Delineate TIN Elevation Data Area

In this example, the shaded areas extend beyond the extents of the elevation point data (i.e., TIN vertices). By default, ArcGIS constructs a convex hull boundary of the elevation data and constructs a TIN within it. However, as can be seen below, the TIN triangles (shaded areas) extend beyond the elevation point data. This will be corrected by delineating the TIN elevation data area.

10_EdgeInterpolation.png

To stop ArcGIS constructing TIN triangles beyond the extents of the elevation point data, we will define elevation area limits where there is valid elevation data. It is important to perform this step before converting the TIN to an elevation raster or otherwise the elevation raster will contain the same invalid elevation areas as the TIN.

To delineate the TIN elevation data area, follow these steps:

  1. In ArcCatalog, click the Search button. This will open the Search panel.
    SearchButton.png
  2. In the displayed Search panel, select Tools, type Delineate TIN data area in the search field, and then press Enter. The software will list the Delineate TIN Data Area tool in the search results.
    12_SearchWindow.png
  3. Click on the blue tool name to display the Delineate TIN Data Area dialog box.
  4. In the Delineate TIN Data Area dialog box shown below, select the TIN file for the Input TIN field by clicking the browse button.
  5. In the Maximum Edge Length field, enter an edge length of 1000.
  6. In the Method dropdown combox box, select the PERIMETER_ONLY option.
  7. Click the [OK] button to run the Delineate TIN Data Area tool on the selected TIN.
    09_DelineateTinDataArea.png

The Delineate TIN Data Area tool works by removing TIN triangles that have a triangle edge longer than the specified maximum edge length. The concept is that most valid elevation areas are made up of TIN triangles with short edge lengths, and invalid elevation areas have TIN triangles with longer edge lengths. Generally, invalid elevation areas occur on the perimeter of the TIN dataset due to the creation of the convex hull area. However, if there are large areas inside the TIN that do not contain elevation data (e.g., lakes and rivers), change the Method to All.

There is no rule on what value to enter for the Maximum Edge Length field. Smaller values will remove more triangles, but can also remove valid elevation areas from the TIN dataset. Larger values eliminate fewer triangles, but can leave invalid elevation areas in the TIN dataset. Trial and error is used to determine an appropriate value to use. The Delineate TIN Data Area tool can be run multiple times on the same dataset; each iteration overwrites the previous results. It is not necessary to run the Delineate TIN Data Area tool on a fresh copy of the TIN each time.

The TIN’s XY coordinate system determines the unit of measurement for the Maximum Edge Length field. For example, if the TIN is in NAD83 State Plane coordinates, the units will be in feet. If the TIN is in WGS84 UTM coordinates, the units will be in meters.

Delineate_100-320x277-1.png


TIN elevation data set after running Delineate TIN Data Area tool with different Maximum Edge Length values. From top to bottom, 100 ft, 1000 ft, and 5000 ft.

Delineate_1000-320x324-1.pngDelineate_5000-320x312-1.png

Convert TIN to Elevation Raster

Once you are satisfied with the delineated TIN elevation data area, it is ready to be converted to an elevation raster.

To convert the TIN to an elevation raster, follow these steps:

  1. In ArcCatalog, click the Search button. This will open the Search panel.
    SearchButton.png
  2. In the displayed Search panel, select Tools, type TIN to Raster in the search field, and then press Enter. The software will list the TIN to Raster tool in the search results.
    15_Search_TinToRaster.png
  3. Click on the blue tool name to display the TIN to Raster dialog box.
  4. In the TIN to Raster dialog box shown below, select the TIN file for the Input TIN field by clicking the browse button.
  5. In the Output Raster field, select a destination folder and file name using the browse button.
  6. In the Output Data Type dropdown combo box, select the FLOAT option.
  7. In the Method dropdown combo box, select the LINEAR option.
  8. In the Sampling Distance dropdown combo box, select the CELLSIZE option and enter the size that each raster pixel should represent (e.g., enter CELLSIZE 10 for 10x10 ft pixels).
  9. In the Z Factor field, use the default value of 1.
  10. Click the [OK] button to run the TIN to Raster tool.
    16_TinToRaster.png

When entering a file name for the output raster, the file extension determines what format the raster will be saved as. For example, entering "elevation.img" will save the elevation raster as an ERDAS Imagine elevation file. Leaving the extension blank will save the elevation raster as an ESRI binary grid elevation raster. In the above dialog box, the raster is saved as an .img file as ERDAS Imagine elevation raster files do not have file name or size limitations as do ESRI elevation grid files and GeoTIFF files.

Floating point (float) elevation rasters are the default raster type. Float elevation raster files store elevation information with a higher precision than integer elevation rasters as they store the elevation data with decimal information (e.g., 10.35 feet versus 10 feet). The downside of float elevation raster files is the extra precision makes the files larger than integer elevation raster files.

The Z Factor field is used to convert between different elevation units. For example, if the TIN’s elevation units are in meters and you need the elevation raster units in feet, you would enter a Z Factor of 3.28084 (i.e., 3.28084 feet = 1 meter). Conversely, if the TIN elevation units are in meters and you need the elevation raster units in meters, you would enter a Z Factor of 0.3048 (i.e., 0.3048 meter = 1 foot).

Check the Converted Raster Results

Once the TIN to Raster tool has completed, open the output raster in ArcMap to check for any errors. The below image shows the computed raster elevation results.

17_ElevationRaster.png

If you want to view a colorized version of the image, right click in the Table Of Contents on the image entry and select Properties from the displayed context menu. The Layer Properties dialog box will be displayed.

In the displayed dialog box, select the Symbology tab. Then, from the Color Ramp dropdown combo box, select an appropriate color ramp. To add a 3D effect to the displayed elevation raster, check the Use hillshade effect option. These settings do not alter the raster elevation data, only how it is displayed in ArcMap.

LayerPropertiesSymbology.png19_Hillshading.png
Platform & GIS Tools › Terrain & Elevation Data

Importing an ESRI TIN elevation dataset

A triangulated irregular network (TIN) is a digital data structure used to representation of a terrain surface. A TIN is a vector-based representation of the land surface, made up of irregularly distributed nodes and lines with three-dimensional coordinates (x, y, and z) that are arranged in a network of non-overlapping triangles. The vertices of each triangle are known data points (x,y) with values in the third dimension (z) taken from surveys, topographic maps, or digital elevations models (DEMs). The surface of each triangle has a slope, aspect, surface area, and continuous, interpolated elevation values. The selective inclusion of points within a TIN gives the triangles their irregular pattern and reduces the amount of data storage required relative to the regularly distributed points in a DEM.

TIN-Surface-with-Contours.png

Unfortunately, the ESRI TIN data file format is a proprietary, not documented, and there are no publicly available utilities for reading this data or converting this data to a different format. However, there are ways an ESRI TIN can be converted to so that it can be used in with our software.

Converting ESRI TIN to Grid

The elevation TIN can be converted to an elevation grid, which can then be used in our software. The ESRI 3D Analyst TIN to Raster geoprocessing tool can be used to create a raster elevation grid from a TIN, as described here.

Converting ESRI TIN to Contours

Elevation contours can be generated from the elevation TIN, and the elevation contours can then be used in our software. The ESRI 3D Analyst Contour geoprocessing tool can be used to create contours from a TIN, as described here.

Converting ESRI TIN to LandXML

While ESRI provides an import tool to import a LandXML TIN to an ESRI TIN, ESRI does not provide a reverse tool for this. However, numerous ESRI customers have requested this functionality.

Platform & GIS Tools › Terrain & Elevation Data

Generate Terrain Command

Digital terrain surfaces can be used for the following tasks:

  • Extracting cross section geometry
  • Computing 2D flow areas
  • Determining bank locations
  • Assigning levees and lateral structures
  • Constructing roadway crossings
  • Defining dam structures
  • Extracting storage area volumes
  • Generating flood maps
  • Watershed delineation
  • Detention and retention pond design
  • Stream realignments and restoration
  • Flow control structures

While the software can read in a variety of terrain surface types, it is sometimes necessary to construct a terrain surface from newly acquired elevation data. This section describes how to do that.

  1. From the Terrain ribbon menu, select the Generate Terrain command.
    Generate-Terrain-command-image-1.png
  2. The Generate Terrain dialog box will be displayed.Generate Terrain Command Dialog Box

The following sections describe the Generate Terrain command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Terrain Elevation Source

This section controls the selection of the elevation data source to be used for generating the terrain surface. If a map data layer was selected prior to selecting this command, the map data layer will be already selected within this section.

From the Terrain source entry, select the terrain source type to be used for generating the terrain surface. The following terrain source types are supported:

  • CAD Drawing
  • GIS Data
  • LandXML Data
  • LIDAR Elevation Data
  • Point Elevation Data
  • TIN Surface

Based upon the terrain source type selected, additional fields are provided for selecting the map data layer and attribute information.

Terrain Grid Limits

The terrain surface that is constructed using this command is a rectangular grid. The user can define the rectangular extents of the constructed terrain surface to an area of interest. The following options are available for defining the rectangular extents of the generated terrain surface:

  • Elevation source extents: The generated terrain surface grid will have the same extents as the original source data.

  • User-defined limits: The user can draw the rectangular extents of the generated terrain surface grid to limit to an area of interest. This has the effect of making the generated terrain surface file smaller and easier to work with. Click the [Pick] button to define the limits of the terrain surface. The dialog box will temporarily disappear, and an information message will be displayed on the status line. Click and drag a rectangular region to define the limits of the generated terrain surface. After releasing the mouse, the user will be returned to the dialog box. A layer will be created with a rectangular box to represent the user-defined selected region.

  • Clipping polygons: The user can select polygon shape regions to define the processing area for the generated terrain. Click the [Pick] The dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next. Select the clipping polygons on the Map View and press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The user will be returned to the dialog box. The area within the selected clipping polygons will be considered the terrain to be processed by the software. In addition, the user can check the Crop terrain to polygon boundary checkbox to crop the merged terrain to the selected polygon boundary.

  • Model extents: If a project model has been defined, this option will create a bounding rectangular region to the extents of the defined model, plus an additional buffer boundary.

By default, the Crop terrain surface to TIN boundary option is checked if the user selects TIN surface or LandXML Data from the Terrain source entry. The generated terrain surface grid will not extend outside of the TIN boundary.

Terrain Grid Specifications

This section is used to define the specifications for the generated terrain surface.

Click the […] button for the Terrain file entry to specify the file name and directory location to save the generated terrain grid file.

By default, the Load terrain as map layer checkbox option is checked to load the terrain file as a layer in the Map Data Layers panel. Click the pencil icon to rename the layer.

The user can select the CRS to be used for the generated terrain grid. If there is only one CRS being used in the project, the software automatically selects it.

By default, the Overwrite existing terrain layer checkbox option is checked. This option controls overwriting an existing terrain layer with the same layer name.

Terrain Grid Resolution

This section is used to define the terrain quality and the cell size for the terrain grid being generated.

From the Predefined terrain quality entry, choose the resolution option to be used. Elevation grid resolutions range from low to ultra-high quality for the terrain surface grid being generated.

From the User-defined cell size entry, the user can manually define the elevation grid cell size. The finer the grid resolution (or smaller the cell size) defined, the greater the detail that can be represented in the generated terrain surface. However, a smaller cell size results in more cells generated for the grid, creating a larger grid file and taking longer to generate.

After the options have been defined, click the [Generate] button and the software will create the elevation grid file and load the grid as a new layer in the Map Data Layers panel.

Platform & GIS Tools › Terrain & Elevation Data

Surface Terrain 3D Vertical Exaggeration

While in 3D view mode, the Vertical Exaggeration Scale allows the user to adjust the amount of vertical exaggeration of the terrain surface to show 3D surface relief on the Map View. Placing the cursor over the scale causes the scale to become more visible.

3D Vertical Exaggeration Scale
Platform & GIS Tools › Terrain & Elevation Data

AutoCAD Drawing as Terrain Elevation Data

AutoCAD drawing files can be used as a terrain elevation data source in the following formats:

  • Contour lines
  • Elevation points
  • AutoCAD Civil 3D terrain surfaces†
  • Bentley MicroStation terrain surfaces†
  • LandXML TIN terrain surfaces

The following sections describe these elevation data sources in detail. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to add an AutoCAD drawing file as a data layer.

Contour Lines for Cutting Cross Sections

AutoCAD drawing files containing contour lines can be used to determine cross section geometry when cutting cross sections. In the Extract Elevation Data section contained within many of the create cross section dialog boxes, the user can select the AutoCAD layers containing contours for use in extracting cross sections.

AutoCAD-Contour-Lines-for-Cutting-Cross-Sections

Contour Lines as Terrain Elevation Surface

AutoCAD drawing files containing contour lines can be used for generating a terrain surface for intersecting the computed water surface when determining the flood map and to determine cross section geometry when cutting cross sections. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to generate a terrain surface.

Elevation Point Data as Terrain Elevation Surface

AutoCAD drawing files containing elevation point data can be used for generating a terrain surface for intersecting the computed water surface when determining the flood map and to determine cross section geometry when cutting cross sections.

LandXML TIN Surfaces as Terrain Elevation Data

The software can use AutoCAD Civil 3D, Bentley MicroStation, and other TIN surfaces to determine cross section geometry when cutting cross sections. TIN surfaces are imported as LandXML files.

To load a LandXML terrain surface from within the Map Data Layers panel, right-click and select Add Layers from the displayed context menu. Then, select the corresponding LandXML TIN surface file to load. The TIN surface will be loaded and displayed as a layer.

Loaded-LandXML-TIN-Surface

The LandXML surface can be used to determine the cross section geometry when cutting cross sections. In the Extract Elevation Data section contained within many of the create cross section dialog boxes, the user can select the TIN surface for use in extracting cross sections.

Selected-LandXML-Surface-for-Cutting-Cross-Sections

Currently the software cannot intersect the computed water surface directly with a TIN terrain surface. The user needs to generate a terrain surface from the TIN surface in order to generate a flood map.

†Civil 3D and Bentley MicroStation terrain surfaces imported as LandXML terrain models

Platform & GIS Tools › External Data Sources

Soil Survey Data Download Command

The Soil Survey Data Download command allows the user to download hydrologic soil groups as shapefile data. To learn how to display the hydrologic soil groups on the Map View for different regions, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Follow the steps below to use the Soil Survey Data Download command:

  1. From the Map Data ribbon menu, click the Soil Maps dropdown menu and then choose the Soil Survey Data Download command. Soil Survey Data Download command
  2. The Soil Survey Data Download dialog box will be displayed. Soil Survey Data Download dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Soil Survey Data Download command and interact with the above dialog box.

General Specifications

This section allows the user to define the general specifications for the soil survey data.

General Specifications section

The following options are available in the General Specifications section:

  • Soil Survey Source This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the source of the soil survey data to download. The dropdown combo box contains the following entries:
    1. Soil Survey Data Africa
    2. Soil Survey Data Canada
    3. Soil Survey Data Ontario
    4. Soil Survey Data USA
    Soil Survey Source dropdown combo box
  • Layer group name This entry field defines the name of the layer group that will be created in the Map Data Layers panel. The default layer group name is Soil Survey Data, which is editable.
  • Shapefile path This entry field defines the file path and name of the shapefile to save the downloaded hydrological soil data. Click the […] browse button to select the directory location and shapefile name.

Soil Survey Data Boundary Limits

This section allows the user to define the boundary limits for downloading soil survey data. In addition, a detailed description of the selected soil survey source is also displayed in the Detailed Description pane.

Soil Survey Data Boundary Limits section

The following options are available in the Soil Survey data Boundary Limits section:

  • Current screen limits When this option is selected, the software will use the Map View screen display as a boundary limit.
  • User-defined limits When this option is selected, the user can draw a rectangle on the Map View representing user-defined limits for the soil survey data to be downloaded. Click the [Pick] button to define the soil survey data limits. The Soil Survey Data Download dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw a rectangular region on the Map View. Click and drag a rectangular region to define the limits. After releasing the mouse, the user will be returned to the Soil Survey Data Download dialog box. A layer will be created with a rectangular box to represent the user-defined selected region.
  • Model extents When this option is selected, the software will create a rectangular bounding region matching the extents of the defined model, along with an additional buffer boundary

Downloading Soil Survey Data

After all the options have been defined, click the [OK] button. The software then downloads the hydrologic soil group data as a shapefile to the selected location and displays the soil survey data on the Map View. Note that the maximum downloading area of the Soil Survey Data Download command is 5000 sq. km.

An example of NRCS soil survey data is shown below.

Map View - Downloaded NRCS soil survey data

In the Map Data Layers panel, the software provides a data legend for each hydrologic soil group layer that lists the soil survey data included within that layer. The user can expand the layer to view the data legend.

Map Data Layers panel

Clicking the […] button adjacent to the soil survey data layer will display the GIS Polygon Properties dialog box, which allows the user to:

  • define various soil survey data and their associated properties
  • define the color scheme for the color ramp
  • style the border associated with the soil survey data polygon(s)
  • change the image’s transparency
  • change the current CRS (coordinate reference system) of the project, etc.
GIS Polygon Properties dialog box

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the GIS Polygon Properties dialog box.

Platform & GIS Tools › External Data Sources

Hydroshed Data Download Command

The Hydroshed Data Download command of CivilGEO software allows the user to download the watersheds, lakes, rivers, streams, and subbasins data as shapefile data. To learn about hydroshed data, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Follow the steps below to use the Hydroshed Data Download command:

  1. From the Map Data ribbon menu, click the Hydroshed Data dropdown menu and then select the Hydroshed Data Download command.
    Hydroshed Data Download command
  2. The Hydroshed Data Download dialog box will be displayed.
    Hydroshed Data Download dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Hydroshed Data Download command and interact with the above dialog box.

General Specifications

This section allows the user to specify the layer group name and location to save the downloaded shapefile. By default, the Layer group name is ‘Hydroshed Data,’ which is editable. The user can click the […] button beside the Shapefile path entry to specify the directory location to save the downloaded shapefiles.

General Specifications section

Hydroshed Data Boundary Limits

This section allows the user to define the extent of the hydroshed data to download.

Hydroshed Data Boundary Limits section

The following options are available for defining the extent of the hydroshed data to download:

  • Current screen limits: When this option is selected, the software will use the current extent of the Map View screen display as a boundary limit for the hydroshed data to download.
  • User-defined limits: When this option is selected, the user can click on the [Pick] button and draw a rectangle on the Map View representing the user-defined limits for the hydroshed data to download.
  • Model extents: If a project model has been defined, this option will create a bounding rectangular region corresponding to the extents of the defined model, plus an additional buffer boundary.

Selecting Data to Download

The Select Data to Download section allows the user to choose the hydroshed data layers that will be loaded and displayed on the Map View. In addition, every hydroshed layer consists of a corresponding brief description under the Description column and a more detailed explanation in the Detailed Hydroshed Data Map Layer Description pane. The user can use the provided default selection as these are typical options used. However, the user can also experiment with various options to customize which hydroshed layers will be loaded and displayed on the Map View.

Select Data to Download section

To return to the default settings, click the [Default] button.

After all the options have been defined, click the [OK] button and the software will download the selected hydroshed layers as shapefile data. The software will also display the data on the Map View as shown below.

Map View hydrography layers

After the hydroshed data have been downloaded, the software will then load the downloaded hydroshed data as a new group in the Map Data Layers panel. Expand the group to see the details of the loaded layers.

Map Data Layers panel
Platform & GIS Tools › External Data Sources

Hydrography Data Download Command

The Hydrography Data Download command allows the user to download the USGS hydrography data via National Hydrograph Dataset Plus High Resolution (NHDPlus HR) as shapefile data. To learn more about NHDPlus HR, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Note that this command works only within the United States.

Follow the steps below to use the Hydrography Data Download command:

  1. From the Map Data ribbon menu, click the Hydrography Data dropdown menu and select the Hydrography Data Download command.
    Hydrography Data Download command
  2. The Hydrography Data Download dialog box will be displayed.
    Hydrography Data Download dialog box
  3. In the General Specifications section, the Layer group name is ‘Hydrography Data’, which can be changed by the user. The user can click the […] button adjacent to the Shapefile path entry to specify the directory location to save the downloaded GIS shapefiles.
  4. In the Hydrography Data Boundary Limits section, choose one of the following three options for defining the extent of the NHDPlus HR data:
    • Current screen limits: When this option is selected, the software will use the current extent of the Map View as a boundary limit for the NHDPlus HR map data to be downloaded.
    • User-defined limits: When this option is selected, the user can click on the [Pick] button and draw a rectangular region on the Map View to define the boundary limits for the NHDPlus HR map data to be downloaded.
    • Model extents: If a project model has been defined, this option will create a bounding rectangular region to correspond to the extents of the defined model, plus an additional buffer boundary.
  5. In the Select Data to Download section, the user can select the hydrography data layers that will be downloaded on the Map View. In addition, every hydrography layer consists of a corresponding short description under the Description column and a more detailed explanation in the Detailed Hydrography Data Map Layer Description pane. By default, the software selects the basic hydrologic layers. However, the user can experiment with the download of different hydrography layers on the Map View. To return to the default settings, click the [Default] button.
  6. When the options have been properly defined, click the [OK] button, and the software will download the hydrography data as a shapefile.

The software will also display the downloaded hydrography data on the Map View as shown below.

Downloaded hydrography data

After the hydrography data have been downloaded, the software will then load the downloaded hydrography data as a new group in the Map Data Layers panel. Expand the group to see the details of the loaded layers.

Map Data Layers panel
Platform & GIS Tools › External Data Sources

Hydroshed Data Command

The Hydroshed Data command of CivilGEO software allows the user to display the watersheds, lakes, rivers, streams, and subbasins data on the Map View.

The Hydroshed Data command retrieves its data from HydroSHEDS (Hydrological data and maps based on SHuttle Elevation Derivatives at multiple Scales) data store. HydroSHEDS provides hydrographic information in a consistent and comprehensive format for all parts of the world. The available data provides geo-referenced data sets (vector and raster) at various scales, including stream networks, watershed boundaries, drainage directions, and ancillary data layers such as flow accumulations, distances, and river topology information.

The HydroSHEDS data is derived primarily from elevation data of the Shuttle Radar Topography Mission (SRTM) at 3 arc-second resolutions. However, for all areas of the USA, the Hydroshed Data command bypasses the HydroSHEDS data store and provides more detailed and accurate information from the USGS NHDPlus HR (High Resolution) data store, which was developed by integrating the high-resolution National Hydrography Dataset (NHD) and Watershed Boundary Dataset (WBD) data with 3D Elevation Program (3DEP) 10-meter digital elevation model (DEM) data.

HydroSHEDS has been developed by the Conservation Science Program of the World Wildlife Fund (WWF), in partnership or collaboration with the U.S. Geological Survey (USGS); the International Centre for Tropical Agriculture (CIAT); The Nature Conservancy (TNC); the Government of Australia; McGill University, Montreal, Canada; and the Center for Environmental Systems Research (CESR) of the University of Kassel, Germany.

Displaying Hydroshed Data on the Map View

Follow the steps below to use the Hydroshed Data command:

  1. From the Map Data ribbon menu, click the Hydroshed Data dropdown menu and select the Hydroshed Data command.
    Hydroshed Data command
  2. The Hydroshed Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Hydroshed Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Hydroshed Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

General Specifications

This section allows the user to provide a name for the layer group in the Layer name field. This name identifies the layer group that will be created in the Map Data Layers panel and will contain the downloaded hydroshed layers. By default, the layer name is set to Hydroshed Data, which can be changed by the user.

Selecting Data to Download

The Select Data to Download section allows the user to choose the hydroshed data layers that will be loaded and displayed on the Map View. In addition, every hydroshed layer consists of a corresponding short description under the Description column and a more detailed explanation in the Detailed Hydroshed Map Layer Description pane. The user can use the provided default selection as these are typical options used. However, the user can experiment with the various options to customize which hydroshed layers will be loaded and displayed on the Map View.

To return to the default settings, click the [Default] button.

After all the options have been defined, click the [OK] button, and the software will load and display the selected hydroshed layers on the Map View.

Map View hydrography layers

After the hydroshed data have been downloaded, the software will then load the downloaded hydroshed data as a new group in the Map Data Layers panel.

Hydroshed Data Map Data Layers panel

Clicking on the [...] button adjacent to the created hydroshed data layer will display the Hydroshed Data Properties dialog box, which allows the user to change the image’s transparency and copy layer metadata text on the clipboard.

Hydroshed Data Properties dialog box

Downloading Hydroshed Data as Shapefile Data

The Hydroshed Data dropdown menu contains one additional command: Hydroshed Data Download.

Hydroshed Data Download command

This command allows the user to download the watersheds, lakes, rivers, streams, and subbasins data as shapefile data. To learn more about this command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Platform & GIS Tools › External Data Sources

Stream Gages Command

Information on the flow of rivers is a vital national asset that safeguards lives, protects property, and ensures adequate water supplies for the future. The USGS is the federal agency responsible for operating a network of about 10,000 plus stream gages nationwide.

Data from this network are used by water managers, emergency responders, utilities, environmental agencies, universities, consulting firms, and recreation enthusiasts.

The following are a few practical applications for stream gage data:

  • Planning, forecasting, and warning about floods and droughts.
  • Managing water rights and transboundary water issues.
  • Operating waterways for power production and navigation.
  • Monitoring environmental conditions to protect aquatic habitats.
  • Describing impacts to streamflow from changing land and water uses.
  • Assessing water quality and regulating pollutant discharges.
  • Designing reservoirs, roads, bridges, drinking water, wastewater facilities, etc.

The Stream Gages command of CivilGEO software allows the user to download the USGS provided stream gage data for a specified location.

Follow the steps below to use the Stream Gages command:

  1. From the Map Data ribbon menu, select the Stream Gages command.
    Map Data ribbon menu - Stream Gages command
  2. The Stream Gages dialog box will be displayed.
    Stream Gages dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Stream Gages command and interact with the above dialog box.

General Specifications

In this section, Stream Gages is the default Layer group name which can be changed by the user. Click the […] button adjacent to the Shapefile path entry to select the file path for saving the downloaded shapefile.

Stream Gages Data Boundry Limits

In this section, choose one of the following three options for defining the geographic location:

  • Current screen limits: The software will use the existing extent of the Map View screen display as a boundary limit for stream gage(s) data to be downloaded. By default, this option is selected.
  • User-defined limits: The user can click on the [Pick] button and draw a rectangle on the Map View representing the user-defined limits for the stream gage data to be downloaded.
  • Model extents: If a project model has been defined, this option will create a bounding rectangular region to the extents of the defined model with an additional buffer boundary.

After selecting the stream gage data boundary limits, clicking on the [OK] button will cause the software to download the stream gage as shapefile data.

The downloaded stream gage(s) will be displayed on the Map View. In addition, the land group layer will also be created in the Map Data Layers panel.

Map Data Layers panel - Stream Gages layer

Note that if USGS stream gage data is not available for the selected location, the following message will be displayed.

USGS stream gage data not available message
Platform & GIS Tools › External Data Sources

Hydrography Data Command

The Hydrography Data command displays the National Hydrograph Dataset Plus High Resolution (NHDPlus HR) from the USGS web map service, showing streams and lakes data on the Map View.

The NHDPlus HR is a geospatial dataset depicting the flow of water across the United States’ landscapes and through the stream network. The NHDPlus HR is built using the National Hydrography Dataset High Resolution data at 1:24,000 scale or finer, the 10 meter 3D Elevation Program data, and the nationally complete Watershed Boundary Dataset.

Note that this command works only within the United States.

Displaying Hydrography Data on the Map View

Follow the steps below to use the Hydrography Data command:

  1. From the Map Data ribbon menu, click the Hydrography Data dropdown menu and select the Hydrography Data command.
    Hydrography Data command
  2. The Hydrography Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Hydrography Data dialog box

The following sections describe the Hydrography Data command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

General Specifications

In this section, the user can provide a name for the layer group in the Layer name field. This name identifies the layer group that will be created in the Map Data Layers panel and will contain the downloaded hydrography layers. By default, the layer name is set to Hydrography Data, which is editable.

Select Data to Display

In this section, the user can select the hydrography data layers that will be displayed on the Map View. In addition, every hydrography layer has a brief description under the Description column and a more detailed explanation in the Detailed Hydrography Map Layer Description pane. By default, the software selects the basic hydrologic layers. However, the user can experiment with which hydrography layers to display on the Map View.

Select Data to Display section

After the options have been properly defined, the user can click the [OK] button and the software will load and display the selected hydrography layers on the Map View.

Displaying hydrography data on Map View

To reset the Hydrographic Layers selection to default values, click the [Default] button.

In the Map Data Layers panel, the software provides a data legend for each hydrography layer that lists the hydrography data included within that layer. The user can expand the layer to view the data legend.

Map Data Layers panel

Downloading Hydrography Data as Shapefile Data

The Hydrography Data dropdown menu contains one additional command: Hydrography Data Download.

Hydrography Data Download command

This command allows the user to download USGS hydrography data via the NHDPlus HR web map service as shapefile data. To learn more about this command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Note that this command only works within the United States.

Platform & GIS Tools › External Data Sources

Wetlands Data Command

The Wetlands Data command of CivilGEO software allows the user to display the graphical representations of the type, size, and location of the wetlands, riparian, or related aquatic habitats in the United States from the US Fish and Wildlife Service. This command also allows the user to download the wetland and riparian data of the United States as shapefile data.

The U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service (hereafter Service) is the principal Federal agency that provides the citizens of the United States and its Trust Territories with current geospatially referenced information on the status, extent, characteristics, and functions of wetlands, riparian, deep water, and related aquatic habitats.

Note that this command works only within the United States.

Displaying Wetlands Data on Map View

Follow the steps given below to display the wetland, riparian, and related aquatic habitat data on the Map View:

  1. From the Map Data ribbon menu, expand the Wetlands Data menu item and then choose the Wetlands Data command. Alternatively, you can simply click on the Wetlands Data command icon.Wetlands Data Command
  2. The Wetlands Data dialog box will be displayed.Wetlands Data dialog box

The following section describes how to interact with the above dialog box.

General Specifications

In this section, the user can specify the name of the wetlands layer in the Layer group name entry field. By default, the layer group name is “Wetlands”.

Clicking on the [OK] button will cause the software to display the wetland, riparian and related aquatic habitat data on the Map View.

Map view wetlands data

The software will then place the wetlands data in a layer group in the Map Data Layers panel.

The Map Data Layers panel will contain a legend detailing the contents of the displayed wetlands data. The user can expand the layer to see the legend details.

Map data layers panel

Downloading Wetlands Data as Shapefile

Follow the steps given below to download the wetland, riparian, and related aquatic habitat data as shapefile data:

  1. From the Map Data ribbon menu, expand the Wetlands Data menu item and then choose the Wetlands Data Download command.Wetlands Data Download Command
  2. The Wetlands Data Download dialog box will be displayed.Wetlands Data Download dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the above dialog box.

General Specifications

In this section, by default, the Layer group name is “Wetlands Data” which can be changed by the user. Click the […] button beside the Shapefile path entry to specify the directory location to save the downloaded shapefiles.

Wetlands Data Boundary Limits

In this section, choose one of the three options for defining the geographic location:

  • Current screen limits: The software will use the existing extent of the Map View screen display as a boundary limit for wetlands data to be downloaded.
  • User-defined limits: The user can click on the [Pick] button and draw a rectangle on the Map View representing the user-defined limits for the wetlands data to be downloaded.
  • Model extents: If a project model has been defined, this option will create a bounding rectangular region to the extents of the defined model, plus an additional buffer boundary.

Clicking on the [OK] button will cause the software to download the wetlands, riparian and related aquatic habitat data as shapefile data. The software will also display the data on the Map View as shown below.

Map view wetlands data download

After the wetland map data has been downloaded, the software will then load the downloaded wetlands data in a new group in the Map Data Layers panel. Expand the group to see the details of the loaded layers. The user can also export the layers to CAD by right-clicking on a layer and then selecting the Export to CAD command from the displayed context menu.

Wetlands map data layers panel
Platform & GIS Tools › External Data Sources

Watershed Flow Paths Command

The Watershed Flow Paths command computes the watershed runoff flow path for a selected location on the Map View. The command uses the USGS WMS service and NED (National Elevation Data) to compute flow path. The USGS provides several of their map products as a WMS (Web Map Service). A Web Map Service is an interface that provides maps of geospatial data as well as detailed information for specific features shown on the map. The NED serves as the elevation layer of The National Map and provides basic elevation information for earth science studies and mapping applications in the United States.

To use the Watershed Flow Paths command, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select Watershed Flow Paths command.
    Watershed Flow Paths Command
  2. The Watershed Flow Paths dialog box will be displayed.
    Watershed Flow Paths dialog box
  3. Define the name for the layer group in the Layer group name input field. This name identifies the layer group that will be created in the Map Data Layers panel and will contain the raindrop points, downstream overland flow paths, and main streams.
  4. The Delete previously computed downstream overland flow paths(s) and defined raindrop point(s) checkbox can be checked to delete any previously computed overland flow paths.
  5. Click the [Draw] button. The Watershed Flow Paths dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar informing the user to place the raindrop point(s).
    Draw raindrop points
  6. Click on the Map View to place the raindrop point locations. A numerical count of raindrop locations will be displayed on the status bar. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
    Map view raindrop points
  7. The Watershed Flow Paths dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of raindrop points will be displayed in the Raindrop points entry, as shown below.
    Watershed Flow Paths command dialog box
  8. Click the [OK] button. Internally, the software will compute the downstream flow path from each raindrop point. It will also show any major streams that the raindrop flow path encounters. Once the process is complete, the overland flow path from each raindrop point will be displayed on the Map View as shown below.
    Overland-flow-path-Raindrop-points-Map-View-Image-5.png
Platform & GIS Tools › External Data Sources

Delineate Watershed Command

The Delineate Watershed command computes the contributing watershed drainage network that drains to a selected map location (outlet point) on the Map View. The command uses the USGS WMS (Web Map Service) service and the NED (National Elevation Data) to automate the watershed delineation process. The USGS makes a number of their map products available as a WMS (Web Map Service). A Web Map Service (WMS) is an interface that provides maps of geospatial data as well as detailed information on specific features shown on the map. The NED serves as the elevation layer of The National Map and provides basic elevation information for earth science studies and mapping applications in the United States.

unknown node

Follow the steps below to use the Delineate Watershed command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Delineate Watershed command.
    Delineate Watershed Command
  2. The Delineate Watershed dialog box will be displayed.
    Delineate Watershed dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the above dialog box.

General Information

From the Site location section, the user can choose the watershed downstream outlet point location from the Map View. After clicking the [Pick] button, the Delineate Watershed dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user to select the watershed downstream outlet point.

The Latitude and Longitude fields will automatically get filled as per the location picked from the Map View. The user can also clear the defined site location by using the [Clear] button.

Once the results are computed, the Drainage area read-only field will display the total drainage area of the watershed being delineated.

Drainage area read-only field

Layer Specifications

In this section, the user can define the name of the layer group in the Layer group name input field. This name identifies the layer group that will be created in the Map Data Layers panel that will contain the delineated drainage catchments and stream network. The Delete previously delineated watershed(s) and contributing streams checkbox can be checked to delete any previously delineated watershed(s) and contributing streams on the Map View.

Layer Specifications section

After defining all the required fields, click the [Compute] button. Internally, the software will then snap the outlet point to the nearest stream, delineate the contributing drainage watersheds, and create the watershed boundaries and upstream drainage tributaries that contribute runoff to the selected location. Once the process is complete, a delineated watershed network will appear on the Map View as shown below.

Watershed-Network-Map-View-Delineate-Watershed-Command-Image-4.png

In the Map Data Layers panel, the software provides a data legend for the computed watershed drainage network layer, which lists the outlet points, streams, and watershed boundaries included within that layer. The user can expand the layer to view the data legend.

Map Data Layers panel
Platform & GIS Tools › External Data Sources

Compute Flow Paths Command

The Compute Flow Paths command computes and traces the subbasin runoff flow path for a selected map location using an elevation terrain surface until the flow path reaches a sink or the edge of the processed DEM grid.

unknown node

Follow the steps below to use the Compute Flow Paths command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Compute Flow Paths command.
    Compute Flow Paths command
  2. The Compute Flow Paths dialog box will be displayed.
    Compute Flow Paths dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Compute Flow Paths command and interact with the above dialog box.

Terrain Elevation Source

This section allows the user to specify which terrain grid layer should be used. The Terrain surface dropdown combo box lists all the terrain surfaces that are already added to the project. By default, this dropdown combo box lists the same terrain surface used in the Scenario Manager dialog box. If there is no terrain surface selected in the Scenario Manager dialog box and there is only one terrain surface loaded, it will select that terrain surface by default.

Terrain Elevation Source section

Selecting Subbasins to Compute Flow Paths

The Select Subbasins to Compute Flow Paths section controls which subbasins should be used to compute flow paths. Select the Select Subbasins to Compute Flow Paths radio button to enable this section.

All Subbasins

The All Subbasins entry causes the software to compute the flow paths for all subbasins on the stormwater layer.

Selecting Subbasins

The Select Subbasins entry allows the user to interactively select subbasin polygons from the stormwater layer on the Map View. Clicking on the [Pick] button will cause the dialog box to temporarily disappear and allow the user to select subbasin polygons from the Map View. The total number of selected subbasin polygons will be displayed in the entry upon returning to the dialog box.

Note that the Compute Flow Paths command confirms that the selected subbasins overlay the selected elevation grid terrain surface. If not, the software will display the following message.

If one subbasin was selected:

If one subbasin was selected

If more than one subbasin was selected:

If more than one subbasin was selected

Terrain Surface Processing Limits

This section allows the user to define the area extent of the terrain surface that will be used to compute the flow paths. Select the Terrain Surface Processing Limits radio button to enable this section.

Terrain Surface Processing Limits
section

The user can select from three available options, as described below:

  • Elevation source extents
    Selecting this option causes the software to process the entire terrain data.
  • User-defined limits
    Selecting this option allows the user to select a rectangular region of the terrain surface for processing terrain data. To select a rectangular region, follow the steps below:
    1. Click the [Pick] button.
    2. The Compute Flow Paths dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select a rectangular region for processing the terrain data.
    3. Select a rectangular region from the terrain surface in the Map View. The Compute Flow Paths dialog box will be redisplayed. The status of the User-defined limits read-only field will be changed from Undefined to Defined.
      User-defined limits read-only field
    4. The software will consider the selected rectangular region for processing terrain data.

  • Assign Clipping polygons
    Selecting this option allows the user to select polygon shape regions from the terrain surface for processing terrain data. To select polygon shape regions, follow the steps below:
    1. Click the [Pick] button.
    2. The Compute Flow Paths dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the clipping polygons.
    3. Select the clipping polygons on the terrain surface from the Map View. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
    4. The Compute Flow Paths dialog box will be redisplayed. The status of the Assign clipping polygons read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to 1 Selected.
      Assign clipping polygons read-only field
    5. The area underneath selected clipping polygons will be considered by the software for processing terrain data.

General Specifications

This section allows the user to define the name of the layer group in the Layer group name input field. This name identifies the layer group that will be created in the Map Data Layers panel that will contain the raindrop points, downstream overland flow paths, and main streams. The Delete previously computed overland flow paths checkbox can be checked to delete any previously computed runoff flow paths.

General Specifications section

Draw Raindrop Points

This section allows the user to draw the raindrop points on the Map View.

Draw Raindrop Points section

Click the [Draw] button to draw the raindrop points. The Compute Flow Paths dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to place the raindrop point(s). Click on the Map View to place the raindrop point(s). Note that the number of raindrop points will be displayed on the status bar. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. To abort the command, press the [Esc] key or right-click and select Cancel from the displayed context menu. Any drawn raindrop points added during the command session will be removed. The Compute Flow Paths dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected raindrop points will be displayed in the Raindrop points entry, as shown below.

Raindrop points read-only entry

After defining all the required fields, click on the [Compute] button. The Compute Flow Paths confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Click the [Yes] button to compute the flow direction grid. To cancel the process, click the [No] button.

Compute Flow Paths confirmation dialog box

The software will then internally compute the downstream flow path from each raindrop point that will merge into a major stream. Once the process is complete, the overland flow path from each raindrop point will be displayed on the Map View as shown below.

Raindrop Point - Overland Flow Path

Note that while the computation is running, the [Close] button changes to [Cancel] so that the user can abort the computation process if desired.

In the Map Data Layers panel, the software provides a data legend for the computed flow paths layer, which lists the raindrop points and downstream overland flow paths included within that layer. The user can expand the layer to view the data legend.

Map Data Layers panel
Platform & GIS Tools › External Data Sources

Contributing Streams Command

Contributing Streams command is used to automatically compute and trace the upstream drainage tributaries that contribute runoff to the selected location (Outlet point) on the Map View.

Follow these steps to use Contributing Streams command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Contributing Streams command.
    Contributing Streams Command
  2. The Contributing Streams dialog box will be displayed.
    Contributing-Streams-Command-image-2.png
  3. Provide the preferred name for the layer group in the Layer group name input field. This input field identifies the layer group that displays the contributing stream network on the Map View in the Map Data Layers panel.
  4. Select Delete previously computed contributing streams(s) check box to delete any previously traced contributing stream network.
  5. Click on [OK] button. The Contributing Streams dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar.
    Contributing-Streams-Command-image-3.png
  6. Click on a point on the Map View to place the downstream outlet point. The software will snap the outlet point to the nearest stream, and then compute and trace the upstream drainage stream network.
  7. Once the process is complete, a delineated contributing stream network will appear on the Map View as shown below.
    Contributing-Streams-Command-image-4.png
Platform & GIS Tools › External Data Sources

Automated Flow Paths Command

The Automated Flow Paths command allows the user to select subbasins and direct the software compute the longest flow path for one or more subbasins. The computations rely on the previously computed flow direction grid generated with the Delineate Subbasins command. Therefore, the user should only select subbasins that were computed using the Delineate Subbasins command.

The longest flow path is widely used in hydrology for computing time of concentration and lag time.

Lag Time and Time of Concentration (TOC) are two different but related terms that are used in hydrology computations. They represent the time required for runoff to travel from the hydraulically most distant point in the watershed to the outlet. The hydraulically most distant point is the point with the longest travel time to the watershed outlet and is not necessarily the point with the longest flow distance to the outlet. It is a function of the topography, hydrologic soil type, and land use within the subbasin.

unknown node

Follow the steps below to use the Automated Flow Paths command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Automated Flow Paths command.
    Automated Flow Paths command
  2. The Automated Flow Paths dialog box will be displayed.
    Automated-Flow-Paths-imge-2.png

The following sections describe how to use the Automated Flow Paths command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting HEC-HMS Subbasins to Compute Flow Paths

The Select HEC-HMS Subbasins to Compute Flow Paths section controls which subbasins should have the longest flow paths computed.

All Subbasins

The All Subbasins entry causes the software to compute the longest flow paths for all subbasins on the HEC-HMS layer.

Selecting Subbasins

The Select subbasins entry allows the user to interactively select subbasin polygons from the HEC-HMS layer on the Map View. Clicking on the [Pick] button will cause the dialog box to temporarily disappear and will allow the user to select HEC-HMS subbasin polygons from the Map View. The total number of selected subbasin polygons will be displayed in the entry upon return to the dialog box.

Note that the Automated Flow Paths command confirms that the selected subbasins overlay the selected elevation grid terrain surface. If not, the software will display the following message.

If one subbasin was selected:

If one subbasin was selected

If more than one subbasin was selected:

If more than one subbasin was selected

Terrain Elevation Source

This section specifies which terrain grid layer should be used. This should default to the same terrain surface used in the Delineate Subbasins dialog box or, if not defined there, in the Scenario Manager dialog box. The dropdown combo box will only list elevation grids.

Terrain Surface Thinning Options

This section allows the user to define the cell size that will be used for thinning the terrain surface. The smaller the cell size value, the longer the processing time.

Terrain Surface Thinning Options

The user can select one of the following options to define the cell size:

  • Selecting the Compute optimal cell size radio button option causes the software to use the default cell size value computed by the software. By default, the software selects this option.
  • Selecting the Define cell size radio button option allows the user to manually define the cell size value. The user can use the spin control button to define the cell size value.
  • Selecting the Use terrain surface cell size radio button option causes the software to use the default cell size value of the terrain surface.

Creating Flow Path Drawing Layer

This section controls whether the computed flow path will be drawn on a “normal” drawing layer.

By default, the Flow path layer entry will be present on the current drawing layer.

Clicking on the [New] button will allow the user to create a new drawing layer.

The Flow path layer dropdown combo box lists all drawing layers that are not locked in the project in alphabetical order. Locked drawing layers will not be listed. In addition, at the top of the listing is an Add New Drawing Layer entry, which will create a new layer.

New Drawing Layer entry

Creating SCS TOC Flow Path

Note that the SCS TOC flow path will be drawn on a “custom” drawing layer that only supports SCS TOC flow path polylines that are part of the HEC-HMS layer. Once the flow paths have been created, they are associated with the HEC-HMS subbasin elements. The user can toggle ON and OFF the display of the SCS TOC flow path in the HEC-HMS Properties dialog box.

The data entries that appear below allow the user to specify the default lengths for the sheet flow and the channel flow segments.

Automated-Flow-Paths-imge-6.png

The Delete previously computed longest flow paths checkbox option allows the user to delete previously computed longest flow paths from the model.

Create Sheet Flow Segment

The Create sheet flow segment checkbox option will specify that there is a sheet flow segment at the upstream end of the selected TOC flow path. This option provides different ways of computing the sheet flow segment, as detailed below.

The Fixed distance entry allows the user to specify the length to use for the sheet flow segment. By default, the software uses a segment length of 20 ft (or 6 meters). The user can enter a different value or click the […] button to measure sheet flow length from the Map View.

The Use McCuen-Spiess equation, Manning’s n entry allows the user to specify the Manning’s n roughness value and the software will automatically compute the sheet flow length. The default value of this entry is 0.1500. Alternatively, click the adjacent […] button to measure Manning’s n roughness value from Manning’s Roughness table. This equation is used for post-construction conditions. The sheet flow length is computed using the following equation.

Equation

Create Channel Flow Segment

The Create channel flow segment checkbox option will specify that there is a channel flow segment at the downstream end of the selected TOC flow. This option provides different ways of computing the channel flow segment, as detailed below.

The Fixed distance entry allows the user to specify the length to use for the channel flow segment. By default, the software uses a segment length of 100 ft (or 30 meters). The user can enter a different value or click the […] button to measure channel flow length from the Map View.

The Maximum shallow concentrated flow distance entry allows the user to enter the maximum shallow concentrated flow distance. The default value of this entry is 1000 ft (or 300 meters). The user can also manually enter a value or click the adjacent […] button to measure the maximum shallow concentrated flow distance from the Map View.

The Percentage of total length spin control is used to compute the length of the channel flow segment, based upon a percentage of the total flow path length. This spin control ranges from 1 to 100%, with a default value of 50%.

The Intersection with routing reach option causes the software to compute the channel flow length when the flow path polyline intersects the routing reach polyline.

Note that the software will confirm that there is a flow direction grid corresponding to the selected terrain surface elevation grid. If not, the software will inform the user that these grids need to be computed and the following message will be displayed.

Create Channel Flow Segment

Computing Longest Flow Paths

Once the data has been defined in the Automated Flow Paths dialog box, click the [Compute] button. The software will then compute the longest flow path for the selected subbasin(s), as shown below.

Computing Longest Flow Paths
Platform & GIS Tools › External Data Sources

Draw and Assign Subbasins Command

In hydrology, a subbasin is used to represent the physical watershed. Subbasins define drainage area polygons that produce runoff to the other elements in the model. In GeoHECHMS, subbasins can be defined by either drawing or assigning polygons on the Map View using the following commands:

  • Draw Subbasins
  • AssignSubbasins
unknown node

When creating a subbasin, the software performs the following tasks:

  • It creates the subbasin polygon on the HEC-HMS model-specific base layer contained within the Map Data Layers panel.
  • It assigns and computes the necessary attribute information of the created subbasin polygon.

Drawing Subbasins

The Draw Subbasins command allows the user to interactively draw polygons on the Map View as subbasins.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw Subbasins command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Drainage Subbasins dropdown menu and then choose the Draw Subbasins command.
    Draw Subbasins ribbon menu command
  2. The Draw Subbasins dialog box will be displayed.
    Draw Subbasins dialog box

Note that pressing the [Ctrl+B] keys will run the Draw Subbasins command directly on the Map View.

The following sections describe how to use the Draw Subbasins command and interact with the above dialog box.

Drawing Subbasin Polygon

The Draw Subbasin Polygons section is used to draw the subbasins on the Map View using polygons. To draw a subbasin polygon, follow the steps below:

  1. Click on the [Draw] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear. Use the Draw curvilinear polygon checkbox option to draw the polygon using curvilinear segments.
    [Draw] button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt you to draw a subbasin on the Map View. Draw the subbasin polygon on the Map View. While drawing elements, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between the curvilinear and the linear digitizing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about drawing elements on the Map View.
  3. To finish digitizing the subbasin polygon, either press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The user can press the [Esc] key to abort the current draw command.
  4. After completing the subbasin digitization, the user is immediately returned to the Draw Subbasins dialog box, and the Subbasin polygons read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    Subbasins polygon read-only field

Subbasin Specifications

This section is used to specify each drawn subbasin by providing each with an ID. The user can assign these IDs either manually or automatically by using some predefined formats.

Follow the steps below to assign subbasin IDs to the subbasins:

  1. If a subbasin has been drawn while the Subbasin ID option is enabled, the user can manually enter the subbasin ID in the corresponding field as shown below.
    Subbasin ID radio button option
  2. Alternately, the user can enable the Auto-name subbasin ID radio button option in order to automatically name every newly drawn subbasin as per the user’s predefined naming formats as shown below.
    Auto-name subbasin ID radio button option
    The different subbasin naming formats present in the Auto-name subbasin ID option are as follows:
    • Subbasin ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the front of the subbasin ID.
    • Subbasin ID digits: This option permits specification of a set number of digits to use for the subbasin ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the subbasin ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
    • Next available subbasin ID: This entry defines the next element ID number to be used.
    • Subbasin ID increment: This entry defines the increment to use when numbering elements. The default value is 1.
    • Subbasin ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the end of the subbasin ID.
    • Subbasin ID preview: This entry provides a preview of the subbasin naming specifications defined above.

  3. After providing the Subbasin ID, press the [Enter] key or click on the [Apply] button.
    [Apply] button
    Note that if the auto-name option is enabled and the user returns to the dialog box, the [Apply] button is disabled since the just drawn subbasins have already been named and created.
  4. The drawn subbasin will be displayed on the Map View.
    Map View subbasins

Assigning Subbasins

The Assign Subbasins command allows the user to manually associate previously drawn polylines or polygons as subbasins.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Subbasins command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Drainage Subbasins dropdown menu and then choose the Assign Subbasins command.
    Assign Subbasins ribbon menu command
  2. The Assign Subbasins dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign Subbasins dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Assign Subbasins command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Subbasin Polygons/Polylines

The Select Subbasin Polygons/Polylines section is used to select the previously drawn polylines/polygons from the Map View to assign them as subbasins.

To assign a subbasin polygon, follow the steps below:

  1. Click the [Pick] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    [Pick] button
  2. The status bar will prompt you to select the polygon/polyline on the Map View. Select the subbasin polygon/polyline on the Map View.
  3. After selecting the polygon/polyline, the user is immediately returned to the Assign Subbasins dialog box. The Subbasin polygons/polylines read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.

Subbasins Specifications

This section is used to specify an ID for each selected subbasin polygon. The user can assign these IDs either manually or automatically by using some predefined formats.

Note that this section is similar to the Subbasin Specifications of the Draw Subbasins dialog box. Hence, see the second subsection under Drawing Subbasins to learn more about it.

Platform & GIS Tools › External Data Sources

USGS StreamStats Command

In CivilGEO’s software, the USGS StreamStats command allows the user to click on a stream location in the Map View, prompting the software to delineate the watershed basin boundary, compute the basin characteristics, and provide estimates for flow based upon site-specific USGS regression equations. The software will generate GIS shapefiles containing the determined watershed boundary and basin characteristics, stream flow path, as well as a PDF results report for the selected site.

Follow the steps below to use the USGS StreamStats command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, click the USGS StreamStats command.
    USGS StreamStats Watershed ribbon menu command
  2. The USGS StreamStats dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    USGS StreamStats dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the USGS StreamStats command and interact with the above dialog box.

General Information

This section is used to define general information on the watershed being computed.

Click the [Pick] button to select a watershed outlet point (or spill point) from the Map View. This selected point should be on a known stream, river, or other waterway. The software will use this point to compute the contributing watershed drainage basin and the discharge at the selected point.

When selecting this watershed outlet point, the dialog box will temporarily disappear, and the user will be prompted to select the outlet point. After selecting the point, the user will be returned to the dialog box and the software will also display the chosen point’s latitude-longitude as well as the corresponding address for the selected point. The user can click the [Clear] button to clear the defined location and redo the entire process.

General Information & Drainage Boundary section

Drainage Basin Boundary

This section is used to define where the computed results are to be saved and whether the watershed boundary should be added to the Map View.

Provide the name for the layer group in the Layer group name input field. By default, the layer name is set to USGS StreamStats, which can be changed by the user.

Click the […] button beside the Shapefile path entry to specify the directory location to save the computed USGS StreamStats results.

The Computational Process

Click the [Compute] button and the software will call the USGS StreamStats webserver with the selected watershed outlet point. The USGS StreamStats webserver will then place your request into a queue (if there are any other user requests in front of it).

[Compute] button

Once your request begins processing, StreamStats first determines the drainage basin associated with the selected point. It performs a watershed delineation using the National Elevation Data (NED). It then determines the longest flow path within the computed watershed, along with the stream slope, watershed average slope and other hydrologic parameters. From the computed watershed centroid, it determines which state the watershed is in and which regional runoff regression equation should be used to estimate the flow-duration statistics for the selected point.

The USGS is continually improving this computation, adding regions that were not previously covered as well as updating the runoff regression equations for computing peak flows based upon additional stream gages and revised flow statistics. These changes and improvements are automatically incorporated into the USGS StreamStats webserver.

Results Postprocessing

Once this information has been determined, StreamStats packages together a ZIP file containing the results and sends that ZIP file back to our software. Our software then unpacks the ZIP file and post-processes the provided results and displays them in the dialog box, Map Data Layers panel, and on the Map View.

The following dialog box sections display the computed results:

  • Drainage area (the General Information section)
  • Peak Flow Basin Characteristics
  • Peak Flow Basin Characteristics (Peak Flow Full Model Reg A Sir2019 5018)
  • Peak Flow Streamflows (Peak Flow Full Model Reg A Sir2019 5018)

Click the [Report] button to display the USGS StreamStats PDF report showing the streamflow statistics and peak flows. This PDF report is also appended to the Map Data Layers panel data listing for easy retrieval.

[Report] button

The Map Data Layers panel also lists the downloaded shapefile layers that were generated by USGS StreamStats. These layers are GIS attributed and contain the computed results. Expand the group to see the details of the loaded layers.

USGS StreamStats Map Data Layers Panel

Frequently Asked Questions

Question: The USGS StreamStats platform is not implemented in some states. A review of the StreamStats status for different states in the US shows that some states fall under the category of “Not Participating”. Do you have any plans for fully implementing the USGS StreamStats across all the states and what is the significance of the term “Not participating”?

CORE-677.png


Answer: There is a substantial effort required to develop the GIS data layers needed for a StreamStats application. Although StreamStats is presented as a nationwide interface, the background data layers required for each individual state's StreamStats implementation are developed by the USGS Water Science Center in that State, through cooperative funding agreements with one or more Local, State, Tribal, or Federal entities. A few Water Science Centers have not been able to identify cooperators willing to help fund the effort, so StreamStats is not yet available in those states. It is possible that Federal funding may someday be allocated for developing StreamStats in the remaining states, but at this time that has not yet occurred.

Question: Purple states show basin delineations and compute basin characteristics but estimates of flow statistics from regression equations are not available. Why is that?

Answer: Wisconsin has developed a StreamStats application but is still in the process of completing Quality Assurance/Quality Control checks before the state’s peakflow regression equations can be made available to the public.

Question: Why is there a hatched region around the state of Mississippi?

USGS-StreamStats-command-image-4.png


Another example is around the state of Missouri.

USGS-StreamStats-command-image-5.png


Answer: Please visit this page for more details. Most regression equations are developed for a particular state. While some data is typically included from nearby stream gages in adjacent states, equations are often only considered valid for use in the specific state they were derived for. StreamStats is set up to reflect the area of applicability as stated by the author of the regression report.

Question: What are the steps that can be followed if the following message is received even after repeated attempts?

USGS-StreamStats-command-image-6.png

Answer: If you don't get a successful delineation after a few tries, your browser may need a hard refresh or your computer's cache may need to be emptied. Each day, StreamStats gets thousands of delineation requests from dozens of users. Internet traffic, browser versions and settings, and other factors outside our control can sometimes lead to "hiccups" that cause problems. Occasionally, there may be transient problems that crop up following network outages or updates. Although StreamStats is not staffed 24/7, please do let us know by submitting a help ticket if you see repeated problems.

Question: How is the Prediction Error computed and what is its significance?

Answer: A detailed discussion of this is available here, but ultimately you may need to consult the regression report specific to the particular flow statistic you are interested in. There are a number of different statistical quality indicators that can be used to measure and describe how well a particular regression equation represents its source dataset. Different authors sometimes choose different indicator statistics, and StreamStats typically will present whichever one was chosen by the author of the regression report.

Question: What is the function of the PROSPER tool under the Exploration tools section?

Answer: The PROSPER tool is relatively new and isn't yet covered in our FAQs or User Manual. A description for the color symbolization is being developed and will be added to the output. It essentially creates a visualization that shows how likely a particular stream reach is to have perennial flow, based on this article.

Platform & GIS Tools › External Data Sources

FEMA NFHL Download Command

CivilGEO software allows the user to download FEMA National Flood Hazard Layers (NFHL) as shapefile data by using the FEMA Flood Data command. The NFHL is a digital database that contains flood hazard mapping data from FEMA’s National Flood Insurance Program (NFIP). This map data is derived from Flood Insurance Rate Map (FIRM) databases and Letters of Map Revision (LOMRs).

The NFHL provides users with the ability to determine the flood zone, base flood elevation, and floodway status for a specific geographic location.

Note that this command works only within the United States.

Follow the steps below to download the FEMA NFHL data:

  1. From the Map Data ribbon menu, click the FEMA Flood Data dropdown menu and then select the FEMA NFHL Download command.
    FEMA NFHL Download - Map Data ribbon menu command
  2. The FEMA NFHL Download dialog box will be displayed.
    FEMA NFHL Download dialog box
  3. In the General Specifications section, by default, the Layer group name is FEMA NFHL Data, which can be changed by the user. Click the […] button beside the Shapefile path entry to specify the directory location to save the downloaded GIS shapefiles.
  4. In the FEMA NFHL Data Boundary Limits section, choose one of the following three options for defining the geographic location:
    • Current screen limits: The software will use the existing extent of the Map View screen display as the boundary limit for the FEMA map data to be downloaded.
    • User-defined limits: The user can click on the [Pick] button and draw a rectangle on the Map View representing the user-defined limits for the FEMA map data to be downloaded.
    • Model extents: If a project model has been defined, this option will create a bounding rectangular region corresponding to the extents of the defined model, plus an additional buffer boundary.
  5. In the Select Data to Download section, the user can choose various FEMA NFHL elements to download. The user can use the provided default selection as these are typical options used. However, the user can experiment with the various options to customize which FEMA map elements should be downloaded. To return to the default settings, click the [Default] button.
  6. When the options have been properly defined, click the [OK] button and the software will download the FEMA NFHL data.
  7. After the FEMA map data have been downloaded, the software will then load the downloaded FEMA data as a new group in the Map Data Layers panel. Expand the group to see the details of the loaded layers. The user can also export the layers to CAD by right-clicking on a layer and then selecting the Export to CAD command from the displayed context menu.
    FEMA-NFHL-Download-Command-image-3.png
Platform & GIS Tools › External Data Sources

FEMA Flood Data Command

CivilGEO software can display the FEMA digital Flood Insurance Rate Map (FIRM) directly on the Map View. The Map View must be assigned a coordinate reference system so that the FEMA digital FIRM map can be correctly georeferenced to match the map coordinates.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to assign a coordinate reference system to a project.

The FEMA digital FIRM map contains the following data:

  • Flood Hazard Zones & Boundaries
  • Flood Structures (i.e., roadway crossings, dams, etc.)
  • Levees
  • Base Flood Elevations (BFE)
  • Cross Sections
  • High Water Marks
  • River Mile Markers and more…
unknown node

Note that this command works only within the United States.

Follow the steps below to display the FEMA digital FIRM map on the Map View:

  1. From the Map Data ribbon menu, click the FEMA Flood Data dropdown menu and then select the FEMA Flood Data command.
    FEMA-Flood-Data-Img-1.png
  2. The FEMA Flood Data dialog box will be displayed.
    FEMA Flood Data dialog box
  3. In the General Specifications section, the default layer group name is FEMA Flood Data, which is editable.
  4. In the Select Data to Download section, the user can choose the FEMA map layers to download. Each FEMA map layer has a brief description in the Description column and a more detailed explanation in the Detailed FEMA Map Layer Description pane. The user can use the provided default selection as these are typical layers used. However, the user can also customize which FEMA map layers should be downloaded.
    To return to the default settings, click the [Default] button.
  5. When options have been properly defined, click the [OK] button. The software will download and display the FEMA flood map on the Map View.
    Displayed FEMA flood map
  6. As you zoom and pan about, the FEMA flood map will automatically update to fill the extent of the Map View display.
  7. After the FEMA flood data have been downloaded, the software will then place and identify the FEMA Flood Data layer as a new group in the Map Data Layers panel. The FEMA Flood Data layer will contain a legend detailing the contents of the displayed FEMA flood map. Expand the group to see the details of the loaded layers.
    MAP Data Layers panel
Platform & GIS Tools › Annotation & Symbology

CAD Properties

The CAD Properties dialog box allows the user to define various elements and their properties on the CAD drawing layer such as width, style, color of the polyline/polygon border, and fill color in the polygon. Furthermore, it also allows the user to view the list of externally referenced CAD drawings, change the CRS (coordinate reference system) of the current project, and automatically apply the transformation scale factor to any layer to accurately map it to the project CRS. To learn more about the coordinate reference system (CRS), refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Follow the steps below to open the CAD Properties dialog box:

  1. In the Map Data Layers panel, click on the […] button next to the CAD drawing layer.
    Map Data Layers panel
  2. The CAD Properties dialog box will be displayed.
    CAD Properties dialog box

The CAD Properties dialog box contains four tabs as described below:

  • General Options
  • File References
  • Spatial Reference
  • Transformation

General Options

Various sections of the General Options tab are described below:

General Information

This section contains read-only information about the directory location and name of the CAD drawing file.

Assign Elevations

This section is used to assign elevation to elements on the CAD drawing layer. The following options are available:

  • No elevation assigned: On selecting this option, no elevation will be assigned to the CAD drawing layer elements. Note that this radio button option is selected by default when the dialog box is displayed.
  • Use CAD elements elevations: On selecting this option, the CAD drawing layer elements will use the same elevation defined for each entity and assign it to the CAD drawing layer elements.

    The Add elevation offset entry allows the user to enter the offset value to raise or lower the elevation of the elements on the CAD drawing layer by a specified amount. Note that Add elevation offset entry is enabled only when the user selects the Use CAD elements elevations option.

Other Options

This section provide options to the user for displaying the CAD drawing file entities on the Map View.

  • Display text: The user can check the Display text checkbox option to display the text entities.
  • Display points: This checkbox option displays the node elements on the Map View.
  • The user can also choose the desired shape, size, and border color of the node elements from the Symbol, Size and Border color options.

CAD Layer Properties

This section allows the user to filter various sub-layers of the CAD drawing layer listed in the grid table.

CAD Layer Properties section

In the CAD layer filter dropdown combo box, the user can choose the desired layer option from the dropdown list to be displayed in the grid table.

CAD layer filter dropdown combo box

In the grid table, the Layer Name column lists all the sub-layers of the parent CAD drawing layer, and their corresponding descriptions are displayed in the Description column. The user can toggle on and off the checkboxes next to the layer name to enable or disable the selected sub-layers.

The user has the option to display the entities of a particular sub-layer on the Map View by checking and unchecking the checkboxes in the Show column.

The user can also define the style of the elements associated with the sub-layers listed in the grid table from the Width, Style, Color, and Fill Color columns.

Clicking on the [Invert Selected] button will cause the software to flip the checkbox entries (i.e., checked entries will be unchecked and vice-versa) of the sub-layers in the Layer Name column.

Clicking on the [Select Pick] button allows the user to select the sub-layers from the Map View.

Clicking on the [Invert Hidden] button will cause the software to flip the checkbox entries of the sub-layers in the Show column.

Clicking on the [Hide Pick] button allows the user to select layers in order to hide entities of that layer from the Map View.

Checking the Show only selected checkbox option causes the software to hide unselected layers in the grid table. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked when the dialog box is displayed.

File References

In this tab, the user can view the hierarchy of externally referenced CAD drawing files in the data grid table. Note that the main CAD drawing file is always listed at the top of the data grid table. The Status column in the data grid displays the status of each referenced CAD drawing file: Loaded, Not Loaded, or Not Found.

File References section

The user has the option to display the desired CAD drawing layers on the Map View by checking the checkboxes in the Visible column.

Clicking the [Load] button will cause the software to reload the CAD drawing file of the selected row.

Clicking the [Unload] button will cause the software to unload the selected externally referenced CAD drawing file. Note that for the main CAD drawing file, this button is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Clicking the [Remove] button will cause the software to remove the CAD drawing file for the selected row.

Clicking the [Reload All] button will cause the software to reload all of the externally referenced CAD drawing files along with the main CAD drawing file listed in the data grid table. Note that this button is used once the user updates the externally referenced CAD drawing files.

Clicking the [Update] button will cause the software to display the Update File Path dialog box. The user can update the path to an externally referenced CAD drawing and select the CAD drawing file for reattaching it as the externally referenced CAD drawing file. Alternatively, the user can select the Reattach command from the right-click context menu to update the path to an externally referenced CAD drawing and select the CAD drawing file.

The data in the data grid table can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document by using the Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF commands from the right-click context menu.

In addition, right-clicking on the data grid table displays the following commands in the displayed context menu:

  • Unload: On selecting this command, the user can remove the CAD drawing file from the project, but it will still be displayed in the data grid table.
  • Reload: On selecting this command, the user can reload the CAD drawing file if the currently referenced CAD drawing file is unloaded.
  • Reattach: This command works similar to that of the [Update] button.
    Displayed context menu

The Details window displays various information associated with the externally referenced CAD drawing file selected in the data grid table, such as the reference name, status, size, last modified date, original path of the CAD file, and the path at which the CAD file is saved.

Details window displays

Spatial Reference

The Spatial Reference tab allows the user to manually assign the project’s CRS to the non-CRS referenced data layer coordinates if the data layer lies within the project’s CRS. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about spatial reference.

Transformation

The Transformation tab allows the user to automatically apply the transformation scale factor to any particular layer and accurately map it to the project coordinate reference system (CRS). Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about layer transformation.

Platform & GIS Tools › Annotation & Symbology

Annotation Mapping

The various commands of CivilGEO software, such as Delineate Subbasins, Watershed Flow Paths, Compute % Impervious, Compute CN, Compute Flow Paths, etc, generate GIS entities which typically are polygon, polyline, and node type elements. These GIS elements have their associated hydrologic properties in the form of attributes. These attributes can be mapped and displayed on the Map View for the GIS elements in the form of annotation labels, as shown below. Refer to this article to learn more about viewing and editing GIS attribute data using Data Explorer.

Annotation labels

Follow the steps below to use the Annotation Mapping functionality.

  1. From the Map Data Layers panel, click the […] button next to the GIS layer shapefile.
    GIS entity layer
  2. The corresponding Properties dialog box will be displayed based on the GIS element type selected. The Annotation Mapping panel of the General Options tab will be selected as default.
    GIS Element Properties dialog box - Annotation Mapping panel

The following sections describe various options available in the Annotation Mapping panel for node, polyline, and polygon GIS entities.

Label Contents

In the Label contents subsection, the Attribute field dropdown combo box contains the GIS attributes associated with the GIS element. The user can select the desired attribute from the dropdown list and then can click the [Add] button to add the attribute to the Annotation label field. The user can add multiple attributes to use them in the annotation label.

Label contents subsection

In the Annotation label field, the user can modify the annotation label by adding prefixes and suffixes to the attributes. This makes the annotation labels more readable on the Map View.

Annotation attribute labels

Label Format

The Label format subsection is typically used to modify the stylization of the annotation labels, such as font, style, size, etc.

Label format subsection

Label Direction

The Label direction subsection allows the user to choose from various Map View orientations of annotation labels with respect to the GIS element. For each GIS element type, the options available under this subsection are different:

  1. Node Entities
    Node entities - annotation label direction options
    • Horizontal: This option is used to align the annotation label horizontally with respect to the node entity.
    • Rotated angle: This option is used to rotate the annotation label with respect to the node entity.
  2. Polyline Entities
    Polyline entities - annotation label direction options
    • Horizontal: This option is used to align the annotation label horizontally with respect to the polyline entity.
    • Aligned with polyline: This option is used to align the annotation label in a parallel configuration with respect to the polyline entity.
    • Rotated angle: This option is used to rotate the annotation label with respect to the polyline entity.
  3. Polygon Entities
    Polygon entities - annotation label direction options
    • Horizontal: This option is used to align the annotation label horizontally with respect to the polygon entity.
    • Aligned with polygon major axis: This option is used to align the annotation label with respect to the polygon’s major axis.
    • Rotated angle: This option is used to rotate the annotation label with respect to the polygon entity.

Label Alignment

For Node and Polyline element types, the following additional Label alignment features can be utilized to display the annotation label on the Map View with various orientations.

  1. Node Entities
    Node entities - annotation label alignment options
    • For node entity, the user can align the annotation label in 9 different orientations. In addition, an offset distance between the node and the annotation label can also be defined.
  2. Polyline Entities
    Polyline entities - annotation label alignment options
    • Placement: Using this dropdown entry, the user can choose to align the annotation label Above Polyline, Below Polyline, or On Polyline.
    • Label offset: This entry can be used to define the offset distance between the polyline and the annotation label.

      Note that the Label alignment subsection will only be enabled if the Aligned with polyline option of the Label direction subsection is selected.

After defining all the required annotation label settings, click the [Ok] button, and the annotation labels for the GIS entities will be displayed on the Map View.

Platform & GIS Tools › Annotation & Symbology

Attribute Mapping

An attribute is a data value associated with a particular feature in a GIS layer—for example, the name and width associated with a particular street. Each feature in a GIS layer (Node, Polyline, or Polygon) can have its own unique set of attributes.

In CivilGEO software, attribute mapping can be performed from the Attribute Mapping panel of the GIS layer properties dialog boxes. This panel allows the user to provide different colorization styles to a selected attribute.

The user can select one of the following types of GIS layer properties dialog box:

  • GIS Polygon Properties
  • GIS Polyline Properties
  • GIS Node Properties

In this article, we will use the GIS Polygon Properties dialog box to demonstrate how attribute mapping is performed in CivilGEO software.

Follow the steps below to access the Attribute Mapping panel:

  1. In the Map Data Layers panel, click on the [...] button next to the desired GIS layer.
    Map Data Layers panel
  2. The GIS Polygon Properties dialog box will be displayed.
    GIS Polygon Properties dialog box
  3. Select the Attribute Mapping panel in the Other Options section.
    Attribute Mapping panel Other Options section
  4. From the Classify dropdown combo box, select the color classification method for providing different colorization styles to the attribute. The user can select one of the following options from the dropdown combo box: None, Defined Intervals, Polygon Delineation, and Unique Values.
    Classify dropdown combo box
  5. From the Attribute dropdown combo box, select the desired attribute for which you want to apply the colorization style.
  6. From the Data range subsection, the user can define the range of the selected attribute values that will be utilized in the color data grid. By default, the Max value and Min value entry fields display the attribute’s maximum and minimum values respectively. However, the user can change these maximum and minimum values, and their corresponding differences will be displayed in the Range read-only field. Note that the Data range subsection can only be enabled when the Defined Intervals option is selected in the Classify dropdown combo box.
  7. From the Data ramp subsection, the user can define the color scheme as well as the interval for the color ramp that will be used to depict the range of color fill. Note that the Data ramp subsection can only be enabled when the Defined Intervals option is selected in the Classify dropdown combo box.
    • Intervals
      This spin control entry field is used to define intervals of the color ramp. Note that the interval defined in this field will create the same number of colorizations in the color data grid.
    • Color scheme
      This dropdown combo box is used to select the color scheme for the color ramp.
    • Clicking the [Compute Ramp] button causes the software to reset the intervals and corresponding color style in the color data grid.
  8. From the Above upper limit subsection, the user can assign a color for all those data range values that do not fall under the defined data range. Click the Color dropdown palette to select the preferred color. Note that the Above upper limit subsection can only be enabled when the Defined Intervals option is selected in the Classify dropdown combo box.
  9. Check the Display Layer legend checkbox to create a color legend of the attributes in the Map Data Layers panel.
  10. Check the Display Map View legend checkbox to create a color legend of the attributes on the Map View.
  11. Click the [Reverse] button to reverse the color in the color data grid.
  12. Once done, click the [OK] button. The software will then display colorization styles for the selected attribute.
Platform & GIS Tools › Annotation & Symbology

Photo Catalog

The Photo Catalog allows the user to add geotagged photographs to their engineering project. In addition, the Google Street View feature allows the user to add additional photos to the Photo Catalog. Photo indicators are shown on the Map View, showing the location and direction that the photo was taken. Hovering the mouse over the indicator shows a popup window showing the photo.

unknown node

The Photo Catalog does not store the photos. Instead, it simply stores references to existing saved photos. It connects to the photographs using reference links to the file path or URL. Photos can be referenced from the following sources:

  • Computer local hard drive
  • Network drive
  • Cloud storage providers (Dropbox, Microsoft OneDrive, Google Drive, Google Photos, etc)

The Photo Catalog will then reference the file path or URL associated with the photograph.

Geotagged Photos

Photos can be geotagged with the following information:

  • Geographic location (Lat, Long)
  • Elevation (optional)

In addition, the following information can be imbedded into the photograph:

  • Date and time
  • Photo direction (i.e., rotation angle)
  • Text title
  • Text description
Example of a geotagged photo


Example of a geotagged photo

Photo Catalog Panel

CivilGEO software has a dedicated section for Photo Catalog in the Map Explorer panel. Click on the Photo Catalog panel to expand.

Photo-Catalog-im-2.png

Photo Preview Window

This window allows the user to preview the photo before referencing it onto the Map View. It will update with the photo selected by the user within the data grid.

Photo-Catalog-Pic-3.png

Referenced Photos Table

This data grid lists all the photos that have been referenced in the project. It lists each photo’s title and description. It also contains a symbol (crosshair symbol) to indicate if the photo is georeferenced or not. The user can edit the photo’s title and description within the data grid.

Photo-Catalog-Pic-4.png


Clicking on a row within the data grid causes the Photo Preview window to update with the corresponding photo. Double clicking on the index column data row will cause the software to jump to the photo location on the Map View.

Crosshair Symbol

The Crosshair symbol indicates if the photo is georeferenced or not. If the symbol is green, then the photo is georeferenced. If the symbol is dark grey, then the photo is not georeferenced.

Crosshair Symbol

Photo Title

The photo title is displayed here. This title string is cropped to the available display space. If the photo does not have a title, then it has a default title of Photo ## where ## represents a photo count.

Photo-Catalog-Pic-6.png

Add Photos

Follow the steps given below to select one or more photos to reference in the Photo Catalog.

  1. Click on the Add Photos button at the top of the Photo Catalog.Photo-Catalog-Pic-7.png
  2. The Add Photos dialog box will be displayed.Add Photos Dialog Box_1
  3. Click on the [Browse] button located at the upper right-hand corner of the dialog box.Browse Button


    The [Browse] button allows the user to:

    • Load all the photos contained in a folder
    • Select multiple photos to be loaded
    • Select a previously created Photo Catalog that contains referenced photos

      Note that the available file types that are supported are standard image formats used for photos. In addition, the dialog box lists the Photo Catalog file extension.

  4. The selected photos will then be added to the photo listing contained in the Add Photos dialog box.Add Photos Dialog Box_2

    Note that both geotagged and non-geotagged photos can be loaded.

  5. When the user browses and selects a Photo Catalog, then the Path entry contains the photo catalog file name, and the file listing contains the photos that are contained in the Photo Catalog.Add Photos Dialog Box_3
  6. Once the photos have been selected, click the [OK] button to close the Add Photos dialog box and add the photos to the Photo Catalog listing.
  7. Alternatively, the user can drag and drop photos into the Photo Catalog panel using Windows File Explorer, at which point the software will then add them to the Photo Catalog listing.Photo-Catalog-imaagee-12.png

    Note: The command also supports photos that are stored in cloud storage, such as Dropbox, Microsoft OneDrive, Google Drive, Google Photos, etc. The photos saved on the cloud storage can be dragged and dropped directly onto the Map View, and the software will then reference these photos in the Photo Catalog based on their geolocation data. The drag-and-drop functionality of photos only works when the corresponding desktop application of the cloud storage provider is installed on the computer. Issues can occur if the photo resides behind a firewall. In this case, select the publicly accessible link to the photo and use that as the path to the selected photo.

Export Photo Catalog

The Export Photo Catalog command allows the user to export out the referenced photos to a photo catalog file.

Photo-Catalog-Pic-13.png


Clicking the Export Photo Catalog button causes the software to display an Export Photo Catalog dialog box, allowing the user to export the Photo Catalog to be used in another project.

Export Photo Catalog Dialog Box


Note that the photo catalog will be saved with a *.pcxml file extension.

Photo Catalog Options

The Photo Catalog Options command allows the user to customize how the photo locations are represented on the Map View.

Photo-Catalog-Pic-15.png


Clicking the Photo Catalog Options command causes the software to display the Photo Marker Options dialog box.

Photo-Catalog-img-16.png


The Photo Marker Options dialog box allows the user to configure the photo marker symbol type and size to be displayed on the Map View. The user can use the scrolling panel in the Photo Marker Symbol Stylization section to choose from multiple marker symbols. Below are some of the marker symbols that our software provides.

Photo-Catalog-Pic-17.png


The user can see the preview of the selected symbol and adjust its size on the right side of the scrolling panel. Additionally, the recently used symbols are displayed in the Recently Used Symbols section.

Photo-Catalog-Pic-18.png

After selecting the desired photo marker symbol from the scrolling panel or from the Recently Used Symbols section, the user can click the [Apply] button.

Photo Marker Symbol Display Visibility

The photo marker symbols are only displayed on the Map View at specific zoom levels, similar to how the software displays model element entities.

If the Map View is zoomed out too far, then the photo marker symbols are not displayed on the Map View.

Displaying Photos on Map View

Hovering the mouse cursor over a photo marker symbol on the Map View will cause a pop-up dialog box to show up over the marker symbol which displays the photo.

Displaying Photos on Map View

Highlighting Photo Markers on Map View

The user can multi-select photos from the Photo Catalog data grid and the software will highlight the corresponding photo marker symbols on the Map View.

Photo-Catalog-imagee-20.png

Rotating a Photo Marker to Define Photo View Direction

The software allows the user to rotate the photo marker on the Map View to define the photo view direction. The photo marker symbol must be unlocked to rotate it on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to rotate a photo marker on the Map View:

  1. From the Map View, right-click on the desired photo marker and select Graphic Edit from the displayed context menu.Photo-Catalog-Pic-21.png
  2. Using the mouse cursor, select the rotation handle of the photo marker and rotate the photo to the desired direction.Photo-Catalog-Pic-22.png

Missing Referenced Photo

If the user clicks on a photo marker symbol from the Photo Catalog and the defined photo is not available (i.e., missing), an informational message “Defined photo not found” is displayed where the photo is normally displayed.

Photo-Catalog-Pic-23.png

Hiding and Showing Photo Marker Symbols on Map View

The Show / Hide Photo Markers button controls the visibility of the photo marker symbols on the Map View. It toggles from ON and OFF, with ON as the default setting. However, the software remembers this setting at a project level. Therefore, if multiple projects are loaded, each project can have its own photo marker display setting.

Photo-Catalog-Pic-24.png

Lock and Unlocking Photo Markers

The Lock / Unlock Photo Markers command locks and unlocks the position of photo marker symbols on the Map View.

Photo-Catalog-Pic-25.png


Initially, the photo marker symbol positions are locked on the Map View. However, unlocking the photo markers allows the user to:

  • Move a photo symbol on the Map View by clicking and dragging it about
  • Rotate a photo marker on the Map View to define the photo view direction using the right-click context menu Graphic Edit command

When the Photo Catalog panel is collapsed, the photo marker symbols are automatically locked and cannot be moved about on the Map View.

The locations of the photo marker symbols can be moved without unlocking them by using the Photo Details dialog box.

Jump To Photo Marker

The Jump To Photo Marker command causes the software to jump to the selected photo location on the Map View.

Photo-Catalog-Pic-26.png


Clicking on the Jump To Photo Marker command also causes the Map View to be centered over the selected photo at an equivalent zoom level. For example, if the Map View is already at a zoom level when displaying the photo marker symbols, then the zoom level remains unchanged. However, if the Map View is zoomed out too far to display the photo marker symbols, then the Map View is zoomed into a zoom level that causes the photo marker symbols to be displayed and the photo marker symbol to be centered on the display.

If the selected photo is not georeferenced, then this command is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Photo Details

The Photo Details command allows the user to see more information for each photo.

Photo-Catalog-Pic-27.png


Clicking the Photo Details command will display the Photo Details dialog box.

Photo Details Dialog Box_1

Alternatively, the user can also click on the photo in the Photo Catalog to display the corresponding Photo Details dialog box.

Photo Details Dialog Box_2

The Photo Details dialog box allows the user to interact with the photos in a modeless, resizable dialog box, showing additional details about the photo as well as seeing a higher-resolution, larger version of the photo. This dialog box is tied to the current project. Switching between projects causes the dialog box to disappear and reappear, depending upon its view state for each project. When the user navigates the photos from the Photo Details dialog box, then the software will also redirect the user to the corresponding image on the Map View.

The Photo Details dialog box provides a [Pick] button, allowing the user to change the Map View location of the corresponding photo marker displayed on the Map View. Updating the location of the photo marker on the Map View also updates the latitude and longitude location detailed in the Photo Details dialog box.

The Photo Details dialog box can run independent of whether the Photo Catalog is displayed.

If there are no photos loaded and the user requests to display the Photo Details dialog box, then the following informational dialog box is displayed.

Informational Dialog Box

Navigate Forward and Backward

The left and right arrows adjacent to the displayed photo allow the user to navigate backward and forward through the referenced photos. When viewing the first or last photo within the list, the corresponding navigation arrow is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Photo-Catalog-Pic-31.png


Note that in both the Photo Catalog and the Photo Details dialog box, pressing Ctrl+Shift+N will move the view to the Next photo, and pressing Ctrl+Shift+P will move the view to the Previous photo. In the Photo Details dialog box, clicking on the Keyboard's left and right arrow keys will cause the software to move backward and forward through the referenced photos.

Capturing Current Google Street View and Adding to the Photo Catalog

The Google Street View command allows the user to add the current Google Street View image to Photo Catalog as photos. Clicking on the camera icon, as shown below, will automatically store the current Google Street View image in a folder named “Photos” contained in the project folder. When capturing this photo, the photo name will automatically be created. Additional information that can be retrieved from that Google Street location, such as address, can be stored as metadata with the photo.

The geolocation and camera direction will also be stored, and the photo will be added to the Photo Catalog.

Photo-Catalog-imaag-32.png

Note that the project needs to be saved before running the capture image command.

Georeferencing Photos to the Map View

Many times, photos taken at a development or construction site are not georeferenced. However, there is great value to georeferencing these photos for context and design review.

Follow the steps given below to georeference a photo:

  1. Add the non-georeferenced photo(s) to the Photo Catalog using the Add Photos command, as described earlier in this article.
  2. From the Referenced Photos Table, click on the photo entry and then drag and drop the photo onto the Map View at the correct location. A photo marker will be placed there.Photo-Catalog-imaag-33.png
  3. If the Photo Catalog is unlocked, you can fine tune the location of the photo marker by clicking and dragging the photo marker to the precise location.

Alternatively, the user can display the Photo Details dialog box and georeference the photo using the [Pick] command.

If you need any further assistance, feel free to contact our technical support team. They will be glad to assist you.

Platform & GIS Tools › Project Management

Options Backstage Page - General Preferences

The General Preferences section of the Options backstage page allows the user to configure default settings at both the project and application levels. These settings are described in the following sections:

  • Project Options - General Preferences
  • Application Options - General Preferences

Project Options - General Preferences

The General Preferences section under the Project Options allows the user to control project-level settings. The changes made within this section apply only to the current project and are automatically updated when the project settings are modified.

The following sections describe the General Preferences section for each CivilGEO software.

GeoHECHMS

General-Preferences-Image-1.png

The options available in the General Preferences section of GeoHECHMS are as follows:

  • Project data units
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to set the data units used in the project. Available options are US Units and Metric (SI) Units. To learn how to set model units, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Drainage area units
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to set the units for the subbasin’s drainage area. The following options are available:
    • US Units - Acres, Feet2, Miles2
    • Metric (SI) Units - Hectares, Kilometers2, Meters2
  • Drainage length units
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to set the units for the length used in drainage elements (e.g., pipes, storage areas, etc.). The following options are available:
    • US Units - Feet, Miles
    • Metric (SI) Units - Kilometers, Meters
  • TOC/Lag Time units
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to set the time units used for TOC/Lag Time values. The following options are available:
    • US Units - Hours, Minutes
    • Metric (SI) Units - Hours, Minutes
  • SCS hydrograph peaking factor
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the peaking factor, which controls the volume of water on the rising and recession limbs. By default, the Standard (PRF=484) option is selected. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the hydrograph peaking factor.
  • Pipe dimensional units
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to set the units of the pipe dimensions. The following options are available:
    • US Units - Inches, Feet
    • Metric (SI) Units - Meters, mm, cm
  • Precipitation units
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to set the measurement units for rainfall or precipitation data. The following options are available:
    • US Units - Inches
    • Metric (SI) Units - mm
  • Output volume units
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to set the units for displaying output runoff volumes. The following options are available:
    • US Units - ac-ft, ac-in, ft3
    • Metric (SI) Units - 1000m3, m3

GeoHECRAS

General-Preferences-Image-2.png

The options available in the General Preferences section of GeoHECRAS are as follows:

  • Project data units
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to set the data units either in US or Metric (SI) units. To learn how to set model units, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Minimum distance between 2D flow area nodes
    This spin control checkbox option allows the user to define the minimum distance between 2D flow area nodes. By default, this checkbox is checked. To learn more about 2D flow area nodes, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

GeoSTORM

General-Preferences-Image-3.png

The options available in the General Preferences section of GeoSTORM under Project Options are similar to those in GeoHECHMS, as explained above in this article, with the following additional options:

  • Storage area units
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to set the units for the storage area. The following options are available:
    • US Units - Acres, Feet2, Miles2
    • Metric (SI) Units - Hectares, Kilometers2, Meters2
  • Flow units
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to set the units used to represent flow rates throughout the model, including inflow, outflow, and discharge through structures. The following options are available:
    • US Units - cfs
    • Metric (SI) Units - itr/sec, m3/s
  • Standard pipe dimensions
    This option allows the user to define the standard pipe dimensions to be provided in the Pipe Data dialog box. Clicking the [Define] button displays the Define Standard Pipe Dimensions dialog box that allows the user to define additional pipe diameters. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Pipe Data command.
  • Catch basin inlet type
    This option allows the user to select the type of catch basin structure that is being defined along the roadway segment. Clicking the [Select] button displays the Select Catch Basin Inlet Type dialog box, which allows the user to select an additional catch basin inlet type.
  • Storage chamber manufacturer
    This option allows the user to select the storage chamber manufacturer that the software supports. Clicking the [Select] button displays the Select Storage Chamber Manufacturer dialog box that allows the user to select additional storage chamber manufacturers. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about storage chamber manufacturers.
  • Subbasin - TOC/Lag Time Method
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the TOC/Lag time method to use. The following options are available: FAA TOC, SCS TR-55 TOC, and SCS Watershed Lag TOC. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about these methods.
  • Use acre-in/hr to cfs conversion factor for Rational Method
    This checkbox option allows the user to enable or disable the use of the 1.0083333208097 conversion factor in the Rational Method peak flow computation (i.e., Q = CIA). By default, this checkbox is checked.
  • Compute pipe interval WSEL profile during analysis
    This checkbox option allows the user to enable or disable the computation of the pipe interval water surface elevation (WSEL) profile while running the analysis. By default, this checkbox is checked.

Application Options - General Preferences

The General Preferences section under the Application Options allows the user to control application-level settings. The changes made within this section change the overall settings of the project at the application level. These changes will always be applied by default to the project when it is prepared.

The following sections describe the General Preferences section for each CivilGEO software.

GeoHECHMS

General-Preferences-Image-4.png

The options available in the General Preferences section of GeoHECHMS are as follows:

  • Application data units
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to set the application data units either in US or metric units.
  • Default local file location
    This read-only field displays the default local file locations. Clicking the adjacent [Browse] button allows the user to modify the folder location to save the files.
  • Default CRS
    This read-only field displays information of the default project CRS applied by the user. Clicking the adjacent [Assign Current CRS] button assigns the current project’s CRS as the default. Clicking the [Remove CRS] button removes the applied CRS. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the coordinate reference system (CRS).
  • Company logo
    This read-only field displays the name of the company logo. Clicking the […] button displays the Select Company Logo dialog box that allows the user to select the company logo file.
  • Define Keyboard Shortcuts
    Clicking the [Define Keyboard Shortcuts] button displays the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box, where the user can edit or assign keyboard shortcuts for any command. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the customization of keyboard shortcuts.

GeoHECRAS

General-Preferences-Image-5.png

The options available in the General Preferences section of GeoHECRAS under Application Options are similar to those in GeoHECHMS, as explained above in this article.

GeoSTORM

General-Preferences-Image-6.png

The options available in the General Preferences section of GeoSTORM under Application Options are similar to those in GeoHECHMS, as explained above in this article.

In addition, GeoSTORM provides additional options shown in the red rectangular box, which are similar to the General Preferences section of GeoSTORM under Project Options. Accordingly, refer to the General Preferences section of GeoSTORM under Project Options part of this article to learn more about them.

Platform & GIS Tools › Project Management

Options Backstage Page

In CivilGEO's software, the user can control various settings at the project and application levels which can be used for modeling a project. These settings can be viewed and modified from the Options backstage page under the File ribbon menu.

Options backstage page under the File ribbon menu

The Options backstage page is further divided into Project Options and Application Options.

Project Options and Application Options

The following sections describe different options available under the Project Options and Application Options.

Project Options

The Project Options allow the user to control various project-level settings of the model. The changes made within the Project Options change the overall setting at the project level. These changes are temporary and automatically updated based on the settings applied to the project.

The following table summarizes the Project Options available in each CivilGEO software:

unknown node

The different sections under the Project Options are as follows:

General Preferences

This section is common in GeoHECHMS, GeoHECRAS, and GeoSTORM. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about the options available under the General Preferences section.

General Preferences section under Project Options

HEC-HMS Options

HEC-RAS Analysis Engine section – Project Options

The options available under this section are as follows:

Note: This section is only available in GeoHECHMS.

  • HEC-HMS analysis engine
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to select which HEC-HMS analysis engine version should be used for the analysis computations.

This section also provides the option to choose the default hydrology methods for different HEC-HMS elements.

  • Subbasin Methods
    The available subbasin methods are Infiltration, Runoff, Baseflow, Storage, and Canopy. To learn more about these subbasin methods, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Subbasin Results Roundup
    In GeoHECHMS, the user can set the decimal digit precision for subbasin output results such as Impervious, Curve Number (CN), and TOC/Lagtime.
  • Subbasin Initial Abstraction Ratio
    The Initial abstraction ratio entry field allows the user to manually adjust the initial abstraction ratio for subbasins.
  • Reach Routing Methods
    The available routing methods are Kinematic wave, Lag Time, Lag Time & Attenuation, Modified Puls, Muskingum, Muskingum Cunge, Normal Depth, and Straddle Stagger. To learn more about these reach routing methods, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Reach Loss/Gain Method
    The available reach loss/gain methods are Constant Loss/Gain and Percolation Loss. Note that the Percolation Loss method is only active when Modified Puls or Muskingum Cunge is selected as the reach routing method. To learn more about Reach Loss/Gain methods, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Storage Area Routing Methods
    The available Storage Routing methods are Outflow Curve, Outflow Structures, and Specified Release.
  • Storage Area Storage Methods
    • If Outflow Curve is selected as the Storage Routing method, the available Storage Methods will be Elevation-Area-Discharge, Elevation-Storage-Discharge, and Storage-Discharge.
    • If Outflow Structures or Specified Release is selected as the Storage Routing method, the available Storage Methods will be Elevation-Area and Elevation-Volume.
  • Diversion Methods
    The available diversion methods are Constant Discharge, Inflow Diversion Table, Lateral Weir, Pump Station, and Time Series. To learn more about these diversion methods, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Source Discharge Methods
    The available source discharge methods are Constant Discharge and Discharge Hydrograph.
  • Meteorology Precipitation Types
    The available precipitation types are Frequency Storm, HMR52 Storm, Inverse Distance Weighted, Rain Gage, Rainfall Distribution, SCS Storm, Specified Hyetograph, and Standard Project Storm. To learn more about meteorology precipitation types, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Meteorology Precipitation Data Source
    This dropdown combo box entry is used to select a precipitation data source which can be used to retrieve the rainfall data for the selected storm frequency and storm duration. The dropdown entry provides the option to choose the precipitation data source for the USA, Austria, Ontario, and Germany.
  • Meteorology Evapotranspiration Types
    The available meteorology evapotranspiration types are Annual Evapotranspiration, Monthly Average, and User-Defined. To learn more about meteorology evapotranspiration types, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Decimal Digit Precision

This section is common in GeoHECHMS, GeoHECRAS, and GeoSTORM. This section allows the user to set the decimal digit precision for various model variables. Note that the Decimal Digit Precision section is common for both the Project Options and Application Options.

Default Values section – Project Options

The software contains the following model variables:

unknown node

Clicking the [Reset] button resets the decimal digit precision to default values.

HEC-RAS Analysis Engine

This section allows the user to select which version should be used for the analysis computations. To learn more about the HEC-RAS Analysis Engine section, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

HEC-HMS Options section under Application Options

Note: This section is only available in GeoHECRAS.

Default Values

Warning Checks section – Project Options

The options available under this section are as follows:

Note: This section is only available in GeoSTORM.

  • Manhole sump depth
    This entry field allows the user to define the sump depth required at the manhole. The sump depth of a manhole represents the vertical offset from the manhole bottom invert elevation to the lowest invert of the connected pipes.
  • Minimum Time of Concentration (TOC)
    This spin control entry allows the user to define the minimum time of concentration (in minutes) to prevent high runoff estimates for small subbasins. If the software computes a TOC less than the value specified in this entry, the software will use the defined Minimum TOC. Note that this entry is not applicable for the EPA SWMM hydrology method.
  • Maximum Time of Concentration (TOC)
    This checkbox spin control entry allows the user to define the maximum time of concentration (in minutes) that will be utilized in the runoff computations. If the software computes a TOC greater than the value specified in this entry, the software will use the defined Maximum TOC. If this entry is unchecked, then the computed TOC is not maximum value limited.
  • Subbasin - Initial abstraction ratio
    This entry field allows the user to manually adjust the initial abstraction ratio for subbasins.
  • Manhole freeboard depth
    This entry field allows the user to define the freeboard height of the manhole. The freeboard height is the distance between the rim elevation of the manhole and the water surface level.

Warning Checks

General Preferences section under Application Options

The options available under this section allow the user to check whether the defined model is outside the bounds of acceptable engineering practice. These values are used to generate warning messages in the report output.

Note: This section is only available in GeoSTORM.

  • Maximum allowable ground cover
    This entry field allows the user to define the maximum ground cover over a pipe. This entry is used to check that the pipe is not placed too deep below the terrain surface, where an excavator cannot dig the required trench depth to bury the pipe.
  • Minimum allowable ground cover
    This entry field allows the user to define the minimum ground cover over a pipe. This entry is used to check that the pipe does not come too close to the terrain surface, preventing the pipe from being crushed when vehicles travel over it or freezing during the winter season.
  • Maximum allowable peak pipe velocity
    This entry field allows the user to define the maximum allowable pipe velocity during the storm peak to prevent pipe joints from separating and to provide sufficient flow to flush debris. In cases where the pipe velocities are larger, anchor collars may be required.
  • Minimum allowable peak pipe velocity
    This entry field allows the user to define the recommended minimum pipe velocity during the storm peak to prevent the build-up and deposition of solids.
  • Maximum & minimum allowable pipe slopes
    This read-only field allows the user to define the maximum and minimum allowable pipe slopes from a design perspective. Clicking the [Define] button displays the Allowable Pipe Slopes dialog box that allows the user to define the recommended maximum and minimum pipe slope from a design perspective.
  • Peak depth/element depth capacity
    This spin control entry allows the user to define the ratio of peak depth to element depth to make certain that there is a reserve built into the flow link (i.e., pipes, channels, etc.) elements. If the computed ratio is larger than the value specified in this entry, the output value will be colored red.
  • Peak flow/design flow capacity
    This spin control entry allows the user to define the ratio of peak flow to design flow capacity to make certain that there is a reserve built into the flow link (i.e., pipes, channels, etc.) elements. This entry defines the percentage ratio of peak flow computed for the pipe by EPA SWMM to Manning’s pipe flow equation for the pipe. If the computed ratio is larger than the value specified in this entry, the output value will be colored red.
  • Peak headwater depth/culvert height ratio (HW/D)
    This entry field allows the user to define the ratio of headwater depth to culvert height for the corresponding culvert set, expressed as a ratio (HW/D) where HW is the total depth of water (measured from the invert of a culvert), and D is the interior height of the culvert barrel.
  • Maximum allowable gutter spread
    This entry field allows the user to define the maximum allowable gutter spread at a catch basin inlet. If the computed gutter spread is larger than the value specified in this entry, the output value will be colored red.
  • Reset
    Clicking the [Reset] button resets the warning check values to default values.

Application Options

The Application Options allow the user to control various application-level settings of the model. The changes made within the Application Options change the overall settings of the project at the application level. These changes will always be applied by default to the project when it is prepared.

The following table summarizes the Application Options available in each CivilGEO software:

unknown node

The different sections under the Application Options are as follows:

General Preferences

This section is common in GeoHECHMS, GeoHECRAS, and GeoSTORM. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about the options available under the General Preferences section.

General Preferences section under Application Options

HEC-HMS Options

This section and its underlying model variables are similar to the HEC-HMS Options section of the Project Options, except for the Lock selected engine for imported models checkbox option. This checkbox option causes the software to lock the selected HEC-HMS analysis engine for analysis computations in all imported models. By default, this checkbox is checked. Refer to the Project Options part of this article to learn more about these model variables.

Save Options section

Decimal Digit Precision

This section and its underlying model variables are similar to the Decimal Digit Precision section of the Project Options. Refer to the Project Options part of this article to learn more about them.

Save Options

This section is common in GeoHECHMS, GeoHECRAS, and GeoSTORM.

User Interface section

The options available under this section are as follows:

  • Retain backup files when closing program
    If this option is checked, then the software creates and retains the project's backup file. If this option is unchecked, then closing the program automatically deletes the existing backup file from the project folder.
  • Include model input files with archived projects
    If this option is checked, the software will include input files with the archived project. To learn more about project archiving, refer to this article in our knowledge base. Note that this checkbox option is not available in GeoSTORM.
  • Autosaving project every
    The Autosave project every option allows the user to set the time interval at which the project will automatically be saved. To learn more about project backup and autosaving, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Auto clear pyramided elevation DEMs cache every
    If this option is checked, the software will automatically clear cached pyramid layers of elevation DEMs at a set interval to free up storage and ensure up-to-date data.
  • Auto clear LIDAR point clouds cache every
    If this option is checked, the software will automatically clear cached LIDAR point cloud data at a set interval to optimize storage and maintain performance.
  • Google Street View image compression
    This dropdown combo entry allows the user to compress the image size (in Percentage) captured from the Google Street View command. To learn more about Google Street View image capturing, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Clear Cache
    Clicking the [Clear Cache] button displays the Clear Cache dialog box that allows the user to clear the cache memory for previously loaded base maps, pyramided elevation DEMs, and LIDAR point clouds. To learn more about the Clear Cache dialog box, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

User Interface

This section is common in GeoHECHMS, GeoHECRAS, and GeoSTORM.

HEC-RAS Analysis Engine section – Application Options

The options available under this section are as follows:

  • Theme
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to select a theme for the application interface. The available options are: Dark, Light, and Use System Setting.
  • Map background color
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to change the map background color with the available color options. The available options are: White, Black, Dark Gray, Medium Gray, Light Gray, Linen, Cornsilk, Light Peach, Light Blue, and Light Green.
  • Mouse wheel zoom
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to select the behavior of the mouse wheel with respect to zooming within the application. The available options are: Wheel up zooms in, Wheel up zooms out, and No action.
  • Snap aperture (pixels)
    This spin control entry allows the user to specify the size of the Snap aperture in pixels. Using this option, the software automatically snaps to the nearest adjoining complementary object within its snapping aperture.
  • Snap distance
    This entry field allows the user to specify the snapping distance (i.e., radial distance) used by the software to automatically snap to the nearest HEC-HMS element within the set snap distance or range.
  • Maximum number of recent projects
    This spin control entry allows the user to specify the number of recent projects displayed in the "Recent Projects" list for quick access.
  • Display “Recent Projects” on application startup
    If this option is checked, the software will show a list of recent projects when the application starts.
  • Confirm deletions
    If this option is checked, the software will always prompt the user to confirm the deletion of the project element(s).
  • Confirm element split
    If this option is checked, the software will always prompt the user to confirm the splitting of a project element.
  • Recompute dimensions on element edits
    If this option is checked, the software will automatically recompute the dimensions of the edited element whenever the user edits a model element.
  • Hide “Ask Simon” link on desktop
    If this option is checked, the software will hide the “Ask Simon” AI-enabled technical assistance link from the desktop.
  • Hide Google logo on Map View
    If this option is checked, the software will hide the Google logo from the map view in the application interface.
  • Application update notifications
    If this option is checked, the software will enable notifications to inform users when a new software update is available.

HEC-RAS Analysis Engine

Other Options section

The options available under this section are as follows:

Note: This section is only available in GeoHECRAS.

  • HEC-RAS analysis engine
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to select which HEC-RAS analysis engine version should be used for the analysis computations.
  • Lock selected engine for imported models
    This checkbox option causes the software to lock the selected HEC-RAS analysis engine for analysis computations in all imported models. By default, this checkbox is checked.

To learn more about the HEC-RAS Analysis Engine section, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Other Options

This section contains the Automatically reduce geometry points to checkbox entry that allows the user to automatically filter out unnecessary station-elevation points from project geometry. To learn more about geometry point reduction, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Options-Backstage-Page-Image-17.png

Note: This section is only available in GeoHECRAS.

Default Values

This section and its underlying model variables are similar to the Default Values section of the Project Options. Refer to the Project Options part of this article to learn more about them.

Platform & GIS Tools › Project Management

Project Archiving

Archiving is a process by which information or data are moved to a repository to securely store it for a longer period of time. It is a good practice to archive inactive or completed projects, so they do not clutter current project data and information. Project archiving is the best solution to keep the workspace clean. Some important benefits of project archiving are as follows:

  • Prevent loss of data
  • Retain all project data and settings
  • Ensure only certain people can access specific information
  • Keep project data and related information organized and easy to access

In CivilGEO software, project archiving can be performed with the Archive command.

Note that the following file formats are generally saved in the Archive command:

  • TIF (Text image file format)
  • DBF (Database file)
  • SHP (Shapefile)
  • SHX (Autodesk AutoCAD shape file)
  • XML (Extensible markup language)

In addition to the above file formats, when you run an analysis on the project file that you have archived, additional file formats, such as .dss; .hms; .regn; .pdata; .sqlite, .vrt, etc. will be saved.

Follow the steps below to use the Archive command:

  1. From the File ribbon menu, select the Archive command.
    Select the Archive command
  2. The Archive dialog box will be displayed.
  3. Browse to the desired location where you want to archive the project file, enter file name in the File name input field, and then click the [Save] button.
    Click the [Save] button
    Note that the user can click the [Cancel] button to close the dialog box.
  4. On clicking the [Save] button, the Archive dialog box will disappear, and the status bar (shown under the Map View) will display a message relating to archiving the project.
    Clicking the [Save] button
  5. Once finished, the software will then save the archived project at the specified location.
Platform & GIS Tools › Project Management

Running CivilGEO Software on Virtual Machines

Hardware virtualization software lets you run multiple operating system instances at the same time on a single computer. Many organizations have adopted virtualization practices to keep up with rapidly changing hardware and software requirements. Virtualization lets you run your applications on a virtual machine, isolated within a server. You need fewer physical machines and can pool computer resources.

What is a Virtual Machine?

A Virtual Machine (VM) is a compute resource that runs programs and deploys apps using software rather than an actual computer. The user can run more than one virtual machine on a single computer system. Each virtual machine has its own operating systems and functions independently of the others even when they are all running on the same computer system.

This article describes how to run CivilGEO software on a virtual machine.

Note: If you plan to install and run CivilGEO software in a virtual environment, check system requirements and verify that the terms and conditions of your license allow use in a virtual environment. Not all licenses permit virtual use.

Prerequisites

This section explains the hardware and software requirements for running CivilGEO software on virtual machines. Make certain to check the following:

  • The virtual machine must be installed on the computer system.
  • The GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) must be enabled on the computer system. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to enable GPU rendering for remote desktop connections.
  • Make certain that the installed virtual machine meets the computer system requirements of the CivilGEO software you want to run. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to know the hardware and software requirements for running CivilGEO software.

Checking Licensing Compatibility

CivilGEO software is licensed as either a Node-Locked Workstation License, Floating Network License, or Cloud License. For virtual machines, the user can use the Floating Network License, and Cloud License only.

To learn more about the types of licenses and how to activate them, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Installing CivilGEO software on Virtual Machine

To install CivilGEO software on virtual machines, follow the steps below:

  1. Open the virtual machine that you are using.
  2. Download the CivilGEO software setup file. To learn more about downloading the CivilGEO software, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  3. Once the download is complete, double-click on the downloaded installation file.
  4. The installation program will startup. Follow the instructions to install the software.

File Sharing Tips

The user should be careful while sharing files between a virtual machine on which the CivilGEO software is running and the host machine. Note that the CivilGEO software needs to place all created, imported, and exported files from CivilGEO on the same computer system (either a virtual machine or host machine) on which they are installed. Therefore, if the software is installed on the virtual machine, the user cannot save the project on the host machine and run project files from the virtual machine. The user must save the files to the virtual machine where the software and its license server configuration utility are installed.

The following methods can be used to share files between the virtual machine and host machine:

  • Using drag-and-drop
  • Using copy and paste
  • Using shared folders
  • Mapping a virtual disk to the host computer system

Performance Tuning Tips

The slow performance issues of the virtual machine when compared to the host are quite common. Therefore, the virtual machine requires a performance tuning approach to fix slow performance issues. The following performance tuning tips can help users speed up their virtual machines:

  1. Allocate additional memory
  2. Exclude virtual machine directories from antivirus tools
  3. Use fixed-sized disks instead of dynamically allocated disks
  4. Defragment your virtual machine
  5. Provide additional CPU
  6. Instead of shutting down, save your virtual machine’s state
  7. Try a different virtual machine software
Platform & GIS Tools › Project Management

Clear Cache Command

CivilGEO software stores temporary data files to improve performance when displaying base maps, elevation terrain grids, and LIDAR point clouds on the Map View. Over time, as the user loads different base maps, processes multiple elevation grids, or imports large LIDAR datasets, the cache may become full or contain outdated or corrupted data. When this happens, the affected data may appear distorted, malformed, or fail to render correctly on the Map View.

The Clear Cache command allows the user to clear previously stored cache files for loaded base maps, pyramided elevation DEMs, and LIDAR point clouds.

unknown node

Cache Data Categories

The Clear Cache dialog box allows the user to select which category of cache data to clear. The three available categories are described below.

unknown node

unknown node

Follow the steps below to use the Clear Cache command.

  1. From the File ribbon menu, click the [Clear Cache] button under the Save Options section of the Options backstage page, as shown below.
    unknown node

    To learn more about the Options backstage page, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  2. The Clear Cache dialog box will be displayed. Select the checkbox option(s) for the category of cache data to be cleared and then click the [Clear] button.
    unknown node
  3. The software will close the dialog box, return the user to the Map View, and clear the cache memory for the selected option(s). In addition, a status bar message will be displayed at the bottom of the Map View confirming that the cache has been cleared, as shown below.
    unknown node

Freeing Up Disk Space

Cache files are stored on the local computer and can consume a meaningful amount of disk space over time, particularly for projects that use multiple base map providers, large terrain surfaces, or dense LIDAR datasets. Using the Clear Cache command frees up the disk space used by the temporary cache files, which can be useful on computers with limited available storage.

unknown node


Platform & GIS Tools › Project Management

Record Video Command

In CivilGEO software, the Record Video command allows the user to publish the Map View data to a video file. Saving the Map View data in a video file gives the user the ability to effortlessly use the data with other applications.

The user can also publish the Map View data into image and PDF files with the following commands:

  • Publish Graphics
    This command is used to publish the Map View data into the image file. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about this command.
  • Publish PDF
    This command is used to publish the Map View data into a PDF file. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about this command.

Follow the steps below to use the Record Video command:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, select the Record Video command.
    • In GeoHECRAS
      Record Video command ribbon menu
    • In GeoHECHMS
      Record Video command ribbon menu
  2. The Record Video dialog box will be displayed.
    Record Video dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Record Video command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Video Format

The Select Video Format section allows the user to define the resolution and directory location for the created video. The user can also use the capturing option to define which portion of the screen is recorded in the video.

Click the […] button beside the Export file entry to specify the directory and the file name for purposes of saving the created video. The software will display the Save As dialog box. From the displayed dialog box, browse to the location to save the file, enter the file name, and then click the [Save] button.

Save As dialog box

On clicking the [Save] button, the Record Video dialog box will be redisplayed, and the complete directory path and file name for saving the video file will be shown in the Export file entry.

Record Video dialog box

The Video resolution dropdown combo box allows the user to select the resolution for the video format to be published. The dropdown combo box contains the following options:

  • 240px - Web
  • 360px - Standard
  • 480px - High Quality
  • 720px - HD
  • 1080px - Full HD
Record Video dialog box
  • Capture Map View: Selecting this radio button option causes the software to capture only the map view screen of the application in use.
  • Capture Full Application: Selecting this radio button option causes the software to capture the entire screen of the application.
  • Capture Scale Bar: Selecting this checkbox option causes the software to add the scale bar to the created video.
  • Capture Compass: Selecting this checkbox option causes the software to add the compass rose in the created video.
  • Open folder after recording: Selecting this checkbox option causes the software to automatically open the folder where the created video is saved after finishing the recording. This can be helpful for quickly sharing the video file with others.

Adding Watermark

The Add Watermark section allows the user to add a watermark to the created video. The user can customize the position, size, and transparency of the watermark per the user’s preferences. By default, this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Check the Add Watermark checkbox to enable this section.

Add Watermark section

The Watermark file entry is used to select the image file to be used as a video watermark. Click the […] button to select the directory location of the image file that will be used as a video watermark. After selecting the image file, the complete directory path and file name will be shown in the Watermark file entry.

The Location dropdown combo box allows the user to select the position of the watermark in the created video. The dropdown combo box contains the following options:

  • Bottom Left
  • Bottom Right
  • Center
  • Top Left
  • Top Right
Add Watermark section


The Watermark size option allows the user to control the size of the watermark to be displayed in the created video. The user can adjust the size of the watermark from the Width and Height spin control entry fields. By default, the software sets the width and height of the watermark image at 0. The user can increase or decrease the width and height to make the watermark image larger or smaller.

The Watermark transparency option allows the user to modify the opacity of the watermark in the created video using the horizontal slider. A transparency value of 40 to 50% works well.

Capturing Mouse

The Capture Mouse section allows the user to record the mouse cursor in the created video. This can be helpful to see exactly what you are clicking on and selecting. By default, this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Check the Capture Mouse checkbox to enable this section.

Capture Mouse section

The Capture mouse click checkbox option causes the software to record the sound of mouse clicks in the created video. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked and the options that appear below it are disabled (i.e., grayed out). Check the checkbox to enable the Left click color and Right click color options as shown below.

Capture Mouse section

The Left click color option allows the user to change the color of the left mouse-click cursor. This can be helpful for purposes of making videos more visually appealing or emphasizing certain actions. The color selector next to this option is used to choose a new color for the left mouse-click cursor.

The Right click color option allows the user to change the color of the right-mouse click cursor. This can be helpful for purposes of making videos more visually appealing or emphasizing certain actions. The color selector next to this option is used to choose a new color for the right mouse-click cursor.

Capturing Audio

The Capture Audio section allows the user to record audio from a variety of sources, including a computer's microphone, an external microphone, or a soundboard. By default, this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Check the Capture Audio checkbox to enable this section.

Capture Audio section

The Capture system sound dropdown option allows the user to select the audio source to record for the video. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked and the dropdown combo box next to this option is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Check the checkbox to enable the dropdown combo box.

The dropdown combo box contains the following options:

  • Default playback device
  • Speakers (Realtek(R) Audio)
  • Speakers (5-Logitech USB Headset H340)
Capture Audio section


The Capture voice dropdown option allows the user to select the audio source for purposes of a voice recording. This can be helpful if the user wants to record his or her voice separately from the system sound or a different source, such as a microphone. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked and the dropdown combo box next to this option is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Check the checkbox to enable the dropdown combo box.

The dropdown combo box contains the following options:

  • Default recording device
  • Microphone Array (Realtek(R) Audio)
  • Microphone (5-Logitech USB Headset H340)
Capture Audio section

Recording Video

When all the data have been defined, click the [Start Recording] button to start recording a new video.

Record Video dialog box

The software will display the following window and start recording the Map View. Navigate on the Map View to record the desired model extent.

Record window
  • Pause button: This button is used to start and stop recording.
  • Stop button: This button is used to stop recording and save the created video.
  • Restart button: This button is used to discard the current recording and start a new recording from the beginning of the video.
  • Duration: This pane displays the length of the video recording. The first digit represents the hours, the next two digits represent the minutes, and the last two digits represent the seconds.

When the recording has been finished, press the Stop button to stop the recording. The software will then save the Map View data into the video file at the specified location.

Note that if the file name specified in the Export file entry of the Select Video Format section already exists at the directory location, the following confirmational dialog box will be displayed.

Record Video confirmational dialog box
Platform & GIS Tools › Project Management

Publish PDF Command

In CivilGEO software, the Publish PDF command allows the user to publish the Map View data to a PDF file. PDF files are easy to share, review, and include in project deliverables while preserving the map layout and presentation. The user can control the page size and orientation, choose whether to include map layers and other map elements, and define the portion of the Map View to publish.

The user can also publish the Map View data into image and video files with the following commands:

  • Publish Graphics
    This command is used to publish the Map View data into an image file. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about this command.
  • Record Video
    This command is used to publish the Map View data into a video file. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about this command.

Follow the steps below to use the Publish PDF command:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, select the Publish PDF command.
    unknown node
  2. The Publish PDF dialog box will be displayed.
    unknown node
  3. Click the […] button adjacent to the Export file entry field.
  4. The Save As dialog box will be displayed. Browse to the location where you want to save the PDF file, enter a file name, and click the [Save] button.
    unknown node
  5. The Publish PDF dialog box will be redisplayed, and the complete directory path and file name will be shown in the Export file entry field.
    unknown node
  6. From the Page size dropdown combo box, select the required page dimensions for the PDF document. Selecting an appropriate page size helps ensure that the Map View content fits within the defined layout. The following page size options are available:
    unknown node
  7. From the Orientation option, the user can select the required page orientation for the PDF document. Two radio button options are available:
    unknown node
    • Portrait
      This option displays the content of the page vertically, with the page height greater than its width.
    • Landscape
      This option displays the content of the page horizontally, with the page width greater than its height.
  1. Check the following checkbox options to export the Map View data into a PDF file in different formats.
    unknown node
    • Layered
      This checkbox option is used to export map layers loaded in the project as separate layers in the PDF file. By default, this checkbox is unchecked.
    • Map scale bar
      This checkbox option is used to include the map scale bar in the PDF file. By default, this checkbox is unchecked.
    • Map compass
      This checkbox option is used to include the compass rose in the PDF file. By default, this checkbox is unchecked.
unknown node
  1. From the Publish Data Limits section, the user can use one of the following options to define the Map View graphic limits to be published:
    • User-defined limits
      This option allows the user to draw a rectangular extent to define the graphic limits. Follow the steps below to use this option:
      • Select the User-defined limits radio button option and click the [Pick] button.
        unknown node
      • The Publish PDF dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw the rectangular extent.
      • Click and drag the left mouse button to draw the rectangular extent.
      • On releasing the mouse button, the Publish PDF dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the User-defined limits read-only field will be changed from Undefined to Defined.
    • Clipping polygons
      This option allows the user to select one or more existing polygons to define the graphic limits. Follow the steps below to use this option:
      • Select the Clipping polygons radio button option and click the [Pick] button.
        unknown node
      • The Publish PDF dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the clipping polygons.
      • Select the polygon(s) on the Map View. When all polygons have been selected, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
      • The Publish PDF dialog box will be redisplayed, and the number of selected polygons will be displayed in the Clipping polygons read-only field.
  1. When all the data have been defined, click the [Export] button, and the software will publish the Map View data into the PDF file at the selected location.
    unknown node
Platform & GIS Tools › Project Management

Publish Graphics Command

In CivilGEO software, the Publish Graphics command allows the user to publish the Map View data as a graphic file. The command provides control over how the image is generated, including the output file format, the area of the map to capture, and the coordinate reference system (CRS) assigned to the exported file. Saving the Map View data as a graphics file makes it easy to include the map in reports, presentations, and other applications, or to share a snapshot of the model with the project team.

The user can also publish the Map View data into PDF and video files with the following commands:

  • Publish PDF
    This command is used to publish the Map View data into a PDF file. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about this command.
  • Record Video
    This command is used to publish the Map View data into a video file. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about this command.

Follow the steps below to use the Publish Graphics command:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, select the Publish Graphics command.
    unknown node
  2. The Publish Graphics dialog box will be displayed.
    unknown node

The following sections describe how to use the Publish Graphics command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Publish Format

The Select Publish Format section allows the user to define where the graphic file is saved. Click the […] button beside the Export file entry to specify the directory location and the file name to save the graphics. The software displays the Save As dialog box, where the user browses to the location, enters the file name, and clicks the [Save] button.

Publish Graphics Command Img 3unknown node

On clicking the [Save] button, the Publish Graphics dialog box will be redisplayed, and the complete directory path and file name will be shown in the Export file entry.

Publish Graphics Command Img 4

In addition, the following checkboxes are available in the Select Publish Format section to control how the graphic data is exported:

  • Grayscale: Selecting this checkbox option exports the graphics data in grayscale.
  • Tiled: Selecting this checkbox option exports the graphics data in a tiled format.
  • Pyramid: Selecting this checkbox option exports the graphics data in a pyramid format.
  • Map scale bar: Selecting this checkbox option includes the map scale bar in the exported graphics file.
  • Map compass: Selecting this checkbox option includes the compass rose in the exported graphics file.
  • Map legend: Selecting this checkbox option includes the Map View legend in the exported graphics file.

Publish Data Limits

This section allows the user to define the extent of the Map View area to include in the published graphics file.

Publish Graphics Command Img 5

The following options are available:

  • User-defined limits
    This option allows the user to draw a rectangular extent to define the graphic limits. Click the [Pick] button to select the graphic limits on the Map View. The dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw the rectangular extent. Click and drag a rectangular region to define the limits. After releasing the mouse, the Publish Graphics dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the User-defined limits read-only field will be changed from Undefined to Defined.
  • Clipping Polygons
    This option allows the user to select one or more existing polygons to define the graphic limits. Click the [Pick] button to select the polygon shape region(s) on the Map View. The dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the clipping polygons. Select the clipping polygons on the Map View and press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Publish Graphics dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected polygons will be displayed in the Clipping polygons read-only field.
  • Model extents
    Select this radio button option to use the model extents to define the graphic limits. If a project model has been defined, this option will create a bounding rectangular region to correspond to the extent of the defined model, plus an additional buffer boundary.

Publish Options

This section allows the user to select the coordinate reference system (CRS) to apply to the published Map View data. The user can select the required CRS from the Export data CRS dropdown combo box. This dropdown combo box lists the CRS associated with the layers currently loaded in the model.

Publish Graphics Command Img 6

Publishing Data to Graphics

When all the options have been defined, click the [Export] button. The software will publish the Map View data as a graphics file and save it to the specified location.

Platform & GIS Tools › AI Assistant

Ask Simon - CivilGEO's AI Assistant

While working on engineering projects, civil engineers may occasionally run into unexpected command or setup issues. With Ask Simon, CivilGEO’s inbuilt AI assistant trained on the company’s own knowledge base, users can get instant, context-specific support directly within the software—keeping projects moving smoothly without interruptions.

What is Ask Simon?

Ask Simon is an AI-powered modeling assistant built into CivilGEO’s engineering software. It provides instant, intelligent help to users facing modeling challenges, offering clear answers to project-related questions.

By utilizing CivilGEO’s extensive knowledge base, Ask Simon delivers accurate, context-aware guidance tailored to the user’s current task. It also assists with navigating workflow automation tools, helping engineers streamline their work and complete projects faster with fewer interruptions.

To access Ask Simon within CivilGEO software, open the software and select Ask Simon from the Help ribbon menu.

Ask Simon

The side panel for Ask Simon will be displayed alongside the software window.

Ask Simon - Side Panel

Key Features of Ask Simon

CivilGEO’s Ask Simon comes with the following features and functionalities:

  • Predefined Software-Related Queries
    To save time, Ask Simon includes a list of commonly asked questions related to CivilGEO software. Users can simply click the [Click to ask] button next to any suggested query to instantly view a relevant response.
    [Click to ask] Button
  • Contextual Search with AI-Powered Knowledge Base Integration
    Ask Simon allows users to quickly search CivilGEO’s knowledge base using natural language queries. Simply type your modeling question into the input field and click submit, Simon will return relevant, context-specific guidance based on your current task.
    Typing Modeling-related Queries and Clicking Submit to Get Relevant Answers
  • Specialized Support for Civil Engineering Projects
    Ask Simon is purpose-built for civil engineering workflows. It provides targeted support for stormwater modeling, HEC-RAS, HEC-HMS, and other related project types—delivering answers and guidance that are highly relevant to the tasks engineers perform within CivilGEO software.
  • 24x7 AI Support
    With Ask Simon, users get round-the-clock assistance for basic modeling questions, eliminating the need to wait for traditional support. The AI assistant is always available within the software, providing instant help whenever it is needed.
  • Multi-Language Support
    Ask Simon supports multiple languages, allowing users to ask questions in the language they’re most comfortable with. The assistant understands and responds in the same language, making it easier for non-English-speaking engineers to get the help they need.

For example, if a user wants to know about "Stormwater Element Display Properties" in German, they can simply ask:

“Was sind die Anzeigeeigenschaften von Regenwasserelementen?”

Simon will respond with the correct information in German, as shown below:

Multi-Language Support

Benefits of Using Ask Simon

Ask Simon empowers engineers with:

  • Faster project turnaround with minimal support dependency
  • Smarter project modeling and design suggestions
  • Instant support for command usage and setup configuration
  • Simplified access to relevant documentation and knowledge base articles

Integrated directly within the CivilGEO software products, Simon simplifies complex workflows by delivering engineering-specific guidance exactly when and where it is needed. For the best results, users should enter their queries clearly to help Simon deliver the most accurate and helpful responses.

Your Data Privacy and Security

We understand that your engineering projects contain sensitive and proprietary information. We want to be absolutely clear: Ask Simon does not access, use, or train on your project data or files. Your engineering projects, models, and design work remain completely private and secure within your own environment.

Ask Simon has been exclusively trained using publicly available technical documentation from authoritative sources, including US Army Corps of Engineers HEC-RAS documentation, US Army Corps of Engineers HEC-HMS documentation, EPA's SWMM documentation, and CivilGEO's own published knowledge base articles and technical guides. The AI assistant draws from this foundation of engineering standards and best practices to answer your technical questions—not from any client project data.

When you interact with Ask Simon, your questions are processed to provide you with relevant answers, but your project files, model data, and engineering designs are never transmitted, stored, analyzed, or used for any AI training purposes. We maintain strict data separation to ensure that your proprietary work remains yours alone. Your data security and confidentiality are fundamental to our commitment to you as our client.

Platform & GIS Tools › Keyboard Shortcuts

Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts Listing

Typing-at-Keyboard.jpg

The following list details the available keyboard and mouse shortcuts to speed up your work.

unknown node
Platform & GIS Tools › Keyboard Shortcuts

Customizing Keyboard Shortcuts

CivilGEO's software provides a keyboard shortcut library where you can edit or assign your own keyboard shortcuts for any command. For example, if you frequently use the Extract Cross Section Geometry command, you can assign the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+E to start the Extract Cross Section Geometry command.

Our software supports the following keyboard shortcut combinations:

  • Function (Fn) keys containing no modifiers
  • Numpad keys containing no modifiers
  • Letters, numbers and symbols containing no modifiers
  • Ctrl+letter, Ctrl+number, Ctrl+symbol, Ctrl+function
  • Ctrl+Alt+letter, Ctrl+Alt+number, Ctrl+Alt+symbol, Ctrl+Alt+function
  • Ctrl+Shift+letter, Ctrl+Shift+number, Ctrl+Shift+symbol, Ctrl+Shift+function
  • Ctrl+Shift+Alt+letter, Ctrl+Shift+Alt+number, Ctrl+Shift+Alt+symbol, Ctrl+Shift+Alt+function

Follow the steps below to customize or view the keyboard shortcuts list:

  1. Select Options from the File ribbon menu to display the Options backstage page.
    Options Backstage Page
  2. Select the General Preferences section under Application Options and click the [Define Keyboard Shortcuts] button to view the keyboard shortcuts list. Alternatively, press the Ctrl+Period keys from the keyboard.
    Define Keyboard Shortcuts Button
  3. The Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box will be displayed.
    Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box

The above dialog box lists all the shortcut key combinations along with their command names. Commands related to a certain ribbon menu section are grouped together and named after the ribbon menu. For example, commands related to the Input ribbon menu will be grouped under the Input section.

Note that each section and its associated commands are arranged alphabetically.

The following sections describe how to create, modify, or remove keyboard shortcuts and interact with the above dialog box.

Modifying Keyboard Shortcuts

To modify the keyboard shortcut of a command, follow the steps below:

  1. Select the command whose keyboard shortcut is to be modified. Then, click the edit tool adjacent to the pre-set keyboard shortcut keys as shown below.
    Edit shortcut key option
  2. Enter the new shortcut key combination. Note that our software includes pre-set keyboard shortcuts for frequently used commands to make your workflow easier. If you try to set a shortcut key that clashes with another command's keyboard shortcut, a warning message will be displayed, as shown below.
    Invalid Keyboard Shortcut dialog box
  3. To learn about default keyboard shortcuts in our software, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  4. Then, save the changes to assign the new shortcut key combination, as shown below.
    Save shortcut key option
  5. Close the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box.

Adding Commands to Keyboard Shortcuts

To add new commands to the keyboard shortcuts library, follow the steps below:

  1. Open the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box as shown in the previous section.
  2. Click the [Add Keyboard Shortcut] button.
    [Add Keyboard Shortcut] button
  3. The Add Keyboard Shortcut dialog box will be displayed. The dialog box groups all the key ribbon menu commands into the appropriate sections.
    Add Keyboard Shortcut dialog box
  4. Scroll down and select the command you would like to add to the keyboard shortcuts library.
  5. Click the edit tool.
    Edit shortcut key option
  6. Enter the custom shortcut key combination to assign to this command.
  7. Now, save the changes as shown below.
    Save shortcut key option
  8. Close the Add Keyboard Shortcut dialog box.
  9. The shortcut key combination, along with the command name, will be listed under its respective section in the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box.
    Input section of Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box
  10. Close the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box.

Note that to remove a keyboard shortcut, the user can click the X option adjacent to the assigned shortcut keys as shown below.

Clear shortcut key option

Restoring Keyboard Shortcuts to Default Values

To reset the keyboard shortcuts to default values, follow the steps below:

  1. Open the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box.
  2. Click the [Reset to Defaults] button.
    [Reset to Defaults] button
  3. The Reset Keyboard Shortcuts confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
    Reset Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box
  4. Click the [Yes] button to reset keyboard shortcuts to default values. To cancel the process, click the [No] button.
  5. Close the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box.
Platform & GIS Tools › Land Use Tools

Land Use Data

The terms land cover data and land use data are often used interchangeably, yet their meanings are substantially different. Land cover data documents the physical characteristics of Earth’s surface—whether it is forest, tidal wetland, urbanized region, or grassland. Land use data refers to how people utilize the land—whether for agricultural, recreational, residential, commercial, or industrial purposes.

Land Use and Land Cover (LULC) data sets are raster (occasionally vector) files developed by classifying raw satellite data into land use and land cover classes. LULC raster files contain multiple band layers, each of which is color coded according to the LULC category—for example, one RGB band layer can identify grasslands, another bare lands, and yet another, wetlands.

Land-Use-Data-image

LULC classification schemes are typically arranged in a nested hierarchy where land cover is often used at the macro scale (urbanized land for example) and land use becomes apparent with increasing map detail where the actual use (residential, industrial, mixed urban etc.) is identified. Below are two levels of a popular multilevel classification system designed by the United States Geological Survey (USGS), with each level mapping to more detailed land use and land cover classes.

unknown node

Sources of Land Use/Land Cover Data

Various global and regional land use and land cover datasets relating to land shapes and usage, whether natural or affected by humans, are available online. Some of the most popular land use and land cover data collections are listed below:

unknown node

Processing Commands for Land Use Data

Land use/land cover (LULC) changes are important elements out of the many active environmental factors affecting catchment hydrology. This is because changes in land use have an impact on hydrologic components such as evapotranspiration (ET), interception, and infiltration, all of which can significantly impact surface and subsurface flows.

There are not many LULC datasets available, owing to the high cost of collecting satellite data and the time-consuming categorization process. In addition, the majority of LULC data products are published many years after the satellite photos were obtained, making them somewhat out of date by the time they are released. As a result, up-to-date spatial data on land use and land cover dynamics might be inconsistent and incomplete.

Nevertheless, extensive knowledge on the status of land and the changes to land use and land cover is essential to the process of developing accurate hydrologic predictions for sustainable regional (re)development. Within GeoHECHMS, the Draw Land Use and Classify Land Use commands can be used to address inconsistencies and gaps in land use and land cover data.

The Draw Land Use command allows the user to manually define land use by interactively painting different regions of land use type in order to create a thematic land use layer. To learn more about this command, refer to this article in our Knowledge Base.

The Classify Land Use command allows the user to geospatially analyze an orthophoto and then categorize land use using an automatic color segmentation approach for regions where land cover data is not available. To learn more about this command, refer to this article in our Knowledge Base.

Platform & GIS Tools › Land Use Tools

Land Cover Command

The Land Cover command of CivilGEO software allows the user to display both natural and man-made land cover data for a selected region on the Map View. Supported regions include the United States, Canada, Canada – Ontario, Europe, Africa, India, Australia, and New Zealand. This command is an important tool for watershed analysis, hydrologic modeling, ecological assessment, and land-use planning. It allows users an immediate visual reference for the physical characteristics of the study area directly within the software.

Land cover data represent the physical characteristics of Earth’s surface—whether it is forest, tidal wetland, urbanized region, or grassland. Using land cover data, the user can examine landscape patterns and characteristics as given below:

  • The extent, availability, and condition of lands.
  • The extent, structure, and condition of ecological systems.
  • The potential dispersion and environmental effects of chemicals and other pollutants.

Land cover also influences or has an impact on watershed hydrology, including water quality, environmental conditions, habitat and species composition, climate, and carbon storage. It also alters hydrologic regimes, runoff patterns, and flood buffering in watersheds.

The user can use land cover data as a starting point from which various monitoring activities (change detection) can be performed. This land cover information can be used for many purposes, such as assessing non-point sources of pollution, understanding landscape variables for ecological analysis, assessing the behavior of chemicals, and analyzing the effects of air pollution.

Note that a coordinate reference system (CRS) should be assigned to the project before running the Land Cover command. Otherwise, the software will display the informational dialog box below.
unknown node

To learn more about the coordinate reference system (CRS), refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Displaying Land Covers for Different Regions

To display land cover on the Map View, select the Land Cover dropdown menu from the Map Data ribbon menu.
unknown node

The following countries are listed under the Land Cover dropdown menu:

unknown node

Clicking on any of the desired countries listed above will cause the software to display the Land Cover dialog box, as shown below.
unknown node

The Layer name entry field allows the user to define the name of the new land cover layer to be created and displayed in the Map Data Layers panel. The software sets “NLCD Land Cover 24” as the default layer name, which is editable.

The Land cover data source dropdown combo box allows the user to select which land use data source to utilize for the newly created layer. By default, the software selects the latest land use data. The following options are available in the dropdown combo box:

  • NLCD Land Cover 2024
  • NLCD Land Cover 2021
  • NLCD Land Cover 2019
  • NLCD Land Cover 2016
  • NLCD Land Cover 2013
  • NLCD Land Cover 2011
  • NLCD Land Cover 2008
  • NLCD Land Cover 2006
  • NLCD Land Cover 2004
  • NLCD Land Cover 2001

unknown node

If the “Overwrite existing data” checkbox option is checked, then the new land cover data selected in the Land cover data source dropdown combo box will overwrite the existing land cover data (if one exists). This is useful when updating the project to use a more recent land cover dataset without creating a duplicate layer.

Note that for countries other than the USA, the Land cover data source dropdown combo box and Overwrite existing data checkbox options are not available.

Adding Land Cover Layer on the Map View

Once the layer name and data source have been defined, click the [OK] button to add the land cover layer for the selected region on the Map View.

In the Map Data Layers panel, the software will provide a data legend for each land cover layer that lists the land cover classification categories included within that layer. The user can expand the layer to view the data legend, as shown below.
unknown node

Platform & GIS Tools › Land Use Tools

Urban Impervious Command

The Urban Impervious command of CivilGEO software allows the user to display global or regional (United States and Europe only) urban impervious surface data directly on the Map View. This command is a valuable resource for users who need to assess the degree of imperviousness across an urban study area, which is a key factor in determining runoff volumes, peak flows, and overall flood risk.

An impervious surface is any hard surface that prevents or significantly reduces water infiltration into the soil. Common impervious surfaces include rooftops, walkways, patios, driveways, parking lots, storage areas, concrete and asphalt paving, and gravel roads.

In urban watersheds, the cumulative extent and density of impervious surfaces has a direct impact on the rainfall-runoff relationship. As impervious cover increases, more precipitation is converted to surface runoff rather than infiltrating into the soil. This can increase runoff volumes and peak flow rates, reduce groundwater recharge, and degrade downstream water quality.

Impervious surface area data are useful for a wide range of engineering and planning applications, including:

  • Calibrating and validating stormwater and hydrologic models.
  • Estimating composite curve numbers and impervious fractions for subbasins.
  • Assessing non-point source pollutant loads in urban watersheds.
  • Supporting watershed-scale water quality studies.
  • Evaluating the cumulative effects of urban development on flood risk.
  • Identifying areas with high imperviousness that may benefit from green infrastructure or low impact development (LID) practices.

Note that a coordinate reference system (CRS) should be assigned to the project before running the Urban Impervious command. Otherwise, the software will display the informational dialog box below.
unknown node

To learn more about the coordinate reference system (CRS), refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Displaying Urban Impervious Surfaces for Different Regions

To display the urban impervious data on the Map View, select the Urban Impervious dropdown menu from the Map Data ribbon menu.
unknown node

The following countries are listed under the Urban Impervious dropdown menu:

unknown node

Clicking on any of the desired countries listed above will cause the software to display the Urban Impervious dialog box, as shown below.
unknown node

The Layer name entry field allows the user to define the name of a new impervious layer to be created and displayed in the Map Data Layers panel. The software sets “NLCD Impervious 2024” as the default layer name, which is editable.

The Urban impervious data source dropdown combo box allows the user to select which impervious data source to utilize for the newly created layer. By default, the software selects the latest available impervious data. The following options are available in the dropdown combo box:

  • NLCD Impervious 2024
  • NLCD Impervious 2021
  • NLCD Impervious 2019
  • NLCD Impervious 2016
  • NLCD Impervious 2013
  • NLCD Impervious 2011
  • NLCD Impervious 2008
  • NLCD Impervious 2006
  • NLCD Impervious 2004
  • NLCD Impervious 2001

unknown node

If the “Overwrite existing data” checkbox option is checked, then the new urban impervious data selected in the Urban impervious data source dropdown combo box will overwrite the existing urban impervious data (if one exists). This is useful when updating the project to use a more recent Impervious dataset without creating a duplicate layer.

Note that for countries other than the USA, the Urban impervious data source dropdown combo box and Overwrite existing data checkbox options are not available.

Adding Urban Impervious Layer on the Map View

Once the layer name and data source have been defined, click the [OK] button to display the impervious surface data for the selected region on the Map View.

In the Map Data Layers panel, the software will provide a data legend for each impervious surface layer that lists the impervious surface percentage ranges and their corresponding color classifications included within that layer. The user can expand the layer to view the data legend, as shown below.

Map Data Layers panel
Platform & GIS Tools › Land Use Tools

Automated Land Use Command

The Automated Land Use command is used to automatically compute land use polygons using alternate mapping source data and a predefined machine learning algorithm. To learn about classified land use, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Follow the steps below to use the Automated Land Use command:

  1. From the Map Data ribbon menu, select the Automated Land Use command. Automated Land Use command
  2. The Automated Land Use dialog box will be displayed. Automated Land Use dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Automated Land Use command and interact with the above dialog box.

General Specifications

In this section, the user can specify the name of the land use layer. By default, the land use layer name is Classified Land Use which can be changed by the user.

Classify Land Use Limits

In this section, the user can choose one of the following three options for defining the classify land use limits:

  • Current screen limits: The software will use the existing extent of the Map View screen display as a boundary limit for the land use layer to be created.
  • User-defined limits: The user can click on the [Pick] button and draw a rectangle on the Map View representing the user-defined limits for the land use layer to be created.
  • Model extents: If a project model has been defined, this option will create a bounding rectangular region corresponding to the extents of the defined model, plus an additional buffer boundary.

After all the options have been defined, click the [OK] button. The software will then download the land use layer data and create a land use layer. The software will also display the land use layer data on the Map View as shown below.

Land use layer data

After the land use layer data is downloaded, the software will then place the downloaded land use layer in the Map Data Layers panel. Expand the layer to see the land use classifications in detail.

Map Data Layers panel

Clicking the […] button adjacent to the created land use layer will display the Land Use Properties dialog box as shown below.

Land Use Properties dialog box

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about Land Use Properties dialog box.

Platform & GIS Tools › Land Use Tools

Land Use Properties

The Land Use Properties dialog box allows the user to define various land uses and their properties, style the border associated with the land use polygon, change the image’s transparency, and display the land use legend in the Map Data Layers panel and/or on the Map View. Furthermore, it also allows the user to change the current CRS (coordinate reference system) of the project and automatically apply the transformation scale factor on any particular layer to accurately map it to the project CRS.

Follow the steps given below to open the Land Use Properties dialog box:

  1. Click on the […] button next to Land Use Layer.Land Use Layer
  2. The Land Use Properties dialog box will be displayed.Land Use Properties dialog box

The Land Use Properties dialog box contains three tabs as described below:

  • General Options
  • Spatial Reference
  • Transformation

General Options

Various sections of the General Options tab are described below:

  • Land Use Palette
    This section also allows the user to define various land uses and their associated properties. Here, if a user makes any changes in the properties of any land uses, the same changes will be reflected in the Land Use Palette of the Classify Land Use panel.
  • Polygon Border Stylization
    This section is associated with the border of the land use polygon. It allows the user to set its color, width, style, and transparency.
  • Fill Transparency
    This section is used to change the transparency of the image so that you can see through the image to the background Base Map. A transparency value of 40 to 50% works well.
  • Land Use Legend
    This section allows the user to display a land use legend in the Map Data Layers panel and/or on the Map View after running the Classify Land Use command.

Spatial Reference

The Spatial Reference tab of the Land Use Properties dialog box allows the user to manually assign the project’s CRS to the non-CRS referenced data layer if the data layer coordinates lie within the project’s CRS. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about spatial reference.

Transformation

The Transformation tab allows the user to automatically apply the transformation scale factor to any particular layer and accurately map it to the project coordinate reference system (CRS). Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about layer transformation.

Platform & GIS Tools › Land Use Tools

Draw Land Use Command

The Draw Land Use command is used to manually define land use on the Map View by interactively painting in the areas of land use. The painted areas are automatically converted into polygons with attribute data associated to the assigned land use. The defined land use polygons are then used to compute the composite hydrologic parameters for each catchment area.

unknown node

Note that the user does not have to “paint-in” land use for the entire watershed being analyzed. The user can select a “default” land use which is then applied to areas that do not have a land use defined.

From the Map Data ribbon menu, select the Draw Land Use command. Selecting this command will display the following panel floating to the right side of the Map View.

Draw Land Use command

When selecting this command, if the Map View is in 3D view mode (even if viewing from directly above), the software will force the Map View into 2D view mode. This is because this command needs the user to define areas of land use, and the Map View must be in 2D mode to perform this task.

Note that prior to using this command, the user needs to assign a CRS to the project. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about how to assign a coordinate reference system to a project.

The various subsections of the Draw Land Use panel are discussed below.

General Specifications

General Specifications section

The General Specifications section of the Draw Land Use panel is used to define the following properties:

  • Land use layer
    This entry is used to define the land use layer to add to the land use polygon data.
    Clicking on the pencil icon will allow the user to rename the selected land use layer.
    In addition, at the top of the listing is an Add New Layer entry, which will create a new layer.
  • Land use layer transparency
    This option adjusts the transparency of the land use being painted using the horizontal slider, allowing the user to see through the defined land use areas to the underlying displayed map. Default transparency value is 50%.

Map Definition Tools

The Map Definition Tools section of the Draw Land Use panel is used to define land use polygon areas and perform various operations on the same. The software provides two modes: overwrite mode and clip mode, which are used to draw straight and curvilinear polylines, trace existing polylines, paint the land use areas, and fill polygons. In addition, the software also provides various tools to edit the drawn land use areas.

Map Definition Tools section

The two modes are as follows:

  • Overwrite mode – Overwrites any existing overlapping land use areas
  • Clip mode – Clips the current land use painting to existing overlapping land use areas
Draw-Land-Use-Command-img-4.png

The different tools provided in the Map Definition Tools section are as follows:

HEC-RAS Map View Overwriting

Draw Overwrite: This tool is used to draw straight overwrite lines on the Map View while overwriting existing land use elements.

HEC-RAS Map View Curvilinear Overwriting

Draw Curved Overwrite: This tool is used to draw curvilinear overwrite lines on the Map View while overwriting existing land use elements.

Trace Polyline Overwrite

Trace Polyline Overwrite: This tool is used to follow an existing polyline while overwriting existing land use elements.

Paint Overwrite

Paint Overwrite: This tool is used to paint the desired area with a wide brush while overwriting existing land use elements.

Fill Polygon Overwrite

Fill Polygon Overwrite: This tool is used to fill closed polygon areas while overwriting existing land use elements.

Draw Clipped

Draw Clipped: This tool is used to draw a straight polyline while clipping to existing land use elements.

Draw Curved Clipped

Draw Curved Clipped: This tool is used to draw a curvilinear polyline while clipping to existing land use elements.

Trace Polyline Clipped

Trace Polyline Clipped: This tool is used to follow an existing polyline while clipping to existing land use elements.

Paint Clipped

Paint Clipped: This tool is used to paint the desired area with a wide brush while clipping to existing land use elements.

Fill Polygon Clipped

Fill Polygon Clipped: This tool is used to fill closed polygon areas while clipping to existing land use elements.The following observations apply to the Draw tool:

  • While drawing land use, the start and end points take the shape of the selected nib, as shown below.
  • When starting to draw land use by holding down the [Shift] key, the drawing is done along a straight line. Similarly, if the user holds down the [Ctrl] key while drawing, the drawing is done along a curvilinear line.
Draw-Land-Use-Command-img-5.png

Fill Area

Fill Area

The Fill Area tool can be used to fill-in voids that are surrounded by defined land use areas.

Draw-Land-Use-Command-img-6.png

The following observations apply to the Fill Area tool:

  • Filling will only occur if the selected location is surrounded by other land use polygons. It will not work in areas that are not surrounded.
  • Filling in an area will cause the currently selected land use to fill into the empty void space.
  • Adjacent land use areas of the same type will merge with the filled-in land use area.

Erase Tool

Erase Tool

The Erase Tool can be used to erase all or part of a land use polygon area.

The following observation apply to the Erase Tool:

Creation of interior holes (doughnuts) is supported when erasing land use areas. For example, the user may erase the park area that is surrounded on all sides by a street land use.

Cut Tool

Cut Tool

The Cut Tool can be used to trim a land use polygon area. You can trim by drawing a freeform line or a straight line across the land use polygon, creating separate polygon fragments of the original land use polygon area.

Delete Land Use Polygon

Delete Land Use Polygon

The Delete Land Use Polygon can be used to delete a land use polygon. Choosing the command will create a Select cursor. The delete command will only work on polygons contained in the current land use layer. No other entities will be impacted by this command. Clicking on a land use polygon will immediately delete it.

Clear All Land Use

Clear All Land Use

The Clear All Land Use tool can be used to remove all the land use polygons from Map View.

Nib Style

The Nib Style section of the Draw Land Use panel is used to choose a nib style (circle, square, or diamond) and/or adjust the nib size. (A nib is the part of a quill, dip pen, or fountain pen which comes into contact with the writing surface in order to deposit ink.)

Nib Style section

The nib size is defined in pixels, and the paint tool and erase tool will change in size according to the selected nib size.

Land Use Palette

The Land Use Palette section of the Draw Land Use panel is used to define various land uses and their associated properties, as well as allow the user to easily switch between various land uses while painting the land use areas onto the Map View.

Land Use Palette section

The following features are provided in the land use palette section.

  • The […] lookup button is used to select the land use with associated curve numbers and impervious values. Clicking on this button will display a Select Land Use lookup table dialog box.Select Land Use lookup table dialog box
  • The Impervious (%) column displays the imperviousness associated with a specific land use or land type.
  • The Rough(n) column displays the Manning’s roughness for a particular land use type. Note that this column is not available in GeoHECHMS.

The following button commands are listed at the bottom of the land use palette.

Zoom Extents

Zoom Extents: Selecting this button causes the Map View to zoom to the extent of the currently selected (highlighted) land use listed in the palette. If a land use is not selected in the palette, then this button is grayed out (unavailable).

Add Land Use

Add Land Use: Selecting this button creates a land use with the default name of Land Use #, where # is replaced with the next number of the total land uses listed. For example, if there are currently four land uses defined and the user clicks on this button, the software will create a new land use with the name Land Use 5. In the event of a naming conflict (i.e., there already exists a land use with that name), the number count gets incremented until there is no conflict. The user can rename the default land use name using the Properties command. Any number of land uses can be created.

Remove Land Use

Remove Land Use: Selecting this button will remove the currently selected (highlighted) land use listed in the palette. If a land use is not selected in the palette, then this button is grayed out (unavailable). If land use polygons have already been assigned to the land use to be removed, then the software will display a confirmation dialog box to confirm that it should remove the land use. Any assigned land use polygons will then be deleted from the Map View as well. If there is no land use polygon(s) assigned to the land use to be removed, no confirmation dialog box is displayed.

Move Land Use Up

Move Land Use Up: Selecting this button will move the currently selected (highlighted) land use up by one within the palette. If the currently selected land use is at the top of the palette, this button is grayed out (unavailable). If a land use is not selected in the palette, then this button is grayed out.

Move Land Use Down

Move Land Use Down: Selecting this button will move the currently selected (highlighted) land use down by one within the palette. If the currently selected land use is at the bottom of the palette, this button is grayed out (unavailable). If a land use is not selected in the palette, then this button is grayed out.

Merge Land Use

Merge Land Use: Selecting this button will move the selected (highlighted) land use(s) into the current land use. If only the current land use is selected, this button is grayed out (unavailable). More than one land use can be merged at a time. Any assigned land use polygon(s) will also be merged into the current land use (potentially causing adjacent polygons of the same land use to merge as well).

Import Land Use Palette

Import Land Use Palette: Selecting this button will display the Import Land Use Palette dialog box, allowing the user to import a previously defined land use palette so that it can be used in the current project.

Export Land Use Palette

Export Land Use Palette: Selecting this button will display the Export Land Use Palette dialog box, allowing the defined land use palette data to be exported so that it can be used in other projects.

Once the land use layer has been created, the software will then place the created land use layer in the Map Data Layers panel. Clicking on the […] button adjacent to the created land use layer will display the Land Use Properties dialog box, which allows the user to perform the following:

  • To define various land uses and their associated properties
  • To style the border associated with the land use polygon(s)
  • To change the image’s transparency
  • To change the current CRS (coordinate reference system) of the project, etc.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Land Use Properties dialog box.

Platform & GIS Tools › Land Use Tools

Classify Land Use Command

The Classify Land Use command uses AI machine learning to geospatially analyze the orthophoto base map and compute the corresponding land use. The user can select areas from the orthophoto base map to train the software, and then machine learning examines the entire orthophoto base map for similar land use areas. The software then creates a polygonized shapefile containing land use areas extracted from the orthophoto base map. The Draw Land Use command can be used to cleanup areas where the Classify Land Use command did not work completely. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about this command.

unknown node

The user first trains the software to recognize various land types based upon selected target areas on the orthophoto. The software reviews the colors and patterns of the selected targets, and then segments the remaining orthophoto into regions to match selected targets using raster recognition. From this, it merges adjacent matching land use regions and creates a thematic land use layer, as shown below.

Thematic Land Use Layer

From the Map Data ribbon menu, select the Classify Land Use command.

Classify Land Use command

Selecting this command causes the following panel to be displayed, floating to the right side of the Map View.

Classify Land Use panel

When selecting this command, if the Map View is in 3D view mode (even if viewing from directly above) the software will force the Map View into 2D view mode. This is because the Map View must be in 2D mode to perform this task. Note that prior to using this command, the user needs to assign a CRS to the project. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about how to assign a coordinate reference system to a project. The various subsections of the Classify Land Use panel are discussed below.

General Specifications

General Specifications section

The General Specifications section of the Classify Land Use panel is used to define the following properties:

Land use layer

This entry is used to define the land use layer in order to add the land use polygon data. Clicking on the pencil icon will allow the user to rename the selected land use layer. In addition, at the top of the listing is an Add New Layer entry which will create a new layer.

Add New Layer entry

Land use layer transparency

This option is used to adjust the transparency of the land use being painted using the horizontal slider, allowing the user to see through the defined land use areas to the underlying displayed map. The default transparency value is 50%.

Image training layer

This option is used to define the image source and extents of the training layer. Clicking on the [Define] button will cause the software to open the Define Image Training Layer dialog box.

Define Image Training Layer dialog box
  • Image Source Selection The Image Source Selection section allows the user to select an image source from the dropdown combo box and the zoom level to be used to create the image training layer by zooming in and out of the base map.
  • Land Use Training Limits The Land Use Training Limits section allows the user to define the land use limits using three different options: current screen limits, user-defined limits, and model extents.
  • Image Training Layer Specifications The Image Training Layer Specifications section allows the user to define the image training layer. The Overwrite existing image training layer is checked by default to automatically overwrite any existing image training layer.

Classification Training

The Classification Training section of the Classify Land Use panel is used to train the software to recognize various land uses for the loaded orthophoto imagery.

Classification Training section

The following details how to train the software to classify land uses from the loaded orthophoto imagery.

Pick Sample

The Pick Sample tool is used to train the software to recognize land use areas from the loaded orthophoto imagery. To use the Pick Sample tool, follow the steps below:

  1. Select the Pick Sample tool. The sampling cursor is round, and the size can be adjusted if desired. Pick Sample tool
  2. Select the appropriate land use from the Land Use Palette to identify on the Map View. Land Use Palette
  3. Position the nib pointer on the Map View where you want to start sampling.
  4. Choose locations on the loaded orthophoto imagery that match the selected land use. The more training samples selected, the better the software will be trained to recognize land uses from the orthophoto imagery.
  5. Press and hold down the mouse button to paint-in areas where samples should be taken from. As you drag the nib pointer around the Map View, the land use training sample area is painted in real time. Training Sample 1
  6. Now, release the mouse button. After a sample has been selected, the software will create an equivalent polygon at the sample location matching the painted-in sample area. Training Sample 2

If more training sample areas need to be added to an existing sample, simply start painting-in more sample areas. Where a new training sample area overlaps an existing sample area, the areas are merged into a single polygon. The following observations apply to the Pick Sample tool:

  • The Land Use Palette shows the number of training samples that have been selected for each land use.
  • The Pick Sample tool is always in overwrite mode. It overwrites any existing overlapping sample polygons.

Erase Sample

The Erase Sample tool can be used to erase all or part of a land use sample polygon area. To use the Erase Sample tool, follow the steps below:

  1. Select the Erase Sample tool. Erase Sample tool
  2. Position the nib pointer on the Map View where you want to start erasing a land use sample.
  3. Press and hold down the mouse button to erase.
  4. Drag the nib pointer around the land use sample area that is to be erased. Training Sample 3
  5. On releasing the mouse button, the land use sample area traced by the nib will be erased. The software will convert the remaining area into a land use sample polygon. Training Sample 4

The following observation applies to the Erase Sample tool:

  • Creation of interior holes (doughnuts) is supported when erasing land use sample areas. For example, the user may erase the park area that is surrounded on all sides by a street land use.

Sampling Size

The Sampling Size slider allows the user to adjust the nib size used to select training samples from the loaded orthophoto imagery.

Clear All Land Use

The [Clear All Land Use] button causes the software to remove the classified land use polygon areas from the Map View. This command allows the user to iteratively select training samples to better inform the software how to classify land use areas from the loaded orthophoto imagery.

Classify Land Use

The [Classify Land Use] button causes the software to classify land use polygon areas from the loaded orthophoto imagery based upon the defined training samples.

Filter Out Isolated Pixel Areas

This entry is checked by default. This checkbox entry causes the software to reclassify small, isolated regions of pixels that might give a “salt and pepper” or speckled appearance to the nearest land use classes. Small regions with pixel count less than or equal to the defined pixel threshold will disappear; being essentially dissolved away based on the closest surrounding cell land use types. A default threshold value of 50 pixels is provided.

Land Use Palette

The Land Use Palette section of the Classify Land Use panel is similar to what is provided in the Draw Land Use command. This section is used to define the various land uses and their associated properties, as well as allow the user to easily switch between various land uses while painting the land use areas onto the Map View.

Land Use Palette section

The following features are provided in the land use palette section.

  • The […] lookup button is used to select land use with associated curve numbers and impervious values. Clicking on this button will display a Select Land Use lookup table dialog box.Classify-Land-Use-Command-16.png
  • The Impervious (%) column displays the imperviousness associated with a specific land use or land type.
  • The Rough(n) column displays the Manning’s roughness for a particular land use type. Note that this column is not available in GeoHECHMS.
  • The Training Samples column displays the number of training samples assigned to each defined land use.

The following button commands are listed at the bottom of the land use palette:

unknown node Erase Sample: Selecting this button causes the software to erase all or part of a land use sample polygon area of the currently selected (highlighted) land use listed in the palette. If a land use is not selected in the palette, then this button is grayed out (unavailable).

unknown node Erase All Samples: Selecting this button causes the software to remove all training samples from the defined land uses. The software will display a confirmation dialog box to make certain that the training samples should be erased.

unknown node Add Land Use: Selecting this button creates a land use with the default name of Land Use #, where # is replaced with the next number of the total land uses listed. For example, if there are currently four land uses defined and the user clicks on this button, the software will create a new land use with the name Land Use 5. In the event of a naming conflict (i.e., a land use with the same name already exists), the number count gets incremented until there is no duplication. The user can rename the default land use name using the Properties command. Any number of land uses can be created.

unknown node Remove Land Use: Selecting this button will remove the currently selected (highlighted) land use listed in the palette. If a land use is not selected in the palette, then this button is grayed out (unavailable). If land use polygons have already been assigned to the land use to be removed, then the software will display a confirmation dialog box to confirm that it should remove the land use. Any assigned land use polygons will then be deleted from the Map View as well. If there is no land use polygon(s) assigned to the land use to be removed, no confirmation dialog box is displayed.

unknown node Move Land Use Up: Selecting this button will move the currently selected (highlighted) land use up by one within the palette. If the currently selected land use is at the top of the palette, this button is grayed out (unavailable). If a land use is not selected in the palette, then this button is grayed out.

unknown node Move Land Use Down: Selecting this button will move the currently selected (highlighted) land use down by one within the palette. If the currently selected land use is at the bottom of the palette, this button is grayed out (unavailable). If a land use is not selected in the palette, then this button is grayed out.

unknown node Merge Land Use: Selecting this button will move the selected (highlighted) land use(s) into the current land use. If only the current land use is selected, this button is grayed out (unavailable). More than one land use can be merged at a time. Any assigned land use polygon(s) will also be merged into the current land use (potentially causing adjacent polygons of the same land use to merge as well).

unknown node Import Land Use Palette: Selecting this button will display the Import Land Use Palette dialog box, allowing the user to import a previously defined land use palette so that it can be used in the current project.

unknown node Export Land Use Palette: Selecting this button will display the Export Land Use Palette dialog box, allowing the defined land use palette data to be exported so that it can be used in other projects. Once the land cover grid has been created, it is loaded as a layer in the Map Data Layers panel. Clicking on the […] Properties button will display the Land Use Properties dialog box, which allows the user to perform the following:

  • To define various land uses and their associated properties
  • To style the border associated with the land use polygon(s)
  • To change the image’s transparency
  • To change the current CRS (coordinate reference system) of the project, etc.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Land Use Properties dialog box.

Platform & GIS Tools › Land Use Tools

Merge Land Use Command

The Merge Land Use command allows the user to merge two or more land use layers into a single land use layer.

Multiple land use layers may create issues during the course of a modeling exercise, which is why the user may want to merge multiple layers together into one integrated surface layer. For example, although one land use layer could contain the general area map coverage created using the Classify Land Use command, this command will not likely capture an accurate land use map of an urban area contained within the area being processed. Under these circumstances, the user would be advised to use the Draw Land Use command. However, since the Classify Land Use command already analyzed the entire area, the user would not be able to use the base map and “draw” regions of different land use polygons within the urban area. In this situation, the solution would be for the user to create two land use layers—one layer that was created using the automated Classify Land Use command and another layer that was more detailed and developed manually using the Draw Land Use command. The user can then use the Merge Land Use command to merge these two layers.

Refer to Draw Land Use and Classify Land Use command articles in our knowledge base to learn more.

Follow the steps given below to merge two or more land use layers using the Merge Land Use command:

  1. From the Map Data ribbon menu, select the Merge Land Use command.Merge Land Use command
  2. The Merge Land Use dialog box will be displayed.Merge Land Use dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Merge Land Use command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Land Use Layers to Merge

The Select Land Use Layers to Merge section controls the selection of land use layers to be merged into a single layer.

From the Existing land use layer dropdown combo box, select the land use layers, one at a time, which need to be merged, and click the [Add] button. The selected land use layer will be added to the table listing the land use layers to be merged. Clicking the [Add All] button will add all the available land use layers in the dropdown combo box to the table.

The Layer cover data source dropdown combo box allows the user to select which land use data source to utilize for the merged layer. By default, the software selects the latest land use data. Note that this dropdown option is available only when the Land Cover layer is selected in the Existing land use layer dropdown combo box.

The following options are available in the dropdown combo box:

  • NLCD Land Cover 2021 (default)
  • NLCD Land Cover 2019
  • NLCD Land Cover 2016
  • NLCD Land Cover 2013
  • NLCD Land Cover 2011
  • NLCD Land Cover 2008
  • NLCD Land Cover 2006
  • NLCD Land Cover 2004
  • NLCD Land Cover 2001
Merge-Land-Use-Command-Imge-3.png

To change the merge order of the listed land use layers, select the appropriate row and right-click to display a context menu. Then, select the Move Layer Up or Move Layer Down context menu command to change the merge order of the highlighted land use layer. Layers that are higher in the listing have precedence over layers that appear lower in the list.

Land Use Layers

Merged Land Use Layer Limits

This section allows the user to define the rectangular extents of the merged land use layer using the criteria described below. The following options are available to define the rectangular extents of the merged land use layer:

  • Land use layer limits: The merged land use layer will have the same extent as the original source data.
  • User-defined limits: The user can draw the rectangular extents of the merged land use layer to correspond to a specific area defined by the user. This can make the merged land use layer smaller and easier to work with. Click the [Pick] button to define the limits of the land use layer. The dialog box will temporarily disappear, and an information message will be displayed on the status line. Click and drag a rectangular region to define the limits of the merged land use layer. After releasing the mouse, the user will be returned to the dialog box. A layer will be created with a rectangular box to represent the user-defined selected region.
  • Clipping polygons: The user can select one or more land use polygons and the software will clip the selected land user layer to the boundary of the polygons. The software will set the limits of the layer to the extents of the selected polygons. Clicking the [Pick] button causes the dialog box to disappear, at which point the user is then prompted to select land use polygons. After selecting the polygons, the user is immediately returned to the dialog box. The software then displays the total number of selected polygons in the dialog box.
  • Model extents: If a model has been defined, this option will create a bounding rectangular region to correspond to the extents of the defined model, plus an additional buffer boundary.

Land Use Processing Specifications

This section allows the user to specify the new land user layer name in the Merged land user layer entry field. The software sets “Merged Land Use” as the default name for the merged layer, which can be changed by the user.

Merge-Land-Use-Command-Imge-5.png

Merging the Land Use Layer

After all the options have been defined, click the [Merge] button and the software will merge the land use layers into a new land user layer and load the layer into the Map Data Layers panel.

Products

  • Free Trial
  • GeoSTORM
  • GeoHECRAS
  • GeoHECHMS

Customers

  • Customer Portal Login
  • Customer Reviews
  • Customer Stories
  • Customer Videos
  • Case Studies
  • Wall of Love

Training

  • Training Classes
  • Training Webinars
  • Product Tutorials
  • Engineering Resources

Company

  • About Us
  • Contact
  • Privacy Center
  • Terms of Use
  • Brand Assets

Support

  • Knowledge Base
  • Contact Support
  • Feature Requests
  • General Feedback

Contact Us

  • info@civilgeo.com
  • +1 608-729-5100
CivilGEO United States
708 Heartland TrailSuite 3000Madison, WI 53717-2174Tel: 608-729-5100 or 800-488-4110
G2 Best Software 2026 — Top 50 CAD PLM ProductsAutodesk Authorized DeveloperFind us on Ariba Network
Copyright © 2026 CivilGEO, Inc. All rights reserved. The CivilGEO logo, “GeoSTORM”, “GeoHECHMS”, “GeoHECRAS”, and “Ready To Engineer” are registered trademarks of CivilGEO, Inc. All other brands, company names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.